M4 Deck Drawings

INSTRUCTION
Part
1/1
Reterence nur^tier
120.05 0 58/RT
Client feteren' -
JLZ040412
Client
Jlnling Shipyard
Date: 12/06/2006
FINAL DRAWINGS
YARD
"
12/06/2006
: Jinling SY
Nanjing, Jiangsu Province
P.R. China
SHIP & HULLNUMBER
1 lOOTEU Container Vessel

Hull No.: JLZ 040412
CLASSIFICATION
Germanischer Lloyd
H&H REFERENCE
120.05.058/RT
INSTALLATION
Airconditioning
Cooling / Heating
Mechanical Ventilation
CONTRACTOR
Heinen & Hopman

Engineering BV
p.o. box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
HOLLAND
Page: 1
Date: 12/06/2006
Pages
Chapter 1:
General Arrangements
th
1) Gen. Arr. HVAC 6'" Deck
2) Gen. Arr. HVAC 5* Deck
3) Gen. Arr. HVAC 4"^ Deck
4) Gen. Arr. HVAC 3"* Deck
5) Gen. Arr. HVAC 2"" Deck
6) Gen. Arr. HVAC l^'Deck
7) Gen. Arr. HVAC Poop Deck
8) Gen. Arr. HVAC Main Deck
9) Gen. Arr. Fore Castle Deck
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Chapter 2:
General Users Manual
2.1) Gen. Users Manual - AHU
2.2) Gen. Users Manual - Cond. Unit
12
40
Chapter 3:
Air handling unit and belongings
3.1) Layout AC-1 AHU
3.2) Technical specification AC-1
3.3) Detail drawing water trap AC-1
3.4) Layout AC-2 8TRE
3.5) Layout AC-3KWG-15
3.6) Instructions TRE & KWG
3.7) Instructions GX fan
3.8) Instruction electric motor
1
2
1
1
1
16
24
11
Chapter 4:
Cooling unit and belongings
4.1) Freon diagram 4G-30.2Y
1
4.2) Layout 4G-30.2Y
1
4.3) Electrical diagram AC-system
15
4.4) Compressor start/stop instructions 1
4.5) Operating instructions Compressor 23
4.6) Spare parts Compressor
57
4.7) Operating instructions Condenser 18
4.8) Spare parts Condenser
28
4.9) Pressure control P48
6
4.10) Pressure control KP
8
11
4.11) Thermostat RT-140
4.12) Differential pressure control MP 5
4.13) Expansion joint ERV
3
4.14) Vib. absorber VTG
1
2
4.15) Pressure gauge fig. 334/366
4.16) Thermometer 1645
1
Page: 2
Number
Version
12005055-001(1/9)
12005055-001(2/9)
12005055-001(3/9)
12005055-001(4/9)
12005055-001(5/9)
12005055-001(6/9)
12005055-001(7/9)
12005055-001(8/9)
12005055-001(9/9)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12005055-201
12005055-202
12005055-203
12005055-204
0
0
0
12005055-400
12005055-401
5000155\AHU\1
0
0
B.l
Date: 12/06/2006
Chapter 5:
Provision cooling unit and belongings
5.1) Freon diagram IV
1
5.2) Layout IV
1
5.3) Layout CTE-evaporator
1
5.4) Electrical diagram PCP-system
12
5.5) Electrical diagram Temp.-panel
5
5.6) Compressor start/stop instructions 1
5.7) Operating instructions Compressor 22
5.8) Spare parts list Compressor
19
5.9) Operating instructions Condenser see 4.7
5.10) Spare parts list Condenser
see 4.8
5.11) Pressure control P48
see 4.9
5.12) Instructions electric motor
see 3.8
6
5.13) Evaporator CTE unit cooler
5.14) Water regulating valve V46
14
8
5.15) Thermostats KP 73
1
5.16) Heat exchanger SLHE
3
5.17) Expansion joint AGreen
5.18) Display ETWM 101
1
12005055-450
12005055-451
12005055-452
5000155/PCP
5000155/TP
0
0
0
B.2
B.2
Chapter 6:
Heating system and belongings
6.1) Heating system diagram
6.2) Layout Heat exchanger MX 15
6.3) Layout Outlet tube
6.4) Instruction circulating pump IPL
6.5) 2-way regulating valve L2S
6.6) Thermostat V2,4,8
6.7) Overflow valve
6.8) Flexcon expansion vessels
6.9) Regulating valve 2620
6.10) Econ super strainers
1
1
1
12
2
5
6
1
1
1
12005055-501
12005055-502
12005055-503
0
0
0
Chapter 7:
Mechanical ventilation system
7.1) Layout E-1
7.2) Layout E-2
7.3) Layout E-3
7.4) Layout E-4
7.5) Layout E-5
7.6) Layout E-6
7.7) Layout E-7
7.8) Layout E-8
7.9) Layout E-9
7.10) Layout E-10
7.11) Layout E-11
7.12) Layout E-12
7.13) Layout E-13
7.14) Layout E-14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12005055-301
12005055-302
12005055-303
12005055-304
12005055-305
12005055-306
12005055-307
12005055-308
12005055-309
12005055-310
12005055-311
12005055-312
12005055-313
12005055-314
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page: 3
Date: 12/06/2006
7.15;)
7.16;)
7.17;)
7.18;
7.19;)
7.20;)
7.2i;)
7.22;)
7.23;)
7.24;)
7.25;)
7.26;)
7.27;)
Layout E-15
Layout E-16
Layout E-17
Layout S-3
Layout S-4
Layout S-5
Layout S-7
Layout S-8
Layout S-15
Instructions Centrifugal fan GT
15
Instructions Axial fan VM/HU
19
Instructions Centrifugal fan TEA 12
Duct fan RS
2
Cha pter 8:
Miscellaneous
8.1) Layout Elec. Duct-heater 4kW
8.2) Layout cabin unit HCM-250E
8.3) Layout cabin unit HCM-350E
8.4) Layout cabin unit HCM-250
8.5) Layout cabin unit HCM-350
8.6) Layout round fire damper
8.7) Layout rectangular fire damper
8.8) Layout supply Louvre
8.9) Layout plenum Louvre
8.10; Room thermostat RAA20
Chaipter 9:
Wheelhouse windows demisting system
9.1) Arr. of Wheelhouse windows demisting system
9.2) Centrifugal duct fan WD-1
9.3) Layout supply Louvre
9.4) Air exhaust grill 50FR-3
9.5) Layout Elec. Duct-heater 3kW
1
1
See 8.8
1
1
Page: 4
12005055-315
12005055-316
12005055-317
12005055-318
12005055-319
12005055-320
12005055-321
12005055-322
12005055-323
0
A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12005055-801
12005055-802
12005055-803
12005055-804
12005055-805
12005055-806
12005055-807
12005055-808
12005055-809
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12005055-001(1/9)
12005055-324
B
0
12005055-810
12005055-811
0
0
ROOM
OL
Wheelhouse
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
Cabin Unit (lôn Hagnetic Material) HCM 250
Del H&H
Duct Elec. Heater
4 kW
Del. H&H
Overpressure Gril
F.A.=0.1m2
Del. Yard
Smoke damper
Passage way in
accommodation
J_
1
REMARK
Del. H&H
VM31-10-2
Unit E-12
Exhaust grill
F.A.=0.13m2
Del. H&H
Del. Yard
H-PENETRATIQN IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN A-BULKHEADS

hfflCRAlWOa CQJgl (TtPE GGV)
UNWSULATEO
INSUUTED
W=^.
SECT
SPIROPPE
l12n
T
HP
7.1 130
7.1 162
7.1 197
8.8 222
6.8 270
D1
PR10
RIO
R12
PR12
193.7
PR15
PR20
R20
219.1
267.0
127.0
159.0
R22S
(an')
99.9
164,7
253.1
318.9
4BB.5
G-PENETRATION IN A.... BULKHEAD/DECK

SPIROTT
INSllATEO
PtPRWETS
UNINSHATEO
SPIROPIPE
D1
RIO
R1Z
R16
R20
RZZ
R2S
H?10
PR12
H?16
PR20
PK2
PR2S
TI4.3
139.7
177.8
219.1
244S
267.0
T
7.1
7.1
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
BULK
HEAD
L
DECK
125
125
900
900
900
900
200
200
900
900
900
900
HP
117
143
181
222
248
270
SECTION
(cm')
78.7
123.7
2(S.6
324.0
410.1
494.8
Penetration has to be insulated according the required fire integrity of the bull<head/decl<
Length of penetrations:
DECK
BlllOHEAD
L=12S
1=900
1=900
when sectii < 20Etai)*

when 200cni ' < section < 750cni ^
* F r e Damper when section > TBOcm ^
SUPPLY .
EXHAUST GRID WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.083 ml
CAP. 1200 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
- .,
,-...
when section < 2 0 C t o n '

when 200cm ^ < section < 750cni '
+ Fire Damper when section > 7 5 0 c m '
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
FIREDAMPER /
L=200
L=900
L=900
DIMENSION
MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM 2 5 0
HCM 250
r
GRID, FREE AREA (FA) = .... M2
UNIT E-12
Q=1200ni3/h
VM31-10-2
SLOT UNDER DOOR

//
OVERPRESS. GRID WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.06 m2
Q=860 m3/h
YARD SUPPLY
DOORGRILLE 150 c m ' ( 1 6 0 - 2 1 5 m V h )
DOORGRILLE 200 cm^ ( 2 2 0 - 2 9 0 m V h )
Snoke danper
0160

E-12 moved t o 6Lh Deck
AvM
Rev. OescripTion
Scale: 1:50 Subject
Units:
Designer
AvH
11-04-'05
08-08-05
Designer
: Jinling SY
mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No.
Controller
Controller
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058

: 12005055-001
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT HVAC
Sheet
A2
: 1 of 9
Rev.
6. DECK
HEINEiSIGiHOPMAKM ENGINEERIIMG B V
FJHg e O W O l T J Q N W G B H E ATJNtaa^V EMTiKATiOMSS R g g J U S E R ATJGfaa
P.O. B o x g - a 7 B Q G A S p a k e n o y r ^ - T h e Nechertands - P h o n e : + 0 1 i P ) 3 0 - g 3 3 g 5 C X 3 - r a x : + 0 1 t P 3 3 3 - a 3 9 g 5
Irawing File: 12005055-Q01A (Oensrat Arr3ngenient].dwg
9g-www.hei.'-ienhopne.n.con
Plot Date; Aug 10, ZQ05 - V>sf
ROOM
Qt
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
Chief Eng.
Cabin Unit
HCM-350/750W
Del. H&H
Chief Eng. Bedroom
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del. H&H
Saloon
Cabin Unit
HCM-350/500W
Del. H&H
Captain
Cabin Unit
HCM-350/750W
Del. H&H
Captain Bedroom
Cabin Unit
Exhaust nozzle

wcRALvma cm (HPE BGW
Del. Yard
Exhaust nozzle
REMARK
HCM-250/750W
INSUUTED
UNWSUUTED
SECTION
SPIROPPE
Del. H&H
PR10
Del. Yard
PR16
RIO
R1Z
R16
R20
PR20
R22S
PR12
WC
Exhaust nozzle
Del. Yard
Corridor
Overpressure grill
F.A.=0.07M2
Del. Yard
Recirculation grill
F,A.=0.11M2
Del. Yard
D1
127.0
159.0
267.0
T HP
71 130
71 162
71 197
6.8 222
8.8 270
193.7
219.1
99.9
164.7
251
318.9
4B8.5

SffliFPE
INSULATED
POPRIVtTS
UMNSATED
SPIROPIPE
D1
pm
114,3
PR12
RQ
R15
R20
KS
R2S
139.7
rei6
PR20
PR22
PR25
T
7,1
7,1
8,0
8.0
8,0
8.0
177.8
219.1
2445
267,0
BULK
HEAD
L
DECK
125
125
900
900
900
900
200
200
900
900
900
900
HP
117
143
181
222
248
270
SECTION
(cm')
78.7
123,7
2(S,6
324,0
410.1
494.S
Penetration tias to be insulated according the required fire integrity of ttie bull<head/deck
Lengtti of penetrations:
BULI'aiEAD
1-12S
when sttficfi < 200cm ^
1=900 when 200an ^< section < 750cm ^
L=900 + Fre Dairper when section > 750cm*
Chief Eng
80
DECK
L=200
1=900
1=900
when sectton < 20cni'

whBi 200an ' < section < TSOon ^
+ Fre Damper when secNon > 750cm'
15
mi
SUPPLY .
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES

FREE AREA 0.07m2
Q=990m3/h
YARD SUPPLY
FIREDAMPER /
300
12
HCM 250EL
DIMENSION
GRID. FREE AREA (FA)
. . M2
MONODUCT CABIN UNIT H C M - 2 5 0 E L

XXX: ELECTRIC HEATER CAPACITY (W)
XXX
NAT VENT GRO WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.035m2
YARD SUPPLY
MM.
'--i r

HCM OEL
EXHAUST NOZZLE
UNDERPRESSURE GOOSENECK
0N100, Q = 80ni3/fi
YARD SUPPLY
320
80
11,2
15
E-12 moved to 6f[i Deck

Rev.
^
Oescription
Scale:
Units:
3
Designer
AvM
08-08-05
Designer
150 Subject
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Jinling SY
mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No. : 120Q5Q55-001
Controller
Controller
Sheet
A2
: 2 of 9
Rev.
AvM
11-04-'05
5 DECK
MEINEN fitHOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

ijS(aie*^^fflaHiiÊME-aiâaEi4ii!ia8^[s
Spake.-iDU,->s -"Pne N e c ' n e . - l a n d s - P h o n e : + 3 1 ( P ) a 3 - H S S S 5 Q O - T a x : + 3 1 (OJOO - 2 9 9 2 5 9 9 - w \ , v w . h e i n s . n h o p , - ^ e n . c o , ~ i
P . O . B o x 3 -0750GA
Jrawing File 12005055-001A iSensral ArrangementLilvg
Plot Ualê: Aug 10. 2005 '- 16:57
ROOM
2nd Eng.
Qt
DESCRIPTION
Cabin Unit
TYPE
HCM-250/750W
Exhaust nozzle
Del. H&H
1st Eng
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del. H&H
1st Eng. Bedroom
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del. H&H
1st Off. Bedroom
MINERALWOa CORD ( H P E GGV)

INSUUTED
UMNSUUTEQ
SEQKM
SPIROPPE
Cabin Unit
Del. Yard
HCM-250/500W
Extiaust nozzle
130
99.9
159.0
162
197
16't,7
PR12
193.7
PR16
R20
219.1
6.8
222
318.9
PR20
R22S
267.0
8.8
270
466.5
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/750W
Del. H&H
I'VSm
253.1
G-PENETRATIQN IN A.... BULKHEAD/DECK
Del. Yard
F.A.=0,08m2
7.1
Del. Yard
2nd Off.
Recirculation grill
127.0
7.1
7.1
Del. H&H
F..=0.08m2
fan')
RW
R1Z
R%
HCM-250/500W
Overpressure grill
HP
PR10
Cabin Unit
Exhaust nozzle
D1
Del. H&H
1st Off.
Corridor
H-PENETRATION IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN A-BULKHEADS
Del Yard
Extiaust nozzle
REMARK
spOTw:
Del. Yard
NPPIE
INSULATED
POPRWETS
Del. Yard
UMNSULATED
SPIROPIPE
:=i4^
D1
PR
RIO
m.3
T
7.1
PR12
R12
139.7
PR16
R16
R20
177.8
PR20
PR22
PR2S
BULK
HEAD
L
DECK
SECTION
125
200
HP
117
7.1
125
200
143
123.7
8.0
8.0
900
900
900
900
181
222
205.6
2-6.1
RZZ
244.5
8.0
410.1
267.0
80
900
900
248
R2S
WO
900
270
494.8
(on')
78.7
324.0
Penetration has to be insulated according the required fire integrity of the bulkhead/deck
BULKHEAD
L=125
when secl1.Dn < 200Dn'
OEa<
L-900
when 200cm ' < section < 750cm ^
L=900
Fre Damper when section > 750cm ^
when sectton < 200cm ^

wlien 200cm ^< section < 750cm '
* Fire IDamper when section > 750cm*
SUPPLY .
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
FIREDAMPER
L-200
L=900
1=900
DIMENSION
GRID, FREE AREA ( F A ) =

PR-
.... M 2
MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-250EL

m 250EL
XXX
1L MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-350EL

HCH 350EI

FREE AREA 0.05 ml
CAP. 695 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
EXHAUST
NOZZLE
E-12 moved to 6th Deck
Rev. Destripfion
Scale: 1:50
Units: mm
Controller
Designer
AvM
11-04-'05
AvM
08-08-05
Designer
Subject
: JJnling SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No.
: 12005055-001
GENERAL A R R A N G E M E N T H V A C
Controller
Sheet : 3 of 9
I Rev.
A2
4 DECK
HEINEIM S H O P M A N EKMGINEERIIMG B V
rjkimGaHoitiQNmQMMm&tiNGm^jmHWmAtm
P . O . B o x a - 0 7 5 Q G A Bpakisnourg
- T h e N e c h e . ^ a n d s - P'no.ne: + 3 1 ( 0 ) 0 3 - 2 3 3 S 5 CX3 - T s
Irauing File 12005Q5S-001A (General Arrangementl.dwg
+ 3 1 0 ) 0 0 - S S 9 2 5 S 3 - \.1'WW.>êi,'^s,^'ôpns.^.co,~^
Plot Date; Aug 10. 2005 - 1657
ROOM
Fiirer
Qf
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/750W ~Del. H&H
Extiaust nozzle
Bosun
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Recreation
l^6IJUTED
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/750W
Del. H&H
Del. H&H
Del. Yard
Overpressure grill
F.A.=0.055m2
Del. Yard
Recirculation grill
F.A.=0.055m2
Del. Yard
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del. H&H
Exhaust Grill
F.A. = 0,027m2
Del. Yard
Unit E-8
RS 160
Del. H&H
IWINSUUTED
SECTDN
SPIROPPE
Del. Yard
Exhaust nozzle
Corridor
MitRALwooL a m awt GOV)
Del. H&H
Del. Yard
Extiaust nozzle
Spare Officer
Del. Yard
Exhaust nozzle
Pilot
jEHARK
PR10
RIO
R12
pm
PR16
PR20
01
127.0
7.1
159.0
7.1
193.7
R20
219.1
RZ25
267.0
HP
130
162
164.7
7,1
197
253.1
8.8
222
318.9
8.8
270
488S
99.9

SPtROTC
INSULATED
PQPRIVEIS
UMNSULATED
SPIROPIPE
D1
BULK
HEAO
L
DECK
SECTION
PR10
m.3
T
7.1
125
200
HP
117
PR12
i?12
139.7
7.1
125
200
143
PR16
R1S
R20
177.8
900
PRZ2
R22
244.5
8.0
8.0
8,0
900
PR20
R2S
267.0
8.0
900
900
900
181 205.6
222 324.0
248 410.1
PR2S
900
900
900
219.1
270
78.7
123.7
494,8
Penetration tias to be insulated according t h e required fire integrity of ttie bull<head/decl<

Lengtfi o f penetrations:
195
10
BULKHEAD
DECK
L-125
L=900
L=900
L=200
L=900
L=900
v^hen sNm < 200cra^

when 200cm ^< section < 750cm ^
+ Fre Daiper when section > 750cm ^
When section < 200cm'

when 200cm ^< secRon < 75Dcm '
+ Fire Damper when sech'on > 750cm ^
SUPPLY .
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EIREDAMPER /
70
DIMENSION
15
GRID. FREE AREA ( F A ) =
245
12
XXX
PR-10

m 25oa
Locker
FREE AREA 0.035 ni2
Q=500 ni3/ti
YARD SUPPLY
XXX
A
.... M 2
GRILL
FREE AREA 0.055 M2
500 ni3/Hr
c:
CM250EL
:] SJ- MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-350EL

Rtr
FREE ARbA
245 Uld/Hl'
EXHAUST GRD WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.017 ml
Q = 245 m 3 / h
YARD SUPPLY
HEM350EL
IT E-8
Q = 245 m3/Hr
RS 160
l--fR12
EXHAUST N O Z Z L E
mJUH
70
15
X^JQ
JLWÊ.
Officer
195
195
9.8
10
E)
E-12 moved \o 6Fti Deck
AvM
Rev. Oescription
70
15
Scale:
Units;
Designer
08-08-05
Designer
1:50 Subject
mm
Controller
: Jinling SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Subject No. : JLZ 04Q409 - 040412 Drawing No.
: 12005055-001
GENERAL A R R A N G E M E N T H V A C
Controller
Sheet
A2
: 4 of 9
Rev.
AvM
11-04-'05
3 DECK
HEIIMEIM S H O P M A N ENGriMEERING B V
ÂijêollîaTftiJîl^Ga^jEATiJiQSvEl'atiif^^
P . O . B o x 9 - 3 7 5 0 G A Spske.-iou.'-s - T h e N e D h e r ' l a n d a - P h o n e ; + a i ^y33
}rawing File 12005055-0(I1A (General ArTan9eraent).dirg
- S 9 9 3 5 O Q - T a x : +Q1 ( 0 ) Q 3 - S39 2 5 9 9 - viAww.hei.ne,nhop,~ian.c;on

Plot Date: Aug 10. 2fl0b - 1668
ROOM
Cook
Qt
DESCRIPTION
Cabin Unit
TYPE
HCM-250/750W
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
B
Hospital
WNERALWOa CDSD (TYPE G6V)
INSULATED
UNWSUUTEO
HCM-250/750W
Del. H&H
Non Return Valve
0100
Del. H&H
Exhaust grill
F.A.=0.021in2
Del. Yard
Underpress grill
F.A=0.007ni2
Del. Yard
Cabin Unit
HCf^-350/750W
Del. H&H
Unit E-3
RS 250L
Del. H&H
Exhaust grill
F.A.=0.037m2
Del. Yard
underpress grill
F.A.=0.017m2
Del. Yard
0125
Del. H&H
Overpressure grill
F.A.=0.036m2
Del. Yard
Underpress grill
F.A.=0.036m2
Del. Yard
D1
HP
(or)
RIO
127.0
7.1
130
99.9
PR10
R12
159.0
7.1
162
164.7
Pfi12
R16
193,7
7.1
197
253.1
PR16
R20
219.1
8.8
222
318.9
PR20
R22S
267.0
6.8
270
4BB.5

smppE
INSULATED
KPPLE ,PQPHVETS
UMNSULATED
SPIROPIPE
"-i-t-
Del. Yard
Non Return Valve
SEQION
SPIROPPE
Del. H&H
Cabin Unit
Exhaust nozzle
Corridor
Del. H&H
Del. Yard
Exhaust nozzle
Ambulance
Del. Yard
Extiaust nozzle
1 Crew
Del. H&H
Del. Yard
Exhaust nozzle
Steward
REtÂRK
D1
BULK
HEAD
L
DECK
SECTION
HP
PR
114.3
7.1
125
200
117
78.7
PR12
R12
139.7
7.1
125
200
143
123.7
PR16
R16
177.8
8.0
900
900
181
205.6
PR20
R20
219.1
8.0
900
900
222
324.0
F22
RZZ
244.5
8.0
900
900
248
4-10.1
PR2S
R2S
267.0
8.0
900
900
270
494.8
Penetration has to be insulated according the required fire integrity of the bulkhead/deci<
BllKHEA'D
"-'''
- - . : - - -
DECK
L-12S
Vfthen sectioi < 20(kin ^
L=200
whai secfton < 200cm'
-,
._
L=900
when 200cni ' < section < 750cm '
L=900
* Fre Damper when section > TSOcm ^
L=900
L=900
wtien 200cni ^< section < 750cm ^

* Fire Damper when section > 750an '
70
15
SUPPLY
^TTT^^
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
195
70
9.8
FIREDAMPER /
DIMENSION
15
70
GRID. F R E E AREA ( F A ) =
M2
15
HCM 250EL
m
OVERPRESS. 6RD WITH HATCH
FREE AREA 0.023 m2
13=325 m3/h
YARD SUPPLY
a i L MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-350EL

7 20
HCH 350EI
EXHAUST N02ik
UNDERPRESS. GRID WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.015 ni2
Q=220 m3/1i
YARD SUPPLY
255
12

FREE AREA 0.049 m2
Q=710 m3/h
YARD SIFPLY
Oescription
Designer
08-08-05
Designer
Scale: 1:50 Subject
3
UMT E-3
Q=710ni3/h
RS250L
AvM
Rev.
Jinling SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Units: mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409-040412 Drawing No.

Controller GENERAL ARRANGEMENT H V A C
: 12005055-001
Controller
Sheet
A2
: 5 of 9
Rev.
AvM
11-04-'05
2 DECK
MEINEN S H O P M A N ENOINEERINS B V
"jMffiJEMifjQiaiSGSHEAfii^VeMI
P . O . B o x a - 3 7 5 0 C3A S p a k e , - i o u , - g - T h e N e c h s H a n d s - Phone:
Drawing File 12005055-OOlA (General ArTangement!.dwg
+ 3 1 ( P ) a O - a 3 3 a S C D - T a x : + 0 1 [ 0 ) 0 3 - aS3 a S 9 3 - w w w . h e i n e . n h o p , ~ i a . - i . o o , ~ i
'
Plot Dafe: og 10, 2005 - 1658
ROOM
Qt
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
HCM-250/500W
REfÂRK
Del, H&H
1 Crew
Cabin Unit
WC
Exhaust nozzle
1 Crew
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del H&H
2 Crew
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del, H&H
WC
Extiaust nozzle
Del. Yard
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del, H&H
1 Crew
Cabin Unit
Exhiaust nozzle
HCM-250/500W
Del, H&H
Del, Yard
1 Crew
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del, H&H
1 Crew
Cabin Unit
HCM-250/500W
Del H&H
Corridor
Circulation grill
F,A.=0,096M2
Del, Yard
Overpressure grill
F.A.=0,096M2
Del, Yard
Unit E-9
RS 200L
Del, H&H
Exhaust grill
F.A.=0.067M2
Del, Yard
Air condition
Del, Yard
2 Crew
WC

FREE AREA 0,1 m?
Q = 1480 m3/li, DEL, YARD
HWERAIWDOL CORD ITYPE GEV)

INSULATED

FREE AREA 0.042 [n2
Q=601 m3/h
YARD SUPPLY
B,
UNINSULATED
SECTION
SPIROPPE
HP
(cm')
RIO
127.0
7.1
130
99.9
159,0
7,1
162
164,7
PR12
R12
R16
193.7
7,1
197
2S3.1
PR16
R20
219.1
8,8
222
318.9
PR20
R225
267.0
8,8
270
486.5
PR10
I'SSnii

UNDERPRESSURE GRID WITH HATCH
FREE AREA 0.042 ni2
Q = 601 m3/h, DEL, YARD
5PIR0F1PE
INSULATED
POPRIVETS
UNINSUUTED
SPIROPIPE
01
PR10
RIO
114.3
T
7.1
PR12
R12
139.7
PR16
R16
PR20
R20
PR22
PR2S
BULK
HEAD
L
DECK
SECTION
125
200
HP
117
7.1
125
200
143
123,7
177.8
8,0
900
900
181
205.6
219.1
8.0
900
900
222
324.0
R22
244.5
8.0
410.1
267,0
8.0
900
900
248
R25
9O0
9O0
270
494.8
(cm')
78,7
UNIT E-9
Q=601ni3/h
RS 200L
Penetration has to be insulated according ttie required fire integrity of the bulkhead/deck
BULKHEAD
L=125
L-=900
L=900
DECK
when secHon < 200cm ^
when 200cm ' < section < 750cm '
Fire Dandier when section > 750cm ^
OVERPRESS, GRID WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.06 m2
Q=860 ni3/h
YARD SUPPLY
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
GRID,
HCM 250EL
when section < 200cm ^

when 200cm ' < secHon < 750cm '
+ Fire Damper when section > 750cm'
SUPPLY ,
FIREDAMPER /
L=200
L=900
L=900
DIMENSION
F R E E AREA ( F A ) =
.... M 2
M O N O D U C T CABIN UNIT H C f \ 4 - 2 5 0 E L
X X X : ELECTRIC HEATER CAPACITY (W)
XXX
M -

HCM 350EL
EXHAUST NOZZLE
SLOT UNDER DOOR
DOORGRILLE 1 5 0 c m '
(160-215
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 2 0 0
cm^
(220-290
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 3 0 0
cm'
(295-430
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 4 0 0
cm'
(435-580
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 5 0 0
cm'
(585-900
m'/h)
130
9,2
15

Rev
Description
E3
Designer
AvH
11-04-'05
Scale: 1:50 Subject

: Jinling SY
Units: mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409-040412
Controller GENERAL A R R A N G E M E N T
AvM
08-08-05
Controller
Designer
Reference No.: 120.05.055-058
Sheet
6 of 9
Drawing NIo. : 12005055-001
Rev.
AI
HAVE
1 DECK
HEIiS<ll\lHOPIVIM ErMGIMESRINO B V
AIR CONDITIONINQ
HEATING 1 VENTILATION
REFRIGERATION
| P , 0 . Box 9 - 3 7 e O GASpakenoui'-g-T'-ie Nech^rlands-PHone: -01 COPCi - g 9 9 SB CO - Tax: +01 { O j O O - a S B a s 3 3 - wwvV.heinenhopna.T . c o n

T'1TK;re?"iA;gl5;T8r;"?f
Drawing Fila; 12005055-001A (General Arrangementlldiig
ROOM
Qt_
Deck Office
1
Machine Office
Crew's Dayroom & Mess
DESCRIPTION
Cabin Unit
HCM-2B0/750W
Del H&H
Exfiaust Grill
F A = 0,022m3
Del Yard
Cabin Unit
HCM-350/750W
Del, H&H
Exhaust Grill
F,A. = 0,015m3
Del, Yard
Regulating valve
0160
Del, Yard
Cabin Unit
Galley
Del, H&H
Exhaust grill
F,A.=0.032m2
Del, Yard
Supply Louver
I"
Del. H&H
Fire Damper
0160
Del, H&H
Unit E-4
Not d e c i d e d
Del, H&H
Galley hood
Not d e c i d e d
Del, H&H
Fire Dainper
400x200
Del, H&H
Unit S-15
RS 250L
Del, H&H
F,A=0.079m2
Del, Yard
Cabin Unit
HCM-350/750W
Del, H&H
Unit E-5
RS 200L
F,A.=0,057m2
Del, H&H
WC
Exhaust nozzle
Suez Crew
Cabin Unit
Underpress grill
Exhaust nozzle

FREE AREA 0.072m2
Q=1031 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
H-PENETRATION IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN -BULKHEDS

HINERALWng CORO (TYPE GGVl
Del, H&H
RS 315L
Exhaust grill
WC
HCM-350/750W
Unit E-6
Supply grill
Officer's Dayroom & Mess
REMARK
TYPE
Lt25iin
NSULATED
UMNSULATED
SPIROPPE
SECTION
1
127.0
PR16
RIO
R12
R%
R20
PR20
R22,5
267.0
PR10
PR12
T
HIP
7,1 130
7,1 162
7,1 197
6,8 222
8,8 270
159,0
193.7
219.1
(cm*)
99.9
m,l
253.1
318,9
486.5

SPIROPIPE
INSULATED
POPRIVETS
SPIROPIPE
OVERPR. GRID WITH HATCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE RM
FREE AREA 0.21m2
Q=3000 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
SUPPLY GRID WITH HATCH

Ef^lERGENCY ENGINE W
FREE AREA 0,33m2
Q=3000 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
UNINSULATED
01
R10
R12
R16
R20
R22
R25
PR10
PR12
PR16
PR20
PR22
PR2S
114,3
139.7
177,8
219.1
244.5
267.0
T
7.1
7.1
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
BULK
HEAD
L
125
125
900
900
900
900
DECK
SECTION
HIP
117
143
181
222
248
270
200
200
900
900
900
900
(cm')
78.7
123.7
205,6
324.0
410.1
494,8
Del, Yard
Del, Yard
HCM-250/750W
F.A.=0,02m2
Penetration tras to be insulated according ttie required fire integrity of \h& bulktiead/deck
Del, H&H
Del Yard
Length of penetrations;
Del, Yard
BULKHEAD
PECK
L=125
L=900
1=900
L=200
when section < 2 O 0 c m '
L=900
L=900

+ Fire Damper when sectim > 7 5 0 c n i '
when section < 200cra ^

* Fire Damper when section > 750cm ^
GOOSENECK DN250 LAUNDRY & ORYROOM

EXHAUST
Q=820m3/ti
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
GOOSENECK 0N100 SAUNA
NAT. SUPPLY
Q=50ni3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
GOOSENECK 0N125 SAUNA
EXHAUST
Q=250m3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
SUPPLY ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
FIREDAMPER /
OVERPR. GRID WITH HATCH

STEERING GEAR RM
FREE AREA 0.21m2
Q=3000 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
DIMENSION
SUPPLY LOUVRE WITH PLENUM
GOOSENECK 0N125 REFR.MACH

NAT. SUPPLY
Q=240m3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY

HCM 250EL
UNDERPRESS, GRID WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.083 m2
Q=1200 m3/h
YARD SUPPLY
XKX
^P^
I^^
GALLEY HOOD
Q=%20m3/ti
Type not decided
Dim not decided

HftnrtfjQQBCWM
HCM 350 I
EXHAUST NOZZLE
IT E-4
Q=1420m3/ti
Type not decided
BUILT IN GALLEY HOOD
SLOT UNDER DOOR

STEERING GEAR RM
FREE AREA 0.33m2
Q=3000 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
DOORGRILLE 150 cm^ ( 1 6 0 - 2 1 5
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 200 c m ' ( 2 2 0 - 2 9 0
m'/h)

DOORGRILLE 400 c m ' ( 4 3 5 - 5 8 0
mVh)
DOORGRILLE 500 c m ' ( 5 8 5 - 9 0 0
m'/h)

FREE AREA 0.036 m2
Q=515 ni3/h
YARD SUPPLY
GOOSENECK DN200 DRY PROV. & REFR MACH

EXHAUST
Q=560m3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
E-12 moved t o 6tti Deck

Rev.
GOOSENECK ON315 WORKSHOP
EXHAUST
Q=1B00m3/ti
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
UNOERPR. GRID WITH HATCH

WORKSHOP
FREE AREA 0.17m2
Q=1500m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
IT E-5
Q=515m3/h
RS 200L
UNDERPRESS, GRID
WITH HATCH
FREE AREA 0,0125 m2
Q=180 (n3/h
YARD SUPPLY
GOOSENECK DN250 C02 RM

UNDERPRESSURE
Q=1000fTi3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SLPPLY
GOOSENECK DN250 C02 RM

EXHAUST
Q=1000ni3/ll
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY

FREE AREA 0,099 m2
Q=1420 ni3/ti
YARD SUPPLY
AvM
Description
Scale: 1i50 Subject
: Jinling SY
Units:
Designer
mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409-040412

Controller
08-08-05
Controller
Designer
Reference N o . : 120,05.055-058
Drawing No.
Stieet
: 12005055-QQ1
AI
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT H A V E
: ? of 9
Rev.
AvM
11-04-'05
POOP DECK
MEINEN S H O P M A N EKMOINEEF=llNG BV
I AJR C O N D I T I O N I N G
HEATING
|,VENTlLATION
REFRIGERATION
P.O. Box g - a y S A Spakenou.-'S - T'ê Nechsp ands - Pho.ie: + a i PJOO - a S S SB QO - Tsx: +31 lOj'JO
Jrawing RIB: T2005055"oOiA (General ArraiTgementl.dv'g '
2 5 9 9 - wM'AV.heine.i'-iapjiBn .CDr-il
""
"
"i^lof Bafe; l i g l o . 2004 - ' l 6 ; M
3
ROOM
Chang. Room
Dry Provision
Qt
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
TYPE
Cabin Unit
Cabin Unit
HCti-250/500W
HCM 250
Del, H&H
Unit E-7
RS 200L
Del, H&H
Exhaust grill
F.A,=0.036m2
Del, Yard
Underp g r l l
F.A,=0.016m2
Del, Yard
Non return valve
0100
Del, H&H

HINERALWDOL [QRD IfYPE GEVl
INSULATED
UNIT S-3
Q=3000m3/h
VM31-10-2
Del, Yard
WC
Exhaust nozzle
Laundry
Unit E-2
RS 315L
Del, H&H
Unit S-8
RS 125L
Dei, H&H
Exhaust grill
Dei, Yard
Supply grill
F.A.=0.07m2
F.A,=0.022m2
Drying room
Exhaust grill
F.A,=0.02m2
Del, Yard
Refr, Macin
Exhaust Grill
F.A. = 0.027m2
Del, Yard
UNIT E-2
Q=820m3/h
RS 315L
UNIT S-8
Q=200[n3/h
RS 125L
Del, Yard
Cabin Unit
HCt^ 250
Del, H&H
127,0
PR16
PR20
R22,5
267.0
Sauna
159.0
193.7
219.1
T
HP
7.1 130
7.1 162
7.1 197
S.8 222
8.8 270
(cm*)
99.9
%k3
253.1
318.9
486,5

SPIROPIPE
INSULATED
POPRIVETS
UNINSUUTEO
SPIROPIPE
D1
RIO
R12
R16
R20
R22
R2S
PR10
PR12
Eng. Store
D1
RIO
R12
R16
R20
PR10
PR12
Del, Yard
F.A, = 0.027m2
SECTION
SPIROPIPE
Del, Yard
Underp Grill
UNINSULATED
PR16
Ffao
114.3
139.7
177.8
219.1
T
7.1
7,1
8,0
8.0
8.0
8.0
BUU<
HEAD
L
DECK
125
125
900
900
9O0
9O0
200
200
900
900
900
900
SECTION
HP
117
143
181
222
248
270
(cm')
78.7
123.7
205,6
3240
410.1
Unit E-14
RS 160
Del, H&H
Exhaust Grill
FA = 0,028m2
Del, Yard
Underp Grill
F.A. = 0.01m2
Del. Yard
Cabin unit
Del, H&H
Del. H&H
Penetration tias to be insulated according ttie required fire integrity of ttie bulkhead/deck
Emerg. Eng, rm
C02 room
Unit S-3
HCM 250
VM31-10-2
Unit E-10
VM31-10-2
Del. H&H
Workshop
Unit E-13
VM31-10-2
Del, H&H
Exhaust Grill
FA = 0,056m2
Del, Yard
Underp Grill
FA = 0,083m2
Del, Yard
PR22
PR25
244.5
267.0
BULKHEAD
DECK
L'125
L-900
L=900
L=200
L=900
L=900
whEH secHon < 200i:m'

when 200cm ' < section < 7S0cni ^
Fre Damper when seclion > 7 5 0 a n '

FREE AREA 0.023m2
CAP, 200 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
UNDERPRESS. GRID WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0,043m2
CAP, 620 Ili3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
494.8
when section < 200cm ^

when 200cm ^< section < 750cni'
+ Fire Damper when section > 750cni'
SUPPLY ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM 250

UNIT E-14
Q=25m3/h
RS 160
Y^
HCM 250
XXX
STEAR, GE:AR
PR-10
HCM 250EL

EXHAUST NOZZLE
3x EXHAUST GRILL
F.A, O.lr
m3/Hr each
SLOT UNDER DOOR

DOORGRILLE 150 c m ' ( 1 6 0 - 2 1 5
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 200 c m ' ( 2 2 0 - 2 9 0
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 300 c m ' ( 2 9 5 - 4 3 0
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 400 c m ' ( 4 3 5 - 5 8 0
m'/h)
DOORGRILLE 500 c m ' ( 5 8 5 - 9 0 0
m'/h)
UNIT S-5
Q=3000ni3/ti
VM31-10-2
C2 room
S-5
Overpr, Grill
VM31-10-2
Del, H&H
F,A. = 0.11m2
Del, Yard
NAT SUPPLY GRID WITH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.017 ni2
Q=145ni3/ti
YARD SUPPLY
IT E-10
Q=1O00m3/fi
Vf^31-10-2
UNIT E-13
Q=l500m3/ti
VM31-10-2

Rev.
AvM
Description
E3
Designer
AvM
11-04-'05
08-08-05
Designer
Scale:
1:50 Subject
Units:
mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409-040412
Confroiler
: Jinling SY
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
Reference No.: 120.05.055-058

Drawing No.
; 12005055-001
HAVE
MAIN DECK
HEIkMEIM S H O P M A N EkMOINEERINQ B V
i AIR CONDITJONINCi
HEATING | VENTiLATION
Controller
Slieet
AI
: 8 of 9
Rev.
HaiiS^
REFRIGERATION
J P.O. Box 3 - 3 7 5 C I B A S p a k e n o u f g - T i e Nec'-ieplanda- PNone: +31 C O P 3 - 5 3 9 SBC30- Tax: +31 (OjOO - a 3 9 g 5 B B - w^^M/.'-lei^le^'-|Qp^-l^l^.con
pawing File; 1200505S-001A IGns
H-PENETRATION IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN A - B U L K H E A D S

y\
hrJAiwm uiai nupc scw

HSOATO) I UWSULATEO
SECTm
SPIROHPE
Y^^B;
Dl
R
RB
Re
PRO
PRO
Pf
PR
T fP
7.1 130
7.1 162
7.1 197
6,e 222
8.8 270
1273
mo
1K.7
2.1
R22S
una
9)9
1M.7
zai
318.9
WS
G-PENETRATIQN IN A . . . . B U L K H E A D / D E C K
an
KOATED 1 LNKSUTEO
GOOSENECK DN250 FWO WINDLASS

OVERPR.
CONTROL PANEL
Q=1000m3/h
CLOSEABLE
YARD SUPPLY
SPRDPIPE
PR
PRE
PRK
1!
RS
RK
R20
CS
RS
PR20
pro2
Fr
UNIT S-7
Q=1000ni3/h
VM31-10-2
T
7.1
7.1
8.0
80
6.0
8
DI
1H3
139.7
1778
219.1
244.5
267.0
HEAD
L
DECK
l
12S 200 HT
125 20O 143
900
900
900
90O
900
900
906 90b
181
222
248
270
SKTCN
7ei7
123.7
205
324.0
410.1
494.B
Penetration Inas fo be insulated cording tl-ie requred fire integrity of ttie bull<tieati/dect<
Lengtti o( penetrations;
MUSHROOM DN315 FWO WINOLASS

SUPPLY
CONTROL PANEL
Q=1000ni3/h
CLOSEABLE
YARD SUPPLY
BXKICAD
nECK
l"125
when sKliai < 2 0 0 D I I '
1-500
1-900
when 2taii ' < sedta < TSOon '

Fire Danper when seclion > TSOcm'
L-200
L=900
L-90O

BOW THRUSTER RM
FREE AREA 0,47m2
Q=4200 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
GOOSENECK QN250 STORE
NAT. SUPPLY
Q=1033m3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
wtiHi section < 230an '

when 200cm ' < sectbn < 7S0an '
fn Danper when seclion > TSOon'
SUPPLY ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
EXHAUST ,
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
GRID, FREE AREA (FA)
M2
GOOSENECK 0N2B0 STORE

EXHAUST
Q=1033m3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
OVERPR, GRID WITH HATCH
BOW THRUSTER RM
FREE AREA 0,29m2
Q=4200 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
GOOSENECK ON250 PAINT ST.
EXHAUST
Q=1303ni3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
UNIT E-16
Q=1033m3/h
GTLF-1-022-1
UNIT E-11
Q=1303m3/h
GTLF-1-020-8
GOOSENECK ON250 PAINT ST.

NAT. SUPPLY
Q=1303m3/h
CLOSEABLE BY HATCH
YARD SUPPLY
D
v^
UNIT S-4
Q=4200ni3/h
VM40-10-2
AvM 08-08-05
Designer
Controller
Scale: 1:50 Subject; Jinling SY
Reference No,: 120.05.055 - 056
Sheet : 9 of 9
Units: mm Subject No. ! JIZ 0t0t09 - Oit0412 Drawing No. ; 1200S055-001
F!ev,
E-12 moved t o 6 t h Deck

Rev.
Description
Designer
AvM
11-C4-'05
Controller
AO
FORE SHIP
MEINEN S H O P M A N ENGINEERING BV
i i l t ^ l F I CQNpiTIDNINiS; HE/vriWe 1 V S M ^
P.O. B5?ia--Q/5aGASpa<enDui,-^g-'preMechep|ianc^-F'ône
Ir'airfliig File; i;OD5O55-001A I l a m ' T i ftrrang6niBrl-]jvg
a i i:q?OC3-eas ^ C O - r e x : j Q i E H J S P - g e a e s a s - v w w '-êlnen-ôp-ian .eor-i

' Plcrt ui\Ki Aug ID. 2M5 - n-.Z
Meinen & Hopman Engineering bv

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel.: 31 -{0)33-299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVA C
1 Introduction
2 Components of the air handling unit
3 Working
3.1 Before the first start up

3.1.1 General
3.1.2
4
4
Fan
3.1.2.1 Valve register

3.1.3 Filters
3.1.3.1 Gasket filter
3.1.3.2 Bag filter
3.1.3.3 Special filters
3.1.4 Heater battery
3.1.4.1 Hotwater battery
3.1.42 Steam battery
3.1.4.3 Electric heater
3.1.5 Cooling coil
3.1.5.1 Chilled water cooling coil
3.1.5.2 Direct expansion cooling coil
3.1.6 Humidifier
3.1.6.1 Spray humidifier
3.1.6.2 Package humidifier
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4 Maintenance
4.1 Casing
4.2 Fan
4.3 V-Belt transmissions
4.3.1 Removing of the V-belt
4.3.2 Mounting of the V-belt
4.3.3 Tightening of the V-belt
4.3.4 V-belt pulley's
4.3.4.1 Removing of the pulley's
4.3.4.2 Mounting of the pulley's
4.4 Valve register
4.5 Filter
4.5.1 Cleaning of the filters
4.5.2 Replacement of the gasket filtermat
4.6 Heater battery
4.6.1 Hotwater battery
4.6.2 Steam battery
4.6.3 Electric heater
4.7 Cooling coil
4.7.1 Chilled water coling coil
4.7.2 Direct expansion coil
4.8 Heat regenerative system
4.8.1 Cross current regenerative system
4.8.2 Heat regenerative battery
4.9 Sound-absorber
4.10 Humidifier
4.10.1 Spray humidifier
4.10.2 Package humidifier
4.11 Siphon
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
12
5 Summery Chapter 2
12
Part three
Chapter 2: The air handling unit - I

P.O Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunscftolen - Holland
Tel +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Part three
Chapter 2: The air handling unit - 2
General Users Manual-HVAC

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
^,j.jy\
,-
1 Introduction
We have spent sometime now on the facts why ventilation and preferable air-conditioning should be made available and how
much. The air-conditioning system with all its components is placed in a casing. This complete system is called an air handling
unit (figure 2-1). In this chapter the air handling unit and it's different components will be explained.
2 Components of the air handling unit
The main sections of an air handling unit are:
The cooling section
In this section heat is withdrawn from the air.
The heating section
- In this section air can be heated if there is the need for a higher temperature in the different
rooms.
The fan section
- Air is sucked through the air handling unit by a fan along the filter-, cooling-, heating- and
humidifier section and is distributed to different spaces/rooms.
The filter section
- In this section dust and other contaminants are filtered from the air.
The humidifier section
- In this section moister can be supplied to the air to increase the humidity of the air.
Silencers
- To keep the noiselevel between maximum levels.
X >
\
/
\
/
\
>
>
>
>
>
y >
>
o
_o
figure 2-1
There are many requirements on the construction of an air handling unit:

soundless working
sufficient thermal and acoustical insulation
stainless steel construction
water and airtight construction
easy accessible parts
relative small weight
easy to disassemble
low price
3 Working
The working of the air handling unit is based on the following principle. The air is sucked in by a ventilator placed in the casing.
Next, the air travels through a filter that cleans the air from dirt and dust. After the filter the air flows through a cooling coil where
it is cooled en dismoisterized (Dismoisterization takes place because water vapour condensates when the temperature is
kDwered).
The cooling coil (evaporator) is a component of the cooling section. When the air is cooled, it is blown into a system of pipes
that transports it to the different spaces in the ship. For ships that sail in colder regions and need beside cooling also heating, a
heating section in the air handling unit is used to heat the air. The air that must be heated flows through a heater that raises the
temperature of the air. Heated air is then transported to the different spaces of the ship where heating is needed.
In the following chapter some basic principles of air handling will be illustrated. After this different parts of an air-conditioning
system are explained.
Part three

P 0 . Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel.. +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
- '. ":
General Users Manual - HVAC '^
';' ;.
'.. ,
3.1 Before the first start up

start the airhandling unit only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted. Always^ put the main- and/or
workswitch of during activities at the airhandling unit Only qualified personal is authorized to
execute the following activities at the airhandling unit
1 1 Excluding the coniniissloning of th cooling mactiin.
3.1.1 General
Check:
!
!
!
I
!
!
!
Wheter all transport safeties are removed.

Wheter the airhandling unit is not damaged.
Whether ail parts are mounted correctly.
Whether, during the start up. nobody is inside the air-handling unit and if all the hatches are closed.
Whether all connections are airtigth.
Whether all airducts are air thight and flexible connected to the unit.
Whether the control devices are connected correctly and all the safeties are properly set.
Vv.
3.1.2 Fan
! Check whether the fan is mounted correctly.
I Check by hand whether the impeller does not touch the casing in any place.
! Inspect the fan casing on pollutions.
! Check in case of a V-belt driven fan :
a- Alignment of the V-belt (see maintenance).
b- The V-belt tension (see maintenance).
! Check whether the motor is connected correctly to the supply.
! Set the thermal protection 5% above the current indicated on the nameplate of the motor.
! Shortly start the fan and control the direction of rotation.
I Measure the current consumption in every phase, measuring takes place in the control unit.
Measuring only takes place when the inspectiondoors are closed.
! Set the thermal protection 5% above the highest measured cunent.

! Check whether the fan and motor are tuming easy and in balance.
OPEN I
When the ventilator is woridng without or not sufficient pressure this

can cause an overloaded motor. To prevent this the duct
connections and position of the strainers must be checked.
SERVO MOTOR
In case of adjustable engines (see projectinformation) the highest current does

not occur at the nominal speed of revolutions. Therefore the current must be
measured over the entire adjusting range.
VALVE POSmON
INDICATION SPUT
3.1.2.1 Valve register

I Check the connection and operation of the servo motor by means of the
manufacturer documents.
! Check the correct action of the valves in accordance with the position of the servo motor.
Part three
Figvre 3.1
Meinen & H o p m a n Engineering bv

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Hoiland
- Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC ) ,
3.1.3 Filters
The airhandlingunit is delivered completely with filters. The filters can be of different types, e.g : Gasket filter. Bag filter or a
special filter like an active carbon or an absolutefilter etc.
3.1.3.1 Gasket filter
The gasket filter is mounted in a slide construction. The construction consits of two fitting parts, the filter is placed in zigzag
shape between them. The two parts are connected by screws or clips.
3.1.3.2 Bag filter
This filter is fitted by spring clips in a frameworic. For the sealing between the filter and the framework a neopreen rubber seal is
used. When mounting the filter in the framewori<, it is important that the spring dips push the filter tight to the sealing.
3.1.3.3 Specialfilters
Absolute and active carbon filters are delivered seperate in the original package. For the mounting of these filters is refered to
the manufacturers documents, enclosed in the package.
3.1.4 Heater battery
After disconnecting the heater will stay hot for some time.
BURNINGDANGER!
3.1.4.1. Hotwater battery

! Check whether the de-aeration and drain are present and the waterconnections (in
counter flow unless mentioned otherwise),
! If not, hold the connections thight when connecting them (fig. 3.2).
! Fill the pipes and battery up, then de-aerate with an idle pump.
! Check all connections for leaks.
! Check the mounting and connections of the frost-protection thermostat (fig. 3.3).
Simulate the action by raising the setpoint.
I Set the thermostat at 5 C.
! Check the mounting of the maximum thermostat.
figure 3.2
MOUKT THE CWPILMt
OVER THE L A N B l f A
ITNEIVEI
3.1.4.2. Steam battery

! Check the mounting of the steampipes and whether they do not leak at
the prescribed pressure.
! Check mounting and connections of the frost-protection thermostat.
Simulate the action (see hotwater battery).
! The thermostat must be placed at a distance from the steambattery.
! Set the frost-protection thennostat to 5 C.
HaUOE-ItE
> B n i C M . PARTS
Figure 3.3
Pad three
Chapter 2: The air handling unit ~ 5

P.O Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunsdiolen - Holland
Tel + 3 1 - ( 0 ) 3 3 - 2 9 9 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC
3.1.4.3. Electric heater

! Check the electric connection.
! Check the mounting of the maximum thermostat
! Check the action of the maximum thermostat. It must be set at 20 C above the airtemperature.
3.1.5 Cooling coil
3.1.5.1. Chilled water cooling coil
!
!
!
!
Check the waterconnections (in counter flow) and whether the de-aeration and drain are present (fig. 3.4).
If not, hold the connections tight when connecting them (fig. 3.2).
RH the pipes and battery up, then de-aerate with an idle pump.
Check the connections for leaks.
3.1.5.2. Direct expansion coil
Contains a harmful refrigerant (R-22) under overpressure. LEAKDANGER! Keep room well vented. In
the presence of an open flame freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses.
! Check all connections.

1 Check whether the possible freeze-in protection is mounted correctly. Simulate
X
the action by raising the setpoint.
! Set the freeze-in protection to 5 * C below the airtemperature.
DE-AIRATION
'Vis
3.1.6 Humidifier
tl
A.
It is not allowed to drill in the dampers under any condition.
3.1.6.1. Spray humidifier

Figure 3.4
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Check the electric- and waterconnections and whether all joints are secured and closed.
Rll the waterreservoir. Set the float ventile about 20 mm under the overflow connection.
Close the drain tap and inspectiondoor or -panel.
De-aerate the pump and start the ventilator.
Open the watersupply to the float valve.
Check the direction of rotation of the pump via an impulse start.
Measure the current consumtion in every phase.
A
Measuring only takes place when the inspectiondoors are dosed.
! Set the thermal protection to 5% above the highest measured current.

A
Never put the humidifier into action without the fan wori<ing, because damage may develop caused by punch of
moisture through the air rectifiers.
3.1.6.2 Package humidifier

! Follow the above mentioned points of the spray damper.
! The watersupply must be set so that that neither waterbells are formed nor water can come loose of the package.
Part three
After the machine has been in operation for ten hours the pulleys must be retightent to ensure that they
are still fixed.

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschotsn - Holland
Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
.\ ,
General Users Manual- HVAC 'j ''} '
4 Maintenance
Always ^ put the main- and/or work switch off during activities at the airtiandling unit Only qualified
personal is authorized to execute the maintanance of the airhandling unit
1 = Excluding the commissioning of the cooling machine.
4.1 Casing
Yeariy:
! Clean the in- and outside of the casing, this can be done by vacuumdeaning with a soft broom.
! Clean the uncoated sendzimir parts of the box at the in- and outside with a light oiled cloth.
! Check the ductconnections (flexible hoses). Damaged hoses must be repared or replaced.
! Check the wori<ing of the dooriocks.
! Possible corrosion phenomena must be treated directly and the cause must be rectified.
I Damages at the coating must be retouched. Especially the internal coating at the inlet- and strainersection.
4.2 Fan
Start the fan only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted. After disconnecting the fan will runout for some
time. After disconnecting the ventilator some parts will be hot for some time. BURNINGDANGER!
Yeariy:
! Clean fan and motor.
! Check whether the connections are still secured and the vibration dampers are not harmed.
I Check the coating and casing of the fan.
! Check whether fan and motor are turning easy and in balance.
I On some fan types bearings with greasenipples are mounted. Then relubrication must be performed according the
instmctions of the manufacturer.
! In all other cases the bearings are maintenance free.
Monthly;
I Check wheter the bearings make an excessive amount of sound. If this occurs the bearings must be replaced.
4.3 V-Belt Transmissions
4.3.1 Removing of the V-belt
!
!
!
!
Remove the front part of the shield over the transmission.

The electric motor is placed on a cradle, that is secured with nuts.
Loosen the nuts and move the cradle to loosen the V-belt.
Remove the V-belt.
AUGNMENT
V.LT PUiXETS
4.3.2 Mounting of the V-belt

Q
Never force the V-belts on the sheaves, as this may damage the belt core, so that the belt will
break after a short time of operation.
Figure 4.1
! Shorten the distance between the cen-tres, by moving the electric motor, until the belts can be fitted easily without the use of
tools.
! Then increase the distance until the V-bett is tensed.
! Align the V-belt with, for example a ruler (fig. 4.1).
! Give the V-belt the prediscribed tension and secure the cradle.
! Replace the front part of the shield.
I After about 15 minutes of loaded operation the V-belt should be tightend (see tightening of the V-belt).
! During the continued operation the tension should be checked after about 50 wori<ing hours, and there upon it should be
checked occasionally.
4.3.3 Tightening of the V-belt
Part three

P.O Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunscholen - Holland
Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
>
; General Users Manual-HVAC
;,- -; ' ,. , ; .;'
(f
! Measure the centre distance.
! Deflect the V-be!t in the middle.
I Measure the deflection and check according the table.
Profile
Diameter of smallest pulley (mm)
SPZ-ALPHA
SPB-BETA
PUSH DOWN
Deflection (mm)
67- 95
100-200
1.0-1.5
1.5-2.0
160-224
250 - 400
3.6-5.1
5.1-6.6
CENTRE OrSTANCE (cm)

DEFLECTION (mm)
Table 4.1 V-belt deflection

Figum 4.2
Always ascertain that the V-belt is aligned correctly and at the right tension.
Replace a V-belt that shows signs of wear immediately.
4.3.4 V-belt pulley's

The V-belt pulley's are provided with a taper-lock bush and can be removed easily without the use of blow- or pulltoals.
4.3.4.1 Removing of the pulley's
\
1 ! Loosen the screws and place one screw in the pressure hole of the pulley.
I Tum the screw in until the pulley is released.
! Remove the pulley from the shaft.
4.3.4.2 Mounting of the pulley's
!
I
!
!
Place the taper-lock bush and pulley together, so that the holes in the pulley and taper-lock bush are corresponding.
Turn the screws in the holes and fasten them slightly.
Align the pulley's.
Tigthen the screws equally until they are fixed.
4.4 Valve register

Monthly:
I Check the position of the set bolt from the servo motor.
Yeariy:
! Check the action and adjustment of the servo motor.
! Clean the valves and driving.
! Disconnect the servomotor to control whether the valve blades are turning easy.
For further information is refered to the manufacturer documents.
Part three
Heinen & Hopman Engineering bv

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunscholen - Holland
Tel.; *31 -(0)33-299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC ,. >,, .
-.
4.5 Filter
The frequency of controlling and cleaning/replacing the filters is strongly related to the pollution of the filtered air, working time and
the type of filters placed. As a directive for the filtercapacity it can be stated, that a dirty filter must not exceed 2>2 times the
pressuredrop off a clean filter.
A
Moisture in the filters (e.g. during foggy wheather) can result in a aggressive reaction with the catched dust.
4.5.1 Cleaning of the filters

Some filters are washable, then the following can be executed :
The filter must be cleaned, at least once a month. In some cases more often, according the conditions. It is done according the
following steps:
I
I
!
!
Take the filter out of the unit.

Clean it with fresh water of max. 60 C.
Soak it in water to which a synthetic detergent is added orrincethem through with a weak water jet against the air direction.
Shake the filters carefully (do not wring the mat) and replace them, take care that the smooth side of the mat is facing the clean
air side, so that the air passes through the coarse filter of the mat first.
A
Special filters as the carbon filter must be maintained as prescribed in the manufacturer documents.
4.5.2 Replacement of the gasketfiitermat

The new filtermat is placed over one of the parts. Take care that the smooth side of the mat is facing the clean air side. Then put
the two parts together and mount them with screws. The superfluous filtemiat must be removed before the filter is replaced.
#%
A new filters works better than a cleaned one. A close control of the condition of the filter is achieved by mounting a
pressure difference gauge. This indicates the condition of the filter. Always keep a spare set of filters available. The
active carbon and absolute filters must be stored in the sealed foil. It is recommended to replace the filters yearly
(except the active carbon filter). Take the installation (preferably) in to action with 'construction filters' mounted.
4.6 Heater battery
After disconnecting the heater is hot and may contain a medium under overpressure. BURNINGDANGER!
4.6.1 Hotwater battery

Yeariy:
! Check for corrosion and leakage, especially before the heating season.
! Clean the battery surface with a vacuumdeaner provided with a soft broom. Degrease hereafter. In case of coated lamellae there
may be used no solvents.
[ In case of systems filled with glycol, check the glycol percentage.
! Check the action of the frost protection, especially before the heating season.
! When blowing clean in the opposite direction of the airstream care must be taken not to damage the (thin) lamellea.
! Because it is possible that there is water remaining in the battery, this must be blown through after draining.
Part three
Chapter 2: The air handling unil - 9

P.O Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
'
Tel.: f 31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
4.6.2 Steam battery

Yearly:
! Check for corrosion and leakage, before the heating season.
! Clean the battery surface with a vacuumcleaner provided with a soft broom. Degrease hereafter.
! Check the action of the frost protection, before the heating season.
[ When blowing clean in the opposite direction of the airstream care must be taken not to damage the (thin) lamellea.
! Because it is possible that there is water remaining in the battery, it must be blown through after draining.
4.6.3 Electric heater
Check the action of the overtieat thermostat regularity. If necessary dean it.
4.7 Cooling coil
4.7.1 Chilled water cooling coil

Yearly:
! Check for corrosion and leakage, espedally before the cooling seasori.
! Clean the battery surface with a vacuumcleaner provided with a soft broom. Degrease hereafter. In case of coated lamellae there
! Because it is possible that there is water remaining in the battery, this must be blown through after draining.
! Check the dip tray on pollution.
I The dropseperation lamellea must be cleaned, if they are strongly polluted with lime, clean them with diluted formic acid or a good
decalcifier. Hereafter the lamellea must be flushed thoroughly with clean water.
! In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used.
! In case of systems filled with glycol, check the glycol percentage.
4.7.2 Direct expansion coil
Contains a harmful refrigerant (R-22) under overpressure. LEAKDANGER! Keep room well vented. In the
presence of an open flame freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses.
! Check for corrosion and leakage, especially before the cooling season.
! Clean the battery surface with a vacuumcleaner provided with a soft broom. Degrease hereafter. In case of coated lamellae there
! Check the dip tray on pollution.
! The dropseperation lamellea must be cleaned, if they are strongly polluted with lime, clean them with diluted formic acid or a good
decalcifier. Hereafter the lamellea must be flushed thoroughly vi^th clean water.
! In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used.
4.8 Heat regenerative system
4.8.1 Cross current regenerative system
The cross current exchanger is mounted in a box as a complete package inclusive drip tray. The condenswater drain must be
supplied with a waterlock (siphon). For information about exchangers that are provided with valves is refered to the valve register
of the ventilator.
Pari three
Chapter 2: The air handling unit -10

Tel.. 31 - ( 0 ) 3 3 - 2 9 9 25 0 0 -
General Users Manual - HVAC .!:: '.-'
4.8.2 Heat regenerative battery

For the maintenance of the heater and cooler part is refered to the hotwater and coldwater battery.
Yearly:
! Check the exchanger for pollution.
! Clean the surface with a vacuumdeaner provided with a soft broom.
! When blowing clean with air, care should be taken not to damage the plates. Hereafter (if necessary) de-grease. Make no use
of solvents in case of a coated exchanger.
4.9 Sound-absorber
The sound-absorber coulisses are normally maintenancefree (under normal operating conditions). However it is recommended to
check the coulisses for damages and loose fibres yearly. It is allowed to clean the coulisses with a vacuumdeaner.
4.10
Humidifier
A< It is not allowed to drill in the dampers under any condition.
4.10.1
Spray humidifier
The salt and mineral content in the supplied water is not constant. Normally an evaporating factor of two can be sustained. This
means that the drain water quantity must be equal to the maximal water quantity that is to be evaporated per unit of time. Thus the
supplied water vapour quantity must be twice the evaporating water quantity. When water treatment is executed, this may not have
a foaming action, because it will cause the drop seperator to be useless. The water may not be softened below 6 German
thougness, because else it will become to aggressive.
Yearly:
! Check the action of the damper.
I Clean the damper. This is done by fully opening the drain and spraying the inner
parts with water. The suction-basket must be cleaned seperately.
! Clean the sprayers and dissolve possible lime deposit with diluted formic acid or
a good decalcifier hereafter flush thoroughly with dean water. When the sprayer
locking is worn out, replace the total sprayerpart. Never scrape the sprayers out
with though tools.
( When the dropseperators are strongly poluted with lime they must be cleaned
with diluted formic add or a good decalcifier, hereafter they must be flushed with
water. In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used.
! Check the sealing and level of thefloatventile.
! Check the correct adion of the continuousspray-arrangement. in case of leakage
of the packing this must be replaced.
! When a drculating pump is installed, clean the inside according the manufacturer
documents.
RECTIFIER
DROSEPeRATOR
SPRAYERS
;
SUPPLY WA.THR
WATERLEVEL
RESERVO
H
11
r^\
Vo-
PUMP
-'-/
C^
^^ 0
!
. P R E S S U R E GAUGE
1
ICOKTINUOUS SPRAY
ITfER
Figure 4.3
Monthly:
! Check wheter the float valve is adjusted so that the suction side of the pump is below the water level.
4.10.2
Package humidifier
The salt and mineral content in the supplied water are not constant. Normally an evaporating factor of two can be sustained. This
means that the drain water quantity must be equal to the maximal water quantity that is to be evaporated per unit of time. Thus the
supplied water vapour quantity must be twice the evaporating water quantity. When water treatment is executed, this may not have
a foaming action, because it will cause the drop seperator to be useless. The water may not be softened below 6 German
thougness, because else it will become to aggressive.
Yearly:
! Check the action of the damper.
! The damper must, depending on pollution, be cleaned. This is done by fully opening the drain and spraying the inner parts with
water. Remove the pump and clean it thoroughly.
Part three
Chapter 2: The air handling unit -11

Tel.: 3 1 - ( 0 ) 3 3 - 2 9 9 25 00
: ' ' ' ' ' r-r-
! In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used. Check the sealing and level of the float ventile.
! Check the correct action of the continuousspray-arrangement. In case of leakage of the packing this must be replaced.
Monthly:
! Check wheter the float valve is adjusted so that the suction side of the pump is below the water level.
! Check the package damper for lime pollution. In case of much lime pollution replace the total package.
4.11
Siphon
A
During the winter freezing danger occurs
Condensdrains of airhandling-units must be provided with a wateriock (siphon). Hereby the

following rules must be taken into account:
wrrj
Figure 4.5
Figum 4.^
! Only one siphon per drain.

! The condens must be discharged by means of a funnel. This enables a
control of the action of the siphon and possible back pressure in the
dischargehoses is avoided.
! The condensdrain must be connected after the mist eliminator. Locked in the
airflow direction.
! The siphon must be provided with a fillopening that is lockable and a drain
device.
! After a long standstill period the siphon must be filled with water before the
installation is started.
At figure 4.5 A and C the airhandling unit is out of operation. In 4.5 B and D the unit is in operation. Figure 4.5 B shows the unit during
underpressure and 4.5 D shov*^ the situation during overpressure. The dimensions of the siphon are excluding the retumvalve.
4 Summery Chapter 2
The air-conditioning system with all its components is placed in a casing. This complete system is called an air handling unit.
The main sections of an air handling unit are:
The cooling section
- In this section heat is withdrawn from the air.
- In this section air can be heated if there is the need for a higher temperature in the different rooms.
The heating section
Air is sucked through the air handling unit by a fan along the filter-, cooling-, heating- and humidifier
The fan section
section and is distributed to different spaces/rooms.
The filter section
In this section dust and other contaminants are filtered from the air.
The humidifier section
In this section moister can be supplied to the air to increase the humidity of the air.
Silencers
To keep the noiselevel between maximum levels.
There are many requirements on the constmction of an air handling unit:
soundless working
sufficient thennal and acoustical insulation
stainless steel construction
water and airtight construction
easy accessible parts
relative small weight
easy to disassemble
low price
Part three
r~

Tel.; *31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
,' '
":.
General Users MariUal - HVAC . M
:.
1 Introduction
2 General principles
2.1 Heat and specific heat
2.2 Change of state
2.3 The boiling process
2.4 Heat of evaporation
2.5 Superheat
2.6 Temperature-enthalpy diagram
2.7 Pressure-enthalpy diagram
2.8 The condensing process
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
3 Refrigerants
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Refrigerants
3.3 Environmental problems
3.4 Refrigerant alternatives
3.4.1 Refrigerant alternative R123
3.4.2 Refrigerant alternatives R134a and R404a
3.5 Refrigerants - general
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
4 The Cooling cycle

4.1 Introduction
4.2 Main components
4.2.1 Evaporator
4.2.2 Compressor
10
10
10
10
11
4.2.3 Condenser
4.3 General cycle description
11
11
5 Refrigerant circuit components

5.1 Evaporator and condenser heat exchanger
5.1.1 Finned heat exchanger
5.1.2 Tube heat exchanger
5.1.3 Plate heat exchanger
5.2 Thermostatic expansion valve
5.2.1 Working of a thermostatic expansion valve
5.2.2 Supertieat
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
6 How to use refrigerant charts, tables & diagrams

6.1 Refrigerant tables
14
14
7 Guidelines for service and maintenance - the cooling machine

7.1 Standard service techniques
7.1.1 Contaminants
7.1.1.1 Effect
7.1.1.2 Purging non-condensables
7.1.1.3 To de-air systems with purge valves
7.1.1.4 To ventilate systems without purge valves
7.1.2 Driers
7.1.2.1 Use
7.1.22 Constnjction
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
7.1.2.3
Selection
16
7.1.2.4 Precautions
7.1.3 Handling
7.1.4 Gauge manifold
7.1 A I Use
7.1.4.2 Care
7.1.4.3 Connection
7.1.5 Leai( testing
7.1.5.1 Methods
Part three
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
Chapter 3 : The coolingsection
-1

P 0 Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
\i'
General Osers Manual - HVAC
'r
7.1.5.2 Detection
18
7.1.5.3 Procedure
7.1.6 Evacuation and dehydration
18
19
7.1.6.1 General
19
7.1.6.2 Deep vacuum method

7.1.7 Charging
7.1.7.1 General
7.1.7.2 Methods
7.1.7 Procedures
7.1.8 Removing refrigerants
7.1.8.1 Excess charge
7.1.8.2 Complete uncharge
7.1.9 Compressor oil
7.1.9.1 General
7.1.9.2 Determining oil level
7.1.9.3 Oil sight glass
7.1.9.4 To detennine the oil level
7.1.9.5 Oil level plugs
7.1.9.6 Adding oil to a compressor
19
20
20
20
21
22
22
22
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
7.1.9.7 Removing oil
26
7.2 Before the first start-up

7.2.1 General
7.2.2 Compressorset
7.2.2.1 Electric motor
7.2.2.2 Compressor
7.2.2.3 Transmission of the compressorset
7.2.2.4 Drier
7.2.2.5 Thermostatic expansion valve
7.2.2.6 Condenser
7.3 Starting and stopping
7.3.1 Starting
7.3.2 Stopping
7.4 Maintenance
7.4.1 General
7.4.1.1 Daily
7.4.1.2 Monthly
7.4.2 Compressorset
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
'.
7.4.2.1 Weekly
29

7.4.2.3 Compressor
7.4.3 Transmission of the compressorset
29
29
29
7.4.3.1 V-belt driven type
29
7.4.3.2 Direct driven

7.4.4 Drier
7.4.4.1 Normally
7.4.4.2 Yeariy
7.4.5 Thermostatic expansion valve
7.4.6 Condenser
7.4.6.1 Weekly
7.4.6.2 Yeariy
8 Guidelines for troubleshooting
8.1 Troubleshooting
8.1.1 Frosted or sweating suction line
8.1.2 Warm liquid line
8.1.3 Frosted liquid line
8.1.4 Back pressure lower than normal
8.1.5 No frost of the thermostatic expansion valve or cooling unit
8.1.6 System operates too much or all time
8.1.7 Storage compartment too cold
8.1.8 Low operating head pressure on condensing unit
type
'.
34
34
34
8.1.9 Head pressure too high

8.1.10 Frost on the thermostatic expansion valve only
Part three
30
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
34
Chapter 3 : The coolingsection - 2

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVC
8.1.11 Storage compartment warm

8.1.12 Troubles with electric Installation
8.2 Complaints with a enumeration of possible causes
8.2.1 Compressor does not run
8.2.2 Compressor shortcycles
8.2.2 Condensing pressure too high
8.2.4 Refrigerated product not cold enough
8.2.5 Condensing unit njns too much
8.2.6 Hot liquid line
8.2.8 Liquid line very cold
8.2.9 Condensing unit noisy
8.2.10 Condensing pressure too low
8.2.11 Not cool enough
8.1.12 Noisy operation
34
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
9 Summery Chapter 3
Part three
ivj
39

P O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel.: *31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
' '
Part three
General Users Manual - HVAC /

Tel.; +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC - /!;
'
1 Introduction
In this chapter the cooling machine and its components of an air-conditioning installation will be explained. There will also be
looked at the maintance and troubleshooting of a cooling installation.
<
The dictionary defines refrigeration as a process of making something cold, and "cold" can be defined |
as an absence of heat. So refrigeration, despite the means by which it is secured, is defined as the
process of eliminating heat. If heat is eliminated from the air contained in a given space, that space
becomes cooler, and its temperature lower.
NO HEAT FLOW
|20=C
2a-CI
2a-c
cold
^
>^^J
"^^
heat
Heat is a form of energy and can be transferred from one body to

HEAT FLOWS DOWN
another by virtue of a difference in temperature. A fundamental law
states that heat may only be transferred from the substance of the
lo=c
higher temperature to that of the lower temperature. Therefore,
figure 3-1
refrigeration becomes a process of providing a substance at a lower
temperature to which heat can flow from a substance at a higher temperature.A cooling machine
has the task to cool parts or substances to a temperature that is lower than the surrounding area
and keep it at this temperature.
figure 3-2
The oldest most known refrigerants are ice, water and air. Initial the only purpose was the
conservation of food for a longer time. The Chinese were the first who discovered that ice could
preserve and gave a better taste to drinks. The Eskimo's have for centuries preserved their food by
freezing it.
In the beginning of the last century badenes, yeast, mould, enzymes, etc. were known. People discovered that the growth of
these micro organisms was dependable on the temperature. At lower temperatures the growrth decreases and under 10- C
there is almost no growrth anymore. This knowledge led to the application of cooling for presen/ing food. At first ice was used for
this purpose.
The first installation for production of artificial ice appeared around 1860. In America in the year 1880 they used the first
ammonia compressors and isolated cells. In the beginning of this century electricity became more important in our society,
because this was the power source for the many mechanical refrigerant installations that were used in breweries, abattoirs, the
fishing industry and the production of ice. After the second worid war the development of small hermetic cooling compressors
was going very fast. Refrigerators and freezers started to take their place in for us now indispensable function in the household.
As said, they are considered nowadays as standard equipment in the household.
The applications of cooling installation are multiple. Examples are:
conserving of provisions
cooling of drinking water
cool containers
heat pumps
freeze drying
air drying (dismoisterizing of air)
air handling
We can hardly imagine how our life would be without cooling and freezing. The influence on our existence is much greater than
people can realize. In this chapter first the basic principles of the cooling technique will be explained. After this the cooling
machine as application of air-conditioning installation is explained. There will also be looked at the components of the cooling
machine.
2 General principles
2.1 Heat and specific heat
Heat is an invisible form of energy that arise from the conversion of other forms of energy in energy of heat. For example; the
mechanical energy needed to rotate a wheel, causes friction that arise heat. Heat is often called a moving form of energy. This
is because heat is always moving from a warm object to a cold object. A tea-spoon placed in a glass of ice water loses its heat
to the water en becomes colder. However in a glass of hot water the tea-spoon absorbs the heat and becomes warmer. The
terms cold and wann are only usable in relation with each other. Only the effect of heat is perceptible and the measuring of it is
the way to define heat. The indication for heat is Q.
Part three
-5

P o Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunscfioten - Holland
Tel *3t (0)33 - 299 25 00
r
The heat is the product of m x ? T x ep, in which m is the mass in kg, ? T is the change in temperature in C and cp is the
specific heat. In the metric system the unit for heat is the calorie (cal), this means the quantity of heat needed to raise the
temperature of 1 g of water from 4- C to 5- C. In the cooling techniqic the kilocalorie (kcal) is generally used which is the same
as a 1000 calories. At the Sl-system the unit for all the forms of energy (heat included) is joule (J). Conversion from metric to SI:
1 cal = 4,187 J
1 kcal= 4,187 U
There are big differences in the quantity of heat needed to raise the temperature of different
^materials 1 C. For example; when we want to raise the temperature 1 C of 1 kg iron, there is
478 kJ of heat needed. 1 kg of air needs 1,00 kJ of heat. TTie specific heat (cp) is the amount of
heat needed to raise the temperature 1* C of 1 kg of a substance. The specific heat of a large
amount of substances is displayed in different charts as kJ/kgK (kcal/kg- C).
k g WATER
2.2 Change of state
I 4.1 a kJ
Every substance can appear in three conditions (states): solid, liquid and gaseous. Water is the
X.
most known example, in solid state as ice, in liquid state as water and in gaseous state as steam
figure 3-s
or vapour. For all the three states the water molecules does not change, the chemical formula is
always H 2 0 . The temperature and pressure the substance is exposed to, define the state of the substance. When ice changes
into water the temperature during melting does not change. All the supplied energy is needed to change the substance from
solid form into liquid form. Only when the substance is entirely melted, the supply of heat will raise the temperature again.
The 'ice boxes' of the past were periodically charged with a cake of ice. t h e ice melted and the
pan of water below the box had to be 'emptied' on schedule to avoid overflow. In melting from a
solid to a liquid, the ice absorbed its latent heat of fusion. This is 334 kJ/kg ice, and the heat to
accomplish this was removed from the foodstuffs within the box. The water was discarded,
although it was cold because it had very limited refrigeration capacity. This is true because 4.18 kJ
raises the temperature of 1 kg of water one degree. Therefore, if 1 kg of water at 0 C absorbs
41.8 kJ its temperature rises ten degrees to 10 C. This defeats the cooling effect of ice.
1. The change-of-state process is important to the mechanical refrigeration cycle for two reasons.
First, the change absorbs a relatively large amount of heat per kg of substance; and second, this
changeHDf-state takes place at constant temperature.
LATENT HEAT OF
FUSION
figure 3-4
2.3 The boiling process

Since the properties of water are easily observed and since its behavior is similar too commonly used refrigerants, water is
used here to demonstrate the boiling process and to establish terminology.
log
If 1 kg of water is heated, its temperature increases 1 C for each 4.18 kJ added. This process
p"
continues until the water reaches its boiling point. The boiling point is determined by the pressure ^
over the water. In an open container the pressure over the water is atmospheric. In a closed
g
container the vapour pressure determines the boiling pressure. At a standard sea level pressure of |
1.01 bar water boils at 100 C.
|
208.2
HEAIOd)
If the pressure is higher than 1.01 bar, the temperature at which
water boils also increases. For example, the boiling point for water in
figure 3-5
a pressure cooker operating at 0.34 bar above atmospheric pressure
is 108 C. At a pressure of 3.45 bar the temperature increases to 148 C. Conversely, if the
figure 3-6
pressure is less than 1.01 bar, as in vacuum, the temperature at which water boils is lower. For
instance, at a pressure con-esponding to 0.67 bar the boiling temperature of water is 89 C and at 0.33 bar, it is 72 C. If the
pressure is lowered still further, water can be made to boil at temperatures sufficiently low to be used for air-conditioning
purposes.
Part three
Chapter 3 : The cooUngsection - 6

Tel.: 31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
At any given pressure there is a corresponding boiling or saturation temperature:

Boiling temperature ( C)
Pressure (bar)
148
108
89
72
10
4.54
1.35
0.67
0.33
0.01
> W ^ ^ T B 1 H C
&
14 'C U
At the boiling point either the pressure or the temperature establishes other
properties of the liquid, such as heat content (enthalpy), density and volume. Water
at the boiling temperature for a given pressure is called saturated liquid.
figure 3-7
2.4 Heat of evaporation

After a fluid has been heated to the boiling point, further addition of heat results in
evaporation of the fluid. The heat required to change the liquid to a vapour at the boiling
point is called the heat of evaporation. At a standard barometric pressure of 1.01 bar
it tal<es 2260 kJ to complete the evaporation of 1 kg of water at 100 C to steam at 100
C.
At this point 1 kg of dry saturated vapour has been produced. The amount of fluid
that evaporates depends on the amount of heat added and the heat of evaporation
of the particular fluid. If 226 kJ is added to water at its saturation temperature of 100
C, 1/10 kg of water will evaporate.
vrURATI
' VAPOR
100-C'
LATENT HEAT
OF
VAPORIZATION
1 kg WATER
2260 kJ
If 22,600 kJ is added, 10 kg of water will evaporate. If only part of the fluid

evaporates, the result is a mixture of saturated liquid and saturated vapour.
figure 3-8
2.5 Superheat
SATURATED VAPOR
PRESSURE IS CONSTANT
SUPER HEATED VAPOR
The point of saturated vapour is reached if there is added enough heat to a fluid
If the fluid is completely evaporated and there is more heat added, we call this
additional heat "superheat." The change-of-state has been completed, so the
additional heat results in a rise in temperature of the vapour. In the superheat
region, the vapour expands slightly in volume as its temperature is raised.
Moreover, the specific heat of the vapour is different from that of the liquid. For
example: water, it takes only 2.0 kJ to raise 1 kg of vapour 1 C in temperature.If
1 kg of steam is superheated 30 C, then 30 * 2 = 60 kJ is required.
figure 3-9
2.6 Temperature-enthalpy
diagram
The characteristics of a substance can be illustrated in a temperatureenthalpy (t-H) diagram. On the horizontal axis the enthalpy is displayed and on
the vertical axis the temperature is displayed. Enthalpy is often indicated as
the heat content and is the sum of energy supplied to a medium. To further
simplify the demonstration, assume 1 kg of water at a standard atmospheric
pressure of 1,01 bar. Starting at point 'A', of figure 1.9, shows that 1 kg of
water at 0 C has a heat content or enthalpy of 0 kJ/kg (figure 3-10).
figure 3-10
Part three

P O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
., .;'
r
Line A-B represents the sensible heat needed to raise the water to its boiling point temperature or saturated liquid temperature at
100 C. As stated previously, for every degree rise4.18 kJ must be absorbed by the liquid. Therefore, the heat content at 100 C
is 100x4.18 = 418 kJ.
Line B-C represents the latent heat of evaporation needed to completely change 1 kg of saturated liquid at point 'B' to dry saturated
vapour at point " C The heat of evaporation for water at standard atmospheric pressure is 2260 kJ/kg. Therefore, the enthalpy of the
dry saturated vapour at point 'C is 418 + 2260 = 2678 kJ. As shown in the diagram the change-of-state from point 'B' to 'C
represents no change in temperature. Therefore, we call this latent.
Line C-D illustrates the effect of adding sensible heat to saturated vapour. This process is called superheating. For every degree
of superheat 2 kJ must be added. For example, if 30 degrees of superheat is required, the temperature at point 'D' is 100 + 30 = 130
C and to accomplish this 30 * 2.0 = 60 kJ must be added.
The enthalpy of the superheated vapour at point 'D' becomes 2678 + 60 = 2738 kJ.
2.7 Pressure-enthalpy diagram
Since the t-H diagram is restricted to a particular pressure, the pressureenthalpy (p-H) diagram is more commonly used because of its greaterflexibility.
The temperature can readily be related to the pressure as was indicated eariier
(see figure
3-11).
p-H DUGRAH FOR HZ O

cmcM.roMT
MIJ _.
Similar diagrams are available for the commonly used refrigerants. By drawing
a horizontal line at a given pressure, it is possible to determine the heat content
of the saturated liquid. This is done by reading the enthalpy scale corresponding
to point 'A' on the saturated liquid line.
The heat content at point 'B' for saturated vapour can be determined in a similar
manner. The difference in enthalpy between points 'A' and 'B' is the heat of
evaporation.
Baw>irnu*^
2.8 The condensing process
figure 3-11
The change-of-state from liquid to vapour is reversible; that is, the fluid can be changed from a vapour back to liquid. This
process is called 'condensing'. Just as heat must be added to affect evaporation, heat must be taken away to change a vapour
back into a liquid, and in the same amount. Just as pressure establishes the temperature at which a fluid boils, pressure also
fixes the temperature at which condensation takes place.
3 Refrigerants
3.1 Introduction
We already saw that if we want to make sure that the crew members feel comfortable during the working and resting period, we
have to regulate the temperature of the different spaces in the ship. Therefore the temperature of the air must be lowered or
raised to an optimum level. In case of raising the temperature we use a heater in the air-conditioning installation. When we want
to lower the temperature of the air, we use a cooler.
In every refrigeration installation there is a quantity of refrigerant. The refrigerant is a liquid or a gas with fixed properties.
Because the boilingpoint of refrigerants lays far below 0* C, the refrigerants only exist in gaseous state at surrounding pressure
(1 bar). When we raise the pressure with a compressor but we keep the same temperature, the gaseous refrigerant will at
some point change-of-state and becomes liquid.
The refrigeration effect of a cooling installation is based on the evaporation of liquid refrigerant at low temperature. The
refrigerant absorbs surrounding heat during evaporation. Because of this process, the surrounding temperature is lowered. In
case of an air-conditioning installation the air is cooled, transported and blown into different spaces in the ship.
Part three
Chapter 3 : The cooUngsection
-8

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
, General Users Manual - HVAC - /
The first practical use of piston-compressors was during the years 1870 -1880. At this time there was the disposal of the
refrigerant ammonia. For a good practical use of a substance as a refrigerant the following properties are needed:
A large evaporation and condensation heat
The larger the heattransfer for a determined refrigerant (from liquid to vapour and reversed), the less refrigerant has to flow
through a cooling machine. Therefore, the compressor can be chosen much smaller in capacity.
Lowr evaporating pressure (0-5 bar) and condensation pressure (1-15 bar).
The higher the pressure, the thiclêr the compressor- and evaporator material. Also a good quality of lubrication oil is needed
to make sure that cilinderwalls will be well lubricated at this continuing cooling process.
Although ammonia as a refrigerant satisfies this need and is much applied for industrial cooling machines, it is not much applied
for the air handling units because it is too dangerous. This is because ammonia is poisonous, very inflammable at temperatures
above 650- C and very explosive at a concentration of 1,5% ammonia in the air. Until 1940 CO^ (carbonic dioxide) was used as
a refrigerant but there was a high condensation pressure needed. Also S& or sulphur dioxide was used but this is also very
poisonous.
Water as a refrigerant possesses, just like ammonia, very good qualities: it is cheap and has a large evaporation heat.
Unfortunately the evaporating pressure needed for the cooling of the air is very low (vacuum) and is very difficult to reach with a
mechanical cooling compressor (tightening).
3.2 Refrigerants
In the beginning of this century, people discovered the dangers of the then known refrigerants used for air handling (poisonous,
explosion- and burning danger). The American company Dupont has done a lot of research between 1928 and 1935 and has
produced some new types of refrigerants that were named "Freon." The first refrigerant was R12 (Freon 12) and satisfied the
then needed requirements, including safety. In the fifties some practical refrigerants were developed for the different application
in the cooling technic. These refrigerants could apparently be used without any danger.
3.3 Environmental problems
During the years 1989 and 1990 intemational environmental experts attended humanity on a new environmental danger, the
depletion of the ozone layer which was caused by CFK's used in cooling installations. Because of this, a high ultraviolet
radiation-level can reach the earth which can cause skin-cancer. Also showed accurate measurements that different waste
gases such as COjform an isolation layer around the earth (green-house-effect). Because of this the solar radiation that
provides life on earth can be much harder radiated back into the universe. Therefore the atmosphere around the earth is heated
stronger then normal with the danger of extra meltingwater of the North- and Southpole and therefore the raise of the sealevel.
During the environmental conference in Copenhagen in 1995 there was decided that delivery, application and the use of CFKrefrigerants become forbidden to ensure a fast CFK-reduction.
3.4 Refrigerant alternatives
The manufacturers of refrigerants developed in the years 1988 and 1990 two replacing refrigerants. These are R123 and
R134a.
3.4.1 Refrigerant alternative R123
The refrigerant R123 is a replacement for the low pressure refrigerant R11. R123 has a less damaging effect on the ozone layer
then R11. It also has almost the same thermodynamic characteristics as R11 and can even be mixed without problems with
R11. Existing installations can be refilled in a short time with R123. The short term testing results have shown that R123 is a
safe but in some degree poisonous refrigerant. The long term testing results will become available within the following years.
Part three
Chapter 3 : The coolings action - 9

P 0 . Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunsctiolen - Molland
T e l : + 3 1 -(0)33 -299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC l : -
'
3.4.2 Refrigerant alternatives R134a and R404a

The refrigerants RI 34a and R404a are replacements for the high pressure refrigerants R12 and R500 and possible even R22.
Not so long ago there were still problems with R134a. This refrigerant cannot be combined with the till now used synthetic oil
and refrigerants.
3.5 Refrigerants - general

Meinen & Hopman normally uses R-22 or R-134* for their installations. Both are clear to water, practically odoriess, nonirritating, non-toxic (except in open flame), non-explosive and non-combustible. They are supplying chemically pure and dry in
sealed containers ranging from small cans to cylinders or drums over a 1000 kg.
There is no universal refrigerant for every application. Each has unique characteristics considered by the equipment
manufacturer. Additional factors to consider include the relationship with oil, controllability, stability, availability and cost.
Because of the different characteristics, refrigerants should never be mixed or substituted in a system. Check the refrigerant
specification on the compressor nameplate or refer to the manufacturer documents.
The refrigerants used by Meinen & Hopman are very suitable for use in refrigeration machines because:
The worthing pressures are not high so that the machinery does not have to be unduly heavy in constmction, and leakage
through glands etc., is minimized.
It has no chemical action on most metals.
It will condensate at relatively high temperatures, which makes it suitable for most conditions.
They are non-inflammable and non-explosive, but when any quantity of refrigerant gas is being blown into the atmosphere,
naked lights should be extinguished. This is because it has been found that refrigerant gas is liable to decompose in the
presence of a naked flame and the products of decomposition are unpleasant to inhale.
1 Since the used refrigerants are odoriess, small leaks may remain undetected until they adversely affect the functioning of the
' plant. The presence of oil at a joint or gland is a good earty indication of leakage. It is therefore advisable to keep the plant, and
all joints particulariy, extemally clean and free from oil. Other methods of leak detection are explained in the chapter "Guidelines
"for service and maintenance."
4 The Cooling cycle
4.1 Introduction
In this chapter the principle of the cooling machine will be explained. First the different fases of the wori<ing of the cooling
machine will be explained. After this the general cycle description will be explained.
The principle of the cooling machine is based on the following four functions:
Expansion
Evaporation
Compression
,
Condensation
These four functions are obtained by the following three main components of
the cooling machine:
Evaporator
Compressor
Condenser
gure 3-12
4.2 Main components

4.2.1 Evaporator
A refrigerant in liquid form will take on heat during evaporation. This change of state leads to the cooling in the cooling process. If
a refrigerant of surrounding temperature is expanded to sunôunding pressure through a tube, heat is withdrawn from the
surrounding area. In this case evaporation will take place that corresponds with the surrounding pressure.
Part the
-10

Tel.: ai - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC ,;-,;-.v
The part of the cooling process in which this process takes place is called the evaporator. The task of the evaporator is to
withdraw heat from the surrounding area, In other words the cooling.
4.2.2 Compressor
Because of the environment it is not allowed to expand the refrigerant into the free
atmosphere. Because of this, the cooling process must take place in a closed circuit.
If the refrigerant which leaves the evaporator is lead to a receiver, the pressure in the
receiver will be the same as the pressure in the evaporator. The result will be that the
circulation of refrigerant will stop and the temperature in the evaporator will become the
same as the surrounding temperature. To maintain a lower pressure and therefore a
lower temperature, it is necessary to remove vapour/gas. This is done by a
compressor that sucks in the refrigerant gas from the evaporator, (figure 3-13)
compressor can be compared with a pump that moves the refrigerant gas through the
cooling circuit. In a closed system there will be always a balance. For example: if the
compressor sucks in the refrigerant gas much faster then it can be formed in the
evaporator, the pressure and therefore the temperature will lower. Or reversed, if the
load of the evaporator is increased and the refrigerant will evaporate faster, the
pressure and temperature in the evaporator will increase.
figure 3-13
4.2.3 Condenser
The refrigerant transfers its heat to the condenser and this heat is transferred to a medium with a lower temperature. The heat
transferring (heat receiving) medium can be air or water. The only condition of this medium is that the temperature is lower than the
temperature in the condenser, which corresponds to the condensation pressure. The process in the condenser is comparable to
the process in the evaporator, only in opposite direction. In this case a change in phase is from vapour to liquid.
4.3 Genera! cycle description

A continues cooling process can be obtained by several ways. The most applied is the compression system. The compression
system is characterized by two pressures:
The low pressure or evaporating side
The high pressure or compression side
As said before the refrigerant transports the heat that is collected in the evaporator to the condenser where it is transferred to air
or water. A change of state for the refrigerant from liquid to vapour and back again to liquid makes it possible to take on or give off
large quantities of heat in an efficient way.
Next the principle of the coolingprocess is described (figure 3-14).
Uquid refrigerant entering the evaporator is controlled by an automatic throttling
device called the thermostatic expansion valve. This valve allows the high
pressure liquid refrigerant to expand; thus, reducing it from condenser to
evaporator pressure. The expansion valve is one of the division points between
the 'high pressure' and the 'low pressure' side of the system.
Because of the reduction of pressure (to atmospheric pressure) the refrigerant
figure
3-14
begins to boil and evaporates at a low temperature (with R22 this is -41* C). it immediately begins to absorb heat from the air that
is flowing across the evaporator surface. The refrigerant continues to absorb heat in the evaporating coil until it is completely
evaporated.
Due to the 'sucking' action of the compressor, the gas thus produced is drawn through the
suction line into the compressor cylinder. The down stroke of the piston admits a cylinder full
of gas through the suction valve. On the upstroke of the cylinder the gas is compressed,
thereby raising temperature and pressure of the gas (figure 3-15). The compressed gas is kept 1
from
the cylinder
cylinder on
on its
its next
next down
down stroke
stroke by
by the
the compressor
from re-entering
re-entenng the
compresso discharge valve. The
pressure thus produced causes the hot gas to flow to the condenser.
figure 3-15
Part three
-11
Helnen & Hopman Engineering bv

Tal.;+31 - ( 0 ) 3 3 - 2 9 9 25 00
rThe compressor discharge valve, like the thermostatic expansion valve, marks a division between the 'high pressure' and 'low
pressure' side. After the compressed gas has passed the discharge valve and enters the condenser, heat flows from the hot gas
into the condensing medium. This action cools the compressed gas and changes it back into a liquid.
This liquid under pressure is collected in the receiver and then forced through the liquid line to the thermostatic expansion valve, and
the cycle repeats itself.
5 Refrigerant circuit components
In this part the different circuit components of a cooling installation will be explained.
5.1 Evaporator and condenser heat exchanger

In a heat exchanger (evaporator (figure 3-16) or condenser (figure 3-17)) heat is transferred through a wall between media with
different temperatures. In the evaporator and condensing heat exchanger the heat transfer on one side of the wall is characterized
by the change of state. In the evaporator this is a change of state from liquid to vapour, in the condenser from vapour to liquid. As
said before in this process a large quantity of heat is transferred. The cooling media can be air or water.
figure 3-16
figure
3-17
The heat exchange of the condenser and evaporator depends on different factors which are:
the cooling surface
the temperature between the cooling medium and the refrigerant
the speed of the refrigerant flow along the pipes
condenser material
the cleanness of the heat exchanging surface
Dirt and lime tarnish on the waterside will influence the heat exchange in a bad way.
If we use an air cooled evaporator or condenser we can use the following types:
Finned pipe heat exchanger
Tube heat exchanger
Plate heat exchanger
5.1.1 Finned heat exchanger
These are heat exchangers where the evaporating or condensing refrigerant flows through U-formed copper tubes. On the outside
of the tubes aluminium finns are mounted which transfers the heat. The airflows along the finned tubes on the outside. Sometimes
the copper tubes are foreseen from spiral fomied inside grooves to improve the heattransfering process (almost 30%) without extra
refrigerant resistant.
5.1.2 Tube heat exchanger
These heat exchangers are used for cooling of liquids or condensing of the refrigerant by means of water. In case of a cooled water
evaporator the evaporating refrigerant flows through tubes (except for centrifugal cooling machines) and the cooling water through
a pressure vessel (shell). In a watercooled condenser the cooling water flows through tubes and the refrigerant condenses on the
outside of the tubes in the pressurevessel. The outside of the tubes is often covered with finns to increase the condensing surface.
The tubes are constructed from copper and are used in installations on land with non corrosive water. For use on ships and
corrosive water the tubes are constructed from cupro/nickel.
Part three

P.O. Box 9 - 375Q GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel.; +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC -
5.1.3 Plate heat exchanger

This type of heat exchanger is constructed from plates varying in shape from flat and crosswise waved stainless steel. In this way
the heat exchange through the plates from evaporating or condensation heat takes place between the liquid and the evaporating
or condensing refrigerant. The direction of the cooling liquid and refrigerant flow is generally opposite. This type of heat exchanger
is sensitive for obstruction and therefore there is often a waterfiiter used in the water supply tube.
5.2 Thermostatic expansion valve
The most important task of an expansion device is to ensure sufficient pressure difference between the high- pressure and lowpressure side of the system. The most simple way is to place a conduct-tube, with a small diameter, between the condenser and
evaporator. This is called a capillary tube. The expansion capillar is only used in small, simple cooling machines such as
refrigerators. This is because of the fact that this device cannot control the quantity of refrigerant which is injected in the evaporator.
For this process be a metering device must be used. The most common device is a thermostatic expansion valve.
A thermostatic expansion valve is a precision device designed to meter the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator. The flow of
refrigerant is in exact proportion to the rate of evaporation of the refrigerant in the evaporator. It is by that preventing the return of liquid
refrigerant to the compressor. Figure 3-18 shows a picture of a thermostatic expansion valve. By being responsive to the
temperature of the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator and the pressure in the evaporator, the thermostatic expansion valve can
control the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator at a predetermined superheat. The valve is built up around a thermostatic element
(1) separated from the valve body by a diaphragm. A capillary tube connects the element to a bulb (2) and a valve body with valve
seat (3) and a spring (4).ln a part of the bulb there is a small amount of fluid. In the rest of the bulb, capillary tube and the space
above the diaphragm there is saturated vapour with a pressure that correspond with the temperature of the bulb.
5.2.1 Working of a thermostatic expansion valve

The function of a thermostatic expansion valve is determined by three fundamental pressures:
P1: Bulb pressure that acts on the upper surface of the diaphragm, in the valve opening direction.^,.
P2: Evaporating pressure that acts on the underside of the diaphragm, in the valve closing, ^'
direction.
P3: Spring pressure that also acts on the underside of the diaphragm, in the valve closing'
direction, (figure 3-18)
The bulb of the thermostatic expansion valve placed immediately after the evaporator, opens on
rising superheat. Pressure on the diaphragm increases when bulb temperature inaeases The
pressure under the diaphragm increases when the evaporating temperature increases The
pressure differential, which correspond to the refrigerant superheat, manifests itself as a force that
tries to open the valve against the opposite force of the spring. If the differential in superheat,
exceeds the spring force the valve will open. When the expansion valve regulates, balance is
created between bulb pressure on one side of the diaphragm and evaporating pressure plus spnng
force on the other side.
As the refrigerant is injected into the evaporator and moves along, the liquid boils off into a vapour
Because of this, the amount of fluid decreases until all of the liquid has evaporated due to the
absorption of a quantity of heat from the surrounding atmosphere. By the time refrigerant gab
reaches the end of the evaporator the refrigerant gas is now superheated. The degree to which the
refrigerant gas is superiieated depends on the amount of refrigerant being fed to the evaporator and
the load to which the evaporator is exposed.
-^"^ ^-'*
The factory superheat setting of the thermostatic expansion valves is made with the valve pin just starting to move away from the
seat. Thermostatic expansion valves are so designed that an increase in superheat of the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator,
is necessary for the valve pin to open to its rated position.
5.2.2 Superheat
Superheat is measured at the point where the bulb is located on the suction line. This is the difference between the temperature at
the bulb and the evaporating pressure/ evaporating temperature at the same point. Superheat is measured in Kelvin (K) or C and
is used as a signal to regulate liquid injection through the expansion valve.
Part three
-13
P o Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland

Tel.: 31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
' .,
-'-'-
6 How to use refrigerant charts, tables & diagrams

6.1 Refrigerant tables
To design equipment for use with a particular refrigerant, the designer must have access to its thermodynamic properties. These
are published by the refrigerant manufacturer, for example for the refrigerant R22:
t
VI
hi
hv
VI
hi
hv
-90
-80
-70
-60
-55
-50
^5
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
0.05
0.11
0.21
0.38
0.50
0.64
0.83
1.05
1.32
1.64
2.01
2.45
0.65
0.66
0.67
0.68
0.69
0.70
0.70
0.71
0.72
0.73
0.73
0.74
3580.66
1763.19
940.94
537.15
414.83
324.56
256.99
205.75
166.40
135.84
111.86
92.84
105.49
115.06
124.81
134.76
139.83
144.96
150.15
155.41
160.74
166.14
171.61
177.14
364.40
369.31
37423
379.11
381.53
383.92
38628
388.61
390.90
393.14
395.33
397.47
-10
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
3.54
421
4.98
5.84
6.81
7.89
9.10
10.44
11.92
13.55
15.34
17.29
0.76
0.77
0.78
0.79
0.80
0.81
0.82
0.84
0.85
0.87
0.88
0.90
65.34
55.34
47.14
40.36
34.71
29.99
26.00
22.62
19.74
17.27
15.14
13.28
188.43
194.18
200.00
205.90
211.88
217.94
224.08
230.32
236.66
243.11
249.69
250.40
401.56
403.50
205.36
407.14
408.84
410.43
411.92
413.29
414.53
415.63
416.56
417.31
Table 3-19.: Table forR22

t
P
VI
Vv
hi
hv
= Temperature of the saturated refrigerant in ( C)

= Vapour pressure of the saturated refrigerant in (bar).
= Specific volume of the liquid in (dm'/kg).
= Specific volume of the saturated vapour in (*10' dm'/kg).
= Enthalpy of the liquid in (kJ/kg).
= Enthalpy of the saturated vapour in (kJ/kg).
Pressure
= Bar exerted at a given temperature. Determines equipment strength and, therefore, affects equipment cost, high
pressure usually results in high equipment cost.
Specific volume = Cubic meters of space required when one kg of refrigerant liquid evaporates. Influences the equipment size.
Enthalpy
= Heat content of refrigerant. This is a measure for liquid heat and vapour heat. The latent heat is a measure of
the refrigeration or cooling effect. The difference in enthalpy between the liquid and the'saturated vapour is the
latent heat of evaporation at the given temperature.
Table 3-19 shows that one kg of R-22 in liquid state, at 5 -C has an enthalpy of 205.9 kJ/kg. It also shows that at saturated
conditions, the pressure increases with the temperature. In the superheat region, however, pressure and temperature no longer
corresponds, and this introduces another variable in defining the condition of the refrigerant. Therefore, superheat tables are much
more extensive. For every refrigerant, superheat tables are available.
7 Guidelines for service and maintenance - the cooling machine
In the former chapters we looked at the different parts of the cooling section. Because a cooling machine is just like other mechanical
equipment not free of maintenance, it is important to know what to do when maintenance is needed. Because of that we look in this
chapter at several service and maintenance techniques.
7.1 Standard service techniques
A cooling machine contains a harmful refrigerant under pressure. LEAK DANGER! Keep room well ventilated. In the
presence of an open flame, freon is liable to decompose in toxic gases. Always put the main-and/or workswitch off during
activities at the machine. Only qualified personal is authorized to execute the following activities at the cooling machine
Part three
Chapter 3 : The coolingsection -14

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
'
7.1.1 Contaminants
7.1.1.1 Effect
The serviceman shall always keep the refrigerant system as dean and dry as possible. Otherwise, contaminants may enter or
develop and cause poor operation or failure. Some contaminants are: air, moisture, antifreeze agents, soldering flux, solvent, metal
chips and dirt. Some of their harmful effects are: sludging, corrosion, copperplating, freezing-up and restrictions.
The chemical breakdown of oil under high temperature in the presence of air or a non-condensable may cause sludging. Corrosion
is caused by air or an oxidizer in a high temperature. Also, soldering flux or acid may cause rust or corrosion. Copperplating can
be traced to contaminated oil that dissolves copper in the system. It then will transfer to a high temperature area such as bearings,
seals or valve plates. Here it is predpitated out by another contaminant such as water, alcohol or air. Freezing-up occurs when a
wet system is placed into operation or a leak develops in a refrigerant to water system operating below 0 C. A freeze-up can be
significant to the serviceman because it alerts him or her to the presence of a contaminant in the system.
7.1.1.2 Purging non-condensables

A leak in the suction side of a system operating in a vacuum or an improper installation will
allow air and other non-condensables to enter the system. Their presence is indicated by
excessive head pressure and/or reduced system capacity. The non-condensables tend to
accumulate in the high pressure side of the system. They also tend to accumulate at the
top of the condenser or receiver because they are lighter than refrigerant vapour. Many
systems have purge valves to allow non-condensable venting (figure 3-20).
figure 3-20
7.1.1.3 To de-air systems with purge valves.
Shut down the system by tuming the main- and/or work-swtch off and allow it to reach ambient temperature.
Compare the system pressure to the corresponding refrigerant pressure for ambient temperature.
A higher system pressure indicates the presence of non-condensables. Give non-condensables time to rise to the system
high point.
Slowly open the purge valve until gas can be heard venting from the port. Limit the opening because liquid refrigerant will boil
and remix non-condensables into refrigerant.
Ventilate for about ten seconds and close the valve.
A
Some V-shaped condensers have two purge valves. Open them altemately.
Restart the system if reduction in discharge pressure occurs. Run the system normally for several hours.
If the discharge pressure is still high repeat steps 1 to 4.
7.1.1.4
To ventilate systems without purge valves
Remove and salvage the refrigerant. Ventilate off any remaining.

Allow the refrigerant container to set undisturtjed for several hours.
Crack the container valve and ventilate off non-condensables.
Leak test and evacuate the system.
Charge the system.
7.1.2 Driers
After disconnecting the cooling machine some parts may be cold (pipes).
FREEZING DANGER!
7.1.2.1
Use
Regardless of the degree of caution, wori<manship and ability an installer or serviceman exerdses, a small amount of residual
moisture and solid particles is neariy always left in the field built-up system. Therefore, every field-piped system must contain
some type of refrigerant drier.
Part three

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Burschoten - Holland
Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Osers Manual - HVAC
'. .y - ,
(r
7.1.2.2
Construction
A drier is a container with inlet and outlet connections (figure 3-21). Inside is a chemical
compound called a desiccant.
The desiccant either physically holds (adsorbs) or chemically reacts with the residual
moisture and prevent it from circulating throughout the system. Most desiccants have
some degree of acid removal ability. They have some form of filtering screen or pad to
prevent the desiccant from entering into the system and also to remove solid particles
already in circulation. Some desiccants are cast or molded into the form of a cylinder to
improve their filtering ability. These are called filterdriers. Some desiccants are field
removable and replaceable.
7.1.2.3
yfgiuie 3-21
Selection
A good general rule is always to use the drier type and size recommended by the unit manufacturer. Where no recommendation
is available, the drier should be selected according to the following factors :
Water capacity
Refrigerant flow rate
Safety
Add removal ability
Rltration ability
Size
- How much will it pick up and hold?

- What flow rate of refrigerant can it sustain without excessive pressure drop?
- Will it be able to mechanically withstand the pressures encountered within the system?
- Will it pick up and hold acids?
How small a solid particle will it retain and how much before it plugs up?
- Will it fit in the unit?
The unit manufacturer can more closely control the entrance of moisture and contaminants than the average installer or
serviceman. When replacing a factory-installed drier, always use the next larger size.
7.1.2.4
Precautions
Never accept or install a drier or replacement desiccant that is not factory sealed.
Never abuse or mishandle the drier.
Once the seals have been removed from the drier or desiccant, install it immediately.
^m^
figure 3-22
7.1.3 Handling
To avoid the entrance of contaminants into a system via the refrigerant container only factory filled
and sealed containers should be used. Facts to remember:
Fusible metal plugs (figure 3-23) are designed to protect the cylinder in case of fire. They may
not protect the cylinder from gradual and uniform overheating.
The interstate commerce commission prescribes that a liquefied compressed gas container
shall not be liquid full below 55 C. Above 55 C, liquid refrigerant will completely fill a container
figure
3-23
and the hydrostatic pressure will build up rapidly with each degree of temperature
Fusible metal plugs tjegin to soften at 71 C and melt completely at 74 C. The hydrostatic pressure developed at 74 C is far
more than the cylinder test pressure.
Never apply a direct flame to a refrigerant cylinder.
To provide some margin of safety, never heat a cylinder above 52 C.
Never place an electric resistance heater in direct contact with a refrigerant cylinder.
Never transfer refrigerant from one cylinder to another without a refrigerant transfer pump.
Do not drop, dent or otherwise abuse refrigerant cylinders.
Always replace valve and hood cap when a cylinder is not in use or empty.
Use the proper valve wrench for opening or closing the valve. Loosen the valve packing nut before turning the valve on;
retighten after closing.
Secure all cylinders in an upright position with a chain or strap when they are not mounted in a suitable stand.
Never exceed the weight marked on the container (figure 3-24).
Part three
-16

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunsctiotsn - Holland ,
Tel.:+31 -(0)33-299 25 00
' General Users Manual - HVAC
, -^
7.1.4 Gauge manifold

7.1.4.1 Use
One of the most useful tools for the serviceman is a gauge manifold. It is an instrument and
should be treated as such. Figure 3-25 shows a typical gauge manifold. It contains two shut-off
valves and three extemal connections. When both valves are closed (front seated) the center or
utility port is isolated. The ports above and below each valve are interconnected so the gauges
will register always when connected to a system.
The left-hand gauge is a compound or suction pressure gauge. The right-hand gauge is the
high or discharge pressure gauge. Flexible charging lines or hoses connect the manifold to the
system. To determine system operation, add charge, purge, equalize or evacuate (figure 3-27).
Services gauges should have the best degree of accuracy that is commercially available.
figure 3-25
7.1.4.2 Care
Never drop or abuse the gauge manifold.

Have the gauges checked and adjusted regularly.
Keep the ports or charging lines capped when not in use.
Be sure the hoses meet the high-pressure requirements.
Never use with any fluid other than clean oil and refrigerant.
Prevent the hoses from being chafed, crushed or stretched.Never subject gauges to pressures higher than the scale face maximum or a high-pressure gauge to vacuum.
7.1.4.3 Connection
Most systems have a high- and low-pressure service tap point for checking
pressures and charging. They may be located on the compressor shut-off
valves, liquid valves or as independent points (ex. Schrader valve). Note that
Schrader service valve ports require an adapter fitting or a core remover
between the service valve and the hose. See figure 3-28. These ports should
always be leaktight and capped or plugged when not in use.
closa
open
CHARGING OR
ADDING OIL
PURGING
The procedure is the same for all type of service ports if the system is
pressurized :
close
open
Locate the usable high- and low-pressure sen/ice ports.

BY-PASSING
Backseat shut-off valves to isolate the ports from the system.
Slowly remove plug or cap. Vent residual pressure to the atmosphere.
gure i-n
Install an adapter in the plug hole for a maleflarefitting.
Be sure both manifold valves are closed (front seated).
a - Connect the low-pressure manifold hose to the low-pressure service port.
b - Connect the high-pressure manifold hose to the high-pressure service port.
c - If the utility hose is used for charging or evacuating, connect it to the refrigerant cylinder or vacuum line. Otherwise, leave
it plugged.
a - Crack open the low-pressure service port for five seconds then close. Repeat on the
high-pressure service port,
b - Watch both gauges for thirty seconds. If either gauge pressure falls, a leak exists. Find it
and seal it.
c - Loosen the utility port cap and crack open the low-pressure manifold valve. Purge air
entrained in the hose. Close the valve. Repeat on high-pressure side of the manifold.
The gauge manifold is ready for use. Crack open both the high- and low-pressure ports. The
system pressure will register on gauges.
fizure 3-28
i If the utility port is used, a third valve should be installed in the utility hose. All venting or
purging is done with the third valve.
7.1.5 Leak testing
Part three
-17

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
.'.
, General Users Manual - HVAC

(Y'
7.1.5.1 Methods
Leak testing by pressure or by vacuum are two common field methods. Either one performed properly
and in sequence will ensure a leaktight system. The pressure method consists of admitting a
refrigerant into the system, or part of the system, and checking for leakage to the outside. The vacuum
method consists of pumping a vacuum in the closed system and watching for a rise in pressure on an
indicator. Here a leak is indicated but is difficult to locate. Therefore, only the pressure method is
treated further.
figure 3-29
7.1.5.2 Detection
The following are three popular detectors listed in order of their sensitivity:
Electronic halogen detector
a guntype detector or probe connected to a control unit. An airpump draws a sample of air
through the detector tip and over a halogen sensitive element. When the probe passes near a
leak, escaping halogen gas actuates the halogen sensitive element and creates an electric
signal. The signal is amplified and alerts the serviceman either audibly or visibly.
Halide torch;
consists of a propane or LP gas tank, hose and a special burner that contains a copper
element (figure 3-29). A 'sniffer' hose is used as the probe. As gas is burned, a slight vacuum is
pulled on the probe. When the probe is passed near a halogen leak, the halogen is drawn into
the hose and injected into the burner below the copper element. A small amount of halogen
burning in the presence of copper has a brightgreen to bluegreen flame. A larger amount of
halogen will
bum with a violet colored flame.
Soap bubbles:
this is a common type of leak detection. Swab a suspected leak area with liquid soap or
detergent and watch for bubbles to appear (figure 3-30).
figure 3-30
7.1.5.3 Procedure
(Assume that no part of the system contains a refrigerant vapor under pressure and that the entire system is to be leak tested.)
All flare, flange, solder, braze, weld or thread fittings must be mechanically tight. Also, seals, packing glands and service valve
packing nuts.
a - Where two wrench flats are available (unions, quick-connects), use two property sized wrenches to avoid twisting or
distorting tubes or fittings. Do not overtighten,
b - All service, safety and charging valves must be closed to the atmosphere,
c - Wirebnjsh and wipe flux and oxides from all heated joints.
Open all interconnecting manual system valves, solenoid and expansion valves to ensure complete system volume.
Connect a cylinder of refrigerant (used in operating system) to a convenient point such as the liquid, suction, discharge or
charging port service valve,
Pressurize the entire system with refrigerant vapour.
Do not exceed the safe test pressure limits established by the unit manufacturer. Remember that some
systems are running under vacuum; so be sure that the seal or pressure relief device blow-off pressures will
not exceeded.
When the selected leak test pressure is attained.

a - Leak test the entire system, including factory-made joints, seals, and insulated lines with one of the halogen leak detection devices mentioned previously.
S Follow the detector manufacturer instructions. Usually a two-cm-per-second movement of any halide detector probe is
sufficient to pick up leaks.
S If liquid soap is used, allow at least one minute before looking for bubbles.
S Check pressure relief devices for leaks.
S On water-cooled or chilled water equipment check the tower slumps, drains or storage tank for traces of refrigerant,
b - Mari< or identify any located leaks and proceed on, unless the leak is severe.
S If a threaded gasket or flange joint leaks, try tightening it before proceeding.
When the leak testing is completed and all leaks are identified, the system must be vented. The venting must be done to the
outside to prevent contaminating the equipment area with refrigerant vapour.
Part three
Meinen & Hopman Engineering bv'
General Users Manual- HVAC

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Repair all detected leaks.

a - When open flame heating of a joint is required, do not breath the products of combustion if refrigerant vapour is present.
Ventilate the area.
S On a leaking flare fitting, disassemble the fitting and check for dents, distortion or cracks.
S On leaking pipe fittings, disassemble and inspect. Reassemble using a refrigerant grade sealant.
S Gaskets or 0-rings can sometimes be made to seal by loosening the flange or holding bolts slightly and giving the casting
or flange plate a sharp rap with a soft mallet.
S Do not 'overfill' a heated joint with solder or brazing alloy. Clean the leak area and attemp to draw the alloy into the leak
area. If necessary, completely unsweat the fitting and start over.
Retest all detected and repaired leaks by repeating the procedure.
7.1.6 Evacuation and dehydration
7.1.6.1 General
Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak testing. Proper evacuation and dehydration prove system tightness, expel noncondensables, and assure a dry system before charging.
Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system are a good vacuum pump and a good evacuation indicator.
Never use the system compressor to evacuate the system. A good evacuation indicator can be a mercury manometer, wetbulb indicator or thermocouple vacuum indicator. A compound gauge should not be used because of its internal friction and
inherent inaccuracy. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the pump suction line sizing, oil, indicator location and
calibration.
7.1.6.2 Deep vacuum method
When a low absolute pressure or high vacuum is established in a closed system, the remaining noncondensables become
negligible. As the pressure is reduced, the trailing point of water is also reduced. This is the principle of the deep vacuum
method of dehydration. As long as the ambient temperature surrounding the system is higher than the boiling point of the internal
moisture, it will boil of and can be expelled. To property employ this method, a good vacuum indicator must be used. In the
following procedure a wet-bulb vacuum indicator is used.
^
A good vacuum reading without a wet-bulb reading may indicate a tight system but not always a dry one.
If free water enters the compressor crankcase (mptured chiller or condenser), the oil must be drained from the crankcase,
because the oil will float on the water and will not allow the water to evaporate. Dehydrate without oil in the compressor. After the
system has dried, add the proper oil charge and dehydrate again.
Table 3-31: Water boiling point
Boiling point
Absolute
psia
100
93
82
46
26
21.1
15.5
14.7
11.5
7.4
1.4
0.49
0.36
0.25
Boiling
point
Absolute pressure
bara
psia
bara
1.013
0.792
0.510
0.097
0.034
0.025
0.017
12.7
10
7.2
4.4
1.6
0
0.21
0.17
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.014
0.012
0.010
0.008
0.007
0.005
pressure
Ventilate all system pressures.

Connect a center tapped 'jumper line' tjetween point A and B, the high and low
sides of the system (figure 3-32). Use at least a 1/2* OD line. Both points must
be closed when the system is evacuated.
Systems having Schrader type service points may require the use of a core
depressor or remover (figure 3-28).
- Connect the pump suction line, indicator and manifold suction hose to the
'jumper line' as shown. Valves C and D must be closed leaktight.
Connect a container of dry system refrigerant to the manifold utility hose. Do
not allow the indicator line till below the pump suction line as oil may enter it
Part three
Figure 3-32
-19

P O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunscfioten - Holland
Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
(c
and cause a false reading. Use only distilled water in the wet-bulb indicator.
Open valves A,B,C and E. Start the pump. Evacuation has started.
Occasionally open valve D to check system evacuation. Allow valve D to remain open at least three minutes.
Use table 3-31 to convert the wet-bulb reading to absolute pressure or vacuum based on water boiling point.
When the system is evacuated to 0.1 bara close valves C and E. Stop the pump.
Open valve D. Watch the indicator for a loss of system evacuation over a fifteen-minute period. A steady loss indicates a
system leak. Double check all field connections from A and B. If the leak cannot be stopped, stop the evacuation and
pressure leak test the system. Before admitting refrigerant vapour be sure valve D has closed.
If no leaks are present close valve D, open valves C and E and restart the pump.
Continue evacuating until the indicator shows a reading of 2 C that corresponds to an absolute pressure of 0.01 bar.
Close valves C and D. Open valve F allowing dry refrigerant to raise the system pressure to 0.7 bara.
'^'low the system to remain pressurized for about thirty minutes.
..ii system pressure by opening valve G.
Close valve G, open valves C and D and restart the pump.
Re-evacuate the system to 0.01 bara or lower, if possible.
Close valves C and D, open valve F, pressurize and isolate the system by dosing valves A and B.
The system is ready for charging. Any remaining moisture will be picked up by refrigerant drier.
7.1.7 Charging
7.1.7.1 General
Despite the system size, the operating charge of refrigerant determines how efficient
and economic the system will run. An overcharged system can lead to high
temperatures, pressures and operating costs with the possibility of component failure.
An undercharged system leads to insufficient cooling, high operating costs and, on
hermetic systems, the possibility of compressormotor tipoff or failure. Therefore, proper
refrigerant charging is one of the most important responsibilities in installing or servicing
any system.
VAPOR AND UQUID
7.1.7.2 Methods
CHARGING
Refrigerant may be added to a system in either a vapour or liquid state. This is

depending on the availability of charging points in the high and low pressure sides of the
system.
figure S-34
Vapour charging
Vapour charging (see figure 3-34) is done by transferring refrigerant vapour from the top of the liquid level
in the refrigerant container to either the high or the low (usually low) pressure side of the system. A
complete charge addition on systems containing 7 kg or less of the refrigerant is usually done by vapour
method. Although vapour charging is slow it allows a very close control. As vapour is expelled from the
refrigerant container, the system and container pressures tend to equalize and
the flow of vapour slows or even stops. When this occurs, the serviceman must either warm the container
by placing it in warm water (see precautions on handling refrigerants) or use the system compressor to
draw vapour from the container (figure 3-35). When using the system compressor, be aware first to check
the compressor oil level before starting.
Liquid charging
figure 3-35
Liquid charging is accomplished by adding or 'pouring' liquid directly from the refrigerant container into the
high-pressure side of the system. When liquid charging, remember:
Never add liquid into the low-pressure side of the system.
Never add liquid into the compressor discharge service valve port. Both can cause compressor damage.
When liquid charging, always install a filter in the refrigerant feed line to prevent any solid particles in the container from
entering the system.
7.1.7 Procedures
Pari three

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual" HVAC
The following are three common charging procedures with a brief description how each should be done.
Follow the unit installation instructions for the method and charge procedure selection.
Charging by weight
This method (see (figure 3-36) is used if a complete charge is to be added and the amount of charge is
known. On systems short of charge of 4.5 kg or less it is sometimes faster and more economical to
remove all of the remaining system charge and add a complete new charge.
Check the unit nameplate or the manufacturer documents for both charge weight and refrigerant type.
figure 3-36
Obtain the con-ect amount and type of refrigerant, charging manifold, hoses, and an accurate weight
scale in the con-ect range of refrigerant, container weight and charge reduction.
Connect the manifold and container to the system with hoses, purge the hoses.
Weigh the refrigerant container, be sure that the connecting hoses do not cause a false weight indication. Write down the
container weight, then subtract the system charge weight and mark the scale face for the correct charge reduction.
Add refrigerant to the system by vapour or liquid method until the correct charge has been added to the system. Stop adding
charge by closing the refrigerant container valve.
Charging by sight glass
The sight glass (see figure 3-37) should be located in the system liquid line. This must be as
near as possible to the refrigerant feed device inlet. When the system is property charged, only
a clear flow of liquid refrigerant passes through the sight glass. Some have refraction indicators
to help in determining the flow. Bubbles orflashingusually indicates a shortage in refrigerant.
Also a dear sightglass of liquid may be present but the system may not be charged at a higher
load condition. Always check and charge at the maximum load and the temperature conditions
expected.
Q
When looking into a sight glass, always be sure that the clear sight glass is liquid and not
vapour.
figure 3-3 7
Check the unit nameplate or manufacturer documents for the proper refrigerant type.
Obtain the correct type and estimated amount of refrigerant and a charging manifold with
hoses.
Connect the manifold and container to the system with hoses, purge the hoses.
If a complete charge is to be added, add some refrigerant to the system by vapour or liquid method.
Start the compressor and allow the system to run about ten minutes.
Add refrigerant by vapour or liquid method.
Allow the system to run on full load for ten minutes or until nofluctuationsappear on the manifold gauges.
Raise the compressor discharge or liquid pressure and hold it to a level equivalent to 43 C (this may vary depending on
manufacturer recommendations) by throttling the condenser intake water or air.
Observe the sight glass, add more refrigerant vapour if necessary.
Allow the system to return to the initial running condition, the system should now be charged property.
Charging by pressure-temperature relation
This method (see figure 3-38) of charging or checking charge is based on certain
assumptions listed at the end of the procedure.
Check the unit nameplate or manufacturer documents for the proper refrigerant
type.
Obtain the correct type and estimated amount of refrigerant, a charging manifold
with hoses and an accurate temperature measuring instrument (thermocouple or
thennometer). Connect the manifold and container to the system with hoses,
purge the hoses. Attach the temperature indicator probe to the exterior of the
system liquid line as close as possible to the refrigerant feed device inlet. Insulate
it to prevent stray air currents or radiation from causing inaccurate readings.
Add enough refrigerant to the system (vapour or liquid method) to enable the
-^^^ ^'^*
compressor to run without a safety trip. Allow the system to run until the manifold gauges do not fluctuate.
- a - Measure the liquid line temperature.
b - Measure the discharge pressure and convert it to temperature. This becomes the system liquid condensing temperature,
c - Compare temperature (a) with (b). If the liquid line temperature is above the condensing temperature, add charge
because hot gas is mixed with the liquid.
d - Continue adding vapour to the system until the liquid line temperature (a) is equal to the system condensing temperature
Part three
- 21

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschotan - Holland
Tel.: Sl - (0)33 - 299 25 00
- - -v;.:./.. XJ
(b). The system is now charged for the condensing pressure present. Full load and raise the system discharge pressure
to the maximum expected conditions. Repeat these steps. The system is now properly charged.
The following assumptions have been made:
The discharge pressure gauge is accurate within 0.15 bar.
The temperature indicator is accurate within 1/2 C and the probe contact is a true indication of the liquid line temperature.
No pressure drop will take place between the point of pressure reading and the point where the temperature readings are
taken. On normal systems a 0.07 bar drop for discharge lines, 0.2 to 0.35 bar drop for liquid lines and 0.15 to 0.3 bar drop for
condensers is allowed.
7.1.8 Removing refrigerants
7.1.8.1 Excess charge
If a system has been overcharged, it is necessary to remove the excess. The excess will be removed
by venting to the atmosphere (outdoors if possible) as a vapour. Proceed as follows:
PROTECT HANDS AND EYES !
Connect a gauge manifold to the system and start it.

Check the system charge using a procedure in 3-27.
If there is an overcharge, crack open the manifold high-pressure valve. Allow vapour to vent from
the utility hose.
^N
\
I
On water-cooled condensers or chillers (unless water is circulating or is completely drained) do not release
the refrigerant pressure rapidly. A freeze-up may result
Secure the utility hose to prevent whipping. If the high-pressure hose is connected to the liquid line or receiver, vent all vapour
from the low-pressure side of the system.
Vent vapour for ten seconds, reclose the valve. Allow the system pressures to settle out then re-check the charge.
I. Alternately vent and check until the system is properly charged.
Q
On systems having a liquid petcock excess charge can be removed by cracking open the petcock port.
7.1.8.2 Complete uncharge
On systems having a chiller and/or a water-cooled condenser, either drain

completely or circulate the water at all times to prevent a freeze-up.
Occasionally the serviceman must remove the system charge to make repairs or
modifications. Some methods of charge removal are:
S Use the system compressor (see figure 3-40)
S Use a scavenging pump system (see figure 3-42)
S By the charge migration
Pump-out method - Using system compressor
Q
Use containers marked for the system refrigerant.
figure 3-40
Isolate the compressor service ports and connect the gauge manifold. Connect the manifold utility hose to
the refrigerant container. Purge all hoses with system vapour.
Place the refrigerant container in ice water and allow it to chill.
Obtain weight scales and a sufficient number of empty, clean, dry refrigerant containers.
Start the system - Open the service valves allowing the system pressure to register on the manifold
gauges.
Fully open the refrigerant container valve.
Open the manifold high-pressure valve. Hot discharge gas or liquid should now enter the cold container
and condense.
Attempt to hold the compressor discharge pressure equivalent to a 90 % condensing pressure.
Continue bypassing discharge gas or liquid into the refrigerant container until it is filled to its weight
Part three
- 22
Figure 3-4 J

P 0 . Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunscfioten - Holland
Tel.. +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users
Manual-HVAC
capacity. Checlc with the scales (figure 3-41). Do not overfill. Change to another container if necessary.
Reduce the system charge until the suction pressure falls to 1.3 bar. Stop the compressor.
Close the refrigerant container valve and manifold high-pressure valve. Remove the utility hose from the container.
Allow the system to set idle. Ventilate any overpressure pressure above 1.3 bar by cracking open the manifold valve.
Before making repairs vent all system pressures.
Tag all the containers having system liquid refrigerant in them as used.
Evacuate the system before recharging.
Pump out - using scavenging pump system
Q
"*
A small air-cooled condenser with safety controls may be used.
Obtain weight scales, a scavenging pump system and a sufficient number of empty,
clean, dry refrigerant containers capable of holding the system charge.
Isolate the compressor service portsand connect the gauge manifold.
figure
3-42
' Connect the manifold utility hose to the suction side of the scavenging system.
Loosely connect another hose from the scavenging system liquid outlet valve to the
refrigerant container. Open the scavenge outlet.
Midseat both the compressor service valves.
Crack open the manifold low pressure-valve and allow the system pressure to flow into the scavenging system. Start the
scavenging pump.
Allow vapour to be taken from the system until all lines have been purged with air.
Tighten the hose at the refrigerant container. Open the refrigerant container valve.
Allow the scavenging system to run with a 90 % condensing pressure and a 40 % suction pressure by modulating the hand
valves on the manifold and scavenge outlet valve. Do not overfill or overheat the refrigerant container. Check the cylinder
weight with scales. Remove and replace it when necessary.
When the system pressure to the scavenging pump can no longer be held at a 40 % suction pressure, open the manifold
high-pressure valve.
Continue removing refrigerant from the system until all intemal pressure decreases to 1.3 bar. Turn off the scavenging pump.
Close the refrigerant container valve and manifold valves. Vent the scavenging system pressure by loosening both the suction
and discharge hoses. Remove the refrigerant container. Tag all containers containing refrigerant as used.
Before making any repairs or modifications to the system, vent all remaining pressure.
Re-evacuate the system before recharging.
Charge migration method.
Obtain weight scales and a sufficient number of empty, clean and dry refrigerant containers. Only use containers mari<ed for
the system refrigerant. Evacuate the containers if possible.
Connect a gauge manifold to the system. If the system has a liquid charging valve, connect the high-pressure manifold hose
to that valve. Connect the manifold utility hose to the refrigerant container. Purge all hoses. Close both manifold valves.
Chill the refrigerant container to the lowest possible temperature, isolate in ice if possible. Add as required during the transfer.
a - If the high-pressure manifold hose is connected to the liquid valve, open the high-pressure manifold valve and refrigerant
container,
b - If no liquid service valve is available, open the manifold suction valve.
If the container was evacuated some refrigerant transfem'ng to the container will flash and further chill the container. This
will fasten the refrigeration transfer.
Allow the system refrigerant to migrate to the chilled containers until the system pressure is equivalent to the container
temperature. For example; If the container is at 3.3 C and the system contains R-22. No further transfer will take place
when the system pressure reaches 5.5 bar.
Once the condition in previous step occurs, either reduce the container temperature or increase the system temperature. If
neither can be done, discontinue removing the charge.
Vent all remaining system pressure to the atmosphere before making repairs or modifications.
Tag all containers having refrigerant as used.
Re-evacuate the system before recharging.
7.1.9 Compressor oil
Start the compressorset only if all shields are mounted. After disconnecting the compressorset will run out for
some time and some parts will be hot BURNING DANGER!
Part three
- 23

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
. . :
(C
7.1.9.1 General
Lubricating oils prevent friction and minimize wear. Refrigeration grade oils also have special characteristics which enable them
to work effidently under various load and temperature conditions. Specifications and oil type are usually established by the
compressor or unit manufacturer based on extensive laboratory and performance tests.
The oil refiners meet or exceed the manufacturer's specifications and supply their oil in dean, dry, sealed containers ranging in
size from 1 liter cans to 200 liter dmms. All are deariy identified. The serviceman has to recognize two things when choosing a
refrigeration oil:
Specify only oil types recommended by the unit or compressor manufacturer.
Purchase only the quantity of oil necessary for cunênt needs to prevent leftover oil from becoming contaminated by air and
moisture.
7.1.9.2 Determining oil level
All Meinen & Hopman compressors are factory shipped with a normal charge of the correct type
of refrigeration grade oil and should rarely require additional oil. The serviceman must be sure that
the proper oil level is maintained in the compressor when it is installed and running.
7.1.9.3 Oil sight glass
Most open, semi-hermetic and large full hermetic compressors have an oil sight glass or bulls-eye
located in their crankcase or shell (figure 3-43). This enables the serviceman to observe the oil
level.
I
1 When two compressors are connected in parallel the oil sight glass is usually located in the oil
I equalizer line (figure 3-44). Normally the compressor oil level is one-half way up the sight glass.
However it may vary slightly. When mnning, the oil level may surge-up and down due to the
^ sloshing of the oil by moving parts. When idle, the oil level may be higher due to absorption of
refrigerant by oil. A crankcase heater (figure 3-45) helps to prevent this condition and should always
be used v(/hen available.
figure 3-44
When restarting an idle compressor the oil level may initially decrease below normal in the sight glass but should return to near
normal in less than one minute. Excessive foaming or a cloudy appearance may indicate a floodback condition and could be harmful
to the compressor. An oil level should always be observed in an oil sight glass, whether running or idle.
P\
7.1.9.4 To determine the oil level
Check to see that an oil level exists.
Start the system on full load to ensure against the possibility of oil being trapped in the system.
gure i-45
Allow the system to run full loaded for atraut twenty minutes.
Stop the compressor and allow it to set idle for about five minutes
Observe the level in the oil sight glass.
a - If the level is low, either a permanent trap or leak exists. Determine which, correct, and add oil to the compressor,
b - Too high level may cause high power consumption and/or possible compressor damage. Remove the excess charge to
obtain one-half sight glass level but first be sure the extra oil not absorbed refrigerant.
A
Beware of false oil levels caused by the capillary attraction of oil to glass.
7.1.9.5 Oil level plugs

Some compressors contain an oil level plug or valve which helps to detenmine the compressor oil level
(figure 3-46). It consists of a small hole at the exact normal oil level. A small threaded plug or valve
seals the drilled hole.
To detenmine the oil level;
Run the compressor on full load for about twenty minutes.
Stop the compressor and allow it to set idle for about five minutes.
Part three
figure 3-46
Heiner) & H o p m a n E n g i n e e r i n g bv
Tel.;+31 -{0)33-299 25 00
>=;
Isolate the compressor from the system by closing the shut-off valves.
Ventilate the internal compressor pressure by opening the suction shut-off valve service port.
Slowly remove the oil level plug (if a valve is used, open the valve).
Check the oil level by observation and/or a probe wire. A correct level should be at opening level.
Some small full hermetic compressors have no method of determining the oil level. Since these compressors are always
installed in factory designed, assembled and pipe systems there is rarely any problem with the oil level, except in the case of a
leak. If the amount of lost oil can be calculated, this amount should be added to the compressor. If the amount of lost oil cannot
be calculated, the serviceman must remove the compressor and drain all remaining oil from the suction line stub. Add a
measured normal oil charge by either the suction stub or by cutting the oil process tube and re-sealing it.
7.1.9.6 Adding oil to a compressor
There are many methods of adding oil to a compressor. Two of the most practical are:
Open system method
Run the compressor on full load, close the suction shut-off valve and reduce the crankcase pressure to 0.14
bar.
figure
3-47
Stop and isolate the compressor from the system by closing the discharge shut-off valve.
A
On non-operable compressors close suction and discharge shut-off valves. Reduce crankcase-pressure by
bleeding excess pressure through valve service ports.
Slowly remove the oil fill plug.

Add the required amount of oil. Be sure no dirt enters the oil fill hole (figure 3-47). Do not leave the compressor open any
longer than necessary.
Replace the oil fill plug.
Open the shut-off valves and restart the compressor, then run twenty minutes fully loaded and re-check the oil level.
In this procedure it is assumed that when venting or pumping the compressor crankcase to 0.14 bar, a small quantity of
refrigerant remains in the oil. As oil is added, refrigerant vapour is escaping to the atmosphere and no air enters the
compressor. If no refrigerant vapour is present in the oil, it will be necessary to either evacuate the compressor via the service
ports or sweep the air from the compressor. Crack open the discharge shut-off valve, pressurize the crankcase and vent the air
and some refrigerant vapour to the atmos-phere via the suction shut-off valve service port.
Closed system method
Build an oil charging arrangement like shown in figure 3-48. Put the amount of oil
necessary in the compressor into the oil charging reservoir via the oil fill plug.
Replace and seal plug.
Connect the oil feed line flare A to the compressor suction shutoff valve
SYSTEM
service port.
VALVE
REFRlGiAMT
Open the feed line valve.
figure 5-48
Loosely connect the pressure line flare B to the refrigerant cylinder.
Crack open the serviceport on the suction shut-off valve. Allow refrigerant
vapour under system pressure to bubble through the reservoir oil and vent to the atmosphere via flare B.
Tighten flair B and dose the feed line control valve.
Close the compressor suction shut-off valve, start the compressor and allow the crankcase pressure to reduce to 0.7 bar (10
psia).
Stop the compressor and isolate by closing the discharge shut-off valve.
Open the refrigerant cylinder valve.
Stow^y open the oil feed line valve and add the required amount of oil.
Allow suifficient time for the oil to drain into the crankcase. Don not overfeed additional oil.
Close the oil feed and refrigerant cylinder valves.
Open the compressor shut-off valves and restart the compressor, then allow it to run for twenty minutes,
recheck the oil level.
This method of oil addition can be used on any system where a pressure tap is available in the suction
side of the compressor and the refrigerant cylinder pressure can be maintained higher than the
compressor suction pressure. An alternative to this method is to partially evacuate the isolated
compressor and draw oil into the compressor crankcase from an open container, see figure 3-49.
Part three

Tel +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00

y
7.1.9.7 Removing oil

If oll must be removed from a compressor, use one of the following methods.
By drain or level plug
Run the compressor on full load, close the suction shut-off valve and reduce the crankcase pressure to 0.14 bar
Stop the compressor and isolate it by closing the discharge shut-off valve.
A
On non-coperable compressors close shut-off valves and reduce crankcase pressure by bleeding from the shut-off valve
service ports.
a- If a compressor has an oil drain plug, carefully open it until oil seeps around the plug threads.
Q
Do not remove the oil plug, than the full oil charge will be lost.
b- If an oil level plug is available, carefully loosen and remove it.

Drain oil to the described level. Discard used oil.
Re-tighten the plug, open the shut-off valves, start and re-check the oil level.
figure 3-50
By fill plug
Follow the first two steps above. Then carefully remove the oil fill plug.
Insert a syphon line into the compressor oil via the fill hole.
Seal the line in place by using a neoprene stopper or modified oil plug (figure 3-50).
Crack open the suction shut-off valve and pressurize the crankcase to 0.36 bar and redose.
Slowly open the syphon line valve and drain the required amount of oil from the compressor. Remove the used oil.
Purge the excess crankcase pressure via the service port and remove the syphon line. Re-install the fill plug, open the shutoff valves, start the compressor and recheck the oil level.
7.2 Before the first start-up
A cooling machine contains a harmful refrigerant under pressure. LEAK DANGER! Keep room well
ventilated. In the precense of an open flame, freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses. Before checking
the following points put the main- and/or workswitch off. Only qualified personal is authorized to execute
the following activities at the cooling machine.
7.2.1 General
Check:
Whether all parts and securities are mounted correctly (drawing).
Whether all valves are in the right position.
7.2.2 Compressorset
The motor can be used for either direction of rotation. The sense of rotation can be changed by interchanging any two feeders of
the electrical wire.
Check:
Whether the motor is connected correctly.

Whether the air inlet is free.
Set the thermostatic protection 5% atx)ve the current indicated on the nameplate.
Whether the motor is turning easy and in balance.
7.2.2.2 Compressor
Part three

P 0 . Box 9 - 37S0 GA Bunschotan - Holland
Tel.:+31-{0)33-299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC .' , :;
For information about the compressor is referred to the manufacturer documents.

7.2.2.3 Transmission of the compressorset
Check:
Whether the transmission is mounted correctly.
When the transmission is accomplished by a V-belt; pay attention to the following points :
a- Alignment ofthe V-belt (look at maintenance),
b- Tension of the V-belt (look at maintenance).
Check, in case of a direct driven compressorset, the alignment of the transmission (look at maintenance).
Whether the shields are mounted correctly.
7.2.2.4 Drier
Check:
Whether the drier core is placed.
Through the sight glass whether the filling is still active, green is active and yellow indicates saturation.
7.2.2.5 Thermostatic expansion valve
Check whether the bulb is connected just after the evaporator.
For further information is refenêd to the manufacturer documents.
7.2.2.6 Condenser
Water-cooled condenser
Start the cooling water pump.
Check whether the cooling water flow is sufficient.
For further information is referred to the manufacturer documents.
Air cooled condenser
Start the fan(s).
Check whether the air in- and outlet are free.
7.3 Starting and stopping
7.3.1 Starting
If the compressorset is provided with carterheating, the carterheating must be active 24 hours before the first
start up. Start the compressorset only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted.
Open the solenoid valve manually by means of the spindle, so that there can be sufficient pressure build-up.
Start the system by turning the main switch on.
Turn on: - Evaporator fan switch
- Compressor switch
- Coolwaterpump switch (watercooled condensor) or the condenser fan switch (aircooled condensor)
Measure (during the first start) the current consumption in every phase.
Set the themiostatic protection to 5% above the highest measured current.
Watch the pressure gauges closely, until the machine has reached its normal operation condition.
The evaporator temperature is about 10 C lower than the room temperature.
The temperature of the freon in the condensing unit is about 5 - 9 C above the cooling water temperature.
Part three

P 0 Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschotan - Holland
Tel *31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
'
"" '
7.3.2 Stopping
After disconnecting, the compressorset will run-out for some time and some parts will be hot (e.g.
compressor) and others will be cold (e.g. tubes). BURNING AND FREEZING DANGER!
Close the solenoid valve of the condenser.

All of the freon is pumped into the condenser (this is called the evacuating of the system).
The low pressure control will switch the compressor off when the setting is attained.
Close ail the valves of the installation.
Stop the evaporator fan(s).
Stop the cooling water pump or close the inlet valve, in case of a watercooied condenser.
Stop the condenser fan(s) in case of an aircooled condenser.
After the machine has been in operation for ten hours the pulleys must be re-tightent to ensure that they
are still fixed.
7.4 Maintenance
A cooling machine contains a harmful refrigerant overpressure. LEAK DANGER! Keep room
well vented. In the presence of an open flame freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses.
Always^ put the main- and/or workswitch off during activities at the installation. Start the
installation only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted. After disconnecting the compressorset
will run out for some time, and some parts will be hot (e.g. compressor) and others will be cold
(e.g. tubes). BURNING AND FREEZING DANGER! Only qualified personal is authorized to
execute the maintenance of the cooling machine.
\ 1 = Excluding the commissioning of the cooling machine
7.4.1 General
7.4.1.1 Daily
Check by sight glass whether the freon is clear and no bubbles are present (replenish).
Part three

Tel.: 31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
-. ,
. , ,-
;'
7.4.1.2 Monthly
Check all connections for leakage.
A
The presence of oil on the tubes indicates a leakage.
7.4.2 Compressorset
7.4.2.1 Weekly
Clean the compressorset.
Ensure that the motor is clean and the air inlet is free.
Check regularly whether the motor is noisy, when this occurs, the bearings may be worn and the electric motor or bearings
must be replaced.
Removal of the electric motor
Disconnect the motor from the supply.

Remove the shields over the transmission.
Disconnect the transmission between motor and compressor.
Dismount the motor and remove it.
Never place or move the motor by the shaft.
7.4.2.3 Compressor
When the compressor is opened, all parts must be cleaned before they will be replaced.
For furttier information is referred to the manufacturer documents.
Daily
Check the suction and discharge pressure.
Check the oilpressure.
Check the oil level (sight glass), a correct oil level is halfway the sight glass.
Yeariy
Replace the compressor oil yearly.
7.4.3 Transmission of the compressorset
7.4.3.1 V-belt driven type
Removing of the V-belt
Remove the front part of the shield over the transmission.

The electric motor is placed on a cradle, that is secured with nuts.
Loosen the nuts and move the cradle to loosen the V-belt.
Remove the V-t)elt.
mm
figure 3-51
Part the
- 29

P O. Box 9 - 3750 GA unschoten - Holland
Tel : +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Mounting of the V-belt

A
^-^
Never force the V-beits on the sheaves, as this may damage the belt core, so that the belt will break after a short time of
operation.
Shorten the distance between the centers, by moving the electric motor, until the belts can be fitted easily without the use of
tools.
Then increase the distance until the V-belt is tensed.
Align the V-belt with a mler or something like that (figure 3-51).
Give the V-belt the pre-discribed tension and secure the cradle.
Replace the front part of the shield. After atxjut 15 minutes of loaded operation the V-belt should be tightened (see tightening
of the V-belt).
During the continued operation the tension should be checked after about 50 working hours, and there upon "it should be
checked occasionally.
Tightening of the V-belt
Measure the center distance.
Deflect the V-belt in the middle.
Measure the deflection and check according the table.
^Q
PUSH DOWN
Profile
diameter of smallest pulley (mm)
Deflection (rnm)
SPZ-ALPHA
67-95
100-200
1.0-1.5
1.5-2.0
SPB-BETA
160-224
250 - 400
3.6-5.1
5.1-6.6
CENTRE DISTANCE (cm)

DEFLECTION (mm)
Always ascertain that the V-belt is aligned correctly and at the right tension. Replace a
V-belt that shows signs of wear immediately.
figure 3-52
V-belt pulley's
The V-belt pulley's are provided with a taper-lock bush and can be removed easily without the use of blow- or pull-tools.
Removing of the pulley's
loosen the screws and place one screw in the pressure hole of the pulley.
Turn the screw in until the pulley is released.
Remove the pulley from the shaft.
Mounting of the pulley's
Place the taper-lock bush and pulley together, so that the holes in the pulley and taper-lock bush are corresponding.
Turn the screws in the holes and fasten them slightly.
Align the pulley's.
Tighten the screws equally until they are fixed.
7.4.3.2 Direct driven type

Removal of the coupling.
The coupling can be disassembled by removing the screws.
Clean the compressor and motor shafts and the coupling flanges. Remove all burrs.
Tighten the compressor hold down bolts.
ATI&
fLEXBLEnjkTE
figure 3-53
Part the

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
;.
Mounting of the coupling

Fit the compressor flange to the compressor crankshaft. The flange has a tapered bore and
a keyway. Be sure the key fits in the keyway before placing the flange on the shaft.
After the flange is in place, install the bolt and washer provided with the compressor. Tighten
the bold securely
Q
Do not use the bolt and washer to force the flange in place.
Fit the motor flange to the motor shaft, be sure that the key fits in the keyway. All parts
should fit snugly but easily. Do not force them into place.
Start the motor and scribe a line adjacent to the motor bearing housing to locate the running
position of the armature.
-flsure s-54
If the motor cannot be started, measure the amount of end play in the motor shaft. Set the
motor shaft at half this measurement and mark the position.
The coupling is to be aligned with the motor shaft in this running position.
Re-assemble the coupling and make a preliminary adjustment of dimension "E" (distance betweenflanges),shown in figure
3-53.
A
For the correct dimension of "E" is referred to the manufacturers documents.
Tighten the motor flange screws.

Alignment of the coupling
Move and shim the motor until dimension "E" is correct when measured at four positions at 90
apart, and until the edges of theflangesare in line when tested with a straight edge (figure 3-53).
Tighten the motor hold-down bolts.
Check dimensions A, B, C and D. Seefigure3-54 and 3-55. If the dimensions are all equal the
coupling is correctly aligned.
A
A convenient way to compare the dimensions is to set an inside capilar at the smaller
dimension and measure the extra width at the larger dimension with the capilar and a feeler
9^"9-
PMUUELMMlMNMBflfigure 3-55
If A and B are larger than C and D (figure 3-54) the coupling is in angular misalignment.
Move and shim the motor until the dimensions are within tolerances.
If A and D are larger than B and C (fig. 3-55) the coupling is in parallel misalignment. Move and shim the motor until the
dimensions are in tolerances.
Run the compressor until it warms up and re-check the alignment.
7.4.4 Drier
7.4.4.1 Normally
Check regulariy whether the drier filling is not saturated. Green is active and yellow indicates saturation.
Before the drier is opened all freon must be pumped in the condenser.
Always replace the drier filling in case of reparations at the cooling machine.
When a new installation is taken into operation the drier filling must be regulariy checked to determine the replacement
interval.
7.4.4.2 Yearly
Replace the drier filling.
ft
It is possible that the drier filling has to be changed more than once a year
Part three
-31

P O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoton - Holland
Tel.-. +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual -.HVAC
. -"
er
7.4.5 Thermostatic expansion valve
A
The cooling machine must be in operation several hours before the thermostatic expansion valve can be adjusted.
The thermostatic expansion valve is usually set to 10 C superheating. The value can be set by the adjusting screw, by turning it
in the freon supply is enlarged (less superheating) and by tuming it out the supply is reduced (more superheating).
When the thermostatic expansion valve is not set con-ectly, the adjusting screw must be turned slightly. Thereupon let the
installation operate for at least 15 minutes before another adjustment is made.
In case of freeze-up of the suction line the adjusting screw must be turned out slightly.
7.4.6 Condenser
7.4.6.1 Weekly
Check the freon level weekly.
7.4.6.2 Yearly
Checking and possible cleaning of the condensor tubes must be performed yearly. This may only be performed by skilful
personnel.
t 8 Guidelines for troubleshooting
8.1 Troubleshooting
^nce a source of trouble in a refrigeration system is located, it may be an easy matter to correct it. The main difficult in
servicing work generally being the location of the trouble. It is important that a systematic method of analyzing will be followed. It
would be considerably better for the serviceman to take the first half-hour to observe the arrangement and operation of the
machine. This is better than to make a hasty decision as to the cause of the trouble and make any adjustment in the hope that it
will solve the trouble. Such a procedure often adds trouble because the adjustment was not necessary or proper. When the
serviceman is following a systematic method of fault locating, he should first listen to the complaint of the owner or operator of
the equipment. This will give him his first impression as to the cause of the trouble. He should then carefully check the complaint
to look that it is justified.
In some instances, the cause of the trouble will be immediately apparent, but in the large majority of cases, some measuring of
pressures, temperatures and running time will have to be made. In this case, it will be necessary to determine the type of
machine since the method of locating the trouble will depend upon the type of refrigerating machine and the method of control.
The following table is put in as a guide for locating and correcting those troubles found more frequently within refrigeration
plants.

Cause
Remedy
Thermostatic expansion valve adjusted so that refrigerant is

admitted to the expansion coil faster then it can be
evaporated.
Adjust the thermostatic expansion valve.
The control adjustment is set for too low temperature and

does not correspond with the adjustment of the thermostatic
expansion valve.
Adjust the control for a higher temperature of the cooling

unit.
Part three

Tel.; *31 -(0)33-299 25 00
In weather conditions where the relative humidity is very high

there may be some condensation on the suction line tubing.
8.1.2 Warm liquid line
This is not serious but may be avoided by insulating the

suction line by a vapour barrier material.
Cause
Remedy
The system contains less than the required amount of

refrigerant and warm vapour is passing through the liquid
line.
Recharge with refrigerant.
The thermostatic expansion valve is opened too far.
Adjust the thermostatic expansion valve for coaect backpressure.
8.1.3 Frosted liquid line

Cause
Remedy
The liquid receiver shut-up valve is partly closed or

obstructed with foreign matter, causing it to act as an
expansion valve.
Make sure the liquid line valve is wide open and if the liquid
receiver valve is partially obstructed it will be necessary to
either remove it and repair it or replace it by a new one.
8.1.4 Back pressure lower than normal

Cause
Remedy
Thermostatic expansion valve adjusted so that too little liquid

passes through the expansion coil.
Re-adjust the thermostatic expansion valve for the correct

suction pressure setting.
Little or no refrigerant in the system.
Locate the leak, repair it and recharge the system.
Thermostatic expansion valve blocked with ice from moisture

in the system or accumulation of dirt.
Change or clear the thermostatic expansion valve and if

moisture is the source of the trouble install a system drier.
8.1.5 No frost of the thermostatic expansion valve or cooling unit

Cause
Remedy
Liquid line valve closed.
Open the valve.
Liquid line completely blocked.
Clear the line or replace the tubing.
Strainer completely stopped up with dirt.
Clear the strainer.
The suction line closed.
Open the suction line.
No refrigerant in the system.
Locate the leak and recharge the system with refrigerant.
Inefficient compressor.
Check compressor for efficiency. Make the necessary

repairs.
Motor operates but the compressor is idle.
Tighten or replace the V-belt.
The operation cyde is short.
Adjust the control.
8.1.6 System operates too much or all time
Part three
- 33
Meinen & H o p m a n Engineering b v

Tai.: *3A - (0)33 - 299 25 00
(C
Cause
Remedy
Control will not out out.
Adjust, repair or replace the control.
Little or no refrigerant in the system.
Locate the leak and recharge as necessary.
Incorrect adjustment of the thermostatic expansion valve.
Adjust as necessary.
Check the compressor and make the necessary repairs.
Compressor operating at too low a speed.
See that the motor specifications correspond with the supply

voltage. See that the V-belt is not slipping and has the
correct tension.
Presence of air in the system.

Restricted circulation over the coolingcoils.
Purge air from the system as outlined under 'Purging the

system'.
See that there is unrestricted air flow around the coils.
8.1.7 Storage compartment too cold

Cause
Remedy
Control set too low.
Adjust to the desired temperature.
Control will not cut out.
Repair and replace control.
8.1.8 Low operating head pressure on condensing unit

Cause
Remedy
Insufficient refrigerant.
Locate and repair the leak and recharge with correct amount
of refrigerant.
Test the compressor for efficiency and make the necessary

repairs.
Thermostatic expansion valve clogged with ice or dirt
Replace or clear the thermostatic expansion valve and

replace the system drier if moisture is the cause of the
trouble.
8.1.9 Head pressure too high

Cause
Remedy
Presence of air in the system
Remove the air from the system as outlined under 'Purging

the system'.
Too much refrigerant in the system.
Blow of the refrigerant as necessary.
Dirty condensortubes or insufficient water supply to a

watercooled condensing unit
Action as necessary.
Too much oil in the system which would tend to retard the
removal of heat in the condenser.
Remove the oil charge from the compressor during the

normal cycle and recharge the compressor with the correct
oil charge.
8.1.10 Frost on the thermostatic expansion valve only
Part three
i'T"

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Cause
Remedy
Thermostatic expansion valve clogged with ice or dirt.
Replace or dear the thermostatic expansion valve and

dehydrate the system if moisture is the cause of the trouble.
8.1.11 Storage compartment warm

Cause
Remedy
Control set too high.
Adjust control for con-ect temperature.
Control will not cut out.
Re-adjust or replace with a new or repaired control.
Insufficient refrigerant in the system.
Locate the leak and recharge the system.
Too much frost on the cooling coil or evaporator.
Defrost as necessary.
Insufficient compressor.
Check the compressor and repair as necessary.
Fuses bumed out and the motor idle.
Replace fuses and check current supply line from the

switches.
8.1.12 Troubles with electric installation

Motor troubles usually develop during hot weather when the maximum load is put on the unit. Especially dangerous in hot
weather, are:
a. High head pressure due to air being present in the system.
b. Dirty condenser restricting the flow of heat.
c. Overcharged plants.
d. Cold room doors left open.
The following causes are some of the more usual complaints (applying to electric motors in general), of which the service
engineer will be confronted with.
Cause
Remedy
Fuses blown.
Fit the recommended size of fuses.
Low voltage.
See that the supply voltage is within 10 % of the nameplate

volt.
Incorrect wiring up.
Check with the wiring diagram supplied with the plant.
Break in the motor circuit.
Check the circuit for continuity including also the starter

circuit.
Excessive load.
Larger size of motor required.
Worn brushes making poor contact (where applicable).
Replace and dean as necessary.
8.2 Complaints with a enumeration of possible causes

8.2.1 Compressor does not run
Check for following causes:
Electric line to motor open
Head pressure too high
Fuse blown
Loose flywheel
Part three
- 35

Tel.:+31 -(0)33 -299 25 00
Tripped overload
V-belt(s) slipping
Cord not plugged in
V-belt(s) broken
Control off-cold location
Piston stuck
Control stuck open
Stuck compressor or motor
'-''
8.2.2 Compressor shortcycies

Compressor capacity too great for evaporator
Shortage of refrigerant
Control differential set too close
Leaky thermostatic expansion valve
Discharge valve leak
Overcharge of refrigerant
Motor overload relay cutting out
Cycling on high pressure switch
8.2.2 Condensing pressure too high

Refrigerant overcharge
Supply water too warm
Air in the system
Water shut off or restricted water-cooled condenser
Dirty condenser
Restricted water or drain lines
Too hot unit location
Poor air circulation around unit
8.2.4 Refrigerated product not cold enough

Evaporator too small
Control set too high
Compressor too small
Expansion valve, strainer or drier plugged
Not enough circulation of cooled air
Leaking discharge or suction valve
Restricted or too small refrigerant lines
Expansion valve not opening viflde enough
Service load too great
Iced or dirty coil
8.2.5 Condensing unit runs too much

Leaking discharge or suction valve
Unit too small or service load loo great
Iced or plugged coil
Control contacts stuck or closed
Defective insulation
Part three
- 36

P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland Tel.; +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Dirty condenser
Air in system
Location too warm
Inadequate air circulation around unit assembly
8.2.6 Hot liquid line

Condensing temperature too high

Thermostatic expansion valve adjusted to pass to much
refrigerant
Therm, expansion valve bulb too wann or in wrong location
Capillary tube units-overcharge
Refrigerant or condenser pressure too high
8.2.8 Liquid line very cold

Receiver shutnaff valve partially closed or restricted
Evaporator too high above condenser
Restricted drier or strainer
8.2.9 Condensing unit noisy

Insufficient compressor oil
Mounting loose
V-belts defective or loose
Motor brushes riding on commutator
Tubing rattle
Oil sludging or refrigerant flooding back
Compressor flywheel or motorpully loose
Condensing pressure too high
Worn motor or compressor bearings
8.2.10 Condensing pressure too low

Cold room
Compressor suction or discharge valves leaking
Cold water, and water valve stuck open
8.2.11 Not cool enough

General
Part three

P o Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel.. >-31 - ( 0 ) 3 3 - 2 9 9 25 00
V:A :
er
Check for f o l l o w i n g causes:
Insufficient airmovenment in conditioned spaces
User expecting results not designed fop
High wet bulb outside
Unequal distribution
Too much make-up air
Insufficient capacity of equipment
Excessive smoke or odors
Dampers incorrectly set or position moved
Unusual loads, e.g. extra lights, appliance or population
Ducts too small or badly laid out
Insufficient capacity of evaporator

Originally chosen too small
Excessive static pressure of ducts
Not enough air over coil-belts slipping
Coil not fully active; insufficient refrigerant
Blower motor underspeed (low voltage)
Thermostatic expansion valve misadjusted, dirty defective
Coil dirty
Coil oil-logged
Filters dirty
^ Insufficient capacity of condensing unit

Originally chosen too small
Underspeed, belts, slipping, motor pulley too small
Under-size suction lines
Suction valves leaking (dirty, broken or corroded)
Not enough water through condenser
Discharge valves leaking (dirty, broken or corroded)
Stoppage in condenser, water or drain lines, water control

valve, strainers or water pressure regulating valves
Discharge or suction valve springs broken, rings worn or

broken
High head in drain lines
Pistons worn
Misadjusted or defective water control valve
Cylinder walls wom or scored : gasket leak between cylinder
Low or fluctuating water pressure heads
Not enough lift of discharge or suction valves
Stoppage in suction or discharge shutoff valves or strainers
Compressor not delivering full capacity
Stoppage in gas passages in condenser
8.1.12 Noisy operation

Vibrating sounds
Motor, pulley, belts out of line
Piping connections too rigid
Belts loose
Loose or insecure parts rattling
Inadequate foundation-insecure mounting
Sheet metal panels inadequately braced
Part three

P.O. Box 9 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland
Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
General Users Manual - HVAC ,
High side or low side units not level
Pulleys out of balance
Weight of units unequally supported at comers
Ducts connected rigidly to low side
Knocking or pounding sounds

Excessive end-play of motor or fan shaft
Seal squeaking-not being lubricated
Pulley loose on shaft, motor or compressor
Oil grooves in bearings stopped
Motor or compressor not bolded tightly to base
Oil pumping-liquid refrigerant returned to compressor
Water hammer-dirt in water control valve
Broken suction or discharge valves
Too much refrigerant in system
Solder or other foreign matter in cylinders
Too much make or too little oil in compressor
Excessive lift of suction or discharge valves
Air noise
Excessive air velocities
1
Bad design of supply grilles
Supply grilles too small

9 Summery Chapter 3
The dictionary defines refrigeration as a process of making something cold, and "cold" can be defined as an absence of heat.
A cooling machine has the task to cool parts or substances to a temperature that is lower than the surrounding area and keep it
at this temperature.
The applications of cooling installations are multiple. Examples are:
conserving of provisions
cooling of drinkingwater
cool containers
heat pumps
freeze drying
air drying (dismoisterizing of air)
air tiandling
Heat is an invisible form of energy that arise from the conversion of other forms of energy in energy of heat. Only the effect of
heat is perceptible and the measuring of it is the way to define heat. The indication for heat is Q. The specific heat (cp) is the
amount of heat needed to raise the temperature 1- C of 1 kg of a substance.
Every substance can appear in three conditions (states): solid, liquid and gaseous. Water is the most known example, in solid
state as ice, in liquid state as water and in gaseous state as steam or vapour. When ice changes into water the temperature
during melting does not change. All the supplied energy is needed to change the substance from solid form into liquid form. Only
if the substance is entirely melted, the supply of heat will raise the temperature again. The change-of-state process is important
to the mechanical refrigeration cycle for two reasons. First, the change absorbs a relatively large amount of heat per kg of
substance; and second, this change-of-state takes place at constant temperature.
The point of saturated vapour is reached if there is added enough heat to a fluid, tf the fluid is completely evaporated and there is
more heat added, we call this additional heat 'superheat'.
In every refrigeration installation there is a quantity of refrigerant. The refrigerant is a liquid or a gas with fixed properties.
Because the boilingpoint of refrigerants lays far below 0* C, the refrigerants only exist in gaseous state at surrounding pressure
(1 bar). When we raise the pressure with a compressor the gaseous refrigerant will at some point change of state and
becomes liquid. The refrigeration effect of a cooling installafion is based on the evaporation of liquid refrigerant at low
temperature.
Part three
- 39

Tel.; +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
^ ,- \-'-[. -.:,',
The principle of the cooling machine is based on the following four functions:
Expansion
Evaporation
Compression
Condensation
These four functions are obtained by the following three main-components of the cooling machine:
Evaporator
Compressor
Condenser
Refrigerant circuit components of a cooling machine are:
Evaporator and condenser heat exchanger
- Rnned heat exchanger
- Tube heat exchanger
- Plate heat exchanger
Thermostatic expansion valve
Part three
Chapter 3 : The cooUngsection
- 40
40
2x hole 22mm for coble glands

e-motor ond onti-condensotion heoting
Service side
40
1750
1750
Connections cooling section changed
Rev.
12x hole 12mm
AvM . 24-05-'0;
Description
^ ^
Designer
Designer
Scale:
1:20 Subject
Units:
mm Subject No. :JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No.
Controller
: Jinling SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Controller
Sheet
: 12005055-201
AIR HANDLING UNIT AC-1 SERVING ACCOMMODATIOja
A3
AvM
Bottom view foundation
11-04-'05
TYPE "BDA 1212"
MEINEN S H O P M A N ENGINEERING BV
P Q B o x g 0 7 5 0 G A S p e i k e - J u - g - T - i q NecSe-lB-ea P^c-c
*D 1 fCJOD 5 3 8 5 5 QC-
'31 fojoo-ggggspg A^^ê
1 of
Rev.
MEINEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

AIR CONDITIONING
MECHANISCHE VENTILATIE
CENTRALE VERWARMING
Zuidwenk 45 - 3751 CB Spakenburg
GAS, WATER EN SANITAIRE SYSTEMEN

' BRANDBEVEILIGING
MILIEUTECHNISCHE SYSTEMEN
- Postbus 9 - 3750 GA Spakenburg - Nederland
SUBJECT: Jinling SY
SUBJECT NR.: JLZ040409 - 040412
REFERENCE NR.: 120.05.055 - 058
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
Dimensions W x H x L )
DIMENSIONS UNIT
3700x1260x1260
mm.
DAMPERPART
Number of dampers
Dim.dampers W X H
Resistance
1
800 x510
10
pc.
mm
Pa
Number of dampers
Dim.dampers W x H
Resistance
1
800 x210
10
pc.
mm
Pa
400
mm
Mixing section
FILTERPART
Filtertype
Begin resistance
Design resistance
End resistance
HEATERPART
Airquantity
Inlet temp.
Outlet temp
Air resistance
Air speed
Capacity
Water temp, in
Water temp, out
Water flow
Max. pressure drop
Material
DEFROST THERMOSTAT
Frost security thermostat
COOLERPART
Airquantity
Inlet temp
Outlet temp
FSH 500 P
50
100
150
Pa
Pa
Pa
9000
-20
39,5
55,6
2,5
180
90
70
2,2
12
Cu/PA
m3/hr
oC
oC
Pa
m/s
kW
oC
oC
l/s
kPa
Trafag F l 5
6mtrc
9000
35
14,5
m3/hr
oC
oC
1 of 2
HEINEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

AIR CONDITIONING
MECHANISCHE VENTILATIE
CENTRALE VERWARMING
Zuidwenk 45 - 3751 CB Spakenburg
GAS, WATER EN SANITAIRE SYSTEMEN

BRANDBEVEILIGING
MILIEUTECHNISCHE SYSTEMEN
- Postbus 9 - 3750 GA Spakenburg - Nederland
Relative humid, in
Relative humid, out
Air resistance
Air speed
Capacity
Refrigerant
Evaporating temperature
Max. pressure drop
Material
70
100
240,1
2,8
2x95
R404A
5,0
24
Cu/PA
HUMIDIFYING SECTION
Spray-pipe
Duct hygrostat
Solenoid valve
Sightglass
Built on
HMH1
EVSI6
Built on
SUPPLY FAN SECTION

Fan type
Air capacity
Total pressure
Static pressure
Dynamic pressure
External pressure
Rpm.fan
Power consumption
Motor power
Rpm. motor
Elektr.tension
Current
GXHB-5-040
9000
2130
2070
60
1700
2888
6,91
8,6
1745
3 Ph 440 V 60
15,4
%RV
%RV
Pa
m/s
kW
oC
kPa
mS/h
Pa
Pa
Pa
Pa
rpm
kW
kW
rpm.
Hz
Amp.
Lloyds R.O.S.
With heating element
2 of 2
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
All drain connections of the airtiandling-unit are 1" BSP.
First connect all drains wifti eacti otfier. Tfiis tias to be done \Yith an 1" pipe
according to tfie drawings. At ttie end of ttiese drain-pipes stiould a watertrap be installed according to ftie related drawing.
All parts of drainpiping must be insulated witfi armaflex or equal.
Ttiis to avoid condensation problems at the outside.
DECK
\// /f /y J/ // // // // // jj // // // // jj // b J/ // // /J jj >^.^.x/yy // J/ //
//
SEE DETAIL WATER TRAP
Pt-Pd
(mm)
10
Pt = Tot all pressure of fan (Pa)
Pd = Dynamic pressure of fan (Pa)
DETAIL WATER-TRAP
^ ^
OPEN CONNECTION
Width of water-trap
is 50mm.
FRONTVIEW
Scale: N.t.s. Subject
E3
Units:
Designer
AvM
11-04-'05
: Jinling SY
Reference No. : 120.05.055 - 058
Controller
: 12005055-202
PRINCIPLE DRAIN CONNECTION
Sheet
A4
1 of
Rev.
AND DETAIL WATER TRAP
MEINEN G^HOPMAN E N G I N E E R I N G B V
II-ATION
REPRIGERATICUN
P.O. Box 9 - 0 7 S 0 GA Spake.-ioui-'g - The Neche.-lands - Phone: +31 [ 0 ) 3 3 - 3 9 9 2 5 0 0 - rax: *31 [P)03 - 5 9 9 gB 9S - www.heine.-ihoprlan.cor
PHYSICAL DATA
FRONT ELEVATION
SIDE ELEVATION
1250
650
Power supply
3x,330V-50H2
3x A/tOV-eOHz
Cooling capacity
2;.,8 kW
28 kW
Refrigerant
R-tOifA
Compressor
Oil charge (ester)
Hermetically sealed recip.

3,8<. Itr
7,08 kW
4,14 m3/hr
3,i,5 m3/hr
2,80 m3/hr
3,30 m3/hr
Motor rating
OPTIONAL PLENUM
' & GRILLE AIR
Sea water flow

Fresh water flow
J OUTLET
Airflow
Motor rating
Electric heating
3i,00 m3/hr
1,1 kW
4075 m3/hr
optional
Refrigerant charge 5,5 kW
Unit weight
580 kg
RETURN AIR INLET

C3
WATER IN
B - WATER OUT
C - CONDENSATE DRAIN
ELECTRIC MAINS
FRESH AIR SPIGOT
ON/OFF SWITCH
THERMOSTAT
1
1
FW
SW
1 1/2 BSPF 1 1/2 BSPF
1 1/2 BSPF 1 1/2 BSPF
2Bmm Cu
20mm GLAND
0160mm OPTIONAL
WATER CONNECTIONS LEFT HAND SIDE STANDARD

RIGHT HAND SIDE OPTIONAL
30C
100
i
_i
ACCESS FOR INSTALLATION/SERVICE
Scale: 1:20 Subject

&
Designer
mha
10-6-05
Changed into 8TRE
Rev. Description
LvdG 21-06-05
Designer
: Jingling SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Units:
mm Subject No. :JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No.

Controller
: 12005055-203
Package AHU Serving; ECR
Sheet
A4
of
Rev.
AC-2 type: 8TRE-404A
MEINEN SI HOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

ILATION
REFRIGERATION J
P.O. Box 9 - 0 7 5 0 GA Spske.-iou.-g -The Nschei-^tBnds - Pho.ne: +01 IP)00 - 2 9 9 2 5 CX) - Tax: +01 (0303 - 2 9 3 SS 9 9 - www.heiinenhop,isn.co.-i
PHYSICAL DATA
100
- SUPPLY AIR
RETURN/
FRESH AIR
kW
kW
V / Hz
kW
kW
m?^hr
10 kPa
190 kq
0 0
-^
m^^tir
1)0
22mm Drain
,100
0,37
5,39
3x440 / 60
15
12 Electric
1,44
Fan capacity
Fan-motor capacity
Compr.-motor capacity
Voltage
Coolinq capacity
Heatinq capacity
Sea water cons.
Pressure drop
Weiqtitbase-unit
Ln
O
O
Ln
FILTER
WITHDR/JWAL
'
r
234
g
... ^
SW OUT 25mm
SW IN 25mm
t S
C5
CO
'
k.
50
*
700
Scale:
Units:
Designer
190
320
750
1:15 Subject
: Jinling SY
mm
Controller
500
^^
Reference No.: 120,05.055 - 058
: 12005055-204
AC-3 SERVING GALLEY
Sheet
A4
: 1 of 1
Rev.
AvM
11-04-'05
Inlet" and outlet dimensions added
s Rev. Description
AvM
MEINEN Gl H O P M A N ENGINEERING BV
28-04-'05
Designer
TYPE: "KWG-15"
I1.ATION
PD
REFFIIGEFtATION
B o x 9 - 3 7 S O G A S p s k e n o u r g - T h e N e c h e r l S i - i d s - P h o n e 01 tPlOO - S33 SS OO - rBx: ^0^ P ) 3 0 - 2 9 9 2 5 93-www.heine.Thop.ian.co.i
INTEGRAL
WATER COOLED
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS
Integral
Norvent Division
Norris House
Crawhall Road
Newcastle upon Tyne
NE12BB
Tel; 0191 261 1071
Fax: 0191 2328069
Preface
^
i
The Norvent Water Cooled Air Conditioning Unit

is a reliable and compact self contained unit, which
has been specifically designed for easy installation
and operation and is ideal for cooling/heating
corppartments. To obtain the best results from the
equipment the user should comply with the enclosed
instructions.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions

1.1
Operating Controls
1.1.1 Right Control Switch
This control selects the required room temperature setting. Fully clockwise
position is for the lowest room temperature setting. The thermostat has a 2C
differential.
1.1.2 Left Control Switch
This control selects:1 - Unit off
2 - Fan only
3 - Fan and Auto Compressor operation
The compressor will not operate unless the fan contactor is made.
For normal operation when room temperature is at design, the thermostat will
open, the liquid refrigerant solenoid valve close and the unit pumps down
refrigerant to condenser and cuts out on low pressure cut out LP2 (auto reset).
On a rise in room temperature the thermostat makes and the compressor will
restart.
1.2 High Pressure Cut-Out - HP (Manual Reset)
A High Pressure cut-out operates if there are fluctuations in the cooling water
supply. In the event of the cut-out operating there is a button on top of the
cut-out that will require to be reset.
Do not persist in resetting cut-out if the unit repeatedly trips.
Investigate and rectify water flow problem.
1.2.2 Low Pressure Cut-Out - LP1 (Manual Reset)
A low pressure cut-out operates if there is a reduction in refrigerant suction
pressure. In the event of the cut-out operating there is a button on the top of
the cut-out that will require to be reset.
Do not persist in resetting cut-out if the unit repeatedly trips.
Investigate and rectify fault.
1.2,3 Motor Overload Protection (Manual Reset)

Two motor circuit breakers (fan and compressor motors) operate if the motor
overloads and will require to be reset. They are located within the electrical
control panel.
Section 2 - Maintenance
Regular checks are recommended to maintain the unit in a trouble free condition, and
these checks should be carried out at regular intervals.
Every Month
2.2.1
Air filter to be removed, cleaned and renewed if damaged.

Access via front grille.
Every 3 Months
2.2.1
Check alignment of fan in housing and belt tension.
2.2.2
Inspect condensate drain to ensure that it is not partially or wholly blocked,
2.2.3
Inspect wiring connections, check all screws and nuts for tightness.
2.2.4
Check all pipe connections for security and leakage.
2.2.5
The water strainer (if fitted) should be cleaned.
2.2.6
The condenser heat pressure water control valve (if fitted).
2.2.7
Check for correct water supply in and out.

i'
2.2.8
. Generally clean the unit, the outside can be wiped using a damp cloth or
leather.
Every 12 Months
^
2.3.1
. Test hermetic system for leaks using an electronic detector.
2.3.2
Clean evaporator fins to ensure efficient heat transfer, using a brush or

compressed air.
2.3.3
It may be necessary after a lengthy period, to clean the condenser of

deposits.
2.3.4
Check temperature differential to ascertain that performance is correct.
Section 3 - Fault Finding

In the event of the unit failing to operate correctly the following checks should be made:
Ref
1
Complaint
Cause
Instructions
Unit does not operate when

switched on
Failure of electric supply

Failure of switch
Reconnect supply
Defective motor
Faulty fan contactor/circuit
breaker
Check switch and replace if

necessary
Test/replace
Reset/replace
Fan runs but does not

supply air
Dirty filter
Fan impeller loose on shaft
Belt worn/broken
Clean or replace filter

Tighten
Replace
Fan runs, delivers air but

compressor does not start
Thermostat setting too high
Faulty thermostat
Faulty selector switch
LP cut out tripped/faulty
HP cut out tripped/faulty
Compressor
contactor/circuit breaker
tripped/faulty
Turn right hand switch fully

anti-clockwise
Test/replace
Test/replace
Reset/replace
Reset/replace
Reset/replace
Faulty compressor
Evaporator is iced up
Unit is too small in duty for

application
Faulty thermostat
Clean or replace
Clean fins and fit filter
Air filter choked

Evaporator fins blocked due
to filters missing
Fan impeller loose on shaft

Fan belt broken
Locate leak, rectify and

recharge system
Tighten
Replace
Compressor and fan

operating but no cooling
effect
Unit operates but does not

cycle on operating
thermostat
Evaporator is iced up

recharge system
Test and replace if
necessary
See Section 6
Check heat load of
conditioned space
recharge system
Test and replace if
necessary
Complaint
Cause
Instructions
Water leaking from unit
Condensate drain blocked

Water connection loose
Clear
Tighten connection
Sound level high
Refrigerant pipes touching

casing
Fan impeller loose
Loose screws or bolts
Check pipework
Check fan
Check all component
fixings
Ref
NOTE: NO WORK SHOULD BE CARRIED

OUT ON UNIT UNLESS ELECTRIC
MAINS IS ISOLATED
0(. s .
No
TR-02
UNIT
HIGH PRESSURE CUT OUT HP
TR-03
TR-05
TR-08
TR-10
O.A/0.63
100/1.6
1.6/2.5
1.6/2.5
2.5/A.O
4.0/6.3
6.0/10.0
9.0/U.O
11
/ /
1 RAR
LOW PRESSURE CUT OUT LP2
"
"
COMP. CBCM
RELIEF VALVE
THERMOSTAT TT (ADJUSTABLE)
0*1 f
OfiN CMKO
TR-15
R( VISION Ot l A i i S
TR-20
RAR
DMrt
LOW PRESSURE CUT OUT LP1
OVERCURRENT BREAKER FAN CBFM
1 ., ,
1 D Art
RAR
U f\t\
N/A
N/A
T T D
D A n
23.0 D A K
23/29C -
TR WATER COOLED
A/C UNITS
OPERATING & SAFETY
SET POINTS
('^
POWER
SUPPLY
No.
START
LRA
MRA
380/3/50
415/3/50
A40/3/60
1
1
1
DOL
30
30
25
3.60
3.60
4.40
TR-03
380/3/50
415/3/50
440/3/60
1
1
1
54
54
47
TR-05
380/3/50
415/3/50
440/3/60
1
1
1
TR-08
380/3/50
415/3/50
440/3/60
TR-10
MODEL
TR-02
TR-15
TR-20
LRA
MRA
DOL
PW
COMPRESSOR
FAN
No.
START
LRA
MRA
DOL
4.28
3.9i
3.59
0.68
0.63
0.57
4.80
4.80
4.17
6.38
6.21
6.13
1.03
1.01
0.99
62
62
54
8.20
8.20
7.13
9.61
9.12
8.16
1.60
1.51
1.36
2
2
2
124
124
108
12.20
12.20
10.60
15.86
15.25
14.45
2.62
2.51
2.37
380/3/50
415/3/50
440/3/60
2
2
2
146
146
127
16.60
16.60
14.43
22.13
21.62
19.73
3.57
3.51
3.06
380/3/50
415/3/50
440/3/60
1
1
1
380/3/50
415/3/50
440/3/60
1
1
1
'
PW
LOCKED ROTOR AMPS

MAXIMUM RUNNING AMPS
DIRECT ON LINE
PART WIND
THIS DATA SHEET IS APPLICABLE TO THE FOLLOWING TR MODELS:-
TR-02/03/05/08/10/15/20
COOLING ONLY
R22/R404a/R407c
SEA/FRESH WATER COOLED
CLOSE COUPLED (SELF CONTAINED) / SPLIT
DUCTED/PLENUM & GRILLE AIR DISCHARGE
4 4 0 / 3 / 6 0 , 415/3/50, 380/3/50
TR WATER COOLED
A / C UNITS
ELECTRICAL LOADING
0"C
No
"I *
OATf
ORN
CHKO
eviSlON
OPTIONAL EXTRAS
MODEL
TR-02
TR-03
TR-5
TR-08
TR-1Q
TR-15
TR-20
ELECTRIC HEATER
FRESH AIR SPIGOT
PLENUM"^& GRILLE DISCHARGE
OPPOSITE SIDE WATER CONNECTIONS
UPRATED FAN MOTOR
HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE KIT
* ALL WATER / DRAIN / FRESH AIR CONNECTIONS

ARE LEFT HAND SIDE LOOKING AT FRONT OF UNIT
AS STANDARD
THIS DATA SHEET IS APPLICABLE TO THE FOLLOWING TR MODELS:
COOLING ONLY/COOLING & HEATING
R22/R134a/R/f04a/RA07c
CLOSE COUPLED (SELF CONTAINED) / SPLIT
DUCTED/PLENUM & GRILLE AIR DISCHARGE
V440/3/60, M 5 / 3 / 5 0 . 380/3/50
TR WATER COOLED
A / C UNITS
OPTIONAL EXTRAS
OITAHS
SPECIFICATION
MODEL
TR-02 - 0022
COOLING CAPACITY 50/60HZ
6.2/7.0
POWER SUPPLY
380-A15-400/50-60HERMETICALLY
SEALED
RECIPROCATING
1-H23B24aDBE
COMPRESSOR
NUMBER/MODEL
SPEED RPM 50/60H2
OIL TYPE
OIL CHARGE LITRES
MOTOR RATING
MiwrnAi .
1.18
2.02
CONDENSER
MODEL
WATER IN NUMBER/SIZE
WATER OUT NUMBER/SIZE
5W FLOW M V H R 50/0H2
FW FLOW M V H R 50/OH2
, / TR-03 - 0022
9.3/10.5
TR-08 - 0022
TR-10 - 0022
TR-15 - 0022
TR-20 - 0022
15.5/17.5
24.8/28.0
31.0/35.0
46.5/52.5
61.9/70.0
l-H25D12aDBE
SEMI HERMETIC
RECIPROCATING
1-
1-
DUPLEX
l-H25A38aDBE
1.92
2.79
SHELL AND TUBE M/ \KINL

K072HB
K122HB
2-1/2"BSP
2-1/2" BSP
l-3/4"BSP
l-3/4"BSP
1.11/1.34
1.19/1.43
0.86/1.02
0.94/1.11
EVAPORATOR
CONDENSATE DRAIN
NUMBER/SIZE
TR-05 - 0022
1-H23A623DBE
HERMETICALLY
SEALED
RECIPROCATING
l-H25D99aDBE
IHD\J/
1 I0\J
1.63
5.00
3.84
7.08
3.84
9.14
K202HB
2-3/4"BSP
1-1"BSP
2.09/2.51
1.78/2.10
K282HB
2-3/4"BSP
1-VBSP
3.45/4.14
2.80/3.30
K282HB
2-3/4"BSP
1-1"BSP
5.74/6.89
3.62/4.26
K572HB
2-3/4"BSP
1-VBSP
5.93/7.12
5.15/6.06
K812HB
1-2"BSP
1-2"BSP
10.10/12.13
8.24/9.70
rilN AINU 1 UUL

1-15mm
l-22mm
1-22mm
1-28mm
l-28mm
l-35mm
1-3Smm
EVAPORATOR FAN MODEL

AIR FLOW M V H R S0/OH2
MOTOR RATING KW
AD2160
900/1080
D-.ZSKW
AT7-7
1275/1530
0.37KW
AT9-9
2125/2550
0.75KW
ATlO-10
3400/4075
1.1KW
AT12-12
4250/5100
1.5KW
6375/7650
2.2KW
8500/10200
3KW
REFRIGERANT CHARGE KG
1.50
1.50
2.50
5.50
6.50
DIMENSIONS HxWxD mm
1200x900x425
1490x900x450
1600x1050x550
1800x1250x650
1800x1250x650
WEIGHT KG
180
300
PLENUM HxWxD mm
130 1(900x425
170 x900x450
230 xl050x550
280 x1250x650
355^1250x650
SW-SEA WATER AT 32n-MARINE D ESIGN CONDENSER WITH MALE WATER CONNECTION

FW-FRESH WATER AT J'^C-COMMER CIAL DESIGN CONDENSER WITH FEMALE WATER CONNECTION
TR-0022 WATER COOLED

A/C UNITS
UNIT SPECIFICATION
1
L
*'>E
C No
0*fE
1 o n AWN
tcMfCCED
'
"
'
'
THIS DATA SHEET IS APPLICABLE

TO THE FOLLOWING MODELS
TR 8-10
AiO/3/O, 415/3/5, 3 8 0 / 3 / 5 0
R22, R404a, RAOlc
No.
DATE
ORN CHKM
REVISION DETAILS
REFRIGERANT PIPE 5I2ES
o4
UNIT
MODEL
V4"
FLARE
B'
C-
8 TR
7/8"
5/8"
iVa"
10 TR
7/8"
5/8"
1V8"
V / , " FLARE
NORRIS HOUSE
CRAWHAU ROAO
KtWCASTlf UPOS'-TYfiE
1 -COMPRESSOR
2 -VIBRATION ELIMINATOR '
3 -CONDENSER
/. -HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE CONN,
5 -SHUT OFF VALVE
6 -LIQUID CHARGING CONNECTION
7 -FILTER DRIER
8 -SHUT OFF VALVE
9 -SOLENOID VALVE
10-S1GHTGLAS5
11
12
13
14
15
EXPANSION VALVE
DIRECT EXPANSION COIL
VIBRATION ELIMINATOR
GAS CHARGING CONNECTION
HIGH PRESSURE CUT OUT
(MANUAL RESET)
LOW PRESSURE CUT OUT
(MANUAL RESET)
LOW PRESSURE CUT OUT (AUTO RESET)
RELIEF VALVE
TR WATER COOLED
A/C UNITS
FREON DIAGRAM
"pr
WIRING ADDED IF ELECTRIC

HEATING INCLUDED
POWER SUPPLY
380/3/50
415/3/50
REMOVE LINK IF REMOTE STOP OR
A40/3/60
SEA WATER PUMP INTERLOCK REOUIRED
o
18
TRANSFORMER
CONNECTION
(WIRE 16)
A - 380V
B - 415V
C - 440V
LINK
18
T^
FM
r- iFV : F 2 ..
^./
POWER
SUPPLY
[ II
CF
M
CB
CM
1
CB
CM
CC
Ml
CC
Il
_' 1
CAB LE
CONNECTION
fr-'
1NQ
RED
2
3
A
5
6
YELLOW
BLUE
BLACK
BLUE
BLACK
8 BLACK
9 BLACK
10 BLACK
12 BLACK
15
16
17
18
19
20
RED
BLUE
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
21
22
23
24
25
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLUE
THIS DATA SHEET IS APPLICABLE TO THE FOLLOWING TR MODELS

.TR-08/10---' .
COOLING ONLY/COOLING i HEATING
R22/R134a(EXCEPT TR-10)/R4Q4a/R407c
CLOSE COUPLED 15ELF CONTAINED]
DUCTED/PLENUM i GRILLE AIR DISCHARGE
4 4 0 / 3 / 6 0 , 415/3/50, 380/3/50
'
NORBIS HOUSE
CRAW'nALl ROAD
NEWCASTlf UPONIYNt
CBH -CIRCUIT BREAKER HEATER

CH -CONTACTOR HEATER
CBFM-CIRCUIT BREAKER FAN MOTOR
CFM -CONTACTOR FAN MOTOR
CBCM-CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPRESSOR MOTOR
CCM -CONTACTOR COMPRESSOR MOTOR
CF -CONTROL FUSE
TR -TRANSFORMER
R
-ANTI SHORT CYCLE RELAY
OHCO-OVERHEAT CUT OUT
SW
HP
LP1
LP2
LSV
TT
H
FM
CM
CCH
-SELECTOR SWITCH
-HIGH PRESS. CUT OUT ( MAN. RESET
-LOW PRESS. CUT OUT ( MAN. RESET :
-LOW PRESS. CUT OUT ( AUTO RESET
-LIQUID SOLENOID VALVE
-RETURN AIR THERMOSTAT
-ELECTRIC HEATER
-FAN MOTOR
-COMPRESSOR MOTOR
-CRANKCASE OIL HEATER
-TR WATER COOLED

A/C UNITS
IÎTM
MGATtrC"
WIRING DIAGRAM
Centrimaster, GX
Installation and Maintenance
Instructions
31.1.2001
FlktWoods
Centrimaster, GX
Genera!
Installation
2
1 . Receiving and inspecting the product
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
2
2
3
3
Inspection
Data on the rating plate
Handling and lifting the fan
Weight of the products
Storing the fan
2. Function and design of the fan
2.1 Design
2.2 Operating conditions
2.3 Balancing
2.4 Bearings
2.4.1 Type of bearings according to the fan type and size.
2.4.2 Max. permissible belt force on the fan shaft
2.4.3 Useful life of bearings
2.5 Free access to the fan
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
3. Installation and commissioning
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
5
5
5
5
5
6
Installation of the fan

Fitting the accessories
How not to install the fan
Inspection after the fan has been installed
Measures to be taken prior to commissioning
Commissioning
General
These instructions are intended for use by professional
service staff. Professional staff who is familiar with the
safety regulations must carry out the installation,
commissioning and operation of the fans. Tools and
protective equipment necessary for preventing accidents
from occurring while installing and operating the fan
must be used in accordance with the local safety norms.
1. Receiving and inspecting the product
1.1 Inspection
Check the fan immediately after you receive it and make
sure that it has not been damaged during transport.
If you discover any damage, get in touch with the
Transportation Company without delay. Briefly rotate the
fan shaft to make sure that it rotates easily. Check the
information on the fan rating plate.
1.2 Data on the rating plate
Ref:
Flakt Woods order number
Marking:
Position number (specified by the customer)
Type:
Fan type
Mfd:
The year when the fan was manufactured
Max speed Maximum permissible fan speed
Max. temp: Maximum permissible operating
temperature of the fan
Weight:
Weight of the fan
Serie:
Serial number
4. Service
4.1 Warranty
4.2 Maintenance plan
4.2.1 Before maintenance
4.2.2 Checking the bearings
4.2.3 Impeller
4.2.4 Casing
4.2.5 Inspecting the bearings
4.2.6 Permanently lubricated bearings
4.2.7 Plummer blocks with ball bearings
4.2.8 Plummer blocks with roller bearings
4.2.9 Recommended lubricants
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
5. Maintenance
Type
5.1 Bearing types and design

5.2 Replacing the bearings
5.2.1 Dismaritling the ball bearing with eccentric locking
collar (Y bearing)
5.2.2 Mounting the ball bearing with eccentric locking
collar (Y bearing)
5.2.3 Dismantling the permanently lubricated ball bearing with
conical adapter sleeve (S-bearing)
5.2.4 Mounting the permanently lubricated ball bearing with
conical adapter sleeve (S-bearing)
5.2.5 Dismantling the plummer block with roller bearing
5.2.6 Mounting the plummer block with roller bearing
5.2.7 Dismantling the plummer block with ball bearing
5.2.8 Mounting the plummer block with bail bearing
5.3 Impeller
_
5.3.1 Removing the impeller (sizes 014...071)
5.3.2 Mounting the impeller (sizes 014...071)
5.3.3 Removing the impeller (sizes 080...100)....;
5.3.5 Mounting an impeller with backward-curved blades
(type LB and HB) and the inlet cone
5.3.6 Final examination
8
8
Type
6. Trouble-shooting
7. Scrapping the fan
Flakt Woods Oy
Kalevantie 39
20520 Turku
Finlond
Re(.
Marking
Type
Mox.speed:.
Weight:
, rpm
kg
Mox. (emp..
C Mfd:
Serie
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
17
18
19
21
1.3 Handling and lifting the fan

The smaller fans are supplied in a carton, whereas the
larger fans are supplied in a wooden crate or on a pallet,
which can be handled by a forklift tnjck.
o
o
5
s
MJ
22
23
24
24
Illustration 1.1 Types of fan packaging
Installation
Centrim aster, GX
Always place the fans on a level surface. Never stack

fans that have been removed from their carton on top of
one another. If the fan is equipped with lifting lugs, they
must be used when lifting the fan.
2 . Function and design of the fan

The fan is used to generate a desired air volume at a
given pressure rise that con-esponds to the pressure
losses in the duct system, to which the fan is connected.
This is achieved by means of rotating the fan impeller.
2.1 Design
1. Casing
2. Cut-off plate
3. Impeller (hub in the middle)
4. Shaft
5. Inlet cone (only in type LB and HB fans)
6. Bearings and bearing brackets
7. Flange
8. Frame
Illustration 1.2 The fan should be lifted by means of

its lifting lugs. If it lacks lifting lugs, the fan may be
lifted by means of a rope secured to the shaft ends.
Do not jerk the fan as you lift it
1.4 Weight of the products
Approximate weights of the standard fans are tabulated
in Table 1.1. The exact weight of the relevant fan is
specified on its rating plate.
Illustration 2.1 Structural parts of the fan
1.5 Storing the fan

The fans are protected in such a manner that they will be
able to withstand storage for 1 month, provided that
they are not exposed to direct rain or snowfall.
- Permissible storage temperature: -40...+70C
- The bearings must not be exposed to vibrations from
the surroundings.

CENTRIMASTER fans are designed for use in comfort
ventilation applications. If the air contains explosive
gases, check from case to case whether the fan can be
used in the relevant application. The spari<-proof version
(inlet cone made of brass or lined with brass) will prevent
sparking in the event that the impeller comes in contact
with the inlet cone (e.g. in the case of bearing damage).
We recommend rotating the fan impeller once a week to

redistribute the lubricant evenly along the bearing races.
This will prevent spot corrosion on the rolling surfaces of
the bearing.
The standard operating temperature of the fan is

-30...+80C. Under normal operating conditions, the
sound power level will exceed 70 dB (A). For detailed
particulars, see the fan catalogue.
The storage time can be extended to 6 months,

provided that the fans are stored in premises, which are
adequately ventilated and heated so that no
condensation will occur on the fans.
The fan impellers are statically and dynamically balanced

to an accuracy of G 2.5 (sizes 035 through 100) or G 6.3
(sizes 014 through 031).
2.3 Balancing
Table 1.1 Weight of fans including the packaging (approx. 10%)

Impeller
type
LF
LB
HB
Fan size
014
5
016
5.3
018
6.7
020
9.2
022
025
028
11.4
13.4
18.5
12.5
15
18
031
23
25
035
30
33
33
040
38
43
44
045
48
53
55
050
57
64
66
056
87
97
113
063
107
128
143
071
142
153
154
080
260
267
284
090
318
353
400
100
429
453
Centrimaster, GX
Installation
2.4 Bearings
2.4.2 Max. pennissible belt force on the fan shaft

The type and size of the bearings determines the max.
permissible belt force. This figure is vital in the selection
of a belt drive. The values tabulated in Table 2.2 and
2.4 presuppose only the radial force. The radial force, F^,
is assumed to be exerted on the shaft end.
2.4.1 Type of bearings according to the fan

type and size
Illustration 2.2 Permanently lubricated ball bearing

with eccentric locking collar (Y bearing)
Illustration 2.3 Permanently lubricated ball bearing

with conical adapter sleeve (KH)
2.4.3 Useful life of bearings

The nominal useful service life of the bearings L.^ is
specified to ISO 281. Part 1. The normal useful service
life of the bearings of the various CENTRIMASTER fans
is tabulated in Table 2.5. The useful service life of the
bearings is conditional on the bearing load, fan speed
and operating temperature.
2.5 Free access to the fan
A free access space must be provided on both sides of
the fan or the fan must be withdrawable from the air
handling unit or the plant room to enable the bearings to
be changed. In fan sizes 014...071 the impeller can be
removed from the fan outlet and in fan sizes 080...100
from the fan inlet (for cleaning or balancing, for instance).
Illustration 2.6 Radial force F.
Illustration 2.4 Plummer block with ball bearing
llustration 2.5 Plummer block with roller bearing (PL)

Table 2.1 Types of bearings
Impeller
type
LF
LB
HB
Fan size
014
D
016
D
018
D
020
S
022
Y
Y
025
Y
Y
028
Y
Y
031
Y
Y
035
Y
Y
S
040
Y
Y
S
045
Y
Y
S
050
Y
Y
S
056
Y
Y
H
063
Y
Y
H
071
Y
Y
H
080
YB
YB
H
090
YB
YB
H
100
YB
H
Table 2.2 Max. permissible radial force, F^, applied to the fan shaft, standard bearings
Impeller
type
LF
LB
HB
Fan size
014
450
016
450
018
450
020
450
022
450
450
025
450
450
028
620
560
031
670
620
035
900
900
040
045
050
056
063
071
080
090
100
1050
1100
1200
1200
1200
1500
1500
1350
1650
1900
1600
5000
2200
1900
6000
2300
1950
6000
2880
2880
8000
3550
3550
8000
4300
8000
900
"D
O
O
Table 2.3. Types of bearing, accessories GTLZ-06/07/08/09/16/17

Impeller
type
LF
LB
HB
Fan size
014
016
018
020
022
YS
YS
025
YS
YS
028
YS
YS
031
YS
YS
035
YS
YS
YS
040
YS
YS
YS
045
YS
YS
YS
050
YS
YS
YS
056
H
H
063
H
H
071
H
H
080
090
100
Installation
Centrimaster, GX
Table 2.4. Max. permissible radial force, F^, applied to the fan shaft, bearings type GTL2-06/07/08/09/16/17
Impeller
type
014
LF
LB
HB
Fan size
016
018
020
022
700
650
025 028
750 1100
650 1000
031
035
040
045
050
056
063
071
1150
1000
1650
1400
1100
1700
1400
1200
2200
1800
1500
2300
2000
1650
5000
5000
6000
6000
6000
6000
080
090
100
Table 2.5 Useful life of bearings, L

Fan size
Impeller
type
014
015 018
080
090 100
020
022 025
040
045 050
056
063 071
028
031 035
LF 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 200(X) 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000
LB
20000 20000 20000 200(X) 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000
HB
40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000
3. Installation and commissioning
3.1 Installation of the fan
The fan is secured to a base by bolts in mounting holes.
The base must be level and stable. The base must be
designed in such a way that vibrations caused by
resonance can be avoided. During the installation,
guarantee that no bending force or mechanical stress
will affect the fan. The fan or the base is mounted on
anti-vibration mountings.
3.2 Fitting the accessories
The fan should normally be connected to the ducting by
means of a flexible duct. The tightness of the flexible
duct must be adequate and there must be no bends that
could throttle the air flow. Check that the flexible duct is
in alignment with the fan outlet and the ducting.
Before connecting the flexible duct to a counter flange,
fit a gasket ( 2 x 1 0 mm, for instance) to one flange.
Assemble the flanged joint by means of bolts, nuts and
washers and beginning at the comers of the flange.
Then tighten the remaining bolts.
3.3 How not to install the fan
The fan must not be mounted with the shaft vertical.
Illustration 3.2 Mechanical stress exerted by

improper mounting can distort the fan casing.
Correct alignment is vital for preventing bearing damage
and vibrations.
3.4 Inspection after the fan has been installed
Rotate the shaft and check that the impeller can move
freely and that it does not come in contact with the inlet
cone. Also check that there is no unusual noise from
the bearings. Make sure that there are no foreign objects
in the fan or in the ducting. Check that the
3.5 Measures to be taken prior to commissioning
If the fan has an impeller with forward-curved blades
(GXLF), make sure that it has been connected to ducting
that confomns to the design pressure drop so that the
motor will not be overloaded.
2
g
Illustration 3.1 Fan with the shaft vertical

The fan must not be mounted with the casing slanted.
Checking the bearings

a) Permanently lubricated bearings: The bearings
might have dripped grease while the fan was
transported and in storage. Clean the external
surface of the bearing.
b) Plummer block bearings: Check the bearing
temperature and the noise. Check the level of
lubricant, if required.
Centrimaster, GX
3.6 Commissioning
Briefly switch on the power supply to the motor to check
whether the fan impeller rotates in the correct direction.
Check that no abnormal mechanical sound and no
surging occurs. Check that the level of
the vibrations transmitted to the bearings is normal.
Maintenance
4.2.1 Before maintenance
- Switch off the power supply to the fan at the
safety-isolating switch.
^r
4.2.2 Checking the bearings

- Noise or vibrations
- Grease
- Bearing temperature
4.2.3 Impeller
- The impeller can be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner,
compressed air or by bnjshing.
- If the impeller is coated with greasy dirt, it can be
washed with a detergent or a solvent.
Illustration 3.3 The correct direction of rotation for an

impeller with forward-curved blades (type LF).
Regularly clean the impeller to keep rt in con-ect balance.

Unbalance will give rise to unnecessary vibrations and
expose the bearings to additional strain. The impeller
can be cleaned whenever necessary but it should be
inspected at least once a year. A fouled impeller also
reduces fan performance and therefore causes the fan
to consume more power.
4.2.4 Casing
- See Section 4.2.3 Impeller above.
- Check that the impeller does not come in contact
with the inlet cones (type LB and HB fans).
4.2.5 Inspecting the bearings

In most cases, any flaws in the bearings can be
detected by listening. When the bearings are normal,
they generate a smooth and uniform sound. Loud
and squeaking noise or other abnormal sounds imply
Illustration 3.4The correct direction of rotation foran
that the bearings are worn out. If an electronic
impellerwith backward-curved blades (type LB and HB).
stethoscope is used, the abnormal sounds can be
detected - and whether there is any defective part as
4. Service
well. A squeaking noise may also be caused by
insufficient lubrication. Too small bearing cross-gap can
4.1 Warranty
cause a metallic noise. Dents on the outer race of the
The warranty is valid for one (1) year from the delivery
bearing can cause vibration, which in turn causes a
date unless otherwise agreed prior to placing the order.
smooth and clear sound. Intermittent sound implies a
The warranty is only applicable to manufacturing defects.
defective rolling surface.
A precondition of the warranty is that regular
maintenance be earned out. Defects under warranty
High bearing temperatures are usually a sign that the
must immediately be notified to the manufacturer or the
bearings are running abnormally. Too high temperature
importer. The warranty does not cover belt damages
is harmful to the grease and bearing itself. Long-term
caused by belt(s) being tensioned too tight. The warranty
operation at temperatures above 120C can shorten the
does not cover service work or indirect damages.
useful life of the bearing. High bearing temperature may
To guarantee smooth operation, the fan must be
sen/iced regularly. The need for servicing is conditional
on the operating conditions. If the air contains dust or
particles, the service intervals will have to be shorter. As
a general njle, the fan must be inspected at least twice a
year. For the most important maintenance measures,
see the following sections.
The most important maintenance measures
be due to insufficient or excessive lubrication, impurities

in the grease, overioading, bearing damage or too small
a bearing cross-gap. Even a slight temperature change
can be a sign of impaired operation if the operating
conditions have not changed. Refilling with lubricant will
nonnally cause a rise in bearing temperature lasting one
or two days.
"O
o
o
Check the grease. A change of colour or darkening is

usually a sign that there are impurities in the grease.
l_arger grains of impurities can be detected by njbbing
>
Centh master, GX
Maintenance
the grease between your fingers. Check also the gaskets
(V-rings, for example) and change them as the need
arises.
4.2.6 Permanently lubricated bearings
The permanently lubricated bearings have been factorylubricated to last throughout their entire useful life
(20,000 - 40,000 hours of operation). High-quality
gaskets in the bearing prevent lubricant from seeping out
and dripping. The maintenance of this type of bearing
consists of cleaning its external surfaces and inspection
to detect any possible abnormal operation or defective
gaskets. If the latter is detected, the bearings will have to
be replaced. Use proper tools to prevent blows that
cause dents on the bearing race. Even the slightest
blows can cause the bearing to emit a scratchy noise.
This will lead to premature ageing.
4.2.7 Plummer blocks with ball bearings
The bearings have been factory-lubricated. As a general
rule the bearings should be reiubricated every 6 months.
The amount of grease for relubrication is given in the
table 4.1. or 4.2. These bearings are equipped with highquality sealings and the change of the grease is not
possible without damaging the sealings. If the bearing is
damaged, the whole plummer block including the
bearing should be changed.
4.2.8 Plummer blocks with roller bearings
Relubrication
Plummer block bearings in a fan njnning 8 hours/day
should be reiubricated once a year. Plummer block
bearings should be reiubricated twice a year if the fan is
operated around the clock. New grease is usually
injected while the fan is operating. If the bearing is
reiubricated during a maintenance downtime,
for instance, the impeller must be rotated in order to
distribute the grease uniformly in the bearing. The
amount of grease required for relubrication is as follows:
0.005 X bearing outer diameter x bearing width
Please note that an excessive amount of grease can
cause a temperature peak in the bearing, which in turn
can damage the lubrication properties of the grease and
lead to bearing damage. Filling with grease should be
stopped when excessive grease starts to seep out of the
bearing.
Replacing the grease
After the bearing has been reiubricated a number of
times or if the grease has become caked, darkened or
faded {compare with its original colour), the grease
should be replaced as follows.
1. Clean the outside of the bearing housing.

Open the bearing cover.
2. Remove all the old grease. Wash the bearing with
white spirit or paraffin oil. Petrol may also be
used but bear in mind its inflammability! Check the

bearing after cleaning. If even a slightest flaw is
discovered, the bearing will have to be replaced.
The bearing should be oiled. Bearings rust easily if
they are not installed.
3. Spread new grease on the rolling surface by hand
or by using a plastic smoothing tool. Rll the empty
space in the bottom half of the bearing housing
halfway with new grease. Do not overfill. An excessive
amount of grease can give rise to increased bearing
temperatures.
4. Fit the upper half of the bearing housing. See also
Section 5.2.6 Mounting the plummer block bearing.
5. Check out the bearing using a screwdriver as a
simple stethoscope (placing the tip against the
bearing housing and the handle against your ear^.
The bearing is running property if you hear a weak
humming sound. A whistling sound indicates
inadequate lubrication.
Table 4.1 Amount of grease for relubrication
Fan
Impeller type
(g)
Fan size
080
090
056 063 071
HB HB HB LF/LB HB LF/LB HB
8
20
10 11 13 6 18
100
LB
14
HB
23
Table 4.2 Amount of grease for relubrication,

bearings type GTLZ-06/07/08/09/16/17
Fan
Fan size
022 025 028 031 035 040 045 050 055 063 071
LF/LB
LF/LB/HB
Impeller type
LF/LB
8
8 10 10 13 13 15 15 10 IT 11
(g)

Only high quality bearing greases should be used such
as the following:
Standard operating conditions for the bearing
{-30...+110C)
- SKF Alfalub LGMT 2
- Mobilux 2
- Shell Alvania R2
- Esso Beacon 2
N.B.
Use protective gloves. Regular exposure to paraffin oils,
dissolvents, etc. can cause allergic reactions.
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
yf^._
5. Maintenance
5.1 Bearing types and design
Permanently lubricated ball bearing with eccentric
locking collar (Y-bearing)
1. Bearing
2. Eccentric locking collar
3. Stop screw
4. Bearing damper, rubber
Pemnanently lubricated ball bearing with conical

adapter sleeve (S-bearing)
1. Bearing
2. Adapter sleeve
3. Lock washer
4. Nut
5. Bearing damper, rubber
(T
Plummer block with ball bearing (YB-bearings)

1. Bearing housing
2. Grease nipple
3. Eccentric locking collar
4. Stop screw
YS = Plummer block with ball bearing (with conical
adapter sleeve)
Plummer block with roller bearing (H-bearing)

1. Bearing housing (SNL..): Upper half and bottom half
2. Self-aligning roller bearing
3. Adapter sleeve
4. Lock washer
5. Nut
6. Gasket set
7. Guide ring (only in one bearing housing)
8. Grease nipple
5.2 Replacing the bearings

5.2.1 Dismantling the ball bearing with eccentric locking
collar (Y bearing)
5
Stepi
Back off the stop screw using an Allen key.
>
Maintenance
step 2
Unscrew the eccentric locking collar (usually in the
direction that is opposite to the direction of rotation of
the fan). Measure and mark the position of the bearing
on the shaft, x =
mm. Support the shaft using a
band or a rope to suspend it. Place the band between
the bearing bracket and the impeller and attach it with a
screw or bolt to one of the fixing holes on the fan casing.
Remove the bearing bracket. .
Step 3
Dismantle the bearing bracket. The bearing is glued to
the shaft. Use an extractor tool to remove the bearing
from the shaft. Attach the claws of the extractor tool to
the inner ring of the bearing. You can also remove the
bearing by tapping the inner ring of the bearing with a
hammer.
Step 4
Replace the bearing and the bearing damper (see the
Spare Parts List).
5.2.2 Mounting the ball bearing with eccentric locking

collar (Y bearing)
Stepi
Wipe the inner surface of the bearing to remove the
protective film. Put the bearing into the bearing damper.
-S
Step 2
Mount the bearing bracket on the bearing and bearing
damper.
Centrimaster, GX
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
yr^**-.
Step 3
Clean the shaft carefully. Apply glue (Loctite 603) to the
shaft. Mount the bearing bracket with bearing at the
marked position on the shaft. Rt the bearing bracket to
the fan casing.
Step 4
Mount the eccentric locking collar to the inner ring of the
bearing and tum it firmly by hand in the direction of
rotation of the fan until the collar is locked in position.
Steps
Tighten the stop screw using an Allen key. If you can
measure the torque, do not exceed the relevant
value specified in Table 5.2. Excessive torque can cause
the inner ring of the bearing to crack.
Table 5.2. Max. permissible torque, M, for the stop screw
Fan
Fan size
022 025 028 031 035 040 045 050 056 063 071
Impeller type
LF/LB
LF/LB
LF/LB
M{Nm)
4
4
4
4
7
7 17 17 17 17 17
Step 6
Rotate the fan impeller and conduct a final inspection.
5.2.3 Dismantling the pennanentiy lubricated ball

bearing with conical adapter sleeve (S-bearing)
Stepi
Release the lock washer tab. Open the nut with a hook
wrench.
5
s
CD
>
10
Maintenance
Centrimaster, GX
step 2
Remove the lock washer and the nut.
Measure and mark the position of the bearing on the
shaft, X =
mm. Support the shaft using a band or a
rope to suspend it. Place the band between the bearing
bracket and the impeller and attach it with a screw or
bolt to one of the fixing holes on the fan casing. Push the
adapter sleeve from the bearing.
Step 3
Remove the bearing brackets from the casing.
Remove the bearing set. Slide the adapter sleeve off the
shaft. If necessary, use a screwdriver to loosen the
adapter sleeve so it will slide more smoothly. Dismantle
the bearing brackets and the bearing from the bearing
damper.
5.2.4 Mounting the permanently lubricated ball bearing

with conical adapter sleeve (S-bearing)
Stepi
protective film. Apply a thin coating of mineral oil on the
inner surface of the adapter sleeve. Put the bearing into
the bearing damper.
Step 2
Mount the bearing bracket on the bearing and bearing
damper so the larger end (having larger diameter) of the
inner ring of the bearing faces the cone of the adapter
sleeve.
o
2,
lo
Step 3
Lubricate the threads of the adapter sleeve and the nut
with molybdenum disulphide compound or similar
lubricant. Slide the adapter sleeve onto the shaft.
If necessary, use a screwdriver to loosen the adapter
sleeve so it will slide more smoothly.
11
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
step 4
Slide the bearing bracket with the assembled bearing on
the shaft and push the adapter sleeve into the bearing. If
necessary, use the nut to draw the adapter sleeve into
the bearing. Secure the bearing bracket to the fan
casing.
f"
Steps
Centre the bearings at the marked position on the shaft.
Mount the lock washer and turn the nut first by hand.
The slanted side of the nut must be against the bearing.
f
Step 6
Turn the nut with a hook wrench at the appropriate torque M (Nm)
specified in Table 5.3. Lock the nut by turning one of the lock
washer tabs into the slot of the nut. If you have to adjust the nut so
that the tab matches the slot, tighten the nut (do not back it off).
Table 5.3 Max. permissible torque, M, for the adapter sleeve
Fan
Impeller type
M(Nm)
Fan size
035
HB
30
0401 045
HB
HB
30
35
050
HB
35
5.2.5 Dismantling the plummer block with roller bearing

Stepi
Clean the external surfaces of the bearing before
starting the maintenance work.
Step 2
Unscrew the bolts and lift the upper half of the bearing
housing off the lower half. Measure and mark the
position of the bearing on the shaft, x =
mm, so that
you can mount the bearing at the same place.
>
12
Maintenance
Centn master, GX
r '\
step 3
Release the lock washer tab.
Step 4
Unscrew the nut with a hook wrench.
^
I
Step 5
Lift the shaft from the bearing housing.
Step 6
Remove the nut, lock washer and the bearing from the
shaft.
5.2.6 Mounting the plummer block with roller bearing

Stepl
Mount the bearing housing (SNL..) so that the grease
nipple is facing the fan impeller. The direction of the
motion of the grease in the bearing housing must be
opposite to the direction of impeller rotation. Clean the
inside of the bearing housing.
13
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
rC
step 2
To mount the gasket set (TSN 5...G), proceed as follows:
Cut a 90-degree slit into one of the four gasket halves.
Mount the gasket half with the slit into the bottom half of
the bearing housing on the side opposite that of the
grease nipple. This will guarantee that excessive grease
can seep out of the bearing housing.
Step 3
Mount the bottom half of the bearing housing
loosely on the bearing bracket so that it can be
positioned. Mount the gasket halves in the slots of the
bearing housing and fill the slots of the gasket halves
with grease (SKF type LGMT2 grease).
Step 4
Wipe the inner surface of the bearing (222...GCK/C3W33) and the adapter sleeve
(H3...A7425) to remove the protective film. Apply a thin coating of mineral oil on
the inner surface of the adapter sleeve. Lubricate the threads of the adapter
sleeve and the nut with molybdenum disulphide compound or similar
lubricant. Slide the adapter sleeve onto the shaft. If necessary, use a
screwdriver to loosen the adapter sleeve so it will slide more smoothly.
Mount the bearing on the adapter sleeve. Push the larger side of the
inner ring of the bearing towards the cone of the adapter sleeve. When
the bearing takes hold of the adapter sleeve, push the bearing with the
adapter sleeve to their position on the shaft.
Steps
After having oiled the side of the nut that is facing the bearing,
place the lock washer and the nut at their position; the slanted side
of the nut must face the bearing. Rll the bearing with grease (SKF
type LGMT2 grease). The bearing must be completely
filled with grease. Place the shaft with the bearing into the bearing
housing. Slide the guide rings (FRB..., 2 pieces) into the bottom
half of the bearing housing of the guide bearing. The guide bearing
is on the drive side of the fan. If the drive side is not known, the
guide bearing is on the right-hand side of the fan.
Step 6
Tighten the nut with a hook wrench. See Table 5.4 for
the appropriate torque, M.
D
O
O
Table 5.4 Torque, M
2
:C0
Fan
M(Nm)
Fan size
056
60
063
60
071
60
080
60
090
60
100
60
>
14
Maintenance
Centrimaster, GX
r
step?
Look the nut by turning one of the lock washer tabs
into the slot of the nut. If you have to adjust the nut so
that the tab matches the slot, tighten the nut (do not
back it off).
Steps
Fill the bearing housing up to 30% of its volume with
grease (SKF type LGMT2 grease).
Table 5.5 Volume of grease for bearing housings
Fan
Fan size
056
063
071
080
Bearing hous. SNL-509 SNL-510 SNL-510 SNL-513

Volume (g)
65 .
75
75
180
090
100
SNL-515 SNL-516
230
280
Mount the upper half of the bearing housing and

secure it by means of bolts. The appropriate torque is
specified in Table 5.6.
Table 5.6 Torque, M, for the bolts of the bearing
housing
Fan
M(Nm)
Fan size
056
50
063
50
071
50
080
80
090
80
100
80
Step 9
When both bearings have been mounted, tighten the bolts
that fasten the bearing housing to the bearing brackets.
Table 5.7 Torque, M, for the bolts that fasten the bearing
housing to the bearing brackets
Fan
M(Nnn)
Fan size
056
90
063
90
071
90
080
150
090
150
100
200
5.2.7 Dismantling the plummer block with ball bearing
Step 1
Before starting support the shaft carefully by using a
band or a rope. Place the band/rope between the bearing
bracket and the impeller. Please note that the impeller
weighs 100 to 250 kg depending on th efan size.
For detailed wieght, please refer to the spare parts list.
15
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
(
step 2
Back off the stop screw using an Allen key
step 3
Unscrew the eccentric locking collar by turning it in the
direction that is opposite to the direction of rotation of
the fan. Measure and mark th eposition of the bearing on
the shaft x =
mm.
Step 4
Loosen the bolts of the plummer block and suspend
the shaft with the rope/band. Tighten the rope/band so
that the impeller does not touch the inlet cone.
The bearing is glued to the shaft. Use an extractor tool
to remove the bearing from the shaft. Attach the claws
j i the extractor tool to the inner ring of the bearing.
You can also remove the bearing by tapping the inner
ring of the bearing with a hammer.
Step 5
Replace the plummer block.
5.2.8 Mounting the plummer block with ball bearing

Stepi
protective film. Apply glue (Loctite 603) to the shaft. The
glue fastens the joint and prevents corrosion. Mount the
bearing at the marked position on the shaft.
16
Glue
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
step 2
Fasten the bolts of the plummer block.
Step 3
Mount the eccentric locking collar to the inner ring of the
bearing and turn it firmly by hand in the direction of
rotation of the fan until the collar is locked in the position.
Step 4
Tighten the stop screw using an Allen key. If you can
measure the torque, do not exceed the relevant value
specified in the Table 5.2. Excessive torque can cause the
inner ring of the bearing to crack.
Table 5.8 Max. permissible torque, M, for the stop screw
Fan
M(Nm)
Fan size
080
27
090
27
100
27
Steps
Rotate the fan impeller and conduct a final inspection.
5.3 Impeller
Stepi
Measure and mark the position of the bearings on the
shaft (x =
mm), so that you can mount the impeller in
the same place. Support the shaft using a band or
a rope to suspend it. Place the band between the bearing
bracket and the impeller and attach it with a screw or
bolt to one of the fixing holes on the fan casing.
17
Centrimaster, GX
step 2
Remove the bearing brackets from the casing. Loosen
the bearings according to the instructions in Section
5.2 and slide the bearing brackets with the bearings off
the shaft. Remove the inlet cones if the impeller has
backward-curved blades (GXLB and GXHB).
Maintenance
Step 3
Carefully place the impeller on the bottom of the fan
casing. Also remove the cut-off plate from the fan outlet.
Step 4
Measure and mark the position of the impeller on
the shaft. Back off the nut(s) of the hub and withdraw the
shaft.
Steps
Withdraw the shaft from the fan inlet. Remove the
impeller from the fan outlet.

Stepi
Place the impeller inside the fan casing.
O
O
18
Maintenance
Centrimaster, GX
step 2
Place the key onto the shaft. The keyway of the
type LB and HB fans is eccentric in the shaft. Place the
shorter end of the shaft towards the hub side.
Step 3
Mount the inlet cones (type LB and HB fans) so that they
extend into the impeller. Push the bearing bracket with
the assembled bearing onto the shaft. Secure the
bearing brackets to the fan casing. Mount the bearings
on the shaft (see Section 5.2).
Step 4
Centre the impeller in the middle of the casing. Tighten
the nut(s) of the hub using an Allen key. See Table 5.8
for the appropriate torque. Mount the cut-off plate.
Table 5.8 Torque, M, for the nut of the hub.

Fan
022 025 028 031

035
Impeller type LB LB LB LB LB HB
4
M(Nni)
4
4
4
7
7
Fan size
040
045
LB HB LB HB
7
7
7
7
050
LB HB
7
7
056
LB HB
7 10
063
071
LB HB LB HB
10 10 10 10
080
LF
27
LB
27
090
HB LF
27 27
LB
27
HB
27
100
LB HB
27 27
Si
Stepi
Measure and mark the position of the bearings on
the shaft (x =
. mm), so that you can mount the
impeller in the same place. Support the shaft at the both
sides of the fan by using a rope or band. Place
the rope/band between the bearing bracket and the
impeller and attach it to the supporting frame or
use an separate support beam etc.
19
Centrimaster, GX
step 2
Dismantle and remove the plummer block from the
drive side. From the opposite side you can just loosen
the bolts of the plummer block.
Maintenance
(
Step 3
Remove the bearing bracket and the screws of the inlet
cone.
f
^
1
Step 4
Lower the impeller to the bottom of the fan casing.
Step 5
Remove the impeller and the shaft from the fan casing.
Step 6
Measure and mark the position of the impeller on the
shaft. Back off the nut(s) of the hub and withdraw
the shaft.
o
o
>
20
Maintenance
Centrimaster, GX

Step1
Place the key onto the shaft. Push the shaft into the
impeller, to the marked position.
Step 2
Lift the impeller and place the inlet cones.
Step 3
Lift the impeller to right height. Mount the bearing
brackets. Mount the bearings (see Mpunting the
Plummer block)
Step 4
Mount the inlet cone.
I
21
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
ar
steps
Center the impeller in the middle of the fan casing.
Tighten the nut(s) of the hub using an Alien key.
Check by rotating the impeller that the inlet cone is
concentric.
f
5.3.5 Mounting an impeller with backward-curved
blades (type LB and HB) and the inlet cone
Centre the impeller and the inlet cone. The dimension
S and the dimension T must be constant throughout.
Check by rotating the impeller to determine that the inlet
cone is concentric.
P
T
^ ^ - - = _
0)
>
22
Maintenance
Centrimaster, GX
r
5.3.6 Final examination
Check that:
- The impeller is mounted for the correct direction
of rotation.
- All nuts and screws have been tightened.
- No foreign objects remain inside the fan casing.
- See also Section 3: Installation and Commissioning.
Illustration 5.1 The correct direction of rotation for an

impeller with forward-curved blades (type LF)
Illustration 5.2 The correct direction of rotation for

an impeller with backward-curved blades (type LB
and HE)
23
Centrimaster, GX
Maintenance
6. Trouble-shooting
Pressure rise and air flow are too low:
- Check the direction of rotation and the speed of
the fan impeller.
- Check that the air flow is not disturbed by any
fold in the flexible duct.
- Check if there is any distorting bend immediately
downstream of the fan outlet. Such a bend can give
rise to excessive connection losses. Check
the duct system and if necessary, fit guide vanes.
The fan vibrates:
- Check the anti-vibration mountings.
- Check that the impeller is clean.
- Check the bearings.
- Check the alignment of the belt drive pulleys.
- Check that the bearings, hub and pulleys
are properiy secured.
Abnormal noise from the bearings:
- See Section 4.2.5: Checking the bearings.
Repeated bearing damage:
- Excessive bearing loads (i.e. belts have been
tensioned too much).
- Poor or inadequate lubrication.
- Impurities have entered the bearing.
7. Scrapping the fan
The materials are tabulated in Table 7.1.
The bearings should be disposed of in accordance with
SKF instructions.
Table 7.1 Materials

Standard
""'"'"'""'"
I
I
ii
Scroll plate
Side plate
Cut-off plate
Inlet cone
Inlet cone, spark-proof version
Bearing bracket
Bearing damper
Bearing
Impeller. LB 022...028
Impeller. LB and HB 031...100
Impeller LF
Hub, LB and HB
Hub, LF
Shaft
Feet/Frame
Disctiarge flange
Flexible connection
DIN
Standard
EN
DIN 17162
DIN 17162
DIN 17162
DIN 17162
Designation
St 02Z
St 05Z
St 02Z
St 05Z
EN 10147
EN 10147
EN 10147
EN 10147
Designation
DX51D+Z
DX53D+Z
0X51D+Z
DX53D+Z
DIN 17162
St 022
EN 10147
DX51D+Z
DIN 1623
St 12
EN 10130
DC01
DIN 17162
DIN 17162
St 02Z
St 02Z
DX51D+Z
DX51D+Z
0X51D+Z
DX51D+2
FW-code
RAGAL51F
RAGAL53F
RAGAL51F
RAGAL 53F
f(,1S53-02
RAGAL 51F
EPDf(4
Special steel
RACOLD01F
RAEX HSF 420
AiSi 12
SS141914-04
SS 142142-00
RAGAL 51F
RAGAL 51F
PVC-fabric
T3
O
O
>
24
Maintenance
Centrimaster, GX
a
o
3"
25
,c
fmz
AN
Flkt Woods Oy Kalevantie 39 FlN-20520 Turku Rnland

t + 358 20 442 3000 f + 358 20 442 3016
w www.flaktwoods.com
FlktWoods
Machine Instructions
Induction motor
GB
Drehstrom-Kfiglufermotor
Betriebsanleitung
DE
3 fr>-H\j^, .^-i'l''.
^0'^M
Moteur cage
Notice technique
Motores de jaula de ardilla

Instrucciones
ES 26
Motore a gabbia di scoiattolo
Istruzioni
--; ' '
IT 34
- . - >
/I
Kortsluten motor ,4
Motorinstruktioner
SE 42
Oikosulkumoottori
Asennus- ja hoito-ohje
Fl
49
ikiiii
E x a m p l e of the Declaration of Conformity
given by A B B Motors.
EC Declaration of Conformity
The {Manufacturer:-
(Name and address of the manufacturer)
hereby declares that

The Products:-
(Productidentification)
are in conformity with provisions of the following Council Directives :

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC (amended by 93/68/EEC),
and, as components, with the essential requirements of the following :

EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC), regarding the intrinsic
characteristics to emission and immunity levels,
and are in confonmity with :
N 60 034-1
Additional Infomiation :By design, the machines, considered as components, comply with the essential requirements of
Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC provided that the installation be correctly realised by the manufacturer
of the machinery (for example : in compliance with our Installation Instructions and EN 60 204 "Electrical Equipment of Industrial Machines").
Certificate of Incorporation (Directive 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 and Annex II, Sub B ) :
The machines above must not be put into service until the machinery Into which they have
been incorporated have been declared in conformity w i t h the Machinery Directive.
Year of CE marking : CEOO.
Signed b y
Title
Date
Translations into other languages are available f r o m

A B B Motors.
LV Motors/Machine Instructions 10-2000
NOTE!
These instructions must be followed to ensure safe and
proper installation, operation and maintenance of the
motor.They should be brought to the attention of
anyone who installs, operates or maintains this
equipment. Ignoring the instruction may invalidate the
warranty.
Declaration of Conformity
Declarations of Confonmity with respect to the Low
voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68
EEC are issued separately with individual machines.
The Declaration of Conformity also satisfies the
requirements of a Declaration of Incorporation with
respect to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC.
Insulation resistance
check
Measure insulation resistance before commissioning and
when winding dampness is suspected.
Resistance, measured at25C, shall exceed the
reference value, i.e. 10 M ohm (measured with 500 V dc
Megger)
WARNING
Windings should be discharged immediately after
measurement to avoid nsk of electnc shock.
Insulation resistance reference value is halved for each
20C rise in ambient temperature.
If the reference resistance value is not attained, the
winding is too damp and must be oven dried.
Oven temperature should be 90C for 12-16 hours
followed by 105C for 6-8 hours.
Validity
Drain hole plugs, if fitted, must be removed during

heating.
The instmctions are valid for the following ABB electrical

machine types, in both motor and generator operation.
Windings drenched in seawater normally need to be

rewound.
series MT*, MBT*, MXMA,

series M2A*/M3A*, M2B*/M3B*, M2C*/M3C*, M2F7
M3F*, M2L7M3L*, M2M7M3M*, M2R7M3R*,
Direct-on-line
or star/delta
starting
The terminal box on standard single speed machines
normally contains 6 winding terminals and at least one
earth terminal.
in frame sizes 63 - 400.

(Additional information may be required for some
machine types due to special application and/or design
considerations.)
Putting into s e r v i c e (starting)
Reception
check
Immediately upon receipt check the machine for external
damage and if found, inform the forwarding agent without
delay.
Check all rating plate data, especially voltage and
winding connection (star or delta). The type of bearing is
specified on the rating plate from size 112 and larger.
Remove transport locking if employed.Turn shaft by
hand to check free rotation.
Motors equipped with roller bearings: Running the
motor with no radial force applied to the shaft may
damage the roller bearing.
Motors equipped with angular contact bearing:
Running the motor with no axial force applied in the right
direction to the shaft may damage the angular contact
bearing.
Motors equipped with regreasing devices:
When starting the motor for the first time, apply at least
the specified quantity of grease until new grease is
forced out of the grease outlet.
For details see section "Machines with relubrication
system" on page 6.
Earthing must be can-led out according to local

regulations before the machine is connected to the
supply voltage.
The voltage and connection are stamped on the rating
plate.
Direct-on-line starting (DOL):
Y or A winding connections may be used.
eg 660 VY. 380 VA indicates Y-connection for 660 V and
A-connection for 380 V.
Star/Delta starting (Y/A):
The supply voltage must be equal to the rated voltage of
the machine in A-connection.
Remove all connection links from the terminal block.
For two-speed, single phase and special machines,
supply connection must follow the instructions inside the
terminal box.
Terminals and direction of rotation
Direction of rotation is clockwise when viewing the shaft
face at the machine drive end, when the line phase
sequence L I , L2, L3 is connected to the terminals as
shown in the figure 1.
To alter the direction of rotation, interchange the
connection of any two line cables.
If the machine has a uni-directional fan, ensure that the
direction of rotation is according to the arrow marked on
the machine.
Use
Operating
conditions
The machines are intended for use in industrial drive
applications.
Normal ambient temperature limits are -25 to +40C.
Maximum altitude 1000 m above sea level.
Safety
considerations
The machine is intended for installation and use by
qualified personnel, familiar with relevant safety
requirements.
Safety equipment necessary for the prevention of
accidents at the installation and operating site must be
provided in accordance with the local regulations.
WARNING
.
, ' - , ' , '
Small motors with supply current directly
switched by thennally sensitive switches can
start automatically
Points
1.
2.
3.
to observe
Do not use the machine to step on
The temperature of the outer casing of the
machine may be hot to the touch during normal
operation.
Some special machine applications require
special instructions (e.g. using frequency
converter supplies)
Lifting lugs must only be used for lifting the motor.
They must not be used to lift the motor when it is
attached to other equipment.
Handling
Storage
The machine should always be stored indoors, in dry,
vibration free and dust free conditions.
needed the position of the eyebolt must be adjusted with

suitable washers.
Ensure that proper lifting equipment is used and that the
sizes of the hooks are suitable for the lifting lugs.
Care must be taken not to damage auxiliary equipment
and cables attached to the motor.
Machine
weigfits
Total machine weight can vary within the same frame
size (center height) depending on different output,
mounting arrangements and added features.
The following table shows estimated maximum weights
for machines in their basic versions as a function of
frame material.
On machines weighing more than 25 kg, the actual
weight is stated on the rating plate.
Frame
size
Aluminium
Weight Add.
kg
for brake
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
6
8
12
17
25
36
63
110
160
220
295
370
-
.
5
8
10
16
20
30
55
65
-
Cast iron
Weight
kg
_
13
20
30
40
50
90
175
250
310
400
550
800
1300
2300
3500
Steel
Weight
kg
-
600
1000
2200
3000
Installation
Unprotected machined surfaces (shaft-ends and flanges)
should protected with anti-con'osive paint.
It is recommended that shafts be rotated periodically by
hand to prevent grease migration.
Anti condensation heaters, if fitted, should preferably be
energised.
The characteristics of electrolytic capacitors, if fitted to
single-phase motors, will require "refonning" following
periods of storage exceeding 1-2 years.
Contact ABB Sales Office for details.
Transportation
Machines fitted with cylindrical-roller and/or angular
contact bearings must be fitted with locking devices
during transport.
Lifting
Lift the motor using the lifting lugs only.
The center of gravity of motors with the same frame
may vary due to different outputs, mounting arrangements and auxiliary equipment
Check that eyebolts or the lifting lugs integrated with the
motor frame are undamaged before lifting. Damaged
lifting lugs must not be used.
Lifting eyebolts must be tightened before lifting. If
Cooling
Normal ambient temperatures should not exceed 40C
(marine standard 50C) if standard performance is to be
achieved. Check that the motor has sufficient airflow.
Ensure that no nearby equipment or surfaces radiate
additional heat to the motor. For more information about
higher ambient temperatures and cooling, see "the Motor
Guide" or contact ABB Sales Office.
Foundation
The purchaser bears full responsibility for preparation of
the foundation.
Metal foundations should be painted to avoid corrosion.
Foundations must be even, and sufficiently rigid to
withstand possible short circuit forces. They shall be
dimensioned as to avoid the occurrence of vibration due
to resonance.
Foundation
studs
Bolt the foundation studs to the feet of the motor and
place a 1-to-2 mm shim between the stud and the feeL
Align the motor directly using appropriate means.
Grout the studs with concrete, check alignment and drill
holes for locating pins.
LV Motors/Machine Instaictions 10-2000
<r
Drain
holes
Always check that open drain holes face downward.
Machines with closable plastic drain plugs are delivered
with these open.
In extremely dusty environments, ail drain holes should
be closed.
This arrangement has no electrical safety function; the

purpose is to equalise the potentials. When the motor
and the gearbox are mounted on a common steel fundament, no potential equalisation is required.
Potential equalisation
Alignment
Con-ect alignment is essential to avoid bearing failures,
vibrations and possible fractured shaft extensions.
Slide rails and belt drives
Fasten the machine to the slide rails as shown in
figure 2.
Place the slide rails horizontally on the same level.
Check that the machine shaft is parallel with driven, or
driving, shaft.
Any belt must be tensioned according to the supplier's
instructions.
WARNING
Excessive belt tension will damage beanngs and
can cause shaft breakage
Do not exceed the maximum belt forces (i.e. radial
bearing loading) stated in the relevant product
catalogues.
Connection
Normal machine design has the terminal box on top and
cable entry possible from both sides.
As a special option, some machines are available with
top mounted terminal boxes rotatable 4 x 90, and some
with side mounted terminal boxes.
Availability of these solutions is described in the product
catalogues.
Plate/strip
Cables/wires
0.75 mm ^
Dnvan machinery
70 mm
min .50 mm'
To comply with EMC-requirements, use only cables and

connectors approved for this purpose. (See instruction for
frequency converters.)
A s s e m b l y and dismantling
General
Dismantling and assembly of machines must be cam'ed
out by qualified personnel using only suitable tools and
working methods.
Bearings
Special care should be taken with the bearings.
These must be removed using pullers and fitted by
heating or using special tools for the purpose. How
to replace bearings is described in detail in a separate
instruction leaflet available from ABB Sales Office.
Fitting coupling
halves and pulleys
Coupling halves and pulleys must be fitted using suitable
equipment and tools that do not damage the bearings.
Unused cable entries must be closed.
Never fit a coupling half or pulley by hammering into

place or remove it using a lever pressed against the
body of the machine.
As well as main winding and earthing terminals, the

tenminal box can also contain connections for
thermistors, standstill heating elements, bimetallic,
switches, or PT 100 resistance elements.
Mounting accuracy of coupling half:

check that the clearance b is less than 0,05 mm and
that the difference a1 to a2 is also less than 0,05 mm.
See figure 3.
WARNING
'
.^ ' .
Voltage may be connected at standstill inside the
terminal box for heating elements or direct
winding heating
Connection diagrams for auxiliary elements are found
inside the terminal box cover.
.WARNING
-'The capacitor in single-phase motors can retain
.' a charge that appears across the motor
' tenninals, even when the motor has reached
" standstill
In frequency converter applications motor frame
external earthing must be used for equalising the potential between the motor frame and the driven machine,
unless the two machines are mounted on the same
metallic base. For motor frame sizes above IEC 280,
use 0.75 x 70 mm flat conductor or at least two 50 mm^
round conductors. The distance of the round conductors
must be at least 150 mm from each other
Balancing
The rotor of the machine is dynamically balanced.
As standard, balancing has been carried out using half
key, and the shaft is marked with a RED tape, with the
text "Balanced with half key".
To avoid vibration the coupling-half or pulley must be
balanced with half key after the keyway has been
machined.
In the event of balancing w i t h full key the shaft is
marked w i t h a YELLOW tape, with the text "Balanced
with full key".
To avoid vibration the coupling-half or pulley must be
balanced without a key after the keyway has been
machined.
in case balancing without key, the shaft is marked with
a BLUE tape, with the text "Balanced without key".
Maintenance a n d lubrication
General
inspection
Inspect the machine at regular intervals.
Keep the machine clean and ensure free
ventilation airflow.
Check the condition of shaft seals (eg V-ring) and
replace if necessary.
Check the condition of connections and mounting
and assembly bolts.
Check the bearing condition by listening for
unusual noise, vibration measurement, bearing
temperature, inspection of spent grease or SPM
bearing monitoring.
* W h e n changes of condition occur,
dismantle the machine, check the parts
and replace if necessary.
Lubrication
Machines with permanently greased bearings
Machines up to frame size 180 are normally fitted with
permanently greased bearings of either Z or 2Z types.
Bearing types are specified in the respective product
catalogues and on the rating plate of each motor from
size 112 and larger.
As a guide, adequate lubrication can be achieved for the
following duration, according to L1 at ambient
temperature of 25 C.
32 000 - 45 000 duty hours for 4 pole machines.^'
16 000 - 26 000 duty hours for 2 and 2/4 pole
1 machines.''
ABB Motors policy is to have reliability as a vital issue

in bearing lubrication intervals. That is why we follow the
LI-principle (meaning that 99 % of the motors are sure
to make the interval time). According to L I policy the
lubrication intervals are as follows:
Frame
size
112
132
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
Amount 3600
Of grease r/min
g/bearing
3000
r/min
1800
r/min
1500
r/min
Ball bearings
Lubrication Intervals in duty hours
10
10000 13000 18000 21000
15
9000 11000 17000 19000
25
7000 9500 14000 17000
30
6000 8000 13500 16000
40
4000 6000 11000 13000
50
3000 5000 10000 12500
60
9000 11500
2500 4000
70
8000 10500
2000 3500
90
2000 3500
6500
8500
120
1200 2000
4200 6000
120
4200
6000
1200 2000
1000
r/min
500-900
r/min
25000
23000
21000
20000
17000
16500
15000
14000
12500
10000
10000
28000
26500
24000
23000
21000
20000
18000
17000
16000
13000
13000
10500
10000
8500
8000
7500
7000
6000
5000
5000
12000
11500
10500
10000
9000
8500
8000
6500
6500
Roller bearings
Lubrication intervals in duty hours
160
180200
225
250
280
315
355
400
25
30
40
50
60
70
90
120
120
3500
3000
2000
1500
1300
1000
1000
400
400
4500
4000
3000
2500
2000
1700
1700
1000
1000
7000
7000
5500
5000
4500
4000
3300
2000
2000
8500
8000
6500
6000
5700
5300
4300
3000
3000
The shorter times apply to larger frame sizes.

''
Depending on application and load conditions, see

applicable product catalogue.
Hours of operation for vertical motors are half of the
above values.
Machines with relubrication systenri

, , V, . WARNING Tf , . . 5 l * ^ t . ; | { ^ 4 ' r . ^ ^ ^ | . - | . . ^
, f - f Bevvare of ail rotating parts! ' ': f '%'^3^t1-li..j
Relubrication procedure:
- Remove grease outlet plug if fitted.
- Press fresh grease into the bearing until all old grease
has been forced out
- Let the motor run 1-2 hours to ensure that all excess
grease is forced out of the bearing. Close the grease
outlet plug if fitted.
Regrease motors while running. If this is not possible,
lubrication can be carried out while the machine is at a
standstill. In this case, use only half the quantity of
grease, then run the motor for a few minutes at full
speed. When the motor has stopped, the remaining
quantity of grease can be forced in until the old grease
has been replaced.
After 1-2 running hours close the grease outlet plug (if
fitted).
Lubrication intervals for vertical machines are half of the

above values.
The amount of grease stated in the table should be
doubled if an automatic regreasing system is used.
The table values are based on the motor running at rated
output in an ambient temperature of about + 25 (approx.
80C bearing temperature). The values should be halved
for 15C increase in bearing temperature and may be
doubled for 15C decrease in ambient temperature.
:|^J4 WARNING
"" | J h e maximum operating temperature of the
x5?: ^.grease and bearings'must not be exceeded
Higher speed operation, eg in frequency converter
applications, or lower speed with heavy load will require
shorter lubrication intervals. Consult ABB Sales Office in
such cases.
Typically a doubling of speed will require a reduction of
lubrication intervals to approx. 40 % of values tabulated
above.
Suitability of bearings for high speed operation must be
checked.
The grease outlet plug must be removed permanently

with automatic lubrication.
If the machine is fitted with a lubrication information
plate, follow the given values, otherwise use the values
in table below.
(.'
Lubricants
E n v i r o n m e n t a l requirements
When regreasing, use only special ball bearing grease

with the following properties:
- good quality grease with lithium complex soap and with
mineral- or PAO-oil
- base oil viscosity 100-150 cST at 40C
- consistency NLGI grade 2 or 3
- temperature range -30C - +120C, continuously.
The following table shows catalogue values of sound

pressure levels at 1 m from the machines surface.
Grease with the correct properties is available from all

the major lubricant manufacturers.
Frame
size
The following (or similar) high performance grease can

be used
EssoUnirex
N2 orN3
.
Shell
Albida EMS 2
.
SKF
LGHQ3
.
Mobil
MobilithSHClOO
.
Klber
KluberplexBEM41 132
.
BP
Energrease LC2
The following normal type of grease can be used if the
regreasing interval is halved (these types of grease
should not be used when bearing temperature is above
100C)
Esso
Shell
SKF
Mobil
Kluber
BP
Beacon 2 or 3
Alvania RL2 or RL3
LGMT2or3
Mobilux2
Centoplex2
Energrease LS2
If the make of grease is changed and compatibility is

uncertain, consult ABB Sales Office.
Highly loaded and/or slowly rotating bearings require EPgrease.
If the ambient temperature is below -25C or above
+55C, or bearing temperature Is above 110C, consult
ABB Sales Office regarding suitable grease.
NOTE!
Always use high speed grease for high speed machines
and some other models, e.g. M2/M3_ 355 and 400 2pole machines, where the speed factor is higher than
400 000 (calculated as Dm x n where Dm = average
bearing diameter, mm ; n = rotational speed, rpm).The
following, or similar, types of grease can be used:
.
.
Kluber
Kluber
Shell
Esso
Mobil
-^
Asonic GHY 72
AsonicHQ 72-102
Albida EMS 2
LT2
MobilithSHClOO
WARNING
Greasi c.inc3u -c ikin imt jti n ind ^ / P
in Ham ! ition
Follow J I I O'lfi l> procnuliunL r J l . f i 1 b / thi.
manuf n twrcr
Spare parts
When ordering spare parts, the full type designation and
product code, as stated on the rating plate, must be
specified.
If the machine is stamped with a serial manufacturing
number, this should also be given.
Noise
levels
Smaller machines have a sound pressure level not

exceeding 70 dB(A).
Guideline sound pressure level dB(A)

2 pole
4 pole
6 pole
8 pole
61
56
59
59
59
59
63
60
63
63
63
63
66
65
72
68
75
75
Values for specific machines can be found in the
relevant product catalogues.Tolerance 3 dB(A).
132
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
69
69
69
72
74
75
77
80
83
83
59
62
62
63
66
67
68
71
80
80
The table values refer to 50 Hz sinusoidal supply

conditions.
For 60 Hz sinusoidal supply, add 4 dB(A) to the above
values.
For sound pressure levels with non-sinusoidal supplies,
contact ABB Sales Office.
Sound pressure levels for all machines in the above
frame sizes having separate cooling systems and for
series M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*, and M2R*/M3R*, are
indicated in separate Machine Instructions.
Rewinding
Rewinding should always be carried out by qualified
repair shops.
Smoke venting and other special motors should not be
rewound without first contacting ABB Motors.
These instructions do not cover ail details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible condition to be
met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should additional information required, please contact
the nearest ABB Sales Office.
Motor trouble shooting chart
Your motor service and any trouble shooting must be handled by qualified persons with proper tools and equipment.
TROUBLE
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
Motor fails to start
Blown fuses
Replace fuses with proper type and rating.
Overioad trips
Check and reset overioad in starter.
Improper power supply
Check to see that power supplied agrees with motor

rating plate and load factor.
Improper line connections
Check connections with diagram supplied with

motor.
Open circuit in winding or control

switch
Indicated by humming sound when switch is

closed. Check for loose wiring connections. Also,
ensure that all control contacts are closed.
Mechanical failure
Check to see if motor and drive turn freely. Check

bearings and lubrication.
Short circuited stator
Indicated by blown fuses. Motor must be rewound.
Poor stator coil connection
Remove end bells, locate with test lamp.
Rotor defective
Look for broken bars or end rings.
Motor may be overloaded
Reduce load.
Motor stalls
Motor runs and then

dies down
One phase may be open
Check lines for open phase.
Wrong application
Change type or size. Consult manufacturer.
Overload
Reduce load.
Low voltage
Ensure the rating plate voltage is maintained.

Check connection.
Open circuit
Fuses blown, check overload relay, stator and push

buttons.
Power failure
Check for loose connections to line, fuses and

control.
Motor does not come
Not applied property
Consult supplier for proper type.
up to speed
Voltage too low at motor terminals

because of line drop
Use higher voltage or transformer terminals or

reduce load. Check connections. Check conductors
for proper size.
Starting load too high
Check load motor is supposes to c a n ^ at start
Broken rotor bars or loose rotor
Look for cracks near the rings. A new rotor may be

required, as repairs are usually temporary.
Open primary circuit
Locate fault with testing device and repair.
Excessive load
Reduce load.
Motor takes too long to
accelerate and/or draws Low voltage during start
Check for high resistance. Adequate wire size.
high amp
Defective squirrel cage rotor
Replace with new rotor.
Applied voltage too low
Get power company to increase power tap.
Wrong rotation
Wrong sequence of phases
Reverse connections at motor or at switchboard.
Motor overtieats while
Overload
Reduce load.
running underloaded
Frame or bracket vents may be

clogged with dirt and prevent proper
ventilation of motor
Open vent holes and check for a continuous stream

of air from the motor.
Motor may have one phase open
Check to make sure that all leads are well

connected.
Grounded coil
Locate and repair.
Unbalanced terminal voltage
Check for faulty leads, connections and

transformers.
TROUBLE
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
Motor vibrates
Motor misaligned
Realign.
Weak support
Strengthen base.
Coupling out of balance
Balance coupling.
Driven equipment unbalanced
Rebalance driven equipment.
Defective bearings
Replace bearings.
Bearings not in line
Line up property.
Balancing weights shifted
Rebalance motor.
Contradiction between balancing of

rotor and coupling
(half key - full key)
Rebalance coupling or motor
Polyphase motor running single phase Check for open circuit.

Excessive end play
Scraping noise
Noisy operation
Hot bearings general
Hot bearings ball
Adjust bearing or add shim.
Fan rubbing fan cover
Remove interference.
Fan striking insulation
Clear fan.
Motor loose on bedplate
Tighten holding bolts.
Airgap not uniform
Check and correct bracket fits or bearing.
Rotor unbalance
Rebalance.
Bent or sprung shaft
Straighten or replace shaft.
Excessive belt pull
Decrease belt tension.
Pulleys too far away
Move pulley closer to motor bearing.
Pulley diameter too small
Use larger pulleys.
Misalignment
Correct by realignment of drive.
Insufficient grease
Maintain proper quality of grease in bearing.
Deterioration of grease or lubricant

contaminated
Remove old grease, wash bearings thoroughly in

kerosene and replace with new grease.
Excess lubricant
Reduce quantity of grease, bearing should not be

more than 1/2 filled.
Overioaded bearing
Check alignment, side and end thrust.
Broken ball or rough races
Replace bearing, first clean housing thoroughly.
al
-^
nM
a2
^-
Figure 3.
Bild 3.
Figure 3.
FiguraS.
Figura 3.
Figur 3.
Kuva 3.
LV Motors/Machine instructions 10-2000
Mounting of half-coupling or pulley

Anbau von Kupplungshlften und
Riemenscheiben
Montage des demi-accouplements et des
poulies
Montaje de mitades de acoplamiento y
poleas
Montaggio di semigiunti e pulegge
Montering av kopplinshalvoroch drivskivor
Kytkinpuolikkaan ja hihnapyran asennus
57
LI
W2c>^-0Ln
Wlcf
Û2
PE LI
> r\
r^
i Qr.,_,,iQ_.iiD
- I
I Hl^ i ; y.1LW1i.
U
56
L2 L3
\\-6 !
Z) !
UUi.-VLYÛ
I
Cl
L2 L3 PE
Hi'
i p
o
o
iyiL.YiiJy*ii.u.,2 L3 PE
LI
Figure 1.
Bildl.
Figure 1.
Figura 1.
Figura 1.
Figur 1.
Connection diagram
Anschludiagram
Connection
Conexin
Collegamento
Anslutningdiagramm
Figure 2.
Bild 2.
Figure 2.
Figure 2.
Figura 2.
Figur 2.
Kuva 2.
Belt drive
Riementrieb
Glissieres et entraTnements courroia
Carriles tensores y correas
Slitte tendicinghia e pulegge
Remdrift
Hihnakytt
LV Motors/;
!n!-tructioris ' 2(
"See refrigerant diagram"
1^00
IS:
^^
4 ; -*Lfting eye 025 mm
\^
I ii"^
?7.Ti: SEAWATER OUT
321: SEAWATER N
H-h
a
100
:ffi:
1750
T750
^ -
i700
FRONTVIEW
I VIEW ' A ' I
600
600
\
\ \
-ON
//
(
CM
/"/
/
09
08
Gauges
Pressostats
Salor
Danfoss
0100
MP/KP
07
Filter / Drier
4411/11A
06
Liquid seperator
Condensor
Castel
Frigomec
Bitzer
05
04
03
REOURED SPACE KR ISTAILATOI Mi
02
SEMI
01
POS QTY
3700
I
TOP VIEW
10/S-54
K1353TB-2
AHU
Vibration damper
Salor
GHT
60-012-031/70sh
Compressor
Frame
Bitzer
H&H
4G30.2Y
3.7mxt25mx0.8m
DESCRIPTION
MAKE
TYPE
REMARK
CondansDP typa K'ffi3TB-2

IDisdiarge line connectkm (1 S / S I
Safefy valve comection
Wafer inlet connedim (R 2 ^
UqJd level incfcaforWater outtef cftmecrtan (R 2n
Screwed flanges DH 2586;l/16
Liquid line comafion (1 3/8')
Remarks:
* Condensor connections according DiN2633,
ND10/16
* Capacity control 50-100%
* Be sure that the freon lines and seawater
lines to the unit are connected on the unit
with flexible connections
iSFRHRWff
0 1 TYPE
R-WÂ
WEBfTUNIT
RALCOUSIMT
V-KOO
MOTOR POWER
MAD POWER SUPPLY
COQUHS CAPACITY
2x32
KW
c440V/60Hz
2x95
KW
EVAPORATCN TEMP.
COrOENaNQ TD1P.
5 (mear
43(nt8aFd
Bilzer^-^
KB
6M9
"C
t
Changed equipment color ace. remarks owner

IDG 18-07-05
Rev. Description
Designer
Controller
Scale: 1-.1 Subject
Jinling SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Sheet
: 1 of
&
Units: mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No. :12005055-401
Rev.
Controller LAYOUT CONDENSING UNIT AHU
Designer
AvM
2x BITZER 4G-30.2Y / K13S3TB2 (2x 50%)
11-04-'05
A2
H E l N E N a . H O P M A N EIMGINEERING B V
A l R l O Q N O i T l O N I N G WEATINGsA/ENTIlÂTION REPRJGERATIONi
P.p. aax8-g75P<3ABga^;iBw.-g-T>isNi'Ty>H>,-itie-P*sin^:-t01 |P5S30-ae8S00-rx:40i
ft30O-S88eS88-jwvm.'-*9i.-i-i'îs.--i-i.fta.-n
POS QTY
PRESSOSTAT SETTINGS
Lowft'asre
Cs(i CErtrot 50%
f
mmm
wsTRUcna aotBiJC
<:
Off
FROM AHU
0.6 har
(7) ^
Fii
WW
aba*
pjNii
3 har
tMereEgre
{tut
ItaTj
(7)
-f^Sl
HUi prsare
iQ-ai
~^
(7)
-to conden^ unit
ISi
AH. UNIT
cin
EVAPtMTCR
::s
^to consten^ imif
n sudMhe sitM cffift^ n i d fhe

rhandhg tul, mu f r d re above the
evaporahr. b^re sing fn ihe condensigiil.
n^2
WARNINO: fgnoiing these instructions can cause seeioua damage fa Oi compressor,
'[321
?
TEST PRESSURE HIGHSIDE
25 BAR
TEST PRESSIM LOWSCE
17 BAR
VACUUM TEST MINIMUM
1000 micron ( 1 Hour )
OLCHAKBE
4,5 Ltr. BSE-32(each)
V
20
0?
O Of
|i3/r|
Danfoss
230V/50-60 Hz
HH00554100
04
Oil pressure control
Danfoss
MP-55
HH00579340
05
Low pressure control
Danfoss
KP-1
HH00577900
06
High pressure control
Danfoss
KP-5
HH00578180
07
Oil pressure gauge
Salor
0-12,5 Bar
HH00726250
08
Low pressure gauge
Salor
0-12,5 Bar
HH00726250
09
Higti pressure gauge
Salor
0-30 Bar
HH00726230
10
Liquid seperator
Frigomec
IO/S-54
HH00723830
11
(Muffler
Frigomec
M-20
HH00723940
12
Condenser
Bitzer
K1353TB2
HH01709130
13
Level indicator
Bitzer
BuRt on
14
Valve
Bitzer
Built on
15
16.1
Safety valve
Castel
28 Bar
HH01936550
Filter shell
Castel
4412/11A
HH00722730
16,2
Filter block
Charge valve
Castel
Castel
4490/
6110/22
HH00722870
17
4
2
18
Ball valve
Danfoss
B-34501
HH00685860
19
Sigiitglass
KMP
KS6-ST-11
HH20001340
20.1
Solenoid valve
Danfoss
EVR-22 1 3/8"
HH0564480
20.2
Coll for solenoid valve
Danfoss
230 V 50-60 Hz
HH00554100
21.1
Therm, exp valve
Danfoss
TES 55-37
HH00590700
2 X 95
KW
COMPRESSOR SPEED
1750
RPM
MOTOR POWER
2x32
KW
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
3x440V/60Hz
CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
1x230V/60Hz
21.2
Orifice assembly
Danfoss
No:01
HH00590300
WATER FLOW
2x 20
M3/H
21.3
Valve body
Danfoss
1 1/8" X 1 3/8"
HH00590770
PRES. DROP COND.
2x 19
kP
22
A.H.U
Salor
190 KW
23
Thermostat
Danfoss
RT-140
HH00552760
24
Vibration damper
GMT
60-012-031/70sh
25
Frame
3.7mx1,25fnx0.8m
26
insulation
Salop
Armaflex
27
Vibration damper
Loggers
DN-80
28
Temp, indicator
Econosto
Fig. 1645
29
Black steel
ST. 37
500 mm
Del. Yard
CSU
30
Pressure indicator
Econosto
fig 366
an
31
Pressure swith
John. control P48AAA9110
HH00720830
13 mm
rsn rw-\ r^n

I 04 I I 05 I r"6~l
-li3/y|
34,9x1,4 mn
28
37,7 tOT
r^n
^
HHMf
HHMf
r^n 0
CJO.
n n
27
13
^
32TCN
jm
I 2 8 II 3 0 I 3 1 I
n m n~i rTg~i
CJO
0N80 (89x35 mm)

37,7 tour
30
r29~i
@
"2g~H 30 I "3i~l
32^
AvM
e--^
Designer
AvM
11-04-'05
^n
Scale:
Units:
28-04-'05
Designer
Rev. Description
Cooling agent: Seawater
CONDENSING UNIT
3
Qty. pos. 23 changed to 2
Coding agent: Seawater
grn
Coil for Capacity control
COOLINQ CAPACITY
DN80 (89x3.5 mm>
nnrinf
1 3/8'
ni
34.9x14 fim
36l|XC3E
03
LIQUIDLINE
28
-D-
140 Watt
an
-|i3/r|
t & T j
Bitzer
13/8'
-Cxl-
Crankcase tieater
HOTGASLINE
2 1/8'
r4~i r5~i r6~i
13
02
SUCTIONLINE
JH
4G-30.2Y
ron r^n ron
<
Bitzer
43 (mean)
i^'t^y
54x13 i m
Compressor
CONOENSINQ TEMP.
M3
34.9)cl4nin
an
01
5 (mean)
24
|i3/y
34,9x14 mm
HH PART NO.
EVAPORATION TEMP.
24
03
TYPE
R-404A
isiiafon 19mm
MAKE
REFRIGERANT
20
When refrigerant lines are soldered, nitrogen must

always be added through the lines, to prevent the
installation from dirt, scale, etc.
DESCRIPTION
1;1 Subject
Jinling SY
Reference N o . : 120.05.055 - 058
mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing N o
Controller
; 12005055-400
FREON DIAGRAM CONDENSING UNIT AHU

2x BITZER 4 G - 3 0 . 2 Y
Controller
Sheet
A2
1 of
Rev.
/ K1353TB2 (2x 50%)
HEINEIM S H O P M A N E N G I N E E R I N G B V
'Alf31^GQN01T!ONINGSHETJNQ3aLVENTItTJOid3BReJ=B]GEfiATiaiSIP.O. aax-a750a[ASsl8naw.-^-T'^Ni*i.'T-^-^{<-FNan:-t01 ( C S O O - g a g g S O O rx: *Ol g g O O - ^ S S e ^ e g - \Âwj.'-<qi,ôTTag,-ân.c<3.-^
ITT
Revision
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
28-04-05
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
Page Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
40
50
51
52
53
54
Symbols and final check

Cabinet view
Main circuit diagram
Control circuit diagram power supply
Control circuit diagram fan
Control circuit diagram compressor 1
Control circuit diagram hotwater pump 1 and 2
Control circuit diagram general alarm
Cable connection
Cable connection
Cable connection
Cable connection
: Cable connection
State of diagram
A - Offer
B - Issued for Approval
C - Approved for Construction
D - As Constructed
E - Final
Meinen i Hopman
Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spalcenburg
tlie Netlietlands
wrtww.heinentiopman.co
Contents o( Iliis document is CONRDENTIAL

Witliout ptiol perinission of Meinen & Hopman
its not permitted to duplicate Of to inform Itiird
parlies any of ttie contents of this document
Cop/right by Meinen! Hopman B.V.
All tights [esecved.
Project 120.05.055-058
Title Air Handling Unit
Table of contents
10
12
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no 50001SSVAHUM
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
Revision
B.1
Project manager M.Aartsen
15
16
120.05.055/RT
17
18
ge A
20
12
iTT
14
15
16
SYMBOLS AND FINAL CHECK

Project number:
Title:
Drawing number:
Voltage:
Frequency:
Current:
Protect:
Weight:
Symbols:
120.05.055/RT
Air Handling Unit
5000155
3x440V
60 Hz
In max 138A
IP54
75 KG
Wiring colour code:

In accordance with:
lEC-EN
60204-1 :2002
Safety of machinery.Electrical equipment
of machines. Part 1: General requirements
Code Code = Description
Main current: Minimum size 1,5 mm'

GreenA'ellow = Earth
Blue
= Common
Black
= AC / DC
In accordance with:
IEC 60617:1995 "Graphical symbols for diagrams"
m
m
Symbol codes:
Control current: Minimum size 1 mm'
"0=^
X.2
GreenA'ellow
Blue
Red
Orange
Grey
= Earth
= DC
= AC
= External supply AC & DC for locking
= Measuring
XO-oX1-0X2-0X3-0X4-0X5-0X6-0X7-0-
Power supply
Main power
Control power > 50 V
Measuring wire
Control power < 50 V
External current
.B..
.b..
.h..
.H..
.K..
.L..
.M. .
.P..
.S..
. 1 ..
.U..
. Y..
. X ...
B = Sensor
E = Heating element
F = Fuse holders/circuit breakers
H = Signal
K = Relay
L = Mains filter
M = Motor
P = Indicator
S = Switch / Push button
T = Transformer
U = Electrical equipment
Y = Valves
X = Terminals
T1 T2
SOLID STATE RELAY
INDICATOR
HOUR COUNTER
SIGNAL HORN
r\iî'
i{
MANUAL MOTOR STARTER
J^
T
.K. 1 , 1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
;,-8
Data
RELAY
CHECKED BY:
INSTALLATION REPORT CABINET:
CABLE DESIGN BASED ON:
This control cabinet is completely ctiecked for transport and installation.

It is possible during transport and installation VnaX failures are generated.
Before starting up the installation, the installer must check the complete
installation, cable works and control cabinet for failures
Lloyds Register of Shipping: Rules and regulations for the classification of ships
Part 6, Chapter 2, Tabel 2.10.3 noimal operations.
The electrical installer must check all these installatkin conditions and can be
held responsible for this cable design.
Firm:
Name:
Date:
Important! Check all the connections

Prevent the contactors from becoming dusty
Approval:
(v.2.3)
Heinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V,
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Nethetlards
vMw.hcirenhopfTian.com
Contents of this document is CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior petmission of Heinen & Hopman
it's rrol petmitled to duplicate or to inform third
parfies any of the contents of this document.
Copyright by Heinen i Hopman B.V,
All rights reserved.
"T
Project 120.05.055-058
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Revision date 28-04-05
Drawing no 5000155\AHU\1
Project no
120.05.055/RT
5000155
Project manager M.Aartsen Page 1

16
17
18
19
12
13
150
.^-40~i
riH
5S10
'( ))
3Q1
^! ^-îf
Hour
BK6
SKliF
4F3 4F3
C o c
tmm' B
o o 0
7K10
J:f^3:lJ
r-1 i^'î r
40D3
E3-
'iJYJ!
"""I
40K4
oocxjocoo oooooocx)
j5Se
r -
Ti
-qD--H:^--a3-
6K10
[J
3F13
3T8
7H8 7Hi3 7H.S 7H7 7H2 7H13 "
rca
VM ,.;^,
i
-S
" ^ ^
3F14
^^'BB
6S4
.i.
3Q2 3Q2 302 3Q2
O 'r4
T i
1
6H8 6H13 6H4 6H7 6H2 6H1S
210
ir
5H6 5H8 SH3
THTl^
yw
Ifltffl Ifii
ooooocxx,
GOOOOOOC
O^-S-Jj
X2
T[7ri^5T^
C-
I2_
I. I
Mamklure.fflaME
rype J E M
Size :SO76l)'21fl)'li'(()
Colour M i m
Sealing :IPS^
Meinen & Hopman
Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750GASpakenbufg
The Netherlands
vw(W. heinenhopman.com
Contents otthis document is CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior permission of Meinen & Hopman
it's not permitted to duplicate or to inform third
partes any of the contents of ttiis document.
Copyright by Meinen & Mopman B.V,
Allrightsressrvod.
Project 120.05.055-058
Cabinet view
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Revision date
28-04-05
Drawing no
5000155\AHU\1
Project no
120.05.055/RT

15
16
ITT
18
5000155
Page 2
19
20
12
13
16
18
19
-/4.2
-/4.2
1 3
::T^
zlû.
* ((N
5 n
GV3-ME63+GV3.A01
-3P4@
Celsa
100A
MG
^vi
-3T4
10075
GV3-ME63+QV3-A01
<I)
-6K10
/6.10
-3P7
Celsa
100 A
\\\
-3F18
::T^
::T^
GV2-ME20+GV-AE11
S RI
1A
GV2-ME05<-GV-AE11
GV2-ME05*GV-AE11
WI5
-7K1I
/7.10
-5K4
;5.4
\\\
-8K6
/8.6
\\\
S\\
.8K1
/8.10
INS 160A 3P
r-
'i
990
r-
999
999
999
-3M8
COMPRESSOR 2
P-34,5I<W ln-55A
-3M11
AC-FAN
P=8.6kWln=15,4A
-3M14
HOT WATERPUMP 1
P=0.37I<W ln=1A
iapi
3 PI
kkk
ILVL2'L2'PE
-supply
3X440VAC 60Hz
lmax=138A
1.Z;
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V,
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
vww.hcinenhopman.co'
VV
(3^
-3M5
COMPRESSOR 1
P=34,6kW ln=55A

Without prioi permission of Meinen & Hopman
partes any of the conterits of this document.
Copyright by Meinen & Hopman B.V.
Project 120.05.055-058
-3M18
HOT WATERPUMP 2
P=0.37kWln=1A
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
5000155\AHU\1
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
120.05.055/RT
10
16
17
16
5000155
Page 3
19
19T
1 6 i 1 7 r
/3.19,
/3.19/3.19-
,^
6A
4A
D3206
D3104
?il
-4P3(y)
Celsa \
500V
Heiner 8. Hopman
Engineering 8,V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenbutg
The Netherlands
VASW. hei ne nh o p ma n. CO m

Without prior permission of Heinen & Hopmar
parties any of the contents of this document.
Copyright by Heinen & Hopman B.V.
Project 120.05.055-058
Designer
M.Hekl<enberg
Drawing no
5000155\AHUM
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
120.05.055/RT
Project manager
16
17
M.Aartsen
18
5000155
Page
4
19
12
13
14
15
16
1 iTT
17
-5S10
humidifiei
on/off
-X2
5S4(}^/
emergency
switch
-5S4.1
fan
off
E-7
12
-5S10.1 O - ^
:^\
-5K4
4
humidity
-X2
-3F11
;3.11
A1
X1
-5H3
XB5-AVM4
frost alarm
LED (red)
(X)
^ ^
X2
.3F11
/3,11
5K4 r
.5H6
XB5-AVM3
fan on
LED (green)
( ^
^
X2
-5E7
25W
fieater
-sYforiS
-5H8
XBS-AVM-l
overload
LED (red)
iiumi.
valve
0
^^
X2
X2
/3.11
LCl-D18P7<-LA1-DtJ40
/3.11
/3.11
'11
73_~
'n.s
S3^
Heinen & Hopman
Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750GASpakenbiJrg
The Nethedands
www.heifienhopman.com

Without prior permission of Heinen & Hopman
it's not permitted to duplicate or lo inform third
Cowright by Heinen & Hopman B.V.
All rights resetved.
: \ :\r
Project 120.05.055-058
Control circuit diagram fan
10
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
S000155\AHU\1
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
120.05.055/RT

12
16
17
18
5000155
Page
20
11
X2
1 2
19
ho
interlock
5K4
/5.4
pressure switch
\
6S7
high press.
.X2 i
1"
B\
22 8 A R ;
-6S4f\-
compressor 1
^ ^
a.ij
-6S8
low press.
6S4.1
oil press.
-6S18
low press.
< 1.5 BAR
0^
-6S12
therm.
RT-140
<
> 4,5 BAR
B\
DA
< 1,5 BAR
<
> 4,5 BAR
< 0,9 BAR
<
&
-3FS
/3.5
t
-3F5
/3.5
-6K10
10
59
Jxi
-6H2(X)
XB! AVM4
ir I alarm
LE D (red)
-6H4
Xas-AVM4
oil pre ;s alarm
;D(red)
(X)
^^
-6H7
XB5-AVM4
high press.
LED (red)
(X)
^^
-6H8
(X)
compr. 1 on
LED (green)
Hh
-6H9 [ h j
hour
counter
6Y12 X
l*\
-6K10 |
valve
liquid
1.r-^2
3r .4
5 ^ - ^ 6
-6E15
carter
heating
100W
.6H13
XB5-AVM4
compr. 1 overload
LED (red)
^^
A1
-6E16
motor
heating
50W
6Y19 r i S
.6H18
X85-AVM5
heating on
LED (geel)
-X2"
unload
valve
-X2
/3.5
;3.5
;3.5
1 3 ^ ^ 0 4
21
_ 2 2 15
LC1-D50P7
<s.
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
www.Seinenhopman.com
Contents ofthis document is CONFIDENTIAL

Without priof permission of Heinen & Hopman
its not permitted to duplicate or to inform third
parlies any of the contents of this document.
Copyright by Heinen i Hopman B.V.
All rights reserved
Project 120.05.055-058
8
10
11
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
S000155\AHLI\1
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
120.05.055/RT

12
13
16
17
18
5000155
Page 6
19
20
10
interlock
pressure switch
-5K4
/5.4
17
18
19
-7S7
high press.
> 22 BAR
B
-7S4
compressoir 2
16
&
7
N|J2rT_ T 1 4 j
O o
-7S8
low press.
-7S4.1
oil press.
< 1,5 BAR
EE}
-7S12
therm.
RT-140
<
-7S18
low press.
o\
<
EA
o
< 0,9 BAR
3F8
/3.8
-7H4
X5-AVM4
oil pre s alarm
L D (red)
Heinen & Hopman

Engineering B-V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenbufg
The Netherlands
\wiw,heinenhopman.co
-A^ A
-3F8
/3.8
7K10
10
7H2
0
.AVM4 ^^
alarrB
3 (red)
<< 1,5 BAR

^
EE}
> 4.5 BAR
-7H7
XB6-AVM4
high press.
LED (red)
Contents ol this document Is CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior permission ot Heinen & Hopman
Cop/fight by Heinen & Hopman B,V.
(X)
^^
-7H8
XB5-AVM3
compr. 2 on
LED {green)
IT
(XI
CII
7H9 [ h ]
hour
counter
I
-TKIO I
valve
liquid
7H13
XB5-AVM4
compr 2 overload
LED (red)
Project 120.05.055-058
17T
.7E15
carter
heating
100W
M
^^
R -7E16
motor
heating
50W
.7Y19 C Z S
-7H18
XB5-AVM5
heating on
LED (geel)
^.
(X)
^
unload
valve
X2
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
5000155\AHU\1
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
120.0S.055/RT
13
14
16
17
18
5000155
Page 7
19
20
10 I
11 !
12I
13 I
14I
15 I
16 I
17I
18 I
19 I 2 0
1 0 2
-ess
^M
pump 1 - o f f - pump 2
AZ A
-8S4
hotwater
cH
press.switch
-.H
13^
-8S13
hotwater
press, switch
r^
Chi
l
-3F14
/3.14
-8K4
8K6 I
LC1-D09P7
pump 1
I
XB6-AVM3
pump 1 on
LEO (green)
'Vit-" 6
X2
8K10 I
LC1-D09P7
pump 2
-8K13
Schiele
-8H11 ( X )
XB5-AVM3
pump 2 on
LED (green)
_14
22
Contents ol this document is CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior permission ol Meinen & Hopma^^
it's not permitted to duplicate ot to inform third
parties any of the contents ot this document,
Copyrigtil by Meinen & Hopman B,V,
All tights reserved.
8H16
XB5-AVM4
pump 1 overload
LED (red)
-3Fia
/3.18
(X)
pump 2 overload
LED (red)
'S3t-" 10
/3.14
/3.18
/3.14
Hoinen 8. Hopman
Engineering B,V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenbutg
The Netherlands
wvw/. he i ne nti o pm a n, CO m
-3F14
;3.14
-3F18
/3.18
't
/3.18
21
Project 120.05.055-058
Control circuit diagram hotwater pump 1 and 2
10
12
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
5000155\AHUM
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
120.05.055/RT

16
17
5000155
Page
8
19
12
1 3 I 1 4 r
17
15
18
/s.ie.
/8.17
/6.3-
12,14
-40K4
4
\
\
11
40K4|
Heinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
www.heinenhopman.com

Without prior pernvssion of Heinen & Hopman
if s not permitted to duplicate or to inform third
partieB any of the contents of this document.
Copyright by Heinen & Hopman B.V,
All rights reserved
63
-5K4
ISA
I -''^
general alarm
\
84
-X5,
) <1
3 4
(^
-InterlockCabin unit
Re- He< ting
Project 120.05.055-058
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
5000155\AHU\1
Revision date
28-04-05
Project no
120.05.055/RT
5000155
Page 40
14
15
16
IT^T
18
19
Cable no:
20.00
20.00
4x1,5mnn^PE
Heinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V,
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
www.heinenhopman com
Uz:
1
25.00
4x1,5mm^PE
-105

W t h o u t ptior permission of Heinen & Hopman
parties any of the contents ot this document.
Copyright by Heinan & Hopmari B.V,
12
40.00
4x2,5mm^ PE
-104
11
40.00
4x16mm^ PE
-103
50.00
4x16mm^ PE
-102
10
1'
Qland'iiltr.;:: Core
4x70mm' PE
-101
Cable type
-000
in
13
14
15
16
17
18
gn/ye
:PE
-SUPPLYiPE
-3Q2:2
-SUPPLY:L1
-3Q2:4
-SUPPLY:L2
-3Q2:6
-SUPPLY:L3
gn/ye
:PE
-3M5:PE
-X1:1
-3M5:U
-XI :2
-3M5:V
-XI :3
-3M5:W
gn/ye
:PE
-3M8:PE
-XI :4
-3M8:U
-XI :5
-3M8:V
-XI :6
-3M8:W
gn/ye
:PE
-3M11;PE
-X1:7
-3IV111:U
-X1:8
-3M11:V
-XI :9
-3M11:W
gn/ye
:PE
-3M14:PE
Power supply 3x440VAC 60Hz

1
Ac-fan
Hotwaterpump 1
-X1:10
-3M14:U
-X1:11
-3IV114:V
-X1:12
-3IVI14;W
gn/ye
:PE
-3M18:PE
-X1:13
-3M18:U
-X1:14
-3M18:V
-X1:15
-3M18:W
M.Hekkenberg
Hotwaterpump 2
Drawing no 5000155\AHUM
Project no
120.05.055/RT
11 1
12
20
Compressor 2
10
Compressor 1
Designer
19
Orig||j|i>;;r ^;lbjcf:";;:^^:^:^;|
Project 120.05.055-058
Cable connection
1
13
14
15
16
17
18
5000155
Page 50
1
19
20
Cable no:
10
3x1,5mm^PE
-202
4x1,5mm^PE
-203
If)
IB
1
14
15
16
-X2:1
-5S4:11
'-X2:2
-5S4:12
17
18
19
-X2:3
-5U4:BN
-X2:4
-5U4:BU
-X2:5
-5U4:WH
-X2:6
-5S10.1:
-X2:7
-5S10.1:
-X2:8
-5Y10:A1
-X2:9
-5Y10:A2
-X2:10
-X2:11
Interlock pressure switch 1
Oil pressure compressor 1
-X2:13
-X2:14
-6S4.1:S
-X2:12
-6S4.1:L
-X2:15
-6S4.1:M
-6S4.1:0
High pressure compressor 1
gn/ye
1
-X2:16
-6S7:1
-X2:17
-6S7:4
-X2:18
-6S7:2
M.Hekkenberg
Project no
120.05.055/RT

10
11
12
] &i i. 2;Ji
Humidifier valve
Designer
20
Hygrostat
Project 120.05.055-058
Cable connection
1
Frost protection
gn/ye
20.00

gn/ye
20.00
4x1,5mm^PE
Meinen 4 Hopman
Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 C3A Spakenburg
The Netherlands
13
gn/ye
20.00
Sxl.Smm^'PE
-207
gn/ye
20.00
Sxl.Smm^PE
-206
12
gn/ye
20.00
3x1,5mm^PE
-205
20.00
3x1,5mm=PE
-204
11
(SlahdJVltr, ; iôre- - Origin ; t ! fSBjct'f' :f S?!*:pf; ''y ''Îff'if/If-M

{.:,;::,,
Emergency switch
20.00
gn/ye
Cableityp
-201
13
14
15
16
17
18
5000155
Page 51
1
19
20
-208
f
1
m
!
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Low pressure compressor 1
-X2:19
-6S8:1
-X2:20
-6S8:4
-X2:21
-6S8:2
Thermostat compressor 1
-X2:22
-6S12:1
-X2:23
-6S12:4
Liquid valve compressor 1
-X2:24
-6Y12:A1
-X2:25
-6Y12:A2
-X2:26
-6E15:
-X2:27
-6E15:
Carter heating compressor 1
Motor heating compressor 1
gn/ye
1
-X2:28
-6E16:
-X2:29
-6E16:
-X2:30
-X2:31
Interlock pressure switch 2
gn/ye
Oil pressure compressor 2
gn/ye
20.00
Contents o( this document is CONFIDENTIAL

VWthout prior permission o( Heinen & Hopman
gn/ye
20.00
4x1,5mm^PE
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Nelheflands
13
gn/ye
20.00
5x1,5mm=PE
-215
gn/ye
20.00
Sxl.Smm^'PE
-214
12
gn/ye
20.00
3x1,5mnn^PE
-213
20.00
3x1,5mm^PE
-212
11
20.00
3x1,501^1== PE
-211
20.00
3x1,5mm='PE
-210
10
CSland-lyltr,, . iCore::/:,;';^ ^rigfrt::-;;!:; I-bjedt-":;":""'""-
4x1,5mm^ PE
-209
#tDte:type' :,,\;,i;P;, r'
Cabiino:'
>n
-X2:33
-7S4.1:0
-X2;34
-7S4.1:S
-X2:32
-7S4.1:L
-X2:35
-7S4.1:M
High pressure compressor 2
gn/ye
1
-X2:36
-7S7:1
-X2:37
-7S7:4
-X2:38
-7S7:2
Project 120.05.055-058
Cable connection
!
Designer
M.Hel(kenberg
Project no
120.05.055/RT
Project manager M.Aansen

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5000155
Page 52
1
19
20
-216
3x1,5mm'PE
-218
nur
1
1
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenbufg
The Netherlands
www.heinenhopman.coni
20.00
gn/ye
13
14
Origin
15
16
17
18
-X2:39
-7S8:1
-X2:40
-7S8:4
-X2:41
-7S8:2
-X2;42
-7S12:1
-X2:43
-7S12:4
gn/ye
1
-X2;44
-7Y12:A1
-X2:45
-7Y12:A2
Carter heating compressor 2
gn/ye
1
-X2:46
-7E15:
-X2:47
-7E15:
gn/ye
Motor heating compressor 2
-X2:48
-7E16:
-X2:49
-7E16:
Hotw/ater pressure switch 1
gn/ye
1
-X2:50
-8S4:
-X2:51
-8S4:
Hotwater pressure switch 2
gn/ye
1
-X2:52
-8S13:
-X2:53
-8S13:
Space heater 25W
gn/ye
11
-X2:55
-5E7:
-X2:56
-5E7:
12
20
Liquid valve compressor 2
M.Hekltenberg
Project no
120.05.055/RT

1
Thermostat compressor 2
10
19
Object
Designe
Low pressure compressor 2
Project 120.05.055-058
Gable connection
1
gn/ye
20.00

it's not permittod to duplicate or to inform third
Core
20.00
3x1,5mm^PE
-223
Gland Metr.
20.00
Sxt.Smm^'PE
12
20.00
3x1,5mm'PE
-222
11
20.00
3x1,5mm'PE
-221
20.00
Sxl.Smm^'PE
-220
10
20.00
Sxl.Smm^'PE
-219
LnJ1
4x1,5mm^PE
-217
Cable type
Cable no:
LO
13
14
15
16
17
18
5000155
Page 53
1
19
20
Cable type
Cable no:
-224
3x1,5mm^PE
-225
3x1,5mm==PE
-226
-2102
E
1
Core
gn/ye
^
1
14
Origin
15
16
17
18
-6S18:1
'-X2;58
-6S18:2
-X2:59
-6Y19:A1
-X2:60
-6Y19:A2
-X2:61
-7S18:1
-X2:62
-7S18:2
Unload valve compr.2
-X2:63
-7Y19:A1
-X2:64
-7Y19:A2
gn/ye
General alarm
-X5:1
-X5:2
gn/ye
11
Interlock Cabin Unit Re-Heating
-X5;3
-X5:4
-X2.1:1
-X2.1:2
-X2.1:3
12
-X2.1:4
11
-X2.1:5
14
-X2.1:6
-X2,1:7
-X2.1:8
12
-X2.1:9
11
-X2.1:10
14
12
20
Low pressure switch compr.2
INT compressor 1
INT compressor 2
M.Hekkenberg
Project no
120.05.055/RT

1
Unload valve compr.1
10
19
Low pressure switch compr.1

-X2:57
Designer
Object
Project 120.05.055-058
Cable connection
1
gn/ye
25.00
13
gn/ye
25.00
Conle nts of this document is CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior permission of Meinen 4 Hopman
it's nol permitted to duplicate or to inform third
partes any of the contents ol this document.
Copyright by Meinen 4 Hopman B.V.
All rights resen/ed.
gn/ye
20.00
5x1,5mm^PE
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering S.V.
P.O.Box g
3750 OA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
www.hei ne nhopman. CO m
12
20.00
20.00
Sxl.Smm^'PE
Gland Metr.
3x10^(1== PE
-2101
11
20.00
3x1mm^PE
-502
20.00
3x1,5mm=PE
-501
10
20.00
3x1,5mm^PE
-227
in
13
14
15
16 - I
17
18
5000155
Page 54
1
19
20
Compressor start-uy instruction

o Before the start-up of the compressor, the crankcase heater must be energized for at
least 24 hours.
The compressor suction valve must be opened one-turn starting from closed position.
The liquid valve at the outlet of the condenser must be closed.
Start the air conditioning fan and the seawater pump (if applicable), set the RT-140
cooling thermostat at the desired set point.
0 Start the compressor and wait until the compressor stops on the low-pressure switch.
After the compressor has stopped, open the compressor suction valve and slowly open
the liquid valve.
The compressor will re-start automatically.
If applicable, open after 30 minutes the oil return valve from the oil-separator.
Comyressor stop instruction

o Close the liquid valve at the outlet of the condenser.
Wait until the compressor stops on the low-pressure switch.
Stop the seawater pump (if applicable) and close the compressor suction valve.
O If applicable, close the oil return valve from the oil-separator.
For detailed information read instruction manual
2HL-1.2(Y)..2N-7.2(Y)
2HL-1.2(Y).. 2N-7.2{Y)
2HL-1.2(Y)..2N-7.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y).. 8FC-70.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y)..8FC-70.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y) .. 8FC-70.2(Y)
44J-26.2(Y) .. 66F-100.2(Y)
44J-26.2(Y) .. 66F-100.2(Y)
44J-26.2(Y).. 66F-100.2(Y)
Inhalt
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Compresseurs hermtiques
accessibles pistons
Semi-hermetic Reciprocating Compressors
Halbhermetische
Hubkolbenverdichter
Sicherheit
Anwendungsbereiche
Montage
Elektrischer Anschluss
In Betrieb nehmen
Betrieb / Wartung
Auer Betrieb nehmen
Seite
1
3
4
12
16
21
23
Content
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Safety
Application ranges
Mounting
Electrical connections
Commissioning
Operation / Maintenance
De-commissioning
Page
1
3
4
12
16
21
23
Sommaire
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
Scurit
Champs d'application
Montage
Raccordement lectrlque
Mise en service
Service / Maintenance
Mise hors de service
Page
1
3
4
12
16
21
23
1 Sicherheit
1 Safety
1 Scurit
Diese Kltemittel-Verdichter sind zum

Einbau in iVlaschinen entsprechend
der E-Maschinenrichtlinie
98/37/EG vorgesehen. Sie drfen nur
in Betrieb genommen werden, wenn
sie gem vorliegender Anleitung in
diese Maschinen eingebaut worden
sind und als Ganzes mit den entsprechenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften
bereinstimmen (anzuwendende
Normen: siehe Herstellererklrung).*
These refrigeration compressors are

intended for installation in machines
according to the EC Machines
Directive 98/37/EG. They may be put
to service only, if they have been installed in these machines according
to the existing instruction and as a
whole agree with the corresponding
provisions of legislation (standards to
apply: refer to Manufacturers Declaration).*
Ces compresseurs frigorifique sont prevus

pour tre incorpores dans des machines
conformement la Directive CE Machines 98/37/CE. Leur mise en service est
uniquement autorise s'ils ont t incorpores dans des machines conformement
la prsente instruction et si ces machines rpondent dans leur totaiit aux
rglementations legales en vigueur (les
normes qu'il faut utiliser: voir la Declaration du Constructeur).*
Autorisiertes Fachpersonal '

Smtliche Arbeiten an Verdichtern
und Klteanlagen drfen nur von qualifiziertem und autorisiertem Fachpersonal ausgefhrt werden.
Authorized staff
, "' ' '
All work on compressofs and refngeration systems shall be carried out by
qualified and authorized refrigeration
personnel only.
. ^
Personnel autoris - ' : . - " ' " , -^

Tous les travaux ains1 que I'entretien de
compresseurs et d'installations frigorifiques ne peuvent tre executes que par
du personnel qualifi et autoris.
Die Verdichter sind nach dem aktuellen Stand der Technik und entsprechend den geltenden Vorschriften gebaut. Auf die Sicherheit der Anwender
wurde besonderer Wert gelegt.
The compressors are constructed

according to the state of the art and
valid regulations. Particular emphasis
has been placed on the users' safety.
Les compresseurs sont confus d'apres

les regies de l'art actuelles et conformement aux prescriptions en vigueur. Une
attention particuliere a t apportee la
scurit de I'utilisateur.
' Hinweis gilt fr Lnder der EU
* Information is valid for countries of tfie EC
Indication valable pour les pays de la CE
%mr
(^
Diese Betriebsanleitung whrend der

gesamten Verdichter-Lebensdauer
aufbewahren.
Retain these Operating Instructions

during the entire lifetime of the compressor.
Garder cette instruction de service pendant toute la dure de service du compresseur.
Restgefahren
Residual hazards
Dangers residuals
Vom Verdichter knnen unvermeidbare Restgefahren ausgehen.

Jede Person, die an diesem Gert
arbeitet, muss deshalb diese
Betriebsanleitung sorgfltig lesen!
Certain residual hazards from the

compressors are unavoidable.
All persons working on these units
must therefore read these Operating
Instructions carefully!
Le compresseur peut tre la source de

dangers rsiduels inevitables.
Par consequent, chaque personne qui
travaille sur eet appareil doit lire attentivement cette instruction de service I
Es gelten zwingend
die einschlgigen Sicherheits-Vorschriften und Normen (z.B. EN 378,
EN 60204 und EN 60355),
die allgemein anerkannten
Sicherheitsregeln,
die EU-Richtlinien,
Lnder spezifische Bestimmungen.
All of the following have validity:

specific safety regulations and
standards (e. g. EN 378, EN 60204
and EN 60355),
generally acknowledged safety
standards,
EU directives,
national regulations.
A prendre en consideration
les prescriptions et normes de scurit
relatives (par ex. EN 378, EN 60204 et
EN 60355),
les regies de scurit gnraiement
reconnues,
les directives de TUE,
les dispositions spcifiques du pays
concern.
Sicherheitshinweise
Safety references
Les indications de scurit
sind Anweisungen um Gefhrdungen

zu vermeiden.
Sicherheitshinweise genauestens einhalten!
are instructions intended to prevent
sont des instructions pour viter les

mises en danger.
Respecter scrupuleusement les indications de scurit !
,
'.\ ff
I^
&&I
hazards.
Safety instructions must be stringently
observed!
Achtung!
Anweisung um eine mgliche
Gefhrdung von Gerten zu vermeiden.
" I "^ Attention!

' I Instructions on preventing possible damage to equipment.
Attention !
Instruction pour viter une possible
mise en danger d'appareils.
'"K^ Vorsicht!
i^ Anweisung um eine mgliche
, ,* minderschwere Gefhrdung von
Personen zu vermeiden.
rar^ Caution!
'J-^ Instructions on preventing a pos'&jd sible minor hazard to persons.
' ' A " Prudence !

i^ Instruction pour viter une possible
mise en danger benigne de personnes.
^r^
Liji
fo^
W^
^ 1 ^ Warning!
|L_S Instructions on preventing a pos^ M sible severe hazard to persons.
^7 Avertissement!
. Instruction pour viter une possible
I."-, mise en danger grave de periljs sonnes.
Warnung!
schwere Gefhrdung von
r j ^ Gefahr!
i ^ Anweisung um eine unmittelbare
%W^ schwere Gefhrdung von
^ S Personen zu vermeiden.
Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise
e.^
Warnung!
Der Verdichter ist im Auslieferungszustand mit Schutzgas gefllt (berdruck ca. 0,5 .. 1 bar).
Bei unsachgemer Handhabung sind Verletzungen von
Haut und Augen mglich.
Bei Arbeiten am Verdichter
Schutzbrille tragenl
Anschlsse nicht ffnen, bevor
berdruck abgelassen ist.
Danger!
Instructions on preventing an
immediate risk of severe hazard
to persons.
Danger!
Instruction pour une imminente mise
en danger grave de personnes.
General safety references
Indications de scurit gnrales
^ j ; ^ Warning!
The compressor is under pressure with a holding charge to a
pressure of 0.5 to 1 bar above
[ atmospheric pressure.
Incorrect handling may cause
injury to skin and eyes.
Wear safety goggles while working on compressor.
Do not open connections before
pressure has been released.
25 Avertissement!
A la livraison, le compresseur est
rempli d'un gaz de protection et
sont en surpression (environ
0,5.. 1 bar).
Des blessures la peau et aux yeux
sont possibles en cas de maniement inappropri.
Lors de travaux sur le compresseur,
porter des lunettes de protection I
Ne pas ouvrir les raccords avant
d'avoir vacu la surpression.
KB-110-4
(f
^
Vorsicht!
Caution!
During operation surface temperatures exceeding 60C or
below 0C can be reached.
Serious burns and frostbits are
possible.
Lock and mark accessible sectors.
Before working on the compressor:
Switch off and allow to cool down.
2X Im Betrieb knnen Oberflchen. Temperaturen von ber 60C

; bzw. unter 0C auftreten.
Schwere Verbrennungen und
'' Erfrierungen sind mglich.
) Zugngliche Stellen absperren
und kennzeichnen.
' Vor Arbeiten am Verdichter:
' Gert ausschalten und abkhlen
. lassen.
Prudence !
Pendant le service, des temperatures de surface excdant 60C
resp. en-dessous de C C pourront
tre atteintes.
Des graves boilures et gelures sont
possibles.
Fermer et marquer les endroits
accessibles.
Avant les travaux au compresseur:
Arrter et refroidir celui-ci.
It * f
Bei Arbeiten am Verdichter, nachdem

die Anlage in Betrieb genommen
wurde:
For any work on the compressor after

the plant has been commissioned:
Pour des travaux au compresseur apres

rinstallation a t mise en service:
yf^
Z-A
/ il
n^2
r>3
Z-^
py J
t-m
Avertissement!
Compresseur est sous pression !
i.'-.1 Lors des interventions non-adI ' -.; quates graves blessures sont posr-, .-".ij sibles.
5,' if Retirer la pression sur le compres. '', seur!
SL'ji Porter des lunettes de protection I
Warnung!
Verdichter steht unter Druck!
Bei unsachgemen Eingriffen
sind schwere Verletzungen mg-
WM lieh.
i " ^ Verdichter auf drucklosen
" " Zustand bringen!
Schutzbrille tragen!
'
2
Anwendungsbereiche
2 Champs d'application
(H)FCKW7(H)CFC
R22(R12-R502)
lfllung
Oll charge
.Charge d'huile
HFKW/HFC
R134a - R404A - R407A/B/C - R507A
tc < 55C
BITZER BSE32
BITZER 85 2
".\
Weitere Kltemittel auf Anfrage

Alternativ-le sietie Technische
Informationen KT-500 und KT-510
P134ay R W C fX> 55C:

BITZER BSE55
Siehe P.rospekte KP 1Q0, KP 110 und BITZER-Softw'are

see brochures KP-100, KP-110 and BITZER software '
voir brochures KP-100, KP-110 etjogiciel BITZER
'-^
Xxi.^ W 6.^'^
(D
2 Application ranges
Zulssige Kltemittel
Permitted refrigerants
Fluides fngorigenes autonses
Einsatzgrenzon
Application limits
Limites d'application
Warning!
Compressor is under pressure!
In case of inproper handling
severe injuries are possible.
Release the pressure in the
compressor!
Wear safety goggles!
ffl
^^wi. . J
Further refrigerants upon request

For alternative oils see Technical
Information KT-500 and KT-510
(D
Autres fluides trigongenes sur demande

Hulles alternatifes, voir Informations
Techniques KT-500 et KTSIO
Bei Betrieb im Unterdruck-Bereich,

Gefahr von Lufteintritt auf der Saugseite. Besondere Manahmen knnen
erforderlich werden.
For operation in the vacuum range,

danger of air admission at the suction
side. Special measures might become
necessary.
En cas de fonctionnement en pression subatmosphrique, danger d'introduction d'air au

cote d'aspiration. Des mesures particulieres
pourraient devenir ncessaire prendre.
Im Falle von Lufteintritt:
In the case of air admission:
En cas d'introduction d'air:
Achtung!
I Chemische Reaktionen mglich
I sowie berhhter Verflssigungsdruck und Anstieg der
Druckgastemperatur.
5?| W a r n u n g !
- i Bei Lufteintritt ggf. kritische
' l Verschiebung der Kltemittel' ^ Zndgrenze
Lufteintritt unbedingt vermeiden!
vaesitiaidaimes
KB-110-4
Attention!
Chemical reactions possible as
well as increased condensing
pressure and discharge gas
temperature.
ra^
ZA
fj}
* ' I
i . ^
Warning!
In case of air admission a critical
shift of the refrigerant ignition
limit is possible
Absolutely avoid air admission!
unraufxaneaMKUssMuCMSKSuawuc
' " n Attention !

j|-1 ^ Reactions chimiques possibles et
h; ' pression de liquefaction excessive
^ " et aussi temperature du gaz de
LiJ refoulement augmente.
Avertissement!
En cas d'introduction d'air dislocation critique de la limite d'inflammabilit de fluide frigorigne
Eviter absolument introduction d'air!
mifiKsiamaamiiis^Kmi^Miiaamra
3 Montage
3 Mounting
3 Montage
3.1 Verdichter transportieren
3.1 Compressor transport
3.1 Transport du compresseur
Verdichter entweder verschraubt auf

der Palette transportieren oder an
Transportsen anheben (siehe Abbildung 1).
Transport the compressor either

screwed on a pallet or lift it using the
eyebolts (see figure 1).
Transporter le compresseur soit visse sur

une palette ou soulever le aux iilets de
suspension (voir figure 1).
3.2 Verdichter aufstellen
3.2 Compressor installation
3.2 Mise en place du compresseur
Aufstellort
Place of installation
Lieu d'emplacement
Den Verdichter waagrecht aufstellen.
Install the compressor horizontally.
Placer le compresseur horizontalement.
Bei Einsatz unter extremen Bedingungen (z. B. aggressive Atmosphre,

niedrige Auentemperaturen u. a.)
geeignete Manahmen treffen. Ggf.
empfiehlt sich Rcksprache mit der
Rrma BITZER.
For operation under extreme conditions (e. g. aggressive or corrosive

atmospheres, low ambient temperatures etc.) suitable measures must be
taken. Consultation with BITZER is
recommended.
En cas d'utilisation dans conditions extremes (par ex. atmosphere agressive, temperatures extrieures basses, etc.)
prendre des mesures adquates. Le cas
chant, if est conseill de consulter la
firme BITZER.
Schwingungsdmpfer
Anti-vibration mountings
Amortisseurs de vibrations
Der Verdichter kann starr befestigt

werden, wenn dabei keine Gefahr von
I Schwingungsbrchen im angeschlossenen Rohrleitungssystem besteht.
The compressor can be rigidly mounted, if no danger of breakage due to

vibration exists in the associated pipeline system.
Le compresseur peut tre mont rigide

s'ii n'y a aucun risque de rupture par
vibrations dans le rseau de tuyauteries
raccord.
' Andernfalls Verdichter auf Schwingungsdmpfern montieren. Dies ist

insbesondere bei der (Montage auf
Bndeirohr-Wrmebertrager erforderlich.
Othenwise the compressor must be

fixed on anti-vibration mountings. This
is particuiary required with mounting
on shell and tube heat exchangers.
Dans le cas contraire, le montage doit se

faire sur des amortisseurs. Ceci est particulirement ncessaire pour le montage
sur des changeurs de chaleur multitubulaires.
Schwingungsdmpfer knnen nach

Abb. 2 ausgewhlt werden.
Abb. 1 Verdichter anheben
Anti-vibration mountings can be selected according to fig. 2.
Rg. 1 Lifting the compressor
Les amortisseurs peuvent tre slectionns d'aprs fig. 2.
Fig. 1 Soulvement du compresseur
KB-110-4
Transport-Sicherungen
bei Verflssigungsstzen
Um Transportschden zu vermeiden
sind bei Verflssigungsstzen im
Lieferzustand die Schwingungsdmpfer der Verdichter durch TransportSicherungen blockiert. Diese Sicherungen mssen nach der Montage
entfernt bzw. gelst werden.
Transport locks for units
Scurit de transport des groupes
When complete units are delivered

the anti-vibration mountings are
locked to prevent transport damages.
These locks must be removed resp.
loosened after installation.
Pour les llvraisons de groupes, les elements antivibratoires sont bloques avec
un dispositif de scurit afin d'eviter des
deteriorations durant le transport. Ceux-ci
doivent tre retires resp. desserres apres
le montage.
Typ(e) II
Transport
Typ(e) I
Verdichter
,>J^ A.',";!, ^ ,^_.U^,'v._,' r''*>-~ Kurbeigetiauseseite

" " , ^ ''':", - ", . A .
Crankcasc side
Compressor
-'^.5;
Compresseur , \^ s
' , - / ' \ ^ . / ' '-'^^ * " Cote carter

Hrte / Farbe
Bausatz Nr
Hardness / Color
Complete No
Duret / Couleur No complet
D
Teile Nr
Part no
No dmortibseur
Hrte / Fdroe
Hardness ' Color
Durete / Couleur
Betrieb / Operation /
Fonctionnement
Motorseite
Motor side
Cote moteur
'"#
Bausatz Nr
Teile-Nr. '
Corrpletf No Part no
No complet
No.amortisseur
, f ia^*t.jKi^23.', i*
2HL-1 2(Y).. 2FL-2.2(Y)

8GC-60 2(Y)
>.Typ(e) II -y
55 Shore
8FC-70 2(Y)
370 000-02
375 023-0?
55 Shore
370 000 02
375 023-02
370 002-02
375 035-02
75 Shorp
370 002-06
375035-04
370 003-04
325 002-07
wei/white/blanc
370 003-01
325 002-04
*~ Weif3/white/blano':':570 003-01 > -325 002-04 J v'v-gelb/yetlow/iaiine . 370 003-02
' 325 002-05
- \ ' 60 Shore''
,.-4,f-*3t!';'v*-"'>
2EL-2.2(Y)_2CL-4 2(Y)
<fS%t|5"rf-
grau/grey/gris
2U-3.2(Y)".. 2N-7.2(Y) -';_ ->>,

42-5.2(Y) .. 4N-20 2(Y)
gelb/yellow/jaune
370 003-02
*4J-13 2{Y) ;. 4G-20.2(Y) "',
braun/brown/brun
370 004-01 ' ' ' 325 002-01 '
4G-30.2(Y)
braun/brown/brun
370 004-01
325 002-05
grn/green/vert
370 003-03 , 325 002-06

^ -
325 002-01
blau/blue/bleu
6J-22.2(Y).. 6F-50.2(Y> ; ^ ^ ^^<r. braun/brown/brun"' 370 004;01
325 0 0 2 - o r f &^'.mvSkieriiieu~r
8GC-60.2(Y) .. 8FC-70 2{Y)
325 002-02
- rot/red/rouge.
370 004-02
370 004-03
325 002-03
. r37o"o04'-03". ? 3 2 5 002-03" .
schwarz/black/noir 370 004-04
325 002-08
44H-30.2(Y)..44G-40.2(Y) ''-;.>- braun/brown/brun 2x370002-01., 2x375035-01 ..', ^ rot/red/rouge ; . ,2x370002-02

44G-60 2(Y)
/ ' braun/brown/brun
66J-44 2(Y)..66F-100,2{Y) .' 5-rot/red/roug

S4T-5 2(Y), S4N-8.2{Y)
2x370002-01
^ 2x370002-02
2x375035-01
^ rot/red/rouge ', . '..370 004:02 '? 325 002-02
, ,blau/blue/bleu
2x375035-02, v , j f blau/blue/bleu
grCin/green/vert
. 2x370002-03
2x375035-02
2x375035-03
<370002-03'' "'2x375035-03
gelb/yellow/jaune
370 003-02
325 002-05
. braun/brown/brun
370 004-01
325 002-01
S6J-16 2(Y)
braun/brown/brun
370 004-01
' 325 002-01
's6H-20 2(Y) .. SSF-30,2(Y} ,
braun/brown/brun
370 004-01
325 002-01
rot/red/rouge''"- ' T 370 004-"03' ' 325 002-03
S66J-32 2(Y)
rot/red/rouge
2x370002-02
2x375035-02
blau/blue/bleu
2x370002-02
2x375035-02
S66H-40 2(Y) .. S66F-60.2(Y)
rot/red/rouge
2x370002-02
2x375035-02
blau/blue/bleu
2x370002-03
2x375035-03
S4G-12 2(Y)
'
Abb. 2 Feder- und Dmpfungselemente
Fig. 2 Anti-vibration mountings

Kl7IB3MMniM^:CÊa!?;Nn(J3iMSME^^
KB-110-4
370 003-03
325 002-06
_ ' ^ braun/brown/brun " 370 004-01
325 002-01
rot/red/rouge ,
370 004-02
' 325 002-02
Fig. 2 Ressorts et plots antivibratoires

aT-CSiari3!a3^2a*K!ii(Mi
-f
Schwingungsdmpfer Typ I
Anti-vibration mounting type I
Amortisseur de vibrations type I
Nach Montage:
Rot gekennzeichnete Transportsicherung entfernen.
Befestigungsschrauben bzw. -muttern + (3) wieder fest anziehen.
After installation:
Remove the red coloured transport
loci
Retighten the fixing screws or nuts
Aprs montage:
Retirer les dispositifs de scurit
paints en rouge .
Resserrer fermement les vis de fixation
resp. les crous + .
Schwingungsdmpfer Typ II
Anti-vibration mounting type II
Amortisseur de vibrations type II
Vor Transport:
Selbstsichernde Mutter zum
Transport des Aggregates anziehen, bis die Bodenplatte des Verdichters auf der Fijhrungshlse
aufliegt.
Before transport:
r Tighten the self-locking nut until
the baseplate of the compressor
rests on the guide sleeve .
Avant le transport:
Serrer l'crou autobloquant , jusqu'
ce que la plaque de fond du compresseur repose sur la douille de guidage .
Nach Montage:
Mutter so weit lsen, bis sich die
geschlitzte Unterlagscheibe entfernen lsst.
I
Unterlagscheibe entfernen.
&.
After installation:
Loosen the nut until the slotted
washer can be removed.
Remove the slotted washer .
Aprs le montage:
Desserrer l'crou autobloquant
jusqu' ce que la rondelle entaillee
puisse tre enleve.
Retirer la rondelle entaillee .
Gummi-Dmpfer
Rubber elements
Plots en caoutchouc
Tandems oder Sonderzubehr
tandems or special accessory
tandems ou accessoires particuliers
Before transport:
Tighten the self-locking nut until
the element is compressed approx.
1 to 2 mm.
Avant le transport:
Serrer l'crou autobloquant jusqu'
ce que l'lment soil comprim d'environ 1 2 mm.
Nach Montage:
Mutter so weit lsen, bis sich die
geschlitzte Unterlagscheibe entfernen lsst.
Unterlagscheibe entfernen.
After installation:
Loosen the nut until the slotted
washer can be removed.
Remove the slotted washer .
Aprs le montage:
Desserrer l'crou autobloquant
jusqu' ce que la rondelle entaillee
puisse tre enleve.
Retirer la rondelle entaillee .
3.3 Rohrleitungen anschliessen
3.3 Pipeline connections
3.3 Raccordements de tuyauterie
^ Vor Transport:
I Selbstsichernde Mutter anziehen, bis das Element ca. 1 bis
^ 2 mm zusammengedrckt ist.
K ^ Warnung!
Z_A Verdichter steht unter berdruck
p" I l durch Schutzgas.
I " :^ Verletzungen von Haut und
0 : 3 Augen mglich.
f'M Bei Arbeiten am Verdichter
f Schutzbrille tragen!
^ ^ Anschlsse nicht ffnen, bevor
S ^ berdruck abgelassen ist.
r j p i Achtung!
P 2 Lufteintritt unbedingt vermeiden!
^"v;'! Absperrventile bis zum Evakuiei ren geschlossen halten.
Warning!
Compressor is under pressure
with holding charge.
Injury of skin and eyes possible.
~-q Attention!
( 1 Absolutely avoid penetration of

^ air!
1 The shut-off valves should
remain closed until evacuating.
Avertissement!
Le compresseur est sous pression
avec gaz de protection.
Blessures de la peau et des yeux
possibles.
porter des lunettes de protection !
'î"", Attention !
j^f -| Eviter absolument introduction
*"g! d'air!
MM Maintenir les vannes d'arrt fermes
MM jusqu' la mise sous vide.
KB-110-4
i;!iass^\^fSX:sssgBxs<siaim9H'axiSimtiMaî
Rohr-Anschlsse
Pipe connections
Raccordements de tuyauterle
Die Rohr-Anschlsse sind so ausgefhrt, dass Rohre in den gngigen

Millimeter- und Zoll-Abmessungen
verwendet werden knnen. Lt-Anschlsse haben gestufte Durchmesser. Je nach Abmessung wird das
Rohr mehr oder weniger tief eintauchen. Im Bedarfsfall kann das
Buchsenende mit dem greren
Durchmesser auch abgesgt werden.
The pipe connections are designed to

accept tubes with standard millimetre
or inch dimensions. Solder connections have stepped diameters.
According to the size the tube can be
pushed more or less into the fitting. If
not required the end with the largest
diameter can be cut off.
Les raccordements sont executes de

fafon ce que les tubes usuels en millimetres et en pouces puissent tre utilises. Les raccords braser ont plusieurs
diametres successifs. Suivant la section,
le tube sera insr plus ou moins profondment. Si ncessaire, l'extrmit avec le
plus grand diametre peut tre scie.
f j " | Achtung!
- 1 * Ventile nicht berhitzen!
" ' . Whrend und nach dem Lten
.' ,. Ventilkrper khlen!
~. - j IVlaximale Lttemperatur 700C.
P11 Attention!
f\ ^ Do not overheat the valves!
/%J Cool valve body while and after
&^j> brazing!
fj'1. Max. brazing temperature
700C.
y-.T^ Attention !
' f Ne pas surchauffer les vannes !
r/
Refroidir les corps de vanne lors du
:t ' brasage et aprs !
i - ' Temperature de brasage maximale
J-u- 700C.
Rohrleitungen
Pipelines
Tuyauteries
Grundstzlich nur Rohrleitungen und

Anlagen-Komponenten verwenden,
die
innen sauber und trocken sind (frei
von Zunder, Metallspnen, Rostund Phosphat-Schichten) und
luftdicht verschlossen angeliefert
werden.
Only use tubes and components

which are
clean and dry inside (free from
slag, swarf, rust, and phosphate
coatings) and
which are delivered with an air tight
seal.
D'une manire generale, on ne doit utiliser

que des tubes et des composants
propres et sees l'intrieur (pas de
calamine, de copeaux mtalliques, de
depots de rouille et de phosphates) et
qui sont livres hermtiquement dos.
Durchmesser gestuft
Stepped diameters
Plusieurs diametres
successifs
Abb. 3 Absperrventil mit RotalockVerschraubung
^ Vor Rohranschluss Verschlussblech entfernen!

; Remove sealing plate before tube connection'
'tm, Avant raccordement du tube, retirer la plaque d'obturation '
Rg. 3 Shut-off valve with Rotalock

adaptor
Fig. 3 Vanne d'arrt avec raccord visser

Rotalock
:15g
ig-^;-aiWV-<f3any*a-i.TM.|y.r.
3.4 Anlaufentlastung (SU) und

Leistungsregelung (CR)
3.4 Start unloading (SU) and

Capacity control (CR)
3.4 Dmarrage vide (SU) et

Regulation de puissance (CR)
Die Ventil-Oberteile werden zum

Schutz gegen Transportschden als
Beipaci< geliefert. Sie mssen vor
dem Evaltuieren montiert werden.
Dazu den Blindflansch gegen das
Oberteil wechseln.
The upper parts of the valves are

delivered separately packed to avoid
transport damage. These valve parts
must be fitted in place of the sealing
flanges before the compressor is
evacuated.
Les parties suprieures des vannes sent

livres sparment afm d'viter des deteriorations durant le transport; elles doivent
tre montes avant la mise sous vide.
Pour cela, il faut remplacer la bride d'obturation par la partie suprieure de la vanne.
TJ Warnung!
Z A Verdichter steht unter Druck
/ '!.| durch Schutzgas!
e j l Schwere Verletzungen mglich.
r..^ Verdichter auf drucklosen
& ' ^ Zustand bringen!
L i Schutzbrille tragen!
f^
'ZA
'^î
lU?
Um Verwechslungen zu vermeiden,
sind Zylinderkopf und Ventilflansch
gekenzeichnet (SU bzw. CR). Ein
Pass-Stift in der Flanschflche erlaubt
nur die richtige Positionierung. Siehe
hierzu Abbildung 4.
Bei Anlaufentlastung wird ein Rckschlagventil in der Druckgasleitung
\ erforderlich.
Avertissement!
Compresseur est sous pression
par gaz de protection !
Graves blessures possibles.
Retirer la pression sur le compresseur !
Porter des lunettes de protection !
Warning!
Compressor is under pressure
by holding charge!
Severe injuries possible.
compressor!
To avoid mistakes the cylinder head

and the valve flange are marked with
a coding (SU resp. CR). A pin in the
flange surface only allows the correct
assembly. See figure 4.
With start unloading a check valve is
required in the discharge line.
For further explications see Technical
Informations KT-100 and KT-110.
Pour viter les confusions, la tete de

cylindre et la bride de la vanne sont identifies avec un indice (SU ou plutot CR).
Une goupille de positionnement loge
dans la bride assure un assemblage correct. Voir figure 4.
En cas de dmarrage vide, il est ncessaire de placer un clapet de retenue dans
la conduite de refoulement.
Pour plus d'explications, voir Informations
Techniques KT-100 et KT-110.
I Weitere Erluterungen siehe Techn.

Informationen KT-100 und KT-110.
Leistungsregelung (CR)
Capacity control (CR)
Regulation de puissance (CR)
optional ab 4Z-5.2(Y)
Option from 4Z-5.2(Y) on
Option partir de 4Z-5.2(Y)
Nachrsten erfordert Austausch

des Zylinderkopfs
Retrofit requires exchange of the

cylinder head
En cas de montage ultrieur une change du tete de culasse est ncessaire.
Leistungsregler drfen nicht in

Verbindung mit dem CIC-System verwendet werden (siehe Kapitel 4).
Capacity control may not be used in

conjunction with the CIC-System (see
chapter 4).
Ne pas utiliser de rgulateurs de puissance en liaison avec ie Systeme CIC

(voir chapitre 4).
"CR"
"SU"
Leistungsregelung
Capacity Control
Regulation dP
puissance
/ ^
Anlaufentlastung
Start Unloading
Dmarrage vide
0\': ''^'.''n::/OK;z*fzyio
..%
Abb. 4 Anlaufentlastung / Leistungsregelung
^^^^l^^f^^
Fig. 4 Start unloading / capacity control
Fig. 4 Dmarrage vide / Regulation de puissance
KB-110-4
VARICOOL-System
VARICOOL System
Systeme VARICOOL
Bei den Typen 2HL-1.2 bis 2N-7.2

kann zwischen unterschiedlichen
Betriebsarten umgeschaltet werden.
Dazu muss die Position des Saugventils einschlielich des Sauggasfilters gewechselt werden (Abb. 5).
For the types 2HL-1.2 up to 2N-7.2

it can be switched over between different operation modes. Therefore the
position of the suction valve including
suction filter has to be changed (see
fig. 5).
Pour les types 2HL-1.2 jusqu'au 2N-7.2

on peut commuter entre differentes
modes de fonctionnement. Pour 9a, il faut
changer la position de la vanne d'aspiration y Indus le filtre d'aspiration (voir
fig. 5).
SL(A) "Sauggas-Khlung":
Standard-Betriebsart
Klima- und Normalkhlung sowie
Tiefkhlung mit R404A / R507A
Der Motor wird hier mit Sauggas
gekhlt. Ggf. wird Zusatzlftung bei
extremen Betriebs-Bedingungen
erforderlich.
SL(A) "suction gas cooling":

standard operation mode
Air-conditioning or medium temperature application and for low temperature cooling with R404A /
R507A
The motor is cooled by suction gas.
Additional cooling is possibly
required with extrem operating
conditions.
SL(A) "refroidissement de gaz aspire":

fonctionnement standard
pour domaine de climatisation et de
refrigeration moyenne temperature
ou pour refrigeration basses temperatures avec R404A / R507A
Le moteur est refroidi par gaz aspire.
En cas utile refroidissement additionnel peut tre ncessaire pour des
conditions de service extremes.
SL(B) "direct suction":

low temperature cooling with R22
(R404A / R507A upon request)
The suction gas is directly led into
the cylinders. This operation mode
always requires external air cooling
- either by additional fan or location
of the compressor in the condenser
air stream.
SL(B) "aspiration directe":

pour la refrigeration basses temperatures avec R22 (R404A / R507A sur
demande) Le gaz aspire est directement dirig dans le cylindres. Cette
mode de fonctionnement doit tre
opr avec refroidissement additionei
- soit pour ventilateur additionei ou
pour location du compresseur dans le
courant d'air du condenseur.
SL(B) "Direkt-Ansaugung":
fr Tiefkhlung mit R22
{R404A / R507A auf Anfrage)
Das Sauggas wird direkt in die Zylinder gefhrt. Bei dieser Betriebsart muss immer Zusatzlftung verwendet werden - entweder mittels
Zusatzlfter oder Aufstellung des
Verdichters im VerflssigerLuftstrom.
SL(A) '
Abb. 5 VARICOOL-System
SL(A) Sauggas-Khlung
SL(B) Direkt-Ansaugung
1 Blindflanasch
2 Zusatzlfter
alternativ: Aufstellung im
Luftstrom des Verflssigers
KB-110-4
Rg. 5 VARICOOL System

SL(A) suction gas cooling
SL(B) direct suchtion
1 Sealing flange
2 Additional fan
alternative: install in
condenser air flow
Rg.5 Systeme VARICOOL

SL(A) refroidissement de gaz aspire
SL(B) aspiration directe
1 Bride d'obturation
2 Ventilateur additionnel
alternative: installation dans le
courant d'air du condenseur
ijticawaaifMMiaiBwwaaiBMiCTia^^
% ^ .
Anschlsse
Connections
2HL-1.2(Y)..2CL-4.2(Y)
"
(C
3 (LP)
"r^-
syB2
Raccords
', 2U-3.2(Y).. 2N-7.2{Y)

3 (LP)
3 (LP)
1 (HP)
SUB)
1/8"-27NPTFV
SUA)
1 (HP) 2 (HP)
3 (LP)
- / ^ ^ - I A . \1/8"-27 NPTIy', 1/8"-27 N P T F /
1/4"-18 NPTF
3/B--18NPTF
4Z-5.2(Y) .. 4N-20.2(Y) "
1/4"-18 NPTF 1/2"-14 NPTF 1/Z-14 NPTF 1/8"-27 NPTF
V8"-27 NPTF
1/8'-27 NPTF
SL
M22xl,5
DL
4J-13.2(Y).. 4G-30.2(Y)
1 (HP)
1/8 -27 NPTF-
" 11
' 1/8 -27 NPTF~
12
1/8'-27 NPTF
f^^
9a
, 3/8--14NPTF
9b
1/2--14 NPTF
1M"-18NPTF
1/4"-18NPTF
3 (LP)
'
1/8"-27NPTF
1/8--27NPTF
10
3/8--18NPTF
M26x1,5 *
6J-22.2(Y) .. 6G-40.2(Y)
1
t^^.
^^m3.'S',:%
1/4--18NPTF
a:::iE-^.r'XiXxx&j,^^tî^f..szsîS^'3^taîs^
10
1/4' 18 NPTc^
1/8" 27 NPTF
o
1/8--27 NPTF
3/8- 18 NPTF
M26x1,5
^sir,jXJ&^,iKVsr*'iii.csii;Lj.si,j-As:2\.,'*^-ût^>ê.Auk(.^^.^.<c~AMbsr&d>.ann.S3.4^>^%:tj:a4M.ne!^^
KB-110-4
A n s c h l s s e (Forts.)
C o n n e c t i o n s (cont.)
R a c c o r d s (suite)
6F-40.2(Y) / 6F-50.2(Y)
1 4- 18NPTF
14-
flNHIf-
1 (HP)
T8^2'Ni-7F
8 G C - 6 0 . 2 ( Y ) .. 8 F C - 7 0 . 2 ( Y )
18-2/NHrr
1'8-27NP"rT:
aS'-ISNPTF
SL
<"
11
7,1t) UNH
12
"7/16--20 UNF
rs
's
'kl
1/4--18 NPTF
' 8
'l/4"-i8 N P t f ^ "
3(LP)
"
1/8"-27 NPTF
3/8--18 NPTF
M26x1,5
44J-26.2
Sonstige Anschlsse wie beim entsprechenden
Einzelverdichter
Other connections same as for the corresponding

single compressor
Autres raccords comme sur le compresseur individuel correspondant
'*
1 Hochdruck-Anschluss (HP) , '
2 Druckgas-Temperaturfhler (HP)
3 Niederdruck-Anschluss (LP)
4 CIC-System: Sprhdse ' '
5 leinfll-Stopfen
>>.-,".", . , ' ' '
6 lablass (Magnetschraube)
7 lfilter
, ~
;
""
- 8 Olrckfhrung (Olabschelder)
9a Gasausgleich (Parallelbetrieb) *
9b lausgleich (Parallelbetrieb)
10 lsumpfheizung
11 ldruck-Anschuss +
-'
^,
' . ' "

'
.
High pressure connection (HP)
2
3
Discharge gas temp, sensor (HP)

Low pressure connection (LP)
CIC System: spray nozzle '
' ".
^ '
'x
1 Raccord de haute pression (HP)

2 Sonde de temperature du gaz au
>refoulement (HP) -
3 Raccord de basse pression (LP)

V'. 4 Systeme CIC. gicleur
5 Oll fill plug
, ,v"[^
P\:[-'\'
6 Oll drain (magnetic screw) /
--:, - ,'-" , 5 Bouchon pour le remplissage d'huile
7 Oll filter
' V
\'i "
8 Oll return (oil separator)
6 Vidange d'huile (vis magnetique)
'^ ' 7 Filtre huile

9a Gas equalization (parallel operation)\ .- ' " Q Retour d'huile (sparateur d'huile)
^9b Oll equalization (parallel operation)
, >-9a Egalisation de gaz (fonction. en parallele)
10 Crankcase heater
9b Egalisation d'huile (fonction, en parallele)
11 Oll pressure connection +
^ v, '
10 Resistance de carter "
12 ldruck-Anschuss -
12 Oll pressure connection
SL
Saugleitung
DL
Druckleitung
SL Suction line
DL Discharge line
11 Raccord de la pression d'huile +

12 Raccord de la pression d'huile SL Conduite d'aspiration
SL(A)
Standard-Ventilposition
SL(A)
Standard valve position
DL Conduite de refoulement
SL(A) Position standard de vanne
SL(B)
Ventilposition fr Tiefkhlung R22
SL(B)
Valve position for low temp R22
SL(B)
. ..,-i-^^>ij..^--w:r.^.^..=?^,L.jT,f:^c?.-^\^,..,.,.;.^^...<^.j3iu^.^.T^3.-w^>^*^.-i" t'j,-^v:y.
KB-110-4
Position vanne pour basses temp R22
Af i,./..iifl?-...^tii ^jrjftii:a'iiKj-..-aja:rf*-j:r-.t.ZTj>pa^fcMt.^3j . . - r - ^ ^ ' . - : -^,r;-^g-pt^^tjiw&î.HAr.w.v>M7.J..)tÊ'.,.wa>
j s - . . . . > - >
11
KerwamatiiaacxiaKmtism
4 Elektrischer Anschluss
4 Electrical connection
4 Raccordement lectrique
4.1 Allgemeine Hinweise
4.1 General recommendations
4.1 Indications generates
Verdichter und elektrisches Zubehr

entsprechen der EU-Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EG (CE 96).
Compressor and electrical accessories

are in accordance with the EC Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EC (CE 96).
Compresseur et accessoires lectriques

correspondent la Directive CE Basse
Tension 73/23/CEE (CE 96).
Elektrische Anschlsse gem

Prinzipschaltbild ausfhren. Sicherheitsnormen EN 60204, EN 60335
und nationale Schutzbestimmungen
bercksichtigen.
The electrical installation is to be carried out according to the wiring diagram. Observe the safety standards
EN 60204, EN 60335 and national
safety regulations.
Realiser l'excution de I'lnstallation lectrique conformment au schema de principe. Respecter en les normes de scurit EN 60204, EN 60335 et les prescriptions de scurit locales.
Bei der Dimensionierung von Motorschtzen, Zuleitungen und Sicherungen:
For the dimensions of the motor contactors, cables and fuses:
Pour le dimensionnement des contacteurs de moteur, des cables d'alimentation et des fusibles :
Tm'V Achtung!
I Q Maximalen Betriebsstrom bzw.
l *?t maximale Leistungsaufnahme
' ' 4 des Motors zugrunde legen.
|,'% SchOtzauslegung:
i : S nach Gebrauchskategorie AC3.
Attention!
Maximum operating current or
max. power consumption of the
motor should be tfie base.
Contactor selection:
according to operational category AC3.
Attention !
Le courant de service maximal resp.
la puissance absorbe max. de
moteur sont prendre en consideration.
Selection des contacteurs:
d'aprs catgorie d'utilisation AC3.
Spannungs- und Frequenzangaben

^ auf dem Typschiid mit den Daten des
j Stromnetzes vergleichen. Der Motor
darf nur bei bereinstimmung ange4^ schlssen werden.
Voltage and frequency data on the

name plate should be compared to
the electrical supply data. The motor
may only be connected when these
coincide.
Comparer les indications de tension et de

frequence sur la plaque signaltique avec
les donnes du rseau. Le moteur ne
peut tre raccord que s'il y a concordance.
Motorklemmen gem Anweisung auf

dem Deckel des Anschlusskastens
anschlieen.
Wire the motor terminals according to

the indications on the terminal box
cover.
Raccorder les bornes du moteur conformment aux instructions se trouvant sur

le couvercle de la boTte de raccordement.
Klemmen 1-2/3-4/B1-B2 an Verdichter

und Motorschutzgert drfen nicht mit
Steuer- oder Betriebsspannung in
Berhrung kommen.
The terminals 1-2/3-4/B1-B2 on the

compressor and motor protection
device must not come into contact
with supply or control voltage.
Les bornes 1-2/3-4/B1-B2 du compresseur et de l'appareil de protection du

moteur ne doivent en aucun cas tre
mises en contact avec la tension de commande ou de service.
4.2 Anlaufstrom verringern
4.2 Reducing the starting current
4.2 Rdulre le courant de demarrage
Anlaufentlastung (SU)
Start unloading (SU)
Demarrage vide (SU)
Sonderzubehr fr 2U-3.2(Y) bis

6F-50.2(Y)
Special accessory from 2U-3.2(Y)

to 6F-50.2(Y)
Accessoire particulier de 2U-3.2(Y)

6F-50.2(Y)
Nachrsten erfordert Austausch

des Zylinderkopfs
Retrofit requires exchange of the

cylinder head
En cas de montage ultrieur une change du tete de culasse est ncessaire.
Durch die integrierte Anlaufentlastung

wird der Anlaufstrom in idealer Weise
reduziert.
Due to the integrated start unloading

the starting current can be reduced to
an optimum.
Par le demarrage vide le courant de

demarrage peut tre rduit ou mieux.
Montage siehe Kapitel 3.4.
Mounting see chapter 3.4.
8-Zylinder-Verdichter:
Der mit einer speziellen Wicklungsschaltung ausgefhrte Motor gewhrleistet auch bei PW-Anlauf ein hohes
Drehmoment. Deshalb wird eine Anlaufentlastung fr diese Verdichter
nicht bentigt.
8-cylinder compressors:
Even in part winding start mode a
very high torque is achieved by the
special motor winding configuration.
Therefore start unloading is not
required with these compressors.
12
Montage voir chapitre 3.4.

Compresseurs 8 cylindres:
Aussi en mode du demarrage bobinage
partiel le moteur dmarre avec un moment d'un couple tres grande. C'est la raison pour laquelle le demarrage vide
n'est pas ncessaire avec ces compresseurs.
KB--110-4
^m:
Teilwicklungs-Motor
Part winding motor
Moteur bobinage partiel
Reihenfolge der Teilwicklungen unbedingt beachten!
Closely observe part-winding order!
Suivre absolument I'ordre d'enroulements!
1. Teilwicklung (Schtz K1):

Anschlsse 1U1,1V1, 1W1
2. Teilwicklung (Schtz K2):
Anschlsse 2U1, 2V1, 2W1
Zeitverzgerung bis zum Zuschalten
der 2. Teilwicklung 0,5 sec (max. 1 sec)
" Achtung!
_ Gefahr von lôtorschden!
' Vertauschte Anordnung der
elektrischen Anschlsse fhrt
zu gegenlufigen oder im
Phasenwinkel verschobenen
Drehfeldern und dadurch zu
- Blockierung.
*- <r Anschlsse korrekt ausfhren!
First part winding (contactor K1):

connections 1U1, 1V1, 1W1
Second part-winding (contactor K2):
connections 2U1, 2V1, 2W1
Time delay before connection of the
second part-winding 0.5 sec
(max. 1 sec)
1. enroulement (contacteur K1):

raccordslUI, 1V1,1W1
2. enroulement (contacteur K2):
raccords2U1,2V1,2W1
Retard de temps jusqu'au raccordement du
deuxime enroulement 0,5 sec (max. 1 sec)
Attention !
Danger de dfauts de moteur I
Une inversion dans les raccordements lectriques engend re des
champs tournants en opposition ou
dcals dans Tangle de phase et
aboutit un blocage.
Realiser correctement les raccorde, ments I
Attention!
^ p l Danger of motor damage!
'^l Wrong wiring results in opposing
^'m or displaced rotating fields due
to changed phase angle. This
leads to locked rotor conditions.
Mount connections correctly!
Stern-Dreieck-Motor (Option)
Star delta motor (option)
Moteur toile-triangle (option)
4Z-5.2(Y) .. 6F-50.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y) .. 6F-50.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y) .. 6F-50.2(Y)
Zeitverzgerung bis zum Umschalten

von Stern- auf Dreieck-Betrieb darf
zwei Sekunden nicht bersteigen.
Time delay before switching from star

to delta should not exceed two seconds.
Retard de temps jusqu'a commuter de

l'toile triangle ne doit pas excder
deux secondes.
V j ^ Attention!
> I Danger of motor damage!
v " - j Wrong wiring results in a short
Z'-^ circuit.
fiv%
||;^
^;'^|
)l'4,
|v*|
L.3
iiM
4.3 Schutz-Einrichtungen
4.3 Protection devices
4.3 Dispositifs de protection
Motor-Schutzeinrichtungen
Motor protection devices
Dispositifs de protection du moteur
njf"^ Achtung!
l\ g Ausfall der Motor-SchutzeinrichS:,"j.| tung mglich!
li U Klemmen 1-2 / 3-4 / B1 -82 an
1^- ^ Verdichter und Motorschutzgert
^*' 1 drfen nicht mit Steuer- oder
^ 1 Betriebsspannung in Berhrung
Sk^ kommen!
gy^ Attention!
Possible break-down of the
motor protection device!
Terminals 1-2 / 3-4 / B1-B2 at
compressor and motor protection device must not contact with
the control or supply voltages!
j ^
INT69VS
INT69VS
INT69VS
2HL-1.2(Y) ..2N-7.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y).. 6F-50.2(Y)
2HL-1.2{Y)..2N-7.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y).. 6F-50.2(Y)
2HL-1.2(Y)..2N-7.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y) .. 6F-50.2(Y)
ist im Anschlusskasten fest eingebaut.

Die Messleitungen fr Motor-PTC sind
verdrahtet. Weitere Anschlsse
gem Prinzipschaltbild bzw.
Technische Information KT-120.
is mounted inside the terminal box.

Cables for the PTC sensors are factory wired. Other connections should be
made according to the wiring diagram
and Technical Information KT-120.
est loge dans la boTte de connexion. Les

cables des sondes PTC (CTP) du moteur
sont raccordes. Autres connexions conformment au schema de principe resp.
I'lnformation Technique KT-120.
^ Achtung!
I l Gefahr von (Motorschden!
' I Vertauschte Anordnung der
"if elektrischen Anschlsse fhrt zu
X
^f Kurzschluss.
Anschlsse korrekt ausfhren!
KB-110-4
Attention !
Danger de dfauts de moteur!
Une inversion dans les raccordements lectriques provoque un
court-circuit.
Realiser correctement les, raccordements I
Attention !
Possibilit de dfaillance du disposif
de protection du moteur!
Les bornes 1-2 / 3-4 / B1-B2 du
compresseur et de l'appareil de proI tection du moteur ne doivent en
aucun cas tre mises en contact
avec la tension de commande ou
i de service!
13
i:
, (
INT69V/7-II
INT69V/7-li
INT69V/7-II
8GC-60.2(Y) und 8FC-70.2(Y)
8GC-60.2(Y) und 8FC-70.2(Y)
8GC-60.2(Y) und 8FC-70.2(Y)
ist im Anschiusskasten fest eingebaut.

Die Messleitungen fr Motor-PTC sind
verdrahtet. Weitere Anschlsse
gem Prinzipschaltbild bzw.
is mounted inside the terminal box.

The cables for the PTC sensors are
already connected. Other connections
should be made according to the wiring diagram and Technical Information
KT-120.
est loge dans la botte de raccordement.

Les cables des sondes CTP du moteur
sont raccordes. Autres connexions conformment au schema de principe resp.
rinformation Technique KT-120.
INT389
INT389
INT389
2HL-1.2(Y)..2N-7.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y).. 6F-50.2(Y)
2HL-1.2(Y).. 2N-7.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y).. 6F-50.2(Y)
2HL-1.2{Y)..2N-7.2(Y)
4Z-5.2(Y) .. 6F-50.2(Y)
Sonderzubehr, kann nachgerstet

werden
Anschluss gem Technischer
Information KT-121.
Gert vorzugsweise im Schaltschrank
unterbringen.
Special accessory, can be retrofitted

Connections according to Technical
Information KT-121.
The device should preferably be installed in the switch board.
Accessoire particulier, peut tre mont

ultrieurement
Raccordement conformment rinformation Technique KT-121.
L'appareil est mont de preference dans
l'armoire lectrique.
Druckgas-Temperaturfhler
Discharge gas temperature sensor
Sonderzubehr,
kann nachgerstet werden
Special accessory, can be retrofitted
Sonde de temperature du gaz au

refouiement
Fhlerelement am HP-Anschluss
installieren (Pos. 2, Seiten 10/11).
- Verdichter mit integrierter Anlaufentlastung:
Der Fhler muss in den Anlaufentlastungs-Zylinderkopf eingebaut werden (siehe Abb. 6).
The sensor should be fitted to the

HP connection (pos. 2, pages 10
and 11).
- Compressors with integrated start
unloading:
The sensor must be fitted into the
start unloading cylinder head (see
figure 6).
Messleitungen in Reihe zu den

Motor-PTC schalten (siehe Prinzipschaltbild).
The sensor cable should be connected in series with the motor

PTC sensors (see wiring diagram).
'(
INT69VS
Installer la sonde sur le raccord HP

(pos. 2,pages 10 et 11).
- Compresseurs avec dmarrage
vide intgr:
La sonde doit tre monte sur la tete
de culasse du dmarrage vide (voir
figure 6).
Les fils correspondants sont branches
en serie avec ceux des sondes CTP
(PTC) du moteur (voir schema de principe).
} .
Steuerstrom
Control ctrcujt
1, Circuit de commande
Legende *
1 Druckgastemperatur-Fhler
2 Anlaufentlastungs-Zyliriderkopf
Abb. 6 Druckgas-Temperaturfhler
bei Anlaufentlastung
14
Accessoire particulier,
peut tre mont ultrieurement
Legend
1 Discharge gas temperature sensor
2 Start unloading cylinder head
Fig. 6 DIscfiarge gas temperature sensor

with start unloading
Legende
1 Sonde de temperature du gaz de
refouiement
2 Tete de culasse du dmarrage a vide
Fig. 6
Sonde de temperature du gaz au

refouiement avec dmarrage vide
KB-110-4
^
ldifferenzdruck-Schalter
Differential oil pressure switch
Pressostat differentielle d'huile
fr Verdichter mit lpumpe (ab

2U-3.2(Y).
Elektrischer Anschluss sowie Hinweise zur Funktionsprfung siehe
Prinzipschaltbild und beiliegende
for compressors with oil pump (from

2U-3.2(Y).
For electrical connections and recommendations regarding function testing,
see wiring diagram and Technical
Information KT-170 included.
pour compresseurs avec pompe huile

( partir de 2U-3.2(Y).
Pour le raccordement lectrique et le contrle du bon fonctionnement, se referer au
schema de principe et I'lnformation
Technique KT-170 qui est jointe.
Druck-Wchter (HP + LP)
Pressure limiters (HP & LP)
Limiteurs de pression (HP + LP)
sind erforderlich, um den Einsatzbereich des Verdichters so abzusichern, dass keine unzulssigen
Betriebsbedingungen auftreten knnen.
Anschluss-Position siehe Seiten 10
und 11.
are necessary in order to limit the

operating range of the compressor to
avoid inadmissible operating conditions.
For position of connections see
pages 10 and 11.
sont ncessaires pour delimiter la plage

de fonctionnement du compresseur de
fa9on ce que des conditions de fonctionnement inadmissibles soient exclues.
Position des raccords, voir pages 10/11.
Oisumpfheizung
Crankcase heater
Resistance de carter
gewhrleistet die Schmierfhigkeit

des ls auch nach lngeren Stillstandszeiten. Sie verhindert strkere
Kltemittel-Anreicherung im l und
damit Viskosittsminderung.
ensures the lubricity, of the oil even

after long standstill periods. It prevents increased refrigerant solution in
the oil and therefore reduction of viscosity.
Die Oisumpfheizung muss im Stillstand des Verdichters betrieben werden bei

Auen-Aufstellung des Verdichters
langen Stillstandszeiten
groer Kltemittel-Fllmenge
Gefahr von KltemittelKondensation in den Verdichter
The crankcase heater must be energized during the standstill for

outdoor installation of the compressor
long shut-off periods
high refrigerant charge
danger of refrigerant condensation
into the compressor
garantit le pouvoir lubrifiant de l'huile,

mme apres des longues periodes stationnaires. Elle permet d'viter un enrichissement de l'huile en fluide frigorigne
et par consequent, une baisse de la viscosit.
Anschluss gem Prinzipschaltbild.

Weitere Details siehe Technische
Information KT-150.
Connections are according to the

wiring diagram. For further detais see
Technical Information KT-150.
CIC-System
CIC-System
Systeme CIC
dient zur Absicherung der thermischen

Anwendungsgrenzen bei R22-Tiefkhlung. Technische Beschreibung und
Hinweise zu Montage und elektrischem Anschluss siehe Technische
Information KT-130.
To maintain the thermal application

limits with R22 low temperature operation. For technical description and
instructions for fitting and electrical
connections see Technical Information
KT-130.
Serf delimiter la plage de fonctionnement du point de vue thermique en cas

d'emploi du R22 en basses temperatures.
Description technique et indications pour
le montage et le raccordement lectrique,
voir information technique KT-130.
f | - | Achtung!
. I J Mechanischer Schaden am
* " Verdichter mglich!
,
CIC-System und Leistungsrege. lung nicht gleichzeitig betreiben!
KB-110-4
1 Attention]
' Possible mechanical damage of
the compressor!
Do not operate CIC-system and
capacity control simultaneously!
La resistance de carter doit etre utiiser

durand des periodes stationaires en cas
d'installation extrieure du compresseur
de longues periodes d'immoblisation
de haute charge de fluide frigorigne
de risque de condensation de fluide frigorigne dans le compresseur
Raccordement conformment au schema
de principe. Pour des details supplmentaires voir Information Technique KT-150.
Attention!
Possible dfaut mcanique au compresseur !
Ne pas operer le syslerne CIC et la
regulation de puissance simultanment!
15
5 In Betrieb nehmen
5 Commissioning
5 Mise en Service
Druckfestigkeit und Dichtheit bevorzugt mit getrockneten Stickstoff (Ng)

prfen.
Test the strength pressure and the

tightness preferably with dry nitrogen
(N2).
Essayer la resistance la pression et l'tanchit prfremment avec l'azote sec

(N2).
Bei Prfung mit getrockneter Luft:
For testing with dried air:
En cas d'essai avec de l'air sch:
J|i3 Achtung!
^ J j Verdichter darf nicht mit Luft
abgepresst werden!
Absperrventile geschlossen halten.
Der Verdichter ist ab Werk sorgfaltig getrocknet, auf Dichtheit
geprft und mit Schutzgas (Ng)
befllt.
H ^ Attention!
| J 3 The compressor must not be
fesl pressurized with air!
^ , j | Keep the service valves closed.
t ^ The compressor is already thorK g oughly dehydrated, tested for
f *f^ leaks and under pressure with
%: holding charge (Ng).
rjjr| Attention 1
f]^ Le compresseur ne doit pas tre
mis sous pression avec de l'air!
Maintenir les vannes d'arrt
fermes.
Le compresseur est soigneusement
sch en usine, son tanchit est
controle et il est rempli avec un
gaz de protection (Ng).
jx^
tli
?*'J
,-<^
l 'm
^^
^^ J
*, 'l
Warning!
Never add refrigerant to the test
[ ' gas (N2 or air) e. g. as leak
>. , indicator.
; '^ Critical shift of the refrigerant
t ' i . ignition limit with high' pressure
I possible!
- * Environmental pollution with
-.** leakage or when deflating!
: Avertissement!
; Ne jamais ajouter fluide frigorigne
I au gaz d'essai (Ng ou air) - par ex.
: comme indicateur de fuite.
i Dislocation critique de la limite d'inI flammabilit en cas surpression de
i possible!
I Pollution d'environnement par fuite
et degonflement!
Warnung!
Dem Prfmedium (N2 oder Luft)
keinesfalls Kltemittel beimisehen - z. B. als Leck-Indikator.
Kritische Verschiebung der
Kltemittel-Zndgrenze bei
berdruck mglich!
Umweltbelastung bei Leckage
und beim Abblasen!
5.1 Druckfestigkeit prfen
5.1 Strength pressure test
5.1 Essayer la resistance la pression
Kltekreislauf (Baugruppe) entsprechend EN 378-2 prfen (oder gltigen

quivalenten Sicherheitsnormen). Der
Verdichter wurde bereits im Werk
einer Prfung auf Druckfestigkeit
unterzogen. Eine Dichtheitsprfung
(5.2) ist deshalb ausreichend.
Evaluate the refrigerant circuit (assembly) according to EN 378-2 (or

valid equivalent safety standards). The
compressor had been already tested
in the factory for strength pressure.
Therefore a tightness test (5.2) is sufficient.
Essayer le circuit frigorifique (groupe assemble) correspondant EN 378-2 (ou

normes de scurite quivalentes, qui sont
valables). Le compresseur tait dej
essay l'usine sur son resistance la
pression. Par 9a un essai d'tanchit
(5.2) est suffisiant.
Wenn dennoch die gesamte Baugruppe auf Druckfestigkeit geprft wird:
However, if the whole assembly is tested for strength pressure:
En cas d'essayer neanmoins la resistance

la pression du tout le groupe assemble:
7 ^ Gefahr!
^ ^ Prtjfdruck des Verdichters darf
'^h'^-^ die maximal zulssigen Drcke
L. -4 nicht berschreiten, die auf dem
* / 3 Typschild genannt sind!
; t | 3 ^' Bedarf Absperrventile
'J^m geschlossen halten!
"AC Danger!
A.i*' Test pressure may not exceed
the maximum operating pressures indicated on the name
;;, > plate!
-' _' If necessary leave the shut-off
valves closed!
'/y* Danger !
i-JKi Le timbrage ne doit pas excder
les pressions de service maximales
' I qui sont marquees sur la plaque
P'- ' d'identit !
^_ En cas utile laisser les vannes
s../ d'arrt fermes !
5.2 Dichtheit prfen
5.2 Tightness test
5.2 Essayer l'tanchit
Kltekreislauf (Baugruppe) als Ganzes oder in Teilen auf Dichtheit prfen

- entsprechend EN 378-3 (oder gltigen quivalenten Sicherheitsnormen).
Dazu vorzugssweise mit getrocknetem Stickstoff einen berdruck erzeugen.
Evaluate tightness of the entire refrigerant circuit (assembly) or parts of it according to EN 378-2 (or valid equivalent safety standards) by using preferably an overpressure of dry nitrogen.
Essayer tout le circuit frigorifique (groupe

assemble) ou des parties - conformment EN 378-2 (ou normes de scurite
quivalentes, qui sont valables). Utiliser
prfremment une surpression avec de
l'azote sch.
Gefahr!
Prfdrcke und Sicherheitsi hinweise siehe Kapitel 5.1.
F ^ Danger!
fjS: Test pressures and safety refer&!'j ences see chapter 5.1.
r ^ Danger !
i - Timbrages et indications de scurite
iL. voir chapitre 5.1.
16
KB-110-4
ns^jcs^^^ssxtaÊHxaasma
5.3 Evakuieren
5.3 Evacuation
5.3Tirage vide
lsumpfheizung einschalten.
Energize the crankcase heater.
Mettre la resistance de carter en service.
Vorhandene Absperr- und Magnetventile ffnen. Das gesamte System

einschlielich Verdichter auf Saugund Hochdruckseite mit Vakuumpumpe evakuieren.
Bei abgesperrter Pumpenleistung
muss ein "stehendes Vakuum" kleiner
als 1,5 mbar erreicht werden.
Wenn ntig Vorgang mehrfach wiederholen.
Open ail shut-off valves and solenoid

valves. Evacuate the entire system
including compressor using a vacuum
pump connected to the high and low
pressure sides.
When the pump is switched off a
"standing vacuum" of less than
1.5 mbar must be maintained.
If necessary repeat this procedure
several times.
Ouvrir les vannes d'arrt et les vannes

magntiques existantes. Proceder la
mise sous vide de l'ensemble du Systeme, y compris le compresseur, i'aspiration et au refoulement.
Un "vide stable" infrieur 1,5 mbar doit
se maintenir aprs i'arrt de la pompe
vide.
En cas utile repeter plusieurs fois la
procedure.
f 1^
k| j
wM
^;ij
;f
i|ft|
aii
' Attention !
I Danger de dfaut du moteur et du
' " - compresseur!
Ne pas dmarrer le compresseur
sous vide.
- Ne pas mettre de tension - mme
w ^. pas en vue d'un essai!
Achtung!
Gefahr von Motor- und Verdichter-Schaden!
Verdichter nicht im Vakuum starten!
Keine Spannung anlegen - auch
nicht zu Prfzwecken!
Attention!
Danger of motor and compressor damage!
Do not start compressor under
vacuum!
Do not apply any voltage not
even for test purposes!
5.4 Kltemittel einfllen
5.4 Charging refrigerant
5.4 Remplir le fluide frigorigene
Nur zugelassene Kltemittel einfllen

(siehe Kapitel 2).
Charge only permitted refrigerants

(see chapter 2).
Remplir seulement des fluides frigorignes autoriss (voir chapitre 2).
Bevor Kltemittel eingefllt wird:

- lsumpfheizung einschalten.
- lstand im Verdichter kontrollieren.
- Verdichter nicht einschalten!
Before refrigerant is charged:

- Energize the crankcase heater.
- Check the compressor oil level.
- Do not switch on the compressor!
Avant remplir le fluide frigorigene:

- Enclencher la resistance de carter.
- Controler le niveau d'huile dans le
compresseur.
- Ne pas enclencher le compresseur!
Flssiges Kltemittel direkt in den

VerflQssiger bzw. Sammler fllen,
bei Systemen mit berflutetem
Verdampfer evtl. auch in den Verdampfer.
Nach Inbetriebnahme kann es notwendig werden, Kltemittel zu
ergnzen:
Bei laufendem Verdichter Kltemittel auf der Saugseite einfllen,
am besten am Verdampfer-Eintritt.
Gemische mssen dem Fllzylinder als blasenfreie Flssigkeit entnommen werden.
Charge liquid refrigerant directly

into the condenser resp. receiver.
For systems with flooded evaporator refrigerant can be also charged
into the evaporator.
After commissioning it may be necessary to add refrigerant:
Charge the refrigerant from the
suction side while the compressor
is in operation. Charge preferably at
the evaporator inlet.
Blends must be taken from the
charging cylinder as "solid liquid".
Remplisser le fluide frigorigene liquide

directement dans le condenseur resp.
le reservoir de liquide. Pour les
systmes avec vaporateur noy, le
remplissage peut aussi se faire dans
l'vaporateur.
Aprs la mise en service, il peut s'avrer ncessaire de proceder un
appoint de fluide frigorigene:
Le compresseur tant en service,
introduire le fluide frigorigene du cot
aspiration, de preference l'entre de
l'vaporateur. Les melanges doivent
tre retirees du cylindre de remplissage en phase liquide et sans bulles.
Bei Flssigkeits-Einspeisung:
If liquid is charged:
En cas de remplissage en phase liquide;
a?l"t Achtung!
*_ I ^'j Gefahr von Nassbetrieb!
\ 'J uerst fein dosieren!
iîi" ltemperatur oberhalb 40C
y^J halten.
i l i i 40C.
f?l"^ Attention !
^\ -.| Risque de fonctionnement en noy !
J";J Faire un dosage tres fin.
pt-|| Maintenir la temperature d'huile auS^ dessus de 40C.
f
i
^ '
- 3j.
-^ t
g Danger!
S Explosion risk of components
'"f and pipelines by hydraulic over* ' pressure.
,.^ Avoid absolutely overcharging of
I I the system with refrigerant!
Danger!
Danger d'clatement des composants et conduites par surpression
hydraulique.
"''-'S Eviter absolument suralimentation
SwS du Systeme avec fluide frigorigene !
Gefahr!
Berstgefahr von Komponenten
und Rohrleitungen durch hydraulischen berdruck.
berfllung des Systems mit
Kltemittel unbedingt vermeiden!
KB-110-4
Attention!
, , Danger of wet operation!
tf' $ Charge small amounts at a time!
^ ^ J Keep the oil temperature above
17
g:
5.5 Kontrollen vor dem Start
5.5 Checks before starting
5.5 Controles avant le dmarrage
lstand
(im markierten Schauglasbereich)
Oil level
(within range on sight glass)
Niveau d'huile
(dans la plage indique sur le voyant)
Bei Verdichter-Austausch:
When exchanging a compressor:
En cas de remplacement du compresseur:
mm
^-f J
^
fe^
W''
^2i
f f ^ Attention!
| f I Oil IS already in the system.
g-"t| Therefore it may be necessary
g f j to drain a part of the oil charge.
W^ If there are large quantities of oil
^M in the circuit (possibly from a
K g preceding compressor damage),
,^ there is also a risk of liquid slug'M^ ging at start.
I ,-| Adjust oil level within the marked
&&a Sight glass range!
='l"' Attention !
I , II y a dj de I'huile dans le circuit.
'^'M '^"'^ cee raison il peut tre ncessaire de retirer une certaine quantit
d'huile.
Quand il y a des quantits importantes d'huile dans le circuit (p. ex. la
suite d'un dfaut du compresseur), il
existe un danger supplementaire de
coups de liquide au dmarrage.
Ajuster le niveau d'huile dans la
plage indique sur le voyant!
Achtung!
Es befindet sich bereits l im
Kreislauf. Deshalb kann es erforderlich sein, einen Teil der lfllung abzulassen.
Bsi greren lmengen im
Kreislauf (z. B. durch vorausgegangenen Verdichterschaden)
besteht zudem Gefahr von Flssigkeitsschlgen beim Starti Vorgang.
lstand innerhalb markiertem
Schauglasbereich halten!
ltemperatur (ca. 15 .. 20 K ber

Umgebungstemperatur bzw. saugseitiger Sttigungstemperatur)
Einstellung und Funktion der
Sicherheits- und Schutz-Einrichtungen
Oil temperature (approx. 15 .. 20 K

above ambient temperature resp.
suction side saturation temperature)
Setting and function of safety and
protection devices
Sollwerte der Zeitrelais
Setting of time relays
Verzgerungszeit des ldifferenzdruck-Schalters
Delay time of differential oil pressure switch
Abschaltdrcke der Hoch- und

Niederdruck-Wchter
Cut-out pressures of the high- and

low-pressure limiters
Absperrventile geffnet?
Are all shut-off valves opened?
11
Temperature d'huile (environ 15 .. 20 K

au-dessus de la temp, ambiante resp.
temp, de vapeur sature l'aspiration)
Rglage et fonction des dispositifs de
scurit et de protection
Rglage des relais de temporises
Temporisation de pressostat differentielle d'huile
Pression de coupure des limiteurs de
haute et basse pression
Vannes d'arrt ouvertes?
KB-110-4
s^
5.6 Startvorgang
5.6 Start-up procedure
5.6 Le demarrage
Schmierung / lkontrolle
Lubrication / oil check
Lubrlflcation / controle de Thulle
Unmittelbar nacti dem Start die

Schmierung des Verdictiters kontrollieren.
The compressor lubrication should be

checked immediately after starting.
Immediatement apres le demarrage, il faut

contrler la lubrlflcation du compresseur.
Oil level % to % height of sight

glass (repeat checks within the
first hours of operation).
Niveau d'huile entre % et % de la hauteur du voyant (contrles rpts

pendant les premieres heures de fonctionnement)
lstand % bis % Schauglashhe

(wiederholte Kontrollen innerhalb
der ersten Betriebsstunden).
Ab2U-3.2(Y):
Bei Bedarf ldruck kontrollieren:
mittels Manometer ber SchraderAnschlOsse an der lpumpe.
ldifferenzdruck (Soliwert):
1,4 bis 3,5 bar
Minimal zulssiger Ansaugdruck
(Saugseite lpumpe):
0,4 bar
From 2U-3.2(Y):
When required check the oil pressure by means of a gauge connected to the Schrader valves on the oil
pump.
Differential oil pressure (permissible
values):
1.4 to 3.5 bar
Minimum permissible inlet pressure
(suction side of oil pump).... 0.4 bar
A partir de 2U-3.2(Y):
Contrler la pression d'huile: avec un
manometre par l'intermdiaire des raccords Schrader sur la pompe huile.
Pression d'huile differentielle (valeur
nominale):
1,4 3,5 bar
Pression d'aspiration min. admissible
(cot aspiration pompe huile): 0,4 bar
Automatische berwachung durch

ldifferenzdruck-Schalter
(Abschalt-Differenzdruck 0.7 bar,
Verzgerungszeit 90 s). Bei Sicherheits-Abschaltungen des Gertes
Stranalyse vornehmen.
Hinweise auf dem Deckel des ldifferenzdruck-Schalters beachten!
Automatic monitoring by differential

oil pressure switch (differential cutout pressure 0.7 bar, time delay
90 s). When this device cuts out a
subsequent fault diagnosis of the
system is required.
Observe therfore recommendations
shown on cover of the differential
oil pressure switch!
Controle automatique avec pressostat

differentielle d'huile (pression differentielle de coupure: 0,7 bar, temporisation: 90 s). En cas de coupure de pressostat, il faut proceder une recherche
des causes.
Tenir compte des indications dans le
couvercle de pressostat differentielle
d'huile!
Wenn grere lmengen nachgefllt

werden sollen:
If larger quantities of oil have to be

added:
S'il faut rajouter de grandes quantits

d'huile:
fw^
;,(l
f,'j
i
F'^ Attention!
C-|/] Danger of liquid slugging!
-j| Check the oil return.
qpi Attention !
I-f.si Risque de coups de liquide 1
i:i Contrler le retour d'huile.
Schwingungen
Vibrations
Vibrations
Die gesamte Anlage insbesondere

Rohrleitungen und Kapillarrohre auf
abnormale Schwingungen berprfen.
Wenn ntig, zustzliche Sicherungsmanahmen treffen.
The whole plant especially the pipelines and capillary tubes must be
checked for abnormal vibrations. If
necessary additional protective measures must be taken.
Contrler I'ensemble de I'installation en

particulier la tuyauterie et les tut>es capillaires s'il existant des vibrations anormales.
Si ncessaire, prendre des mesures de
precaution adquates.
f | ^ Achtung!
* I Rohrbrche sowie Leckagen am
Verdichter und sonstigen Anlagen-Komponenten mglich!
Starke Schwingungen vermeiIî- den!
ri-" Attention!
;.'t".' Attention !
I , Possibilit de ruptures de tuyau et
jj";.,', vidages an compresseur et autres
fi ,;| componets de I'installation !
Isak viter des vibrations fortes !
Achtung!
Gefahr von Flssigkeitsschlgen!
lrckfhrung berprfen.
KB-110-4
11 s Pipe fractures and leakages at

t-'J, compressor and other compo^t;'-^ nents of the plant possible!
'&aM Avoid Strong vibrations!
19
g;
Schalthufigkeit
Switching frequency
Nombre d'enclenchements
Der Verdichter sollte nicht hufiger als

8 mal pro Stunde gestartet werden.
Dabei die Mindest-Laufzeit nicht
unterschreiten:
Mindest-Laufzeit
bis 5,5 kW
2 min
bis 15 kW
3 min
ber 15 kW
5 min
The compressor should not be started

more than 8 times per hour. Thereby a
minimum running time should be
guaranteed:
min. running time
to 5,5 kW
2 min
to 15 kW
3 min
above 15 kW
5 min
Le compresseur ne doit pas tre mis en

service que 8 fois par heure. En plus une
dure de marche minimale doit tre
assure:
dure de marche min.
5,5 kW
2 min
15 kW
3 min
de 15 kW
5 min
Betriebsdaten berprfen
Checking the operating data
Verdampfungstemperatur
Sauggastemperatur
VerflQssigungstemperatur
Druckgastemperatur
ltemperatur
Schalthufigkeit
Datenprotokoll anlegen.
Evaporating temperature
Suction gas temperature
Condensing temperature
Discharge gas temperature
Oil temperature
Switching frequency
Prepare data protocol.
Controler des caractristiques de

service
Temperature d'vaporation
Temperature des gaz aspires
Temperature de condensation
Temperature des gaz refouls
Temperature de I'huiie
Dresser un proces-verbal.
SKUaCKSMVKMBWSC
20
KB-110-4
^
6 Betrieb / Wartung
6 Operation / IVIaintenance
6 Service / Maintenance
6.1 Regelmige Kontrollen
6.1 Regular checks
6.1 Contrles rgulirs
Anlage entsprechend den nationalen

Vorschriften regelmig prfen.
Dabei folgende Punkte kontrollieren:
Examine regularly the plant according

to national regulations.
Check the following points:
Betriebsdaten (vgl. Kapitel 5.6)
Operating data (chapter 5.6)
Verifier I'installation rgulirement conformment aux rglementations nationales.

En ce cas contrler les points suivants:
lversorgung (siehe Kapitel 5.6)
Oil supply (see chapter 5.6)
Schutz-Einrichtungen und alle Teile

zur benwachung des Verdichters
(Rckschlagventile, DruckgasTemperaturwchter, ldifferenzdruck-Schalter, Druck-Wchter...
siehe Kapitel 4.3 und 5.6)
Protection devices and all compressor monitoring parts (check

valves, discharge gas temperature
limiter, differential oil pressure
switch, pressure limiters... see
chapters 4.3 and 5.6)
Datenprotokoli pflegen.
Update data protocol.
Elektrische Kabel-Verbindungen
auf festen Sitz prfen.
Check electrical cable connections

on tight fitting.
Integriertes Druckentlastungsventil
Internal pressure relief valve
Soupape de surpression Incorpore
Das Ventil ist wartungsfrei.
The valve is maintenance free.
Cette soupape n'exige aucun entretien.
Allerdings kann es nach wiederholtem

Abblasen auf Grund abnormaler Betriebsbedingungen zu stetiger Leckage kommen. Folgen sind Minderleistung und erhhte Druckgastemperatur. Ventil prfen und ggf. austauschen.
Repeated opening of the valve due to

abnormal operating conditions, however, may result in steady leakage.
Consequences are losses in capacity
and increased discharge temperature.
Check and replace the valve in this
case.
Cependant des fuites permanentes peuvent se produire apres I'avoir crache

plusiers reprises en raison des conditions
de service anormales. Une capacit
rduite et une temperature du gaz de
refoulement leve sont des consequences. Contrler la soupape et la remplacer en cas utile.
Caractristiques de service (chap. 5.6)

Alimentation en huile (voir chap. 5.6)
Dispositifs de protection et toutes
pieces, qui surveillent le compresseur
(clapets de retenue, limiteur de temperature du gaz au refoulement, pressostat differentielle d'huile, limiteurs de
pression... voir chapitres 4.3 et 5.6)
Soigner le proces-verbal.
Verifier les raccords des cables lectriques sur ajustement solide.
aa^&tusasKi'ef
KB-110-4
21
Si^
i,c
6.2 lwechsel
6.2 Oil changing
6.2 Remplacement de l'hulle
lwechsel ist bei fabrikmig gefertigten Anlagen nicht zwingend. Bei

"Feld-Installationen" oder bei Einsatz
nahe der Einsatzgrenze empfiehlt sich
ein erstmaliger Wechsel nach ca. 100
Betriebsstunden. Dabei auch lfilter
und Magnetstopfen reinigen.
Danach etwa alle 3 Jahre bzw. 10 000
.. 12 000 Betriebsstunden l wechseln. Dabei auch lfilter und Magnetstopfen reinigen.
lsorten: siehe Kapitel 2.
Oil changing is not normally necessary for factory assembled plants. For
"field installations" and for applications
near the operating limits a first oil
change is recommanded after approx.
100 operating hours. This includes
cleaning the oil filter and magnetic
plug.
After that the oil has to be replaced
approx. every 3 years or 10 000 ..
12000 operating hours. Clean also oil
filter and magnetic plug.
Oil types: See chapter 2.
Une vidange d'huile ne s'impose pas pour

les systmes realises en usine. En cas
de "realisation sur le site" ou de fonctionnement aupres des limites du domaine
d'application autoris, une premiere
vidange est prconise apres environ
100 heures de fonctionnement. Nettoyer
alors egalement le filtre huile et le bouchon magnetique.
Par la suite, prvoir une vidange d'huile
tous les 3 ans resp. apres 10 00 ..12000
heures de fonctionnement. Nettoyer alors
egalement le filtre huile et le bouchon
magnetique. Types d'huile: voir chapitre 2.
f i r i Achtung!
VI { Esterle sind stark hygroskopisch.
Feuchtigkeit wird im l chemisch
A gebunden. Es kann nicht oder
-.'_ nur unzureichend durch Evaku'i ieren entfernt werden.
X uerst sorgsamer Umgang
', erforderlich!
/ Lufteintritt in Anlage und lge'2 binde vermeiden!
Attention!
Ester oils are strongly hygro'i3 scopic.
Moisture is chemically compounded with these oils. It cannot be, or only insufficiently,
removed by evacuation.
Handle very carefully!
Avoid air admission into the
plant and oil can!
Altl Umwelt gerecht entsorgen!

I. Chlorhaltiges l ist Sondermll.
Dispose of waste oil properly!

Chlorinated oil is pollutive waste.
Attention !
Les hulles ester sont fortement
hygroscopiques.
L'humidit est lie chimiquement
dans les hulles. Elle ne peut pas
tre, ou de manire insuffisante
seulement, retire lors de la mise
sous vide.
Manipulation tres soigne exige !
Eviter l'introduction d'air dans l'installation et les bidons d'huile I
L'huile usee devra tre recycle de
faôn adapte!
Les huiles chiores usees sont des
dchets pol lues.
ESSKS^^SWEKUi
22
KB-110-4
^
7 Auer Betrieb nehmen
7 De-commissioning
7 IWise hors service
7.1 Stillstand
7.1 Standstill
7.1 Arret
Bis zur Demontage lsumpfheizung

eingeschaltet lassen. Das verhindert
erhhte Kltemittel-Anreicherung im
Verdichter-l.
Keep the crankcase heater switched

on until dismatling the compressor!
This prevents increased refrigerant
solution in the compressor oil.
Laisser la resistance de carter mise en

service jusqu'au demontage du compresseurl Elle permet d'viter un enrichissement de fluide frigorigene dans le compresseur.
7.2 Demontage des Verdichters
7.2 Dismantling the compressor
7.2 Demontage du compresseur
Bei Reparatureingriffen, die eine

Demontage notwendig machen, oder
bei Auer-Betriebnahme:
For repair work, that makes dismantling necessary, or when decommissioning them:
En vue d'une reparation, que fait un

demontage ncessaire, ou de la mise
hors service:
Absperrventile am Verdichter schlieen. Kltemittel absaugen. Kltemittel

nicht abblasen, sondern Umwelt
gerecht entsorgen!
Close the shut-off valves at the compressor. Pump-off the refrigerant. Do

not release the refrigerant but dispose
it properly!
Fermer les vannes d'arrt du compresseur. Aspirer le fluide frigorigene. Ne pas

laisser le fluide frigorigene s'echapper,
mais recycler le de fagon adaple !
r X 3 Warnung!
'ZiA Verdichter kann unter Druck
I v H stehen!
|^*4 Schwere Verletzungen mglich.
icM Schutzbrille tragen!
"A" Warning!
^ - j Compressor can be under
, pressure!
' Severe injuries possible.
^ ^ Wear safety goggles!
Verschraubungen oder Flansche an

den Verdichter-Ventilen ffnen. Verdichter ggf. mit Hebezeug entfernen.
Open the threaded joints or flanges at

the compressor valves. Remove the
compressor if necessary with a hoisting tool.
Ouvrir les vissages ou les brides aux

vannes du compresseur. Enlever le compresseur en cas chant avec un engin
de levage.
Verdichter entsorgen
Disposing the compressor
Mise la ferraille du compresseur
l am Verdichter ablassen.
Chlorhaltiges l ist Sondermll.
Drain the oil at the compressor.

Verdichter reparieren lassen oder

Umwelt gerecht entsorgen.
Have the compressor repaired or disposed of properly!
Vider l'huile du compresseur.

Lhuile usee devra tre recyclee de fagon
adaptee ! Les huiles chlorees usees sont
des dchets pollus.
KB-110-4
Avertissement!
Le compresseur peut-tre sous
pression!
Graves blessures possible.
Faire reparer le compresseur ou le faire

recycler de fagon adapte.
23
g
I- N -T -E R- N A -t-
I -o
N A-
I-N-T-E-R-N-A-T-
I O N A L
Ersatzteilliste
Spare Parts
List
Liste des pieces

dtaches
Hubkolbenverdichter,
4- und 6-Zylinder
Recip. Compressors,
4- and 6-Cylinder
Compresseurs piston,
4 et 6 cylindres
w-
4J-13.2
bis / to /
6F-50.2
44J-26(.2)
bis / to /
66F-100.2
4H(.2)
bis / t o /
6F.2
S4G-12.2
bis / to /
S66F-60.2
S6H.2
bis / t o /
S6F.2
W4HAbis / t o /
W6FA
xiiMaimKrmiaaa^
Wichtige Hinweise fr
den Benutzer
Important recommendations for the user
Recommendation
importante pour le client
Eine ordnungsgeme Bearbeitung

Ihres Ersatzteilauftrages kann nur bei
vollstndigen Angaben erfolgen.
An order can only be executed exactly

if a full designation is given.
L'xcution confbrme d'une commande de

pieces dtaches ne peut tre faite qu'avec
I'indication complete des coordonnes.
Bestellbeispiel:
Example for ordering:
Example de commande:
Stck
Quantity
Quantit
Benennung
Description
Designation
Typ
Type
Type
Art.-Nr.
Ref. nr.
Rf. no.
Fabrikationsnummer
Serial number
No. de fabrication
Magnetschraube
Magnetic plug
Vis magntique
6F-50.2
366 114-02
1 503 0001
Sind bei einem Teil nderungsstufen

vermerkt, mu neben der Art.-Nummer
auch die Fabrikationsnummer oder die
nderungsstufe angegeben werden.
\ Werden keine Angaben gemacht, wird
j die neueste Teileausfhrung geliefert.
,. Verdichtertypen, die lter als 10
Jahre sind, werden in dieser Liste
nicht mehr aufgefhrt.
(123 4 5 6 - 7 8 )
(123 4 5 6 - 7 8 ) 4
[incl. 17,23]
- . 17,23
(23)
f
In cases where stages of modification
are indicated, please give the compressor serial number as well as the ref.
number, without this latest design will
be supplied.
"
. . , '
'
Compressor types older than 10

years are not entered any more i n .
this list.
S'il s'agit d'une piece ayant subie des

modifications, veuillez indiquer en dehors
du numro de reference de la piece le
numro de fabrication du compresseur
reparer. Sans ces coordonnes il vous
sera livre d'office la piece la plus recente.
Les types de compresseurs qui sont
plus ges que 10 ans ne figurent plus
dans la liste.
Legende
Legend
Legende
Artikel-Nr. in Klammem:
nicht mehr liefefbar .--
Ref. no. in brackets:

no mois available .-,
Rf. no. entre paranthses:

non plus livrable
nicht mehr lieferbar, aber austauschbar durch nchste ndemngsstufe
no more available, but interchangeable by next modification step
non plus livrable, mls interchangeable par le prochain no. de modification
enthlt Pos. 17 und 23
containing item 17 and 23
inclus no. 17 et 23
bereits enthalten in Pos. 17 und 23
already contained in item 17 and 23
dj contenu dans no. 17 et 23
Pos.-Nr. in Klammem:
nicht in der Zeichnung dargestellt
Item no. in brackets:

not shown in the exploded view
pos. no. in brackets:

ne sont pas indiques sur l'clat
Fortsetzung der Pos. nchste Seite
Item continued next page
No. continue ta page suivante
a
Die Tabelle zeigt die in dieser Ersatzteilliste enthaltenen Typen und die verwendeten Abkrzungen:
The table shows the types and the

abbreviations used in the spare part
ist:
Le tableau indique les types et les abbreviations utilises dans cette liste de pieces
dtaches:
44.. / 66..
S4G-12.2..
S6F-30.2
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S6H-20.2
S6G-25.2
S6F-30.2
4J-13.2..
6F-50.2
4J-13.2
4J-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H-25(.2)
4G-20(.2)
4G-30(.2)
6J-22.2
6J-33.2
6H-25(.2)
6H-35(.2)
6G-30(.2)
6G-40(.2)
6F-40.2
6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
6H(.2)
6G(.2)
6F.2
S66J-32.2..
S66F-60.2
S66J-32.2
S66H-40.2
S66G-50.2
S66F-60.2
W4HA.. W6FA
W4HA
W4GA
W6HA
W6GA
W6FA
S6H.2... S6F.2
S6H.2
S6G.2
S6F.2
44J-26(.2)
44J-44(.2)
44H-30(.2)
44H-50(.2)
44G-40(.2)
44G-60(.2)
66J-44.2
66J-66.2
66H-50(.2)
66H-70(.2)
66G-60(.2)
66G-80(.2)
66F-80.2
66F-100.2
?^
'(
r^ <
LL
U. (O
(O
> <
CM I
^m
Anlaufentlastung SU"
Start unloading
Dispositif de demarrage vide
Leistungsregler CR"
Capacity control
Rgulateur de puissance
o.
:B^
Sg:
(C
mtsssmssssssa^smi
Typ
Pos.
ritem Type
%
11
im.
1
Type
4J-13.2/-22.2
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty ,
Modifi- froifn model

cation month/year/no
Ref nr
Description
Pier
Modifi- parlir du modele Ref no.

cation mois/anne/no
"i
1
S4G-12 2
300 028-01
10/82/2300l't'' "300'b28ll2''X?"
300 051-02
10/82/230001"^ *3b0 2 8 ^ F ^ -
ca 2/83
6H-25(2)/-35f2)
1
1
10/82/2320311^ abo'oTis^s'^";'
6G-30( 2) / -40f 2)
6F-40 2 / -50 2
4H(.2)
4G(.2)'
6H(.'2)"
6G(.2)
6F2
12/82/232001
"65
'"0'70
0 75
300 028-07 ,,,
0 82
Gehuse
Body
0 70
[incl. 3,5]
0 70
10/82/2300'l7
3bo''26557^~ Corps
10/82/230001
300 026-06
10/82/230001'y-" 300'026^r7'"'
~
t-;)-
0 75
0 82
300 026-4''~"'
"0'70
W4GA(L)
W4GA(L)
W6HA(L)'''- " " '^-
.1
W6HA(L)
. 2
W6GA(L)
W6GA(L)
W6FA
3'026-08 -""
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
311 100-04
300 026-12
4/95/484507
''Vs
300 02V-O5
300 026-14
3/95/483540
""'P'"'
3/95/483513 -^
0 70
30'026-O6"'"^300 026-13 - ,
300 026-07
3/95/483533
1
..
3lfl00-8'!7
f
_ "'
320 500-06
0 75
300 026-15
311 100-05
-'^f
0 75
300 026-08
-^ j . -
0 60/75
"0>5
300 026-04
1-
0 65
"Ô
300 028-06
W4HA(L)
4J-13^.. 6F-50.2
Gehuse
Body
Corps
[incl. 2,3,4,5]
300 028-04
W4HA(L)
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
Designation
11/82/231001
4H .6F.2
'-"^'"^ '""1 '
W4HA.. W6FA 4
10/82/230001
6T22.2 / -33 2
'4G-20(2)/-30(2)
nde- ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
rung
4H-15(2)/-25(2)
stock
0 82
Lagerbuchse (Motorseite)
Bearing bush (motor side)
Coussinet (cote moteur)
*1
0 50 X 0 45 X 47,5
Lagerbuchse (Kurbelgehuse) 0 50 X 0 45 X 47,5

Bearing bush (crankcase side)
'75xY0x''70"''^"
Coussinet (cote carter)
*1
0 62 X 0 48 X 1,7
Anlaufscheibe (Motorseite)
Thrust washer (motor side)
Rondelle de tiute (cot moteur)
1
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
1
'1
320 500-06
'; , ;
4H-15(.2)
4J-13.2
S4G-12.2
4J-22.'2 '
'"
4H-25(.2)
4G-20(.2) / -30(.2)
1 '
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25.2 / 6H-35(.2)
6G-30(.2)
S6F-30.2
:6G-40('2p:::-yiSi;;? VJJIJIIP
6F;ô.2/-5o:2':.a:jE:
- -"
Anlaufscheibe (Kurbelgehuse 0 6 2 x 0 4 8 x 1 . 7
Thrust washer (crankcase side
320 500-08 '-" Rondelle de bute (cot carter' 0 8 6 x 0 71 x1,7,
-1
301 007-06
._, . ,
,.- -- .--_--
30'l'007-07%" "
301 007-10
s'fi'S
gaW352oi||;: ^3t:-p-T6i|:J
Kubelwelle
Crankshaft
Vilebrequin
[incl. 7]
Hub/Stroke/Course 55
0 45 X 467
'Hub/Stroke/Course C5
' 0 45x522
0 45 X 570
"Hub/Sfek/Coure^SSil&S'i
T:45 x;63"ft>;;|||R5tS
.^:;:;|/f:|f||i^.,-:|:::;^
^':'d-U-^
'v'-K'-.i;":v"r '"',
^^-^tyiiy
- -i:"--
Pos
Stock
Typ
''.' -
~ v'
Item Type
No.
>C^
^ J * ^ " '
.' '^ '
' "^ j
Type ' i , -. ,-,.~r.

^
Qty.
-,
Piece
''
' r .
nde- ab Baujahr
rung
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Bennnnung
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- partirduowdele Ref no

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
301 007-03
'6H(2)'
6G(2)
F2
W6HA
W6GA
W6FA
301 007-08
4J-13 2 .6F-50 2
2/3
366112-01
4Hr.:6F2
W4HA W6FA
2/3
366 112-02
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4J-13.2/-22.2
6J-22.2 / -33.2
4/6
302 238-25 .
4H.15(2)/-25(2)
4H(.2)
6H-25( 2) / -35( 2)
6H(.2)
4/6
302 238-16
W4HA
W6HA
4/6
1
*.
S4G-12 2
3/95/483000
Kubelwelle
Crankshaft
Vilebrequin
[incl. 7]
Verschluss-Sch raube
Plug
Vis de fermeture
*6
4G.20(.2)/'-3b( 2)
"4/6
6G-30(.2)y-40(.2)
4G(2)
.;,
^ - : '''j-'X t^^>i' s ^ v^* '
i
6G( 2) -r, -^
W4GA
W6GA
'^4/6
6F-4O2/-50I2 ^
6F.2 ; :
_* - - -
(10)
(12)
10
V^
"'
S *
"' s"
..
"i. ^
^ ',
y>
' '* "'V
<,
t
^ _
lE
M 8 X 1 DIN906
M 12x1,5
Pleuel / Kolben komplett

0 64,96 mm*
Connecting rod / piston compl.
Bielle / Piston complet
0 69 96 mm*
pncl. 10,15,18,19]
0 69 96 mm'
302 237-22
~0 59 95 mm*
"
Hochdruck-Seite
High pressure side
Cote haute pression
302 238-19
0 74,96 mm*
Niederdruck-Seite
Stempelung des Standard-KolLow pressure side
bens. 1st ein anderer Durchmesser Cote basse pression
eingestempelt, mu dieser zustzlich zur Ersatzteilnummer angege- 0 74 96 mm'

ben werden.
v^r.
i ,%,^---:,^, * Standard piston marldng, when
^ -x -^^ c
^
stamped with another diameter,
indicate this in addition to spare

part no.
302 257-i4
0 74 96 mm'
* Timbrage du piston standard.
Dans le cas oil un autre diametre
0 81 96 mm*
302 238-22 ' " - serail timbre sur le piston, il faut
prciser ce diametre additionelle.
X. V _ ^
_
-E
ment au numro de reference.
302 238-19'
6/91/406000
K.
0 45 X 532
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
Bouchon de fermeture
'
2
'
Hub/Stroke/Course"55
- 0 45 X 554
'
302 257-01
6,91/406000
S4G-12.2
r^T
J-^
W6FA
S4G-12.2
302 115-03
S-tG-12 2
302 115 Cl
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
4/6
302 115-01
4J-13.2.. 6F..
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
8/12
6/91/406000
9/95/489000
-0
302 257-07
382 141-01
Pleuel komplett
Connecting rod complete
Bielle complet
[incl. 11.. 14]
-9
Sicherungsring
Spring washer
Rondelle Grower
^10
81,96 mm*
-. ,
Hochdruck-Seite
High pressure side
Cote haute pression
fl^liederdruck-Seite
'Low pressure side
Cote basse pression'
A8,D1N6796-FST
tSieeimssmsiisen^&ssm&i
Pos.
Stck
Typ
Item
Type
No.
Type"J' - j '.';;_
^ %1
Sfe
!iaeifiimmm3^KmsSB>s^s:asmig
'-^
*iL "
Ref nr
De'.cnption
- -.
Piece Modifi- partiYdumodde Ref no
cation
(15)
Art Nr
Benennung
"
Modifi- from model

Qty.
-
nderung
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
4J-13.2/-22.2
6J-22 2 / -33 2
4/6
302 233-22
4H-15(.2)y-25(2)
6H-25(2)/-35(2)
4H(2)
6H(2)
4/6
302 233-05
W4HA
W6HA
4/6
6/91/406000
302 2 3 2 16
S4G-12.2
302 233-08
302 233-08
4/6
6G(2)
W4GA
W6GA
'6F-40.27-'50.2
6F,2
(16)
4/6
'
302 233-11
6'
^ !
6/91/406000
S4G-12.2
383 401-04
S4G-12 2
383 401-06
4/6
383 401 06
->.
6F^0.2/-50 2
6F2
W6FA
, 6
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4 H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
8/12
0 64 96 m m '
0 69 96 mm*
0 69, 96 mm*
' 59,96'rnm* " ^ ' ! " "
Hochdruck-Seite " , ,"
>"High pressure Side
LCot haute pression
* Stempelung des Standard-Kolbens. Ist ein anderer Durchmesser

eingestempelt, mu dieser zustzlich zur Ersatzteil-Nr. angegeben
werden.
* Standard piston marking, when
stamped with another diameter.
indicate this in addition to spare
part no.
* Umbrage du piston standard.
Dans le cas oil un autre diametre
serait timbre sur le piston, il feut
prciser ce diametre additionellement au numro de reference.
302 233-43
W6F
4J-13.2/-22.2~
6J-22.2 / -33.2
4H-15(.2)/-25(.2)
6H-25(.2) / -35(.2)
4H(.2)
6H(.2)
W4HA
W6HA
4G-20(.2) / -30(.2)
6G-30(.2)/-40(.2)
4G(.2)
6G(.2)
W4GA
W6GA
(17)
302 2 3 3 ^ 0
6/91/406000
Kolben komplett
Piston complete
Piston complet
[ i n d . 16,17,18,19]
* 9
302 233-37
S4G 1 2 ?
4G-20(.2)7'-30(2)
6G-30( 2) / -40( 2)
4G(.2) .
_
Debignabon
mois/annee/no
0 74,96 mm*
Niederdnjck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cot basse pression
0 74 96 mm*
0 74 96 mm*
0 81 96 mm*
0 81,96 mm*
Kolbenbolzen
Piston pin
Axe de piston
.*15
0 20x013x45
Hochdruck-Seite
High pressure side
Cot haute pression
f 2 0 x 0 13x56
' Niederdnjck-Seite
: Low pressure side Cot basse pression
' 20 X 0 13 X 56
m^j~^
38340V26',,
0 20x013x60
382 231-04
Sicherungsring
Retaining ring
Circlip d'arrt
-15
0 20x1,DIN472
11
fC
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
' -,.
^
No.
IVIodifi- partirdu modele Ref no

cation mois/anne/no,"
^
Designation
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
S4G-12.2
382 300-52
S4G-12 2
382 300-58
P 75 X 0 6 8 , 7 x 1 , 5 C r - ' J
-NiederdruckSeite
\ '-.
JLOW pressure side f--^
'
*Cot basse pression " ' -
4J-13.2/-22.2
6J-22.2 / -33.2
4/6
382 300-46
0 65x059,2x1,5
DIN70910, Cr
(Kolben/Piston 0 64,96)*
4H-15(2)/-25(2)
6H-25(2)/-35(2)
4H(2)
6H(2)
W4HA
W6HA
4/6
" 4 G i o ( . 2 ) / -30(.2)
6G-30(.2) / -40(.2)
4G(.2)
6G(.2)
W4GA
W6GA
4/6
'
.wc**,'*
" "
'
"'"' -
4H-15(.2)/-25(.2)
6H-25(.2)/-35(.2)
4H(2)
6H(.2)
W4HA
W6HA
4G-20(2)/-30(2)
6G-30(.2)/-40(.2)
4G(.2)
,
.
6 G ( 2 ) . ' .. - .
,
Nut 1 - Verdichtungsring
Groove 1 - Compression ring
Rainure 1 - Segment tanchit
382 300-55
382 300-58
6/88/346000"''
Z%2Z<iÛ!f-- j'-* ^ \ ' ' '
'
0 60 x 0 54,9 x 1,5 Cr
Hochruck-Selte
High pressure side
Cot haute pression
' 70 x 0 64 1 X 1 5
6/88/346000
^'t
* Achtung! Bei der Bestellung von

Kolbenringen mutt unbedingt die
Markierung am Kolbentxjden, der
Kolbendurctimesser und die Kolbenringhhe angegeben werden.
* AttentionI In case of ordering
piston rings please specify stamped mari< on piston bottom, piston
ring diameter and piston
ring
height.
* AttentionI Sur votre commande
de segments de piston veuillez
prciser le marquage sur le fond
du piston, le diametre du segment
et I'hauteur du segment.
D1N70910 Cr
(Kolben/Piston 0 69 96)*
0 75 X 0 68,7 x 1,5
DIN70910, Cr
; g j x 0 75 T ? 1 5 "
-'DIN70910 Cr '^ '-' ^-"'
' (Kolben/Piston 0 81.96)*
382 310-19
382 310-25
,^0 7 5 x ' 6 8 , ' 7 x " l , 5 '

,,Niederdruck-Seite
'
, Low pressure side - ; *Cot basse pression" '
382 ' 310-13
^Lf^ jB!jy"'fc'!-^;*.l5'l*t^^l-K.JU-^Jf^ S J X , - J -
l.Bli,l..
4J-13.2/-22.2
6J-22.2 / -33.2
W4GA
W6GA
6/88/346000
- 6'"
-
S4G-12.2
S4G-12.2
4/6
"4/6'
'-,^'1
6/88/346000 ~."
<'
', ^
0 60 x 0 54,9 x 1,5
Hochruclc-Seite
High pressure side
Cot haute pression
0 65x59,5x1,5
DIN70911
'0'7b764;'i"'xl'',5'"" ;" '"""

,-DIN70911
*.Jl-..
- '\
. (Kolben/Piston 069,96)* .
'
- * . * ' '
6/88/346000
382 310-22
4/6
1/92/421000
382 330-01
" ,
6/88/346000.,
382 310 25
:. 1>.., ^1
2
6F-40.2 / -50.2
6R2
W6FA
"'70x 0 64,1x1,5
DIN70911
0 70 x 0 64,1 X 3 G-Ring
'75x'68,7x"l,5'
DIN70911
l~"'
'- (Kolben/Piston 0 74,96)'
. *- .'
4/6
'
"^' -~! ' ' ^
"4/6
Nut 2 - Verdichtungsring
Groove 2 - Compression ring
Rainure 2 - Segment tanchit
15
3'^82 310-22 '""
4/6
4/6
12
Descnpt on
Modifi- from model

cation month/year/no.
-.'-V,"' Piece
6F-40.2 / -50.2
6F.2
W6FA
19
Ref r r
Qty.
'
18
Benennung
nderung
Type
Art Nr
Stck
'"
6/88/346000
382 310-25
6/88/346000
* Achtung! Bei der Bestellung von

Kolbenringen mu untiedingt die
382 330-04
Markierung am Kolbenboden, der
Kolbendurchmesser und die Kolt)enringhhe angegeben werden,
382 3'l0-28 ' " " AttentionI In case of ordering
piston rings please specify stamped mark on piston bottom, piston
ring diameter and piston ring
382 310-28
height.
* AttentionI Sur votre commande
1/92/421000
382 330-07
1/92/421000
0 7 5 x 0 64.7x1.5
DIN70911
0 75 x 0 64,7 X 3 G-Ring
t -
w c % " < c f-.iki '
0 82 X 75,1 X 1,5 DIN ,
'70911
(Kolben/PlSton 0 81,96)*
' _ ' - , . - " . , * ., , '
0 8 2 x 0 75,1x1,5
DIN70911
de seyrnents de piston veuillez

/^ rx -re ^ n r-* nprciser te marquage sur le fond
^ ^2 X 0 75,1 X 3 G-Ring
du piston, le diametre du segment (Kolben/PlSton 0 81,96)
et I'hauteur du segment.
:S&
Pos.
Typ
Stuck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

cation montti/year/no
.No.'
Type
Piece
(20)
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Re* nr
Descnpticn
Modlfi- parb'r du modele Ref no

cabon mois/annee/no
Designation
4H-15/-25
6H-25/-35
4H
6H
W4HA
W6HA
0/0
ca. 9/84
46-20/-30
6G-30 / -40
4G
6G
W4GA
W6G^
0/0
ca 9/84
Nut 3 - labstreifring
Groove 3 - Oil scraper ring
Rainure 3 - Segment racleur
d'huile
(21)
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA..W6GA
8/83/248000
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
(22)
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA..W6GA
8/83/248000
Zahnscheibe
Lock washer
Rondelle Grower
(23)
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA..W6GA
8/83/248000
Spritzblech
Oil splasher
Tle d'etanchit
24
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H 6F2
W4hA W6FA
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
25
372 314-03
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
9/80/189001
372 807-01
Dichtunqssatz
Set of gaskets
Jeu do joints
* 171, 330, 415
12/81/212001
(305 109-01)i
Lagerdeckel komplett mit lpumpe

Bearing cap complete with oil pump
Chapeau a palier complet
[incl. 26..31]
ca. 8/95
305 125-03
0 182 x 0 133 x 1
îT'%'^'" '' "l 82 x "l*33 x 1 '

'-"- ^ - " " * ' ' 0 182 x 0 133 x 0.75
0182x0133x0,5
0 1 8 2 x 0 133x0,8
-'
Lagerdeckel kompl. fr MP54, Delta P

Bearing cap complete for MP54, Delta P
Chapeau a palier complet MP54, Delta P
[incl. 34]
W4HA'.."W6FA
ca 8/05
305 125-04 "^ " Lagerdeckel kompl. fr MP55A, Delta P ,

Beanng cap complete for MP55A, Delta P
Chapeau a palier complet MP55A, Delta P
[incl. 34]
-.
.,
.
(26)
4J-13 2 . . 6F-50 2
4 H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
12/81/212001
361 101-01
(27)
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
12/81/212001
(28)
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H.. 6F2
W4HA.. W6FA
1/95/481000
ca. 8/95
lberdruckventil
Vz-ISNPTF
Oil pressure valve
Soupape de surpression d'huile
-25
Feder
Spring
Ressort
380 209-01
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 12
(29)
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
12/81/212001
382 402-01
Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
-25
A 10x15x1,
D1N7603, AI.
30
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
7/82/227000
311 100-04
Lagerbuchse
Bearing bush
0 50x045x47,5
W4HAW6FA
10/96/510001* ' 311'110-04' '
^* 25
"f'"'
0 5 0 x 0 45x47,5
13
(C
Stuck
Type
"No.
Type
31
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
32
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
10
10
Pos.' T,P
Item
(33)
34
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
nde- ab Baujahr ' '

rung \ Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty
Modifi- from model ,

Ref nr
Descnpt on
Piece
Modifi- party du nnodle Ref no

cation mois/anne/no..'
Designation
' ' ^ ^^
ca. 8/95
ca. 8.95
320 500-07
Anlaufscheibe
Thrust washer
Rondelle de bute
25
0 62 x 0 48 x 1,7
380 156-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 25, DIN933-10.9
380 306-32
Zylinderschraube
Socket screw
Vis tete cylindriqe
25
M 10 x 30, DIN912-10.9
372 312-04
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
0 90 x 0 51 x 1
(362 500-01) i
lpumpe
Oil pump
Pompe huile
[incl. 35]
ca. 8/95
305 125-03
Lagerdeckel kompl. fr MP54, Delta P

Bearing cap complete for MP54, Delta P
Chapeau a palier complet MP54, Delta P
[incl. lpumpe, Oil pump, Pompe huile]
ca 8/95
305 125 04
Lagerdeckel kompl fr MP55A, Delta P

Beanng cap complete for MP55A. Delta P '
Chapeau a palier complet MP55A, Delta P
[incl. Olpumpe, Oil pump, Pompe huile]
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F2
W4HA .. W6FA
ca. 8/95
362 503-02
lpumpe
Oil pump
Pompe huile
[incl. 35]
-25
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
372 004-01
O-Ring
O-ring joint
Joint section circulaire
0 59,99 x 2,62
372 001-19
O-Ring
O-ring joint
* 34, 25
0 74 X 2
380 055-04
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 8 x 55
\
W4HA
35
W6FA
oder/or/ou
36
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
ca. 8/95
oder/or/ou
37
14
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
ca. 8/95
380 155-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
25
M 8 x 20
ca. 8/95
380 306-86
Zylinderschraube
Socket screw
Vis tfe cylindrique
M 10 x 30
Pos.
Item Type
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- apartfr du modele Ref no

cation mois/anne'no
Designation
nderung
,^'
Qty..'
Modifi- from model

' >r -^
Piece
. ^
"'.'
ab Baujahr
Mon7Jahr/Nr
Stck
Typ
No.
Type ^
38
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
9/78/149000
ca. 8/95
320 314-01
Halter (MP 54)

Mounting plate
Suppert
140x40x3
(320 344-02)
Halter (OMS)
Mounting plate
Suppert
143x109,5x2
oder/or/ou
39
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
382 002-01
U-Scheibe
Wastier
Rondelle
40
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
382 201-51
Fedening
Spring washer
Rondelle Grower
A4,3;DIN127
41
4J-13.2.. 6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
380 401-56
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder screw
Vis tete cylinrique
M 4 x 8, DIN84- 4.8
42
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
(347 320-01)
100 x 50 x 130, 110/220 V
ca. 01/96
(347 320-18) i
ldrucksicherheitssch. MP54
Oil pressure cut-out
Pressostat descurit d'huile
ca. 10/2001
347 320-33
ldifferenzdruck-Begre. MP54
Differential oil pressure cut-out
Pressostat pour de pression
differentielle d'huile
100 x 50 x 130,110/220 V
'
A4,3; DIN125, Ms.
oder/or/ou
1
ca. 10/95
(347 321-03) i
Elektron, lberwachungssystem (OMS)

Electronic Oil Monitoring System
Systeme de surveilance d'huile lectronique
ca. 02/2001
347 319-01
ldifferenzdruck-Begre.Delta P 230 V , 50/60 Hz

Differential oil pressure
cut-out Delta P
differentielle d'huile Delta P
"(347"320Wr
Oldifrernzdrucl<-Bgre.MP55A-100 x 50 x 130,110/220 V
Differential oil pressure .
cut-out MP55A
. ,
differentielle d'huile MP55A -'.
W4HA".. W 6 F A " ' f '
43
4J-13.2..6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA
W6FA
2 .
ca. 5/97
347 320-27 -,
361 500-01
ca. 08/95
361 500-02
366 011-01
Schrader-Ventil
Schrader-connection
Raccord Schrader
7;^^.. 20UNFxV8"-18NPTF
''j^^'. 20UNF x^s'-ieNPI
T-Einschraubvrsch'raubungen
T-piece
Racccrd T
Vo"-18 NPTF
_
",. ^
(44)
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
312 030-03
Druckring
Thrust collar
Couronne de serrage
[ i n d . 45]
-48
0 62 x 7
(45)
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
372 001-13
O-Ring
O-ring
Join section circulaire
.44,48,171,330,415
0 45 x 3
(46)
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
325 900-02
Federscheibe
Spring washer
Rondelle ressort
0 58.5 x 46 x 0.5
12/90/392001
M48
(C
Stck
Typ
Item
Type
No-'
Type
(47)
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
312 006-01
Ring fur Federscheibe

Ring for spring washer
Bague pour ressort
*48
48
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
374 027-01
Wellenabdichtung
Shaft seal
BoTte dtanchit
[incl. 44,45,46,47]
49
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
384 102-01
NasenKeil fr Stator
Gib-head key for stator
Clavette pour stator
5 X 5 X 60, DIN 6887
51
4J-13.2
4H-15.2
384 001-22
A 1 2 x 8 x 6 3 . DIN6885
^4J-22 2
' 6J-22 2
.4G-20 2
. 6H-25 2
384 001-16
Passfeder fr Rotor
Key for rotor
Clavette d'entralnement rotor
6J-33.2
4H-25.2
6H-35.2
6F-40.2
6F-50.2
, ,
y -^
.-/'.'
"60-30 2 '
' -
'"'"'"'
nderung
Benennung
Pos^
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art Nr
Qty. ' Modifi- finm model

Ref. nr.
> * cation month/year/no. '
Descnption
Piece
Designation
Modifi- partir du modele Ref.no.' .-''^

cation mois/anne/no.
1/76C001T
384 001-19'
""i" "
-- -
A 1 2 x 8 x 8 0 DIN6885
A 1 2 x 8 x 1 1 0 , DIN6885
384001-18"*''
-"--
0 58x5
TA 12x8
X"100,"'DIN6885 '.
4G-30.2
6G-40.2
52
4J-22.2
4G-20(.2)
6J-22.2
6H-25(.2)
313 007-01
Distanzhlse
Spacer bush
Bague d'espacement
[incl. 53]
0 60x14
53
4J-22.2
4G-20(.2)
6J-22.2
6H-25(.2)
383 101-08
Passkerbstift
Grooved dowel pin
Goupille cannele
52
5x20, DIN 1472
54
4J-13.2
4H-15(.2)/-25(.2)
4G-30(.2)
6J-22.2
6H-35(.2)
6G-30(.2)/-40(.2)
6F-40.2/-50.2
320 502-04
Sicherungsscheibe
Thrust washer
Rondelle de scurit
0 54x017x5
55
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
382 201-08
Federring
Spring washer
Rondelle Grower
A16, DIN127
56
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15.2
4G-30.2
4G-20.2
6J-22.2
6H-25.2
6G-30.2
6G^0.2
6F-40.2
6F-50.2
(380159-03) i
380 166-03
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 16x40 DIN 933-10.9
4H-25.2' ' ^
6J-33 2
6H-35.2
16
"'*"' "
Y''''
J i~*i-^ I
384 001-24
-- ,-^
(380 059-01) T
A 1~2V8~x 125rDIN6885
M 16x40 DIN 933-10.9
' M 16x55 DIN'931-1.'9'
.1
380 166-05
M 16x55 DIN 931-10.9
(380 059-02) i
M 16x60 DIN 931-10.9
380 166-04
M 16x60 DIN 931-10.9
9aiisei^B3^sakg-!oiij)i!^;E^^
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
'Item
Type
Qty.
Modifi- fronn model

No.'
Type
Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Rf. no. ' / ' ' , Designation

57
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
11/79/171000
4H'.T6F2
ca 1/83
380 154 02
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
11/79/171000
4H 6F2
W4HA W6FA
4J-13 2
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Ref. nr.
Descripticn
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vishexagonale
, , _ ..o rMMo-ai i n n
M 6 x 12 DIN933-10 9
325 910-01
Benzing-Spannring
Circlip
Anneau tendeur
SPI 0 230
ca 1/83
382 201-03
Fedomng
Spnng \\asher
Rondelle Grower
A6. DIN127
11/79/171000
362 004-02
Sauggasfilter
Suction strainer
Tamls d'aspiration
0 220 x 50
(ohne Befestigungsloch)
(without fastening hole)
(sans trou de fixation)
4H e r 2
W4HA W6FA
ca 1/83
362 004-01
60
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6R2
W4HA.. W6FA
61
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
W4HA
58
59
W6FA
6F-50 2
4G^20(.2) '" " " ^ ' "

6J-22.2
6H-25(.2)
6G-30(.2)
4H-25(.2)
4G-30{.2)
6J-33.2
6H-35.2
6G-40(.2)
6F^0.2 / -50.2
.._.
4H(2)~- :' " " " ; :

4G(.2) - - W4HA
W4GA
62
6H(.2)"'
6G(.2)
W6HA
W6GA
6F.2
W6FA
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 ' H A "..W6FA
63
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4H..W6FA ' '"'
1
" 1
372 315-02
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
^ 1 7 1 , 300, 330, 415
0 286 x 0 238 x 1
1/85/281000
305 220-01
0 286 x 120
l7i8 5/281000
305 219-01
Gehusedeckel
Housing cover
Couvercle de corps
1/85/281000
305 218-01
0 286x166
9/83/249000 '
305214-02",""'
0 28' x112
9/83/249000
305 214-01
0 286x112
7/78/141000
366 110-01
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
6/81/206000
366 110-01 "-""
6/81/206000
4/80/184000
0 228x32 7 ' ' -t^-':'

(8 Befestigungslcher)
(8 fastening holes) ,
(8 trous de fixation)
''/B"-27NPTF St
Va''-2'7NPTR"st'
366 110-02
' 286x134
-_ _
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
366 110-02 "" Bouchon de fermeture
VJ"-18NPTF St
,-,.^,,
,
-V-18NPTF, St.,
17
Stck
nderung
Type
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Type
Piece
Pos. Typ
Item
''No.
64
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H 6F2
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- partir du modele Rf no

cation mois/annee/no.
Designation
W4HA.. W6FA
65
Art Nr
12/87/332000
Verschluss-S topfen
Plug
366 110-05
366 110-05
3/4"-14NPTF, St.
12/87/332000
380 057-07
4G-20f 2)
6J-22 2
6H-25f 2)
6G-30( 2)
10
1/85/281000
380 057-08
4H-25(.2)
4G-30(.2)
6J-33.2
6H-35(.2)
6G-40(.2)
6F^0.2 / -50.2
10
1/85/281000
380 057-11
1/84/261CTOO '
380 057356 ' "
1/85/281000
380 057-09
y -< - j .
M12X110, D1N931-10.9
M 12x120 DIN931-10 9
M12x150, DIN931-10.9
1/85/281O"" 380 0 5 7 4 1 1 ; : : ;
ZulYx
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
100. DIN931-T0'9
M12x130, DIN931-10 9
^M"12'"X t50rDIN93110 9 ]
^.
-.'i
_ _
1/85/281000
"' ti-' 1 'JJ**!.m--''"
-"
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
^ , 1 -
i-%.
W4HA.. W6FA
4J-13.2/-22.2
|_
''
4H-25(.2)
4G-30(.2)
6J-33.2
6H-35(.2)
6G-tO(.2)
6F-40.2/-50.2
4H"..'6F2
'^
..-2
1/85/281000
4J-13 2/-22.2
4H-15( 2)
2/4--14NPTF. St.
12/87/332000
r
3/4--'l4NPTF St
10
4G-20(.2)'
6J-22.2 '
6H-25(.2)
6G-30( 2)
67
366 110-05
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H'..6F2 ' ' " . '-"10

W4HA.. W6FA
66
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr.
x^
~=f- _ ~
..
* -
3,
_ _.;. ; .
sfiC-l_vE ti^t-i^jS ~'-'t- >- !w
380 057-14
, '
M12X180, D1N931-10.9
M 12 X 11, OrN93l'l0.9"
380 057--'07 '->^'"
. .- .'
?.
372 301-02
3'2 301-03
4H-15(.2)
4H(.2)
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
'/'i"^-
, ->
0 70 X 0 54 X 1
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
4H-25(.2)
4G-20{.2)
4G-30{.2)
6J-22 2 / -33 2
6H-25(.2)
6H-35(.2)
6G-30(.2)
6G-40(J2)
6F-40.2
6F-50 2 .
6H(.2)
6G(2)
6F.2
W6HA
W6GA
W6FA
18
'
0 76 X 0 61 X 1
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
- ^ '
Stck
nderung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

cation rrionth/year/no
Art Nr
Benernunq
Rcf nr
Dcscnption
^m
f
Modifi- partir du modele Ref no

cation mois/anne;no
"
No.
Type
71
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15{.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
r4H-Yb( 2)
'4G-20( 2)
4G-30( 2)
6J-22 2 / -33 2
6H-2( 2)
-6H-3b( 2)
6G-30( 2)
6G-40( 2)
6F-40 2 / -50 2
6H(.2)
6G(.2)
6F.2
.W6HA
W6GA
W6FA
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
4H-25(.2)
4G-20(.2)
4G-30(2)
6J-22.2/-33 2
6H-25( 2)
6H-3b^ 2)
6G-30v 2)
6G-40( 2)
6F-40 2 / -50 2
6H(2)
6G(.2)
6F2
W4HA
W4GA
361 334-01
0 42 0 V ) N H 3
W6H'A
361 334-02
r54(2Va-)NHj
72
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Piece
(380 057-04)1
ca. 12/92
380 007-52
" .
Designation
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 16x100 OIN931 8 8
(361 312-01)1
361 313-01
ca. 11/96
Saugabsperrventil
Suction shut-off valve
Robinet d'arrt l'aspration
[ind. 73..791
(361 312 03)1

ca 11 96
4J-13.2 7-22.2
4H-15{.2)
4H(.2)
4G(2)
W4HA
W4GA
0 54(21'8")
'
""' i "
r>
4H-25(.2)
4G-20(.2) / -30(.2)
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25(.2)
6H-35(.2)
6G-30(.2) / -40(.2)
6F-40.2/-50.2
6H .. 6F2
"W6H' ^ ' ' ' - ' " "
W6GA
W6FA '
<_ 3
(365 311-01)1
1
1
'1 "
- _
365 321-14
ca. 11/96
.^ -
' 1""
.1
*
0 42(1%")
361 313-0?
W6GA
W6FA
73
M 12x80, DIN931-8.8
' M 16x100 DIN931-10 9
(380 059-05H
380 009-53
ca 12/92
M12x80, DIN931-10.9
ca. 11/96
.
_f*^f
,r
j..,.-i2a:
ca. 11/96
-~' ' i " . ' ^
(365 321-01)1
365 321-14
i.'^=_'-î V , L >-.
Rohranschluss
Ripe connection
Raccord de tube aspiration
72
0 42 (1%") Ms.
0 42 (1%") St.
0 42(lV)St
(365 311-03)1
0 54 (2^8") Ms.
365 321-03
0 54 (2V8') St
'365 321-03'T'~
" 54 (2Vg") St
19
r^Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type ,
Qty.
Modifi- from model .

No.'
Type'
'- " -
/ " Piece
si
74
75
76
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- partirdu nfiodie Rf no

cation nriois/anne/no.
Designation
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
372 303-01
4H-2( 2)
,4G-20( 2)
4G-30( 2)
6J-22 2 / -33 2
6H-2EI 2)
6H-3E( 2)
6G-30( 2)
6G-40( 2)
6F-40 2 / 50 2
6H(2)
8G(.2)
6F2
W6HA
W6GA
,W6FA
372 303-02 '
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H{.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
4H-25(.'2)
4G-20(.2)
4G-30(.2)
6J-22.2/-33 2
6H-25{ 2)
6H-35( 2)
6G-30( 2)
6G-40( 2)
6F-40 2/-C0 2
6H(2)
"
6G( 2)
6F.2
W6HA
W6GA ^
W6FA . ' .
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15{.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
4H-25C2')''
4G-20( 2)
4G-30( 2)
6J-22 2/-33 2
6H-25( 2)
6H-35{ 2)
6G-30( 2)
6G-40(.2)
6F-40 2/-'=0 2
6H(2)
6G(2)
.6F2
W6HA
W6GA
W6FA
Dichtung
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
72.171
'
0 52 X 0 37 X 2
0 75x061 X 2
f
f
367 121-01
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Bride de serrage
^72
367 12"l"-02
^
80x80
110x110
1
^
, "
ca. 11/96
-is
r
(380 057-15) i
380 302-05
Zylinderschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
-72
(380 059-01
ca 11/96
380 10&-09
'
-
^
20
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jatir/Nr.
^ ^ _ ' .^ _*,
M 12x50, DIN931-10.9
M 12x50. D1N912-10.9
''M I T X 55,"C)fN93iTl0'.9 "^ ,

M 16x55 DIN933 8 8
:^
Pos.
Typ
StL,',k
nderung
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

Type
Piece

cation mois/anne'no
Item
. ,
No."
-' '
77
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
4H-25( 2)
4G-20{ 2)
4G-30( 2)
6J-22 2 / -33 2
6H-25( 2)
6H-35' 2)
6G-30( 2)
6G-40( 2)
6F-40 2 / -50 2
6H(.2)
6G{.?)
6F.2
W6HA
W6GA
W6FA
78
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
VH-25(T2)
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Re' rr
Descnpticn
(382 401-12)
9/87/329001
Designation
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
- 72,171
(382 401-16)
9/87/329001
0 28 X 0 23,5 X 2, AI.
0 40 x' 32,5 X 2 AI
9/87/329001
375 014-04
9/87/329001
375 014-05
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
Chapeau de protection
-72
GFK
GFK
4G-20(.2)
4G-30(.2)
6J-22.2/-33 2
6H-25(.2)
6H-35(.2)
6G-30(.2)
6G^0(.2)
6F-40 2 / -50 2
6H(.2)
6G(.2)
6F.2
W6HA
W6GA
W6FA
79
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)
4H-25(.2)
4G-20(.2)
4G-30(.2)
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25(.2)
6H-35(.2)
6G-30(.2)
6G-40(.2)
6F-40.2/-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
(366 101-01)i
ca. 11/96
366 110-02
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
V4'-18NPTF, Ms.
V4"-18NPTF, St.
82
4J-13.2..6F-50
4H.. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
366 114-02
Magnetschraube
Magnetic plug
Vis magntique
M 26x1.5
83
4J-13.2..6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
382 403-04
Dichtring
Gasket
Joint
A26x31,DIN7603,AI.
1*171,330,415
84
4J-13.2..6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
(325 000-02) J
1/89/361001
325 000-34
Druckfeder
Thrust spring
Ressort
0 23,5x28x 1,5
0 23,5x28x 1,8
laagaswhattiBea&ai
Pos'I Typ "^ . -

Item Type_ ,^ ',.
Stck'' nderung
, ^-
No!'
Type y ^,;_',.t /,
85
4J-13.2..6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
86
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H
y^^f*v
6F2
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption

cation .mois/annee/no.
Designation
Qty ; Modifi- from model

Piece
1
W4HA.. W6FA
87
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
88
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
(90)
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
11/97/531001
"i
89
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr.
362 003-01
lfilter
Oil strainer
Filtre d'huile
(360 110-01)i
lrckfhrsystem
Oil return system
Systeme retour d'huile
360 110-06
0 20 X 200
(36 11-02 ">
11/97'531001
ca. 8/92
360 110-07 r
"360 115^1
366 110-02
leinfllstopfen
Plug
Bouchon
V4''-18NPTF St.
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
0 40 x 0 30 x 1,5
m A^ n r,., <
040x031x1
372 003-15
O-Ring
O-Ring
* 171,330,415
0 36,3x1,78
361 806-02
Schauglas
Sight glass
Voyanf
0 39,5x14
361 802-02
Schauglas
Sight glass
Voyant
0 67 x 8,5
(367 224-01)
Schauglasdeckel
0 62 x 0 30 x 8,5
(372 302-02) i
372 301-12
10/82/230001
10/82/230001
10/82/230001
Bride de voyant
91
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
380 154-06
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 6 x 20, D1N933-10.9
92
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
366 110-04
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
Bouchon
V-j'-MNPTF St
2
.
93
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
366 110-05
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
Bouchon
'/^''-MNPTF S t
94
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
372 415-01
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
^171,330,415
270 x 250 x 1
95
4J-13 2
96
97
6F-50 2
"i
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
23
4H .. 6F2 -' ' T

W4HA.. W6FA
21
4J-13.2.. 6F-50
S4G-12.. S6G-25
44.. / 66."(.2)"
S66H-*0( 2)
S66G-50(.2)
22
4H.,6F2
'*"
W4HA W6FA, "'
320 307-04
Bodenplatte
plate
302 400-01 -"-' Bottom
Plaque de
"
380 156-05
,.
fond
270 x 360 x 12
' 3 5 o \ 315x54
.JUXJlxb4
380 3 0 6 - 2 6 ' "
7/88/347000
370 004-01
7/88/347000'"
370 002-02
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vishlxagonale
M 10 x 25, DIN933-10.9
i., ^ - - - , _ iL.^,r^^-\---^x
M 10x55. DIN912-10 9 ,
Dmpfersatz
(Kurbelgehuseseite)
Vibration damper set
(crankcaseside)
Amortisseur de vibrations-joi
(cote
de carter)
^
braun Lo= 42 (Feder)

brown Lo=42 (spring)
brun Lo=42 (ressort)
- > _ - . - ^ - - A- " "
-f
""Vîl.^"T'\
'""^'^^ .60
J^^^'\
y. ,
rouge
(caoutchouc)
^g:
r~
Art Nr
Bcncnr utig
Ref nr
Description
Modifi- partirdunKXfle Ref no

Desigradon
Pos" Typ
Sli-ck
Item Type
Qty.

Piece
Ande- ab Baujahr
rung
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
'
No
Type
98
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50
S4G-12 .. S6G-25
7/88/347000
325 002-01
44 /66 (2)
S66H-40(.2)
S6CG 50( 2)
7/88/347000
375 035-02
S4G-12.2
4J-13 2/-22 2
4H-15(2)/-25(2)
4G-20( 2)
7/88'347000
370 004-02
4G-30(.2)
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25(.2) / -35(.2)
6G-30(.2) / -40(.2)
6F-40.2 / -50.2
7/88'347000
370 004-03
blau Lo=48 (Feder)

blue Lo=48 (spring)
bleu Lo=48 (ressort)
44H-30(.2)/-50(2)
.44G-40(.2)
7,e&.'347000
370 002-02
rot ,60" (Gummi)

red ,60" (rubber)
rouge ,60" (caoutchouc)
66H-50(.2)/-70(.2)
44G-60(.2)
66G-60(.2)/-80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
66J-44.2 / -66.2
7/88/347000
370 002-03
blau ,65" (Gummi)

blue ,65 (rubber)
bleu ,65" (caoutchouc)
S4G-12.2
325 002-01
braun Lo=42 (Feder)

4J-13 2 /-22.2" " " "

4H-15(.2)/-25(2)
4G-20(.2)
99
100
'
~ V
... t ' " ' * . ! - c j i
a.s.Aa^^
- j i - . . .
4G-30(.2)
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25(.2) / -35(.2)
6G-30(.2) / -40(.2)
6F-40.2 / -50.2
S6H-20
S6G-25
44H-30(.2) / -50(.2)
44G-40(.2)
4",
- _ W T oT-
~ - ,
101
102
rt_*
' T
_-,:^-,.*js:
7/88/347000
^ . . - v .
;
t
V ,
.>- \
'
.jJC-t
^ *'*
\ _ !. _
rot Lo=42 (Feder)

red Lo=42 (spnng)
rouge Lo=42 (ressort)
t : ~ .
* - v , v . , r ^Li'..
^-~
.~* .
375 035-02
rot'30'(Gu'rnmi)
, red .60'(rubber)
rouge ,60" (caoutchouc)
5i_
4J-13.2..6F-50.2
(327 305-04)
327 309-01
rot Lo=42 (Feder)

red Lo=42 (spring)
rouge Lo=42 (ressort)
blau Lo=48 (Feder)

blue Lo=48 (spring)
bleu Lo=48 (ressort)
66H-50(.2)/-70(.2)
44G-60(.2)
66G-60(.2)/-80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
66J^M.2/-66.2
S66H^0
S66G-50
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
braun Lo=42 (Feder)

325 002-03
'Ir,
Dmpfersatz
(Motorseite)
Vibrationdamper set
(motor side)
Amortisseur de vibraions-joi
(cot motor)
Element (Motorseite)
Mouting (motor side)
Amortiss. (cot moteur)
"325 2-02""""" 99
7/88/347000
braun Lo=42 (Feder)

brown Lo= 42 (spring)
fiDt ,60" (Gummi) ^ J ^ ^
red SO' (rubber) ' -C, ^
-rouge ,60" (caoutchouc)
370 004-01
--,
Element (Kurtelgehuseseite)
Mounting (crankcase side)
Amortiss. (cot de carter)
-97
380 156-05
^ .
>^,^ j _ - i ^
blau ,65' (Gummi)

blue ,65' (rubber)
bleu ,65' (caoutchouc)
375 035-03
Fu
Mounting foot
Pied
360x60x15x019
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10x25, DIN 933-10.9
369x60x13x021
(C
Typ
Pos.
Stck
njng
.
Item
Type
Qty
"
-,-
'No:
*.
nde-
Type
:,
Piece'
>
103
Benennung
Art Nr.
ab Baujahr
Mon7Jahr/Nr.
Modifi- from model

Description
Ref. nr.
^
j /
Designation
Modifi- partir du modele Rf. no.

cation nrois/anne/no.
j.
-^
4H-15(.2)/-25(.2)
4J-13.2/-22.2
4G-20(.2)/-30(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
W4HA
W4GA
3/80/183000
361 110-03
"^1-22 2 / -33 2
6H-25( 2) / -35( 2)
6G 30(2)/-40(2)
6F-40 2 / -50 2
64(2)
6G(2)
6r2
W6HA
W6GA
8/79/168000
361 110-01
Gasausgleichsventil
Gas equalizing valve
Soupapa galisation pression
gaz
werA
104
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)/-25(.2)
4G-20(.2)/-30(.2)
4H(.2)
T
v y ^ f f l J V V >
W4HA
, _ j .
1T-i
-_
- A ^
J.J
;i
j V
1
.
weHA'^T"-*'" ";;"
- - f
.^ 1
4J-13.2 .. 6G-40.2
4H(2) . 6 0 2
W4HA . W6GA
6F-40 2/-50 2
6F.2
W6FA --
1 . '
),
vJ
-^
-.
^, _ ^
,.^_
, . 1 ^ K-
_.
' i
_ .
~.
'ÎTS'JV. . . .
\^-^4
.,i,
l^-i-.i-
.j
vwv^fB^-m
^r
NPTF. St. 31 bar

^ U i ^^^^
_ ^ j
ca. 7/89
361 100-01
%'-Â NPTF, Ms. 34 bar
ca. 7/89 "
s e f i 0 0 - 0 2 ' "*
^/4''-14 NPTF^ St. 34 bar
W6GA
W6FA
105
^,_r
361100-02 :-_
^.j
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25(.2) / -35(.2)
6G-30(.2)/-40(.2)
6F-40.2 / -50.2
6H(.2)
6G(.2)
6F.2
berstrmventil
3/_^...,4 ^p-pp^ ^ g 34 (jg^
Differential pressure relief valve
Soupape de suret differentielle
361 100-01
372 704-01
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
91 x 52 x 1
2-
372 704-01
Dichtung fr Zwischenflansch
91 x 52 x 1
.-.l-^_^_-V
_. % Gasket forintermediate flange
.-
^ .-, --
-,
* / ' ,
"
"
Joint pour bnde intermdiaire

-171,330 , 7 ^ . 5 ;
106
4J-13.2 .. 6G-40.2
4H(.2).. 6G.2
W4HA.. W6GA
367 015-01
Blindflansch
Flange
Bride
91 x 52 x 13
107
4J-13.2 .. 6G-40.2
4H(.2).. 6G.2
W4HA .. W6GA
380 156-06
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 30, DIN933-10.9
380''306-23
Zylinderschraube
Screw
'
6F-40.2/-50 2 ' ^ " " '

6F.2
,. , ' W6FA
' .
108
4J-13.2 .. 6G-40.2
4H(.2).. 6G.2
W4HA.. W6GA
^ - 4 0 . 2 / 50 2 '
6R2
W6FA
,4
^ r
,"'-
<' .'
. ; -
'
',
'-
- ' - . " '
372 704-01
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
91 x 52 x 1
372 301-02
-'^^"
070X054X1
-" './-
24
'
^
- ^-
Vis
- " ' ' - / M ldx'25,blN9{2-10 9

'.,'''-!';"
'.
"'
r
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption

cation mois/annee/no
Designaton
Pos. Typ
Stck
nderung
Item Type
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Piece
' _:
-;';
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr'Nr
No.
Type
109
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)/4H-25.2
4G-20(.2) / -30(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
380 156-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 25, DIN933-10.9
63-22 2 / 33 2
6H-?5{ 2) / -35( 2)
6G-30( 2) / -40( 2)
6H(.2)
6G(.2)
380 306 23
Zylinderschraube
Screw
Vis
M 10 x 25 0IN912-10 9
380 306-84
Zylinderschraube
Screw
Vis
MIO x 35, DIN912-10.9

verz.
6F-40 2/-50 2
6F2
W6fA
380 007-52
SecliskantschTaube
Hexagon screw ^
Vis hexagonale
M 12x80 DIN931-a8
4J-13 2/-22.2
4H-15(2)/-25(2)
4G-20(.2) / -30(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
361 310-07
Druckabsperrventil
0 28(lVa")
Discharge shut-off valve
Robinet d'arrt au refoulement
[ind. 113..117,173,174]
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25( 2) / -35( 2)
6G-30( 2) / -40( 2)
6H(.2)
6G(.2) ,
361311-02
6F^0.2 / -50.2
6F.2
'W4HA
W4GA
W6HA
W6GA
110
W4HA
W4GA
"
0 35(lV)
(361 312-01)1
11/96
361 313-01
1 ''
(361 314-01)i
9/93/449000 .^, 361 316-05 ,
-.1.
VV6HA "
W6GA
W6FA
111
112
V))S t
0 4 2( l V
' N W 2 5 ' s l " / i ^ "
^NW25St
,E.->!!4.ai-
"NW32
"(361 314-02)1
9/93/449000
361 316-06
"i '"
11/96
361 313-13
" "
""^
'
NW32
(36*1 313-04)1
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25(.2) / -35(.2)
6G-30(.2) / -40(.2)
6H(.2)
6G(.2)
5/80/185000
(367 023-01)1
ca. 05/02
367 021-03
6J-22.2 / -33.2
6H-25(.2) / -35(.2)
6G-30(.2) / -40(.2)
6H(.2)
6G(.2)
372 200-04
0 42/54SL _
Anschlussflansch
Connecting
flange
Bride de raccordement
91 x 42 x 52
Q^^ I 3y^- uNp
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulalre
-171
0 38,1 x 0 35 x 1,5
'
25
g
Pos
Typ
Stck" nderung
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Iteoi
Type
Qty. - Modification
' ."/
Pic Modification
from model
month/year/no
Ref nr
Descnption
partrdunnodele Ref no
mois/annee/no
Designation
No',^ Type
113
4J-13.2/-22.2
4H-15(.2)/-25(.2)
4G-20(.2)/-30(.2)
4H(.2)
4G(.2)
366 000-06
6J-22 2 / -33 2
'6H 25(2)/-35(2)
6G 30(2)/-40(2)
,6H(2)
6G(2)
366 000-07
1F-40.2/-50.2
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube refoulement
-110
W6FA
4I-1A4GA-
ca. 11/96
ca 11/96
-ssciV)"
(365 311-01)1
0 42 ( 1 V ) Ms.
365 321-14
0 42(1%") St
(365 321-01)1
0 42 ( 1 V ) St
4J-13.2... 6G-40.2
4H(.2)... 6G(.2)
116
-'
4HA-.. 6GA-
4J-13 2 . 6G-40 2
4H( 2) 6G( 2)
10/85/290000
6Fô.2/-5or2 '.y6F2 H ;, ^ I
'
W6FA
o'
9/87/329000
4J-13 2 . 6G-40 2
4H( 2)... 6G( 2)
10/85/290000
>9/87/329000
4J-13.2 ... 6G^0.2

4H(.2)... 6G(.2)
6F-4.27-50.2 *.
6F2 ' ' - .
'- .
W6FA
1
' . - -
118
26
4J-13.2 ... 6G^0.2

4H(.2)... 6G{.2)
6F-40.2 / -50.2
6F.2
>
DN25
365 321-11"
DN 32 '
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
0 38,1 x 0 35 x 1,5
372 303-01 ^ ~ Dichtnng''

Joint nng
Joint annulaire
0 52 x 0 37 x 2
372 301
0 43x34,5x1
-110,117
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
,~g^ ^ *I%TI ^-V " - ,*,
< ' ".-''- "-'''''
BF^dlY/'-SO" 2" "'

6F.2','---i';-^t;-v>^tp<
W6FA ^;f s-_>-''
117
365 321-10""" "
372 200-04
''6F-46.2'/''5o'2' '" "

6F.2 -> ,
W6FA / ' : f f i * -
365 321-14. ^
6HA- , . . - ^
6GA- ^S--. '.'^ "{'
115
0 28 (1 Vg")
6F.2
'f
^>1/74/Z001R
375 014-03
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
375 0T44)4'^^ " - 1 1 0
GFK
366 202-01
^/a"-20 UNF
Verschluss-Mutter
Sealing nut
Bouchon d'obturation six pans
(366101-01)i"" Verschluss-Stopfen
Pluq
366 110-02
Bouchon de fermoture
-110
'.
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
Bochon de fermeture
__,, -
^^^
V/-18 NPTF, Ms. *
(f
-^
V"-18NPTFSt
' . , ' -' .. "-'
''/,'-14 NPTF Ms
imewi^B^jtCTaâfifBtftf.^*M'^?nf
Stuck
Anderung
Item Type
Qty
Modifi- from model cation month/year/no.
Ref nr
Description
No.
Typo
Piece
Modifi- parfir du modele Re' no

ed tron mols/anne/no.
Designation
119
4J-13.2/-22.2
6J-22.2 / -33.2
2/3
304 051-01
4H-15(2)/-25(2)
6H-25(2)/ 35(2)
4H(2)
6H(2)
2/3
304 051-02'"'
0 70
4G-20(.2) / -30(.2)
6G-30(.2) / -40(.2)
4G(.2)
6G(.2)
2/3
304 051-03
0 75
6P-40 2 ' -50 2

6F.2
304 051-15
0 82
W4HA(L)
304 051-04
0 70
W6HA(L)
Y-
Pos.
Typ
W4GA(L)
W6GA(L)' - ' ' " - ' " -
3
W6FA
120
122
123
, -.,- 2
4/95/484507
. _
- . - ^ h - .
3/95/483513
-r-
rr. ^
^ ^j,
Ventilplatte komplett
Valve plate complete
Plaque dapets complete
[incl. 120,121]
304 054-01
0 70
34"0Sf-^^'"
0 70
, 0 70
304 051-05
0 75
304 054-02
0 75
'js-^-'^"-^
30405l"-5''''^~
3/95/483531 -
Bohrung
Bore
Alssage
0 65
r 304 054-01
3/95/483540
^ -
Benennung
304 054-02
0 75
3'(M 051-16
0 82
- - - -
4J-13.2/-22.2
6J-22.2 / -33.2
2/3
9/87/329000
372 511-10
4H-15(2)/"-25(2)"'
6H-25(.2)/-35(.2)
4H(.2)
,',.._
6H(.2)
" ' '-W4HA(L)
W6HA(L)
2/3
9/87/329000
372 511-09
9/87/329000
372 511-11
2 5 3 x 1 5 5 x 1 , 0 ( 0 75)
372 511-07
2 5 3 x 1 5 5 x 1 . 0 ( 0 82)
4G-20(.2) / -30(.27
6G-30(.2) / -40<.2)
4G(.2)
6G(.2)
W4GA(L)
W6GA(L)
121
2
3'"
Art Nr
ab Baujahr
Mon/Jahr/Nr. .
~2J3
6F-40.2 / -50.2
6F.2
W6FA (L)
'
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
2/3
2/3
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
(124) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2

4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
2/3
2/3
4/6
''253'x155x1o'(0 70)
253x155x1
Zylinderkopf, luftgekhlt
Cylinder head, air cooled
Gulasse refroidie air
155x253x62
380 056-03
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10x60, DIN931-10.9
366 110-01
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
^125
V8"-27 NPTF, St.
ca. 11/2000
372 616-01
ca. 06/93
302 319-02
(302 319-01)i
ca. 06/93
2 5 3 x 1 5 5 x 1 , 0 ( 0 65)
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
* 119,171,330
(372 612-01)1
28/42
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
-119, 171,330
253 X 155 x 0,5
27
^
Pos
Typ
c
-
, , ,
Item Type' ' ^ . . . ^

No.
Type
.'^,_' '
125
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr ,
rung
Mon /Jahr/Nr.
Qty.
Ref nr
Modifi- from model
J ' '
Ref no
Modifia partrdu modele
cation
mois/anne/no.
ca. 3/83
302 360-03
'"_ Piece
2/3
Art Nr
Benennung
oder/or/ou
302 360-04
126
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
2/3
ca. 3/83
(302 326-01)
2/3
ca. 6/93
302 326-02
oder/or/ou
127
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
2/3
ca. 3/83
(302 351-08)
2/3
ca. 6/93
302 351-15
2/3
2/3
(380 391-51)1
ca. 07/03
366 132-01
Oescnption
Designation
Zylinderkopf wassergekhlt
komplett
Cylinder head, water cooled
complete
Culasse refroidie par eau
complete
[ind. 121,124,126,127.130]
Zylinderkopf, wassergekhlt
Cylinder head, water cooled
Culasse refroidie eau
*125
seewassert)estndig
sea-water resistent
rsistante leau de mer
253 x 155 x 64
seewasserbestndig
sea-water resistent
resistente l'eau de mer
Verschluss-Schraube
Plug
-125
R 3 / . oiN906
R 3/ DIN906 - MS.
(128) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2

4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
ca. 3/83
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
1 (129) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2

4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
ca. 3/89
Flansch
Flange
Bride
130
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F2
W4HA .. W6FA
2/3
131
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
4/6
4/6
3/95/483000
(132) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
380 056-07
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
-125
M 10 x 80
DIN 931-10.9
(383 011-02) i
327 000-01
Zylinderstift
Dowel pin
Goupille cylindrique
6 x 20 DIN668
cHUvon
b u n x û
ca. 6/85
(380 354-05) i
Gewindestift
M 10 x 12, DIN916
ca. 3/95
380 358-01
aou;niellete
M lOx 12, DIN916

225 x 96 x 93, GG-25
133
6F-40.2 / -50.2
6F.2
300 903-01
Zwischenflansch
Intermediate flange
Bride intermdiaire
134
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
343 416-02
Stromdurchfhrungsplatte komplett
Terminal plate complete
Plaque bornes complete
pncl. 135..139,151,152,159,160]
135
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
372 421-02
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
-134,171,330,415
0 165 x 120 x 1
136
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
304 900-01
Stromdurchfhrungsplatte
Terminal plate
Plaque trames
-134
165x120x15,5
137
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
382 002-03
A6,4;DIN125
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
-134
380 402-04
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder screw
Vis tete cylindrique
M 6 x 10, DIN84
343 417-07
Anschluss kompl. fr Erdung

Connection compl. for earthing
Raccord compl. pour prise de terre
-134
138
28
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
ca. 9/89
ca. 9/89
^g
Foj,
Typ
Item Type
Stu-k
Ande- ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahf/Nr
rung
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Qty
Modifi- from model

Ref. nr.
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- parlir du modele Rf. no.

cafion mols/annee/no
Designation
No
Type
139
4J-13.2.. 6G-50
372 124-01
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
165x120x3
(140) 4J-13.2.. 6G-50
375 002-03
Isolierplatte
Insulation plate
Plaque isolate
- 139,151
85 X 25 X 6
(141) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
375 001-03
Druckbuchse
Insulating bush
Douille isolate
- 139,151
0 8 X 0 24 X 8
(142) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
375 000-03
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annuiaire
* 139, 151
0 1 6 x 0 8x8,5
(143) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
382 042-01
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
139,151
A 8,4; DIN333, Ms.
(144) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
381 301-05
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
Exrou six pans
- 139, 151
M 8; DIN EN 24032
(145) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
382 002-02
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
- 139,151
A 5,3; DIN125, Ms.
(146) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
381 301-03
Sechskantmutter
Hexaton nut
Ecrou six pans
- 139, 151
M 5; DIN934, Ms.
(147) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
382 201-54
Federring
Spring wahser
Rondelle Grower
* 139,151
A 8; DIN 127
(148) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
375 007-01
Fhrungsplatte
Plate
Plaque
139,151
86x34x12
(149) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
302 915-01
Kabelklemme
Cable connector
Borne
- 139, 151
(150) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
320 318-03
Schaltbrcke
Connection bridge
Plaque de raccord
160
151
4J-13^ .. 6F-50.2
343 414-08
Stromdurchfhrung komplett
Terminals complete
Ensemtjle de raccordement
[incl. 140..149]
134
152
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
343 414-07
Stromdurchfhrung komplett
Terminals complete
Ensemble de raccordement
[incl. 153..158]
-134
29
g
Pos
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type
(C
Stuck
nde- ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
rung
Art Nr
Benennurg
Qty
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- partrdu modele Ref no

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
'
(153) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
375 002-01
Isoherplatte
Insulatin plate
Plaque isolante
152
53x18x6,5
(154) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
375 001-01
Druckbticfise
Isolating bush
Douille isolante
-152
0 4,5x18,5x8,5
(155) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
375 000-01
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
*152
0 8,6x04,5x6
(156) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
382 002-01
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
152
A 4,3; D1N125, Ms.
(157) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
381 301-02
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon nut
Exrou six pans
*152
M 4; D1N934, Ms.
(158) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
375 013-01
Winkel
Angle
Cornire
152
* 159
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
375 006-01
Zwischenplatte
Plate
Plaque intermdiaire
134
160
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
343 413-01
Umbausatz fr Y oder A- Schaltung

Conversion kit for Y or A connection
Barette de couplage toile-triangle
134
161
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
10
(380 306-22)i
Innensechskantschraube
Socket screw
Vis six pans creux
M 10x20, D1N912-10.9
10
ca. 06/2001
380 306-89
86 x 70 X 3
M 10x20, D1N912-10.9
162
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
321 202-01
Zentrierblech
Cover sheet
Plaque de centrage
167x122x12
163
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
372 120-01
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
171,330,415
133x117x2
164
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
(324 500-02)
Anschlusskasten
Terminal box
Bolte de raccordement
300 x 170x70 St.
1
2
A 4,3; DIN125, Ms.
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
165
166
167
168
30
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
ca. 12/93
300 950-04
382 002-01
ca. 12/93
ca. 12/93
(305 904-02) i
ca. 10/01
305 914-02
380 402-01
ca. 12/93
380 508-51
(324 908-01)
347 002-02
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder screw
Vis tete cyldindrique
313x175x84 AI.
M 4 x 1 0 , DiN84, Ms.
M 5 X 20, D1N7985
Deckel
Lid
Couvercle
3 0 5 x 1 7 5 x 6 St.
Motorschutzgert
Motor protection device
Appareil de protection moteur
INT 69 VS
313x175 AI.
r
Pos.
Typ
Stuck
Aiide-
rung
ab Bdujnr
Mon/JjhrjNr
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Description
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

ed tion month'year/no
No.'
Type
Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Ref no.

cabon mois/annee/no
169
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50
170
4J-13.2..6F-50.2
171
4J-13 2/-22 2
4H-15(2)
ca. 12/93
1
iP*^-*
'h"^'
""
Designation
380 402-01
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder screw
Vos tete cylindrique
M 4 x 10, DIN84, Ms.
380 501-52
Linsenschraube
M 6 x 12, DIN7985- 4.8
380 501-54
vVIS
^ ' a^tete
l t o .oni.,
,0
conique
M 6 X 16, DIN7985
372 811-02
Dichtungssatz
Set of gaskets
Jeu de joints
[ind. 24, 33, 35,45, 60, 67, 70, 74, 77, 83, 88, 94,105,
108,112,114,115,120,121, 212,135,163]
"372 8 1 1 - 0 3 " "
4G-20( 2) /-3( 2 ) " "
372T1I-O4
''6J-22.2/-33 2
372"8lT-05'l'T-
372 811-06
35(2)
372'81l'5)7"ir!
'6G-30( 2) / ^0( 2)
372 811-08
6F^.2/-50 2
3728l1-09'^'5
4H-(2)
372 812-01
W4HA(L)
45(2)"^
W4GA(l)
Dichtungssatz
372''8T2Af; Set of gaskets
Jeu de joints
372 812-02
[ind. 24, 33, 35, 60, 67, 74, 77, 83, 88, 94,105,108,112,
114, 115, 120, 121, 206, 211, 212, 213, 220]
372ai2^byrr''
6H(2)
372 812-03
W6HA(L)
372'8l''2-i)8', r
6G('2)
372 812-04
W6GA(L)
372 812-09'"'"''"
6F2
372r812-05~"
W6FA(L)
372'812-10 "
4J-13.2
346 277-12
9,5 kW, 0 223, 146
220 / 380 Y-3-50
346 277-14
9.5 kW, 0 223 X 146
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 277-46
9,5 kW, 0 223 X 146
380 . 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
H-25(2)/
172
Stator / Rotor komplett
4H15(2)
346 277-12' T 11,0 kW, 0 223 X 1 4 6 r r = ^ ^ ' ' " 2 2 0 7 Sao'Y^-So"'
1/78/141000
346 277-14
11,0 kW, 223 X 146
346 277-46
4J-22'2
4G 20( 2)
346294-12
?/78'14200Q
4H-25(.2J , " " "''-!

6H-25(.2)
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
11,0 kW, 0 223 X 146; . : - ^ 380.. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)

l'6, kW, 0223716571 "
220 A/380 Y-3-5
346 294-14
16,0 kW, 0 223 X 165,1
380 A /660 Y-3-50
346 294-46
16,0 kW, 0 223 X 165,1
380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
346 294-12 ' '
"l5,0kW,'223xT65,l''""' .,
220 A / 380 Y-3-50
346 294-14
15,0 kW, 0 223x165,1 ., - ^
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 294-46
6J-22.2
15,0 kW, 0 223 X 165,1;., <_^ J,^ 380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
346 306-1^
iVo'kW, 0 223x190,5"' "
346 306-14
16,0 kW. 0 223. X 190,5
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 306-46
16,0 kW, 0 223 X190,5
380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
12/77/132000"^' 346 3 0 6 - 1 2 , T
220 A 7 380 Y-3-50
18,5'kW, 0 223 X 190,5 7.'"Ty'220 'nso'Y^SO "' '"
346 306-14
18,5 kW, 0 223x190.5
346 306-46
18,5 kW. 0 223 X 190.5
'
380 A / 660 Y-3-50 '
i:
- 380 ...420 YY-3-50 (PW)
31
1 L
V\.
g
Pos.
c
, ' , ' - Stoci
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type ,, j ^ " ' , '
!' ,' "

-- _
4G-30( 2)
6G-30(.2)
6J-33 2
6H-35(.2)
6G-40( 2)
6F-40
Anderung
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr
Ref. nr. , , .
Oescnption
Qty
Modifi- from model

cation monlh/year/no.
Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Ref.no? "fiiX'

1/85/281000
9/77/129000
1/85 281000
^ Psignation
346 318-12
22,0 kW, 0 223 x 203,2
220 A / 380 Y-3-50
346 318-14
22,0 kW, 0 223 x 203,2
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 318^6
22,0 kW, 0 223 X 203,2
380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
346 332-12
24,0 kW 0 223'x 222
' 220 AMO Y ^ 5 ' " ^ - 7 " ^
346 332-14
24 0 kW, 0 223 X 222
380 A / 660 Y-3-50 . ^
346 332 46
24 0 kW 0 223 X 222
380 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
"3463^-12
26,0 kW, 0 223 X 222
220 A / 380 Y-i50
346 332-14
26,0 kW, 0 223 X 222
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 332-46
26,0 kW, 0 223 x 222
380 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
346 330^12'î" ; 3,OkW,/0'223jxY34,9r.-1^^22alk/'38O~YS.~''^"' ' '

346 330-14 - .>, 30,0 kW, 0 223 x 234,9;
S.
346 330-46
30,0 kW. 0 223,234,9; -.',.
. j> 380 A / 660 Y-3-50

> 380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
6F-50.2
346 331-51
37,0 kW, 0 223 x 234,9;
380 YY-3-50 (PW)
173
6F-40.2 / -50.2
367 121-01
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Bride de serrage
-110
80 x 80
174
6F-40.2 / -50.2
6F.2
W6FA
380 302-05
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder screw
-110
M 12 x 50, D1N912-10.9
(175) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
372 124-01
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
165x120x3
(176) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
372 137-02
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
905 x 2,5
190
343 213-04
lsumpfheizung
Crankcase heater
rincl. 191]
140 W / 220 V
\
'
Art Nr. ' "l "
Benennung
4J-13.2..6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
2/94/462001
oder/or/ou
343 213-03
140 W/110 V
oder/or/ou
343 213-02
140 W / 24 V
Achtung! Nur verwendbar mit TauchhQise Pos. (192).
Atlentionl Only usable with immersion sleeve (item 192).
Attention! Seulement utilisable avec doigt de gant (no. 192).
191
192
32
4J-13.2..6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
4J-13.2..6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
(389 006-01)i
1/95/481000
389 002-01
2/94/462001
345 906-02
Gertesteckdose kompl.
Elect, connector
Contact fiches
-190
DIN43650
Tauchhulse -NH3
Immsersion sleeve
Doigt de gant
3 ; - . ngpjp
^
Pos
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty.
No
Type
Piece
200
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
Art. Nr.
BenennLnq
Modifi- from model

Ref. nr.
Descnption
Modifi- pattrdumod{e
Rf. no. , 1 j j^
Designation
(366 102-01)i
Stopfen
3/8"-18NPTF, Ms.
366 110-03
3/8"-18 NPTF. St.
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
ca. 3/98
201
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
366 012-01
Winkelverschraubung
Angle compression fitting
Raccord querre
202
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA..W6FA
360 101-03
Leitung fr lrckfhrung
Pipe for oil retum
Conduite pour retour d'huile
203
4H .. 6F.2
3/93/443 001
(374 0 1 7 - 0 1 ) i
10/94/470000
374 017-03
3/93/44300'l"J^" (374 0 1 7 - 0 2 ) i "
10/94/470001
Wellenabdichtung k o m p l e t t
(Metallfaltenbalg Ausfhrung)
Shaft seal complete
(metal bellow design)
BoTte d'tanchit c o m p l e t
(soufflets mtalliques)
[ i n d . 204..208]
W4HA
204
W6FA
. 37fJ 017-04
oder/or/ou '
W 4 H A L . . W6FAL
4H .. 6FJ2
3/93/443001
(374001-04)
10/94/470001
374 001-06*
1"
3/93/443001 ""
(374 001-05)
10/94/470001
374 001-07;
W4hlA':'W6F""""
374017-05
W 4 H A L . . W6FAL
1
(206) 4H .. 6F.2
207
208
209
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
''.\. ' - ' i '
Gleitring
Slip ring
Bague d'tanchit
[ i n d . 206]
.*204
" nicht einzeln lieferbar
* cannot be delivered separately
* pas livrable sparment
0 64 x 50,8 x 8,5
0 47 x 0 4
372 001-15
O-Ring fr rot. Teil
3/93/443001
372 003-28
3/93/443001""'*"
372 010-05
O-iinyiutdiypdil
Joint a section circulaire
presse toupe mobile
203,204
(383 101-05)
12/74/F001R
10/94/470000
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
12/74/F001R
3/93/443001
4 H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
(210) 4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
(374 009-03)
3/93/443001
10/94/470001
12/74/F001R
3/93/443001
Passkerbstift
0 50,39x3,53
i^û,>^^
!_ _^
' 50,39 x 3,53 NH3
1, .
'
Goupille cannele
Wellenabdichtung stat Teil
Shaft seal, stationary part
Ensemble press-toupe fixe
[ i n d . 209..214]
203
* nicht einzeln lieferbar
' pas livrable sparment
305 413-07*
0 142 x 31
305413-08*
Abschlussdeckel
Shaft seal cover
Flasque
- 208
cannot be delivered separately
' pas livrable sparment
(312 003-01)
Gegenring
0 69,5 x 0 50,4 x 13,5
'
0 4 x 10, DIN 1472
(305 416-03)
oder/or/ou
NH,
Wellenabdichtung rot. Teil

Shaft seal rotary part
Ensemble presse toupe mobile
[ i n d . 205,206,210, 211]
NH3
203
"nicht einzeln lieferbar
pas livrable sparment
spezielle Au.^'u^^rupg - C C
3 7 4 001-08*
(205) 4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
0 6x1
spezielle Ausfhrung - SIC
oder/or/ou
W4HA,. W 6 F A '
spezielle Ausfhrung - SIC
Bague fixe
-204
" pas livrable sparment
33
Pos' Typ
Item Type
- _
No.'
(211) 4H .. 6F.2
WHArWeFA"'
Stck
Andenjng
city.
Modifi- from model cation month/year/no,
Piece
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
213
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
214
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- partirdunKidle Ref no

Dsfgnation
(372 001-18)
O-Ring
0 60 X 0 5
3/93/443001
(372 001-21)
10/94/470001
372 001-25
^ " ' y section circulaire

Joint
203, 204
0 6u1 x^ 0x/ 4T.V,

5
^
0 63,09 x 3,53
LT"J S- ?t*W^
-"'
1.
212
Art Nr
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
'>2.
1
2
|0^63.0x_3j53(NH3}-;{,-,
,10/94/470001 / s 372 01^0-04, /
:6:iir4.5(NHiF:iijn
33/4436()fft: '(372:0dV2iy:>
11/91/411000
372 313-02
DIctitung
Gasket
Joint
-171,203
0142x0106,5x0,5
379 000-01
Ring
0 64 x 0 50 x 3, Filz
382 501-05
Couronne
171,208,415
0 58 x 0 50 x4, RWD
(366 100-01)1
Stopfen
Plug
208
V8"-27NPTF
ca. 3/98
366 110-01
7/76/Z001T
380 155-08
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 8 x 30, DIN933-10.9
VR'-27NPTF St
215
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
216
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
384 001-06
Passfeder
Feather key
Clavetle volant
A8 x 7 x 45, DIN6885
217
4H .. 6F2
W4HA.. W6FA
303 602-11
Riemenscheibe
Pulley
Poulie
0 230 x86
218
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
382 112-01
Sicherungsblech
Tab washer
Tle de scurit
219
4H .. 6F2
W4HA.. W6FA
381 214-01
Nutmutter
Grooved nut
Ecrou cannel
M 40 x 1,5
220
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
372 001-20
O-Ring
O-ring joint
171,415
0 126x04
221
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
1/84/26100
Stiftschraube
Stud
Tige filete
222
4H .. 6F2
W4HA.. W6FA
1/84/261000
Fedening
Spring washer
Rondelle Grower
223
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
1/84/261000
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
Ecrou six pans
224
4H .. 6F2
W4HA.. W6FA
1/2
34
380 902-02
Ringschraube
Eyebolt
Vis bague
M 12, DIN580
:B^
r
Pos
Typ
Stuck
Andp
rung
Item
Type
Qty
Modi*!- from model

Ha.
Type
Piece
Modifi- partr du modele Ref no

250
4J-13.2..6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr
Art Nr.
Benennung
Ref nr
escnption
Designation
302 355-10
Leistungsregler . C R ' komplett

luftgekhlt
Capacity regulator complete
air cooled
Regulator de puissance compl. refroidie air
[ i n c l . 251,265]
oder/or/ou
302 355-05
wassergekhlt
water cooled
refi'oidie a eau
oder/or/ou
302 355-06
251
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
seewasserbestandig
sea-water resistant
resistant I'eau de mer
302 354-08
Zylinderkopf mit Kolben , C R '

Cylinder head with piston
Culasse y inclus piston
[incL 252.. 263]
>*250
oder/or/ou
302354-03
luftgekhlt
air cooled
refroidie air
wassergekhlt
water cooled
refroidie eau
oder/or'ou
302 354-04
252
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
2/3
2/3
(372 612-01)i
ca. 11/2000
372 616-01
seewasserbestandig
sea-water resistant
Dichtung
253x155x1
?olm'
253x155x0,5
^
253
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
ca. 6/93
(302 350-17)
oder/or/ou
171,330
Zylinderkopf mit Sitzring .CR"

Cylinder head with bush
Culasse y inclus baque de
ca e/gs ^v^C
(302 SSO-'iS)';^ [ i n c l . 255]

^ 251
oder/or/ou
ca. 6/93
(302 351-20)
luftgekhlt
air cooled
refroidie air
.wassergekhlt,. , .
water cooled
refroidie eau
^ >
(254) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2

4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
(255) 4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2

4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
256
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
257
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4 H . . 6F2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
258
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F2
W4HA .. W6FA
366 110-01
ca. 6/93
Stopfen
Pflug
^251
'/8"-27 NPTF St.
Verschluss-Schraube
Plug
1*251,253
R 3y . QifggQg
(382 111-01)
Sicherungsring
7 x 1 DIN6799
(382 221-11)*
^'"'"'^^
Rondelle circlip
- 251,260
'nicht einzeln lieferbar
9aXx1iDuI N
4 7/ 1i
im
(313 000-10)-
Verschluss-Scheibe
Sealing washer
Rondelle
^251,260
0 37 x 3,3 x 9,1
383 103-04
Steckkerbstift
Taper grooved dowel pin
Goupille entaille inseration
-.251
3 x 8 , D1N1474
(380 391-51)i
ca.07/03
8/87/328000
seewasserbestandig
sea-water resistant
366 132-01
R 3y " D1N906 - MS.
35
'
Pos.
Typ ' ' '-'
Item
Type
No.
Type'
259
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
260
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4 H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
'
Stck
nderung
' - '
Qty.;_
Modifi- from model

cation month/year/no.,
^.'_,'-^ - - t ; " Piece
ab Baujalir '
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
A r t Nr.
Benennung
Ruf. nr.
Oescnptjon
Modifi- partir du modele Ref. no.

(325 000-07)*
1
2
ca. 01/2001
Designation
Druckfeder
Thrust spring
Ressort
251,260
0 27,5 x 29,5
(314 200-01)1
Kolben k o m p l e t t
031,4x34,4x09
347 854-02
Piblun c o n iplelB
Piston c o m p l e t
0 31 4 x 34 4 x 0 9
kJ J i ,4 x J4,4 x l a
Pnc.256,257,259,261,262,263]
-251
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
262
4J-13.2.. 6F-5o!2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
263
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
1
1
264
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA '
13
265
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6 F 2
W4HA .. W6FA
(372 704-02)1
Dichtung
89 x 52 x 1
ca. 4/97
372 712-01
^^^^
8 9 x 5 2 x 0 , 2 5 Retail
261
266
Dichtscheibe
Gasket
Joint
M 2 5 1 , 260
0 31,6x3,1
(313 000-04)*
Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
-251,260
'niclit einzeln lieferbar
0 22.5x1,2x9,1
(382 111-01)
Sichertingsscheibe
7 x 1 DIN6799
(382 221-11)*
^"''^"P
Rondelle drclip
.251,260
'nicht einzeln liefertâr
9aXx1i DIN
u i N 471
4n
380 056-03
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M l O x 60, DIN931-10.9
9/87/329000
(347 602-03) i
347 600-03
Magnetventil komplett ,CR"

Solenoid valve complete
Vanne solenolde compete
[Incl. 266, 277, 283, 284, 285]
250
NH3, R12, R22, R502
ca.7/96
(375 003-01)*
265
268
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
277
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
281
36
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
ca. 3/98
380 056-10
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 100, DIN931-10.9
343 308-01
Spule
220 V, 50/60 Hz(Danfoss)
343 303-07
g^y^g
110 V,50/60 Hz (Danfoss)
343 303-03
265
48 V, 50/60 Hz (Danfoss)
343 303-04
343 303-05
343 304-01
48 V, DC (Danfoss)
343 304-02
42 V, DC (Danfoss)
343 304-03
24 V, DC (Danfoss)
9/87/329000
(347 155-02) i
ca. 4/96
347 690-02
Ventil
Valve
Vanne
265
NH3, R12, R22, R502

(Danfoss)
^
Pos.
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type
283
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
(284) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2

4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
Stck
Ande- ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
rung
Art Nr
Beoemurg
Qty
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- parlir du modele Ref no

Designation
7/81/207001
389 002-01
Elect, connector
Contact fiches
-265
9/87/329000
(375 038-01) i
Befestigungsmutter
Hexagon nut
Ecrou six pans
265
ca. 01/2000
375 068-01
Spulenbefestigung
Fixing cap
Fixation chapeau
-*265
ca. 06/2002
DIN43650
:sg
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
(C
Stck
Qty.
-.
No.
Type ..
- ^
300
301
302
303
304
,' ' \ . '

-'
>
nderung
Modifi- from model

cation month/year/no."
'
Piece
"
306
Description
;'V- ''i''
Designation
-5
-"'
44J-26( 2)
44H-30( 2)
44H-5b(.2y
44J-44(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
Umbausatz, Tandem Verdichter

Conversion kit, Tandem compressor
Kit de couplage, Compresseur tandem
302 909-03""^"
[ind. 60, 301.. 317, 327,328]
302 909-02
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
302 902-01
44J-44( 2)
44H-50( 2)
44G^0l 2) / -60( 2)
66J-44 2 ' -66 2
66H-50( 2) 1 -70( 2)
66G-60( 2) / -80( 2)
66F-80 2/-100 2
20
44J-44('2)
"'"
44H-50( 2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44 2 / -66 2
66H-50( 2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-T00.2 -
20
44J-26( 2)
44H-30( 2)
44J-44( 2)
44H-50( 2)
44G-40( 2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66 2
66H-50(.2)/-70(.2)
66G-60( 2) / -80( 2)
66F-S0 2/-100.2 -,
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
302 909-01
1/85/281000
Zwischenstck
Connector housing
Piece intermdiaire
300
302 908-01
0 286 X 326
0 286 X 381
44J-26{ 2)
44H-30( 2)
380 057-06
1/85/281000
380 057-07
380 703-02
'-
1/85/281000
380 703-03 "
sS';?. i j - .
4
381 101-07
381 11-07".'^^-'"
.,
-,
"
"/
Stiftschraube
Stud
Tige filete
-300
M 12 X 100 DIN939-10 9
M 12x110 DIN931 10 9
M 12x110 DlNq39 10 9
'>'^, y I ^
, t*^
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
Ecrou six pans
M12
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
330
0 76 X 0 60 x 1
Sauggasfilter
Suction strainer
Tamis d'aspiration
0 61x201
-1
M12
- '*i
372 301-03
4 4 J ^ { 2 ) " ' .^"^'.,

44H-50(.2)
' ' .
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44 2 /.-66.2
66H-50(.2)/-70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100 2
372 301-05
44J-26( 2)
44H-30( 2)
362 002-01
44J^14(.2)
44H-50(.2)
44G-40( 2) / -60( 2)
66J-44 2/-66 2
66H-50{.2)/-70(2)
66G-60( 2) / -80( 2)
66F-80 2/-100 2
i""
362 002-02
"
M 12x100, DIN931-10 9
, " V--
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
300
K^-Âv-S^V
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
~^
38
Ref. nr. - \
Modifi- partir du modele Rf.no>;.,%

;
- -t.-r
'
44J-44(.2)
. 4 '
44H-50(.2)
'- '
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J^M2/-66 2 ^
''.
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-6Q(.2) / -80{.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
305
ab Baujahr > ' A'rtNr. '" '.'"^ Benennung

Mon /Jahr/Nr. '
0 105x86x1
0 85 x 201
"
'
^ -
fî^tsi^^^^BtmixiBse^mmmgaBssss
Typ
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
Mon /Jalir/Nr.
rung
Art Nr.
Benenn II Q
Item
Type
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref. nr.
Descnption
No
Type
Piece
Modifi- partr du modele Rf. no. cation mois/anne/no.
307
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
.Pos.
4^-44(.2)
*44H-50(.2)
-'44G-40(.2) / -60( 2)
66J-44.2/-6b2
66H-50(.2) / -70( 2)
66G-60(.2)/-80(2)
66F-80.2/-100 2
308
44J-26{.2)
44H-30(.2)
^44J^4(.2)
44H-50(.2)
44G-40(.2; / -60( 2)
66J-44.2/-66 2
'66H-50(.2) / -70( 2)
66G-60(.2) / -80( 2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
1 "
309
44J-26(:2) / -44(.2)
44H-50(.2)
44G^0(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2/-66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
310
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
44J-44(.2)
'"'
44H-50(.2)
- :
44G-40(.2)/-60(.2)
66J-44 2/-66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(2)/-80(.2)
'66F-80 2/-100 2 .^
311
312
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
ca. 12/92
ca. 12/92
Designation
372 301-03
Dichtung
Gasket
0 76 x 0 60 x 1
372 301-05
;^33Q
0105x086x1
(380 059-05) i
Sechskantschraube
M 16 x 100, DIN931-10.9
380 009-53
Vistrg;nai:
(380 059-07)1
M16x100,DIN931-8.8
Miex'iio'DiNgsi-ig
380 0C9-54
M 16x140 DIN931-8 8
382 001-57
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
A17; DIN125, St.
(361 312-03) i
54 (2''/8") (Nobis)
361 313-02
Saugabspem/entil
Robinet d'an-t l'aspiration
[Incl. 311..317]
(361 312-05)1"
361 313-03
54 (2V.'') (Nobis) St
,. . ^ , _ . ^ .. .
;^0 76(3V>(Nobis)
0 76 (S''/g"} (Nobis) St
- ':.
1
(365 311-03)1
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
54 (2Vg") Ms.
365 321-03
-310
0 54(2V)St.
44J-44(.?)
44H-50(.2)
44G-40(,2) / -60( 2)
66J-44 2 / 66 2
66H-50( 2) / -70t 2)
66G-60{2)/ 80(2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
31,5 321-05
44J-26( 2)
44H-30( 2)
372 303-02
44J-44(.2)'"" " " '

44H-50(.2) 44G^0( 2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2/-66 2
66H-50(.2)/-70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
372 303-03' '
0 7t) (3Va") St
Dichtung
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
^310.330
0 75 x 0 60 x 2
,nc mor 0
0105x085x2
' '
--
-':
39
g
Pos.
.Item
Typ
Stck
Type
No. , Type
313
,Jff^-^
_^^ -
nderung
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
ArtNr.
Benennung
.'"
Qty.
Ref. nr.','Modifi- from model cation month/year/no. -
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- partirdu modele Rf. no. '">;:^

cation tnois/anne/no.
Designation
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
367 121-02
44J44(.2)'
367 121-03 '
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Bride^deserrage
44H-50(.2)
44G-tO(.2)/-60(2)
,66J-44.2y-66 2
66H-50C.2) / -70( 2)
,66G-60(.2)/ 80f2)
^66F-80.2/-100 2
314
315
380 109-09
'44S4A{.2)''"'T' : T.
-44H-50(.2) '
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J^M.2/-66.2
68H-50(.2)/-70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/1-100.2
380 111-01
44J-44(.2)
44H-50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44 2 / -66.2
66H-50(2)/-70(.2)
66G-60(.2)/-80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
316
317
318
1 "''
Sectiskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
--.-rA-.-
v '
M 16 x 55, DIN933-8.8
M 18x70 DiN931 8 8
Nobis
(382 401-16)
"
Dichtung
Joint ring
0 40 x 0 32,5 x 2 AI
* 310, 330
(382 401-?6)" '
"40 x' 32'"5x''2'AI '^^'^"

k
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
9/87/329001
44J-44(.2)
44H-50(.2)
> '
44G-40(.2) / -60( 2)
66J^M 2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2)/-70(2) ^
66G-60( 2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
9/87 3^J301
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
44J^(2)'''"'
44H-50(.2)
44G-40(.2)/-0(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80( 2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
44J-26(.2)/-44(.2)
44H-30(.2)
44H-50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J^4.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
"66M0.2/-100.2''
375 014-05
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
375 014-05'^'"' Chapeau de protection
GFK (Nobis)
366 110 02
1 ENPTF St
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
^ 310
366 110-02
5/80/185000
380 306-23
ca. 12/92
380 007-52
' "'1
8
40
"140 x 140 Nobis)-;;"":
>
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
44J-26(.2)
44H-30(.2)
110x110 (Nobis)
Zylinderschraube
Socket screw
Vis tete cylindrique
(38057<)4)t*T.
Q F K iNobis)
W ISNPTT St
M 10 x 25, D1N912-10.9
" M 12 X 80."D'IN931-1 0
M 12 X 80, DIN931-8.8
9 !
Pos. Typ
Stci
nderung
Art Nr
B-'nennunq
Item Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Dcscnption
Piece
Modifi- partrdumodelo Ref no

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
ab Baujahr
MonJJahr/Nr
No.
Type
319
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2) / -50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
"66J-44.2/-iB6;2
i66H-50(.2)/-70(2)
_66G-60(.2)/.-80(2)
361 311-02
"eeF-Si)-100.2
361 313-01
320
321
322
5/80/185000
44J-26(.2) / M{.2)
44H-30(.2) / -50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
5/80/185000
(367 023-01 ) i
ca. 05/02
367 021-03
66F-80 2 / -100 2
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2) / -50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-i00.2 -'
2 "
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2) / -50(.2)
44G-40( 2) / -60(.2)
325
0 42(lV)
Anschlussflansch
Connection flange
Bride de raccordement
91 x 48
300 903-01
Zwischenflansch " ' T - " '

Intermediate flange
Bride intermdiaire
?95x96x93GG
372 200-04
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
0 38 x 0 35 x 1,5
0 70 x 0 54 x 1
366 000-06
0 28(lV)'-t.
66J-44 2 / - 6 6 2
'
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80( 2)
366 000-07' '
66F-80.2/-100.2
(365^311-01)1
0 42(lV)Ms.
365 321-14
0 42(lV)SL
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2) / -50{.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
372 200-04
, I - - ^ N -_Vli^_|BK^-'-
44J-26(.2) / ^4(.2)
44H-30(.2) / -50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J^*4.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.?) / -80(.2)
10/85/290000
66F^0.2/-100.2
9/87/329000 '
44J-26(.2) / -A4(.2)
44H-30(.2) / -50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
10/85/290000
WE'9
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
*319
0 35 (l^/g") Lot
Iji-s-ttwft-ia ^ * ' ^
66F-80'.2"'/-100.2 '"'
324
Druckabsperrventil
0 28 (1 Vg") Lot.
Robinet d'arrt ou refoulement
[ind. 322..326]
,
0 35 ( 1 V ) Lot
372 301-02 " "_ ' Dichtung Zwischenflnsch

Gasket intermediate flangp
Joint bride intermdiaire
^319,330 :
323
361 311-01
iip7/329C|||
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
.* 319, 330
372 303-01 -"-"
0 38 x 0 35 x 1,5, Tefl.
' 0 52x0 37x2'"" "'""';

Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
-319,330
.1-.-
375 014-03
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
Chapeau de protecion
-319
i-.
GFK
GFK
'
"
41
(C
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
No. , Type
326
'
k "
'
'' " , "
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2)/-50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J^M.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
6 6 G ^ 0 ( 2) / -80( 2)
Stuck" AndeTting
Art. Nr
Benennung
Qty. .
Modifi- from model ' . Ref. nr.

cation^ month/year/no.
Oescnption
Piece
Modifi- partirdu modele

cation mols/anne/no.
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr. *
Rf. nol
-J^-
Designation
Versctiluss-Stopfen
Plug
366 202-01
^/16'-20UNF
M 3 1 9
'6'6F-80'2M00 2 ~ ^
"2
'
,2.
ca. 3/98
' ,'
(seeloiST)^"
"V-ISNPTF, Ms
366 110-02
^V-18NPTF. St
327
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2)/-50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2/-66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-8a.2/-100.2
12/87/332000
Versctiluss-S topfen
Plug
328
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2)/-50(.2)
44G-40(.2) / -60(.2)
66J-44.2 / -66.2
66H-50(.2) / -70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
12/87/332000
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
329
44J-26(.2) / -44(.2)
44H-30(.2)
7/88/347000
(327 501-05)1
U-Schiene
Rail
FerU
80x45x1400
ca. 1/99
326 055-03
Rahmen
Frame
Chassis
1342 X 470 X 88
44G-40(.2)/'-60(.2)
44H-5(.2)
66J-44.2/-66.2
66H-50(.2)/-70(.2)
66G-60(.2) / -80(.2)
66F-80.2/-100.2
. ^
,. - . j - r 7 / 8 8 / 3 4 7 0 0 0 " "
(327 5 0 1 - 0 6 ) ; ' U-Schiene

Rail
FerU
., 2
ca. 1/99
326 055-03
" l
7/88/347000
ca. 1/99
330
44J-26(.2)
44J^M(.2)
44H-30(.2)
44&40(2)/'-60(2)
"44^-50(2)
66J-44 2 / -66.2
1 '
...
66G-60( 2)7-80( 2) '
80 X 45 x" 1490 ,
Rahmen
Frame
Chassis
1342x470x88
(327 501-07)1
U-Schiene
Rail
FerU
80x45x1490
326 055-03
Rahmen
Frame
Chassis
1342x470x88
3 7 2 813-01
Dichtungssatz
Sets of gaskets
Jeu de joints
[ i n d . 24, 33, 35, 45, 60, 83, 94, 105, 1 0 8 , 1 2 0 , 1 2 1 , 135,
163.305,307,312,315 321,323,324]
372 813-02
" : - , ^'4 ..-K -
372 813-03
372 813-04
.^-ll
66H-5o'( 2)"/ -70("2)'
V^ k*
J,V/ -^ *
372 8 l ' 3 - 0 5 ' "

372 813-06^
66F-80.2/-100.2
372 813-07
331
66F-80.2/-100.2
367 121-01
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Bride de serrage
319
80x80
332
66F-0.2/-100.2
380 302-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
319
M 1 2 x 5 0 , DIN912-10.9
42
^
Pos
Typ
Item Type
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
BcnenrLng
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Descnption
Piece

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
No.
Type
350
S4G-12.2
366 104-02
S6J-16 2
S6H-20 2
S6G-25 2
S6F-30 2
S6H2
S6G2
S6F2
366 104 02
S66J-32.2
S66H-40.2
S66F-50.2 / -60.2
366 104-02
S4G-12 2
304 018-01
1/2
304 016 01
1/2
304 016-02
351
; .'- '
.-
_ ?
"s6H-20'.2
S66H-40.2
S6H2
'""
Hoctidruck-Seite
High pressure
Cote haute pression
304 016 03
"l/2
"~"""'"
S4G-12.2
1/2 ~
"1/2
1/92/421000
[ind. 358]
304 016-04
304 016-04
304 016-07
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H
S6G-25.2 S66G-50.2
S6G.2 .
'~1
1/2
S6J-16.2
S66J-33.2
353
Plaque clapets complete
[ind. 354, 355]
S6G-25 2
S66G-50.2
S6G2
352
^L'AA NPTF
S6J-16.2
S66J-33.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
1/2
mit Verschluss-Stopfen
304 0-t6'^5 " " ' Vaive plate complete
with plug
304*016"o'6'
avec bouchon de fermeture
[ind. 354, 356, 357]
Niederdruck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cte basse pression
304 016-07
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6R2
" 1/2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
1/2
S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
S6H.2
1/2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G2
' 1/2
^C^-OO 2
S5f' C'0 2
LGr2
1/2
304 016 08
304 016-09
mit Oberstrmventil
304 016-10'. C with diff. pressure relief valve
avec soupape de sOret
differentielle
304 0 T 6 - n "
[incl. 354, 356, 358]
Niederdruck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cte basse pression
304 016-12
43
p
Vos.
Typ
Item Type _
Stuck
nderung
Qty
Modifi- from model

Piece
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Oescnption
Modifi- partirdu modele Ref no

cation mofs/annee/no
Designation
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
a
1
'NO.
354
355
356
357
44
Type
S4G-12.2
372 511-09
372 511-06
Dichtung Gehuse
Gasket body
Joint corps
M 351, 352, 353, 415
253 x 155 x 1,0 0 70

Hochdruck-Seite
High pressure side
Cte haute pression
253x155x1,2 0 75
Niederdruck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cte basse pression
S6J"16 2
S66J-32 2
3/6
~S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
3/6
372 511-04
253x155x1,2 0 70
S6&-25 2
S66G-50 2
S6G.2
3/6
372 511-06
~253x155xi;2 0 75
~S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
3/6
372 511-08
253x155x1,2 0 82
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S6H-20.2
S6G-25.2
S6F-30.2
S66J-32.2
S66H-40.2
S66G-50.2
S66F-60.2
S6H.2
S6G.2
S6R2
1/2
1/2
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S6H-20.2
S6G-25.2
S6F-30.2
S66J-32.2
S66H^0.2
S66G-50.2
S66F-60.2
S6H.2
S6G.2
S6F2
2/4
2/4
S4G-12.2
S5J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2
1/2
372 511-05 "
(372 612-04)1
ca. 11/2000
372 616-02
S53'x 155x"l 2
Dichtung Zylinderkopf
Gasket cylinder 1 lead
Joint plaque culasse
253x155x1
253x155x05
^^^ x i so x u,3
Hochdruck-Seite
High pressure side
Cte haute pression
1*351,359,415
(372 612-01)1
ca. 11/2000
372 616-01
Dichtung Zylinderkopf
Gasket cylindei head
Joint plaque culasse
253 x 155 x 1
p-s? v 1 <;'; v n ;
Z U j x i x u,o
Niederdruck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cte basse pression
-* 352, 353,359,415
3/76/L001T
366 110-05
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
Niederdruck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cte basse pression
352
'/j"-14NPTF St
'^ST"'-
^
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
Ho.
Type
358
S4G-12.2
Stck
'
^z-
'''_
nderung
ab Baujafir
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Qty. _ Modifi- from model

cation montti/year/no.
Piece
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Ref. nr.
Descnption
Modifi- partirdurmdle Ref.no. . '

S6J-16 2
S66J 32 2
S6H-20 2
S66H-40 2
S6H.2
S6G-25 2
S66G-50 2
S6G.2
1/2
361 100-03
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
1/2
361 100-03
Designation
berstrmventil
Differential pressure relief valve
,NPTF V . 15bar
Soupape de srete differ.
Niederdruck-Seite
^351,353
Low pressure side
-Cte basse pression
NPTF V . 15bar
Niederdruck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cte basse pression
und/and/et
1/2
359
360
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
1/2
1/2
302 360-14
(302 335-01 )J
1
2/4
2/4
2/4
.^
1/92/421003
ca, 06/2002
302 320-02
302 320-02 " "
Zylinderkopf
Cylinder head
Culasse
367
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
1/2
1/2
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
ca. 01/2001
Zylinderkopf
Cylinder head
Culasse
155x253x68
.302360-16, ;
j , ? ~t^
. ^ j
*y^
155x253x62,5
i155x 253x62,5
155x253x62,5
(302 339-01 )t
1/2
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
ca. 06/2002
NPTF Û; 34 bar

Hochdruck-Seite
High pressure side
Cte basse pression
[incl. 355]
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
369
361 100-01
Hochdruck-Seite
High pressure side
Cte basse pression
366
368
1/92/421000
Niederdruck-Seite
Low pressure side
Cte basse pression
[ind. 356]
361 500-01
Schrader-Ventil
Schrader connection
Raccord schrader
^/i6"-20UNF X Vs'27NPTF
(372 704-01)1
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
M.415
91 X 52 X 1
Zwischenflansch
Flange
Bride
91 X 52x68
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
91 X 52 X 1
372 712-01
(369 101-01)i
ca. 11/2000
367 015-21
ca. 01/2001
372 712-01
(372 704-01 )J
91 X 52 X 0,25
91 X 52 X 13
91 X 52 X 0,25 Relall
M415
370
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
1/2
380 056-12
Sechskantschrautje
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M10X120, DIN931-10.9
371
S4G-12..S6F-3
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F-2
1/2
380 156-08
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 1 0 x 4 0 , D1N933-10.9
45
(f
Pos
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type
372
S4G-12 2
S6J-16.2
S6H-20( 2)
S6G-25(.2)
S6F-30.2
S66J-32..S66F-60 2
S6H..S6F.?
373
S4G-12.2
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung
Mon7Jahr/Nr.
Art Nr.
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref. nr.
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- parbr du modele Rf. no.

361 310-07
1/2
361 310-08
1
1/2
374
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
1/2
376
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
1/2
377
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
1/2
378
S4G-12.2
Druckabsperrventil
Robinet d arret au refoulement
[ind. 373 377]
0 28 (1 \ " )
35 (i'/-")
366 000-06
366 000-07
10/85/290001
ca. 01/2001
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
* 372
0 28 (1 VR')
35 {1''/.")
372 200-04
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
-372,415
0 38,1 x 0 35 x 1,5
375 014-03
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
372
GFK
366 202-01
Verschluss-Mutter
Sealing nut
-372
''/ig"-20UNF
(372 704-01 ) i
Dichtung
91 x 52 x 1
372 712-01
JQ^P'
91 X 52 X 0,25 Retall
1/2
372 301-02
^415
0 70x054x1
S4G-12 2
362 001-10
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20 2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60 2
S6F2
1/2
362 002-06
Sauggasfilter
Suction strainer
Tamisd-aspiration
0 30 x 60
_ , ^ ..
0 50x140
S6J-16 2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
"S6H.2
S6G-25.2 .'/'-I- :
S66G-50.2
.-.
S6G.2
,.'-,-,.,'
S6F-30.2 - - v ' '^'
S66F-60.2 " '
S6F2
46
Designation
S6J-16.2 '
S6H-20( 2)
S6G-25(.2)
S6F-30.2
S66J-32,.S66F-60 2
S6H..S6F.2
379
, - '
^m
c
Pos
Typ
Item Type
'No."
Type
Stuck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung * MoniJahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty.
l\(1odifi- from model

Ref nr
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- partr du modele Ref no

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
S4G-12.2
'S6J-i6 2
S66J-32 2
S6H-?0 2
S66H-40 2
; S6H.?
-S6G-?5 2
'S66G 50 2
S6G.?
S6F-30 2
S66Fb0 2
.S6F.2
4/8
S4G-12.2
S6J-16 2
S66J-32 2
S6H-2C 2
S66H-10 2
S6H.2
1/2
1/2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66-60.2
S6F.2
1/2
382
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66-60.2
S6F2
Anschlussflansch
Connecting flange
Brude de raccordement
*381
383
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
-381,415
384
S4G-12 2
380
381
S6J-16.2
S66J-32 2
S6H-20 2
S66H^0.2
S6H2
S6G-25 2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2
1/2
- 1/2
ca 12/92
380 056-10
Sechskantschraube
M 10 x 100, DIN931-10.9
380 007 52
aaVon:
M12X80DIN93110 9
361 310-08
42 (^^lg')
Saugabsperrventil
(361 312-01 j i " Robinet d'arrt Taspiration
[ind. M7 MS, 494, 4?S]
361 313 01
(361-312-13)1
0 4 2 ( l V ) 0 54(2V8")
361 313-13
0 4 2 ( l V ) 0 54(2V)
366 000-07
- r~
. :-
-'-
(365 311-01)1
365 321-14
1/2
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
0 35(1%")
0 42 ( l V )
35
nî")
^
42 (1%") Ms
0 42 0%') St.
-^^
1/2
365 321-08
0 4 2 ( 1 V ) 0 54(2V)
47
g
Pos
Typ
Item Type
"No.
385
386
387
^ :.
Type ' . ' . . - , . . .
nderung
ab Baujahr '
Mon /Jalir/Nr. "
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Description
Pi
Modifi- parbrdumcxJle Ref no

Designation
S4G-12.2
372 200-04
Dichtring
'S6J16 2
S6eJ-32 2
S6H-20 2
S66H-40 2
S6H2
S6G-25 2
S66G 50 2
S6G2
S6F-30 2
'S66F-60 2
S6F2
1/2
372 303-01
' ' ' " * annulaire

""9
Joint
^381,415
S4G-12.2
S4G-12.2
r
0 38,1x0 3 5 x 1 5
0 a
52/ xXi 0 j37
.la
/ xX2i
1
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
S6J-16.2 " " r ,

S66J-32.2
S6H-20 2 -"'-,
S66H-40.2 J^
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2 388
Stcdc
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
* 381, 415
10/85,290001
10/85/290001
1/2
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
375 OlV04;J^ Chapeau de protection
^381
375 014-03
GFK
^
"v
1
366 202-01
.,
Verschluss-Mutter
^/H6"-20UNF
Sealing nut
^381
S6J-16 2
S66J-3Z2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40 2
S6H 2 ,
'
,1 ,
S6G-25.2 " - S66G-50.2 '.
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2 .
S6F2
1/2
1/2
389
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
372 301-03
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
-415
0 76 x 0 60 x 1
390
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
380 159-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 16 x 50, DlNg33-10.9
391
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
1/2
(372 704-03)1
Dichtung
91x52x1,5
1/2
372 712-01
S*-'
-415
91X52X0,25
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32-.S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
2/4
(380 156-06)1
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 30, DIN933-10.9
2/4
380 306-32
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder screw
M 10 x 30, DIN912-10.9
392
48
,-;
(366 101-01)J ' Verschluss-Stopfen

Plug
366 110-02
Bouchon de fermoture
- 381
Va'-IS NPTF Ms
''/i"-18 NPTF St
. - , ; - . -
ca. 01/2001
^
Pc-.
Typ
Item Type
Stck
Ande- ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
rung
Art Nr
Cty
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Description
Piece
Modifi- parbrdumcxjele Ref no

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
No
Type
394
S4G-12.2
360 508-01
sei-i b 2
360 504 01
S6H-20 2
S6G-25 2
,S6F-30 2
'S66T32.2
S66H-40.2
S66G-50.2
S66F-60.2
395
396
S4G 12 2
S6J-16 2
S6H-20 2
S6G-25 2
S6F-3Q 2
S66J-32.2
S66H-40.2
S66G-50.2
S66F-60.2
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
Zwischendnidcmischleitung
Interstage manifold
Conduite de pression intermdiaire
.^
360 505-01
S6H2
S6G2
S6F2
"S6a2
S6G.2
S6F.2
Benennung
360 504-02
S'? 006 01
.-
Isolierung
Insulation
Tuyau flexible isolant
377 002-02
377 002-03
377 002 01
'
1/2
347 002-02
INT 69 VS
Motorscfiutzgert
Motor protection device
Apparail de protection moteur
oder/or/ou
347 004-01
397
398
S4G-12..S6F-30
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
INT 389
1/2
(347 023-01)1
1/2
347 023-03
S4G-12.2
ca. 12/97
DruckgasQbertiitzungsschutz
NPTF 1/8", 140 "C
Discharge temp, safety control
Protection de la surchauffe H.P. NPTF 1/8", 140 "C
Nacheinspritzventil
Desuperheating expansion
valve
Dtendeur
ohne Unterkhler
without subcxjoler
sans sous-refroidisseur
361 404-09
R22
TEX 2 , DOse 02
361 404-02
R404A
TEVI 2 , Dse 01
mit Unterkhler
with subcooler
avec sous-refroidisseur
ca. 12 / 97
361 404-04
R 22 ,R 404A
361 404-03
R404A
TEVI 2 , Dse 03
TEVI 2.Dse 02(to<-60C)
v -
S6J-16 2
S6bJ 32 2
1/2
ca 12/97
361 404-03
R 404A
361 404-09
R22
ohne Unterkuhler
without subcoolor
sans bous-refroidisseur
'
TEVI 2 Duse02
'
. TEX 2 , DOse 02
1
1/2
T
ca 12'97
3fa1 404 05
361404-04
361 404-04
mit Unterkuhler
With subcx)olpr
avec bous refroidisseur
R404A
TEVI 2 , Duse 04
R404A
ThVl 2,Duse 03{to<-6'C)
R22
TEVJ 2 . Dse 03
49
(i
Pos. Typ
Stck
Item Type
Qty.' - Modifi- from model

cation montti/year/no.
No.
Type
Piece
'
if
Art Nr
Bcnenrung
Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- partirdunKxile Ref no

Designation
Anderung
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr.
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
'
ohne Unterkhler
without subcooler
1/2
ca. 12/97
361 404-03
R404A
TEVI 2 , Dse 02
361 404-09
R22
TEX 2 . Dse 02
mit Unterkhler
with subcooler
1/2
ca. 12/97
361 404-06
R404A
361 404-04
R404A
TEVI 2,Dse 03(to<-60C)
361 404-06
R22
TEVI 2 , Dse 05
S6G-25 2
S66G 50 2
TEVI 2 , Dse 05
ohne Unterkhler
without subcooler
1/2
oa 12/97
361 404-04
R404A
TEVI 2 , Duse 03 '
361 404-10
R22
TEX 2 Dse 03
mit Unterkhler
with subcoolcr
avGC sous refroidisscur
1/2
ca 12/97
361 404-06
R404A
TEVI 2 , Dse 05 ,
361 404-04
R404A
TEVI 2,Duse 03(to<-60X)
361 404-06
R72
TEVI 2 Duse 05
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
ohne Unterkhler
without subcooler
1/2
ca. 12/97
361 404-04
R404A
TEVI 2 , Dse 03
361 404-10
R22
TEX 2 , Dse 03
mit Unterkhler
with subcooler
1/2
ca. 12/97
361 404-07
R404A
TEVI 2 , Dse 06
361 404-04
R404A
TEVI 2,Dse 03(to<-60C)
361 404-06
R22
TEVI 2 , Dse 05
S6H 2 ~ ' ~
ca 12/97
ohne Unterkhler
without subcooler
sans sous refroidisscur
361 404-03
R22
TEVI 2 , Dse 02
mit Unterkhler
with subcooler
S6G.2
ca 12/97
-'- "
ca. 12/97
361 404-04
R404A
361 404-03
R404A
TEVI 2 Duse 02(to<--60-C)
361 404-06
R22
TEVI 2 . Duse 05
' TEVI 2 . Duse 03
ohne Unterkhler
without subcooler
361 404-04
R22
TEVI 2 , Dse 03
mit Unterkhler
with subcooler
50
ca. 12/97
361 404-05
R404A
TEVI 2 , Dse 04
361 404-03
R404A
TEVI 2,0se 02(to<-60"C)
361 404-06
R22
TEVI 2 , Dse 05
g:
Pc>:
Itrm
No
Stuck
nap
ruig
ab Bauj-hr
Mon / J j n n N r
Art Nr
' Bt-nennurg
frcni mc del
month/year/no
Ref nr
Dccnption
cation
Ref no
Designation
1/pe
Type
Piecp
MoaiS- apartrdurrKxiele
S6F2
ohne Unterkuhler
,, J ^ , without subcooler
"''--sans sous-refroidisseur
1
ca 1 2 / 9 7
361 404-04
R 22
- - T V T E V I 2 , Duse 03
-1
mit Unterkuhler
With subcooler
avec sous-refroidisspur
^
,
1
399
400
401
402
403
S4G-12 2
ca 1 2 / 9 7
361 404-06
R404A
361 404-03
R 404A
TEVI 2 Duse 02(to<-60C)
361 404 06
R 22
TEVI 2 , Duse 05
Leitung 'ur Druckausgleich

Equal zing line
CondL itc
0 6
(361 8 0 0 - 0 2 ) i
Schauglas
0 10, Lot. x 109
361 822-01
^ T " ^
0 10. Lot. X 119
360 401-17
S6J-16 2
S6H 20( 2)
S6G 25( 2)
S6F-30 2
SbbJ-32 S66F-60 2
S6H S 6 F 2
1/2
360 401-16
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S6H-20(.2)
S6G-25(.2)
S6F-30.2
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F2
1/2
1/2
8/97/528000
TEVI 2 , Duse 05
oder/ou/or
1/2
1/2
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2
S6H-20(.2)
S6G-25(.2)
S6F-30.2
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6R2
1/2
S4G-12 2
S6J-16 2
S6H-20( 2)
S6G-25(.2)
S6F-30 2
S66J-32..St)6F-60 2
S6K.S6F.?
1'2
(361 800-03)1
8/97/528000
Wl2,Lt. fr Betrieb "

mit Unterkhler
.with subcooler
avec sous-reft'ofdisseur
361 822-02
0 12, Lot X 146
347 100-02
Magnetventil
Solenoid valve
Vanne sclnolde
oder/or/ou
347 101-02
0 12, Lot. fr Betrieb mit

Unterkhler.EVRIO
with subcooler
362 101-03
Filtertrockner
Filter-drier
Dshvdrateur filtre
oder/or/ou
3C2 101-04
S4G-12 2
S6J-16 2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20 2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25 2
S66G-50.2
S6G2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
1/2
J'.MJO.'
32
353 002-01
0 10, Lot. EVR 6
1
1
I
;
^ 0 10
^^ , ,
0 12, Lot fur Betrieb mit
Unterkuhler
With subcooler
Unterkhler
Subcooler
Sous-refroidisseur
312 x 72 x 34
î? v-? y^/:
o i <i x . ^ x i / j
g:
Pos. Typ
WM^BSEXSKtXM
Item Type
"'''
nderung
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty
Ref nr
Modifi- from model
cation month/year/no. _
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- partirdu nrxxJele Rf no

Designation
Type
406
S4G-12 2
56J-16 2 "
S66J-322
1/2
S6H-20 2
S66H-40 ?
1/2
384 001-18
S6G-25.2
S66G-50 2
1/2
384 001-16
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
1/2
384 001-18
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
1/2
311000-06
408
384 001-14
t
""
1-1/2
S4G-12.2
S6J-16.2 "
"'
S6H-20(.2)
S6G-25(.2)
S6F-30.2
. -'
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
S6H..S6F.2
A 12 x 8 x 60
A12'x8x100
" '^J:
^'""
A12x8x100
"A12X8X'80
.' ^
' - 1/2
Passfeder fr Rotor
Key for rotor
' " Clavette
d'entralnement rotor
384 001-18
.. .
"S6H-20.2' "
S66H-40.2*
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
No.
407
-^
Stck
A 12x8x100
Distanzhlse
Spacer bush
Bague d'espacement
3lT0-'d8
ca 11/2000
380 166-05
ca. 11/2000 "
380 166-03
0 60 x 55
oc
1,060x35
Sechskantschraube fr Rotor
M 16 x 55, DIN933-10.9
&
M16X40DIN933-10 9
409
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
410
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
20
411
S66J-32..S66F-60.2
412
S66H-40.2
S66G-50.2
413
302 902-01
Zwischenstck
Connector housing
Piece intermdiaire
0 286 x 326
2/77/Y001U
380 057-06
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 12 x 100, DIN931-10.9
2/77/Y001U
380 703-02
Sfiftschraube
Stud
Tige fiiete
M 12 x 100, DIN939-10.9
372 301-03
Dichtung fr Sauggasfilter
Gasket
Joint
415
0 76 x 0 60 x 1
S66H-40.2
S66G-50.2
362 002-01
Sauggasfilter
Suction strainer
Tamis d'aspiration
0 61 x 201
414
S66J-32.2
S66H^0.2
S66G-50.2
S66F-60.2
326 055-03
Rahmen
Frame
Chassis
1342 x 470 x 88
415
S4G-12.2
Dichtungssatz
Set of gasket
3 7 2 S 1 S ; 0 1 Jeu de joints
S6J-16.2 .
"
<-
."'"i;.
"s6H-20 2
S6G-25^2\*:
52
372 816-02
7"-'"
::JS
li
' .^:-
. =4=i
S6F-30 2
seej-sî"^
372 818-01
'^''^'J
'
S66G-50.2 . , ' ' " /
i_'
S66F-60.2 *
S6H.2
372 e i e ^ a ' W '

372 816-04
i\.
S66H^0 2
[ind. 24,33,35,45,60,83,88,94,105,135,163,354,355,356,
367,369,374,378,385,389,391,418,423]
372"8l"6iTr'
372 816-06
J?
- - -^
^ '^
372*816-07"^.^
372 816-08
372 816-09"'"
S6G2
372 816-10
S6F2
372 8l'6-il " "
[ind. 24,33,35,60,83,88,94,105,206,211,212,213,220,
354,355,356,367,369,374,378,385,386,389,391,418,423]
^
Pes
Typ
Stuck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

Piece
',_NdJ Type
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Oescnption

Designation
416
Stator / Rotor komplett

S4G-12.2
S6J 16 2
S66J 32 2
1/2
346 266-06
9,2 kW, 0 223x133
380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
346 266-04
9,2 kW, 0 223x133
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 266-02
9,2 kW, 0 223x133
220 / 380 Y-3-50
34'6 2 7 7 l 4 6 ' ; 7 ; 9,2 kW, 0 223x146
380
346 277-14 . < 9,2 kW, 0 223 X 146
380 / 660 Y-3-50 ':
346 277-12 '-^

S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
S6G-25 2
S60G-50 2
'
1/2
1/2
1/2
417
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2
1/2
418
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2
2/4
2/4
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-6G.2
S6F2
1/2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
1/2
419
420
-it.
J..as!,J:^J.
9,2 kW, 0 223x146
220 A / 380 Y-3-50

-.
-1J
ji
X ^-..c^'UiJi&^.^ZXi '^js
346 294-46
16,0 kW, 0 223x165,1
380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
346 294-14
16,0 kW, 0 223x165,1
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 294-12
16,0 kW, 0 223x165,1
220 A / 380 Y-3-50
346 306-46 ~'^-'' 18.5 kwT" 2i23"xT90',5 ""Z^'"T380 -" 42'YY-3-50 (PW)
S6F-30.2
S66F-6P.2
(^
420 YY-3^5fPW)
1/92/421003
ca. 01/2001
34b 306-14
18,5 kW. 0 223x190,5 ^^r.,^ 380A/660Y-3-50
346 306-12
18.5 kW, 0 223x190,5
e-sit-â- ^
w iJU,
- .,"220 A / 380 Y-3-50
J ?- - . -Ia,.JSi.Bt\.JSr. J. K. * i . J
fisj-
22,0 kW, 0 223 x 203,2
380 .. 420 YY-3-50 (PW)
346 318-14
22,0 kW, 0 223 x 203,3
380 A / 660 Y-3-50
346 318-12
22,0 kW, 0 223 x 203
220 A / 380 Y-3-50
360 503-02
Saugleitung
Suction line
Conduite d'aspiration
(372 704-03) i
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
i415
91x52x1,5
Stiftschraube
Stud
Tige filete
M 10x100, DIN939-8.8
Federring
Spring washer
Circlip
A 10, DIN127
372 712-01
382 201-05
1/92/421003
i " - , i , ^ .
346 318-46
(380 702-08)
1/92/421003
r-A-_ ,. i Jb ^
91 x 52x0,25
53
w^
"Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
No." Typo
(C
"
Stck" ndeaing
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- parlir du modele Rf no

Designation
Qty. \ Modifi- from model

^/
Piece
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
1/2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-5a.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
.S6F.2
3/6
4/8
4/8
423
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H^0.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F.2
1/2
372 301-02
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
0 70 x 0 54 x 1
424
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
1/2
367 121-01
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Bride de seaage
80 x 80
S6G-25 2
S66G-50 2
S6G2
S6F-30 2
S66F-60 2
S6F2
1/2
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
4/8
380 057-15
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 12 x 50, DIN931-10.9
' S6G-25 2
S66G-50 2
S6G.2
S6F-30 2
S66F-60 2
S6F2
4/8
380 302-05
Zylinderschraube
Socket screw
Vis a tete cvlindrique
M 12 x'SO DIN912-10 9
'
S6J-16.2
S66J-32.2
S6H-20.2
S66H-40.2
S6H.2
S6G-25.2
S66G-50.2
S6G.2
S6F-30.2
S66F-60.2
S6F2
1/2
(377 003-01)
1/2
Isolierung
Insulation
Tuyau flexible isolant
421
422
425
426
54
381 101-06
1/92/421003
Sectiskantmutter
Ecrou six pans
380 056-10
Sectiskantschraube
1/92/421003
(380 156-06) i
Vi^hlxacî:
ca. 03/03
380 306-32
'
5/91/405000
M 10, DIN934-8.8
M 10 x 100, DIN931-10.9
M10X30,DIN931-10.9
M 10x30, DIN912-10.9
367 121-08
377 003-02
g:
Pos.
Typ
StLck
Item
Type
Qty
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- partirdumodeJe Ref no

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
nderung
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr
Modifi- from model

month/year/no
Ldtion
''No.,
450
Type
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H.. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
Piece
1
302 357-10
oder/or/ou
Anlaufentlastung komplett ,SU' luftgekOhlt

Start unioader complete
air cooled
Dispositif de dman^ge vide refoidie air
fincl. 451,463]
302 357-05
wassergekhlt
water cooled
refroidie eau
oder/or/ou
seewasserbestndig
sea-water resistant
302 357-06
451
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA..
302 356-06
Zylinderkopf mit Kolben ,SU"

Cylinder head with piston
Culasse y Indus piston
[incl. 452..461]
450
luftgekhlt
air cooled
refoidie air
oder/or/ou
302 356-03
wassergekhlt
water cooled
refroidie eau
oder/or/ou
seewasserbestndig
sea-water resistant
302 356-04
452
453
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
(372 612-01)1
ca. 11/2000
372 616-01
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
- 171,451
253x155x1
,
.^^ _ ,
253x155x0,5
(302 350-06)
Zylinderkopf mit Sitzring ,SU' luftgekhlt

Cylinder head with bush
air cooled
Culasse y incl. bague de bute refbidie air
-.451
oder/or/ou
[incl. 455]
(302 350-02)
wassergekhlt
water cooled
refroidie eau
oder/or/ou
seewasserbestndig
sea-water resistant
(302 351-12)
454
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
(366 100-01)J
Stopfen
1/8'-27NPTF Ms.
366 110-01
-451
1/8"-27NPTF. St.
(455) 4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2

4H .. 6F2
W4HA.. W6FA
(380 391-51)1
DIN960 R^/.j"
Verschluss-Schraube
Plug
456
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
457
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
ca. 07/03
7/85/287000
366 132-01
R%",DIN960 - MS.
383 103-04
Steckkerbstift
Taper grooved dowel pin
Goupitle fendue
-451
3 x 8, DIN 1474
(380 906-03)*
Sperrzahnschraube
Screw
Vis
- . 451,460
M 5 x 12
"nicht einzeln lieferbar

' c a n n o t be delivered separately
*pas livrable sparment
55
^rs
Pos
Typ ,
Item
Type
"No. '
- -_
', ,
Type''f'"-i''..j'-:%
5,'. ^ ^ . > ' * ^ " -f-
Stck
nderung
Qty
Modifi- from model

cation montfi/year/no
Piece
Modifi- parBr du modele R6f no

cation mois/anne/no
"1^
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jalir/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Rcf nr
Oescnption
^ ist
<r
Designation
458
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4 H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
(311 008-01)*
Drucicbuchse
Bust!
Oouille
451,460
'nidit einzeln lieferbar
'cannot be delivered separately
0 14 x 3,7
459
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
(375 005-01)*
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
451,460
'cannot be delivered separately
'pas livrable sparment
PTFE 0 21 x 3
460
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
(314 201-01)i
Kolben komplett
0 31,7 x 20,8
347 650-02
Slol^S?
^^^^^^"^
ca. 01/2001
[ i n c l . 457,458,459]
i*451
461
4J-13.2.. 6F-50;2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA .. W6FA
325 010-06
Feder
Spring
Ressort
451
0 20 x 4 0
462
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
13
380 056-03
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 60, DIN931-10.9
463
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
9/87/329000
(347 602-04) J
NH3, R I 2. R22, R502
ca. 7/96
347 600-04
Magnetventil kompl. . S U "

Solenoid valve compl.
Vane solenoTde complete
[Incl. 464..469,471]
450
464
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4 H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
ca. 4/97
(372 704-02) i
Dichtung
89 x 51 x 1
372 712-01
ô'lnl'^^
89 X 52 X 0,25 (Retail)
i463
465
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
466
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
467
380 056-10
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10 x 100, DIN931-10.9
9/87/329000
(347 156-02)1
ca. 7/96
347 691-02
Ventil .SU"
Valve
Vanne
463
(NH3, R12, F122, R502)

(Danfoss)
ca. 3/98
343 308-01
Spule
Coil
Bobine
463
230 V /50/60 Hz
oder/or/ou
343 303-07
468
56
4J-13.2.. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W 4 H A . . W6FA
110 V 50/60 Hz
343 303-03
48 V 50/60 Hz
343 303-04
42 V 50/60 Hz
343 303-05
24 V 50/60 Hz
343 304-01
48 V DC
343 304-02
42 V DC
343 304-03
24 V DC
389 002-01
Elect, connector
Contact fiches
463
DIN43650
Pos.
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type
469
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
Stuck
nderung
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty
Ref nr
Modifi- from model
cation month/year'no
\ ,
Modifi- apartir du modele Ref no
cation mois/anne'no
Descnption
Piece
ab Baujahi
Mon./Jahr;Nr
9/87/329000
{375 038-01)1
Befestigungsmutter
Hexagon nut
Ecrou six pans
463
ca. 01/2000
375 068-01
Spulenbefestigung
Fixing cap
Fixation chapeau
463
(347 023-01 ) i
Druckgasbertiitzungsschutz
140 C
Discharge temp, safety control
Protection de la surchauffe H.P.
ca. 06/2002
470
4J-13.2 .. 6F-50.2
4H .. 6F.2
W4HA.. W6FA
Oesignataon
ca. 01/1997
347 023-03
57
^
Pos.
Typ
Item
1^
Type
Stck
nderung
Qty
Modifi- from model '

cation month/year/no.,
Piece
Modifi- parbrdu modele Rf. no.

I.
-No? [Type
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art. Nr,
Benennu
Ref. nr.
Descnpti r
ff
Dcsignati n
58
59
: ^ ^
I N -T-
E R N -A -T-
I -O ' N A- L
Bitzer Khlmaschinenbau GmbH

Eschenbrnniestr. 15
71065 Sindelfingen (Germany)
Tel. +49(0)7031-932-0
Fax +49(0)7031-932-146 & -147
bit2er@bitzer.de http://www.bit2er.de
^ ? ^
Operating Instruction
lifîfiif-AitrMttgrAî
Druckbehlter:
Pressure vessels:
Reservoirs sous pression:
Wassergekhlte Verflssiger
und lkhler
Water-Cooled Condensers
and Oll Coolers
Condenseurs eau et
Refroidisseurs d'huile
K033N .. K4803T
K033NB .. K4803TB
K033N .. K4803T
K033NB .. K4803TB
K033N .. K4803T
K033NB .. K4803TB
OW401 .. OW941
O W 4 0 1 B . . OW941B
OW401 .. OW941
OW401B .. OW941B
OW401 .. OW941
OW401B..OW941B
Inhalt
1 Sicherheit
2 Anwendungsbereiche
3 Projektierung
4 Montage
5 In Betrieb nehmen
6 Betrieb
Seite
1
4
5
8
13
16
Content
1
2
3
4
5
6
Safety
Application ranges
Plant design
Mounting
Commissioning
Operation
Page
1
4
5
8
13
16
Sommaire
1
2
3
4
5
6
Scurit
Champs d'applications
Conception
Montage
Mise en service
Fonctionnement
Page
1
4
5
8
13
16
1 Sicherheit
1 Safety
1 Scurit
Diese Druckbehlter sind zum Einbau

in Klteanlagen entsprechend der
EU-Maschinenrichtlinie 98/37/EG
und der EG-Druckgerterichtlinle
diese Klteanlagen eingebaut worden
bereinstimmen (anzuwendende Normen: siehe Konformittserklrung).*
These pressure vessels are intended

for installation in refrigeration plants
according to the EC Machines Directive 98/37/EC and the EC Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.They
may be put to sen/ice only, if they
have been installed in these refrigeration plants according to the existing instruction and as a whole agree
with the corresponding provisions of
legislation (standards to apply: refer to
Declaration of Conformity).*
Ces reservoirs sous pression sont prvus

pour tre incorpors dans des installations
frigorifiques conformment la Directive
CE Machines 98/37/CE et la Directive
CE Equipements sous Pression
97/23/CE. Leur mise en service est uniquement autorise s'ils ont l incorpors
dans des installations frigorifiques conformment la prsente instruction et si
cettes installations frigorifiques rpondent
dans leur totalit aux rglementations
legales en vigueur (les normes qu'il faut
utiliser: voir la Declaration de conformit).*
Autorisiertes Fachpersonal
Smtliche Arbeiten an Verfssigern,
lkhlern und Klteanlagen drfen
nur von qualifiziertem und autorisiertem Fachpersonal ausgefhrt werden.
Authorized staff
All work on condensers, oil coolers
and refrigeration systems shall be carried oul by qualified and authorized
refrigeration personnel only.
Personnel autoris
--^
Tous les travaux ainsi que I'entretien de
condenseurs, refroidisseurs d'huiie et
d'installatJons frigorifiques ne peuvent
tre executes que par du personnel qualifi el autoris.
" Hinweis gilt nur fr Lnder der EU
Information is valid for countries of the EC
' Indication valable pour les pays de la CE
^g
"^
Die Druckbehlter sind nach dem

aktuellen Stand der Technik und entsprechend den geltenden Vorschriften
gebaut. Auf die Sicherheit der Anwender wurde besonderer Wert gelegt.
The pressure vessels are constructed

Les reservoirs sous pression sont confus

d'apres les regies de I'art actuelles et
conformment aux prescriptions en
vigueur. Une attention particuliere a t
apporte la scurit de l'utilisateur.

gesamten Lebensdauer des Dmckbehlters aufbewahren.
Keep this Operating Instruction during

the whole lifetime of the pressure vessel.
Garder cette instnjction de service pendant toute la dure de service du reservoir sous pression.
Restgefahren
Residual hazards
Dangers rsiduels
Vom Druckbehlter knnen unvermeidbare Restgefahren ausgehen.

arbeitet, muss deshalb diese Betriebsanleitung sorgfltig lesen!

pressure vessel are unavoidable.
must therefore read this Operating
Instruction carefully!
Le reservoir sous pression peut tre la

source de dangers rsiduels inevitables.
travaille sur eet appareil doit lire attentivement cette instruction de service !
Es gelten zwingend
die einschlgigen Unfallverhtungsvorschriften (z. B. BGV DI),
Sicherheitsregeln,
die EU-Richtlinien,
Lnder spezifische Normen und
Bestimmungen z. B. EN 378.

specific rules for the prevention of
accidents (e. g. German rule
BGV D1),
generally safety'standards,
EU guidelines,
national standards and regulations
e. g. EN 378.
les prescriptions relatives la prvoyance centre les accidents
(par ex. prescription allemande
BGVD1),
les regies de scurit gnralement
reconnues,
les normes et dispositions spcifiques
du pays concern par ex. EN 378.
Sicherheitshinweise
Safety references
Les indications de scurit

zu vermeiden.

hazards.
Safety instructions must be exactly
observed!
sont des instructions pour viter les

mises en danger.
Respecter scrupuleusement les indications de scurit !
TCT Achtung!
I - O Anweisung um eine mgliche

1 " J Gefhrdung von Gerten zu verS B meiden.
1 1 Attention!
1 1 Instructions on preventing possi*^- ble damage to equipment.
I Attention !
i Instruction pour viter une possible
i mise en danger d'appareils.
^^^ Vorsicht!
WA^ Caution!
"yr, Prudence!
fr-& Anweisung um eine mgliche

F^M minderschwere Gefhrdung von
^ 3 Personen zu vermeiden.
g|A, Instructions on preventing a posM S sible minor hazard to persons.
^-^ Instruction pour viter une possible

",
mise en danger benigne de perwj, sonnes.
"^S^ Warnung!
' Z A Anweisung um eine mgliche
^<^-| schwere Gefhrdung von
^ K ^ Warning!
^4r\ Instructions on preventing a possible severe hazard to persons.

A mise
en danger grave de per-
f^
Gefahr!
^& Anweisung um eine unmittelbare
'^>M schwere Gefhrdung von
m Danger!
^ Instructions on preventing a high
&-.;;i risk of severe hazard to persons.
Avertissement!
sonnes.
Danger!
^ Instruction pour une imminente mise

ins'&aBamiapats
DB-200-2
( #
^
Warnung!
Der Druckbehlter ist im Ausiieferungszustand mit Schutzgas ge*. fllt
- (berdruck ca. 0,5 .. 1 bar).
Bei unsachgemer Handhabung sind Verletzungen von Haut
- -.1 und Augen mglich.
Bei Arbeiten am Druckbehlter
<\
Gefahr!
Schwerste Verletzungen mglich.
Maximal zulssige Drcke nicht
berschreiten!

\ Warning!
I The pressure vessel is under
pressure with a holding charge,
{ which is above atmospheric
pressure (approx. 0,5 .. 1 bar).
Injury of skin and eyes is possible.
Wear safety goggles while working on pressure vessel.
Indications de scurit generates
Avertissement!
A la livraison, le reservoir sous pression est rempli d'un gaz de protection et sont en surpression
' (environ 0,5 .. 1 bar).
Lors de travaux sur le reservoir
sous presion, porter des lunettes de
protection!
r ^ Danger!
A ^ Explosion risk of components
VîiA 3rid pipelines by hydraulic overW^ pressure.
j S Severest injuries possible.
^ i Do not exceed maximum allow^ i able pressures.!
Tj^^ Danger!
O Danger d'clatement des compo'l ^ sants et conduites par surpression
< '~. hydraulique.
;, "", Blessures les plus graves possibles.
^ ' '\ Ne pas dpasser les pressions
b>Smaximales admissibles!
Bei Arbeiten am Druckbehlter, nachdem die Anlage in Betrieb genommen

wurde:
For any working at the pressure vessel after the plant has been commissioned:
Pour des travaux au reservoir sous pression apres I'installation a t mise en service:
rj^ Warnung!
L:^ Druckbehlter kann unter Druck
A Avertissement!
Le reservoir sous pression peut-tre
%ih Schwere Verletzungen mglich.

s-'cS Druckbehlter auf drucklosen
Zustand bringen!
m^^ Warning!
i^^ Pressure vessel can be under
^5 ^ pressure!
I "I? Severe injuries possible.
^ ^ Release the pressure in the
i s 2 pressure vessel!
lkhler:
Oil coolers:
Refroidisseurs d'huile:
WR& Caution!
^ ^ j Surface temperatures exceeding
S 60C can be reached.
p," I Burnings possible.
IVIark accessible sectors.
pg
^ ^
WM
g>a
i^S
Wassergekhlte Verflssiger:
Water-cooled condensers:
Condenseurs eau:
fy^m Vorsicht!
KTs Caution!
t--^ During operation surface tempest *^ ratures exceeding 60C can be
\^% reached at the refrigerant inlet.
feM Burnings possible.
^ s Ivlark accessible sectors.
tiM stehen!
: Vorsicht!
Oberflchen-Temperaturen von
ber 60C knnen auftreten.
J Verbrennungen mglich.
S Zugngliche Stellen kennzeichnen.
i^. Im Betrieb knnen am Kltemittel-Eintritt Oberflchen_! Temperaturen von ber 60C

l-îJ auftreten.
i Verbrennungen mglich.
Zugngliche Stellen kennzeichnen.
sous pression !
Graves blessures possibles.
Retirer la pression sur le reservoir
^K~. sous pression !
Prudence!
Temperatures de surface excdant
60C pourront tre atteintes.
Possibilit de brlures.
Marquer les endroits accessibles.
Prudence !
pourront tre atteintes l'entre du
fluide frigorigne ou d'huile.
Possibilit de bnlures.
- Marquer les endroits accessibles.
Bei Arbeiten am Rohrsystem des

Khlmediums gilt zustzlich:
For any working at the pipe system

additionally:
Pour des travaux la tuyauterie en plus:
ms^ Warnung!
j C - i Khlmedium kann Haut und
4- >'>i Augen vertzen!
5*;'j Warning!
rar^ Avertissement!
LSS. Ruide caloporteur peut cautriser
^',? peau et yeux !
Porter des lunettes de protection I
ilA' Coolant can cauterize skin and

!.r. i) eyes!
sii-\ Wear safety goggles!
!:::aîUcMxt;^Âais::âaa3;U^^
DB-200-2
iiw^xej>fmscmis^mi^ss:xsss:^^s!?ii-m^gieiXii^^^^
^
2
Anwendungsbereiche
Gruppe / Substanzklasse
group / substance class
groupe / classe de matiere
K033H(B) K4803T(B)&OW401{B)
Zulssige Kltemittel
Permitted refrigerants
Fluides fngongenes autonses
OW941(B)
OW401(B) OW941(B)
Zulassige Kaltemaschinenle
Permitted refngerantion compressor oils
Huiles pour machines fngorifiques aulorisees
K033H
OW401
Kuhlmedien
Coolants
K4803T
OW941
EN 378-1:
LI
1 ^ , L3
" 'î
entsprechend / according to / suivant

ISO 6743-3
DIN 51503-1
28 bar
Wasser oder Khlsole

water or bnne
eau OU saumure
'
120C
-10C
Seewasser, Wasser oder Kuhlsole

seawater, water or brine
eau de mer, eau ou saumure
-10C
Frostschutz'
anti-freeze'
antigel'
(D
Khlsole-Konzentrationen siehe
BITZER Software
nur nach Rcksprache mit BITZER

PS maximaler Betriebsdruck
*d max maximale Betriebstemperûr
d min minimale Betriebstemperatur
<S)
For concentration of the bnne see

BITZER Software
only after consultation with BITZER

PS maximum operating pressure
'd max maximum operating temperature
t j ,! minimum operating temperature
(D
" "'S Achtung - Korrosion!

' Das KOhlmedium darf gegen" " ^ ber dem Rohrmaterial der
, ' -. Druckbehlter und dem WerkI ,^; Stoff der Umlenkdeckel nicht
lM aggressiv sein:
f Y ^ Attention - Corrosion!
^ I j The coolant must not react
f , ' : aggressively with the pipe materj ; . ^ . ? lal of the pressure vessel or the
^S material of the end covers:
q r a Attention - Corrosion !
M i Le fluide caloporteur ne doit pas
"^'if tre agressif envers les matriaux
S f l ^ constituant les tubes et les couWi vercles dflecteurs des reservoirs
^ S sous pression:
K033N .. K4803T/ OW401 .. OW941

(Standard-Ausfhrung):
Rohre: Kupfer
Umlenkdeckel: Grauguss
K033N .. K4803T / OW401 .. OW941

(Standard design):
pipes: cooper
end covers: grey cast iron
K033N .. K 4 8 0 3 T / OW401 .. OW941:

(Version standard):
tubes: cuivre
couvercles dflecteurs: fonte grise
K033NB .. K4803TB / OW401B ..

OW941B (Seewasser-Ausfhrung):
Rohre: Kupfer-Nickel-Legierung
Umlenkdeckel: Kunststoff beschichtet
K033NB .. K4803TB / OW401B ..

OW941B (seawater-resistant design):
pipes: copper-nickel-alloy
end covers: plastic coated
OW160A .. OW860A (Standard):

Rohre: Stahl
Umlenkdeckel: Grauguss
OW160A.. OW860A (standard):

pipes: steel
end covers: grey cast iron
K033NB .. K4803TB / OW401B ..

OW941B (version marine):
tubes: alliage cuivre-nickel
couvercles dflecteurs: revtus d'une
rsine synthtique
OW160AC .. OW860AC (Seewasser):

Rohre: Kunststoff beschichtet
Umlenkdeckel: Kunststoff beschichtet
OW160AC .. OW860AC (seawater):

pipes: plastic coated
end covers: plastic coated
'
95C
10 bar
K033HB .. K4803TB
OW401B..OW941B
120C
' -10C
28 bar
Ruides caloporteurs
dmax
dmin
Pour concentration du saumure voir

BITZER Software
seulement apres avoir consuit BITZER

PS pression maximale de service
t^ ^^ temperature maximale de service
tj in temperature minimale de service
OW160A.. OW860A (standard):

tubes: acier
couvercles dflecteurs: fonte grise
OW160AG .. OW860AC (version marine):
tubes: revtus d'une rsine synthtique
couvercles dflecteurs: revtus d'une
rsine synthtique
DB-200-2
Als kostenlosen Service prft

BITZER die Eignung der Rohri materialien gegen Vorlage einer
I Wasser-Analyse.
i Prf-Grundlage ist der aktuelle
1 Stand der Erfahrungen.
i Eine absolute Gewhrleistung
I auf Korrosions-Sicherheit kann
1 jedoch aufgrund der komplexen
I Verhltnisse nicht gegeben wer! den.
As a free service, BITZER will

examine the suitability of pipe
materials if a water analysis is
provided.
I The basis for the examination is
i the current status of knowledge.
However, due to the complexity
of the situation, no absolute
guarantee can be given that
materials will be corrosion proof.
Sur presentation d'une analyse

d'eau, BITZER controle la compatibilit avec les matriaux constituant
les tubes (service gratuit).
Le controle repose sur l'tat actuel
des experiences acquises.
Cependant, en raison de la complexit des rapports, une garantie
absolue quant la scurit centre la
corrosion ne peut pas tre donne.
3 Projektierung
3 Plant design
3 Conception
3.1 Druckbehlter transportieren
3.1 Pressure vessel transport
3.1 Transport du reservoir sous pression
Druckbehlter verschraubt auf der

Palette transportieren. Wenn vorhanden an Transportsen oder oberen
Befestigungswinkeln anheben.
Transport the pressure vessel

screwed on a pallet. Lift it using the
eyebolts or the upper fastening brackets if available.
Transporter le reservoir sous pression

visse sur une palette. En cas disponible
le soulever aux oeillets de suspension ou
aux querres de fixation de dessus.
3.2 Aufstellort
3.2 Location
3.2 Emplacement
Bei Einsatz an extremen Standorten

(z.B. aggressive Atmosphre, niedrige
Auentemperaturen u.a.) geeignete
Manahmen treffen. Ggf empfiehlt
sich Rcksprache mit BITZER.
For operation under extreme conditions (e.g. aggressive / corrosive

atmospheres, low ambient temperatures etc.) suitable measures must be
taken. Consultation with BITZER is
recommended.
En cas d'utilisation dans des conditions

extremes (par ex. atmosphere agressive,
temperatures exterieures basses,...)
prendre des mesures adquates. Le cas
chant, il est conseill de consulter
BITZER.
* j f l Achtung Einfriergefahr!
Es muss sichergestellt sein,
dass die Temperatur am Aufstellort ausreichend oberhalb
dem Gefrierpunkt des Khlmediums liegt.
Attention - Danger of freezing!

It is necessary to ensure that the
I temperature at the location is
high enough above the freezing
point of the coolant.
" *" Attention - Risque de prise en glace !

I II faut s'assurer que la temperature
-. I'emplacement est suffisamment
jl I plus leve que le point de gel du
t.-._s fluide caloporteur.
3.3 Aufbau der Anlage
3.3 Plant design
3.3 Conception de I'installation
Bei Montage eines Verdichters auf

den Verflssiger:
If a compressor is mounted on the

condenser:
En cas de montage d'un compresseur sur

le condenseur:
^ R Achtung!
" I - , | Auf den Verflssiger drfen
i^fJl keine Schwingungen bertragen
. ^ werden!
tf^q Verflssiger nicht als tragendes
l'^','! Element verwenden!
^ ^ Verdichter nur mit DmpfungsSl elementen auf Verflssiger mon& tieren!
W^
f I,rJ
^sl
A'<M
fe^
^ 1
^ ^
mm
'
Die Druckleitung muss ausreichend

elastisch sein, damit auf den Verflssiger mglichst wenig Schwingungen
und Bewegungen des Verdichters
bertragen werden. Eventuell kann es
notwendig sein, flexible SchwingungsAusgleicher einzubauen. Extreme
Druck-Plsationen sollten durch den
Einbau von Mufflern gedmpft werden.
The discharge line must be sufficiently

elastic so that a minimum of vibrations
and movement is transferred to the
condenser. It may be necessary to fit
flexible vibration dampers.
Attention!
No vibrations should be transmitted to the condenser!
^ " * "^^ ^'^^ condenser as
load-bearing element!
Mount the compressor on the
condenser only with damper
elements!
Extreme pressure pulsations should

be damped by fitting mufflers.
Attention !
N'admettre pas la transmission des

I . vibrations
au condenseur!
Ne pas utiliser le condenseur

comme bti!
Toujours prvoir des elements antivibratoires entre le compresseur et
..a le condenseur!
La conduite de refoulement devra tre
suffisamment lastique pour ne pas
transmettre trop de vibrations et de mouvements du compresseur au condenseur.
Le cas chant, prvoir la mise en place
de flexibles antivibratoires.
Des pulsions de pression extremes
devront tre attnues par un silencieux.
xui(iii^;Sia&3:aaixet&it'^:::i*sXiBsas^^
DB-200-2
g:
^r
3.4 Kltemittel- bzw. Oi-Seite
3.4 Refrigerant resp. oil side
3.4 Cote fluide frigorigne / huile
Die gesamte Anlage sollte so ausgelegt und betrieben werden, dass der
maximale Betriebsdruck im Druckbehlter nicht berschritten werden kann
(28 bar).
The entire plant should be designed

and operated so that the maximum
operating pressure in the pressure
vessel (28 bar) cannot be exceeded.
Toute I'installation devra tre congue et

exploite de fagon ce que la pression
de service maximale dans le reservoir
sous pression ne puisse pas tre dpasse (28 bar).
Druckentlastungs-Ventile sind zwingend erforderiich, wenn

damit zu rechnen ist, dass der
maximale Betriebsdruck durch
uere Wrmequellen berschritten wird (z. B. Brand) oder wenn
die gesamte Kltemittel-Fllung der
Anlage grer ist als 90% des Behlter-Inhalts bei 20C (Fassungsvolumen). Der Behlter-Inhalt ist
das Volumen zwischen betriebsmig absperrbaren Ventilen vor
und nach einem Druckbehlter. Bei
Behltern, die direkt hintereinander
montiert sind, gilt das Volumen aller
Behlter und der Leitung.
In diesen Fllen sollten bevorzugt
^ berstrm-Einrichtungen eingesetzt
i werden, die das Kltemittel oder das
l auf die Niederdruck-Seite der
^ Anlage leiten (Emissions-Minderung).
Pressure relief valves are essential if

it is to be expected that the maximum operating pressure will be
exceeded due to external heat
sources (e.g. fire), or if
the entire refrigerant charge of the
plant is more than 90% of the
receiver volume at 20C (charge
capacity). Receiver volume means
the volume between operationally
lockable valves before and after a
pressure vessel. In case of two
vessels being mounted in series, it
is the volume of both vessels and
the connecting pipe.
In these cases relief devices should
be prefered that lead the refrigerant or
the oil to the low-pressure side of the
plant (emission reduction).
Des soupapes de surpression sont vraiment ncessaires quand:

il est possible que la pression de service maximale soit dpasse (influence
de sources de chaleur extrieures
telles que incendie par ex.), ou quand
la charge totale en fluide frigorigne
de I'installation entire est suprieure
90% de la contenance du reservoir
sous pression 20C. La contenance
signifie le volume entre les vannes serrables en service avant et aprs un
reservoir sous pression. En cas de
deux reservoirs monts en serie, c'est
le volume des deux reservoirs et de la
conduite.
Dans ces cas, il faudrait prconiser l'emploi de systmes de decharge qui dvient
le fluide frigorigne ou l'huile vers le cot
basse pression de I'installation (limitation
de rejets).
Sicherheitsschaiteinrichtung
Safety switching device
Dispositif de scurit par coupure
Entsprechend den rtlichen Vorschriften mssen Druck begrenzende

Sicherheitsschalteinrichtungen vorgesehen werden.
In conformance with local regulations,

pressure limiting safety switching
devices must provided for.
Conformment la rglementation locale

en vigueur, il faut prvoir des dispositifs
de scurit par coupure pour limiter la
pression.
3.5 Khlmedium-Seite
3.5 Coolant side
3.5 Cot fluide caloporteur
Das Khlmedium sollte weder Feststoffe noch Gasanteile enthalten:
The coolant should contain neither

solids nor gases:
Le fluide caloporteur ne devrait contenir

ni corps solide ni element gazeux:
Feststoffe mssen durch geeignete

Filter abgeschieden werden.
Any solids must be separated out

using suitable filters.
Les corps solides doivent tre rcuprs par des filtres adquats.
Gasanteile sollten durch konstruktive Manahmen vermieden werden.
A gas content should.be avoided

through suitable design measures.
La presence de gaz peut tre vite

par certaines adaptations.
Offene Kreislufe:
Der Druckbehlter darf sich whrend
des Stillstands nicht entleeren. Dazu
entweder
einen Khlmedium-Regler am
Khlmedium-Austritt des Druckbehlters einbauen
oder einen Schwanenhals am
Auslauf.
Open circuits:
The pressure vessel must not drain
off while not in use. For this reason, fit
either
a coolant regulator at the coolant
outlet of the pressure vessel, or
a swan-neck at the outlet
Circuits ouverts:
Durant les phases d'arrt, le reservoir
sous pression ne doit pas se vider.
Prvoir done:
un rgulateur la sortie du fluide caloporteur du reservoir sous pression ou
un coude surlev la sortie.
DB-200-2
gKac5iEyj8ahtaaHr.ii^ggaaata33
^3^
vs):maAiiiSifiaim
Bei Leitungswasser als Khlmedium

muss geprft werden, ob der Einbau
eines Rohrtrenners vorgeschrieben
wird.
When using tap-water as a coolant, it

is necessary to check whether the
installation of a pipe disconnector is
stipulated.
Bei Khlung mit Seewasser:

Wenn das verwendete Seewasser auf
Grund der rtlichen Bedingungen zu
Iûschel-Biidung fhren kann, sollten
geeignete Filter eingebaut werden.
Dies dient auch zum Schutz der
Rohrleitungen vor Muschelbefall.
When cooling with seawater:

If, due to local conditions, the seawater in use can lead to scale or shell
deposits, suitable filters should be fitted. This also serves to protect the
pipe lines from shell deposits.
Refroidissement par eau de mer:

Si, en raison des conditions locales, I'eau
de mer utilise peut provoquer la formation de coquillages, des filtres adquats
doivent tre installs. Ceux-ci serviront
galement proteger les tuyauteries
contre ce genre de depots.
3.6 Anlage anmelden
3.6 Plant registration
3.6 Declaration de I'installation
Verflssiger und lkhler sind Druckbehlter nach der Druckgerterichtlinie 97/23/EG. Deshalb muss die
gesamte Anlage entsprechend den
rtlichen Vorschriften bei der Aufsichtsbehrde angemeldet und von ihr
genehmigt werden.
Die Kategorie fr die Konformittsbewertung des jeweiligen Druckbehlters ist in der oberen Tabelle aufgelistet.
Condensers and oil coolers are pressure vessels according to the

Pressure Equipment Directive
97/23/EC. For this reason the entire
plant must be registered with the
supervisory authority and duly
approved in accordance with local
regulations.
The category for the conformity
assessment of each pressure vessel
is listed in the table above.
Les condenseurs et les refroidisseurs

d'huile sont des reservoirs sous pression
d'aprs la directive quipements sous
pression 97/23/CEE. Par consequent,
I'ensemble de I'installation devra tre
declare I'organisme de centrale et autoris par celui-ci, conformment la rglementation locale en vigueur.
La categorie pour revaluation de conformite par chaque reservoir sous pression
est indique dans le tableau ci-dessus.
In Lndern auerhalb der EU mssen

die jeweiligen Vorschriften eingehalten
werden.
In non EU countries local regulations

must be complied with.
Dans les pays en dehors de I'UE, les

rglementations respectives seront
prendre en consideration.
Myp
'Typo
Bohalter-lnhalt (Kaltem tie / I)

Receiver volume (rcfriqerant / oil)
Contenaice de res (fluide frig / huile)
Kategorie fr die Konformitatsbewertung nach 97/23 EG

Category for the conformity assessment according to 97/23 FC
Categorie pour revaluation dc la conformite d apros 97/23/CE
d m ^ (I)
3,8
Kltemittel- / Ol-Gruppe LI
Kltemittel Gruppe L3 (L2)
Refngerant' oil group LI
Refngerant group L3 (L2)
Groupe de fluide frig / d'huile LI Groupe de fluide fng L3 (L2)
I
II
I
II
i
II
Type
\'l
KOSSNfB
K073H{B
K123H(B
-,5'K203H(B
;;4^^K283H(B
j,y K373H(B
"K573H(B
K813H(B
K1053H(B
'-K1353T{B
~ VK1973T(B
.;;^K2923T(B
, K3803T(B
, K4803T(B
\ ' OW401(B:
:',OW501(B
',"' OW781(B
'J^W941(B
Kltemittel-Gruppen L I , L2 und L3
entsprechend EN 378-1.
DB-200-2
Si le fluide caloporteur est de I'eau de

ville, verifier si la mise en place d'un disconnecteur de conduite est prescrit.
34
5,1
11,8
11,3
14 5
29 4
27,7
40 0
37 0
76,0
'67,0
108 0
98 0
105
14,0
180
24,0
Refrigerant groups L1, L2 and L2

according to EN 378-1.
II
II
II
III
III
III
III
IV
ill
II
II
II
II
III
III
III
III
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
Groupes de fluide frigorigne L I , L2 et L3

conformment la EN 378-1.
'^m-
4 Montage
4 Mounting
4 Montage
4.1 Lieferzustand
4.1 Condition as delivered
4.1 Etat la livraison
Der Druckbehlter ist im Lieferzustand

verschlossen und mit Schutzgas
befllt. Der Schutzgas-berdruck
betrgt 0,5 .. 1 bar. Alle Rotalock- und
Ransch-Anschlsse sind durch eine
eingelegte Metallscheibe verschlossen.
In delivery condition the pressure vessel is closed and filled with holding
charge. The holding charge has an
overpressure of 0.5 to 1 bar. All
Rotalock and flange connections are
closed by an inserted metal plate.
A la livraison, le reservoir sous pression

est clos et rempli d'un gaz de protection.
La surpression du gaz de protection est
de 0,5 .. 1 bar. Tous les raccords rotalock
et brides sont obturs par une plaque
mtallique.
4.2 Rohrleitungen anschliessen
4.2 Pipe line connections
4.2 Raccordement de la tuyauterie
Die Rohranschlsse fr Kltemittel

bzw. l sind so ausgefhrt, dass
Rohre in den gngigen Millimeter- und
Zoll-Abmessungen verwendet werden
knnen. Lt-Anschlsse haben gestufte Durchmesser. Je nach Abmessung
wird das Rohr mehr pder weniger tief
eintauchen. Im Bedarfsfall kann das
Buchsen-Ende mit dem greren
Durchmesser auch abgesgt werden.
The pipe connections for refrigerant

resp. oil are designed for tubes having
the normal millimetre or inch dimensions. Brazing connections have
stepped diameters. According to the
size the tube can be pushed more or
less into the fitting. If not required the
end with the largest diameter can be
cut-off.
Les raccords pour le fluide frigorigne /

pour I'huile sont executes de fagon ce
que les tubes usuels en millimetres et en
pouces puissent tre utilises. Les raccords braser ont plusieurs diametres
successifs. Suivant la section, le tube
sera insr plus ou moins profondment.
Si ncessaire, l'extrmit avec le plus
grand diametre peut tre scie.
Positions of connections see page 11.
Positions des raccords, voir page 11.
Ti"^ Achtung!
||.^1 Ventile nicht berhitzen! .
'%''^ Whrend und nach dem Lten ' ^
'i"4iVentilkrper khlen.
y Maximale Lttemperatur 7Q0C.
^ i ^ Attention!
S:|:|| Avoid overheating of the valves!.
i " ^ ^ o o l valve body while and after '
^';f| brazing!
^ S Max. brazing temperature
S
700C.
r r i Attention !
| J 3 Ne pas surchauffer les vannes !
Refroidir les corps de vanne lors du
brasage et apres I
;S Temperature de brasage maximale
700C.
Zuerst berdruck aus dem Druckbehlter ablassen: Anschlsse vorsichtig

ffnen.
Release the pressure from the pressure vessel first: Open the connections carefully.
Evacuer tout d'abord la surpression du

reservoir sous pression: Ouvrir les raccords prudemment.
Anschluss-Positionen siehe Seite 11.
' fy*^^<"^*'
Durchmesser gestuft
Stepped diameters '
Plusieurs diametres
successifs
Vor Rohransrfiluss Vcrcchlu-^sbloch entfemenl

Remove sealing plate before tube connedioni
- . Keiirer la loie ae termeiure avani raccoruer le luue i
Abb 1 Rohr-Anschluss mit RotalockVersch raubung
Fig 1 Pipe connection with Rotalock

adaptor
Fig. 1 Raccord de tube avec raccord a visser

Rotalock
DB-200-2
'asLmiMmiss:3sss<^^;viaKtaaiiisiaK
t ^ ' ! Warnung!
L!\ Druckbehlter steht unter beri w druck durch Schutzgas.
f l Verietzungen von Haut und
^ ^ Augen mglich.
i,^^ Bei Arbeiten am Druckbehlter
*M Schutzbrille tragen!
p Warning!
Pressure vessel is under pres^^"^ sure with holding charge.
I Injury of skin and eyes possible.
Wear safety goggles while workn^
u p ing on pressure vessel!
Avertissement!
Le reservoir sous pression est en
pression avec du gaz de protection.
possibles.
"., I Porter des lunettes de protection
% ~\ durand les travaux sur le reservoir
iJ~a sous pression!
Absperrventile und / oder Ltanschlsse entfernen.
Remove shut-off valves and / or

brazed connections.
Retirer les vannes d'isolement et / ou les

raccords braser.
f^ Achtung!
^ 1 1 Eintritt von Luftfeuchtigkeit mglichst vermeiden!
Offenen Druckbehlter umgehend in die Anlage einbauen.
Attention!
If possible, prevent any humidity
from entering!
Open pressure vessels should
be immediately installed into the
iestM plant.
Druckbehlter whrend N/IontageUnterbrechungen wieder verschliessen.
Close the pressure vessel again during any installation interruptions.
Refermer le reservoir sous pression

durant les arrets de travail.
Flush out the relevant pipes with inert

gas during any brazing or welding
work.
Durant les travaux de brasage et de soudage, rincer les portions de tuyauterie

concemes avec du gaz de protection.
Sauberkeit der Rohre
Cleanliness of the pipes
Propret des tubes

die
von Zunder, l\/letallspnen, Rostund Phosphat-Schichten) und
werden.

which are
coatings) and
seal.
D'une manire generale, n'utiliser que

des tubes et des composants qui
sont propres et sees l'intrieur (pas
de calamine, de copeaux mtalliques,
de depots de rouille et de phosphates)
et
sont livres hermtiquement clos.
Druckentlastungs-Ventii an
Verflssiger montieren
Mounting the pressure relief valve

at condenser
Monter la soupape de surpression au

condenseur
Innengewinde 3/8"-18 NPTF:

Druckentlastungs-Ventii einschrauben.
Internal thread 3/8"-18 NPTF:

Screw the pressure relief valve.
Riet Interieur 3/8"-18 NPTF:

Visser la soupape de surpression.
Auengewinde 1 1/4"-12 UNF:

Druckentlastungs-Ventii in Adapter einschrauben. Dann Adapter mit berwurfmutter am Druckbehller befestigen.
External thread 1 1/4"-12 UNF:

Screw the pressure relief valve into the
adaptor. Then fasten the adaptor at the
pressure vessel with the union nut.
Riet extrieur 1 1/4"-12 UNF:

Visser la soupape de surpression dans
I'adaptateur. Puis fixer I'adaptateur sur le
reservoir sous pression avec I'ecrou-raccord.
Lieferbare Adapter siehe Abb. 2,

Anschluss-Position Seite 11.
Available adaptors see figure 2,

connection position page 11.
Adaptateurs disponibles voir figure 2,

position de raccord page 11.
Whrend der Lt- oder Schweiarbeiten die entsprechenden

Leitungsteile mit Schutzgas splen.
1/2'-14 NPTF
G 1/2
1 / 2 " - 1 4 N P T F ' 4.
Attention !
Eviter si possible I'introduction
d'humidit !
Connecter immdiatement le reservoir de pression ouvert l'installation.
3/8"-18 NPTF
G 1/2
SW12
366 005-01
Abb. 2 Ueferbare Adapter fr das

Druckentlastungs-Ventll
DB-200-2
366 005-02
366 005-03
Fig. 2 Available adaptors for the pressure

relief valve
366 005^4
366 005-05
Fig. 2 Adaptateurs disponibles pour la soupape de surpression
rC
A n s c h l u s s f r Manometer
C o n n e c t i o n for pressure g a u g e
Raccord d u manometre
nur bei Wartungsarbeiten, nicht whrend Betrieb nutzen.
use it only for maintenance work not

during operation.
utiliser seulement pour des travaux de

maintenance ne pas pendant le service.
Hier keinesfalls Druck-Wchter anschlieen!
By no means pressure limiters may

be connected here!
Ne raccorder, en aucun cas, les limiteurs

de pression ici I
4.3 Khlmedium-Rohre anschlieen
4.3 Fitting coolant pipes
4.3 Raccorder ies tubes du fluide caloporteur
Rohre einschrauben, dabei sicherstellen, dass die Einschraub-Nippel nicht

mitgedreht werden.
Standard-Ausfhrung
Innengewinde (G..)
oder Flansch (DN..)
Seewasser-Ausfhrung
Auengewinde (G..)
oder Flansch (DN.;)
1
0
2
0
Visser les tubes. S'assurer que Ies

nipples vis ne se tournent pas.
Screwed nipple (3) and (4):
Einschraub-Nippel (3) und (4):
Screw the pipes. Make sure that the

screwed nipples do not turn.
Nipples vis (3) et (4):
standard design
internal thread (G..)
or flange (DN..)
seawater-resistant design
external thread (G..)
or flange (DN..)
version standard
filets Interieur (G..)
OU bride (DN..)
version marine
filets extrieur (G..)
OU bride (DN..)
2a
3a
4 pass'
' 3b
2 pass - .'
4a
4'pass
. 4b
2 pass
.5
^
'.- ,- -
- ' -.;,',;, . ' G V j '., 2 X G V2 . - i G V ,

K033N(B)
10L %
G%
12L V j " '
- , . ' K073H(B)
12L V j " -10L
GV2
G%
"" G y^s 2 X G V2 .
K123H(B)
16L V
, G \
12L y^r
( I ' V / - 1 2 U N F ) < .G V2
2 X G V, N ' G V ^
-:.-" '
K203H(B)
16L %'
^ " 1 6 L . ^ 5 / ^ V . - ^'-(1.-1/4"
'^G?J^y^2 X A A I S S & ' G % ^ ,~ G Issi^î^SvS- - 1 ' ^ - ^ --. ^ i f * "."'- -.
K283H(B)
G % . " . - . G-%
22L % "
22L
G I ; j :.,x' - / i ' ' ( 1 V / -12tJNF)
'a
GX-^ 2 X ^
K373H{B)
2 XG % '
28L 1 Vg"
22L \ - .
G ^ ' - '^ G I ~
"' (1 3/4"- 1 2 U N F ) ' ; - G \
K573H(B)
^SSLI^/g"
28L 1^8- .
G2
G2'" \GV4(GV2)
GIV4 >
,-'GlV4
(1 %' - 1 2 U N F )
" ~ \K813H(B)
" G 2
"35Ll3/g""
28L i V a "
GIV4
' G IV4
G2
G ^V^ (G V2)
(1 %' - 1 2 U N F )
G2
GIV4
K1053H(B)
35L 1 % "
G2
42L1%"
G V4 (G V2) , 0 %" - 1 2 U N F ) ' G I I / 4
K1353T(B)
'42L1V
35L 1 % " '
G I V 4 .' G 2
G2
, G 1/4 (G V j )
_ - _.
( 1 X -12 UNF)
.:.- G1V4
K1973T(B)
54L2V8"
42L 1 V
DN65 G'V,(GV2)
( 2 % "- 1 2 U N F ) ' ^ G 2 ''^'' D N 6 5 - '-' G 2
K2923T(B)
5 4 L 2 V 8 " - 54L 2Ve" ' , (112x112)
. G 2 , b N 6 5 '-'Xf G 2
D N 6 5 ' G V , (G %)
; ' V - * J'.
K3803T(B)
7 6 L 3 V 8 V , . 76L,3V8DN 100 ^^ G V , (G V j )
.'. (140x1.40)
\'. , D N . 8 a . ,- DN J 00 . : , D N 8 0
K4803T(B)
- 76L3V8' ^ -TBL'^SVR" ,
;r-'(140x140} V."K'' D N B G -IDNIOO }-" ' D N 8 0 , . D N ' 1 0 0 ' ; | G % ( G I / 2 ) . ^
^sî
OW401(B)
22L \ 22L %
G % " ' : 2 " X G 3 / 4 ' v^ "J ' 4
G1"
""^ VOB'' '
OW501(B) _
22L % : ~ .
G I -^ -'''/'~'\~ '
22L V
,' - ' 'Z'^''- ' G % . > - 2 X G % .-<-'.^'G ^L
' " . ^ 0 1 OB '
^
"
'
"
V;
'
OV^81(B)
28LlVa"
OW941(B) -' ' 3 5 L 1 % "
( i^
'" ; -
'
28L' i % "
35
^X
1 Kltemittel-bzw. t-Eintritt
2 Kltemittel-bzw. I-Austritt '\-. ' ,2a Alternativer Kltemittel-Austritt^ . ''
3
Khlmedium-Eintritt
' ~~>
. 3a: 4 oder 6 pass / 3b: 2 oder 3 pass
4 Khlmedium-Austntt ' '^ y ' '4a: 4 oder 6 pass / 4b: 2 oder 3 pass
5
Khlmedium-Ablass ^ >- î .'
6 Anschluss fr Manomete'r' - '
7 Anschuss fr Druckentlastungs-Ventil
Innengewinde 3/8"-18 NPTF '^ _. ''
, Auengewinde 1 1/4"-12 UNF -, .,
>
' .
8 Scfiauglas
9 lablass-Ventil
10 Umlenkdeckel, abnehmbar
11 untere Befestigungs-Schiene
12 obere Befestigungs-Schiene
- '
^ 6 pass ~3 pass
* -J"^
^;^_ ^ '
: "
"
- - - ^ ' 6 pass
G 1 " "' ' - 2 x G 1

. G l " ' " 2 x"G 1 ;
?' G 1 .
' " ' - '
> *
'3 pass
"^v
G 1V2,. : G ' / / ( G \ ) ^
GiVa ' ' G V ^ ( G V 2 )
,
- _ . ; - '
01 O B '
IOB'-;
s.
Entree de fluide fngongne resp. d'huile

1 Refngerant resp.'oil inlet
Sortie de fluide frigorigne resp d'huile "'
*''2 '^Refrigerant resp. oil outlet
*;:-?>|''2a - Sortie alternative de fluide frigongne "'
2a alternative refrigerant outlet
Entre de fluide caloporteur , ,^
. 3 Coolantiniet ^,,- 'j/\ ^ ',}
3a: 4 ou 6 pass / 3b: 2 ou 3 pass
^ \ ' ' , 3a: 4 or 6 pass / 3b: 2 or 3 pass
^5
Sortie de fluide caloporteur
^ ''V." 4 , Coolant outlet: r;,"""'" ' ^r'"'; ^
%,
4a: 4 ou 6 pass / 4b- 2 ou 3 pass , -
^ ' '-" 4a: 4 or 6 pass / 4b: 2 or 3 pass
Vldage de fluide caloporteur
- .. J
Coolant
drain
-'^>'
.,
''-''i^-/
: 5
Raccord du manometre
,
/
'"'6 Connection for pressure gauge
Racord du soupape de surpression >
>' 7 Connection for pressure relief valve
filet Interieur 3/8"-18 NPTF ,1 ~ c',"
interneal thread 3/8"-18 NPTF
^
filetexteneurl 1 / 4 " - 1 2 U N F
. .,,.
external thread 1 1/4"-12 UNF .,
8 Sight glass
a Voyant
9 Oil drain valve
9 Vanne de vidage d'huile
10 End cover, removable
10 Couvercle detlecteur, amovible
11 Fixing rail below
11 Rail de fixation en dessous
12 Fixing rail above
12 Rail de fixation en dessus
ISA
irrttfmfifMn iirf uiwTCniwvu^BrTKiww-Tiim-iffir-vri,.KîOWinu gL:-Tjttmfiii*WiBmg
10
DB-200-2
'assfsisssssssx
Anschlsse
Connections
Raccords
K033N(B) .. K373H(B)
4a/3b
(0|
TOP
K573H(B)& K1053H
4a
fi/
/*".
fe "" i
^ .A
> -C i o. ^
rx::
K1053HB &
K1353T(B).. K4803T(B)
Ol.-'
'3a
7/16"-20UNF
OW401(B).. OW941(B)
4a/3b
7/16--20 UNF
wittgwwwBTii.; tfta3a%fe-^Ra>i.aiiMSMft.tfTi.."^f.w-,^c g ; . ! ^ niwK v?mfaaasaBCgJMa!.g
DB-200-2
iAKag3fflA.O(M.-'=iRJ5Siyiis;!s^^
11
sg
4.4 Khlmedium-Durchgnge
4.4 Coolant passes
4.4 Passes du fluide caloporteur
Je nach Umlenkdeckei wird das Khlmedium entweder 2, 3, 4 oder 6 mal

durch den Druckbehlter gefhrt.
Depending on the end covers the

coolant passes the pressure vessel 2,
3, 4, or 6 times.
Dependent du couvercle deflecteur le fluide caloporteur passe le reservoir sous

pression 2, 3, 4, ou 6 fois.
K573H(B) .. K4803T(B):
4-Pass-Deckel sind Standard mig
montiert. Alternative: 2-Pass-Deckel
K573H(B) .. K4803T(B):
4-pass end covers are monted as standard. Alternative: 2-pass end covers
K573H(B) .. K4803T(B):
Couvercles 4-pass sont standardement
monts. Alternative: couvercles 2-pass
Bei allen anderen Gerten kann am

gleichen Umlenkdeckel zwischen 4oder 2- bzw. 6- oder 3-Pass gewhlt
werden. Dies hngt davon ab an welchen Positionen die KhlmediumRohre montiert werden (Abb. 3).
At all other devices it can be choosen

between 4 or 2 resp. 6 or 3 passes at
the same end cover. This depends on
which positions the coolant pipes are
mounted (see fig. 3).
Chez tous autres appareils on peut choisir entre 4 ou 2 resp. 6 ou 3 passages.

Cela depend auxquelles positions les
tubes du fluide caloporteur sont monts
K033N(B).. K373H(B)
OW401{B)/OW501(B)
K573N(B).. K4803T(B)
2 pass
2 p?GS
Abb. 3 Khlmedium Anschuss-Positionen

am Umlenkdeckei
K033N(B) .. K373H(B):
4- Oder 2-Pass, je nach Anschluss
am gleichen Deckel mglich
K573N(B) .. K4803T(B):
unterschiedliche Deckel fr 4- cxJer
2-Pass
OW401(B) .. OW501(B):
OV\/781(B)..OW861(B):
12
4 pass
Rg. 3 Coolant-eonnection positions at the

end cover
K033N(B) .. K373H{B):
4 or 2 passes depending on connection at the same cover possible
K573N(B).. K4803T(B):
different covers for 4 or 2 pass
OW401(B) ..OW501(B):
OW781{B) .. OW861(B):
(voir fig. 3).
OW781(B)/OW861(B)
3 pass
6 pass
Rg. 3 Positions des raccords du fluide caloporteur au couvercle deflecteur

K033N(B).. K373H(B):
4 ou 2 passages dependant du raccord
sur le mme couvercle possible
K573N(B).. K4803T(B):
couvercles diffrents pour 4 or 2 passages
OW/401(B)..OW501(B):
OW781(B)..OW861(B):
DB-200-2
g
5 In Betrieb nehmen
5 Commissioning
5 IVlise en Service
Der Druckbehlter wurde im Werk als

einzelnes Gert geprft. Nach der
fviontage muss die Dichtheit der
Anschlsse und des Rohrleitungssystems erneut geprft werden.
The pressure vessels have been tested in the factory as individual units.
After installation it is necessary to test
again for any leaks of the connections
and pipe work.
Le reservoir sous pression a t control

en usine en tant qu'appareil individuel.
Apres montage, l'tanchit des raccords
et du Systeme de tuyauterie doit tre
recontrlee.
5.1 Dichtheit prfen
5.1 Leak testing
5.1 Essai d'tanchit
Mit getrocknetem Stickstoff berdruck

erzeugen. Druckbehlter und Leitungen auf Lecks prfen.
Test for leaks by pressurizing the

presure vessel and pipes using dry
nitrogen.
Crer une surpression avec de l'azote sch. Rechercher la presence de fuites dans
le reservoir sous pression et la tuyauterie.
1 ^ Gefahr!
Z Prfdruck darf den maximal
t*' ^ zulssigen Druck nicht berl' 1'i schreiten (sieheTypschild)!
^l'-f Sicherheitsvorschriften unbe^_'*. dingt befolgen (z. B. EN 378
oder quivalent).
' A ' Danger!

^3SL Test pressure may not exceed
-' the maximum allowable pressure
(see name plate)!
Safety regulations have
absolutely to be observed (e. g.
.*.- EN 378 or equivalents).
% " Danger!
iJ^ Le timbrage ne doit pas excder la
'
pression maximale admissible (voir
' plaque d'identit)!
Excuter absolument les prescriptions de scurit (par ex. EN 378 ou
*.-.*. quivalente).
5.2 Refrigerant charging
5.2 Remplir le fluide frigorigne

Khlmedium-Kreislauf in Betrieb
nehmen. Das Khlmedium knnte
sonst einfrieren.
Before refrigerant is charged:

Put the coolant circuit into operation. Otherwise the coolant might
freeze.
Avant le remplissage du fluide frigorigne:

Mettre le circuit du fluide caloporteur
en service, sinon celui-ci pourrait geler.
Nur zugelassene Kltemittel einfllen (siehe Kapitel 2).

(see chapter 2).

Verflssiger bzw. Sammler fllen,

For systems with flooded evaporator possibly charge also into the
evaporator.

ergnzen:
Gemische mssen als blasenfreie
Flssigkeit dem Fllzyiinder entnommen werden.
After commissioning it may be neccessary to add refrigerant:

While the compressor is running,
charge the refrigerant from the suction side, preferably at the evaporator inlet.
Blends must be take from the
Remplir le fluide frigorigne liquide

le reservoir de liquide. Pour les systmes avec vaporateur noy, le remplissage peut aussi se faire dans l'vaporateur.
r ^ Gefahr!
i!- Berstgefahr von Komponenten
| ' . * l und Rohrieitungen durch hydrau'ff-iî lischen berdruck.
^,,t berfllung des Systems mit
f \ Kltemittel oder
' Ol
^ unbedingt
SîiM vermeiden!
f ^ Danger!
^3m. Explosion risk of components
^-i"i and pipelines by hydraulic overffi^J pressure.
p \ J Avoid absolutely overcharging of
the system with refrigerant or oil!
Aprs la mise en service, un appoint en

fluide frigorigne peut s'avrer ncessaire: le compresseur tant en service,
introduire le fluide frigorigne du c6t
tre retirees du cylindre de remplissage
en phase liquide, sans bulles.
" > ~ Danger!
O L Dcinger d'clatement des compo' sants et conduites par surpression
*, ^ hydraulique.
< Eviter absolument suralimentation
du Systeme avec fluide frigorigne
^ w j ou avec huile !
mimxiamr^ti^xi
DB-200-2
13
r
5.3 Khlmedium
5.3 Coolant
5.3 Fluide caloporteur
In der folgenden Tabelle ist der maximal zulssige Durchsatz an Khlmedium aufgelistet. Dieser Wert bezieht
sich auf sauberes und gasfreies Wasser mit einer Durchfluss-Geschwindigkeit von 2,5 m/s.
The following table lists the maximum

permitted coolant volume flow. These
values refer to clean, gas-free water
with a flow velocity of 2.5 m/s.
Dans le tableau ci-apres, sont indiqus

les debits de fluide caloporteur maximaux
admissibles. Ces valeurs se referent de
I'eau propre et sans gaz ayant une vitesse de passage de 2,5 m/s.
Der Druckbehlter kann mit gering

feststoff- oder gasbelastetem Wasser
bei einer Durchfluss-Geschwindigkeit
bis ca. 1,5 m/s betrieben werden.
Dazu mssen aus vergleichbaren
Anwendungen positive Erfahrungen
vorliegen.
The pressure vessel can be operated

with water containing a slight amount
of solids or gases with a flow speed of
up to about 1.5 m/s. However, positive
experience must first have been
gained from comparable applications.
Druckprobe / Probebetrieb
Pressure test /Test operation
Bei geschlossenen KhlmediumKreislauf sollte eine Druckprobe

durchgefhrt werden (maximaler
Betriebsdruck 10 bar). Bei offenem
Kreislauf gengt ein kurzer Probebetrieb.
A pressure test should be carried out

with a closed coolant circuit (maximum operating pressure: 10 bar). With
an open circuit a short test run is sufficient.
"""^
] {
i I' j
..
- f
rf
Achtung - Korrosion!
Wenn die Anlage nach
Druckprobe bzw. Probebetrieb
lngere Zeit stillsteht, mssen
die Rohre vor Korrosion
geschtzt werden durch:
Druckprobe mit sauberem Wasser

oder trockenem Gas,
Probebetrieb mit sauberem
Wasser.
Wenn dies nicht mglich ist, mssen
die Rohre gereinigt werden:
Rohre splen und trocknen oder mit
sauberem Wasser befllen. Siehe
auch Kapitel 6.1.
'^f'Z Attention Corrosion!

I If the plant is not operated for a
g?,
long time after pressure test
"'l resp. test run, the pipes must be
tri protected against corrosion by:
pressure test with clean water or
dry gas,
test run with clean water.
If this is not possible, the pipes must
be cleaned:
Flush pipes and dry them or fill them
with clean water. See also chapter
6.1.
Le reservoir sous pression peut tre utilise avec de l'eau faiblement "charge" en
corps solides et en gaz pour une vitesse
de passage jusqu' 1,5 m/s. Pour ceci, il
faut disposer de resultats probants obtenus dans des conditions similaires.
Essai de pression / Mise en service

d'essai
Dans les cas d'un circuit ferme, il est souhaitable de proceder un essai de pression (pression de service maximale
10 bar). Dans le cas d'un circuit ouvert,
une courte mise en service d'essai suffit.
| T l Attention - Corrosion !
| | - : | Si I'installation reste assez long%''^ temps l'arrt apres I'essai de pres'X>,^ sion / la mise en service d'essai, les
| A ^ tubes doivent tre protegs centre
S. la corrosion par:
essai de pression avec de l'eau propre
OU un gaz sec,
mise en service d'essai avec de l'eau
propre.
Si ceci n'est pas possible, les tubes doivent tre nettoys:
Rincer et scher les tubes ou les remplir
avec de l'eau propre. Voir galement chapitre 6.1.
Einlauf-Zeit bei offenen KhlKreislufen (Korrosionsschutz)
Bunning-in time with open cooling

circuits (corrosion protection)
Temps de mise en uvre pour les circuits ouverts (protection anticorrosion)
Innerhalb der ersten Monate sollte der

Druckbehlter stndig vom Khlmedium durchstrmt werden, damit sich
eine Schutzschicht bilden kann.
Within the first months coolant should

constantly flow through the pressure
vessel so that a protective layer can
form.
Whrend Stillstandszeiten gengt ein

geringer Durchfluss.
While inoperative a low flow rate is

sufficient
Durant les premiers mois, le fluide caloporteur devrait circuler en permanence

travers le reservoir sous pression. Une
couche de protection peut ainsi se former.
14
Un faible debit suffit durant les periodes

d'arrt.
DB-200-2
W^r
aKaaa.-a'.a35aasggg-aiBt;;waaai^^
^~y^^^p^
Verflussigor
,;.;."<"
-i'^
Behaiter-lrihalt
(Khlmedium)
Receiver volume
(coolant)
(Contenance de res.
(fluide caloporteur)
dm3 (!)
0,4
0.7
0,9
1,8
2,1
3.1
5,8
7,0
Q3
11,5
18,8
25,0
37,4
45,0
0,4
0,7
0,9
1,8
2,1
3,1
-. >-,
.-, 5,8
-, , , - ' "
7,0
9,3
11,5
18,8
25,0
'"
.
' 37,4
_ '_ '
_45 0
Condensers
Condcnscurs
J*
Typ
Type
Type
K033N
K073H
K123H
K203H
K283H
K373H
K573H
K813H
K1053H
K1353T
K1973T
K2923T
K3fa03T
K4803T
K033NB
K073HB
K123HB
K23HB
K2a3HB
K373HB
K573HB
K813HB
K1053HB
K1353TB
Kig73TB
K2923TB
K3803TB
__,_, K4803TB
...,.
;,
_ . , ^ y j , ^ . ^^-ir^"
; -." ' ^ " ' l k h l e r ' ''*.
Ai-i.^- :''( r-^
f< " ^ t ^ , ^'^ '-
-P
Beh.-lnhalt
^ P . (Kuhlmed.)
^
Res. volume
yp
(coolant)
. ^
Contenance
'yp - ( f l . c a l o p . )
dm3(l)
"
2 Pass
4 Pass
max. Durchsatz
Druckabfall
Druckabfall
max. Durchsatz
Pressure drop1
max. flow Pressure drop
=^ max. flow
Quantit passe max., Perte de pression Quantit passe max. Perte de pression
^-fM^>i^^'^''^
. bar
0.11
0,11
0,15
0,33
0,33
0.40
0 30
0,30
0,38
0,38
0,38
0,38
0,38
0,39
0,10
0,11
0,14
0,32
0,32
0 39
0,30
0,29
0,37
0,37
0,37
0 37
0.37
0,37
Vs-y, i.'--^ ,m^/h

0,38 ,:'
'1,37
0,76 ,
' 2,74
0,76 :"" ' 2 , 7 4
1.78 tf?:.'i6,41
2,38 C : , 7 ' 8,56
2,98 ' ''.3''0,71

5,09
6,48
6,48
8,33
12,03
17,56
23,17
29,64
0,38
0,76
0,76
1,78
2,38
2,97
5,09
6,48
6,48
8,33
12,04
17,56
23,17
25,54
-,-
"";j8,32
V : , 23,32
' ' "^'23,32
7"^ 30,00
- 43,32
" * ' - ! ' 63,22
'83,40
106,70
1,38
2,75
- /
2,75
'
6,42
8,56
10,71
. , , 18,32
- .- 23,34
23,34
30,00
43,33
63,22
--83,40
.^ _. .106,80
jr.'J-wp -^-iSf-i-ycT
'
_. -
-_
<r
l/s
0,19
0,38
0,38
0,89
1,19
1.49
2,31
3,24
3,24
4,17
6,0?
8,78
11,58
14,83
0,19
0,38
0,38
0,89
1.89
1,49
2,31
3,24
3,24
4,17
6,02
8,78
11.58
14,83
-.- *
f i
bar
0,22
0,22
0,28
0,64
0,64
0,78
0,59
0,58
0.74
0,74
0,74
0,74.
0,74
0,75
0,22
0,22
0,28
0.64
0,64
0,78
0,59
0,58
0,74
0,74
0,74
0,74
0,74
0,75
m^/h
'0,68
1,37
1,37
3,20
4,28
5,35
8,33
11,66
11,66
15,00
21,66
31,61
41,70
53,40
0,69
1,38
1,37
3,21
4,28
5,35
8,33
11,66
11,66
15,00
21,66
31.61
41,70
_ 53,40
w *<,j;;aW^Jf*^(JjjjpRpy,iF^^>w1}^:H-.,J" ^^#-^ f - J f t T " ^ .
RefroFdts'seurs d'fiuile
-xiiZ. 4 i-ft. ( li~a',5 :K
,.; t.' X O i l coolers
.-T^^4^^ ^Th^lh^
- ...
ltemp
">.;
(Bntntt)
max Durchsatz [m^/h] und Druckabfall [b?rj bei Kuhlmodium-Eintritts-ZAustntts-Temperatur
Oiltemo
m;-x flow [m~^/h] and pressure drop [bar] with coolant inlet and outlet temperature
(inlet) Quantit passe max. [m-^/h] et perte de pression [bar] temp, entre / sortie fluide caloporteur
Temp.'
d'huile
' ^ I S ' C / 25C
27X / 32X * '
*: 50X/60C
.." 4 0 C / 5 0 C " ^ ' ,
(entre) "
bar
l/s m^/h bar .,
;' l/s m^/h bar f" . l/s m^/h bar
1'. l/s m %
'_' '
0,02
0,06
2,2
80
100
0,42
0,58
1,5
2,1
0,13
0,25
2,2
3.6
0,04
0,1
0,19
0,39
ÔW501(B)
2,6
80 '
100
'0,53
0,75
1,9
2,7
0,24
0,45
7 0,81 . 2,9
1,33 4,8
0,08
0,2
.0,25 0.9 - 0.06 '^ 0,14 0,5 0,03

0,50 1,8 0,22 " 0,11 1,4 0.13
OW781(B)
4,5
80
100
0,75
1,06
2,7
3,8
0,13
0,25
OW941(B)
5,4
80
100
Standard 4- oder 6-Pass

2- oder 3-Pass
DB-200-2
0,G1
1,00
'1,14
,1,81
4,1
6,5
0,04
0.1
"1,53 5.5
1,00 3,6 0,28
1,42* 5,1* 0 , 1 * '
2,44 8,8
0,09
0,22
Standard 4 or 6 pass
2 or 3 pass
0,7 0,03
1.4 0,12
0.4
1,0
OW401 (B)
0.11
0,28
0,36
0,69
1,3 0,03
2.5 0,12
0,19
0,55
0,7
2,0
0,01
0,07
0,47
0,92
1,7 0,07
3,3 0,22
0,28
0.72
1,0 0,02
2.6 0.15
Standard 4 ou 6 pass
2 OU 3 pass
15
r
6 Betrieb
6 Operation
6 Fonctionnement
Der Druckbehlter muss regelmig

von einem Sachkundigen geprft werden. Die Prfintervalle sind von Kltemittel, Khlmedium und Betriebsweise
abhngig. Sie mssen vom Betreiber
festgelegt werden.
The pressure vessel must be regularly

inspected by authorized personnel.
The inspection intervals depend on
refrigerant, cooling agent and mode of
operation. They must be determined
by the end user.
Le reservoir sous pression doit tre

control rgulirement par une personne
comptente. La priodicit des contrles
depend du fluide frigorigne, du fluide
caloporteur et du mode d'exploitation. Elle
doit tre dtermine par l'exploitant.
6.1 Stillstand
6.1 Standstill
6.1 Arret
Sjra Attention - Corrosion!

l | I While not operating, the coolant
side of the pressure vessel must
be protected against corrosion.
i This applies especially with
aggressive coolants, e.g. brack''fA ish water, water containing solids
'^ or liable to bio-fouling.
Attention - Corrosion !
Durant les periodes d'arrt, le cot
fluide caloporteur du reservoir sous
Vpression doit tre proteg centre la
r--' ,
-.Vcorrosion.
Notamment pour les fluides caloporteurs agressifs comme par ex. eau
saumtre, eau charge en corps
solides OU soumise au bio-fouling.
Decommissioning
Mise hors service
\ Verschmutzungen des Khlmediumi Rohrsystems sollten vor lngeren

' Stillstandszeiten entfernt werden. Dies
gilt insbesondere fr organische
' Stoffe und Muschelbefall. Siehe hierzu
Kapitel 6.2.
Any contamination of the coolant pipe

system should be removed before any
long periods of non-operation. This
applies especially in cases of organic
materials and shell deposits. See
chapter 6.2.
Les depots dans le Systeme tubulaire du

fluide caloporteur doivent tre retires
avant les arrets prolonges. Sont concerns avant tout les depots organiques et
les formations de coquillages. Voir pour
cela chapitre 6.2.
Bei aggressiven Khlmedien muss

das Rohrsystem gereinigt und anschlieend getrocknet oder mit sauberem Wasser befllt werden.
With aggressive or corrosive coolants,

the pipe system must be cleaned and
dried or filled with clean water.
Pour les fluides caloporteurs agressifs, il

est recommand de nettoyer le Systeme
tubulaire puis de le scher ou de le remplir avec de I'eau propre.
6.2 Wartung
6.2 Maintenance
6.2 Maintenance
Die Druckbehlter sind fr wartungsfreien Betrieb ausgelegt Dennoch ist

es ratsam, die Rohre des Khlmediums regelmig zu reinigen. Ihre Verschmutzung ist direkt von der Qualitt
des verwendeten Khlmediums abhngig.
The pressure vessels are designed for

maintenance-free operation. However,
it is advisable to clean the coolant
pipes regularly. The contamination
depends directly on the quality of the
coolant used.
Les reservoirs sous pression sont dimensionns pour un service sans entretien. II
est cependant recommand de nettoyer
rgulirement les tubes du fluide caloporteur. L'encrassement est en rapport direct
avec la qualit du fluide caloporteur utilise.
Achtung - Korrosion!
Whrend des Stillstands die
Khimedium-Seite des
Druckbehiters vor Korrosion
schtzen!
Insbesondere bei aggressiven
Khlmedien z. B. Brackwasser,
Feststoff-belastetes oder BioFouling-anflliges Wasser
Auer Betrieb nehmen
In den Rohren knnen sich gelste

oder feste Bestandteile des Khlmediums absetzen wie Kalk, Sand,
Algen oder Schlick.
Organische Stoffe z. B. Algen knnen Lokalelemente bilden. Daraus
kann im schlimmsten Fall Lochfra
entstehen.
Bei Meerwasser-Khlung knnen
auch innen auf die Rohre Muscheln
aufwachsen.
16
Materials in the coolant in dissolved or solid form can be

deposited in the pipes, e.g. lime,
sand, algae or silt
Organic materials such as algae
can build up local elements. In the
worst case this can lead to pitting.
With seawater cooling, shells can
also grow on the insides of the
pipes.
Des composants solides ou dissous

dans le fluide caloporteur teis que
chaux, sable, algues ou limon peuvent
se dposer sur les tubes.
Des substances organiques telles que
les algues peuvent constituer des elements locaux. Dans le cas extreme,
une corrosion localise peut apparaTtre
(piqres).
Avec le refroidissement par eau de
mer, des coquillages peuvent se dvelopper l'intrieur des tubes.
DB-200-2
^
Reinigung
IQ Warnung!
Khlmedium kann unter berdruck stehen!
Schwere Verletzungen mglich.
I Zuerst auf drucklosen Zustand
bringen!
1 ^
Z J
^ 1
I3
Cleaning
Nettoyage
mc% Warning!
^LijJ Coolant can be under pressure!
Â Severe injuries possible.
& ^ Release the pressure first!
mm Avertissement!
Fluide caioporteur peut tre en sur
i i pression !
j Graves blessures possibles.
~J D'abord vacuer la pression !
Warnung!
Khlmedium kann Haut und
Augen vertzen!
i Warning!
^' Coolant can burn the skin and
eyes!
Tysn Avertissement!
^ i A Fluide caioporteur peut provoquer
5. ' - des brlures aux yeux et la peau !
L Porter des lunettes de protection !
Die geeignete Reinigungsmethode

und die Reinigungs-Intervalle sind von
Art und Grad der Verschmutzung
abhngig.
Suitable cleaning methods and cleaning intervals depend on the type and
extent of contamination.
La mthode de nettoyage appropriee et

la periodicite du nettoyage dependent du
type et du degr d'encrassement.
W T Achtung!
l, I I Reinigungsmittel darf das
k i J Rohrmaterial nicht angreifen!
1 ^ Attention!
I a Gleaning agents must not react
s2 with the pipe material!
pi~s Attention !
I f j L e produit de nettoyage ne doit pas
J attaquer le matriau des tubes !
Weiche Ablagerungen
z. B. Algen, Schlick:
Vorsichtig abbrsten. Ggf
Reinigungsmittel verwenden.
Anschlieend gut durchsplen.
Soft deposits
such as algae or .silt:
Brush off carefully. Use cleaning
agent if necessary.
Rinse well afterwards.
Feste Belge z. B. Kalk, Muscheln:

Splen mit geeignetem Lsungsmittel.
Solid coatings such as lime or

shells:
Rinse with suitable solvent.
Depots mous
comme par ex. algues, li mon:
Retirer prudemment la brosse.
Utiliser ventuellement un produit de
nettoyage.
Rincer ensuite abondamment.
Sehr wirkungsvoll und Umwelt

freundlich ist die Verwendung von
Zitronensure:
- Mit einer wssrigen Lsung aus
25-prozentiger Zitronensure
befllen.
- 24 Stunden einwirken lassen.
Gelegentliches Umpumpen verstrkt die Wirkung.
- Anschlieend die gelsten Stoffe
aus dem Druckbehlter heraussplen.
Verunreinigtes Khtmedium Umwelt
gerecht entsorgen!
DB-200-2
The use of citric acid is very effective and environmentally friendly:

- nil with a 25% citric acid / water
solution.
- Allow to react for 24 hours.
Occasional circulation by pumping
increases the effect
- Afterwards, flush the released
materials out of the pressure vessel.
Dispose of contaminated coolant

properly!
Depots solides
comme par ex. chaux, coquillages:
Rincer avec un produit dissolvant
appropri.
L'emploi d'acide citrique est tres efficace et non polluant:
- Remplir avec une solution aqueuse
compose de 25% d'acide citrique.
- Laisser agir pendant 24 heures. Un
transvasement occasionnel renforce
l'efficacit.
- Rincer le reservoir sous pression
pour en retirer les composants dissous.
Le fluide caioporteur contamin devra
tre recycle de faôn adapte !
17
r
6.3 Kltemittel absaugen
6.3 Extracting refrigerant
6.3 Retrait du fluide frigorigne
bei Reparatureingriffen oder AuerBetriebnahme der Verflssiger
for repair work at the condensers or

when decommissioning them
en vue d'une reparation ou de la mise

hors service des condenseurs
rjTJ Achtung - Einfriergefahr!

f. I J Es muss sichergestellt sein,
dass die Siedetemperatur des
Kltemittels zu jedem Zeitpunkt
ausreichend oberhalb dem
Gefrierpunkt des Khlmediums
liegt.
Dazu unbedingt folgende
Hinweise beachten:
Kltemittel mglichst flssig absaugen
oder abpumpen. Siedetemperatur des
Kltemittels berwachen. Sie darf beispielsweise beim Khlmedium Wasser
nicht unter 4C fallen.
" i " Attention - Danger of freezing!

'^ I * It is necessary to ensure that the
. "* boiling point of the refrigerant is
^- _5 at all times high enough above
r '^1 the freezing point of the coolant.
;.,3 -J For this reason it is essential to
-J. observe the following points:
"nrj Attention - Risque de prise en

' I *i glace !
^ II faut s'assurer que la temperature
(; a d'txjilition du fluide frigorigne est
^ ^' toujours suffisamment plus leve
'_" que le point de gel du fluide calo^. ? porteur.
' Tenir toujours compte des points
- . ' - suivants:
Si possible, aspirer ou pomper le fluide
frigorigne en phase liquide. Surveiller la
temperature d'bullition du fluide frigorigne. Si le fluide caloporteur est de l'eau,
elle ne doit pas chuter en-dessous de
4C.
Wird das Kltemittel gasfrmig abgesaugt, muss zustzlich der Kreislauf

des Khlmediums in Betrieb sein. Die
Temperatur des Khlmediums muss
am Absaugort berwacht und ggf. entsprechend erhht werden.
\
Kltemittel Umwelt gerecht entsorgen.
Pump-off refrigerant as a liquid if possible. Monitor the boiling point of the

refrigerant. With water as a coolant,
for example, it may not fall below 4C.
If the refrigerant is extracted as a gas,
the coolant circuit must also be in
operation. The temperature of the
coolant must be monitored where the
refrigerant is sucked off and increased
if necessary.
Dispose of the refrigerant properly.
Si le fluide frigorigne est aspire en

phase gazeuse, le circuit du fluide caloporteur doit tre en service. La temperature du fluide caloporteur doit tre surveille au point d'aspiration et rehaussee
le cas chant.
Recycler le fluide frigorigne de fagon
adapte.
DB-200-2
s^
6.4 l ablassen
6.4 Draining the oil
6.4 Vider I'huile
bei Reparatureingriffen oder auer

Betrieb nehmen der lkhler
for repair work at the oil coolers or

when decommissioning them
en vue d'une reparation ou de la mise

hors service des refroidisseurs d'huile
Anlage ausschalten. Wenn mglich

Kltemittel- und l-Leitungen vor und
hinter dem lkhler absperren.
Switch off the plant. If possible shut

off the refrigerant pipes and oil pipes
before and behind the oil cooler.
Mettre I'installation hors de service. Si

possible, fermer les tuyaus de fluide frigorigne et de I'huile devant et derrire le
refroidisseur d'huile.
" A ' Warnung!

^-A lkijhler kann unter Druck stehen!
^%j Schwere Verletzungen mglich.
1,';V lkhler zuerst auf drucklosen
t'\fi Zustand bringen!
J Schutzbrille tragen!
OT Warning!
l-~i Oil cooler can be under
pressure!
Severe burns possible.
oil cooler!
^ i | ^ Avertissement!
Le refroidisseur d'huile peut-tre
sous pression !
Retirer la pression sur le refroidisseur d'huile premirement!
S l Porter des lunettes de protection !
Wanne bereit halten. l am lablassVentil ablassen (Pos. 9 Seite 11). l

auffangen und Umwelt gerecht entsorgen.
Take an oil pan ready. Drain the oil at

the oil drain valve (pos. 9 page 11).
Collect the oil and dispose of it properly.
Tenir prte une gouttire I'huile. Vider

I'huile la vanne de vidage d'huile (pos. 9
page 11). Recueillir I'huile et recycler la
de fagon adapte.
Les hulles chiores unses sont des
dchets pollus.
6.5 Auer Betrieb nehmen
6.5 Decommissioning
6.5 IVIise hors service
Im Schadensfall muss der Druckbehlter vom Kltesystem getrennt und

ausgetauscht werden. Dazu Kltemittel absaugen und Khlmedium entfernen.
In the case of damage the pressure

vessel must be disconnected from the
refrigeration system and replaced. For
this purpose the refrigerant and the
coolant must be removed.
En cas de sinistre, le reservoir sous pression doit tre dconnect du Systeme frigorifique et remplac. Pour cel, il faut
retirer le fluide frigorigne et le fluide
caloporteur.
Verunreinigte Stoffe Umwelt gerecht

entsorgen!
Dispose of contaminated fluids properly!

Chlorinated oil is pollutive waste
Les fluides contamins devront tre

recycle de fafon adapte.
Les hulles chiores unses sont des
dchets pollus.
DB-200-2
19
l-N-T-E-R-N-A
T- I O N A L
I-N-T-E-R-N-A-T-I-O-N-A-
Ersatzteilliste
Spare Parts
List
Liste des pieces

dtaches
Flssigkeitssammler,
Verflssiger,
iabscheider
Liquid Receiver,
Condenser,
Oil Separators
Reservoirs de liquide,
Condenseurs,
Sparateurs d'huile
-wi^::^^L^.
;MS
K033N{B)
bis/to/a
(5/99-)
K4803T(B)
F62H
(1/99-)
bis / to /
F3202N
FS35
(1/98-)
bis / to /
FS3102
f
0A1854(A)
OA4088(A)
OA9011(A)
OA14011(A)
,.r
Wichtige Hinweise fr
den Benutzer
Important recommendatlons for the user
Recommendation


L'xcution conforme d'une commande de

pieces detachees ne peut tre faite qu'avec
Bestellbeispiei:
Exemple de commande:
Stck
Quantity
Quantit
Benennung
Description
Designation
Typ
Type
Type
Art.-Nr.
Ref. nr.
Rf. no.
Fabrikationsnummer*
Serial number*
No. de fabrication*
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
F062H
366 000-13
1 561 0001
* Sind bei einem Teil nderungsstufen

vermerkt, mu netsen der Art.-Nummer
I Werden keine Angaben gemacht, wird
1 die neueste Teileausfhrung geliefert.
* In cases where stages of modification

be supplied.
* S'il s'agit d'une piece ayant subie des

^ Flssigkeitssammler, Verflssiger
und labscheider die lter als 10
Jahre sind, werden in dieser Liste
nicht mehr aufgefhrt.
Liquid Receiver, Condenser and Oil

Separators older than 10 years are
not entered any more in this list.
Reservoirs de liquide, Condenseurs et

Sparateurs d'huile qui sont plus ges
que 10 ans ne figurent plus dans la
liste.
Legende
Legend
Legende
Artikel-Nr. in Klammem;
nicht mehr lieferbar
Ref. no. In brackets:

no more available

non plus livrable
nicht mehr lieferbar, aber austauschbar durch nchste ndeaingsstufe
non plus livrable, mais interchangeable par le prochain no. de modification
inclusno. 17 et 23
Pos.-Nr. in Klammern:

not shown in tfie exploded view

No. continue la page suivante
^5rf
seewasserbestndig
sea-water resistant
resistant Peau de mer
(123 456-78)
(123 456-78) i
[incl. 17,23]
- 17,23
(23)
^
Die Tabelle zeigt die in dieser Ersatzteilliste enthaltenen Typen:
The table shows the types used in the

spare part list:
Le tableau indique les types utilises dans

cette liste de pieces dtaches:
Wassergekhlte Verflssiger
Water-cooled Condensers
Condenseurs eau
Liegende Flssigkeitssammler
Liquid Receivers
Reservoirs de liquide
Stehende Flssigkeitssammler
Liquid Receivers
Reservoirs de liquide
K 033N
K 073H
K123H
K 203H
K 283H
K 373H
K 573H/4
K813H/4
K1053H/4
K1353T/4
K 573H/2
K813H/2
K1053H/2
K1353T/2
K1973T/4
K2923T/4
K1973T/2
K 2923T/2
K 3803T/4
K 4803T/4
K 3803T/2
K 4803T/2
F062H
F102H
F152H
F192T
F202H
F252H
F302H
F392T
F402H
F 552T
F562N
F732N
F 902N
F1052T
F1202N
F1602N
F2202N
F 3202N
FS 35
FS 55
FS 75
FS 102
FS 152
FS 125
FS 202
FS 252
FS 302
FS 402
FS 562
FS 732
FS 902
FS 1122
FS 1602
FS 2202
FS 3102
K 033N(B)
K 073H(B)
K123H(B)
K 203H(B)
K 283H(B)
K 373H(B)
K 573H(B)/4
K813H(B)/4
K1053H(B)/4
K1353T(B)/4
K 573H(B)/2
K813H(B)/2
K1053H(B)/2
K1353T(B)/2
K1973T(B)/4
K2923T{B)/4
K1973T(B)/2
K 2923T(B)/2
K 3803T(B)/4
K 4803T/(B)4
K 3803T{B)/2
K 4803T(B)/2
labscheider
Oil separators
Sparateurs d'huile
OA 1854(A)
OA 4088(A)
OA 9011 (A)
OA 14011(A)
I>_
1_
100
co
o
a> i _ 0)
O)
o
c c m
o 0) 7^
"O o CO
V0) c c CO
o o o
> O O i^
Liegende Flssigkeitssammler
Horizontal liquid receiver
Reservoir de liquide horizontaux
F062H .. F3202N
g:
Stehende Flssigkeitssammler
Vertical liquid receiver
Reservoir de liquide verticaux
r-^
I (
FS35 .. FS3102
r3vmiimxs^sr'eirMti!KWuni:!i^K
Olabscheider
Oil separators
Seperateurs d'huile
OA1854(A)..OA14011(A)
Wm'r
Pos.
Typ
Stck
Item
Type
Qty.
Type
Piece
No.
K033N
K073H
K123H
nderung
Descnption
Designation
305 050-02
Umlenl<deckel,
3C5 050-03
Anschluss-Seite
End cover, connection side
Couvercle, deflecteur
cote raccordement
305 054 02
k23HB
K283HB
K373HB
305 073 01
l<573H/4
K813H/4
K1053H/4
K1353T/4
305 0C2-08
K 573HB/4 ' '

K813HB/4
K1053HB/4
K1353TB/4
305 060-01
K 573H/2
K813H/2
K1053H/2
K1352T/2
3C5 062-05
K 573HB/2 '
K813HB/2 '
K1053HB/2
K1353TB/2
K1973T/4
K 2923T/4
K 1973TB/4
K 2923TB/4
K1973T/2
K 2923T/2
K"i973TB/2
K 2923TB/2
K 3803T/4
K 4803T/4
K 3803T5,2
K 4803TB,2
Benennung
305 054-01
'KVOSH
K283H
K373H
K 3803T/2
K 4803T/2
Art Nr
Ref nr
Modifi- from model
cation mois/anne/no
K 033NB
K 073HB
K123HB
K3'803TB/4
K 4803TB/4
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
305 075-01
305069-04^
305 064-01
35 064^Z|-j-;305 066-01
305 066-02
305 067-01
305 0fj7-02
0115
0115H
0168
O 168 H
0 224
O 224 H
0 224
0 224 H
' 0 310
O310H
O 310
0 31OH
0 380
O 330 H
O 380
O 380
^
Pos. Typ
r
.
' .
".-
_ltem Type
No.
Type
K033N
K073H
K123H
Stck
nderung
ab Baujahr '-, Art Nr

Mon7Jahr/Nr.
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- from model '* Ret nr

cation month/year/no. 1
Descnption
Piece
Modifi- parbrdu modele Ref no

Designation
372 104-03
Dichtung Anschluss-Seite
Gasket, connection side
Joint, cot raccordement
'
'-'
0107x4
(-)
K033NB
K 073HB
K 123HB
K 203H
K283H
K373H
372 106-02
0159x4
372 110-04
0 215x4
372 110-03
"0 215x4
K 203HB
K 283HB
K 373 IB
K 573H/4
K813H/4
K1053H/4
K 1353T/4
K 573HB/4
K813HB/4
K1053HB/4
K1353TB/4
k 573H/2
KB13H/2
K1053H/2
K 1352T/2
K 573HB/2
K813HB/2
K1053HB/2
K 1353TB/2
K1973T/4
K 2923T/4
372 112-04
0 299 X 4
1 ^;
372 112-03
0 299 X 4
372 129-01
0 369 X 4
372 130-01
0 369 X 4
305 072-01
K1973TB/4
K 2923TB/4
'kl973V2~"!
K2923T/2
-^-^ '
-'"
'<'
K1973TB/2 '' ,
K 2923TB/2 ,,
K 3803T/4
K 4803T/4
K 3803TB/4
K 4803TB/4
K'3803T/2
K 4803T 2
K3803TD/2
K 4803TB/2
3
K033N
K073H
K123H
K033NB ? :. " ^
K 073HB
,}, ^
K123HB ',, "._ .
K203HB""'"'"^"''''^'
10
.,
i"
K203H
K283H
K373H
K283HB -
K373HB
-";, ,
1'
305 052-03
Umlenkdeckel, Umlenkseite
End cover, return cover side
Couvercle, dflecteur
cot inversion du circuit
0115
'iisV)
305 055-01
0168
305 056-01" "-
iesl-Y "-* '"'-.
g
Pos.
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Ref. nr,
Descnption
Stck
nderung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Piece
Modifi- parbrdumodae Rf. no. : I

Designation
K 573H/4
K813H/4
K 1053H/4
K 1353T/4
305 062-10
Umlenkdeckel, Umlenkseite
End cover, return cover side
Couvercle, dflecteur
cote inversion du circuit
0 216
K573HB/4
K813HB/4
K1053HB/4
K1353TB/4
305 062-09
0 216 H
305 062-10
0 216
K.'573HB/27/
K813HB/2
K 1053HB/2
K1353TB/2
305 062-09
D216M
K1973T/4
K 2923T/4
305 069 06
O 310
K'1973TB/4
305 069-05
O310(-)
K1973T/2
K 2923T/2
305 069-06
0 310
K1973TB/2
K2923TB/2
305'o9-o'5
"310H
K 3803T/4
K 4803T/4
305 070-01
K3803TB/4
K4803TB/4
305 070-02
"380 (")
K 3B03T/2
K 4803T/2
305 070-01
'0 380
K 3803TB/2
K 4803TB/2
305 070-02
O 380 H
K813H/2
K 1053H/2
K 1352T/2
K 2923TB/4
0 380
11
r
Pos.
Item
,No.
4
Typ
Type
"
'
''
, .
Type ' _^,
Stck" nderung
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr.
Qty. ^ Modifi- from model

, ;'-
K033N
K073H
K123H
Piece
Benennung
Aii'Mr *~ ' "
Oescnption
Ref. nr
Designation
Modifi- partirdu modele Rf, no.

Dictitung, Umlenkseite
Gasket, return cover side
Joint.cte inversion du circuit
372 105-03
0107x4
(-)
K033NB
K 073HB
K 123HB
K203H
K283H
K 373H
372 107-02
0159
372 111-03
0216
i"
372 113 03
0 298
372 130 01
0 368
361 329-03
K 203HB
K 283HB
K 373HB
K 573H/4
K813H/4
K 1053H/4
K 1353T/4
K 573HB/4
K813HB/4
K1053HB/4
K 1353TB/4
K573H
K813H/2
K 1053H/2
K 1352T/2
K 573H8/2
K813HB/2
K1053HB/2
K1353TB/2
K1973T/4
K2923T/4 '
K1973TB/4
K 2923TB/4
K1973T/2
K2923T/2 ; ! :;
'<
'
'-'-
K1973TB/2 "
K 2923TB/2
K 3803T/4
K 4803T/4
K 3803TB/4
K 4803TB/4
K 3803T/2
K 4803T/2
K 3803TB/2
K 4803TB/2
5
K 033N(B)
K 073H(B)
K'I'23H(B)'"^^"^'^"'
. J.- ' a-;
. r - l V u N S , 0 1 2 L , V2"
361 329-07
K283H(B) ""'""'
K 373H(B)
361 329-08
1 V - ' ' 2 U N F , 0 22L,''/8"
K 573H(B)
K813H(B)
361 329-09
1 V - 1 2 U N F , 0 28L,1 Vg"
"*"""
'K'l53H(B):g':gJ* .;::;;: :i';R

K 1353T(B):g!|ijAS
12
V - 1 6 U N F , 01OL,
K203H"(B)"
38l'329^06
Eckventil, kpl. (Austritt)

Valve complete (Outlet)
Robinet complet (Sortie)
' " ' (Standard)
\'';*':;-/: ' ' ' \ - f S ' '

i.a3E;;;v
736f32-lo'!:WS
1"-14UNS, 0 16L,
. i'V-1'2 NF, 0 35 L, 1 % "
Pos. Typ
Stuck
nderung
ab Baufahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr. -^
Art Nr
Benennung
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

cation month/year/no_
Ref nr
Descnption
No.""
Type
Piece
Modifi- apartirdurrxxlele Ref no

Designation
k)
^ '
-*
Edcventil, kpl. (Austritt)

361 319-02 77 Robinet complet (Sortie)
(Standard)
361 319-03
K1973T(B)
361329-14
K2923T(B)
K 3803T(B)
K 4803T(B)
2V4"-12UNS,0 4 2 L , 1 % "
| t W 5 4 j _ 0 54,2
V /
NW 76, 0 76, 3 Vg"
oder/or/ou
K123HB
K 203HB
K283HB
361 329 08
zweites Eckventil (/austritt)

second Valve (Outlet)
K 373HB
K 573HB
K813HB
361 329 09
1 V - 1 2 U N F 0 28L 1 \ "
K1053HB
K1353TB
361 329-10
1 V - U N F , 0 35 L. 1 3'B"
K1973TB
361 329 '4
2''4" 12 UNS, 0 42 L 1 V
K 2923TB
361 319 C2
NW54 0 54 2V8"
K 3803TB
K 4803TB
361 319 03
NW76 0 76 3 ^ B "
1 V4"-12UNF0 22L
Oder/or/ou
K123HB
K 203HB
K 283HB
366 002-10
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
K 373HB
K573HB
K813HB
366 002-13
1 % " - 1 2 U N F i L , 1 Vg"
K1053HB
K 1353TB
366 002-14
1 %"-UNF 0 35 L, 1 \ "
1 V4"-12UNF0 22L,
K i 973TB""
366 002-16
2V4"-12UN,0 42L,1 V
K 2923TB
366 004-07
0 54, 2 Vg' - St.
'f
366'004-Yl
0 76 3 Vg" - St
K38d3TB
K4803TB
SW.^'Vii'JTtiB"^
oder/or/ou
K123HB
K 203HB
K283HB
366 003-10
Winkel Rohranschluss
Bend tube connection
Raccord angulaire
K 373HB""
K 573HB
K813HB
366 003-13
l ' ' , " 12UNFL 1 a"
K"1053HB'
366 003-14
1 V - U N F O 35 L 1 -^V
1 ^'4'-12UNF 0 i 2 L
K1353TB
K1973TB
k 2923TB"
K 3803TB
K4803TB
13
Î3g;
(C
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty.

No.
Type
Piece
' ,
Art.Nr. -"
Benennung
Ref. nr. "
,'
Descnptjon
Modifi- part'r du modele Rf.no.';?,

Designation
ab Baujahr ' "

Mon./Jahr/Nr:
F062H
F 1 0 2 H ' ' "^r" ' " " .
F152H"
361 329-03
Eckventil, kpl. (Austritt)

36'r329-06T?*'' Robinet complet (Sortie)
V-16UNF, 01OL, V
361 329-07
1"-14UNS, 0 1 6 L , % "
361 329 08
1 V4"-12UNF0 22L
361 329-09
1 V - 1 2 U N F , 0 2 8 U 1 Vg"
361 329-10
1 %'^2 UNF7"35 M
F192T
F202H
F252H
F302H
F392T
.,,.,
-'
F402H
F552T
F562N
F732N
F1202N
F1602N
361 329-14
F 2202N
F 3202N
361 319-02
NW 54. 0 54 , 2 Vg"
PS 35 (FS32)
FS 55 (FS52)
361 329-03
V - 1 6 U N F , 0 1OL,
FS 75
FS102
FS125
361 329-06 "" "
V-14"UNS, 0 12 L, Vg"
FS 152(FS82)
361 329-07
FS562
FS732
JV"V7"-12TJNF,^ 2 2 ' L , ' % "
1 V-12UNF, 0 28L,1 Vg"
361 329-10 '
^^ *
---=M:pr_.-'î
'
; i V-12UNF, 0 3 5 L , 1 % "
361 329-14
2V4"-12UNS, 0 42L,1
'
"'
"361 "319-02"""'"
K 033N(B)
K 073H(B)
^ .,-
....
^-. . . ^,~c
K 203H(B)
K 283H(B)
K 373H(8)
1 w / 54T054] 2 Vg"-'
-. ^^
372 200-01
K123H(B)
-e-
Dichtung Eckventil (Austritt)

0 14,3 x 1,5 Teflon
Gasket, liquid valve (Outlet)
Joint, robinet de liquide
_ L--r--'r.r
. 1 " " " ^ " -' ^
M
\(Sortie)' 019,1
X 1,5 vTeflon
372~200-02''^^;* _. c
372 200-02
019,1 X 1,5 Teflon
372 200-03 "
0 25,4x1,5 Teflon T
K1053H(B)
K1353T(B)
1/2"
K 1973T(B)
1/2
- , * .
^ j
372 200-04
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
372 200-04;"^^""
0 38;"1 X 1 5 Teflon
372 200-06
0 50 8 X 1,5 Teflon
- - , , -
K 2923T(B)
'l/2
372 301-03
K 3803T(B)
K 4803T(B)
1/2
372 301-05
1"
- .'
K573H{B)''
K 813H(B)
F062H
r-14UNS, 0 16L,
361 329-09
FS1122
FS 1602
FS 2202
FS3102
2V4"-12UNS,0 4 2 L , 1 % '
'361 b29-08'"'''"
FS902
'
372200-01'^"'-
F102H
372 200-02
F152H
F192T
372200-02'
'
14
*j '^z* ^>L^ S"^
FS 202 ' ' ' ' ' "

FS252
FS302
FS402
F902N
F1052T
"76T 6i1x 1 "" "^ * ' -i

0 1 0 5 x 0 86x1
'0"l4,3x 1,5Teflon'"' ' "'
019,1 X 1,5 Teflon
' 0 19,1 xT,5 Teflon- "
'"
S!Eismsms^sssm!3^
Pos. Typ
Item
,No.
Type
-.
Type " "', , ^-
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung - Mon7Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Description
Piece

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
F202H
F252H
F302H
F392T
372 200-03
Dichtung Eckventil (Austritt)

0 25,4x1,5 Teflon
Gasket, liquid valve (Outlet)
Joint, robinet de liquide (Sortie)
5
F'402H
372 200-04
D 38 1 X 1 5 Te'lon
F902N
F1052T
372 200 04
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
F1202N
F1602N
372 200 06
~0 50,8 X 1,5 Teilon
F2202N
F 3202N
372 301 03
0 76x061 X 1
FS 35 (FS32)
FS 55 (FS32)
372 200-01
0 14,3x1,5 Teflon
FS75 (FS82)
FS102
FS 125
FS152
372 200-02
019,1 X 1,5 Teflon
FS202
FS252
FS302
FS125
372 200-03
0 25,4x1,5 Teflon
FS562
FS732
FS902
372 200-04
0 38,1 x 1,5 Teflon
FS1122'
FS1602
372 200-06
0 50,8 X 1,5 Teflon
FS 2202
FS3102
372 301-03
0 76 x 0 61 X 1 .
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
F5S2T
F562N
F732N
(7)
F062H
bis/to/
F 3202N
'o
FS35
bisAo/
FS3102
K 033N(B)
K 073H(B)
K 123H(B)
*^
>;'-,= j ; "'.r ' . t - r . ~ _ ; ^ 4
- - _
375 014-01
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
-5
'
K 283H(B)
K 373H(B)
K573H(B)
Kai3H(B)
K1053H(B)
K1353T(B)
1/2
K1973T(B)
1/2-
K 2923T(B)
1/2
375 014-04
GFK
K'3803T(B)
1/2-
375 014-05
'GFK
375 014-01
GFK
375 014-03
' - ^ ^
- , 3 ^ .
'
GFK
Schutzkappe (Austritt)
Protecting cap (Outlet)
Chapeau de protection (Sortie)
-5
K 203H(B)
GFK',",r .'< f" V'
-- , '
- .
- "
"
K 4803T{B)
F062H
F102H
F152H
F202H
F252H
F302H
15
^
Typ
Stck
nderung
Type
Qty.
Modifi- from model " '

Type
Piece
Modifi- partirdunxxlele Rf. no.

F402H
F552T
F562N
F732N
F902N
F1052T
F1202N
F1602N
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art. Nr. ;
. I
Benennung
Ref. nr. - - /
Description
.'S
375 014-03
f
Designation
GFK
Schutzkappe (Austntt)
Protecting cap (Outlet)
Chapeau de protection (Sortie)
S
i-."iSf*asia..ffr
F2202
F 3202N
375 014-05
GFK
FS 35 (FS32)
FS 55 (FS52)
FS 75 (FS82)
FS 102
FS 125
FS 152
FS 202
FS 252
FS 302
FS 402
375 014-01
GFK
FS 562 ' " ' '

FS 732
FS 902 " - ,
FS 1122 "
FS 1602
375 014-03
'GFK
FS 2202
FS 3102
375 014-05
GFK
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K1973T(B)
1/2
366 202-01
Verschluss-Mutter
Sealing nut
^/ig"- 20 UNF
K 2923T(B)
K 3803T(B)
K 4803T(B)
1/2
366 110-02
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
^5
'V-ISNPTF.Sr
366 202-01
Verschluss-Mutter
Sealing nut
^/le'- 20 UNF
F062H
F102H
F152H
F192T
F202H
F252H
F302H
F392T
F402H
F552T
F562N
F732N
F902N
F1052T
F1202N
F1602N
16
(7
^
Pos
Typ
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung . Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Item
Typp
Qty.
Modifi- from model

cataon montti/year/no.
Re* nr
Descnption
No
Type
Piece

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
10
F2202
F 3202N
366 110-02
Verschluss Stopfen
Plug
V/-18NPTFSt
FS35
FS55
FS75
FS102
FS152
FS125
FS202
FS252
FS302
FS402
FS562
FS732
FS 902
FS1122
FS1602
FS22021'-""""'''
FS3102
366 202-01
Verschluss-Mutter
^/IK"- 20 UNF
K 2923T(B)
~ '
K 2923T(B)
"j^
" / _ ' '
1/2
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
VA18NPTF St
372 303-02
Dichtung
0 75 x 0 60 x 2
372 303-03
SZiaire
:105x085x2
372 303-02
0 75 X 0 60 x 2
372 303-02
'75x'60x'2'~r'
365 321-03
-
1/2
-V-
"
'
- ^
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
365'321-05 "
F2202N
F 3202N
365 321-03
FS 2202
FS3102
365 321-03"'"'"
K 2923T{B)
1/2
K 3803T(B)'
K 4803T(B)
' 1/2 '
"r*- s - ^ " ^
""'
K 2923T(B)
, i ^ ^ , - ^ ^
F2202N
F 3202N
' 4/8
4
-^
'
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Birde de serrage
110x110
-140x140
iwxiw
..
"
-^
110x110
j ' l O x l l O ' " "
367 "i 2*1-02
'380 130-5 l y - ' "
'- - " '
' 0 76 (3 Vg") St.'-
J3V(2V)St7-"'..
380 029-54
4/8
K3803T(B)''"'^'~"r
K4803T(B).
"
FS 2202
FS3102
367 121-03 "

367 121-02
54 (2 Vg") St.
0 54 (2 Vg") St.
367 121-02
FS2202" " "~

FS3102 " -
14
' 'l/2
**'
""."'
F 2202N
F 3202N
13
K 3803T(B)
K 4803T(B)
12
366ii-02
^:._-__
F 2202N
F 3202N
11
" '1 '
1/2
K 3803T(B)"
K4803T(B)
FS2202
FS3102
Sealing nut
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 16 x 55, DIN 931 -5 6

verz
^^^^^^ -g^,^ ^
verz.
380 029-54
M 16x55, DIN 931-5.6

verz.
38 029-54 ' '
' M 16x55, DIN 9'31-5"6' .

,verz.
berwurfmutter
Flare nut
Capuchon
17
^m
Pos.
Typ - " . / ^ "t
Item
(C
^ ^
, r
Type
Stck' nde- ab Baujahr' " ' Art Nr. .

rung
Mon7Jahr/Nr.
,- '
Qty.
Ref. nr.'
.
,, ' -,".
'
^
^
Piece Modifi- partirdu modele Ref.no.
'
"
No,'
'
'^
f- ~
Type
j.
' " ' '
15
"
'
"
K 2923T(B)
4/8
'K38b3f(B)
K4803T(B)
4/8
F2202N
F 3202N
FS3102
16
*'-
'"V
'^
- "
,-
Description
:^"'
,*,
^'" A
f.'"".".* Designation
f^
Sechskantscfi raube
Hexagon screw
315 901-02"^"^' Vis hexagonale
5
380 029-53
380 029-53
< 'i
'FS'2202 "' 7
"'i
. . _ Benennung
""
; , ' " ; " " , < , " '
380 029-53
M 16x100, DIN 931-5 6

j M ^YfM 16Vl60,-5.6
M ' I X 100, DIN 931-5.6
JM 16 X 1 0 , ' D I N 9 3 1 - 5 . 6 " ' ,
"
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
372 200-04
F62H
F102H
F152H
F192T
372 200-04
F'202H
372 200-04
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
^ l l K l X 1 Ts Teflon "-'^"''"'
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
F252H
F302H
F 392T
F402H
F552T
F562N
F732N
F902N
F1052T
F1202N
F1602N
F 2202N
F 3202N
i.
17
18
FS 35 (FS32)
FS 55 (FS52)
FS 75 (FS82)
FS 125
FS102
FS152
FS202
372 005-03
0-Ring
0-Ring
0 28,3x1,78
372 20-04
Dichtrinq
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon'
FS252
FS302
FS402
FS562
FS902
FS1122
FS 1602
FS2202
FS3102
372 200-04
K 033N(B)
bis/to/
K 4803T(B)
361 816-02
F062H " ' " "

F102H .F152H '
.
F192T-
1*
361 816-02
041 8 x 9 7
F202H
F252H
F302H
F392T
F402H
F552T
F562N
F732N
F902N
F1052T
F1202N
F1602N
F 2202N
F 3202N
361 816-02
0 41,8x9,7
'
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
Schauglas 0 27
Sight glass
Voyant
0 41,8x9,7
^
Pos
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type
-'.._"; ,
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref. nr.
Description
Piece
Modifi- partrdutTrdle Rf. no. , '

cation mois/anne/no
FS35(FS32)
,\
-' /'
FS55(FS52)- . T / ' .
FS75(FS82) "'^-;
FS 125
' .".
'
Designation
1 '
1 ,
361 815^3 . - Schauglas 0 22

Sight glass
Voyant
1 Vg'-IS UNEF
Aussengewinde
Exernal thread
Filet intneure
FS102
FS152
FS202
361 816-02
0 41,8 X 9,7
FS 252
FS302
FS402
FS562
FS902
FS 1122
FS1602
FS 2202
FS3102
361 816-02
0 41,8x9,7
18
19
20
K 033N(B)
K 073H(B)
K123H(B)
Schauglasdeckel
Sight glass cover
Bride de voyant
366 110-09
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
V-18NPTF
366 203-01 - '
Verschluss-Mtter' '^'T'^'
Sealing nut
' . .
Bouchon d'obturation
1 V-IÛNF
F062H
K 203H(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
'
F102H
bis / to /
F 3202N
-^ ~- ^ . , ^
- -
v>
.^
. ..1.*^, ,-jvt^^
--.,
1. _
<
-^
_ 'S=~
oder/or/ou
FS 55
bis / to /
FS3102
" '
366 005-0 r"""' Adapter fr Sicherheitsventil " 'Vj'- 'NPTF ' "
Adapter for safety valve - _^ , (Innengewinde)
Adapteur pour soupape de ' -"' ' (Internal thread)
sOret ,
i " ^ ,
(Filet Interieure)
' i "
Oder/or/ou
1
**
366 005-04
V i
_,-' . _-^ .^^
..
oder/or/ou
366 005-03
1"
>
G Vz" . (Innengewinde)
'": (Internaf thread) (Filet Interieure)
-- ' .-
,''/2"-14NPTF - :
(Aussengewinde)
(External thread)
(Filet intneure) '
oder/or/ou
'
"
**
"'
1 '
* J
366 005-02
-,
21
K 033N(B)
K 073H(B)
K123H(B)
372 200-02
K203H(B)
K283H(B)
372200-03 .
K 373H(B)
K 573H(B)
K813H(B)
372 200-04
G Va" '
(/^ssengewinde)
(External thread)
(Filet intneure)
0 19,1 X 1,5 Teflon
Dichtung fr Rohranschluss
Eintritt / Inlet / Entre
Joint ring pipe connection
Joint annulaire raccord de tube
aspiration
?0 25,4^)i:'f;5T=flcm:Scffi^
:Bntritt/:Inlet/ Entree::tlj
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
Eintritt / Inlet / Entree
19
"ms^sxusTKsisEia-uaasaameKaaBsm
Pos. Typ
^ ,"
Item Type
No.
'"
_.
Type
'
'-
^ -
.,
nde- ab Baujahr
rung , MonVJahr/Nr.
Art f^Jr
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Description
Piece
Modifi- partirdunncxlle Rf no
Designation
f f
K1053H(B)
K1353T(B) , .
K1973f(B)
K 2923T(B)
K 3803T(B)
K 4803T(B)
372 303-03 '
F062H
372 200 02
019,1 x 1,5 Teflon

F12H
F152H
F192T
F202H
F252H
F302H
F392T
372 200-03
0 25,4x1,5 Teflon
Eintritt/Inlet/Entree
F402H
F552T
372 200-04
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon

F562N
F732N
F902N
F1052T
3/2 200^06"
0 50,8 x"l,5 Teflon ' """'

Eintntt / Inlet / Entree
F1202N
F1602N
372 303-02
' 75 X 0 61 X 2
F 2202N
F 3202N
372 303-03
0105x086x2
Eintritt/Inlet/Entre
FS 35
FS 55
FS 75
372 200-03 '
0 25,4 X 1,5, Teflon " -"^

Eintritt/Inlet/Entre
"
-"
0
1
' T 0 5 x ' 0 86x"2

Eintntt/Inlet/Entree
372~20-04'"
0 38,1x1,5, Teflon , " .

372 200-06
0 50,8x1,5 Teflon
372 303-02""
0 7 5 x 0 6 f x 2 ' ' .' "

Eintritt/Inlet/Eritre -
372 303-03
0105x85x2
"
^ 1
FS 562
FS 732
FS 902
"
0 50,8 X 1 5 Teflon
Joint ring pipe connection
Joint annulaire raccord de tube
0
75 X 0 61 X 2
aspiration
.^-.
FS 202
FS 252
FS 302
FS 402
372 303-02
-'
.^
FS 125
FS 1122
FS 1602
372 200-06
....
FS 1 0 2 "
FS 152
22
Stck
/-
-
"
.'-'.-.
'-
FS 2202
FS 3102
K 033N(B)
K 073H{B)
366 000-13
Rohranschluss, Standard
Pipe connection
1"-14UNS, I 2 L V 2 "
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
1"-14UNS, 0 1 6 L % "
Winkel-Rohranschluss
Blend tube connection
Raccord angulaire
r-14UNS, 0 1.2 LV2"

Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Rcbinel complet
r-14UNS, I 2 L V 2 ' '

cxier/or/ou
1
366 000-14
oder/or/ou
1
366 001-15
oder/or/ou
1
T
20
361 321-10
Pes.
Typ
Item Type
No
Type
K 123H(B)
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Description
Modifi- apartirduriKXJele Ref no

cation mois'annee/no
Designation
Stuck
nderung
Qty
Modifi- from model

cation montti'year/no
Piece
1
ab B<.u|ahr
Mon Jphr'Nr
Pipe connection
r-14UNS, 0 1 6 L V
Raccord angulaire
1"-14UNS 0 1 6 L V
361 321-05
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1"-14UNS 0 1 6 L V
366 000-01
Pipe connection
1 V4--12UNF, 0 1 6 L % "
Eintritt/lnlet/Entre
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
1 V4"-12UNF, 0 2 2 L V
Eintr|tt/lnlet/Entre
Raccord angulaire
1 V/-12UNF, 0 1 6 L V
Eintritt/lnlet/Entre
361 321-06
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1 V4"-12UNF, 0 2 2 L % "
366 0 0 0 - 0 3 '
Pipe connection
. Raccord de tube aspiration
366 000-14
oder/or/ou
366 001-16
oder/or/ou
K 203H(B)
oder/or/ou
366 000-03
oder/or/ou
366 001-01
oder/or/ou
K 283H(B)
' 1 V4M2IJNF, 0 2 2 L V
oder/or/ou
366 o'-C"'
Rohranschluss '"
Pipe connection
i V4"-12 UNF,0 28 L 1 Vg'

oder/or/ou
366 001 - 0 3 '
Raccord angulaire
- ; i V4--12UNF, 0 22L
odeoor/ou
K 373H(B)
361 321-06
Eckventil komplett '; " ' ' -'

Valve complete . " . "
'
Robinet complet
366 000-06
Pipe connection
1 3//-i2UNF,0 2 8 L 1 Vg"
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
1%"-12UNF,035L1%"
Raccord angulaire
1 V-12UNF,0 28L1 Vfi"

Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1 3/4"-UNF, 0 28 L 1 Vg"
-1 V4"-12 UNF, 0 2 2 LVS"

oder/or/ou
366 000-07
oder/or/ou
366 001-06
oder/or/ou
361 321-07
21
Pos. Typ
Stck
nderung
Item Type
Qty.
Modifi- {rom model ,

No.
Type .
'
.-
Piece
K 573H(B)
K813H(B)
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art Nr.
-"' '
Descnption
Ref. nr.
* r
Modifi- partirdu modele Rf. no.

Benennung
/ ' Designation
1 ,
366 000-07 ; Hohranschluss, Standard

Pipe connection
Raccor de tube aspiration
366'0t-b7_T-''' ^nkeT-RcThranschluss
Raccord angulaire
1 ^/^"-UNF, 0 35 L 1 %'
oder/or/ou
1 V-12UNi=,0 3 5 L 1 % "
oder/or/ou
1
36l''32t<)8~'"
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
366 000-22
Rohranschlu , Standard
Pipe connection
Raccor de tube aspiration
2 V4''-12 UN, 0 42 L, S t
361 321-12
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
2V4"-12UN, 0 4 2 L , 1 % "
365 321-6'3"'7
Rohranschluss \
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
0 54 2V8"-St. ' - 'Bntritt/Inlet/Entree ;." '
K1053H(B)
K 1353T(B)
At-
1 V - 1 2 U N F 0 35L1
f -lAi
odef/or/ou '
1
K1973T(B)
K 2923T(B)
'1
, -
. . v i - - . . . * .
-
oder/or/ou
f
361 3 1 9 - 0 2 " "
'
- ' ' ^
'
K 3803T(B)
K 4803T(B)
365 321-05
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
'
"
'
'
'
' 0 54 2V8"-'St. . "'- ' 1

'Eintritt/Inlet/Entree 0 76 3 Vg" - St.
oder/or/ou
1
F 062H
l~
^ A., W ~
361 319-03
1
.
i^
366 000-13"^
S'^
iJ5-I.*n.-U-!->
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
Pipe connection
0 76 L 3 Vg" - St.
r - 1 4 N S , 0 1 2 L V '~^
Eintritt / Inlet / Entree ^' ^:
. . . 5Ji^
'l.^^..^'%,i'^j-'^z^
oder/or/ou
1
366 000-14
'
'
'i
'
"_
"
;
F102H
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
de tube t'sniration
' ',-J ""' ' '*'' ^~='^ Raccord
J, J, _^viaA '*,sa.ir- .Av.*eoder/or/ou
r-UUNS, 0 1 6 L % "
Eintritt / Inlet / Entree' , ^ - j
366*001-15 " - ' Winkel-Rohranschluss

Blend tube conncrtion
- ,
^ i
Raccord angulajre
oder/or/ou
1"-KUNS,012L,Va",
Eintritt /Jniet / Entree; ,.:
36r321-1Q""'^" Eckventil komplett

Valve complete
"*- ^ l l Robinet complet
366 000-01
Pipe connection
1"-UtJNS,''012L^^"''* ^;
Eintritt/Inlet/.Entree
. ",
'2ust^'cu..:::;s...f<.!...dw.jj(u-^d^1~
1 V4"-12UNF, 0 1 6 L V
oder/or/ou
366 000-03
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
1 V4"-12UNF, 0 22L
Raccord angulaire
1 V/-12UNF, 0 1 6 L % "
oder/or/ou
366 001-01
T
22
^^^^:^^^^
Pos. Typ
Stck
Item Type
No.
'
Type . -:
.- Qty.
- - j . Piece
nde- ab Baujahir
Monyjahr/Nr
rung
Art Nr
Benennung
Modifi- from model

cation montfi/year/no
Ref nr
Description
Modifi- partir du modele Ref no.

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
oder/or/ou
1
F152H
361 321-06
366 000-03
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1 V4"-12UNF0
2 2 L V
Pipe connection
< Raccord de tube aspiration
1 V4"-12UNF,0
2 2 L V
oder/or/ou
1
366 000-04 "
Rohranscfiluss
Pipe connection
"l V 4 " - 1 2 N F , 0 2 8 L 1 Vg"
oder'or/ou
1
366 001-03
1 V4--12UNF, 0
2 2 L V
oder'or/ou
1
F192T
Winkel-Rohranschlss
Bend tube connection Raccord angulaire
^
361 321-06
366 001-01
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
''' ' '

' ~
1 V4M2UNF. 0 2 2 L V
Winkel-Rohranschl.,Standard
Raccord angulaire
1 V4M2UNFI6LV
Raccord angulaire
1 V4"-12UNF, 0 2 2 L V
1 V4M2UNF, 0 2 2 L V
oder/or/ou [i*^1
366 001-03
oder/or/ou
F202H
F252H
F302H
361 321-06
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
3660-'3"""
Pipe connection
, 1 V4M2UNF, 0 2 Z L V
oder/or/ou
1
366 000-04 '
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
1 V4"-12 UNF 0 28 L1 Vg"

"Eintntt/Inlet/Entree
Oder/or/ou
1
366 001-03"'"
Winkel-Rohranschluss"
Raccord angulaire
1 V4M2UNF22LV
"1 V4"-12 UNF 0 22 L V

oder/or/ou
F392T
3G1 321-06
Eckventil komplett ' .'

Valve complete - Robinet complet ' \^
366 001-03
Winkel-Rohranschl.,Standard
Raccord angulaire
1 V4"-12UNF0 2 2 L % "
oder/or/ou
1
366 001-01
Raccord angulaire
1 '/4"-12UNF0
1 6 L V
oder/or/ou
1
361 321-06
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1 V4"-I2UNF0
2 2 L V
23
^
Pos.
Typ - -"
,.;.; .
Item Type
, .
slck
nderung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Piece
Modifi- parbr du modele Rf. no, "'.-ty _. Designation

No.'
Type
', , ,-
F402H
F552T
ab Baujahr^
"Art Nr."
Mon7Jahr/Nr. --
Ref. nr.
366 000-06
Benennung
Description
Pipe connection
1 3/ 12 UNF, 0 28 L 1 Vg"
Eintritt / Inlet'/Entree
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube aspirafion
1 3/^".i2 UNF, 0 35 L 1
Bend tube corinection
Raccord angulaire
1 3/"12 UNF 0 28 L 1 Vo"

^^^^^ , ,13// ^^^^
oder/or/ou
1
366 000-07
,oder/or/ou -;"
1
366 001-06
^'
oder'or/ou
1
F562N '
"
F732N
;
361 321-07
\ v^ r i ^
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1 3/^". 12 UNF, 0 28 L 1 Vg"

3^,^^ ^ ,^,3^ / ^^jre
. 1^ t
' - { '
366 000-23'""," Rohranschluss, Standard

Pipe connection .
'2''/i'-12'uN S S L I ^ "
Eintntt/Inlet/Entree '
, , , , - . "'
oder/or/ou
[t . ^ fn,.% n-i-,e*Ji-
{ '
1
366 000-22" ' ' Rohranschluss''' " " ,

Pipe connection - ;
'Raccord de tube aspiration
-i
".
TV4"-12 UN. 42T. 1 % "

'gintntt/Inlet/Entree
oder/or/ou
~ *
-,
y-^^
" ' . " i S ^
- . _ ..
Raccord angulaire
..... .
- ~
. '
"
oder/or/ou
1
, .
F902N
F1052T
J J.
JU.il. >-
361 321-14
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
2 V4"-12 UN, 0 35 L 1 % "

Eintritt/Inlet/Entree '
366 000-22
Pipe connection
2 V4"-12 UN 0 42 L 1 % "
Bntritt / Inlet'/Entree
=-
- oder/or/ou - v "
Raccord angulaire
oder/or/ou
1
F1202N ' " '

F1602N
' "
^ -
S^r*-
361 321-12
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
2 V4"-12 UN, 0 42 L 1
g^j^^^, / ,^,3, ^ ^ j ^ ^ e
365 321-03 ,.
Pipe connexion
0 54 2 Vo" - St
Bntritt/Inlet/Entree^
361 3 1 9 - 0 2 " ^
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
0 54 2 V" - St ' "

365 321-05
Pipe connection
0 76 3 Vo" - St
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
0 76 3 Vg" - St
^ ^ t ^ j ^ , ,^|g,, ,^^6
oder/or/ou
"i
F 2202IN
F 3202N
- ' ---.- - -
oder/or/ou
1
T
24
361 319-03
'%m.
Pos. Typ
Stck
Ande- ab Baujahr
rung
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Item Type
Qty
Molfi- from model

Ref nr
Description
Piece
Modifi- parSr du modele Ref no

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
,Na
Type
FS35
FS55
FS75
FS102
366 000-01
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
&
3 -'
C -
4 . - ^
l^^-!c-M-i.
1 V 4 M 2 U N R I 6 L , St.
IS-O-.-''
T . w n ^ S * r
-^
oder/or/ou
1
361 329-08
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
i 1/4"-! 2 UNF, 0 22 L % "
366 000-03
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
1 V4"-12UNF0 22L, St.
-FS'l25
FS152
oder/or/ou
FS22
PS2C2
361 329-08
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1 V4M2UNF, 0 2 2 L V
366 000-05
P'pe connection
Raccord de tube
1 V - 1 2 U N F , 0 22L.,St
361 329 09
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete.
. ' ..-, '
Robinet complet .' ,' ' {- !<
1V-12UNF, a s L i V s "
366 000-06
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
1 %"-12UNF, 0 28L, St.
361 329-09
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
1%-12UNF, 0 28L1V8"
366 obo 23"
Rohranschluss, Standard -',_

Pipe connection " _' J"?l .
Raccord de tube
_ .
2V4"-i2UN, 0 35L,St
oder'or/ou
1
w a r 1.
FS302
FS402
1 w
oder/or/ou
1
FS 562
' ",
" -
n-=r
_ ..
oder/or/ou
' i"
\
FS902
361 321-12 ' 7 Eckventil komplett

Valve complete
Robinet complet -,~
- . -two.^_ Jlw..-jc
366 000-22
Au'i
2V4*-12UN, 0 42^, 1 % "

St *rî)
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
2V4"-12UN, 0 42L,St.
2V4M2UN, 0 421-,1%"
oder/or/ou ' v
FS 1122
FS1602
361 321-12
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
365 321-03 7 '
Pipe connection > Raccord de tube ,
\ ~
" ' 0 5 4 (2VB")-St.
i t i , . j . . ^ - ' - 3 j
oder/or/ou
1
FS 2202
FS3102
T
361 319-02 ' " "
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
365 321-05
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
oder/or/ou
^ --
' - " ' - 0 54 (2V8")-St
'- -
0 76 (sVgl-St.
- - 25
^
Pos.
Typ
r
Stck
nderung
'
Qty
Modifi- from model

"t/
Piece
Modifi- partrdu modele Bf. no. "' > .

'
Item Type ^
Type
Na
_ _
'
'
"
"
' '
ab Baujahr
MonVJahr/Nr.
'
.._.
_A^
\ t
Ref. nr.
- --
'-'
-. i A r =. .*
~ ^"'
"
'
"
-^^s-^rr
" " - " ^
- T-^
-* A
-'-
Designation
Eckventil komplett
Valve complete
Robinet complet
0 76 L (SVg") - St.
see'ooo-io
Rohranschluss
Pipe corinection
Raccor de tube ispiration
V-ieuNR^'ioL
1"-14UNS, 0 16L
366 000-01
1 \i' 12 UNF, 0 16 L
366 000-02
1 ' V - i a UNF, 0 18 L'
3G6 000 03
1 V4" 12 UNF, 0 22 L
366 000-04
1 '/4"-12NR0 28L
366 000 05
1 ^4" 12 UNF, 0 22 L
366 000 06
1 ^4"12NF,0 2aL ' .
3C6 000 07
. 1 ^ 4" 12 UNF, 0 35 L
366 000 08
1%"12UNF, '42L
Ibo 000 ?3
2 ' 4' 12 UN, 0 35 L
366 000-2?
2 ' v i a UN, 0 42 L
366 001-16
Raccord angulaire
366 001-01
u
366 001-03
'
- '
"'-'- -
--"^-
w . ^ , v - *
T:^:
'"WK"
":'"' . ' " '
F1202N
F1602N
367121-03 V
--'
26
1 V - 1 2 U N F , 0 35L
'1 V - 1 2 U N F , 0 42L
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Bridge de serrage
112x112
140X140
112x112
-M40X140"'; "~'';~'r
? -
\'-_,
.'-''1
' - ^ :'', -
,',',- -
367 121-03 '

367 121-02
""f= '-'',:-,
il.^/4''-12 UNF, ' 2 8 ' L ' _
366'001-10"'*'
K 3803T(B) "7-" '

K 4803T(B) : '
FS2202 .
FS3102 '
1 V - 1 2 U N F , 0 22L
3"66'o'i-oe"'."
"-.1 . ,
367 121-02
F S i l 2 2 " ~ '*"''"
FS 1602
; r - 1 4 UNS, 0 161
I'l V4':12'UNF,'28L . .
366 001-05
K1973T(B)
K 2923T(B)
F2202N ' " - - - ; - ' "

F 3202N
V - 1 6 U N F , 0 1OL
1 V4"-12 UNF, 0 22 L
366 001-07
-_r^nr--s-r-="--.'"
23
, -
Mi1::S'^%.iL. ..s.
^r 1
-' - -
* 1 V4"-12 UNF, 0 18 L
366 0 0 t 5 4
*
1 V4''-12UNF, 0 16L
366 00l'-02 " "
.'
r-14UNSr1*2L
366 000 14
366 001-12
__
>^
-','-'
Descnption
361 319-03
Vee ooio 13
"
A_J^
'
'
Benennung
Art. Nr. -'
367 121-02
112x112
367"l2i<)3^'^:V
"14oViT''''' T^-''. '
''
' ' ..: - r
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Description
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Ref. no.

cation mois/anne/no
"No.
24
"ype
' ;,
, _.-
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Designation
K1973T(B)
K 2923T(B)
380 029-54
K3803T(B)
K4803T(B)
380 130-51
F1202N
F1602N
380 029-54
M 1 6 x 5 5 , DIN 931-5.6
F'2202N
380 130-51
M 1 8 x 7 0 DIN 933-5 6
FS 1122
FS 1602
380 029-54
N/116X55 DIN 931-5 6
FS 2202
FS3102
380 130-51
M 1 8 x 7 0 , DIN 933-5 6
K1973T(B)
K 2923T(B)
K 3803T(B)
K 4803T(B)
366 110-01
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 1 6 x 5 5 , DIN 931-5.6
t l 1 1 8 x 7 0 , DINF33-5 6
F 3202N
(25)
F1202N
F1602N
F2202N
F 3202N
FS1122
FS1602
FS 2202
FS 3102
Stopfen
Plug
Bouchon
0
1
366 110-01
V e ' - M N P T F St
366 110-01
V g ' - U N P T F . St.
0
1
0
26
381 101-55
'38l'll-6'"'
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
Ecrou six pans
27
381 101-59
K 033N(B)
K 073H(B)
327 301-01
K123H
K 203H
K 283H
K373H
327 3 0 ' l - 0 4 '
K573H
K813H
K1053H
K123HB
K 203HB
K 283HB
K 373HB
K573HB
K813HB
K1053HB
K1353TB
K1973TB
:,h C- -( , - _ . - -
DIN 934-8, M 8
" D I N 934-8, M I O
"'"
DIN 934-8, M 12
381 101-57
V g ' - U N P T F . St.
D I N 934-8, M 16
- .
Befestigungsschienensatz
u n t e n komplett mit Schrauben
Fixing rails complete below,
with screws
Rails de fixation complet, en
dessous avec vis
250 X 45 X 6
320 X 50 X 8
^ j - .
327 301-05
360 X 50 X 8
327 3 0 1 - 0 6 '
360x130x8
324 025-07
U 65 X 50 X 5 X 320
324 025-05
U 70 X /O X 6 X 360
324 025-02
"K'2923TB
324 025-03
K 3803TB
K 4803TB
324 025-06
U 80 X 200 X 6 x 420
F062H
327 301-01
250 X 45 X 8
F102H
F152H
F192T
F202H
327 301-04
320 X 50 X 8
^ j - ^ c - , t t
U 70x140x6x360
'U 8 0 x 1 6 0 x 6 x 4 2 0
27
^
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
No.
Type
iBBEacatBiKCTMWCTTBUBiwgairMWW
/
'
Ref. nr.
^ -^
Descnption
partirdu modele Rf.'no.'"-'* ''"

mois/annee/no.
Designation
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Piece
F252H
F302H
F392T
F402H
F562N
F732N
F902N
ab'saujahr"'" '7
Monyjahr/Nr. ,.
F 5 5 2 T -. -., .
F 1 0 5 2 T " . - ',"
327 301-05
F1202N
F1602N
, /
- . - . , . -
-'
u n t e n komplett mit Schrauben
Fixing rails complete below,
with screws
Rails de fixation complet, en
dessous avec vis
327 301-06
'
0.
-J-
_.
j'-Vb-^- " T *
-'*
'-
K 033N{B)
K073H(B)
'""i
o b e n komplett mit Schrauben
Fixing rails complete above,
with screw
Rails de fixation complet au
dessous avec vis
327 301-12
1 '
327.301-01 ,^ ,.
K123H(B)
K203H{B) " ' '" "">.

K 283H(B)
.- ' ,
K373H(B) ' '. .
K 573H(B)
K813H{B)
K 1053H(B)
K1353T(B)
K 1973T(B)
K 2923T(B)
360 X 50 x 8
360 X130 X 8
7 . , - - ' - . " -{j
F3102N
28
Benennung
nderung
cation
; F 2 2 0 2 N
ArtNr,' T T"
stck"
200x45x6
2KC- 0,5.2.. 2FC- 3.2
Lt
250 x 45 X 6
2HL-1.2..2FL-2.2'
327 301-20
200 X 70 X 8
2KC- 0,5.2 .. 2FC- 3.2
327 301-21
240 X 90 X 8
2EC- 2 . 2 . . 2CC- 4.2
327 301-09
320 X 60 X 8
2EL- 2.2 .. 2CL- 4.2
--
"tr-
327"301-2V^-""'
1240x90x8' ""
' ,2EC-2.2..2CC-4.2
327 301-22
240x80x8
4FC-3.2..4CC-6.2 -
327 301-09
320 x 60 X 8
2 E L - 2 . 2 4N-20.2
327 301-22
240 X 80 x 8
4FC- 3.2 .. 4CC- 6.2
327 301-10
360 X 55 X 8
4Z- 5.2 .. 6F- 50.2
oder/or/ou
K1353T(B)
K1973T(B)
K 2923T(B)
K 3803T{B)
K 4803T(B)
F62H
F102H
ca.5 / 97
1
.
327 301-20
'200 X 70 X 8
7', " '
o b e n komplett mit Schrauben 2KC-1.2._2FC-3.2
Rxing rails complete above,
240 X 9 0 X 8 -5 " '''' with screw
,2EC- 2 . 2 . . 4CC- 6.2
Rails de fixation complet au
dessous avec vis
'320x60x8
-'i'- '
2EL- 2.2 2N- 7.2
.
F152H
F202H
1417x365x88
44H-30.2 ..66F-100.2
327 301-21
240 x 90 X 8
2EC- 2.2 .. 2CC- 6.2
327 301-22
240 X 80 X 8
4FC- 3.2 .. 4CC- 6.2
327 301-09
320 X 60 X 8
2EL- 2.2 .. 4N- 20.2
:'::;!i";;l
"327^01-23^S''U
Mim-
:F392T..:vi;;:;ji;:vri::-
Mm
:.::ir;:iE.s:;::iz.''
327 301-21
327 301-09 /
'^
28
Rahmen Tandem
Frame Tandem
Chassis Tandem
.
1
326 057-01
M:M
- ' - - - ' -
240 X 80 X 8 ' -'

22EC-4.2..44CC-12.2
-iiiiliîilS
.^^mS,2mm.
_. -
'
g
Pos. Typ
Item Type
No. _ Type .'
- - i - .5-
F252H
F302H
F402H
32
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Description

cation mois/annee'no
Designation
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr'Nr
Stck
nderung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Piece
1
327 301-22
240 X 80 X 8
4FC- 3.2 .. 4CC- 6.2
327 301-10
360 X 55 X 8
4Z- 5.2 .. 6F- 50.2
F552T
F1052T
1/2
327 301-10
360 X 55 X 8
FS 10^..FS 3102
1/2
347 403-02
Minimal - Maximalstandsanzeige (Rotalock)

Minimum - maximum level indicator
Indication de niveau minimum - maximum
[incl. 16]
F562T
bis/to/
F3102N
33
K 573H(B)
t)is/to/
K 4803T(B)
366 120-01
Stopfen
Plug
Bouchon
(34)
FS 102 ...FS 3102
366 005-06
Adapterstck mit Innengewinde Vi" NPT zum Einbau

optoelektronischer Sensoren
Adapter with inner thread Vi" NPT for fitting of
opto-electronic sensors
Piece d'adaptation avec filetage Interieur Vi" NPT pour le
montage de sondes opto-lectroniques
(35)
K 033N(B)
bis/to/
K 4803T(B)
361 824-01
Schauglas 0 27 Bausatz
Sight glass complete
Voyant complet
[incl. 36,37,38,39,40,41]
-(43)
1/2
361 824 01
SchugTas 0 27 Bauiatz""'" . " ' " ' "

Sight glass complete -' "
Voyant complet
.',".--'
pncl. 36,37,38,39,40,41]
-(43) '
F 062H
bis/to/a
F3102N
FS32
FS35
FS52
FS55
FS82
FS75
FS125
361 823-01
Schauglas 0 22 Bausatz
Voyant complet
[incl. 36,37,38,39,40,41]
-(43)
FS102
FS152
1?
361 824 01
Schaugtas 0 27 Bausatz
Voyant complet
T '
[incl. 36,37,38,39,40,411
'
-(43)
-. , . : < , - . . . - , .
'
FS202
t5is/to/
FS3102
36
R 1/ "
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T{B)
361 816-02
Schauglas 0 27
Sight glass
Voyant
-(35)
F062H
bis J to / a
F3-'.02N
1/2
361 816-02
Schaugl.is 0 27
Sight glass
Voyant
-(35)
361 815-03
Schauglas 0 22
Sight glass
Voyant
-(35)
I'
361 816-02
Schauglas 0 27
Sight glass ,
Voyant
.
-(35)
V -
FS32
FS35
FS52
FS55
FS82
FS75
FS125
F S ' " i a 2 " '
FS152
FS 202
bls/to/ '
FS3102,
"
-'-
--
'" '
ji
_.
-_
- . _
"""
';
-"
'
'^
,
'
->
--
---
29
M'iwimaaMEiWfWiiTiKMaiaraoj^^
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty.
No.
Type
Piece
37
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
F062H
bis/to/a
F3102N
FS32
PS 35
PS 52
PS 55
FS82
PS 75
PS 125
PS 1 0 2 "
PS 152
'
Art Nr
Benennung
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Descnption
Modifi- partirdunxxlle
Ref no
Designation
372 200-04
Dichtring
Joint ring
Bague d'etancheite
-(35)
0 38,1 x 1,5 Teflon
1/2
372 200-04
Dichtnng
Joint nng
Bague d etancheite
-(35)
0 38 1 x 1 5 Teflon
372 005-03
0-Ring
0 - Ring
Joint Torique
*{35)
ab Baujahr
Mon7Jahr/Nr.
"i/2'
"
372'200-04'7'7
0 28,3x1,78
Dichtring
-,--..-
Joint nng
'
'
Bague d'etancheite
PS 202
bis/to/
PS 3102
38
' ' ""
' . -
1/2
,
_^
i _
berwurfmutter
Flare nut
Capuchon de vanne
-(35)
366 304-02
berwur'mutter
Flare nut
Capuchon de vanne
'
PS 102
PS 152
^ ^" *
"1/2"
366 304-02
PS 202
bis/to/
PS 3102
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
F062H '
bis/to/
F3102N
~
""'
'"
.iii
32
35
52
55
82
75
125
ps'ici"" '"'"737
PS 152
PS 202
t)is/to/
PS 3102
'""1/2'
"""i'"'
1/2
(320 909-03) J
ca. 05/01
'
"
"
"
324 937-01
"
ca 05/01
"
'
(320 goi'-sT;"'
324 937-01,. '
> -
'
'-
"
.
','
^1/2
1/2'
' 'J.7
2
* ^^^\
berwurfmutter
Flare nut
Capuchon de vanne
-(35)
Lochblech fr Schauglas 0 27
Perforated plate for sight glass
Tle perfore pour voyant
- (35)
j ^
Lochblech fr Schauglas 0 2 7 ' '

Tle perforee pour voyant
-(35)
- % j - ,
__ _
i-.c-v-^ - " ^ - >
"(320'9q9-3T[ "'
ca.'05/01
324 937-01""
Lochblcch fr Schauglas 0 2 7 . -; " r r ^ , j ; :

,-^ '-^
Perforated plate for sight glass '^ , ' . ' V ? I T ' ] ! - f / ' 'C/-""
Tle perforee pour voyant
' .' "> ;'.- "" ' ' ^''
> '" .*. ',
/ ^-'"-.-' f " -
*-"
(35)
^. .1
,^^^'-
. ' , ; , ' " , "'^-
- , , : "*'*
,-,"'7'
-;J*/-
-rt"-, ~ ' - " ?i.^-
^1
-
'
. '
"
'
- .
'
. -
'
*:;
^ "^
Lochblech fr Schauglas 0 22
Tle perfore pour voyant
-(35)
30
T-'
320 909-02
.,
'
"
'
366 304-02
'
<-
,<a. -
'".
K 033N{B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
-*f^
' '
F 062H
bis/to/
F3102N
39
_ -
-' " '
-t.^*
'
(1
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

c a t o n month/year/no.
PiectJ
Modifi- partirdumodle Rf. n :

'
*,\'f'.
Ite Tl Type
No
Type
(40 )
K 033N(B)
bis/to/
K 4803T(B)
ab Baujahr "
Mon /Jahr/Nr.
Art Nr.
F62H
bis/to/a
F3102N
1/2
FS 32
FS 35
FS 52
FS 55
FS 82
FS 75
FS 125
FS 102 '
FS 152
1/2
Ref nr.
F062H
bis/to/
F3102N
FS 102
FS 152
1/2
1/2
-_?
Schwimmer 0 6,5
tur Schauglas 0 2 2 , 2"^
Sight glass float
Flotteur du voyant
- (35)
375 070-01
Schwimmer 6,5
fr Schauglas 0 22 , 0 27
Sight glass float
Flotteur du voyant
-(35)
375 070-01
Schwimmer 0 6,5
fr Schauglas 0 22
Sight glass float
Flotteur du voyant
-(35)
324 203 01
-.. ,
ca. 05/01
FS 202
bis/to/
FS 3102
(42)
0 27
Distanzring 0 31 x 10 fr Schauglas 0 27
Spacer bush 0 31 x 10 for sight glass 0 27
Bague d'espacement 0 31 x 10 pour le voyant 0 27
t^'S.'
3Z4 203-01
ca. 05/01
Designation
375 070 01 ' '
324 203-01
ca. 05/01
Descnption
Schwimmer 0 6,5
fr Schauglas 0 22 , 0 27
Sight glass float
Flotteur du voyant
-(35)
1 FS 3102
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
375 070-01
FS 2 0 2 '
bis/to/a
(41)
Benennung
1 366 203-07
320 506-09
372 200-06
36S211 21
odcr'or'ou
365 211 24
365 211 22
365 211-20
J65 211-23
Distanzring 0 3 l ' x 10 fr'Schaugias 0 2 7

"
~
Distanzring 0 31 x 10 fr Schauglas 0 27
(35)
Verschluss-Mutter
Rare nut
Capuchon
Verschluss-Scheibe"
'Washer
v, ,.Rondelle
- - ' " < '
1, ,
,.,
2 V / - 1 2 UN, S W 5 0
0 54x15
'
'
Dichtnng fr 2 y 4 " l 2 ' u N " ' ' " " 5 0 , 8 ' x ' l .FTefTon '
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
SchWPinipppJ
Woldng connection
Raccora a solider
T 1/ .
'"' '
2 /4 - 12 UN x 35
"
" "
*" " "
2 V
-12UNX''K)"'
1 'M"-12UNFX50
1%--12'UNFX25,5
1 ^4"-12UNFx50
31
vag:
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
'
>
i^
No.
Type' '
(43)
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
Stck
nde- j ab Baujahr
rung
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Ref. nr
Description

Designation
'
, , , - " ' " Piece
F062H
bis/to/a
F3102N
36r 825-01
Schauglas 0 27 kpl. mit Einschweimutter 1 %'-12 UNF

Voyant complet
[ind. 35,44]
1/2
361 825-01
Schauglas 0 27 kpl mit Einschweimtter 1 \"-12

S.ght glass complete
Voyant complet
[Ind. 35,44]
361 812-01
Schauglas 0 22 kpl mit Einschweimutter 1 Va"-18 UNEF

Voyant complet
[ind. 35,44]
\/2
361 825 01
Schauglas 0 27 kpl, mit Einschweimutter 1 % ' - 1 2 UNF

Sight glass complete ,,
' ','
Voyant complet
'' , [incl. 35,44]
-,
"
,
-
FS 32
FS 35
FS 52
FS 55
FS 82
FS 75
FS 125
FS 102
FS 152.
FS 202 ;
tiis/to/
FS 3102
(44)
,. -
,-
':, :', '
'
' '
K 033N(B)
bis / to /
K 4803T(B)
F 062H' ' T . ;' ~-" .

bis/to/
F3102N
'T/2
FS 32
FS 35
FS 52
FS 55
FS 82
FS 75
FS 125
365 211-20
"^r^*.
"
'
'
365 211-20'
365 212-10
Einschwelssnippel fr Schauglas 0 27
Welding connection
Raccord souder
-(43)
. Einschwelssnippel fr Schauglas 0 27
'
.
Welding connection
Raccord souder
-(43)
Einschweissmutter fr
i 3/. -^2 UNF
\ 3 / " : 'i 2 ijNF - " '
^
1 1/ . ] Q U N E F
Schauglas 0 22
Welding connection
Raccord souder
-(43)
. FS 102
" "' - "
FS 152 - . . . '.
FS 202
' ..
bis/to/" / " ' V
FS 3102
.^- .
1/2
- '.
"
365 211-20 '
_
,_
,.
- ..
.-
" i.
Einschweissnippet fr
" - ' .V3/4*-l2UNF . < ^ - , ' "
Schauglas 0 27
, ^ ,
' ; " - "
Welding connection
'
Raccord souder
. , i.,
, ' -(43)
^^
~ : ,
- " , - ' - . _ . .
'
32
UNF
- . , - . - ' :
^
-Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
lype
Qty. "
Modifi- from model

Type
Piece

cation mois/anne/no
'No.
100
101
102
ab Baujahr
Monyjahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
Designation
OA 1854(A)
372 303-02
OA4088 (A)
37233-03'''*7 ^^^^^
Joint
OA901 i (A)
OA14011 (A)
372 303-08
0A1854(A)
365 321-03
OA4088 (A)
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
365 3 2 f : 0 5 T i ? Raccord de tube
i104
A9011 (A)
0A14011 (A)
367 204-02
0A1854(A)
367121-02
OA4088(A) V " " 7
l''
367 121-03
Dichtung
0A1854(A)
380 029-54
OA4088"(A) "'"'"" "
380 130-51
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
0A1854(A)
' O A 4 b 8 8 ' ( A ) ' ' " " " -'
l . j ; ^ . i . ^ . . ^ ^ ^.^
0149x0129x2
*104
? 0 76 (3 V7") St. ' "

: - X
0 235 x 65
DIN 2635
Gegenflansch
,1 S
"
"
.'^\ .
54 (2 Vg") SL
Vorschweissflansch
Welding neck flange
Bride souder coilerette
3*
103
0 75 x 0 61 x 2
|01O570^x2 ^ " "
110 x 110 x 26
^
ri42x152x33
104
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
104
U 16 x 55
DIN 931 5 6
? . . . . -, ' " '
M18X70
DIN 933 5 6
"
,--
104
(105) OA9011 (A)

OA14011 (A)
110
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
380 030-02
366 004-07
'
"
ir*'^ ""^^
'366"'4îT;J!'
M 20 X 75
DIN 931 5.6
Bausatz Schweissbuchse kpl.
Pipe connection complete
Raccord de tube complet
[incl. 100,101,102,103]
FL 112 x 112 / DN 50
r-i~.i/r, ; . . r , ' / n M o n
- . ^ ^ 1 ^ x 140 / DN 80
381 101-11
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
M 20
DIN 934
372 303-03
Dichtung
Joint ring
0 105 x 0 85 x 2
372303-08 *<"'
Joint annulaire
0 1 4 9 x 0 129x2
365 321-05
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
114
75 (3 Vg") St.
367204^02"
Vorschweissflansch \ "
'.
Welding neck flange
Bnde souder coilerette
0 2 3 5 x 6 5 -.
DIN 2635
142 x 142 x 33
'
OA4088 (A)
A9011'(A)
OA14011 (A)
l "
112
OA4088 (A)
367 121-03
Gegenflansch
Companion flange
Contre-bride
114
113
OA4088 (A)
380 130-51
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
114
OA4088 (A)
366 004-11
Bausatz Schweissbuchse kpl.

Pipe connection complete
Raccord de tube complet
pncl. 110,111,112,113]
FL 140 x 140 / DN 80
381 101-11
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
M 20
DIN 934
111
114
(115) OA9011 (A)

OA14011 (A)
120
OA1854(A)
___
^.^
'-'
Dichtung
Joint
, '372 301-05 : f ' ; J , .
Joint annulaire
372 301-02
,.v, .,.-,,: ;,:,,>;K,5;,*.v
A4088j;AJ7^|^t7v7
380 030-02 "^
128
ring
'
M 18x70
DIN 933 5.6
- . . 00 -r^ '
M 20x75
DIN 931 5.6
0 70 x 0 54 x 1
^vx . / i , ; - " v,',,^ H' ' -iM'sw;
0 1 0 5 x 0 8 6 x 1 .^ la-H-:
'^J^ytf^SiyS^,.,:
;.:.^ ;:*#*:, i
-i î- &H-if;;.i:;: Mk 'lSIf

33
Pos. Typ ^
, ,
Stck
nderung
ttem Type
. ,'
Qty. '
Modifi- fronfi model

cation montfi/year/no.
Piece
Modifi- apartirdumodie Rf. no. \ j .

ab Baujahr MonVJahr/Nr.
ArL Nr.,-'
Benennung
Ref. nr. -'
Descnption
No.
Type
121
0A1854
375 014-04
Schutzl<appe
Protecting cap
128
Nobis 0 42
122
0A1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
366 110-02
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
Bouchon de fernneture
*128
V" -18 NPTF St

"
124
0A1854(A)
372 303-01
OA4088"(AV'"
372 303-03 " '
Joint
ring
Jointannulaire
0 52 x 0 37 x 2
. , , - ^ ^"^ " w^-'-^^'T'"
0 105x085x2
-^.^.j
OA1 8 5 4 ( A )
365 321-14
Designation
-.
-128
125
OA4088(A) "^r-" "";
126
OA 1 8 5 4 ( A )
OA4088 (A)
^ 127
OA1 8 5 4 ( A )
0A1854(A)'"'
128
-'V
" ' 'J
1
"4"
OA4088
OA4088 (A) ~
OA1854(A)
(130) OA4088 (A)
34
' -
.-,^
"-""
'
365 321-05 '

367 121-01
367121-03 "'"^
380 027-51
^,^^ ' - T ' - v - -
"'">''
OA1854
OA4088"()
V " ^>-T^t!i''KS=*"r-Â^'~'
OAT854(A)'
129
. V
380"l30-5l"
361 319-01
- -"H .J'fllgV
-- T
,> i^
361 '319-04"''' "
0 42 (1 % ") St.
_^ ^^
"-Ve (TV.") St
- . '
Gegenflansch
Companion flange
Contre-bride
-128
80 x 80 x 20
1 A? v 14p x 33
I42xl42xjd
' l
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
128
M 12x45
DIN 931 5 6
. . Tr, ' -;
- - ^ .^,- ,
M 18x70
DIN 933 5.6 -.
Eckventil kpl. (Austritt)

[incl.120,121,122,124,125
126,127,129,130]
'
DN 40
-^
DN 40
DN 80
361 319-03
361 319-06
380 027-52
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
128
4 ..J * w r K ^
315 901-02
"Stiftschraube''"''^
381 101-09
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
Raccord de tube
128
:-^t.K^,?iî^.-i
- -" ~-i
^^ ,.^ ^
DN80
M12x80
DIN EN 24014 5.6
"
' """"'M 1 8 / ' M ' 1 6 X 1 6 0
Double-ended stud
Boulon filetee
- 128
56
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou (m) hexagonal
128
MI 6
', ,
"
'
^
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type
Oty.
Modifi- from model

No.
Type
Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Rf. n o . ' , ' ' . Designation

140
OA1854
372 200-03
Dichtring (l-Austritt)
Joint ring (Oil-Outlet)
Joint annulaire (Oil-Sortie)
OA1854A
372 200-03
Dichtnng (I-Astritt)
O 25 4 x 1,5 Teflon
OA4088
372 200-04
Dichtnng (l-Austntt)
0 38,1 x 1,5 Teflon
372 200-04
Dichtring"(l-Listritt)
Joint ring (Oil-Outict)
Joint annulaire (Oii-Sortie)
0 38,1 x 1,5 Teflon
372 301-02
Dichtung (l-Austritt)
141
0 7 0 x 0 54 x 1
372 200-06
Dichtring (Ol-Austritt)
0 50,8 x 1,5 Teflon
372 301-02
Dichtung (l-Austritt) ,J'_

'
0 70x054x1
372 200-06
Dichtring (l-Austritt) ,,
.
0 50,8 x 1,5 Teflon
361 321-06
i i/^..i2UNF, 0 22 L % "
361 314-06
Eckventil kpl (l-Austntt)

Valve complete (Oil-Outlet)
Robinet complet (Oil-Sortie)
[incl.142]
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
OA4088 A
OA9011
OA14011
OAgdll'A"
OA14011 A
-1
141
OA1854
OA1854A"
"
ca. 04/02
ca 04/02
OA4088
~-^
OA408aA "
' '7'
OA9011
OA14011
'i
1 '"
OA9011 (A)
0 A 1 4 a i 1 (A)
142
143
' ^
s^ s
OA9011
OA14011
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
"
ca. 04/02
ca 04/02
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Ref. nr.
Description
0 25,4 x 1,5 Teflon
.. -
361 321-08
1 V4.-12 UNF DN 20
.
,..-,'
1%.-12UNF, 0 3 5 L 1 % "
361 314-08
'I%r-12'UNF,TN32
<-
361 319-01
[incl.140,142,148,149,150
151,152,153]
DN 40
361 321-12
[incl.142]
2 V4. - 12 UNF, 0 42
361 319-04
[incl.140,142,148,149,150
151,152,153]
DN 40
361 314-10
[incl.142]
2 V 4 . - 12 UNF, 0 4 2 ,
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
141
';'-
OA1854
OA1854(A)
375 014-01
OA4088
OA4088 (A)
OA9011
OA14011
375 014-03
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
375 014-05
OA9011
OA14011
OA9011 ' ' ' '
OA14011 A
1
1
" i
ca. 04/02
Rohranschluss
DN 40
Raccord de tube
2 74. - 1 2 UNF, 0 42
365 312-04
365 312-04
366 000-22
365 214-14
ca 04/02
'
"DN40"""
"
-"
-'
2 '/4.-12 UNF, 0 4 2
35
:^
Pos.
Typ
Item
Type
No.
Type ;
144
OA9011
OA14011
'.
OA9011 A
OA14011 A
145
148
149
150
151
152
153
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
OA9011 (A)
D A I 4011 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
Stck
nderung
Qty.
Modifi- from model

cation month/year/no,
Piece
Modifi- partirdu modele Rf. nocation mois/anne/no.
ab Baujahr , .^
Mon/Jahr/Nr.
Art. Nr.
'
"""'-
Beriennung
Description
Ref. nr. >
'V"
367 122-01
ca. 04/02
ca 04/02
Gegenflansch
Companion flange
Contre-bnde
90x90x18
366 304-04
"-
berwurfmutter
Rare nut
Capouchon de vanne
2V4.-12UN
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 12x45
DIN 931 - 5.6 verz.
366 110-02
Verschluss-Stopfen
Plug
141
V4--18NPTFSt.
372 303-01
Dichtung
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
141
0 52 x 0 37 X 2
365 321-14
Rohranschluss
Pipe connection
Raccord d e tube
141
0 42 (1 % ') St.
Gegenflansch
Companion flange
Contre-bride
141
80 X 80 X 20 - DN 40
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
141
M 12x45
DIN 931 - 5 . 6 verz.
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
141
M 12x80
DIN EN 2 4 0 1 4 - 5 . 6 verz
ca. 04/02
367 121-01
ca. 04/02
380 027-51
ca. 04/02
380 027-52
ca. 04/02
90x90x18
'
ca. 04/02
ca. 04/02
Gegenflansch
Companion flange
Contre-bride
367 122-01
380 027-51
ca. 04/02
Designation
160
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
372 200-03
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
0 2 5 , 4 x 1 , 5 Teflon
161
0A1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
366 203-01
Verschluss-f\/l utter
Sealing nut
Bouchon d'otxiuration
1 V4- - 1 2 U N F
162
OA1854
OA4088
OA9011
OA14011
361 321-06
Eckventil kpl.
Valve complete
Robinet complet
[incl.163]
1V4-I2UNF, 0 2 2 L % "
OA488
'
OA4088 A
OA9011 A
OA14011 A
163
- "
OA1854
OA4088
OA9011
OA14011
'l' '
-.-,.,..
375 014-01
^;^^S:?:;..r::",-:v~
iOA4088A: ' a ; ' v i f f i .
'OA9011 A " , > w ;
OA14011 A ; ' : : - i : T
36
36l'314-04 "*
"1 V4.-12ljN"F.'DN'i2
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
162
-; '
. ^
\ ~'
- '
^
Pos.
typ
Item
Type
>o.
'
-^^ " -_^
Type _,;-^^\-'_:>
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung - Mon./Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty.
Modifi- trom model

cation month/year'no
Ref nr
Description
Piece
Modifi- partirdutTvxJele
cafion mois/anne/no
Ref no
Designation
164
0A1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
320 506-01
Verschluss-Scheibe
Sealing washer
Pastille bombe
0 28,5x1,5
170
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
372 301-13
Dichtung
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
^174
0 56 X 0 48 X 1
171
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
361 806-03
Schauglas
Sight glass
Voyant
*174
0 55,5x15
DIN 8902
172
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
367 222-01
Gegenflansch
Companion flange
Contre-bride
174
173
OA1854(A)
OA408a (A)
OA901 f (A)
OA14011 (A)
12
380 126-52
Sechskantsch raube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
-174
MIO x 25
DIN 933 5.6 verz.
174
OA 1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
361 801-02
Bausatz Schauglas kpl.

Voyant complet
[incl.170,171,172,173]
0 88
180
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
345 901-01
Tauchhlse (Thermostat)
Fitting well (Thermostat)
Tube plongeur (Thermostat)
NPT 3/8"
181
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
347 022-01
Thermostat
Thermostat
Thermostat
AM 2
190
OA1854(A)
345 906-02
230 V / 1 4 0 W
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
Tauchhlse (Heizung)
Fitting well (Heater)
Tube plongeur (Resistance de
carter)
OA1854(A)
389 002-01
OA4088 (A)
Gertesteckdose
Elect, connector
Contact fiches
Typ GDM 209

DIN 43650
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
OA1854 (A)
343 213-04
230 V / 1 4 0 W
OA4088 (A)
lsumpfheizung
Heater
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
194
195
200
oder/or/ou
0A1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
OA1854(A)
1
1
OA4088'(A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
88x048x10
343 213-03
372 301-13
1
2
ab - 1 624 6034
372 200-04
372 301-13
115V/140W
Dichtung
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
-202
'
0 56 X 0 48 X 1
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
56 X 0 48 X 1
ab - 1 624 5496
372 200-04
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
372 301-13
0 56 X 0 48 X 1
ab - 1 624 6996
372 200-04
0 38,1 X 1,5 Teflon
37
Pos.
Typ
Stuck
nderung
Jtem
Type
No.. Type
201
0A1854(A)
ab Baujahr ' ' .

Mon./Jahr/Nr.
ArLNr
Benennung
Qty
Modifi- from model

Ret nr
Oescnption
Piece
Modifi- partirdunnodlQ Ref no

Designation
ca. - 1 624 6034
c a . ' ' 1 624 5496
380 126-52
OA4088(yj""^--'''
202
OA1854(A)
210
380 126-52
ca. - 1 624 6996
347 401-01
Minimal - Maximalstandsanzeige
Minimum - maximum level
indicator
Indication de niveau
minimum - maximum
[incl.200]
ca. - 1 624 6034 347 403-02
OA1854A
ca. - 1 624 6034 347 403-04
.1
M 10x25
DIN 933 - 5.6 verz.
OA1854
347 4 0 1 ^ 1 " . "
M 10 x 25
DIN 933 - 5.6 verz.
'^4'l'Ox25 ^ " '
:,DIN 933 - 5 6 verz
380 126-52 "3^5
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
bA4088 (A) ^ " '
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
RansctT/Flange/Blde
1 1,
Hotaiock
Rotalock
- r~,^
-^.,_
"Ransch/Flange/Bide '
Rotalock .
^
-
OA4088
ca. - 1 624 5496 347 403-02
OA4088 A
ca. - 1 624 5496 347 403-04
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
347 401-01
OA9011
OA14011
ca. - 1 624 6996 347 403-02
Rotalock
OA9011 A
OA14011A
ca. - 1 624 6996 347 403-04
Rotalock
OA1854
OA4088
OA9011
OA14011
361 500-01
OA4088 A
OA4088 A
OA9011 A
OA14011 A
Rotalock
Flansch/Flange/Bide
Schrader-Ventil
Schrader connection
Raccord Schrader
361 i 10-01'""'"' Verschluss-Stopfen ,Plug'

- "
7/^ ^-. 20UNF x Vg"27NPTF
'''"---'A,"-27 NPTF
~ St
>
'
^'^. .
215
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
372 200-03
Dichmng
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
0 25,4 x 1,5 Teflon
216
OA1854 (A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
320 506-01
Verschluss-Scheibe
Sealing washer
Pastille bombe
0 28,5 x 1,5
217
OA1854(A)
OA4088 (A)
OA9011 (A)
OA14011 (A)
366 203-01
Verschluss-Mutter
Sealing nut
Bouchon d'otjduration
1 I/
38
. 12 UNF
^
Art Nr
Benennung
Re' nr.
Description
Modiff- apartirdumodele Ref no.

cation mois/anne/no
Designation
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi-. from model

catjon .month/year/no
No.
Type
Piece
39
gen vorbehalten / Subject to change / Toutes modifications resrves 04.03
"'"^
European Refrigeration Controls Catalogue

Catalog Section 6
Product Bulletin P48
Issue 9911
ll^
Series P48
Pressure Controls for Steam, Air or (hot) Water
/ ntroduction
The series P48 pressure controls are designed
as operating or high/low cut-out control on
steam, air or (hot) water applications. Also for
non-combustible gases which are not harmful to
the materials in contact with these mediums.
On steam applications a steam trap is
recommended (see Accessories).
description
The P48 series have been developed for
special applications where pressure must be
controlled. All models have an adjustable
differential depending on the range (see type
number selection table).The P48AAA-9110 and
P48AAA-9120 has the power element outside
the case.
All the models have phosphor bronze bellows
and brass pressure connections except the
P48AAA-9150. This model has a stainless steel
bellows and pressure connection and is
provided with a brass adapter 'A"-18 NPT
female to R3/8 male.
P48 Pressure Control for Steam, Air or (hot)

Water
Feature and Benefits
Generous wiring space

provided
Easy wiring and maintenance
Splash-proof enclosure (IP54)
Can be used for indoor/outdoor applications
SPOT contacts are provided as

standard on single pressure
control
Can be wired for alarm functions
Trip-free manual reset
Override is not possible in the control

function.
Q999 Johnson Controls inc.

Order No. PD-P48-E
Catalogue Section 6
P48
Issue 9911
ôte
Contact function
These controls are designed for use only

as operating controls. Where an operating
control failure would result in personal
injury or loss of property it is the
responsibility of the installer to add
devices or systems that protect against, or
warn of, control failure.
Oc
p>
Q
Manual reset models are possible as optional
construction for quantities only.
Fig. 1
A - B open on pressure increase.
A - C close simultaneously.
/Counting
Mounting can easily be done with a mounting
bracket 271-51 (order separately) or directly on
a surface. Mounting holes 4.5 mm diam. and
M4 holes are provided.
o p t i o n a l construction note
If your requirements are not in the type number
selection table, then please contact your
Johnson Controls representative.
/adjustment
Adjustment of range and differential can be
done by turning the hexagonal range screw and
differential screw. These screws can also be
locked by a lockplate accessory (KIT023N600)
(order separately).
The range scale indicates high switch point
(contacts A - B open, A - C closed). Deduct
differential to obtain low switch point.
/ \ e p a i r and replacement
Repair is not possible. In case of an improperly
functioning control, please check with your
nearest supplier. When contacting the supplier
for a replacement you should state the
type/model number of the control. This number
can be found on the data plate or cover label.
/ ype number selection table

Range (bar)
0-1
0.2-4
1 - 10
1 - 16
3-30
Differential (bar)
0.16-0.55
0.25-0.80
1 -3
1.3-2.5
3-12
Max. bellows pressure (bar)

3.5
8
15
25
33
Order number
P48AAA-9110
P48AAA-9120
P48AAA-9130
P48AAA-9140
P48AAA-9150
Note: 1 bar = 100 kPa ^ 14.5 psi
Catalogue Section 6
999 Johnson Controls Inc.

Order No. PD-P48-e
P48
Issue 9911
/ a c c e s s o r i e s (order separately)
Fig. 2
Brass adapter R3/8 female
to 1/4-18 NPT male
ordernumber
CNR012N001R
Fig. 5
Brass adapter R3/8 female
to 1/4-18 NPT female
order number
CNR013N001R
e-i>
Fig. 4
Mounting bracket
order number 271-51
Fig.3
Steam trap 1/4-18 NPT
male/female
order number TGB16A600
Fig. 6
Locking kit
order number KIT023N600
Pov/er
element dimensions (mm)
CO
Q;
_/j
lO
I-
L-
1W
'-OT
17
44.5
Fig. 7
All ranges except 0 to 1 bar and 0.2 to 4 bar
A. R3/8
Order No. PD-P48-E
Fig. 8
Ranges 0 to 1 bar and 0.2 to 4 bar
A. R3/8
Catalogue Section 6
P48
issue 9911
/dimensions (mm)
53
7025
-9
48.5
113
LJ.
iZ2=C^
-^-l
"^
CK
H-.
1. Lockpiate (if applied)

2. Two mounting holes 4.5
3. Four mounting holes M4 (deep 6 mm)
4. Cable inlet grommet (cable range 5 to 13)
5. Power element see fig 1 and 2
6. Reset button (reset models only)
Fig. 9
Catalogue Section 6
Q999 Johnson Controls Inc.

Order No. PD-P48-E
P48
Issue 9911
opacifications
Types, ranges
differentials
Media
Max. medium temperature
Pressure connector
Ambient temperature
limits
Material
Protection
Electrical rating
See type number selection table

Steam, air, water, non-combustible gases
+100 C
R 3/8 male*
-50 to + 55 C (+70 C maximum duration two hours)
case and cover Weather-proof aluminium die cast
contact unit
Large copper backed silver cadmium (AgCdO)

contacts on phosphor bronze conductor leaves
bellows
Phosphor bronze**
IP54
~16(10)A 400 V
- 220 V, 12 W (pilot duty only)
Packaging
Shipping weights
Individual package
ind. pack
0.5 kg
overpack 12 kg (24 pes.) for
20 kg
(40 pes.) for
P48AAA-9110
P48AAA-9120
P48AAA-9150
P48AAA-9130
P48AAA-9140
* Except P48AAA-9150: '/"-IB NPT plus adapter to R3/8 male.

** Expt P48AAA-9150; stainless steel 316 L
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond
these specification's, consult the localJohnson Controls office or representative. Johnson Controls shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
JENSON
Johnson Controls International, Inc.
Headquarters:
Milwaukee, Wl. USA
European Headquarters:
Westendtiof 8, 45143 Essen, Germany
European Factories:
Lomagna (Italy), Leeuwarden (The Neiherlands) and Essen (Germany)
Brancti Offices:
Pnncipal European Cities.
This document is subjacl to change
Catalogue Section 6
Pnnted in Europe
9 9 9 9 Johnson Controls Inc.

Order No. PD-P48-E
Pressure controls,
type KP, with enclosure IP 33, IP 44 or IP 54
Introduction
KP pressure controls are used as protection

against too low a suction pressure or too high
a discharge pressure on compressors in
refrigeration and air conditioning plant.
KP pressure controls are also used for starting
and stopping refrigeration compressors and fans
for air-cooled condensers.
Features
Approvals
Materials in contact
with the medium
e Oanlou 9/96
KP pressure controls are fitted with a single pole

double throw (SPOT) changeover switch. The
position of the switch is determined by the '
pressure control setting and the pressure at the
connector.
KP pressure controls can be supplied with
enclosures IP 33, IP 44 and IP 54.
Ultra-short bounce times

Reduces wear to a minimum and
increases reliability.
Vibration and shock resistant
Manual cxintrol
Testing the electrical contact function can be
performed without the use of tools.
Laser welded bellows
DEMKO, Denmark
NEMK, Norway
FIMKO. Finland
SEV, Switzerland
Germanischer Lloyd, Germany
DIN 32733, Germany
(KP 7W, 7B, 7S; KP 7B, 7 ABS; KP 17W, 178)
Polski Rejestr Statkw. Poland
Compact design
DnV, Det norske Veritas, Norway

RINA, Registro Italiano Navale, Italy
BV, France
LR, England
MRS, Maritime Register of Shipping, Russia
EZU. Czech Republic
CE marked according to EN 60947-4, -5
Versions with UL and CSA approvals can be
supplied to special order.
Unit type
Material
KP 1 , 2 . 5 . 7 . IS
and 17
Tinbranze, no. 2.1020 ace. to DIN 17662

Free cutting steel, no. 1.0737 /1,0718 ace. to DIN 16S1
KP IA, SA, 7A
and ISA only
Stainless steel 18/8, no. 1.0737 /1.0718 ace. to DIN 17440

Free cutting steel, no. 1.0719 ace. to DIN 1651
Steel, no. 1.0330 ace. to DIN 1624
Aluminium, no. 3.0255 ace. to DIN 1712
Catalogue RK.00.H5.02 - Page 294
f
P r e s s u r e controls, type KP, with e n c l o s u r e IP 33, IP 44 or IP 54
Technical data
Ambient temperature
- 4 0 - * +65C (+80C for max. 2 hours).
Contact systems
SPOT
DIN-approved units:
- 2 5 - +65C (+80C for max. 2 hours).
Max. working pressure
L P : PB = 17 bar
HP: PB = 32 bar
Low pressure (LP)

SPOT
Max. test pressure

LP: p' = 20 bar
H P : p ' = 35bar
a-
16A 1
Contact ioad
Altemating cun-ent
A C 1 : 16 A, 400 V
AC3: 16 A, 4 0 0 V
AC15:10A,400V
Max. starting current (L.R.): 112 A, 4 0 0 V
High pressure (HP)

SPST
^
Direct current:
DC13:12 W, 2 2 0 V control current
Cable connection
T h e cable entry can be used for 6 - 14 m m dia.
cables.
A Pg 13.5 screwed cable entry can also be used
for 6 - 14 m m cable. With 8 - 16 m m cable a
standard Pg 16 screwed cable entry can be used.
Enclosure
IP 33 to EN 60529 / IEC 529
Enclosure IP 33 is obtained when the units
without top cover are mounted on a flat surface
or bracket. The bracket must be fixed to the unit
so that all unused holes are covered.
!<!
CD O-
1 6A B _ll_,"^-5r
gg(A)^HPS
Dual pressure
(HP/HP)
|S
II
SPDT+LP signal
Dual pressure
(LP/HP)
A
SPDT+LP+HP signal
if
IP 44 to EN 60529 / IEC 529

Enclosure IP 4 4 is obtained when the units
with top cover are mounted on a flat surface or
bracket. The bracket must be fixed to the unit so
that all unused holes are covered.
KP pressure controls with auto reset are supplied
with top cover. For KP pressure controls with
manual reset, the top cover must be separately
ordered.
Dual pressure
(LP/HP)
IP 54 to EN 60529 / IEC 529

IP 54 is obtained when the KP pressure controls
a r e m o u n t e d in an IP 54 enclosure, (code no.
60-0330 for single pressure controls a n d code
no. 60-0350 1br dual pressure controls).
IP 54 enclosure has to be ordered separately.
Catalogue RK.00-H5.C2 - Page 295
Danfoss 9/96
Pressure controls, type KP, w i t h enclosure IP 3 3 , IP 4 4 or IP 54
Ordering
Pressure
Typo
For fluorinated
Regulating Differential Regulating Differential

range
Ap
range
bar
bar
t>ar
t)ar
Low
pressure
LP
T"^
Code no.
High
pressure
HP
Contact
system
V4 in.
6 mm
flare
V in.
OOF
solder
8 mm
OOF
solder
6 mm
cutting
ring
60-1112
60-1110
60-5051
60-1103
60-1111
60-1109
60-5052
60-1120
60-1124
60-1123
60-1179
60-1177
60-5053
refrigerants
Low
KP 1
-0.2 - . 7.5
0.7 - 4.0
Aut.
60-1101
Low
KP1
-0.2 - 7.5
0 . 7 - * 4.0
Aut.
60-1141')
Low
KP1
-0.9 - > 7.0
Fixed 0.7
Man.
Low
KP 2
-0.2 - 5.0
0.4-1.5
Aut
High
KP 5
8-32
1.8^6.0
Aut.
60-1171
High
KP 5
8-32
1.8-6.0
Aut.
60-1142')
SPOT
High
KP 5
8-32
Fixed 3
Man.
60-1173
60-1180
60-1178
60-5054
Dual
KP 15
-0.2^7.5
0.7 - 4.0
8-32
Fixed 4
Aut.
Aut.
60-1241
60-1254
60-1249
60-5055
Dual
KP 15
-0.2 - 7.5
0 . 7 - > 4.0
8-32
Fixed 4
Aut.
Aut.
60-1119')
60-1255
60-1250
60-5056
Dual
KP 15
-0.2 - 7.5
0.7-^4.0
8-32
Fixed 4
Aut.
Man.
Dual
KP 15
-0.2-^7.5
0.7 -4.0
8-32
Fixed 4
Aut.
Man.
SPDT +
LP signal
60-1243
60-114a')3
Dual
KP 15
-0.9 - 7.0
Fixed 0.7
8-32
Fixed 4
Man.
Man.
60-1245
Dual
KP 15
-0.9 - 7.0
Fixed 0.7
8-32
Fixed 4
Conv.2)
Conv.2)
60-1261
60-1263
60-1262
Dual
KP 15
- 0 . 2 - * 7.5
0.7 -> 4.0
8^32
Fixed 4
Aut.
Aut.
60-1265
60-1299
60-1297
Dual
KP 15
-0.2 -> 7.5
0.7-> 4,0
8 - * 32
Fixed 4
Aut.
Man.
60-1284
60-1298
Dual
KP 15
- 0 . 2 -> 7.5
0.7-4.0
8^32
Fixed 4
Conv.2)
Conv.2)
Dual
KP 15
- 0 . 9 - * 7.0
Fixed 0.7
8-32
Rxed 4
Conv.2)
Conv.2)
SPDT +
60-1264
LP and HP
60-1154
signal
60-1220
High pressure (HP)
Low pressure (LP)

Pressure
Type
For fluorinated
')
^)
3)
*)
Reset
High pressure (HP)
Low pressure (LP)
=^
Regulating Differential Regulating Differential

Ap
range
Ap
range
bar
bar
bar
bar
refrigerants
and R717
Code no.
Reset
LP/HP
Contact
system
MIO X 0.75
IP 44
IP 54
6 mm cutting ring
IP 44
IP 54
1 m cap.
tutie with
M10x0.75
(NH3)
Low
KP1A
-0.2 - 7 . 5
0.7- 4.0
Aut./-
Low
KP I A
-0.2-7.5
0 7 - 4.0
Aut./-
Low
KP I A
-0.9 - 7 . 0
Fixed 0 7
Man./-
Low
KP2A
- 0 . 2 -+ 5.0
0.4-1.5
AuL/-
High
KP5A
8-32
1.8-6.0
-/AuL
High
KP5A
8^32
1.8^6.0
- / Aut.
High
KP5A
8-32
Fixed 3
Dual
KP ISA
- 0 . 2 -> 7.5
0.7^4.0
8-32
Fixed 4
Dual
KP ISA
- 0 . 2 - 7.5
0.7-4.0
8-32
Dual
KP 1SA
- 0 . 9 - 7.0
Fixed 0.7
Dual
KP ISA - 0 . 9 - 7.0
Fixed 0.7
60-1162
60-5200
60-5005
60-5201
60-1160 *)
60-1146')*)
SPOT
60-1163 3)
60-5202
60-5004 3)
60-5203
60-5015
60-5204
60-5006
60-5205
60-1232
60-5206
60-5008
60-5207
60-11613)
60-1230*)
60-1147 ' ) * ;
60-1153 3)
60-5208
60-5007 3)
60-5209
60-1231 3)
60-5210
60-5012
60-5211
60-1293*)
Fixed 4
SPOT + LP 60-1295
Aut./ Man- & HP signal 60-1296 3)
60-5212
60-5010 3)
60-5213
60-1294 3)
8-32
Fixed 4
Man. / Man.
60-1292 3)
60-5214
60-5011 3)
60-5215
60-1287 3)
8^32
Fixed 4
60-5016 3)
60-5216
60-5009 3)
60-5217
60-1283 3)
- / Man.
Aut.; AuL
SPOT
Conv. / Conv.^ LP signal
Pressure controls with gold-plated contacts

Conv.: optional automatic or manual reset
Enclosure IP 33
Enclosure IP 44
Accessories
for KP pressure controls with M10 xO.75
connections:
Weld connections: M I O x 0.75 nut and 0 6 x 150 m m seamless steel pipe, code no. 60-0057
code no. 60-0078
Steel c a p . tube: 1 m with 2 x M 1 0 x 0.75 nuts,
code no. 60-0082
Steel cap. tube: 1 m with 1 x M I O x 0.75 and G 3/8 nut.
code no. 6 0 - 0 1 4 1
Adaptor: 1/4 to 1/8 NPT int. thread,
code no. 60-0330
IP 54 enclosure for single pressure controls,
code no. 60-0350
IP 54 enclosure for dual pressure controls,
For other accessories: see "Spare parts and accessories", R K . 0 X . G 2 . 0 2 .
I Danfoss 9/96
60-5057
60-0010
Catalogue RK.00.H5.02 - Page 2 9 6
r
Pressure controls, type KP, with enclosure IP 33, IP 44 or IP 54
Ordering
(continued)
Pressure control setting with convertible reset
Low press.
Manual reset ^)
Automatic reset
Automatic reset
Manual reset
High press.
Manual reset ^)
Manual raset
Automatic reset
Automatic reset
^) Factory setting
T^
Pressure controls with DIN 32733 approval 0

Low pressure (LP)
Pressure
Type 2)
High pressure (HP)
Regulating Differential Regulating

Ap
range
range
bar
bar
bar
Differential
Ap
bar
Code no.
Reset
DIN
approvals
V4 in.
6 mm
flare
V"Y
LP/HP
Contact
system
DWFK 4806895
60-5101^)
60-5110*)
6 mm
ODF
solder
MIO X 0.75
Anvendes til fluorer ede klemidler

Low
KP 1W
- 0 . 2 - 7.5
0.7 - 4 . 0
Aut/-
SPOT
Low
KP 1W
-0.5 - 3.0
Fixed 0.7
AuL/-
SPOT
DWFK 4806895
60-1113^)
60-1117*)
Low
KP 1B
- 0 . 9 - > 7.0
Fixed 0.7
Man.l-
SPOT
DBFK 4806995
60-5103 3)
60-5109 3)
Low
KP2W
- 0 . 2 - 5.0
0.2-1.5
Aut./-
SPOT
DWFK 4B07095
60-5120*)
60-5123*)
High
KP7W
8-32
4 - 10
-/Aut
SPOT
DWK 4800194
60-1190*)
60-1203*)
High
KP7W
8-32
4 - 10
-/AuL
SPOT
DWK 4800194
60-5021 ) 6)
60-1203*)
High
KP7B
8-32
Fixed 4
-/Man.
SPDT
DBK 4B00394
60-11913)
High
KP7B
8-32
Fixed 4
- / Man.
SPDT
DBK 4B00394
60-5022 3)6)
High
KP7S
8-32
Fixed 4
/Man.
SPOT
DBK 4800394
60-1192 3)
High
KP7S
8-32
Fixed 4
-/Man.
SPDT
DBK 4B00394
60-5023 3) 6)
Dual
KP7BS
8^32
Fixed 4
Man. / Man.
SPST
DBK 4B00294
60-1200 3)
60-12143)
AuL / Aut.
SPDT +
LP and HP
signal
DWK 4800594
60-1275*)
60-1276*)
60-1213 3)
Dual
KP 17W
- 0 . 2 -> 7.5
0.7-> 4
8-32
Fixed 4
Dual
KP 17W
-0.2 - 7 . 5
0.7^4
8-32
Fixed 4
Aut./AuL
SPDT
DWK 4B00594
60-1267*)
60-1272*)
Dual
KP 17B
- 0 . 2 - . 7.5
0.7-> 4
8-32
Fixed 4
Aut. / Man.
SPDT
DBK 4800494
60-1268 3)
60-12743)
Pressure controls with DIN 32733 approval ^)

Pressure
Type
Low pressure (LP)
High pressure (HP)
Regulat.
range
bar
RegulaL
range
bar
Different.
Ap
bar
OifferenL
Ap
bar
Code no.
Reset
LP/HP
Contact
system
DIN
approvals
M10X0.75
IP 44
IP 54
6 mm cutting ring
IP 44
IP 54
1 m cap.
tube with
MID X 0.75
For ammonia
Low
KP 1AW
0.2-* 7
0.7-4
AuL/-
SPDT
DWFK 4806895
60-5127 =) 60-5218 5)
Low
KP 1AB
0.9-7
Fixed 0.7
Man./-
SPDT
DBFK 4806995
60-5128 5) 60-5219 5)
High
KP7AS
8-32
Fixed 4
-/Man.
SPDT
0 8 K 4800294
60-1155
60-5014
High
KP 7ABS
8-32
Fixed 4
- / Man.
SPST
DBK 4800294
60-5017 3) 60-5221
60-5013 3) 60-5220
60-1205 3)
Meets the requirements in VBG 20 dealing with safety equipment and excess pressures.
W = Wchter (pressostat), B ~ Begrenzer (pressure control with ext. reset], S = Sicherheitsdruckbegrenzer (pressure control with Int. reset).
A tieltows rupture in inner bellows will cause the refrigeration plant compressor to stop.
A rupture of the outer bellows will cause the stop pressure to ftl approx. 3 bar under the set value.
Enclosure IP 33.
Enclosure IP 44.
With 0 6 X 150 mm weld connection.
KP with goldplated contacts.
Catalogue RK.00.H5-02 - Page 297
Danfoss 9/96
Pressure controls, type KP, with enclosure IP 33, IP 44 or IP 54
Design
16 19,
Capillary tube
10/11
Key sketch of KP pressure control
0 = 17mm
|S
0 = 1 4mm
G 1/4A (ISO 7 / 1 )
ImFa
- -^
M10x0.75
0 = 14-mrn
Capillary tube for KP 1A, 5A and 15A
1. Low pressure setting spindle, LP

2. Differential setting spindle, LP
3. Main arm
5. High pressure setting spindle, HP
7. Main spring
8. Differential spring
9. Bellows
.10. LP connection
11. HP connection
12. Switch
13. Terminals
14. Earth terminal
15. Cable entry
16. Tumbler
18. Locking plate
19. Arm
30. Reset button
Cutting ring connection
Bordel
KP 15
The switch in the KP has a snap-action function

and the bellows moves only wrtien the cutin or
cutout value is reached.
The bellows becomes connected to the low
or high pressure side of the plant through
connection (10) or (11).
e Danfoss 9/96
1=
=B=
Weld nipple tor KP
The design of the KP affords the following

advantages:
- high contact load
- ultra-short bounce time
- high resistance to pulsation
- vibration resistance up to 4 g in the range
0-1000 Hz
- long mechanical and electrical life
(
5)e**)<<'M0* S<at'^<3C&>OS>**)-$JkK&^7PI4<K7l
(continued)
The KP with letters W, B or S havebeen tested

and approved by \S> (Technischer Oberwachungs Verein, Federal Republic of Germany)
in accordance with DIN 32733.
W = Wchter (pressure control)
B = Begrenzer
(pressure control with external reset)
S = Sicherheitsdruckbegrenzer
(pressure control with Internal reset).
KP 7 and KP 17 have a double bellows, an
outer bellows and a regulating bellows. When
pressure in the plant exceeds the set value, the
KP will automatically stop the plant. The double
bellows system prevents loss of system charge
in the event of bellows rupture.
A rupture in the outer bellows will cause the
cut-out pressure of the unit to fall to about 3 bar
under the set value, and thus provides a
feil-safe function.
18
Versions with designation W or AW cut in again

automatically when the pressure has fllen to
the set value minus the differential.
Versions with designation B or AB can be cut in
manually with the external reset button when the
pressure in KP 1 has raised 0.7 bar atxsve set
value and in KP 7 has fllen 4 bar under the set
value.
Versions mVh designation S or AS can be cut in
manually with the internal reset arm when the
pressure has fllen 4 bar under the set value.
All KP pressure controls, including those which
are DIN-approved, operate independently of
changes in the ambient temperature around
the control housing.Therefore the set cut-out
pressure and differential are held constant
provided the pennissible ambient temperatures
are not exceeded.
18
\ \m\
\jiMgn.
irn.
-1/4 i n . /
6mm flare
Bb'rdel
KP 7W, flare
25
JOSE)
DBK
30
M/4 I n . / 6 m m flare''
Bordel
18 I T
KP7BS
Catalogue RK.OO H5.02 - Page 299
a o;) cric'i'
5>C**)(J<^M* <a:'^C5CK2)***)i55afl(5)<!?Pf îW)
(HC3^<3K>
Reset
1. Manual reset:
Units with manual reset can only be reset
during operation by activation of the reset
button.
2. Automatic reset:
After operational stop, these units reset
automatically.
3. Convertible reset:
Units with optional reset can be activated by
automatic and/or manual reset.
Permissible working pressure
The permissible working pressure is determined
by the pressure that can be safely allowed in the
refrigerating system or any of the units within it.
The permissible working pressure is designated
PB (Der zulssige Betriebsberdruck).
(a3>ter
'Snap Ainction"
A certain contact force is maintained until
irrevocable "snap" is initiated.The time during
which the contact force approaches zero is thus
limited to a very few milliseconds.Therefore
contact bounce cannot occur as a result of, for
example, slight vibrations, before the cut-out
point. Contact systems with "Snap function" will
change over even when micro-welds are created
between the contacts during cut-in. A very high
force is created during cut-out to separate the
contacts.This force immediately shears off all the
welds. Thus the cut-out point of the unit remains
very accurate and completely independent of the
magnitude of the current load.
Pressure controls with automatic reset - LP:

Set the LP start pressure on the "CUT-IN" scale
(range scale).
One rotation of the low pressure spindle O
0.7 bar.
Set the LP differential on the "DIFF" scale. One
rotation of the differential spindle 00.15 bar.
The LP stop pressure is the LP start pressure
minus the differential.
Pressure controls with automatic reset - HP:

Set the HP pressure on the "CUT-OUT" scale.
One rotation of the HP spindle 02.3 bar.
Set the HP differential on the "DIFF" scale.
One rotation of the differential spindle CO. 3 bar.
The HP start pressure is the HP stop pressure
Start and stop pressures for both the LP and HP
sides of the system should always be checked
with an accurate pressure gauge.
The LP stop pressure must be above

absolute vacuum (Pe = ^ bar)!
Pressure controls with manual reset

Set the stop pressure on "CUT-OUT" scale
(range scale).
Low pressure controls can be manually reset
when the pressure is equal to the stop pressure
plus the differential.
High pressure controls can be manually reset
when the pressure is equal to the stop pressure
If with low stop pressure the refrigeration

compressor will not stop, check to ensure that
the differential value has not been set too high!
a cgxo cat'
Test pressure
The test pressure is the pressure used in strength
tests and/or leakage tests on refrigerating
systems or individual parts in systems. The test
pressure is designated p'.
Catalogue RK.O0.H5.O2 - Page 300
rC
5je**)(2<^^*<30+
*<lfet>-(a*^MK;>sj2}7W-#*^K^
CXJt CDH* XD >-CSE

Flare connection
KP with top cover

-44-
K 1 2 2 -
la^l
''mT^
K P 1, 2. 5. 7B. 7S and 7W
O^TTl T
KPISandlTW
MIO X 0.75 connection
ixr^
KP with IP 54 enclosure
84
^
im - .
mffl
yn W
la-AI
fll^*^!
raJI
UlU-o=u
.
KP J A 2A OS M
=^ w
^^t
gge
T9'"af
K P J 5 A 7 AS and TABS
Cutting ring connection
KP with IP 54 enclosure
84
^ a
"'
" " '
.n
rOTi
0=12
KP IA 2A ami 5A
Solder
KP 15A, 7 AS and TABS
connection
84
. H n
IP 54 endosure
B-a
rggi
%_|J
B n
CSQ
w
JJ
IP 54 enclosure
KP 1,2. 5. 7B. 7S and 7W
KP 15, 17W
: 3 ^
.
IcTlO
.
Weld nipple
2.5
FT
- 14
3$
KP 1, 2, 5 and 7: approx.
KP 15, 17 and 78S: approx.
KP IA and 5 4 ; approx.
KP ISA and 7ABS: approx.
Weight
0.3 kg
0.5 kg
0.3 kg
0.5 kg
0='*
C a t a l o g u e RK.0O.H5.O2 - Page 3 0 1
a Danloss 3/96
Thermostats, differential thermostats

type RT
Introduction
An RT thermostat is fitted with a single-pole

changeover switch.
The position of the contacts depends on the bulb
temperature and the set scale value.
The RT series includes thermostats for general
applications within industrial and marine
refrigeration.
Features
Technical data
Danfoss 9/96
The RT series also includes differential

thermostats, thermostats for neutral zone
regulation, and special thermostats with
gold-plated contact surface for PLC applications.
Waterproof versions, enclosure IP 66
Suitable for alternating and direct current
Wide regulating range
Interchangeable contact system
Wide range of units for industrial and marine

applications
Special versions for PLC applications
Cable connection
Pg 13^.5. Cable diameter6- 14 mm.
Permissible ambient temperature

-50 -+70C for thermostat housing.
Enclosure
IP 66 to IEC 529, except for versions with ext.
reset which are to IP 54.
Switcfies
.
.
See "Ordering switches".
Catalogue RK.O0.H5.O2
325
Thermostats, differential thermostats, type RT
Approvals
CM
CO
-J
CO
1CC
o
1-
S
^ ^
C*1
? s
^ ^
(O
1*.
CM
1;
S
^
o
CS*
OEMKO. Denmark
NEMKO, Norway
.
__
.
.
Lloyd's Reg. of Shipping, UK
FIMKO, Finland
Germanischer Lloyd. Germany

DSRK, Deutsche-Schiffs-Revision und -Klassifikatton, Germany
Canadian Standards Association, Canada ^)

SEV, Switzerland
&
Polski Rejestr Statkw. Poland

MRS Maritime Register of Shipping, Russian Federation
EZU, Chech Republic
NKK, Japan
Det norske Veritas, Norway
. ^
.-.
EN 60730-2-1 to 9
CE mark according to RN 60947-4, -5
^) Special versions supplied from Danfoss, Canada.
Overview
1>o
c
V.'
+>0
+ 1 00
+1 50
.-
* " i
i
*
'
y %^ 1
. ~ ' i
-.-
+200
+2 50
+300C
4i
-60--25
RT10
-45--15
RT9
(bulb coldest)
-30-0
RT13
-25-+15
RT3
-25-+15
RT2,7
-20-+12
RT8
v^W,
Adsorption-charged wUh remote bulb

(bulb warmest or coldest)
r-'
i'
rt<-i
vf^
!u
/
>
, JU
,^ '
^-
;
* _\\ >
- ,
^
--'
'
-
'
: '.
>0
326
()
RT14
+5 - +22
RT23
+8 - +32
RT15
+ 15-+34
RT24
+15-+45
RT140
RT 101,102
+70-+150
RT107
II 1 II 1 1 1 1 1 II II 1
-50--15
RT17
Vapour-charged with coiled capillary tutie sensor

(room thermostats)
-30-*0
RT11
Adsorption-charged with coiled capillary tube sensor (room tl^rmostats)
-25-+15
RT34
1 11111111111111111111111 1
-20 -+12
RT8L
- 5 -> +30
Vapour-charged dead zone thermostat (room thermostat)

Adsorptior)-charged differential thermostats with remote bulb (bulb warmest or coldest)
+ 50
RT12
- 5 - +30
+25 -> +90
1
_l
-5-+10
Partial charge with remote bulb (bulb warmest)
Adsorption-charged dead zone thermostats with remote t>ulb

(bulb warmest or coldest)
v t
Type
I^M 1
Mil
MM
Vapour-charged with remote bulb
^ .
' ' ,'-:.t, 1

f fi
^
Range
C
+100
Catalogue RK.00.H5.02
I
+150
+200
I
+250
RT4
- 5 - +30
RT14L
+15-+45
RT140L
0-++38
RT16L
- 3 0 - +40
RT270
I
+300C
Danfoss 9/96
Ordering
Thermostats
Differential A t
an.
Reset
Capillary
tut>e
length
Charge
Type
Lowest
temp.
setting
K
Vapour')
RT10
- 6 0 -> - 2 5
1.7- 7.0
1.0- 3.0
Aut.
150
17-5077
RT9
-45--15
2.2-10.0
1.0- 4.5
Aut.
150
17-5066
RT3
-25->+15
2.8-10.0
1.0- 4.0
Aut.
150
17-5014
RT17
-50--15
2.2- 7.0
1.5- 5.0
Aut.
100
17-5117
RT11
-30-0
1.5- 6.0
1 . 0 ^ 3.0
Aut.
66
17-5083
RT4
1.5- 7.0
1.2- 4.0
Aut.
75
17-5036
17-5037*)
- 5 - +30
Highest
temp.
setting
K
Code no.
RT13
-30->0
1.5- 6.0
1.0- 3.0
Aut.
150
17-5097
Adsorp-
RT2
-25-+15
5.0-18.0
6.0-20.0
Aut.
150
17-5008
on2)
RT8
-20-+12
1.5- 7.0
1.5- 7.0
Aut.
145
17-5063
RT 12
-5-+10
1.0- 3.5
1.0^. 3.0
Aut.
65
17-5089
RT23
+5 -> +22
1.1- 3.5
1.0- 3.0
Aut.
85
17-5278
RT15
+8 - +32
1.6- 8.0
1 . 6 ^ 8.0
Aut.
150
17-5115
RT24
+15^+34
1.4- 4.0
1.4- 3.5
Aut.
105
17-5285
RT140
+15-^+45
1.8- 8.0
2.5-11.0
Aut.
240
17-5236
RT102
+25 - +90
2.4-10.0
3.5-20.0
Aut.
300
17-5147
RT34
-25-+15
2.0-10.0
2.0-12.0
Aut.
100
RT7
-25^+15
2.0->10.0
2.5-14.0
Aut.
150
RT14
- 5 -t +30
2 . 0 ^ 8.0
2.0-10.0
Aut.
150
17-5099
RT101
+25 - +90
2.4-10.0
3.5-20.0
Aut.
300
17-5003
RT107
+70-+150
6.0-25.0
1.8- 8.0
Aut.
215
17-5135
D
D
QQ
Regulation
range
Max.
bulb
temp.
Bulb
type
Partial 3)
17-5118
17-5053
^) The sensor must be located colder than thermostat housing and capillary tube. ^) The sensor can be located warmer
or colder than thermostat housing. ^) The sensor must be located warmer than thermostat housing and capillary tube.
*) With t>uilt-in heating coil - reduces the thermal differential.
Thermostats with adjustable dead zone

Dead zone NZ
Regulation
range
Max.
bulb
temp.
Capillary
tutse
length
"C
Lowest
temp.
setting
K
1.5/0.7
1.5-5.0
0.7-
1.9
100
-20-+12
1.5
1.5-+4.4
1.5-
4.9
145
- 5 -4 +30
1.5
1.5^5.0
1.5-
5.0
150
17L0034
RT140L
+15^+45
1.8/2.0
1.8-4.5
2.0-
5.0
240
17L0031
RT101L
+25 - + 9 0
2.5/3.5
2-5^7.0
3.5^12.5
300
17L0062
Regulating
range
Operating
range for
LT bulb
Dead zone NZ
Capillary
tube
length
m
Code no.
Max.
bulb
temp.
C
-30-40
65
2x5
17D0031
Charge
Type
Bulb
type
Vapour
RT16L
0-+38
Adsorption
RT8L
RT14L
Differential
Highest
temp.
setting
K
Code no.
17L0024
17L003Q
Differential thermostat
Charge
Type
Bulb
type
c
Adsorption RT270
0-+15
2xA
Type of bulb / sensor
Cylindrical
remote sensor
gn_
m_
Room sensor
Special versions
RT can be supplied with special switches.
See next page.
Danfoss 9/96
Ouci sensor
Capillary
tube sensor
When ordering, please state

1. Type
2. Code no. of standard unit
3. Code no. of spectat switch
327
^r
Ordering
(continued)
Switches
Version
Standard
Symbol
4
I S
SPDT
Man.
reset
Man.
reset
i^>2
lri)T
.^*
Description
Contact rating
Single-pole changeover switch with termina

board proof against leakage currant.
Fitted in all standard versions of type RT.
Snap action changeover contacts.
For manual reset of unit after contact
changeover on rising temperature.
For units with reset facility.
Alternating current
Ohmia
AC110A.400V
Inductive:
AC34A,400V
AC15 = 3 A , 4 0 0 V
D^. current:
DC13 = 1 2 W , 2 2 0 V
For manual reset of unit after contact

changeover on falling temperature.
For units with reset facility.
Reset
Code no.
Aut
17-4030
Max.
17-4042
Min.
17-4041
SPDT
Dead
zone
Single-pole changeover switch with dead

zone and terminal board proof against
iealâge current.
Available
only as a
component
part of RT
controls with
adjustable
dead zone
SPDT
Standard
1.,^
^ '
SPDT
Man.
reset
SPDT
Dead
zone
IT-.,
S'
SPDT
Man.
reset
SPDT
Cuts in
two circuit:
simultane
OU sly
Single-pole changeover switch that cuts

out two circuits simultaneously on rising
temperature. Snap action changeover
contacts.Terminal board proof against
leakage current.
Aut
17-4240
Max.
17-404S
Available
only as a
component
part of RT
controls with
adjustable
dead zone
Single-pole changeover switch with gold

plated (oxide-free) contact surfaces.
Increases cut-in reliability on aiann and
monitoring systems, etc. Snap action
changeover contacts.Terminal board proof
against leakag.ej:u(rent.
yr-n*
'4'2
1
Alternating current
Ohmic:
AC1 = 1 0 A , 4 0 0 V
Inductive:
AC3 = 2 A . 4 0 0 V
A C 1 5 = 1 A, 400 V
Dir. current
DC13 = 12 W, 220 V
Single-pole changeover switch with dead

zone and gold plated (oxide-free) contact
surfaces. Increase cutnn reliability on alami
and monitoring systems, etc. Snap action
changeover contacts. Terminal board proof
against leakage current
Single-pole changeover switch that cuts in

two circuits simultaneously on rising
temperature. Snap action changeover
contacts.Terminal boaid proof against
leakage current.
SPST
With
non-snap
action
changeover
contacts

Increases cut-in reliability on alarm and
changeover contacts.Terminal traard proof
'!>-:*
Hi^
JL"
O
SPST
Cuts out
two circuit!
simultaneously

Increases cut-in reliability on alarm and
changeover contacts.Terminal board proof
Single-pole changeover switch with

non-snap action changeover contacts.
J-T"'
Alternating current
Ohmic:
AC1 = 10 A, 400V
Inductive:
AC3 = 3 A , 400 V
AC15 = 2 A , 400V
Dir current
DC13 = 12 W, 220 V ' 1
Aitemating
or direct current
25 VA, 24 V
Min.
17-4047
Max.
17-4034
Min.
17-4036
17-0181
SPDT
I if current is led through contacts 2 and 4, i.e. terminals 2 and 4 connected but not 1, max. permissible load is
increased to 90 W, 220 V.
The switches are shown in the position they

assume on falling temperature, i.e. after
downward movement of the RT main spindle.
The setting pointer of the control shows the scale
value at which contact changeover occurs on
falling temperature. An exception is RT with

swntch, code no. 17-4042, with max. reset where
the setting pointer shows the scale value at
which contact changeover occurs on rising
temperature.
Spare parts and accessories,

see spare parts catalogue RK.0X.G1.02.
328
o Danfoss 3/96
r
Design
Function
Thermostat type RT
K
/ - - ^
5. Setting knob
9. Regulation range scale
10. Looptennlnal
11. Pg 13.5 screwed cable entry
12. Mainspring
14. Terminals
15. Main spindle
16. Switch
17. Upper guide bush
18. Contact arm
19. Differential temperature
setting nut
23. Bellows element
25. Fixing hole
26. Sensor (bulb) clip
28. Capillary tube
29. Sensor (bulb)
30. Sensor (bulb) pocket
3 1 . Capillary tube gland
38. Earth terminal
44. Temperature setting spindle
Key sketch ofRT
thermostat
RT thermostat
The thermostatic element consists of a sensor

(29) capillary tube (28) and bellows element (23).
The element contains a charge that reacts to
temperature variations at the sensor so that the
pressure on the moving bellows rises when
temperature rises.
By turning the setting knob (5) the main spring
(12) can be set to balance the pressure in the
element.
Danfoss 9/96
Catalogue RK.OO.H5.02
A rise in temperature at the sensor compresses

the bellows and moves the main spindle (15)
upwards until spring force and element pressure
are in equilibrium.
The main spindle (15) is fitted with a guide bush
(17) and a differential setting nut (19) that
together transfer the main spindle movement
to the switch (16).
329
Design
Function
(continued)
5. Setting knob
12. Mainspring
15. Main spindle
16. Switch
17. Upper guide bush
18a and 18b. Contact arm
20. Lower guide bush
23. Bellows element
25. Rxing hole
23. Capillary tube
29. Sensor (bulb)
40. Neutral zone setting nut
44. Temperature setting spindle
Thermostats with neutral zone, type RTL
RTL thermostat
Key sketch RT L thermostat
RT L pressure controls are fitted with a switch

(17-4032) with an adjustable neutral zone.This
enables the units to be used for floating control.
The neutral zone switch contact arms (18a) and
(18b) are operated by the spindle guide bushes
(17) and (20).The upper guide bush (17) is fixed
while the lower guide bush (20) can be moved up

or down by the setting nut (40). In this way the
neutral zone can be varied between a minimum
value (equal to the mechanical differential of the
unit) and a maximum value (depending on the
type of RT unit).
i
Mechanical
differential
'^'NZ min.
Set
Terminology
330
temp
Floating control
A form of delayed control where the correcting
element (e.g. valve, damper, or similar) moves
towards one extreme position at a rate
independent of the magnitude of the error when
the enxir exceeds a definite positive value, and
towards the opposite extreme position when the
error exceeds a definite negative value.
Catalogue RK.0O.H5.02
Hunting
Periodic variations of the controlled variable ft-om
the fixed reference.
Neutral zone
The interval between the mal<e points of the two
contacts.
e Oanloss 9,'3S
r
T h e r m o s t a t s , differential t h e r m o s t a t s , type RT
Charges
f. Wapour charge
Pressure
Temperature
Here the interdependence between the pressure

and temperature of saturated vapour is utilized,
i.e. the element is charged with saturated vapour
plus a small amount of liquid.
The charge is pressure-limited; a further increase
in pressure after evaporation of all the liquid
in the bulb, will only result in a small pressure
increase in the element.
2. Adsorption
This principle can be utilized in thermostats for

low temperature, etc., where evaporation must
be able to talce place from the free liquid surface
in the bulb (within the operation range of the
thermostat), and where at the same time, the
bellows must be protected against deformation
when Icept at normal ambient temperatures.
Since the pressure in the element depends on
the temperature at the free liquid surface, the
thermostat must always be placed so that the
bulb is colder than the rest of the thermostatic
element.
The evaporated liquid will recondense at the
coldest point, i.e. the bulb.Thus, as intended,
the bulb becomes the temperature-controlling
element in the system.
Note:
When the bulb is coldest, the ambient
temperature has no effect on regulating
accuracy.
charge
I Scale deviation
factor
,
1 Pressure
is
.,c?S
or
^
Temperature
.
.-t
20C
1C 0%
Relative
, scale
setting
(%)
'
In this case the charge consists partly of a

superheated gas and partly of a solid having a
large adsorption surface.
The solid is concentrated in the bulb and it is
therefore always the bulb that is the
temperature-controlling part of the thermostatic
element.
The bulb can thus be placed warmer or colder
than the rest of the thermostatic element.
Such a charge is however to some extent
sensitive to changes in the temperature of the
bellows element and capillary tube.
Under normal conditions this is not important,
but if the thermostat is used in extreme
conditions, scale deviation will occur.
The scale can be corrected by using the graph
and the table.
Scale correction = Z x a.
Z can be found in the graph and "a" in the table.
Danfoss 9/96
Catalogue RK.0D-H5.02
^-
i.
"c
'
Curves for different amtieret temperatures.
0%~ lowest scale setting temperature,
100% - highest scale setting temperature.
Type
Regulating
range
RT2
RT7
RT 8, RT 8L
RT12
RT14.RT14L
RT15
RT23
RT24
RT101,RT102
RT140.RT140L
-25->+15C
-25-+15''C
- 2 0 -> +12C
-5-+10C
- S -> +30''C
+8 -> +32C
+5^+22C
+15->+34"C
+25 - -t-SO'C
+15->+45C
-c
Correction
factor
a
2.3
2.9
1.7
1.2
2.4
1.2
0.6
0.8
5.0
3.1
331
Charges
(continued)
Example
Scale correction on an RT 14 (range - 5 to +30C)
atactivaSng temperature +12C and ambient
temperature-10C.
The scale temperature, +12C, lies approximately
In the middle of the scale range, i.e. relative scale
setting of 50%.
The factor Z can be found in the graph from 50%
and the curve for-10C, i.e. approx. -1.2.
The correction factor "a" can be found in the table

for an RT 14, i.e. 2.4.
The scale correction = Z x a = -1.2 x 2.4 = -2.88.
If activation at+12C for the same conditions is
required, the thermostat must be set at
+12x2.88 = 9 . 1 2 - 9 . 1 .
3. Partial charge
As with the vapour charge, the partial charge
utilizes the interdependence between the
pressure and temperature of saturated vapour.
. Pressure
isa
Temperature
Partial charge is used in RT units having a range

lying higher than ambient temperature.
The partial charge is of such a volume that the

t)ellows housing, capillary tube and a small part
of the bulb are filled when the thennostat is in
operation.The bulb is thus the warmest part of
the system.
The liquid will condense in the remaining, coldest,
part of the system but because of the volume of
the charge the free liquid surface will always be
in the bulb. In this way, the bulb becomes the
temperature-controlling part of the system.
Note:
When the bulb is placed warmest, the ambient
temperature has no effect on regulating
accuracy.
332
SI Danfoss S 6
Design
Function
RT differential thermostat
An RT differential thermostat contains a singlepole changeover switch that malces or breaks

depending on the temperature difference between
the two sensors of the unit.
The RT 270 is for use in process plant, ventilation
plant, and refrigeration and heating plant where
there is need to maintain a certain temperature
differential, 0-15C, between two media. One
sensor is used as a reference and the other as a
control sensor.The temperature differential is the
direct controlled variable.
The figure shows a cross-section of the RT 270.
The differential thermostat contains two bellows
elements: the LT element whose sensor must be
placed in the medium having the lowest
temperature, and the HT element whose sensor
must be placed in the medium having the highest
temperature.
The main spring has a rectilinear characteristic.
Within the operating range the RT 270 can be set
for different temperature differentials by the setting
disc (5).
1. LT sensor (bulb)
2. Capillary tubs
4. LT bellows element
5. Setting disc
10. Loop terminal
11. Pg 13.5 screwed cable entry
12. Main spring
14. Terminals
15. Main spindle
16. Switch
17. Upper guide busli
18. Contact arm
20. Lower guide busti
24. HT twllows element
25. Fixing hole
28. Capillary tutje
32. HT sensor (bulb)
38. Earth terminal
39. Blow-out disc
Terminology
When the differential between LT and HT sensor

temperature falls, the main spindle (15) moves
downwards.
The contact arm (18) is moved downwards by
the guide (17) so that contacts (1-4) break and
contacts (1-2) make when the set temperature
differential is reached.
The contacts changeover again when the
temperature differential rises to the set value plus
the fixed contact differential of approx. 2C.
Example
Set differential = 4C.
Switch breaks at 4C differential and remakes at
4 + 2 = 6C.
Regulation range
The temperature differential between LT and HT
sensors within which the unit can be set to
operate. Indicated on the thermostat scale.
Contact differential
The temperature rise on the HT sensor overthe
set temperature differential which causes the
switch contacts to make or break.
Sc^le indication
The difference between the temperature on LT
and HT sensors at the moment when the switch
contacts change over as a result of the downward
movement of the spindle.
Reference sensor
The sensor that is placed in the medium whose
temperature is not affected by the function of the
thermostat (HT- or LT sensor).
Operating range
The temperature range of the LT sensor, within
which the differential thermostat can operate.
Danloss 9/96
Catalogue RK.O0.H5.O2
Control sensor
The sensor that is placed in the medium whose
temperature must be controlled (LT- or HT
sensor).
333
(f
Setting of differential
The knob can be used to make a setting on the

range scale for the lowest temperature at which
the contact system must be activated (cut-out or
cut-in).
Nomograms for
obtained differentials
A = Range setting
B = Obtained differential
C = Differential setting
c
islos'
o
RT 2
6 <
7
8
-9
-10
11
12
13
U
-15
-16
17
IS
19
L20
B
-5
-10-15-20
-25-
RT 9
C
25-
C
2
15-
-10S
-5-
0-
RT 24
s'
0-
15
20-
5-
10-
IS-"
10
-15
25-
RT 10
II
-20
30-
-25-'
RT 11 +
13
RT 12
-5-1
-4-3-2
-1
0
1
23-
-30-
-55-25-
-50-
-20-15-
-35-
-10-
-30
78
9
10
-S
-25-'
C
30-
c J
-10
-40
10
RT 7
is-
-5
-*i
c
lo-
10-
'sis
S-
*r
3
4
RT -
-Si
-20-
C
-602
RT 3
The differential roller 19 must then be used to

set the differential. The highest activating
temperature at the sensor is equal to the
activating temperature + the set differential.
0-'
RT 17
RT 14
RT 23
;îi
2520
isla
sD<
-5
RT 34
15
90^
RT 101
105
8070-
0-5-
SO-
'1
-6
8
-20-
20-
-15-
22-
C
701
100-
30-
5
6
7
2S
140-
20-
9
10
1 SO-
15
i-11
110-
50-
120-
40-
130-
334
Catalogue RK.OO.H5,02
3
4
10
-10
-15-
-25
\^^
90-
12
3025-
RT 140
r1.8ji
80-
-10
-20-
RT 1 0 7
IS
20
Oamoss 9/96
T h e r m o s t a t s , differential t h e r m o s t a t s , type RT
Dimensions and weight

Weight approx. 1 kg
-83-H
W^
hl
o
o
r~m.
MSL
li,
5
t: iJ
-11 O J
i!
o
o
(N
CO
ro
Li
g
l5
RT thermostat
housing
Rr4, JJ, 6i,
RT thermostat housing
17,34
i^
o
o./7_i
^ a5
e25
t->-e9.5
r-a9.5
ra9.5
%
0 4-
^ ^ ^
RT 140, UOL
Danfoss 9/96
o
o
O^
RTB, 8L, 14, 14L,

15, 107.270
^ ^ ^
i;
RT 12, 23, 24
RT102
335
Differential pressure controls

type IVIP 54, 55 and 55A
Introduction
Features
Approvals
Materials In contact
with the medium
MP 54 and MP 55 oil differential pressure

controls are used as safety switches to protect
refrigeration compressors against low lubricating
oil pressure.
Ifthe oil pressure fails the oil differential pressure
control stops the compressor after a certain time
period.
MP 54 and 55 are used in refrigerating systems
using fluorinated refrigerants.
MP 55A is used in refrigerating systems with

R 717 (NH3). MP 55A can also be used in
systems with fluorinated refrigerant.
MP 54 has a fixed differential pressure setting.
It also incorporates a thermal time relay with a
fixed release time setting.
MP 55 and 55A have adjustable differential
pressure and are available both with and without
thermal time relay.

Can be used for deep freeze, refrigeration and
air conditioning plant
Suitable for both alternating and direct current

Screwed cable entry for cables from
6 to 14 mm diameter
Can be used for ail normal fluorinated

refrigerants
Small contact differential
Electrical connection at the front of the unit
Meets the requirements of EN 60947
DEMKO, Denmark
NEMKO, Norway
FIMKO, Finland
DSRK, Deutsche-Schiffs-Revision und
-Klassifikation, Germany
@ Polski Rejestr Statkow, Poland
EZU, The Czech Republic

RINA, Italy
CE mark according to EN 60947-5
Unit type
Versions having UL and CSA approvals can be

Material
MP 54
MP 55
Stainless steel 19/11, no, 1.4306 to DIN 17440

Deep-drawn steel plate, no. 1.0338 to DIN 1624
Free cutting steel, no. 1.0718toDIN 1651
MP55A
Stainless steel 19/11, no. 1.4306 to DIN 17440

Deep-drawn steel plate, no, 1.0338 to DIN 1624
Free cutting steel, no. 1.0401 to DIN 1652
Catalogue RK.OO.H5.02 - Page 312
Differential pressure controls, type MP 54, 55 and 55A
Technical data
Control voltage
230Vor 115Va.c. ord.c.
Max. bellows temperature

100C
Permissible voltage variation

+ 10^-15%
Enclosure
IP 20 to IEC 529
Max. working pressure

PB = 17bar
Max. test pressure
p' = 22 bar
Contact loads
Type A;
On time relay output contacts M-S:
AC15:2A, 250 V
DC13:0,2A, 250V
Temperature compensation
The time relay is temperature-compensated in
therange-40to+60''C
Type B without time relay:

AC15:0,1 A, 250 V
DC13: 12W, 125V
Screwed cable entry

Pg13.5
Type C without time relay:

AC1: IDA, 250V
AC3:4A, 250 V
DC13: 12W, 125V
Cable diameter
6 ^ 14 mm
Ordering
For fluorinated refrigerants
Type
MP 54
MP 55
Differential
Switch
differential
max.
Operation
range,
LP
side
Time
relay
release
time
s
Ap bar
Apbar
bar
Fixed 0.65
0.2
-1 ->+12
Contact
load
(see
technical
data)
0 2)
Code no.
Connection
V4 in./6 mm
Flare
1 m cap.tube
Cutting ring
V4in.
6 mm
ODF solder
60B0297
Fixed 0.65
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
45
60B0166
Fixed 0.9
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
60
60B0167
Fixed 0.65
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
90
60B0168
Fixed 0.65
0,2
-1 -^+12
120
60B0169 3)
Fixed 2.1
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
120
60B0180
0.3
-^4.5
0.2
-1 .^+12
45
60B0170
60B0133
60B0187
0.3
^4.5
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
60
60B0171
60B0134
60B0188
0.3
^4.5
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
60
60B01781)
0.3
->4.5
0.2
- 1 ->+12
90
60B0172
60B0135
60B0189
0.3
^4.5
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
120
60B0173
60B0136
60B0190
0.3
-^4.5
0.2
-1 -+12
0 2)
60B0299
0.65-> 4.5
0.4
-1 ^ + 1 2
0 2)
60BOZ94'')
60B0191 ^)
60B0295
For fluorinated refrigerants and R717 (NH3)
Type
MP55A
Operation
range,
LP
side
Time
relay
release
time
bar
Differential
Switch
differential
Apbar
max.
Apbar
0.3-^4.5
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
s
45
0.3^4.5
0.2
-1.^+12
0.3^4.5
0.2
- 1 -^+12
0.3^4.5
0.2
0.3->4.5
0.3-4.5
Contact
load
(see
technical
data)
Code no.
Connection
0 6,5/
0 10 mm
weld nipple
Cutting ring
6 mm
60B0174
60B0182
60
60 B0175
60B0183
60
6OBOI79I)
60B0186^)
-1 ^ + 1 2
90
60B0176
60B0184
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
120
60B0177
60B0185
0.2
-1 ^ + 1 2
60B02982)
60B0296
0 2)
^) With operational light that remains on during normal operation.

Note: If the operational light goes out, the compressor should not run longer than the release time.
2) Versions without time relay are for applications where an external time relay is required - perhaps with a different
release time than the one specified.
^) 60B0169 meets Copeland specifications. UL-approved versions can be supplied.
'^) Approved according to EN 60947-4, -5.
Catalogue RK.0O.H5.02 - Page 313
s Danfoss 9/96
Differential pressure controls, type IVIP 54, 55 and 55A
Design
The operation of the pressure control Is

conditional only on the differential pressure, i.e.
the difference in pressure between the two
counteracting bellows, whereas it Is independent
of the absolute pressure acting on both bellows.
The MP 55 and 55A can be set for different
differential pressures by the setting disc (3).The
set differential pressure can be read from the
internal scale.
The MP 54 has a fixed differential and has no
pressure setting disc. The factory-set differential
pressure is stamped on the front plate of the
control.
1. Connection to pressure side of

lubrication system, OIL
2. Connection to suction side of
refrigeration plant, LP
3. Setting disc
4. Reset buttom
5. Test device
Terminology
Differential range
The pressure difference between LP and OIL
connections within which the control can be set
to operate.
Contact differential
The pressure rise above the set differential
pressure (scale reading) necessary to cut off
current to the time relay.
Scale reading
The differential between the oil pump pressure
and the pressure in the crankcase that exists at
the moment the contact system cuts In current
to the time relay on falling oil pressure.
Release time
The period for which the differential pressure
control allows the compressor to run with too low
an oil pressure during start-up and operation.
Operating range
The pressure range on the LP connection within
which the control can operate.
Function
If there is no oil pressure on starting, or if the oil

pressure falls below the set pressure during
operation, the compressor will stop afterthe
release time has elapsed.
The electrical circuit is divided into two completely
separate circuits, a safety circuit and an
operational circuit.
The timer (e) in the safety circuit is activated

when the effective lubricating oil pressure, the oil
differentialpressure{ihe
difference between the
oil pump pressure and suction pressure), is lower
than the set value.
The timer is deactivated when the oil differential
pressure is more than the set value plus the
contact differential.
TEST
RESET p-[^
Electrical diagram
R ST
Function
(continued)
The two diagrams below explain thie terms "oil

differential pressure" and "contact differential",
both have to be considered when using oil
differential pressure controls.
The first diagram shows the function of the

differential control during start; the second shows
the function of the control during operation.
Pos. A: Normal start-up

Ttie lubricating oil pressure is built up during start to the set/
fixed differential plus the contact differential, before the
timer cuts out (in this example, after 45 seconds). At point A
contactsTi-T2 open and timer (e) is stopped, i.e. normal
lubricating oil conditions for the compressor have been
established.
Pos. S:The lubricating oil pressure does not reach the set/
fixed differential plus the contact differential before the timer
period elapses. At point B the timer cuts out operational
circuit L-M and the compressor stops.
If a signal source is connected to terminal S, it will be
activated. Restart can only be performed after about
2 minutes by activation of the reset button, provided the
cause of the fault has been determined.
10 20
On start-up
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Pos. C:The lubricating oil pressure falls during operation

to a value lovi'er than the set/fixed differential.
At point C, safety circuitTi-T2 cuts in and the timer is
activated.
Pos. D;The lubricating oil pressure reaches the set/fixed
differential plus the contact differential before the timer
period elapses.
At point D, safety circuitTi-T2 cuts out and the timer is
stopped, i.e. normal lubricating oil conditions for the
compressor have been established.
Pos. H.-The lubricating oil pressure falls to a value lower
than the set/fixed differential during operation.
At point E, safety circuitTi-Ts cuts in and the timer is
activated.
Pos. F.The lubricating oil pressure remains lower than the
set/fixed differential. At point F the timer cuts out operational
circuit L-M and the compressor stops.
If a signal source is connected to terminal S, it will be
activated. Restart can only be performed after about 2
minutes by activation of the reset button, provided the
cause of the fault has been determined.
After start-up
It is important that a function check should be made to
ensure that the differential pressure control is operating as
it should.This checl< can be made by pressing the test
device (inside the unit on the left hand side).
When the test device is pressed down and held in this
position the compressor motor should stop after the release
time determined by the time relay has elapsed.
During operation
Dimensions and weight
-105ii
Su
* P^ <?'
mJ
o
J -
MP 54, 55
^1
-105-
in
LP
OIL
S_J
in
LIT
ra
eX5^3
=
o^
0 = 20
L LiL
MP 55A
i/V
We/gftt
approx. O.B kg
Expansion joint Type ERV yeHow

Application:
Construction:
General:
Type:
Rubber expansion joint for compensating movements and

misalignments in pipeline systems. Designed for general use:
Suitable for cold water, cooling water, petroleum based
products, mineral and dairy oils, DIN-fuels, natural gas, etc.
Maximum operating temperature +90 C, m a x i m u m working
pressure 16 bar, 10 bar for larger diameters.
Nitrile rubber (NBR) inner w a l l . Nylon reinforcements.
Oil-resistant neoprene rubber (CR) outer w a l l , electrically
conductive. Galvanized and yellow-chromated swiveling
steel flanges drilled according to DIN PN10 or PN16. Yellow
marking around the bellows.
Approved by Germanischer Lloyd and Bureau Veritas, also
fulfills VG 95959. Most sizes available in different neutral
lengths or w i t h flanges according to DIN PN6, PN25 or PN40,
ASA ISOLbs and BS10. Upon request available with
flanges in stainless steel or bronze.
ERV y e l l o w
Type:
ERV yellow
Range dimensions
n=<y--/d^.'<
Working
diameter
length
pressure
diameter
(mm)
(mm)
(bar)
(mm)
/:25
130
IS
DIN FNlO/16
115
85
32
130
16
DIN PN10/16
140
100
4x18
40
130
130
16
16
DIN PNlO/16
150
no
DIN PN10/16
165
125
145
160
..180
210
240
295
295
350
355
400
410
460
515
620
725
840
950
4x18
4x18
50
Outside
65
130
16
DIN PN10/16
185
130
16
DINPNlO/16
200
.1.30._:. _ 1 6 ; . . :
. DIN.eNlQ/1.6...
-.220
125
130
16
DINPNlO/16
250
150
130
16
DINPNlO/16
285
200
130
10
DINPNIO
340
200
130
16
DINPN16'
340
250
130
10
DINPNIO
395
250
130
16
DINPN16
405
300
130
10
DINPNIO
445
.;;-3oo'
130.
16
DINPN16
460
--:-350T^
200
iO-;
400
200
10
DINPNIO
500
200
10
DIN PN10
600
200
10
DINPNIO
DIN PN10;-- ::,
: 505 '
565
. :
670
780
700
250
10
DINPNIO.
895
800
250
10
DINPNIO
1015
900 ^
300
10
DINPNIO
1115
300
10
DINPNIO
1230
1000
Loggers
Class
80i
';
number X mm
Bolt holes
Nominal Neutral
PCD
(number
(mm)
1050
1160
xmm)
4x14 :
4x18
8x18
. 8x1B.
8x18
8x22
8x22
12x22
12x22
12x26
12x22
12x26
16x22
16x26
20x26
20x30
24x30
24x33
28x33
28x36
A/Iovements:
The m a x i m u m movements for type ERV yellow are stated

below. These values are valid for operating temperatures
up to +50 C and do not apply simultaneously.
The permissible movements are reduced by 25% for
temperatures beween +50 C and +70 C and by 40% for
temperatures between +70 C and +90 C. Use of a vacuum
ring causes a 50% reduction..
Nominal
Compression
Elongation
Lateral
Angular
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(degrees)
30
30
30
30
30
20
30
35
30
12
35
35
35
40
8
6
6
diameter
(mm)
25- 80
30
100- 150
30
200- 300
30
350- 600
40
700- 800
40
40
900-1000
Loggers
40
p^^S^^^^
Installation instructions
min. 15 mm
min. 1 mm
Build-in length:
The build-in length should preferably be equal to the neutral length of the
expansion joint. If this is not possible, an elongation of 5 mm (for type
yeliowsteel and expansion joints with PTFE lining only 3,5 mm) or a compression
of 10 mm is allowed for expansion joints with a neutral length of 130 mm.
For expansion joints with neutral lengths of 200 mm or more, these values can
be doubled. In case of elongation, check that the rubber collar of the expansion
joint is not drawn out of the flange groove. Please note that compression
or elongation during installation reduces the allowable movements of the
expansion joint.
neutral length
-l(V+5ramor-2IV+10 mm
Connecting flange:
Make sure that the correct type and size of connecting flange is used.
The inside diameter of the connecting flange must be the same as the inside
diameter of the expansion joint to provide a safe connection. Check that the
sealing surface of the connecting flange is not damaged to prevent leakage.
Placing the bolts:

Insert the bolts with the head towards the expansion joint to prevent damage
and tighten the bolts in diagonally opposite pairs. A space of at least 1 mm
must remain between the flanges after tightening. The distance between the
bolt and the expansion joint should be minimum 15 mm to prevent damage to
the expansion joint when the system is pressurized. Be SL
use Sil bolt
holes.
Radiation heat:
If welding or other heat generating operations have to take place after
installation, the expansion joirit should be protected.
General:
Try to install the expansion joint in such a way that the date of production is
visible. Check the condition of the expansion joint regularly.
Loggers
21
'SIT
VTG
VIBRATION ABSORBEFtS
VIBRATIG
EMPLOyMENT
VIBRATIG vibration absorbers are used to:
- Avoid that vibrations, produced from compresaor.
oome to Ihe circuit's lube.
- Reduce noise,
- Absorb ttiermic expantlona.
ITS panicuiar oonstructlon also allow the vertioai
installation, in fact, since the possibility of retention
of the condensate water in the corrugated zone near
the end fitting has been eliminated, no problems also
at temparaturee below Zero
SMEET
1/1
CONTflUCTION
The flexible i7>atal hose is manufactured in stainless
steel AISI 321, the external braid is in stainless
steel AISI 304, the sleeve and the braid lock ring
are in stainlaas steel, the end fitting is in copper
99,9, All WELDINGS are made through TIG
syatam in inert atmosphere.
EXAMPLE OF ORDER
VTG i a meana a vibration absorber having:
A = 18,2 8 = 1,0 E=255
EXAMPLE OF MOUNTING
NORMAL WORKING CONDITIONS

- Nominal pressure
P N 3 2 upio2"l/8
PN 25 over 2'5/a
- Min. Temperature
:
- 100 "C
- Max Temperature
:
+ 250 C
VIBRATIG vibration absoj-bers can also work at
higher temperatures provided that pressure is
reduced proportionately, (pis. kindly ask to our
technical office).
AIK<E
INSTALLATION
The connection between VIBRATIG vibration
absorber and the tube is normally affected through
brazing. The particular construction of VIBRATIG
allows the installer to effect the BRAZING OF
CONNECTION
to the tube WITHOUT
PARTICULAR CARES or protections from
overheating that could generate during this
operation
AtKrcfuee.
OASTie
Uf^VUT
OKg-CTK or VBHATlCWS
KS+I
H
VTG
INCHES
V"
a/8'
I'
5'
*4-
7/8"
METRIC
08
10
ia
18
3a
S,6
8^
105
12.B
KJi
tB,a
1.0
1.0
1.0
1,0
1.0
20
20
zo
20
25
J1
.'S
18
18
230
230
730
7S0
ON RgQUEST
f i f l 1'*
I'M
a'1/8
28
as
42
23.4
28,3
3,a
42,3
1,0
1,0
1.S
1,3
3S
26
36
25
27
27
27
32
2SS
26S
880
a-s.
?^''
3'1/B
/.
4"1ffl
/.,
78-J
IB
loa
S4.a
67,1
-*!i
78,J
aoU
la^
10B,S
I.S
2,0
3,0
a.o
3^
30
3S
BO
80
ao
3a
48
sa
70
tS';
104
104
1M
lao
33Q
S7S
430
51Q
B.:,
N?r
710.
710
aqo
aoo
'
"
contents
330
instruments
econ pressure gauges

bourdon t u b e type
all o f stainless steel
f i g . 366
DIN accuracy class 1.6: case 63 mm
DIN accuracy class 1.0: case 100 and 160 mm
fig. 366
other t y p e s awailable:
fig. 368')
fig. 737
fig. 736
fig. 738')
fig. 739')
') case 0 63 mm with centre back pressure entry
case Sizes:
connections:
pressure ranges:
63, 100 and 160 mm

case 63 mm
- BSPP'A" male threaded end
case 0 100 and 160 mm - BSPP'" male threaded end, also available with NPT
threaded end
pressure gauges for instrumentation air (TRM type) with NPT'A" male
threaded end
pressure gauges
vacuum gauges
vacuum/pressure gauges
instrumentation
air pressure gauges
- 0to0.6/1 ')/1.6/2.5/4/6/10/16/25/40/60/100/160/
250/400/600/1000/1600 ^) bar
- -1 to 0 bar, -1200 to 0 mbar
- -1 to 0.6/1.5/3/5/9/15 bar
- auxiliary scale: 0.2 -1 bar (3 -15 psi),
main scale: 0-100 % linear or 0 -10 square root
') min. pressure range for pressure gauges with case 0 63 mm

') pressure range 0/1600 bar for case 160 mm only
operating temperature:
ambient:-20to+60C
| medium: max.+100 "C
materials:
pressure connection - stainlesssteelWs.no. 1.4571

bourdon tube
- stainlesssteelWs.no. 1.4571
- instrumentation air pressure gauges up to 1.6 bar
overload pressure
case 0 63 mm: short time - full scale value
case 0 100/160 mm: short time-1.3 x full scale value
- stainlesssteelWs.no. 1.4301
movement
- stainlesssteelWs.no. 1.4301, with "blow-out disc"
case
- laminated safety glass
window
on request:
scale ranges
- Kpa, Mpa, ton etc. scale to customer's specification
pressure connection - with restriction screwto minimise pressure pulsation
pressure element
- cleaned and degreased (for oxygen service)
overload pressure, max. 100 %
operation temperature up to 200 C
accessories for pressure gauges: see page 338 to 340
Simensions:
surface/panel mounting flange with 3 holes:

case 0 63 mm: flange 0 85 mm x pcd 75 x 3.6 mm
case 0 100 mm: flange 132 mm x pcd 116 x 4.8 mm
case 0 160 mm: flange 196 mm x pcd 178 x 5.8 mm
other dimensions on request
contents
324
instruments
econ pressure gauges

general instructions f o r use of t h e Bcon pressure g a y g e s
Provided that the right selection has been made and that it
is applied correctly, the Econ industrial pressure gauge is
free
of maintenance for a long time.
Some factors that determine a failure-free operation are:
being damaged.
Seal NPT connections on the thread with tape or liquid
packing.
At pressures above 1600 bar, apply a metal tapered
sealing ring or a special high-pressure connection.
It is recommended to use a closing device with vent
screw between the pressure gauge and the measuring
point.
This enables to check the gauge at the zero point and to
replace a defective gauge during operation.
Slowly open the valve below the gauge to avoid pressure
impulses.
Close the valve below the gauge before blowing out the
pipes.
Suction or blowing in the low-pressure gauge connections
can damage the measuring unit.
At measuring media with high temperatures, such as
steam, the use of a syphon pipe filled with water or
provided with a cooling element is required (DIN 16255).
If a syphon pipe is not adequate to reduce the
temperature to lukewarm (DIN 16255), a pipe that is long
enough or an extra cooling element has to be applied.
The diameters of the pipes between the measuring point
and the pressure gauge should be a bit larger for liquids
than for gases. A diameter of about 6 mm is sufficient for
most liquids. With long measuring pipes and low
pressures pipe diameters up to about 20 mm are
recommended.
set-up a n d rOMntitig:
Set up the pressure gauge vibration-free or select a type

which guarantees a clear reading (liquid-damped type);
Mount the pressure gauge in a vertical position. Other
positions of the gauge - DIN 16256/57 - have to be
mentioned when ordering.
Use a stainless steel or plastic casing for outdoor
installation.
Protect the measuring system from pressure impulses or
reduce them to a minimum through a throttle screw or
shock absorber.
Mount the pressure gauge at such a distance from
sources of heat that radiation cannot make the
temperature of the instrument exceed 50 C (DIN 16255).
Pressure gauges have to be mounted with the right
spanner to the square or hexagon of the connecting
nipple.
Outside gas-pipe thread pressure gauges according to
DIN 16288 are suitable for bottom sealing: flat or profiled
rings, for example Econ fig. 3003 and 3005, should be
used as seals.
Use with a plastic-covered gas-pipe thread connection
union nut or a tension socket with a soft sealing ring
(Econ fig. 3006, 3001) to prevent the sealing area from
storage:
Pressure gauges that are stored temporarily should be

kept well-packed at a dry place with temperatures
between
5 C and 50 C.
pressure conversion table

kPa
MPa
kgf/cm^
(=kp/cm2)
mmwg
10^
100
0.1
1.01972
^ 10197.16
100
0.1
10^
1.01972.10-3
10.1972
0.01
0.001
10
1.0197.10-5
0.10197
10
1000
0.001
1,01972.10-2
101.972
10^
10^
1000
10.1972
101972
98066,5
98.0665
0.09807
9.807
9807
9.807.10=
0.0001
9806.65
9.80665
0.009807
0.1
1.3332
133.322
0.13332
0.1333.103
68.950
6894.76
6.895
0.006895
bar
mbar
Pa
bar
1000
mbar
0.001
Pa
10-5
kPa
0.01
MPa
10
kgf/cm^
(=kp/cm')
0.9807
980.7
rmmwg
0.000098
0.098
mwg
0.09806
98.0665
mmHg
(Torr.)
0.00133
Ib/in?
(=psi=psig)
0.06895
lb/in'
(=psi=psig)
mwg
mmHg
(=Torr.)
10.1972
750.062
14.5038
0.010197
0.7501
0.0145
0,000102
0,750.10-2
0.145.10-3
0.10197
7.5018
0.14503
101.972
7501.87
145.038
10000
10
735.56
14.2233
0.001
0.07355
0.00142
1000
73.556
1.4223
0.001359
13.5951
0.01359
0.01934
0.07031
703.07
0.70307
51.715
contents
344
instruments
glass tube thermometers

econ t h e r m o m e t e r s
aluminiunn casing
brass insert
;
m
according to DIN 16181 to DIN 16195

figure numbers:
type
straight
90 angle
135 angle
small
medium
large
fig. 1645
fig. 1646
fig. 1647
fig. 1648
fig. 1649
fig. 1650
fig. 1651
fig. 1652
fig. 1653
straight type
construction:
accuracy and scale marks:
casing
- V-shape, aluminium gold-coloured anodized, clear figures

by means of black marking on gold-coloured.background; scale
range in C.
insert
- brass, max. pressure 16 bar, BSPPV2" male threaded end.
the insert can be removed from the casing,
glass insert - capillary tube of prismatic solid glass with clear black scale
marking, blue spirit filling on white background.
flexible mounted glass tube, protected by rubber rings.
standardized according to DIN 16184,16188,16193
ranges and insert lengths:
small type
medium type
large type
-30/+50
0/120
-30/-t-50
0/120
0/160
-30/-I-50
0/120
0/160
insert length
" L " in m m
40
50
63
50
63
100
160
63
100
160
BSPP connection A
V2"
V2"
V2"
scale range C
spare parts:
on request:
135 angle type
90 angle type
glass tube
with insert of stainless steel

other standard scale ranges and/or insert length
otherthreaded end connections
scale with C/F
thermowells in various types and materials
dimensions fmm}:
H
small type
"
H,
110 130 30
medium type
150 170 36
large type
200 220
36
for dimensions L a nd A see table

above
contents
342
instruments
recommendations for the use and

m o u n t i n g of thermometers
installation:
idicating reaction:
Preferably a thermometer is to be mounted at an accessible place, free from

vibrations and excessive heat radiation. If, however, vibrations cannot be
avoided, a type for distance reading (with capillary tube) is recommended.
In this way the reading device can be mounted to a stable basis close to the
sensor. Liquid-damped thermometers sometimes offer another solution.
If a quick indicating reaction is required, a sensor suitable for direct immersion is

a good choice.
Here the temperature-sensitive part has to be totally immersed into the medium,
preferably slantingly against the flow direction or in the pipe bend. Avoid dead
angles as well as mounting in the direct environment of heating coils, steam
regulators, etc.
good
^^..J^
insert/thermowwell:
recommended
posilion in bend
In continuous processes the use of a thermowell is recommended which makes

it possible to dismount the thermometer at all times without influencing the
continuation of the process.
The slowing down of the heat transfer caused by the thermowell can be
compensated by:
Application of an insert/thermowell that is long enough, in pipes up to
0 100 mm a length equal to the diameter of the pipe is recommended. With
larger bores an insert length of half the diameter is sufficient.
Loss of conduction heat can be prevented by providing the connection
between the thermowell and the pipe with a good packing and, if necessary,
by application of extra external isolation.
Application of an insert that fits into the thermowell with only little tolerance (a
diameter difference of 0.2 mm is perfect).
In order to improvethecontact between the insert and the thermowell, a bit of
metallic fat (paste) is applied.
capillary tubes:
Capillary tubes of thermometers should be laid functionally and mounted solidly.

Sharp bends should be avoided. Extremely long capillary tubes (possible up to a
maximum of 20 m) are to be mounted with a loop with a minimum radius of
50 mm at every 5 meters. A capillary tube may not be exposed to temperatures
above 60 C.
check:
A thermometer has to be checked periodically for correctness of indication.

Reliable reference points are mixtures of ice and water for 0 C and boiling water
fori 00C.
If a possible inaccuracy is more than 3 % of the maximum value of the scale,
it is advisable to check the thermometer at more than one point.
Calibration of a thermometer can also be done by Econosto.
In that case the indication is at least checked at 3 measuring points
(about 25, 50 and 75 %) per 100 scale divisions.
This check is done through comparison with a calibrated thermometer in a
thermostat-controlled bath.
A certificate of this calibration is provided upon request.
POS QTY
01
2
02
2
03
2
04.1 2
04.2 2
05
4
06
2
07
2
08
2
09
2
2
10
11
2
12
2
13
2
14
2
15
2
16
2
17
1
18
1
19
1
1
20
21
1
22
1 .
23
1
24
1
25
1
26
2
27
4
4
28
29
2
30
2
31
1
32
2
33.1 2
33.2 2
34.1 1
342 1
35.1 1
35.2 1
36
1
37
1
38
1
39
2
40
1
41
1
42
2
43
1
44
1
45
4
46
1
47
1
48
1
49
2
2
50
51
1
LOWPfcssuf
Off.
Qrf-i
&
Hffl PRESSURE
jQrf-a*
0^ bar
0.5 bar
I?
42
bar
I 3/8*
REFRRQEM 'S 3 H T
i
[SU I
-w|-
:-!KPC
nsn
mmm
\vr
_rv
Insulatton 13mm
C ^
38
?îi
"sn
333
(sm
rssi
I 3/8*
10x0,9 fsin
REFRIGERANT
EVAPORATION TEMPERATtM
R-404a
-28Cmaan) 'C
CCMBtSe TEhfCRATlM
4i{inBan)
SUCTION LNE
3/4'
HOT GAS I M
3/B-
LEUOUNE
3/8'
COOJNQ CAPAOTY
2,8
CCM^SSQR S=EED
MOriK POWER
MAB< POWK S I H \ Y
500
RPM
35
KW
3 X 440 V 60 H3
CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
1 X 230 V 60 Hz
WATER ROW
m/H
PRESSU DROP (CCMJENSOf^
10
kPA
KW
aatnuT
oo
THST P i S S l ^ HCHSBE
25 Bar
TEST PRESSURE LOWSDE
17 Bar
32 " m
1000 ( nfcron 1 hour )
VACUUM TEST Mff#UM

OLCHARQE
2 X t S Lfr. BSE-62
MAXIMUM PPE lENETH
mmMmiimami
When refrigerant lines are soldered, nitrogen

must always be circulated through the lines, to
protect the Installation from dirt, scale, etc.
DESCRPTION
Compressor
Crankcase heater
MAKE
Bitzer
Bitzer
TYPE
IV-Y
70 Watt
E-motcr
ABB
M3AA-100-LB
Pulley E-mofor
Têrlock
V-belt
Spruit
Spruit
Spult
HH01278350
HH01262540
Low pressure gauge

LP. If, pressure conlrrt
Salor
Danfoss
SPB-132-2
R-2012-28mm
SPB-1450
0-12,5 Bar
KP-15
High pressure gauge
Salor
0-30 Bar
HH00726220
Oil seperafor
Valve
Si^tglass
Condenser
Castel
Castel
Danfos
Bitzer
5540/4
6420/2
sgn-6s
HH00720670
m00550160
K123HB2
HH01708750
Level Micator
Safety relief valve
Bitzer
Castel
BuRt on
28 Bar
Valve
Non return vve
Liquid recavo"
Level mdicatDr
Bitzer
Danfoss
Bitzer
Bitzer
But on
nrv-IOs
FS-55
HH00554480
HH01719740
built on
Valve
Charge valve
Danfoss
Casta
FRta* dri"
Si^tglass
Annaconda liquid line
Annaconda Suction line
Heafexchanger
Water r ^ vve
Danfoss
Danfoss
Astroflex
Astrcrflex
Oouchete
John, control
B-34448
6012/22
023U3565
HH00685600
m00720660
HH00556100
HH005517
Vilration damper
Temp, indicator
Pressure control
Loggers
Econosto
Econosto
Ball valve
HH PART 1^.
-
HH01272730
HH00726240
HH00578480
HH01936550
-
sgj-10s
VTG-3
VTG-6
HH01935710
HH01935740
HH00723990
slhe 1 1/2
V46BB9510
AGREEN r
1/2"
-
Fig. 1645
Fig. 366
Danfoss
B-34448
HH00685800
Ball valve
Danfoss
B-34449
HH00685810
FRter/drier
Solenoid v^ve
Danfoss
Daifoss
023U3553
EVR-6
HH00556020
HH00563130
Col for solenoid valve

Therm, exp. valve
Danfoss
Danfoss
230 V 50-60 Hz
TES-2
HH00554100
HH00594620
Orifice assembly
Danfoss
tto:01
HH00586280
Therm, exp. valve

Qrfice assembly
Drain heater
Evaporator
Danfoss
Daifoss
TES-2 mop -20

No.02
TAS-30
CTE34L8ED
HH00594700
HH00566290
HH00677260
HH0195473
CTE29M6
HH01955200
HH00582980
TAS
ECO
ECO
Evaporator
Thermostat
Danfoss
KP-73
(Defrost thermostat
High temp, alarm
Danfoss
Oaifoss
Temp, indicator
Pressure v^ve
VDH
KP-73
KP-73
TK-085
kvp-12
t>ion return valve

Vflratim danper
Frame
Danfoss
Sor
nrv-16s 3/4
HH00554800
60-03Z031/40sh 1.1 x 0,8 X 1,55 m -
Ball valve
Danfoss
B-34450
Danfoss
B-34450
Back steel
Temp M t a t o r
ST. 37
EUwl
500 mm
IC-91
Insulation
Armaflex
Ball valve
Danfoss
GMT
,,,,. :
19 mm
HH00582980
HH0058298
HH00503020
HH00568690
HH00685820
t)685820
Del Yard.
AIRFLOW EVAPORATER
J
%
-^^
no
10x0,8 mn
"35-^ 'twiI
LJ
OEHCEl
j ]csi T
nz-j
O
1 / r 22x3 nan)
r (32x3^ mn
fan I
aSTDUT
Rev.
^
32-Ol
Designer
Description
Scale;
&
Units:
Designer
1:1 Subject
: Jinting SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing tô.
Controller
: 12005055-450
FREON DIAGRAM PCP UNIT
Controller
Sheet
A2
1 of
Rev.
AvM
r46~i
11-04-'05
BITZER IV / K123HB W-130 Y
HEINEIMHOPMAIM ENGINEERING BV
(mSaWlMONlNa*HE11NGVENTlJi^
p . p . 9axg-075P<3ASgWlJnaw.''S;-T><NSyl^;<B-F''-wi,-.^:'i01 { C S O a - g S g g S O P - r ^ x i ' t O l
fi^pO-BSSS^d9-\wjiM.'-vr,nri^^!S!-tmn.trai
WATER CONNECTIONS BITZER K123H CONDENSOR

04)
Refrigerant connections
-Refrigerant connections
(01
Refrigerant
Safety valve connection
connection
-R 1/2"
R3/4"
Liqiud level indicator-
-R 1/2"
LTI
Condensor connections ace. DIN 2566. ND 10/16
SEAWATER OUT
y
">
SEAWATER IN
OJ
Ln
Ln
o
o
Ln
vO
REFRIGERANT
R-404a
OH. TYPE
BSE-322
WEIGHT UNIT
V - 250
RAL COLOR UNIT
6019
MOTOR POWER
3,5
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
3 X 440 V 6 0 Hz
COOLING CAPACITY
2,8
EVAPORATION TEMP.
- 2 8 (mean)
CONDENSING TEt-IP.
43 (mean)
KG
KW
KW
SEAWATER OUT
SEAWATER IN
n
^
0 50x50x4
nr^
^
1050
700
1100
800
FRONT VIEW
VIEW "A"
REQUIRED SPACE
FOR INSTALLATION
AND SERVICE CONDENSOR
o
o
"See refrigerant^diagram"
CO
06
05
04
900
Vibration damper
Typs &0-01KB1/40S1
03
02
01
POS QTY
c
LTI
FRAME
C-VIBRATION DAMPER'
SALOR
1100x800x1550
GMT
60-012.031
GAUGE PANEL
CONDENSOR
SALOR
BITZER
STANDARD
K123H
E-MOTOR
COMPRESSOR
ABB
BITZER
M2AA-100 L
IV
DESCRIPTION
MAKE
TYPE
40Stl
REMARK
Ln
Changed equipment color ace, remarks owner
REQUIRED SPACE FOR

INSTALLATION AND SERVICE
Rev. Description
Units;
Subject
mm
Controller
: Jinling SY
Reference No. -. 120.05.055 - 058
. 12005055-451
CONDENSING UNIT PCP
Controller
Sheet
A2
1 of
Rev.
AvM
11-04-'05
TOP VIEW
18-07-05
Designer
Scale:
Designer
1100
TOG
BITZER IV / K123H W-130 Y
H E I N E N S H O P M A N ENGINEERING B V
U=î3GNOlTlOMNlSB E A T W
P.O. ajx-07500AS*<nou.--T'^Ni9*'T*S,-icB-PHan;-t01 SSCO-SeS&eiO-rx;-Ol #300-^800589-vvwv>/.-**.-*->'!S.-i-i.i-i
DETAIL F
DIMENSIONS
_Pre-noun"tecl v a l v e s on t h i s side
75
500
450
7^^^
^:?
cW>
65
OESV>
r
r
rh'
108
402
12
Room
POSITION
OF DEFROST
Dimensions MM
A
B
Type
ELEMENTS
FREEZER ROOM
REFR. ROOM
CTE 34 L8 ED
CTE 29 M6
1030
680
Connections
730
380
In
Out
Driptroy
Drain
1/2"
1/2"
22mm
22mm
1 " BSP
r BSP
R8A
RBA:
RAS:
DEFROST ELEMENT IN COOUNG BLOCK

DEFROST ELEMENT IN DRIPTRAY
Rev.
Scale:
a
Designer
Description
Units:
Designer
1:1 Subject
: Jinling SY
Reference No : 120.05.055 - 058
mm Subject No. : JLZ 0<.0'.09 - 0',0'.12 Drawing No.
Controller
: 12005055-452
EVAPORATOR FREEZER / REFR. ROOM
Controller
Sheet
A3
: 1 of
Rev.
AvM
11-0(,-'05
TYPE "CTE"
M E I N E N Gl H O P M A N E N G I N E E R I N G
AIF1 C O N D I T I O N I N B
HEATIIMU
VENTILATION
BV
REPRIGERATION
P.O. Box Q - 0 7 6 0 QA SBknawr>c - T-vs NeoSo.Swnde - Rtc.-io: +Ol CPX - S e e e s C X : - rx: -OlflSJOQ- SOC 2 5 G-
i-. s e i.-va n S D p,in. OQ.>
10
Revision
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
12
15
17
Page Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
40
50
51
52

Cabinet view
i Control circuit diagram power supply
: Control circuit diagram compressor 1 + 2
Control circuit diagram Freezer room -20C
Control circuit diagram vegetable room +4C
Cable connection
i Cable connection
; Cable connection
State of diagram
A - Offer
D - As Constructed
E - Final
Meinen & Hopmen

Engineering B.V.
P O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Netheriands
www heinenhopmanco
Contents of ttiis document is CONFiDENTiAi.

Wtttiout prior permission of Heinen & Hopman
its not permitted to dupiicate or to inform third
Ali fights reserved.
Project 120.05.055-058
Title Cool-Freeze Unit
Table of contents
10
12
13
Designer
M.HelÎtenberg
Drawing no
PCP
Revision date
30-03-05
Project no
120.05.055
B.2
Project manager M. Aarlsen
14
16
17
18
5000155
Page A
19
20
ITT
14
16
15
ITT
18
191
20

Project number;
120.03.208
Title:
Cool Freeze Unit
Drawing number:
230623
Voltage:
3x440V
Frequency:
60 Hz
Current:
In max 11A
Protect:
IP54
Weight:
50 KG
SOLID STATE RELAY
H.@
Main current; Minimum size 1,5 mm^
Control current; Minimum size 1 m m '
H..D=2.
Green/Yellow
Blue
Red
Orange
Grey
=
=
=
=
=
Earth
DC
AC
External supply AC & DC for locking
Measuring
XO-OX1-0X2-0X3-0X4-0X5-0X6-0X7-0-
Power supply
Main power
Measuring wire
External current
'X2
INDICATOR
HOUR COUNTER
SIGNAL HORN
l'\l\'l'
,m
Symbol codes:
Blue
= Common
Black
= AC / DC
Symbols;
In accordance witti:
T1 T 2
Wiring colour code:

In accordance with;
lEC-EN
60204-1 ;2002
Safety of machinery-Electrical equipment
of machines. Part 1; General requirements
- ^
"^
.B...
.E...
.F...
.H...
.K...
.L...
.M...
.P...
.S...
.T...
.U...
.Y...
.X...
B
E
F
H
K
L
M
P
S
T
U
Y
X
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sensor
Heating element
Fuse holders/circuit breakers
Signal
Relay
Mains filter
Motor
Indicator
Switch / Push button
Transformer
Electrical equipment
Valves
Terminals
Ill
Data
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CABLE DESIGN BASED O N :
This control cabinet is completely checked for transport and installation.

It is possible during transport and installation that failures are generated.
Part 6, Chapter 2, Tabel 2.10.3 normal operations.
The electrical installer must check all these installation conditions and can be
CHECKED BY:
Firm:
Name:
Date:

Approval:
(v.2.3)
Contents ot this document is CONFIDENTIAL

Heinen & Hopfnan
Without prior permission o( Heinen & Hopman
Engineedng B.V,
ifs not permitted to duplicate oi to inform third
P.O.Box 9
parties any of the contents ot this document.
Copyright by Heinen & Hopman B,V.
3750 GA Spakenburg
All lights reserved.
The Nettierlards
www.helnenhopman.com
Project 120.05.055-058
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no POP
Project no
120.05.055
Project manager M. Aartsen
16
17
18
Page 1
19
20
12
13
16
17
19
F^Wa.
3F5
4H1^
3F8 3F11
5H5 5H10 5HJ4 5H8 6H5 6H12 6H15 7H5 7H10
I r ': r . 'I r
I
6S5
5S7
7S4
4T4
trj-cz!' B
o
6K8
o
5K6
5K11 6K10
mi T
rj
4F3-5
o o o G O O o o o
= O o
0 O O
o o o
CII
[Zl
o o o
0 o 0
o o o
o o o
4K17 7K8 40K4
6U4
* 1 Ififcl
"Bil:
OOO
ooo
tycol
3Q2
X1
ffl
X2
^ !
X5
in j||||{jl!||l|||||j|||jj|i
II 1 1 III
-'Di i
J
Manutadure: RITTAL
Type
Size
Colour
Sealing
: AE 1060
: 600x600x210
: RAL 7032
:IP54
Heinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GASpakenburg
Tlie Netherlands
www.heinonhopman.co
Contents of Ihis document is CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior petmission of Heinen & Hopman
parlies any of the contents of this document
Cop/figtit by Heinen & Hopman B V
Project 120.05.055-058
Cabinet view
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
POP
Revision dale
30-03-05
Project no
120.05.055
^TT
16
17
18
Page
2
19
20
10 I
11
12
14
15
-M.2
-M.2
L3'
3 !
-3F5 I
-3F8
7A
7A
GV2-ME14tGV-AE11
-3Q2
AB8
\X z1^
GV2-ME14*GV-AE11
GV2-ME07+GV-AE11
f4f\
-5K6
;5.6
-/4.2
\ \ \
-5K1
/5.11
-6K1
/6.10
P999
99
999
19 9 9 91
lLllL2lL3lPE
-supply
3X440VAC 60H2
lmax=11A
{":
Meinen i Hopman
Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 CA Spakenburg
The Netheriands
www. tie i ne n h op man, CO
Pi
V W
M
-3M5
COMPRESSOR 1
P=3,45kW ln=7A

Wtltiout ptior permiBBion of Heinen & Hopman
iffi not peimitted to duplicate or to irriorm third
parties any ol the contents of this document.
C o w r i g h t by Heinen 4 Hopman B.V.
-3M8
COMPRESSOR 2
P=3,45kW lr=7A
Project 120.05.055-058
7 I
8 \ 9
-3611
DEFROSTER
P=1,4kWln=1,84A
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
PCP
Revision date
30-03-05
Project no
120.05.055

10
11
12
15
16
17
18
Page
3
19
20
10
11
13
14
15
16
20
/3,19-
'Â
-4F5
10A
4A
D3210
D3104
-4H16
XB5-AVM1
power on
LED (whJe)
4K17
(X)
^^
power on
^
A2
G2R+P2RF-08-S
22
2p
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V,
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenbufg
The Netherlands
www.heinenhopmar.com
r-

it's not permitted to duplicate or to infoim third
parties any of the contents o( this document.
Cop/right by Meinen & Hopmar B.V,
I
Project 120.05.055-058
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no POP
Project no
120.05.055
14
16
17
18
Page 4
19
2 r
10
-SSSQA
no. 1
1 water
waler''
press, switch
11 1
12 I
13 I
14 I
15 I
16 I
17 I
18 i
19 I
20
-5S5
no. 2 water
press, switcli
102
1 = COMPRESSOR 1
'Pi^W
0 = OFF
-5S5.1
KP-15
L O W PRESSURE
AUTORESET
> 0.1 BAR
L O W PRESSURE
AUTO RESET
> 0.1 BAR
m\
m\
<
< 1,3 BAR
>
BJ
]i 7
-5K6
6
-3F5
/3.5
2 = COMPRESSOR 2
1
E3-V-
HIGH PRESSUR
M A N U A L RESET
> 20 BAR
HIGH PRESSUR
M A N U A L RESET
> 20 BAR
&
>
- %'
t Y
-3F5
/3.5
XI
-5HS
XB5-AVM3
compr. 1 on
LED (green)
M
^
5K6 p ^ I
compr.1
-5H8
XBS-AVM4
A2
high press.
LED (red)
/3.5
-SH10
XB5-AVM3
compr. 2 on
LED (green)
(X)
^ ^
X2
5K11
,
compr.2
21
Meinen & htopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Boy 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
WW, heinenhoprnan.com

it's nol permitted to duplicate or to inform third
fi\ lights reserved.
-5H14
XB5-AVM4
compr. 1-2 overload
LED (red)
LC1-D09P7
1-
()
-5E17
carter
: heat.70W
-5E16
carter
heat.row
/3.B
/3,8
/3.5
/3.5
I
|A2
5^
I3J:
14"
21
22.
Project 120.05.055-058
Control circuit diagram compressor 1 + 2
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
POP
Revision date
30-03-05
Project no
120.05.055
Project .manager M.Aartsen

13
14
15
16
17
18
Page
5
19
14
16
17
18
iTT
-6S5fA-U
er room
-6U4
defrost clock
FRI 77G
SETTING CLOCK
RED TRIPPER
RED TRIPPER
RED TRIPPER
GREEN TRIPPER
GREEN TRIPPER
OTF?
(6)
(6)
(6)
(7)
(4)
08.00
16.00
24.00
25
28
-6F13
1 i
-7K8
/7.8
-esioFT-A
-6S7Q
room
11 : KP-73
f defrost stop^
KP-73
1A
-6si6r~i
higft temp.
-X2
X1
-6H5 (X)
XB5-AVM3
fan on
LED (green)
^^
:6Y7X
liquid
valve
-6K8 I
capacity
G2RP2RF-08-S
-6KtO I
defrost
LC1-D09P7
.6H12
XB5-AVM5
. defrost on
LED (yellow)
.6E13
110W
drain
(X)
^ X2
^
-6H15 ( X )
XB5-AVM4
^
tiigh temp
LED (red)
12.10
/3.11
/3.11
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spal<enbUFg
The Nellierlands
WrtW.heinenliopman.co

Without prior permission o( Meinen & Hopman
its not permitted to duplicate or to inform ttiird
partieB any of the contents of this document.
Ali riglits reserved
Project 120.05.055-058
Control circuit diagram Freezer room -20C
12
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no PCP
Project no
120.05.055
Project manager M. Aartsen Page 6

14
16
17
18
19
10
11 1
12 I
13 I
14 I
15 I
16 I
17 !
18 I
19 I
1 .
-7S4
vegetable room
-6K8
;6.8
-7S7
;room temp,
KP-73
7M* ( a }
fa" S T : ;
0.5A
|N
-THS
XB5-AVM3
fan on
LED (green)
(X)
^ X2
^
ol
^^\
liquid
valve

Meinen & Hopman
Engineering B.V,
P.O.Box 9
parties any ofttie contents of this document.
3750 GA Spakenbutg
The Netherlands
www.tieinenhopman.com
-7S10Q-f
room max. temp.
KP-73
-ec5
: capacity
G2R+P2RF-0B-S
-7H10
XB5-AVM4
high temp
LED (red)
Project 120.05.055-058
Designer
Title
Cool-Freeze Unit
Control circuit diagram vegetable room +4C
9
10
11
12
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no POP
Project no
120.05.055
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
10 I
11 \
12 i
13 I
14 i
15 i
16 I
17 i
18 I
19 i
20
i12 U
4
-4K17
(4,17
40K4I
Helnen & Hopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750GASpakenburg
The Netherlands
wiwi/.heinenhopmar\.com
Contents of thia documentisCONFIDENTIAL

Without prior permission of Keinen & Hopman
it's not permitted to duplicate or to inlotm third
-40K4
\
4
12|
\
\
general alarm
Designer
Project 120.05.055-058
8
11
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no PCP
Project no
120.05.055

13
15
17
18
19
20
-000
s i
10
1 1 1
12
Gland Metr.
4x2,5mm=^ PE
-101
4x1,50^1== PE
-102
F^
1
^
1
15
16
17
18
19
Object
gn/ye
-PE
-SUPPLY:PE
-3Q2:2
-SUPPLY:L1
lmax=11A
'-3Q2:4
-SUPPLY:L2
-3Q2:6
-SUPPLY:L3
Compressor 1
-X1:1
-3M5:U
-XI :2
-3M5:V
-X1:3
-3M5:W
P=3,4kW ln=7A
Compressor 2
-X1:4
-3M8:U
-X1:5
-3M8:V
-XI :6
-3M8:W
P=3,4kW ln=7A
Defroster
-XI :7
-3E11:U
-XI :8
-3E11:U
-XI :9
-3E11:W
-X2:1
-5S3:
-X2:2
-5S3
freezer room
Water pressure switch
High/low press.compr. 1
-X2:3
-5S5.1:A
-X2:4
-5S5.1:B
-X2:5
-5S5.1:C
-X2:6
-5S5.1:D
Project 120.05.055-0.58
Designer
Project no
Revision
Cool-Freeze Unit
Cable connection
7
10
11
20
Origin
Title
1
Core
gn/ye
Contonts of this document is CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior permiBsion of Meinen & Hopman
Copyright by Hainen 4 Hopman B.V,
All rights reserved
14
gn/ye
5x1,5mm'PE
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V,
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenbutg
The Nelbetlands
swAv.he i nan hopman.com
gn/ye
3x1,5mm^PE
-202
13
gn/ye
4x1,5mm='PE
-201
gn/ye
4x1,5mm^PE
-103
Cable type
Cable no:
IN
12
13
14
M.Hekkenberg
15
Drawing no PCP
16
120.05.055
17
18
19
20
-203
10
11
12
Gland Metr.
Meinen 8. Hopman
Contents of this document Is CONFIDENTIAL
Wthout prior perrr^lssion of Helnen & Hopman
Engineering S.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
Copyright Ijy Heinen & Hopman B.V,
All rights resenred
Ttê Netherlands
2
i
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
ffi
I
16
-X2:7
-5S10:A
-X2:8
-5S10:B
-X2:9
-5S10:C
-X2:10
-5S10:D
-X2:11
-5E16:
-X2:12
-5E16:
-X2:13
-5E17:
-X2:14
-5E17:
10
11
-X2:15
-6M4:L
-X2:16
-6M4:N
20
Freezer room thermostat
-X2:17
-6S7:4
-X2:18
-6S7:1
Freezer room liquid valve
-X2:19
-6Y7:A1
-X2:20
-6Y7:A2
Freezer room defrost stop
-X2:21
-6S10:1
-X2:22
-6S10:2
Freezer room drain heater
-X2:23
-6E13:
-X2:24
-6E13:
12
ig
Freezer room 2x fan
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no PGP
Revision date
30-03-05
Project no
13
14
120.05.055
Revision
l
Carter heating compr. 2
Project 120.05.055-058
Cable connection
1
18
Carter heating compr. 1
gn/ye
High/low press.compr. 2
gn/ye
17
Object
gn/ye
3x1,5mm'PE
run
15
gn/ye
3x1,5mm'PE
-210
Origin
gn/ye
3x1,5mm'PE
-209
14
gn/ye
3x1,5mm'PE
-208
gn/ye
3x1,5mm'PE
-207
13
gn/ye
3x1,5mm=^PE
-206
Core
3x1,5mm='PE
-205
5x1,5mm'PE
-204
Ljfc:
Cable type
Cable no:
15
16
17
18
Page 51
1
ig
20
Cable no:
-211
10
Cable type
11
Gland Metr.
L ^
m
!
Origin
15
16
-X2:25
-6S15:4
-X2:26
-6S15:1
-X2:27
-7M4:L
-X2:28
-7M4:N
10
11
-X2:29
-7S7:
-X2:30
-7S7:
19
20
Vegetable room liquid valve
-X2:31
-7Y7:A1
-X2:32
-7Y7:A2
Vegetable room hightemp. therm
-X2:33
-7S10:
-X2:34
-7S10:
General alarm
-X5:1
-X5:2
12
Vegetable room thermostat
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
PGP
Revision tiate
30-03-05
Project no
120.05.055
Revision
i
18
Vegetable room fan
Project 120.05.055-058
Cable connection
7
Freezer room hightemp. therm.
gn/ye
17
Object
gn/ye
3x1,5mm^PE
Contents of this docuinentis CONFIDENTIAL

Meinen & Hopman
Without prior permission ot Heinen & lôpman
Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
Copyright t]y Heinen & Hopman B.V,
M rights reserved.
The NetherlandB
wwtw.heinenhopman.com
4
1
5
1
6
2
1
3
14
gn/ye
3x1,5mm^PE
-501
gn/ye
3x1,5mm^PE
-215
13
gn/ye
3x1,5mm^PE
-214
gn/ye
3x1,5mnn^PE
-213
12
Core
Sxl.Smm^PE
-212
CM
13
14

i
15
16
17
18
Page 52
1
19
20
10
Revision
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
30-03-05
16
Page Title
1
2
3
50

Cabinet view
: Cable connection
State of diagram
A - Offer
D - As Constructed
E - Final
Meinen & Hopman

EngineetingB.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 CA Spakenburg
The Nethedands
Vkww.heinenhopman Co
Contents ot this document is CONPIDENTIAL

Witliout prior permission of Heinen & Hopman
it's not permitted to dupiicate ot to inform third
parties any of the contents ot this document
Copyright by Heinen i Hopman B V.
Ali nghts resen/ed.
Project 120.05.055-058
Title Temperature Panel
Table of contents
Designer
M.Hekltenberg

Revision
10
B.2
Drawing no
TP
Project no
120.05.055
15
16
~irT
18
Page A
13
14
15
16
17

Project number:
Title:
Drawing number:
Voltage:
Frequency:
Current:
Protect:
Weight:
Symbols:
120.03.208
Temperature panel
230623
1x230V
60 Hz
In max 100mA
IP54
20 KG
Wiring colour code:

In accordance with:
lEC-EN
60204-1 :2002
Safety of machinery.Electrical equipment
of machines. Part 1: General requirements
Main current: Minimum size 1,5 mm'
Blue
= Common
Black
= AC / DC
In accordance with:
Symbol codes:
Control current: Minimum size 1 mm'
.@
H.D=:^
GreenA'ellow
Blue
Red
Orange
Grey
=
=
=
=
=
XO-oX1-0X2-0X3-0X4-0X5-0X6-0X7-0-
Power supply
Main power
Measuring wire
External current
Earth
DC
AC
External supply AC & DC tor locking
Measuring
'X2
T1 T2
SOLID STATE RELAY
INDICATOR
HOUR COUNTER
SIGNALHORN
riifi"-
.TS
f^
rM
1 , 1
1^

.B... B = Sensor
.E... E = Heating element
.F...
. H . . . F = Fuse holders/circuit breakers
.K... H = Signal
.L... K = Relay
.M... L = Mains filter
.P... M = Motor
.S... P = Indicator
.T...
. U . . . S = Switch / Push button
.Y... T = Transformer
.X... U = Electrical equipment
Y = Valves
X = Terminals
Ill
Data
RELAY
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CABLE DESIGN BASED ON:
CHECKED BY:
This control cabinet is completely checked for transport and installation.

It is possible during transport and installation that failures are generated.
Part 6, Chapter 2, Tabel 2.10.3 normal operations.
The electrical installer must check all these installation conditions and can be
Firm:
Name:
Date:

Approval;
(v.2.3)
Heinen Hopman
Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenbutg
Ttie Netherlands
wvÂ^/.hetnenôpman.con
Contents of this document i& CONFIDENTIAL

Without prior permission ol Heinen & Hopman
parties any of the contents of this document
Cowfight by Heinen 4 Hopman B.V
All rights resen/ed.
Project 1 2 0 . 0 5 . 0 5 5 - 0 5 8
Designer
Title
Temperature Panel
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no TP
Project no
120.05.055

16
17
18
19
20
10
11
14
12
15
17
19
20
FREEZER ROOM
-20
3U11
3U14
[;EGETABLE ROC
G __+4_
3Q2
0L--
Manufacture: RITTAL
Type
:AE1032
Size
: 200 X 300 X 120
Colour : RAL 7032
Sealing : IP 54
Hainen ! Hopman
Engineerings V.
P.O.Box 9
37S0 GA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
www.heinenhopman.co

it's not permitted to duplicate or to Inform third
All fights reserved,
Project 120.05.055-058
Cabinet view
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no TP
Revision date
30-03-05
Project no
120.05.055
Project manager IVI.Aartsen
12
13
15
16
17
18
Page 2
19
20
10
-3F5
11
16
17
18
19
!^X
2
15
.3U14
EWTM 101
vegetable room +4C
1
20A
14
13
400mA
-3U11
EWTM 101
freezer room -20C
-302
- []
100 mA
12
S
4
t^
olllo
""'if
(1
1
-'^2 9
41
fSI
-3R11|4
freezer/J
room PTC T
xo ,
IRUU
vegetable/J
room PTC T
)<
L
N PE
i
i
i
1L I N I PE
-SUPPLY
1X230VAC 50Hz
!_.,::
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B.V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Wetherlands

C o p / r i g h t by Meinen & Hopman 8-V.
Project 120.05.055-058
Designer
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no
TP
Title
Revision date
30-03-05
Project no
120.05.055
Temperature Panel
7 \
'B \
I
Project manager M. Aarlsen

14
15
16
17
18
Page 3
19
20
i l
2 I
3 I
4 I
-000
7 I
s i
9 I
3x1,5mnn^PE
-301
3x1mm^PE
KJ
1 I
Meinen & Hopman

Engineering B V.
P.O.Box 9
3750 GA Spakenburg
The Netherlands
2 I
3 I
11
5 1
12
13
7 I
a l
9 I
15
Core
Origir
Object
16.00
gn/ye
-PE
-SUPPLY:PE
-X0:L
-SUPPLY:L
-XO:N
-SUPPLY:N
16
17
18
19
20
gn/ye
PTC freezer room -20C
-X3:1
-3R11:
-X3:2
-3R11:
gn/ye
PTC vegetable room +4C
-X3:3
-3R14:
-X3:4
-3R14:
Designer
Project 120.05.055-058
Cable connection
14
Gland Metr.
16.00

ifs not permitted to duplicate or to inform third
parties any of the contents of INs document.
Ail rights reserved.
4 I
10
16.00
SxImm^'PE
-302
e l
Cable type
Cable no:
in
5 I
M.Hekkenberg
Drawing no TP
Project no
120.05.055

10
11
12
13
14 1
15 i
16 1
17 1
18 1
19 1
20
k; ,
. .WltoIt--tiSUi-
Compressor start-up instruction

o Before the start-up of the compressor, the crankcase heater must be energized for at
least 24 hours.
The compressor suction valve must be opened one-turn starting from closed position.
The liquid valve at the outlet of the condenser must be closed.
Start the air conditioning fan and the seawater pump (if applicable), set the RT-140
cooling thermostat at the desired set point.
O Start the compressor and wait until the compressor stops on the low-pressure switch.
After the compressor has stopped, open the compressor suction valve and slowly open
the liquid valve.
0 The compressor will re-start automatically.
If applicable, open after 30 minutes the oil return valve from the oil-separator.
Compressor stop instruction

o Close the liquid valve at the outlet of the condenser.
Wait until the compressor stops on the low-pressure switch.
Stop the seawater pump (if applicable) and close the compressor suction valve.
O If applicable, close the oil return valve from the oil-separator.
For detailed information read instruction manual
letriebsanleitunp
Operating Instructlonis
imsm
ostoctio
"^-i^
*.^&:iiîj!:jtadZerai,.. ^
Offene
Hubkolbenverdichter
Open drive reciprocating

compressors
Compresseurs ouverts
pistons
Typen
Types
Types
0 ( Y ) . . VIIW(Y)
Inhalt
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sicherheit
Anwendungsbereiche
Montage
Elektrischer Anschluss
In Betrieb nehmen
Betrieb/Wartung
Auer Betrieb nehmen
Seite
1
3
4
11
13
18
23
0(Y)..V1IW(Y)
Content
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Safety
Application ranges
Mounting
Electrical connections
Commissioning
Operation / Maintenance
De-commissioning
Page
1
3
4
11
13
18
23
0(Y)..VI1W{Y)
Sommaire
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Page
Scurit
Champs d'appiications
Montage
Raccordement lectrique
Mise en service
Service / Maintenance
Mise hors de service
1
3
4
11
13
18
23
1 Sicherheit
1 Safety
1 Scurit
Diese Kltemittel-Verdichter sind zum

Einbau in Maschinen entsprechend
der EG-Maschinenrichtlinie
diese Maschinen eingebaut worden
bereinstimmen (anzuwendende
Normen: siehe Herstellererklrung).*
These refrigeration compressors are

intended for installation in machines
according to the EC Machines
Directive 98/37/EC.They may be put
to service only, if they have been
installed in these machines according
to the existing instruction and as a
whole agree with the corresponding
provisions of legislation (standards to
apply: refer to Manufacturers Declaration).*
Ces compresseurs frigorifique sont prevus

pour tre incorpors dans des machines
conformment la Directive CE Machines 98/37/CE. Leur mise en service
est uniquement aulorise s'ils ont t
incorpors dans des machines conformment la prsenle instruction et si ces
machines rpondent dans leur totalit
aux rglementations legales en vigueur
(les normes qu'il faut utiliser: voir la
Declaration du Constructeur).*
Autorisiertes Fachpersonal
Smtliche Arbeiten an Verdichtern
und Klteanlagen drfen nur von qualifiziertem und autorisiertem Fachpersonal ausgefhrt werden.
Authorized staff
All work on compressors and refrigeration systems shall be carried out by
qualified and authorized refrigeration
personnel only.
Die Verdichter sind nach dem aktuellen Stand der Technik und entsprechend den geltenden Vorschriften gebaut. Auf die Sicherheit der Anwender
wurde besonderer Wert gelegt.
The compressors are constructed

Les compresseurs sont congus d'apres

ies regies de I'art actuelles et conformment aux prescriptions en vigueur. Une
attention particu liere a t apporte la
scurit de l'utilisateur.
* Information is valid for countries of tfie EC
" Indication vaiable pour ies pays de la CE
Personnel autoris
Tous les travaux ainsi que I'entretien de
compresseurs et d'installations frigorifi ques ne peuvent tre executes que par
du personnel qualifi et autoris.
Sa:;rii3i3i?Sii:-i^S:-^-^
' Hinweis gilt nur fr Lnder der EU

gesamten Verdichter-Lebensdauer
aufbewahren.
Retain these Operating Instructions

during the entire lifetime of the compressor.
Garder cette instruction de service pendant toute la dure de service du compresseur.
Restgefahren
Residual hazards
Dangers rsiduels
Vom Verdichter knnen unvermeidbare Restgefahren ausgehen.

arbeitet, muss deshalb diese Bedienungsanleitung sorgfltig lesen!

compressors are unavoidable.
must therefore read these operating
instructions carefully!
Le compresseur peut tre la source de

dangers rsiduels inevitables.
travaille sur eet appareil dort lire attentivement cette instruction de service !
Es gelten zwingend
die einschlgigen Sicherheits-Vorschriften und Normen (z. B. EN
378, EN 60204 und EN 60355),
Sicherheitsregeln,
die EU-Richtlinien,
Lnder spezifische Bestimmungen.

specific rules for the prevention of
accidents (e. g. EN 378, EN 60204
and EN 60355),
generally acknowledged safety
standards,
EU directives,
national regulations.
les prescriptions et normes de scurite
relatives (par ex. EN 378, EN 60204 et
EN 60355),
les regies de scurite gnralement
reconnues,
les dispositions spcifiques du pays
concern.
Sicherheitshinweise
Safety references
Les indications de scurite

zu vermeiden.

hazards.
Safety instructions must be stringently
observed!
sont des instructions pour vrter les

mises en danger.
Respecter scrupuleusement les indications de scurite!
Tin.
^ I j Attention!
XI '^ Instructions on preventing possil i . J ble damage to equipment.
pijrf Attention!
fef J Instruction pour viter une possible
E a mise en danger d'appareils.
^y^ Vorsicht!
|V ^4 minderschwere Gefhrdung von
m^ Personen zu vermeiden.
W/Ti Caution!
X Instructions on preventing a pos l * i sible minor hazard to persons.
55
^/m
1^-^
^ S
^ B
^ A Q Warnung!
Z_A Anweisung um eine mgliche
l schwere Gefhrdung von
m^ Warning!
i - A Instructions on preventing a possible severe hazard to persons.
PJPJ Avertissement!
'" <d Anweisung um eine mgliche

"i Gefhrdung von Gerten zu verffis meiden.
f ^
'.^g
^ 3
mM
Gefahr!
Anweisung um eine unmittelbare
schwere Gefhrdung von
rJC7- Danger!
Instructions on preventing an
immediate risk of severe hazard
to persons.
Prudence!
mise en danger benigne de personnes.
/ ^ Instruction pour viter une possible

^ S mise en danger grave de per^ S sonnes.
m
Danger!
Instruction pour une imminente mise
Indications de scurite generates
A"Warnung!
Der Verdichter ist im Anlieferungszustand mit Schutzgas ge-
^^
P j ^ Avertissement!
A la livraison, le compresseur est
rempli d'un gaz de protection et
sont en surpression (environ
0,5 .. 1 bar).
porter des lunettes de protection !
'J
fllt (berdruck ca. 0,5 .. 1 bar).

Bei unsachgemer Handhabung sind Verietzungen von
Haut und Augen mglich.
VS.
Ii,.2ai::s:5a^*t2rî-iKfflaBJ>tt^>i
Warning!
The compressor is under pressure with a holding charge to a
pressure of 0.5 to 1 bar above
atmospheric pressure.
Incorrect handling may cause
injury to skin and eyes.
I Wear safety goggles while working on compressor.
i;aw;i.^?.7i-;^-Ki
KB-510-3
Sits^r:.srrxcKx-^^^sK^!-t'irK.i*e
rxaSK^Bstmî^TSiSftaiKtK/iiii-
Vorsicht!
Caution!
During operation surface temperatures exceeding 60C or
below 0C can be reached.
Serious burns and frostbits are
possible.
Lock and mark accessible
sectors.
Before working on the compressor:
Switch off and allow to cool
down.
Im Betrieb knnen OberflchenTemperaturen von ber 60C

bzw. unter 0C auftreten.
Schwere Verbrennungen und
Erfrierungen sind mglich.
Zugngliche Stellen abspenên
und kennzeichnen.
Vor Arbeiten am Verdichter:
Gert ausschalten und abkhlen
lassen.
Prudence !
resp. en-dessous de 0C pourront
tre atteintes.
Des graves brulures et gelures sont
5. ^* possible.
? - Possibilit de graves brulures.
Farmer et marquer les endroits
accessibles.
Avant les travaux au compresseur:
t
. . . Artter et refroidlr celui-ci.
A'
HI
f
*i
Bei Arbeiten am Verdichter, nachdem

die Anlage in Betrieb genommen
wurde:
For any work on the compressor after

the plant has been commissioned:
our des travaux au compresseur apres

rinstallation a t mise en service:
AJ Warnung!
Verdichter steht unter Druck!
m;n Warning!
Avertissement!
Lors des interventions non-adquates graves blessures sont possibles.
Retirer la pression sur le compresseur !
Danger!
Les cheveux, les mains ou les vtements peuvent tre "happs" par
I'entraTnement par courroies !
Possibilit de graves blessures.
Absolument scuriser la zone de
rentralnement par une protegecourroie !
Bei unsachgemen Eingriffen

sind schwere Verletzungen mg, lieh.
Verdichter auf drucklosen
' Zustand bringen!
- ' Schutzbrille tragen!
Z^,
fi?
p:*|
'Uîh
fi.?^
ra
Gefahr!
Haare, Hnde oder Kleidung
"I knnen von Riementrieb erfasst
j werden!
^ ^ Schwere Verletzungen mglich.
^f^y-a Antriebsbereich unbedingt mit
.-' \ einer trennenden Abdeckung
^M1 sichern: Riemenschutz!
2 Anwendungsbereiche
J
t
-j
BITZER B 5 2
sxnEm!iaaaii:3t;}iâiiBfxaitia::x!i-iz7isi^^sie^xtisi&ai^^
KB-510-3
HFKW/HFC
R134a-R404A-R507A
t^ < 55'C
BITZER BSE 32
R134a/tj.>55'C
BITZER BSE 55
Siehe Prospekt KP-510 und BITZER-Software

see bnjchure KP-510 and BITZER software
v u r brochure KP-510 et logiciel BITZER
Einsalzgrenzen
Application limits
Limites d application
3)
(H)FCKW / (H;CFC
R22(R12-R502)
lfllung
Oil charge (T)
Charge d huile
Weitere Kltemittel auf Anfrage

Erfordert spezielle Wellenabdichtung
(fr Typ VIW(Y) & VI1W(Y) auf
Anfrage)
Alternativ-Ole siehe Technische
Infbrmaonen KT-500 und KT-510
Danger!
Hair, hands or clothing can be
caught In the belt drive!
Serious injuries are possible.
The area of the drive must be
secured with a separating cover:
belt guard!
Zulassige Kltemittel
Permitted refrigerants (D
Fluidrs frigoriênps autonss
ffl
Compressor is under pressure!

In case of inproper handling
severe injuries are possible.
compressor!
Further refrigerants upon request

Requires a special shaft seal
(for types VIW & VII(Y) upon request)
For alternative oils see Technical
Information KT-500 and KT510
(D
Autres fluides frigorignes sur demande

Garniture d'tanchit speciale obligatoire
(pour les types VIW & Vll(Y) sur
demande)
Huiles alternatifes, voir Informations
Techniques KT-500 et KT-510
3aasW5!aw5aS'iSaitiE:-,E
(f
Bei Betrieb im Unterdruck-Bereich,
Gefahr von Lufteintritt auf der Saugseite. Besondere Manahmen knnen
erforderlich werden.
For Operation in the vacuum range,

danger of air admission at the suction
side. Special measures might become
necessary.
En cas de fbnctionnement en pression subatmosphrique, danger d'introduction d'air au

ct d'aspiration. Des mesures particulires
pourraient devenir ncessaire prendre.
Im Falle von Lufteintritt:
In the case of air admission:
En cas d'introduction d'air:
Achtungl
Chemische Reaktionen mglich
sowie berhhter Verfissigungsdruck und Anstieg der
Druckgastemperatur.
Warnung!
Bei Lufteintritt ggf. kritische
Verschiebung der Kltemitteli Zndgrenze
: Lufteintritt unbedingt vermeiden!
I Attention!
Chemical reactions possible as
well as increased condensing
pressure and discharge gas
temperature.
; Attention I
I J Reactions chimiques possibles et
^* pression de liquefaction excessive
' " et aussi temperature du gaz de
refbulement augmente.
Warning!
In case of air admission a critical
shift of the refrigerant ignition
limit is possible
i Absolutely avoid air admission!
2S Avertissement!
En cas d'introduction d'air disloca, ^ tion critique de la limite d'inflammag bilit de fluide frigorigne
Eviter absolument introduction d'air!
3 Montage
3 Mounting
3 Montage
3.1 Verdichter transportieren
3.1 Compressor transport
3.1 Transport du compresseur
Verdichter verschraubt auf der Palette

transportieren.
Transport the compressor on a pallet,
Transporter le compresseur soil visse sur

une palette.
3.2 Preparation
3.2 Preparation
Before assembling the oil chamber of

the shaft seal must be filled with oil!
Tip the compressor according figure 1.
Avant le montage, le compartiment d'huile de la garniture d'tanchit doit tre

rempli d'huile ! Renverser le compresseur
suivant figure 1.
Flg. 1 Filling of the oil chamber
Fig. 1 Remplissage du compartiment d'huile
1. 3.2 Vorbereitung
Vor der Montage muss die lkammer
der Wellenabdichtung mit l gefllt
werden! Dazu Verdichter kippen entsprechend Abbildung 1.
J>-
Abb. 1 lkammer fllen
^lTEClJ^r.:S^g?i^TC3L3ft..MJT>SK.-âf^f.<?.Htre-..^'..g.^j^^-.rt^.T....r..
^"
..^-T.-^Tr.-.v-.iii^. ..^gf!>y^--wl.*-w*.J..T.H.a.wrgîwr-i:"rii.-s-.^xn^t^^vi.^t^^-.
^^..fc<.Twr..-jri*'.i!.:..- ..v.f?^-^-JS--.;;t-<'.
KB-510-
^g
^>xmiss2assâttSiê)faaBwstxaKfit
3.3 Aufstellen
3.3 Installation
3.3 Mise en place
When installed in extreme conditions (e. g. aggressive or corrosive

atmospheres, low ambient temperatures etc.) suitable measures
must be taken. Consultation with
BITZER is recommended.
En cas d'utilisation dans conditions

extremes (par ex. atmosphere agressive, temperatures extrieures basses,
etc.) prendre des mesures adquates.
Le cas chant, il est conseiil de
consulter BITZER.
Le compresseur et le moteur doivent

tre monies horizontaiement et fixer
de manire rigide sur un cadre de
base.
Les cadres de base doivent tre

poses sur une assise stable. Afin de
diminuer les transmissions de bruit,
une mise en place sur des elements
lastiques est possible (semeile flottante ou amortisseurs). En cas d'emploi d'amortisseurs avec appui ponctuel, un renforcement du chassis peut
s'avrer ncessaire.
Bei Einsatz unter extremen Bedingungen (z. B. aggressive Atmosphre, niedrige Auentemperaturen
u. a.) geeignete Manahmen treffen. Ggf. empfiehlt sich Rcl<sprache mit BITZER.
Verdichter urxj iVIotor mssen waagerecht und starr auf einem stabilen
Gmndrahmen aufgestellt werden.
Grundrahmen mssen auf stabilem Unterbau gelagert werden. Zur
Verringerung von Krperschall ist
auch elastische Aufstellung mglich
(schwimmendes Fundament oder
Schwingungsdmpfer). Bei
Verwendung von Schwingungsdmpfern mit Punktauflage kann
eine Verstrkung der Rahmenkonstruktion notwendig sein.
Install compressor and motor horizontal, fixed on a rigid base frame.
The base frame must be located

on a firm foundation. Flexible installation to reduce structurally transmitted noise is also possible (floating foundation or vibration
dampers). If vibration dampers with
single point support are used, a
reinforced frame construction may
be necessary.
Bei Bndelrohr-Wrmebertragern:
For shell and tube heat exchangers:
En cas des changeurs de chaleur multitubulaires:
îr% Achtung!
f l ', Verdichter nicht starr auf WrmeK' f bertrager montieren. Nicht als
j . ^' tragendes Element verwenden!
I 1 Beschdigung des Wrmeber'i>, ' tragers mglich (Schwingungs^^. brche).
p| 7
*'| f
f,"^*
J, J
||-s
m 'J
|{"1|
j4
^ ^
?<;*
Ms
Attention!
Do not mount the compressor
solidly onto the heat exchanger.
Do not use it as load-bearing
element!
Damage of the heat exchanger
d^! is possible (vibration fractures).
Attention I
Ne pas monter solidement le compresseur sur l'changeur de
chaleur.
Ne pas utiliser le comme bti I.
Risque de deterioration d'changeur
de chaleur (ruptures par vibration).
istiSiJ.-:i:m:z:u^vi;&:mxi&t^^KîSi3^
KB-510-3
J^
3.4 Keilriemenantrieb
3.4 V-Belt drive
3.4 Entrainement par courroies
Schwungrad montieren
Mounting the flywheel
Montage du volant
Whrend Montage die Flanschabsperrventile geschlossen halten.
Leave flanged shut-off valves in

closed position.
Bohrung des Schwungrades von

Farbrckstnden reinigen.
Clean bore of flywheel from paint

residue.
Pendant cette operation laisser les

vannes de compresseurs bride en
position ferme.
Rostschutzlack vom Wellenende

entfernen.
Remove corrosion inhibitor from

shaft end.
Etwas l auf das Wellenende bringen.
Apply small amount of oil to shaft

end.
Schwungrad unter Drehen auf die

Welle schieben.
Slide flywheel on to shaft, using a

rotary motion.
f i | 7 Achtung!
^ f j Wellenschaden mglich!
?jl Niemals das Schwungrad mit
| * j Hammerschlgen auf die Welle
,^ treiben. Welle darf sich nicht
tM nach innen verschieben.
\
I
i.
y**"^-.
(]
Enlever les restes de peinture se trouvant dans l'alsage du volant.

Eliminer la peinture antirouille sur I'extrmit de I'arbre.
Mettre un peu d'huile sur l'extrmit de
I'arbre.
Engager le volant sur ce dernier en lui
faisant subir un mouvement de rotation.
Attention!
Shaft damage possible!
Never force flywheel to shaft by
means of a hammer. Shaft must
not slide inward.
jra *; Attention I
. I J Dfaut de I'arbre possible !
I " . 1 Ne jamais monter le volant sur
' J I'arbre coups de marteau. L'arbre
;, ' ne doit jamais se dplacer vers l'inta-J rieur.
Gewindekeil von der Verdichterseite

her einsetzen.
Insert threaded key from compressor side.
Engager la clavette filete du cot du

compresseur.
Federring und Mutter lose aufsetzen.
Put lock washer and nut loosely

onto place.
La rondelle ressort et l'crou tant

lgrement visse.
Keil mit einigen leichten Schlgen

eintreiben. Mutter anziehen.
Drive key home by means of a

hammer and a drift punch by a few
firm blows. Tighten nut.
Entbncer la clavette par quelques

coups de marteau lgers. Visser
l'crou.
y'^ Achtung!
f\ t Gefahr von Nabenbruch!
.-" * Gewindekeil nicht bermig
SBuda eintreiben!
^m'% Attention!
I ^ Danger of hub breakage!
;'"" ' Avoid excess blows of the
111;.* threaded key!
" j \ Attention !
, I , Danger de une fissure du moyeu!
Eviter de trop forcer la clavette file- J te !
Drehrichtung
Rotating direction
Sens de rotation
Einzeln installierte Verdichter knnen

eine beliebige Drehrichtung haben.
Separately delivered compressors

may have any direction of rotation.
Bei luftgekhlten Aggregaten die

Drehrichtung beachten. Sie wird durch
einen Pfeil am Ventilatorflgel angezeigt. Werkseinstellung: Rechtslauf
der Ventilatoren.
With air cooled condensing units pay

attention to the rotating direction. It is
marked by an arrow on the fan blade.
Factory setting: clockwise rotation of
the fan.
Les compresseurs livres sparement

peuvent avoir des sens de rotation quelconques.
Keilriemen
V-belt
Courroies
r ^ Gefahr!
O S Haare, Hnde oder Kleidung
%i knnen von Riementrieb erfasst
%, ^ werden!
'\m Schwere Verletzungen mglich.
^ v Antriebsbereich unbedingt mit
W:'% einer trennenden Atxieckung
& . 8 sichern: Riemenschutz!
Danger!
Hair, hands or clothing can be
W^-A caught in the belt drive!
%Â Serious injuries are possible.
4 The area of the drive must be
|v: i| secured with a separating cover:
ixM belt guard!
Wi ~. Danger I
O E Les cheveux, les mains ou les vteIfgg ments peuvent etre "happs" par
g ^ I'entraTnement par courroies !
^ ^ Possibilit de graves blessures.
M% Absolument scuriser la zone de
rQ I'entraTnement par une protegesiM. courroie !
"tvxt::::::,'-.^-
Cependant en cas des groupes refroidis

I'air on doit tenir compte du sens de
rotation. II est marque par un trait la
pale de ventilateur. Ajust I'usine: rotation droite.
er-iVSfisCi'iiiîaT'AP MLIK':,:^^;^
'iiM(u-?":3W3B;i!;*ji;ji-5?'â^>if-'siii:t ; ^ ' % i
KB-510-3
Bei Arbeiten am Riementrieb:
For maintenance work on belt drive:
Lors d'interventlon l'entrainement par

courroies:
W^ Gefahr!
l ^ Motor abschalten und
mal Motorsicherungen entfernen!
n g Danger!
^ Switch off motor and remove
i ^ motor fuses!
"Mettre hors defonctionnementle
Riemenscheiben mssen festsitzen

und fluchten (siehe Abb. 2).
The belt pulleys must be firmly

seated and fixed. They must be
correctly aligned (see figure 2).
Les poulies d'entrainement doivent

tre fixes fermement et alignes correctement (voir figure 2).
Only use V-belts

of the same length: calibrated
length or In a set,
with the prescribed quality and
with prescribed dimensions.
For length and profile see
prospects KP-510, KP-610 and
KP-615.
N'utlliser que des courroies trapzoTdales

de mme longueur: longueurs calibres ou d'un mme jeu, ainsl que
de qualit et
de dimensions prescrites.
Longueurs et profile voir prospectus
KP-510. KP-610 et KP-615.
Adjustment of belt tension:

Measure the free length L of the
top belt section (see figure 3).
Push the centre belt section down
17 mmforevery 1000 mm free
belt length.
Recommended power P:
width 13 mm 11 to 16 N
width 17 mm 22 to 31 N
AJuster la tension des courroies:

Mesurer la longueur llbre L du brin de
courroies suprieur (voir figure 3).
Abalsser le brin de courroies du
milieu avec un tester de force lastique de 17 mm pour chaque 1000
mm de longueur llbre.
Force recommande P:
profiM3mm 1 1 1 6 N
profil 17 mm 22 31 N
Nur Keilriemen verwenden, die

gleichlang sind mit kalibrierten
Lngen oder als Satz sowie
vorgeschriebene Qualitt und
vorgeschiebene Abmessungen
haben.
Profil und Lngen siehe Prospekte KP-510, KP-610 und KP-615.
Riemen-Vorspannung einstellen:
Freie Lnge L des oberen
Riementrumms messen (siehe
Abbildung 3).
Riementrumm in der Mitte mit
einem Spannkrafttester um 17
mm je 1000 mm freier Lnge herunterdrcken.
Empfohlene Kraft P:
Profil 13 mm 11 bis 16 N
Profil 17 mm 22 bis 31 N
Riemen-Vorspannung nach Einlaufzeit nochmals kontrollieren.
j"? Achtung!
I^'l'l Vorspannung nicht berhhen!
i;^'?4 Gefahr von Lager- und Wellen '.1 Schdigung an Verdichter und
3a Motor.
The belt tension must be checked

again after a running-in period.
flp;
k]S
1",^!
fe^fl
^M
Attention!
Do not exceed belt tension!
Risk of bearing and shaft damage at the compressor and
motor.
Danger!
moteur et enlever le fusible de scu01^:^ rite du moteur!
Recontroler la tension initiale des courroies aprs un certain temps.
f v ; ^ Attention !
t f ^ Ne pas excder la tension Initiate !
t",-| Risque de dgt sur les pallers et
p'.J| sur le vilebrequin du compresseur et
hu du moteur.
inj:' Y - -^^Wrr|-
Abb. 2 Riemenscheiben ausrichten

Fig. 2 Aligning the belt pulleys
Fig. 2 Alignement des poulies d'entrainement
msxMssiiaisMdsa&a
KB-510-3
Abb. 3 Riemen-Vorspannung berprfen

Fig. 3 Checking belt tension
Fig. 3 Contrle de la tension initiate des courroies
S?)Sia^!l^daiXla;5<^âL3!tl(u^
^
3.5 Rohrleitungen anschlieen
Warnung!
; Verdichter steht unter Oberdruck
durch Schutzgas.
I Verletzungen von Haut und
: Augen mglich.
i Anschlsse nicht ffnen, bevor
Oberdruck abgelassen ist.
f J Lufleintritt unbedingt vermeiden!

^M Absperrventile bis zum EvakuieSiM ren geschlossen halten.
,c
3.5 Pipeline connections
3.5 Raccordements de tuyauterie
fji% Warning!
t A Compressor is under pressure
with holding charge.
Injury of skin and eyes possible.
Avertissement I
Le compresseur est sous pression
avec gaz de protection.
possibles.
"Siporter des lunettes de protection !
'i:3 d'avoir vacu la surpression.
I Attention!
3 Absolutely avoid penetration of
llSa air!
The shut-off valves should
remain closed until evacuating.
Ifnp Attention I
Eviter absolument I'introduction
d'air I
Maintenir les vannes d'arrt fermes
jLVAu! jusqu a la mise sous vide.
RohranschlUsse
Pipe connections
Raccordements de tuyauterie
Die Rohr-Anschlsse sind so ausgefhrt, dass Rohre in den gngigen Millimeter- und Zoll-Abmessungen verwendet werden knnen. Lt-Anschlsse haben gestufte Durchmesser. Je
nach Abmessung wird das Rohr mehr
oder weniger tief eintauchen. Bei Bedarf kann das Buchsenende mit dem
greren Durchmesser auch abgesgt werden.
The pipe connections are designed to

accept tubes with standard millimetre
or inch dimensions. Solder connections have stepped diameters.
According to the size the tube can be
pushed more or less into the fitting. If
not required the end with the largest
diameter can be cut off.
Les raccordements sont executes de

fafon ce que les tubes usuels en millimetres et en pouces puissent tre utilises. Les raccords braser ont plusieurs
diametres successifs. Suivant la section,
le tube sera insr plus ou moins profondment. Si ncessaire, l'extrmit avec le
plus grand diametre peut tre scie.
rifl
*f I
'; '.^
~: j
îiA
^ | 1 Attention!
Y,\ Do not overheat the valves!
Cool valve body while and after
brazing!
l*--:^! Max. brazing temperature
y 700C.
j T f l Attention !
| j Ne pas surchauffer les vannes !
' . Refroidir les corps de vanne lors du
-. j"^ brasage et apres !
U- i Temperature de brasage maximale
L * 700C.
Achtung!
Ventile nicht berhitzen!
Whrend und nach dem Lten
Ventllkorper khlen!
Maximale Lttemperatur 700C.
Durchmesser gestuft
Stepped diameters
T Plusieurs diametres
successifs
Vor Rohranschluss Verschlussblech entfernen!

i I - Remove sealing plate before tube connection!
' "j Retirer la tle de fermeture avant raccarder le tuBe !
j . - i ^
/"i-
"'V"
Abb. 4 Absperrventil mit RotalockVerschraubung
Fig. 4 Shut-off valve with Rotalock

adaptor
tK*.a-ffMTs*t*i;iisx'.5fi:a.i^JRKr-.*=aa:faffiyri;**VK>*ail;::ri:t:-esi^^
Fig. 4 Vanne d'arrt avec raccord visser

Rotalock
':Zîl^!f^-7^9aSXS~r3
KB-510-3
ssis)&sâssc^GAa2^%Kie
Anschlsse
Connections
i(HP)
1/B- 2/ NPrr"
Raccords
m^
Typ
Type
0(Y), l(Y)
Position
Typo
r-rr-n ,
\',~-
' t S J M & ^ i - T, ' . - - < : - ' - ' , '
^ 0(Y) V8--27NPTF :1/4"-iaNPTF
I(Y) 1/4--18NPTF W - I S NPTF
--,;4 ^v.^^^';
',,^ 5^>'
8. ' . " 2 (U) 7

" " \,iy8"-27 NPTF n
1 (HP)
W-27 NPTF/
TVP
Type Type
Position
3
ll(Y)
II(Y)..VllWtY)
W-18NPTF
W-18NPTF
lll(W)(Y) ,1/4"-18NPTF
3/8*-18NPTF
-IV(W)(Y)
'SSiP
3/B"-1 NPTF
1/4--1BNPTF 3/8"-1B NPTF
V(W)(Y)
1/2--14 NPTF
1/2--14 NPTF
VIW(Y)
' VIIW{Y)
1/2--14NPTF
\a'AA NPTF
1/2'-14 NPTF
1/2"-14 NPTF
3--18 NPTF
' ~J.*Afc.>^l. .
4
5a
5b
6
7
8
9
10
Hochdruck-Anschluss (HP)
Niederdruck-Anschluss (LP)
(fr ll(Y)V(W)(Y) Option) .
leinfll-Stopfen / lruckfhrung
(von labscheider)
lablass
'
' ''
* .'
lsumpfheizung lll(WJ(Y), iV{W)(Y),
V!W(Y). VtlW(Y) (Option)
lsumpfheizung V(W)(Y) (Option)
Schauglas, alternativ Anschluss fur
l- und Gasausgleich (Parallelbetrieb)
Manometer-Anschluss (HP)
Manometer-Anschluss (LP)
Khlw/asser-Anschluss
IIIW(Y)..V1IW(Y)
Druckentlastungs-Ventil V1IVV(Y)
(erforderlich bei einem Hubvolumen
> 50 m3/h)
SL Sauggas-Leitung
DL Druckgas-Leitung
tsxvaaxxi:ifme^
KB-510-3
, 4
5a
5b
6
7
8
9
10
SL
DL
High pressure connection (HP)

Low pressure connection (LP)
(for ll(Y)..V(W)(Y) option)
Oll fill plug / oil return
^~
(from oil separator)
Oil drain
/'
^ '
'
''
Crankcase heate'r1ll(W)(Y), 1V(W)(Y).
VIW(Y), VI IW(Y) (option)
Crankcase heater V(W)(Y) (option)
Sight glas, alternative connection for
oil and gas equilization (parallel operation)
." ' ' - ' '
Pressure gauge connection (HP)
;
Pressure gauge connection (LP)
Cooling water connection
IIIW(Y) ..VI1W(Y)
Pressure relief valve VIIW(Y)
(necessary with a displacement
> 50 m3/h)
Suction line
Discharge line
Raccord de haute pression (HP)

Raccord de basse pression (LP)
(pour ll(Y) .V(W)(Y) option)
,'
Remplissage dtiuile / retour d'huile
(de sparateur d'huile)
\ \ 4 Vidange d'huile
'5a Resistance de carter lll(W)(Y), 1V(W)(Y),
VIW(Y). VIIW(Y) (option) ~
5b Resistance de carter V(W)(Y) (option)
' 6 Voyant, alternatif raccord pour
galisation d'huile et de gaz
'(fonctionnement en parallele)
- 7 Raccord du manometre (HP)
^ 8 ' Raccord du manometre (LP)
" 9 Raccord pour I'eau de refroidissement
IIIW(Y)..VIIW(Y)
10 Soupape de surpression VilW(Y)
(ncessaire pour un volume balay
> 50 m^/h)
SL Conduite d'aspiration
DL Conduite de refbulement
sif*ssatW3^sastacaa3râjSia^^
Rohrleitungen
Pipelines
Tuyauteries

die
von Zunder, Metallspnen, Rostund Phosphatschichten) und
werden.
Anschluss-Positionen siehe Seite 10.

which are
coatings) and
seal.
Connection positions see page 10.
D'une maniere generale, on ne doit utiliser

que des tubes et des composants
propres et sees l'intrieur (pas de
calamine, de copeaux mtaliiques, de
depots de rouiile et de phosphates) et
qui sont livres hermtiquement dos.
Positions des raccords voir page 10.
I Achtung!
i Ventile nicht berhitzen!
Bei Anlagen mit lngeren Rohrleitungen oder wenn ohne
Schutzgas geltet wird: SaugI seitigen Reinigungsfilter einbauen (Filterfeinheit < 25 jxm).
Attention!
Do not overheat the valves!
Plants with longer pipe lines or if
it is soldered without protection
gas: Install cleaning suction side
filter (mesh size < 25 \im).
Attention!
I Attention!
Compressor damage possible!
Generously sized high quality filter driers must be used to
ensure a high degree of dehydration and to maintain the
chemical stability of the system
(molecular sieves with specially
adjusted pore sice).
Attention!
I Achtung!
i Verdichterschaden mglich!
Im Hinblick auf hohen Trocknungsgrad und zur chemischen
\ Stabilisierung des Kreislaufs
mssen reichlich dimensionierte
Filtertrockner geeigneter Qualitt
venwendet werden (Molekular: Sieve mit speziell angepasster
Porengre).
Monter un filtre de nettoyage (maille

< 25 \im) I'aspiration, dans les
installations avec de longues tuyauteries ou quand le brasage est realise sans gaz inerte.
I
l2
Dgts sur le compresseur possibles !

Utiliser des filtres dshydrateurs largement dimensionns et de qualit
approprie (tamis molculaire avec
taille des pores adapte) afin d'assurer le haut niveau de dessiccation
requis et la stabilit chimique du circuit
4 Elektrischer Anschluss
4 Electrical connection
4 Raccordement lectrique
4.1 Allgemeine Hinweise
4.1 General recommendations
4.1 Indications generates
Das elektrische Zubehr entspricht

der EU-Niederspannungsrichtlinie
73/23/EWG (CE 96).
The electrical accessory is in accordance with the EC Low Voltage

Directive 73/23/EEC (CE 96).
Les accessoires lectriques correspondent la Directive CE Basse Tension

73/23/CEE (CE 96).
Elektrische Anschlsse gem

Prinzipschaltbild ausfhren. Sicherheitsnormen EN 60204, EN 60335
und nationale Schutzbestimmungen
bercksichtigen.
The electrical installation is to be carried out according to the wiring diagram. Observe the safety standards
EN 60204, EN 60335 and national
safety regulations.
Realiser l'excution de I'lnstallation lectrique conformmenl au schema de principe. Respecter en les normes de scurit EN 60204, EN 60335 et les prescriptions de scurit locales.
Bei der Dimensionierung von Motorschtzen, Zuleitungen und Sicherungen:
For the dimensions of the motor contactors, cables and fuses:
Pour le dimensionnement des contacteurs de moteur, des cables d'alimentation et des fusibles:
I Achtung!
Maximalen Betriebsstrom bzw.
maximale Leistungsaufnahme
des Motors zugrunde legen.
Schtzauslegung:
nach Gebrauchskategorie AC3.
Attention!
Maximum operating current or
max. power consumption of the
motor should be the base.
Contactor selection:
according to operational category AC3.
Attention !
I'l Le courant de service maximal resp.
la puissance absorbe max. de
moteur sont prendre en consideration.
Selection des contacteurs:
d'apres catgorie d'utilisation AC3.
Spannungs- und Frequenzangaben

auf dem Typschild mit den Daten
des Stromnetzes vergleichen. Der
Motor darf nur bei bereinstimmung
angeschlossen werden.
Voltage and frequency data on the

name plate should be compared to
the electrical supply data. The
motor may only be connected when
these coincide.
Comparer les indications de tension et

de frequence sur la plaque signaltique avec les donnes du rseau. Le
moteur ne peut tre raccord que s'il y
a concordance.
o n s - t i ' i i j i 1"^ ,il3i'jia:3frCi; a;jii*j'.^-i:s.'C2.-rsSiiin.i*<awasi;t.a2
gitj.-_a:.j:^.3j-'rttaît:r.-ri;: ^ ^ a g i a r i t jw..âyjr:y%."U.
Ki
:;i;:::i(ii':iiaaMXm':i4i'*
KB-510-3
g:
Motorklemmen gem Anweisung
auf dem Deckel des Anschlusskastens anschlieen.
m
-I
AchtungI
Gefahr von Motorschden!
Vertauschte Anordnung der
elektrischen Anschlsse fhrt
bei Y/A-Schaltung zu Kurzschluss. Bei PW-Motoren fhrt
dies zu gegenlufigen oder im
Phasenvînkel verschobenen
Drehfeldern. Der Motor wird
dadurch blockiert.
Anschlsse korrekt ausfhren!
Wire the motor terminals according

to the indications on the terminal
tMDX cover.
Raccorder les bornes du moteur conformment aux instructions se trouvant

sur le couvercle de la boTte de raccordement.
Attention!
Danger of motor damage!
Interchanged wiring results with
j Y/A starting to a short circuit.
With part winding motors it
results to opposing or displaced
phase fields. This leads to
locked rotor conditions.
^ 1 Attention 1
^ 1 1 Danger de dfauts des moteurs !
5 , Une inversion des raccordements
lectriques en mode toile-triangle
provoque un court-circuit. Sur les
' moteurs txibinage partiel, elle
engendre des champs tournants en
' opposition ou dcals dans Tangle
de phase et aboutit un blocage.
Realiser correctement les raccordements I
4.2 Schutzeinrichtungen
4.2 Protection devices
4.2 Dispositif de protection
Motor-Schutzeinrichtung
IVIotor protection device
Dispositif de protection du moteur
nach Vorschrift des Motorherstellers

bzw. den Richtlinien zum Schutz von
Antriebsmotoren ausfhren.
Must be fitted in accordance with the

motor manufacturer's specifications
and the guidelines for the protection
of drive motors.
A prvoir en conformit avec les prescriptions du constructeur de moteur resp. les

directives relatives la protection des
moteurs d'entraTnement.
Druck-Wchter {HP + LP)
Pressure limiters (HP & LP)
Limiteurs de pression (HP + LP)
sind erforderiich, um den Einsatzbereich des Verdichters so abzusichern,

dass keine unzulssigen Betriebsbedingungen auftreten knnen.
Anschluss-Position siehe Seite 9.
Druck-Wchter keinesfalls am
Service-Anschluss des Absperrventils
anschlieen!
are necessary in order to limit the

operating range of the compressor to
avoid inadmissible operating conditions. For connection positions see
page 9. By no means pressure limiters may be connected to the service
connection of the shut-off valve!
sont ncessaires pour delimiter la plage

de fonctionnement du compresseur de
fagon ce que des conditions de fonctionnement inadmissibles soient exclues.
Position des raccords, voir page 9. Ne
raccorder, en aucun cas, les limiteurs de
pression au raccord de service de la
vanne d'arrt!
lsumpfheizung
{Typ III(W)(Y) ..VIIW{Y))
Crankcase heater
{Typlll(W){Y)..VIIW{Y))
(Typlll(W){Y)..VIIW(Y))
gewhrieistet die Schmierfhigkeit

des ls auch nach lngeren Stillstandszeiten. Sie verhindert strkere
Kltemittel-Anreicherung im l und
damit Viskosittsminderung.
ensures the lubricity of the oil even

after long standstill periods. It prevents increased refrigerant solution in
the oil and therefore reduction of viscosity.
garantit le pouvoir lubrifiant de I'huile,

merne apres des longues periodes stationnaires. Elle permet d'viter un enrichissement de I'huile en fluide frigorigne
et par consequent, une baisse de la viscosit.
Die lsumpfheizung muss im Stillstand des Verdichters betrieben werden bei

Auen-Aufstellung des Verdichters
langen Stillstandszeiten
groer Kltemittel-Fllmenge
Gefahr von KltemittelKondensation in den Verdichter
The crankcase heater must be energized during the standstill for

outdoor installation of the compressor
long shut-off periods
high refrigerant charge
danger of refrigerant condensation
into the compressor
Krwi5a-iraat.'aies!sîws
KB-510-3
S;!ait3a292KifSAS5C.'"i
La resistance de carter doit etre utiiser

durand des periodes stationaires
en cas d'inslallation extrieure du compresseur
en cas de longues periodes d'immobiisation
en cas de haute charge de fluide frigorigne
et en cas de risque de condensation
de fluide frigorigne dans le compresseur
ajBjiaj^âgiririaawaaEyaBtegaaaK-sa
11
-r
Der elektrische Anschluss muss ber
einen ffnerkontakt am Motorschtz
gefhrt werden, um sicherzustellen,
dass die Heizung nur bei Stillstand
des Verdichters in Funktion ist. Siehe
auch Prinzipschaltbild.
Anschluss-Position siehe Seite 10.
The electrica! connection must be

routed via an NC contact of the motor
contactor in order to ensure that the
heating only functions when the compressor is shut off. Refer also to wiring
diagram.
For connection position see page 10.
Le raccordement lectrique doit passer

par un contact au repos (NF) du contacteur du moteur afin de s'assurer que la
resistance est uniquement en service
quand le compresseur est l'arrt. Voir
galement le schema de principe.
Position de raccord voir page 10.
5 In Betrieb nehmen
5 Commissioning
5 Mise en Service
Der Verdichter ist ab Werk sorgfltig

getrocknet, auf Dichtheit geprft und
mit Schutzgas (Nj) befllt.
The compressor is already thoroughly

dehydrated, tested for leaks and
under pressure with holding charge
(Nj).
Le compresseur est soigneusement

sch en usine, son tanchit est
controlee et il est rempli avec un gaz de
protection (N2).
Achtung!
f Druckfestigkeit und Dichtheit der
S,"
gesamten Anlage bevorzugt mit
st'
a ^ getrockneten Stickstoff (Nj) pr-
i 1 Attention!
I Test the strength pressure and
the tightness of the entire plant
preferably with dry nitrogen (N2).
Compressor must be put out of
WM circuit when using dried air Msi keep the shut-off valves closed.
^ ^ Bei Venwendung von getrockne*'"'S ter Luft Verdichter aus dem

^ Kreislauf nehmen '^ Absperrventile unbedingt
^ I J geschlossen halten.
Gefahr!
Verdichter darf keinesfalls mit
^ Sauerstoff oder anderen technii i sehen Gasen abgepresst wers c J den!
Warnung!
. Dem Prfmedium (Nj oder Luft)
^j- keinesfalls Kltemittel beimi'"^'^~ sehen - z. B. als Leck-Indikator.

J-. Kritische Verschiebung der
"" Kltemittel-Zndgrenze bei
berdruck mglich!
Umweltbelastung bei Leckage
und beim Abblasen!
:itXKrgasc:ssjaaji.Ta.Ka-.:.- 7.
12
m^ Gefahr!
1 ^ By no means the compressor
^"1 may be pressure tested with
g S oxygen or other industrial
fL.-M gases!
K r ^ Warning!
| - A Never add refrigerant to the test
fe'J'l gas (N2 or air) - e. g. as leak
L ^ indicator.
^ J Critical shift of the refrigerant
Wm ignition limit with high pressure
P ^ possible!
Wi'% Environmental pollution with
SS leakage or when deflating!
Attention!
Essayer la resistance la pression
et l'tanchit de toute l'installation
prfremment avec l'azote sec (Nj).
Compresseur doit tre remis hors
du circuit quand l'air sec est vitilis.
- maintenir les vannes d'arrt fermes.
m^
iC
^. 1
i"j
Bs
Gefahr!
Ne faire, en aucun cas, les essais
de pression sur le compresseur
avec de l'oxygne ou tout autre gaz
technique!
R j n Avertissement!
Z i A Ne jamais ajouter fluide frigorigne
^ 3 au gaz d'essai (Nj ou air) - par ex.
comme indicateur de fuite.
Dcalage critique de la limite d'inflammabilit du fluide frigorigne
possible, en cas de surpression !
Pollution de l'environnement en
cas de fuite ou d'vacuation du
Systeme!
u^-_ac3rJg3Kiaaea<us:aaev:-:
KB-5rO-3
^
5.1 Druckfestigkeit prfen
5.1 Strength pressure test
5.1 Essayer la resistance ia pression
Kltekreislauf (Baugruppe) entsprechend EN 378-2 prfen (oder gltigen

quivalenten Sicherheitsnormen). Der
Verdichter wurde bereits im Werk
einer Prfung auf Druckfestigkeit
unterzogen. Eine Dichtheitsprfung
(5.2) ist deshalb ausreichend.
Evaluate the refrigerant circuit (assembly) according to EN 378-2 (or

valid equivalent safety standards). The
compressor had been already tested
in the factory for strength pressure.
Therefore a tightness test (5.2) is sufficient.
Essayer le circuit frigorifique (groupe assemble) correspondant EN 378-2 (ou

normes de scurit quivalentes, qui sont
valables). Le compresseur tait dj
essay l'usine sur son resistance la
pression. Par 9a un essai d'tanchit
(5.2) est suffisiant.
Wenn dennoch die gesamte Baugruppe auf Druckfestigkeit geprft wird:
However, if the whole assembly is tested for strength pressure:
En cas d'essayer nanmoins la resistance

la pression du tout le groupe assemble:
eCfi Gefahr!
Prfdruck des Verdichters darf
' v | die maximal zulssigen Drcke
nicht berschreiten, die auf dem
Typschild genannt sind!
Bei Bedarf Absperrventile
geschlossen halten!
^jjg
i^
l^/'S
%fS
I
^ ^
i
g ^
^&
^,1
ftJ
M |
6'1^
:.^
5.2 Dichtheit prfen
5.2 Tightness test
5.2 Essayer l'tanchit
Kltekreislauf (Baugruppe) als Ganzes oder in Teilen auf Dichtheit prfen

- entsprechend EN 378-2 (oder gltigen quivalenten Sicherheitsnormen).
Dazu vorzugsweise mit getrocknetem
Stickstoff einen berdruck erzeugen.
Evaluate tightness of the entire refrigerant circuit (assembly) or parts of it according to EN 378-2 (or valid equivalent safety standards) by using preferably an overpressure of dry nitrogen.
Essayer tout le circuit frigorifique (groupe

assemble) ou des parties - conformment EN 378-2 (ou normes de scurit
quivalentes, qui sont valables). Utiliser
prfremment une surpression avec de
I'azote sch.
f";^' Danger!
Test pressures and safety referr,i ences see chapter 5.1.
m^ D a n g e r !
Z ^ Timbrages et indications de scurit
t^SJ voir chapitre 5.1.
5.3 Evacuation
5.3 Tirage vide
K-y Gefahr!
Prfdrcke und Sicherheitshinweise siehe Kapitel 5.1.
5.3
Evakuieren
Danger!
Test pressure may not exceed
*he maximum operating pressures indicated on the name
plate!
If necessary leave the shut-off
valves closed!
Danger!
Le timbrage ne doit pas excder
les pressions de service maximales
qui sont marquees sur la plaque
d'identit!
En cas utile laisser les vannes d'arrt fermes !
lsumpfheizung einschalten.
Energize the crankcase heater.
Mettre la resistance de carter en service.
Vorhandene Absperr- und Magnetventile ffnen. Das gesamte System

einschlielich Verdichter auf Saugund Hochdruckseite mit Vakuumpumpe evakuieren.
Bei abgesperrter Pumpenleistung
muss ein "stehendes Vakuum" kleiner
als 1,5 mbar erreicht werden.
Wenn ntig Vorgang mehrfach wiederholen.
Open all shut-off valves and solenoid

valves. Evacuate the entire system
including compressor using a vacuum
pump connected to the high and low
pressure sides.
When the pump is switched off a
"standing vacuum" of less than
1.5 mbar must be maintained.
If necessary repeat this procedure
several times.
Ouvrir les vannes d'isolement et les

vannes magntiques existantes. Proceder
la mise sous vide de I'ensemble du Systeme, y compris le compresseur, I'aspiration et au refoulement.
Un "vide stable" infrieur 1,5 mbar doit
se maintenir aprs I'arrt de la pompe
vide.
En cas utile repeter plusieurs fois la procedure.
-^"r: A c h t u n g !
' I I Verdichter nicht im Vakuum star, " * teni
}' -"^ Mechanische Schden mglich.
Zuerst mit Kltemittel befllen!
Iîr*
%] i
'^-' I
jv'';'
ILL.
Attention!
Do not Start compressor under
vacuum.
Mechanical damages possible.
Charge refrigerant first!
^ j " ! Attention !
-f ' Ne pas dmarrer le compresseur
' " " ' sous vide.
H^" ,^ Des dfauts mcaniques sont pos"-*",' sibles.
-''-Ij Proceder d'abord au remplissage de
i j i fluide frjgorigne !
i,ifi:aîKiSi-Q**Jiî}ifiaX3aja!CK2aiisiH^
13
KB-510-3
13
p
5.4 Charging refrigerant
5.4 Rempilr le fluids frigorlgene
Nur zugelassene Kltemittel einfllen

(siehe Kapitel 2).

(see chapter 2).

- lsumpfheizung einschalten.
- lstand im Verdichter kontrollieren.
- Verdichter nicht einschalten!
Before refrigerant Is charged:

- Energize the crankcase heater.
- Check the compressor oil level.
- Do not switch on the compressor!
Avant remplir le fluide frigorigne:

- Mettre la resistance de carter en service.
- Contrler le niveau d'hulle dans le
compresseur.
- Ne pas enclencher le compresseur!

Verflssiger bzw. Sammler fllen,
ergnzen:
Gemische mssen als blasenfreie
Flssigkeit dem Fllzylinder entnommen werden.

For systems with flooded evaporator refrigerant can be also charged
into the evaporator.
After commissioning it may be necessary to add refrigerant
Charge the refrigerant from the
suction side while the compressor
is in operation. Charge preferably at
the evaporator Inlet.
Blends must be taken from the
Remplisser le fluide frigorigne liquide

le reservoir de liquide. F*our les systmes avec evaporateur noys, le remplissage peut aussi se flre dans l'vaporateur.
Aprs la mise en service, il peut s'avrer ncessaire de proceder un
appoint de fluide frigorigne:
Le compresseur tant en service,
introduire le fluide frigorigne du c6t
tre retirees du cylindre de remplissage en phase liquide et sans bulles.
Bei Flssigkeits-Einspeisung:
If liquid is charged:
En cas de remplissage en phase liquide:
mi'% Achtung!
i J i Gefahr von Nassbetrieb!
^ 4 uerst fein dosieren!
JI'J^ ltemperatur oberhalb 40C
halten.
jr|
1,| I
WA
p
; I Attention !
' I ,- Risque de fbnctionnement en noy !
' ', Faire un dosage tres fin.
;* ! Maintenir la temperature d'huile au'-u dessus de 40C.
TAT, Gefahr!
berfllung des Systems mit
Kltemittel unbedingt vermeiden!
Attention!
Danger of wet operation!
Charge small amounts at a time!
Keep the oil temperature above
^m 40X.
i Danger!
Explosion risk of components
I and pipelines by hydraulic overI pressure.
i Avoid absolutely overcharging of
i the system with refrigerant!
Danger!
Danger d'clatement des composants et conduites par surpression
hydraulique.
Eviter absolument suralimentation
du Systeme avec fluide frigorigne !
C
:xa^z-es^ziM^îrtaiâ--^-i:^si-jr:svr-j/axK:i!.-^;^m^^^
a.'--i: rfHiasiK C^rx -.
:.T5Eflneaw -x!*:*;
C- i=3iV>:asi-ia^-^3-s%ji:'!:jana3sai.'C^^siinK^^
KB-510-3
VMsm'amettimstmmimsm
S^
5.5 Kontrollen vor dem Start
5.5 Checks before starting
5.5 Controles avant le dmarrage
lstand
(im markierten Schauglasbereich)
Oil level
(within range on sight glass)
Niveau d'huile
(dans la plage indique sur le voyant)
Bei Verdichter-Austausch:
When exchanging a compressor:
En cas de remplacement du compresseur:
T\% Achtung!
f f i j AttentionI
1 Oil is already in the system.
\ Therefore it may be necessary
I to drain a part of the oil charge.
' If there are large quantities of oil
I in the circuit (possibly from a
preceding compressor damage),
^ there is also a risk of liquid slugll^ff ging at start.
& Adjust oil level within the marked
^ S sight glas range!
f y i Attention !
11 I II y a dj de I'huile dans le circuit.
4 ^ Pour cette raison il peut tre ncesp f l saire de retirer une certaine quantit
| j | d'huile.
g ' ^ Quand il y a des quantites importan^;A tes d'huile dans le circuit (p. ex. la
^k suite d'un dfaut du compresseur),
^ < | il existe un danger supplmentaire
V > i de coups de liquide au dmarrage.
^-'i, Ajuster le niveau d'huile dans la
t>~^ plage indique sur le voyant!
I'f'.-| Es befindet sich bereits l im

""J Kreislauf. Deshalb kann es erfbr^ derlich sein, einen Teil der lfllung abzulassen.
Bei greren lmengen im
Kreislauf (z. B. durch vorausgegangenen Verdichterschaden)
' besteht zudem Gefahr von Flssigkeitsschigen beim Startvorgang.
lstand innerhalb markiertem
. Schauglasbereich halten!
ltemperatur (ca. 15 .. 20 K ber
Umgebungstemperatur bzw. saugseitiger Sttig ungstemperatur)
Einstellung und Funktion der
Sicherheits- und Schutz-Einrichtungen
Oil temperature (approx. 15 .. 20 K

above ambient temperature reap,
suction side saturation temperature)
Setting and function of safety and
protection devices
Sollwerte der Zeitrelais
Setting of time relays
Abschattdrcke der Hoch- und

Niederdruck-Wchter
Cut-out pressures of the high- and

low-pressure limiters
Absperrventile geffnet?
Are all shut-off valves opened?
Temperature d'huile (environ 15 .. 20 K

au-dessus de la temperature ambiante
resp. de vapeur sature l'aspiration)
Rglage et fonction des dispositifs de
scurit et de protection
Rglage des relais de temporises
Pression de coupure des limiteurs de
haute et basse pression
Vannes d'arrt ouvertes?
aSKîlSiStS!^
KB-510-3
15
g
5.6 Startvorgang
5.6 Start-up procedure
5.6 Le demarrage
Schmierung / lkontrolle
Lubrication / oil check
Lubrification / contrle de I'huile
Unmittelbar nach dem Start die

Schmierung des Verdichters kontrollieren.
The compressor lubrication should be

checked immediately after starting.
Immediatement apres le demarrage, il faut

contrler la lubrification du compresseur.
Oil level Vi to % height of sight

glass, repeat checks within the
first hours of operation.
Niveau d'huile entre % et % de la hauteur du voyant, contrles rpts

pendant les premieres heures de fonctionnement.
If larger quantities of oil have to be

added:
S'il faut rajouter de grandes quantits

d'huile:
r i - r Attention!
4 l Danger of liquid slugging
fil.4 Check the oil return.
WM Attention I
H j Risque de coups de liquide !
^ a Contrler le retour d'huile.
Schwingungen
Vibrations
Vibrations
Die gesamte Anlage, insbesondere

Rohrleitungen und Kapillarrohre, auf
abnormale Schwingungen berprfen.
Wenn ntig, zustzliche Sicherungsmanahmen treffen.
The whole plant, especially the pipelines and capillary tubes, must be
checked for abnormal vibrations. If
necessary additional protective measures must be taken.
Contrler l'ensemble de l'installation en

particulier la tuyauterie et les tubes capillaires s'il existant des vibrations anormales.
Si ncessaire, prendre des mesures de
precaution adquates.
r-|':| Achtung!
^ 1 1 Rohrbrche sowie Leckagen am
'Â Verdichter und sonstigen AnlaP 3 gen-Komponenten mglich!
y^ -^ starke Schwingungen vermei-
f Y l Attention!
?'11 Pipe fractures and leakages at
^ v | compressor and other compo^ nents of the plant possible!
I Avoid strong vibrations!
' " Attention !

Possibilit de ruptures de tuyau et
_ ' ' vidages an compresseur et autres
'' componets de l'installation !
V. viter des vibrations fortes !
Betriebsdaten berprfen
Checking the operating data
Verdampfungstemperatur
Sauggastemperatur
Verflssigungstemperatur
Druckgastemperatur
ltemperatur
Schalthufigkeit
Datenprotokoll anlegen.
Evaporation temperature
Suction gas temperature
Condensing temperature
Discharge gas temperature
Oil temperature
Switching frequency
Prepare data protocol.
Contrle des caractristiques de

Service
lstand V* bis % Schauglashhe,

wiederholte Kontrollen innerhalb
der ersten Betriebsstunden.
Wenn grere lmengen nachgefllt
werden sollen:
Achtung!
Gefahr von Flssigkeitsschlgen!
lrckfhrung berprfen.
^ den!
Temperature d'vaporation
Temperature des gaz aspires
Temperature de condensation
Temperature des gaz refouls
Temperature de I'huile
Dresser un proces-verbal.
s;^^sK*r;Laait::a::jti?j**f*-BTr^"t
16
K3-510-3
^fe
6 Betrieb / Wartung
6 Operation / Maintenance
6 Service / Maintenance
6.1 Regelmige Kontrollen
6.1 Regular checks
6.1 Contrles rgulirs
Anlage entsprechend den nationalen

Vorschriften regelmig prfen.
Dabei folgende Punkte kontrollieren:
Examine regularly the plant according

to national regulations.
Check the following points:
Betriebsdaten (vgl. Kapitel 5.6)
Operating data (chapter 5.6)
Verifier I'installation rgulirement confbrmment aux rglementations nationales.

En ce cas contrler les points suivants:
lversorgung (siehe Kapitel 5.6)
Oil supply (see chapter 5.6)
Schutz-Einrichtungen und alle Teile

zur berwachung des Verdichters
(Rckschlagventile, Druck-Wchter... siehe Kapitel 4.2 und 5.6)
Datenprotokoll pflegen.
Riemen-Vorspannung nach
Einlaufzeit nochmals kontrollieren
Elektrische Kabel-Verbindungen
auf festen Sitz prfen.
Protection devices and all compressor monitoring parts (check

valves, discharge gas temperature
limiter, pressure limiters... see
chapters 4.2 and 5.6)
Update data protocol.

Check initial belt tension again
after running-in period
Check electrical cable connections
on tight fitting.
Caractristiques de service (chap. 5.6)
Alimentation en huile (voir chap. 5.6)

Dispositifs de protection et toutes
pieces, qui surveillent le compresseur
(clapets de retenue, limiteur de temperature du gaz au refoulement, llmiteurs
de pression... voir chapitres 4.2 et 5.6)
Soigner le proces-verbal.
La tension initiale des courroies aprs
la periode de rodage
Verifier les raccords des cables lectriques sur ajustement solide.
6.2 Arbeitsventile
6.2 Working valves
6.2 Clapets
sind fr wartungsfreien Betrieb ausgelegt. Trotzdem empfiehlt sich eine

berprfung nach Betriebsstrungen
und im Zusammenhang mit lwechsel (etwa alle 10 000 bis 12 000
Betriebsstunden).
are designed for maintenance free

operation. It is however recommended
to make an inspection after operating
failures and in conjunction with an oil
change (approx. every 10 000 to
12 000 operating hours).
sont dimensionns pour un sen/ice sans

entretien. II est nanmoins conseill d'effectuer un contrle, aprs derangements
de service et I'occasion d'une vidange
d'huile (environ toutes les 10 000
12 000 heures de service).
Fr die berprfung neue

Dichtungen (Ventilplatte, Zylinderkopf) bereithalten. Sie knnen bei
Demontage zerstrt werden.
Kompletter Wechsel der Ventilplatte

ist erforderlich, bei
starkem Verschlei,
Querschnitts-Verengung durch
lverkokung oder
Beschdigung der Ventilsitze.
When the inspection is made, new

gaskets (valve plate, cylinder head)
should be kept ready, as the existing gaskets may be damaged during dismantling.
Pour le contrle, 11 est ncessaire de

prvoir des joints neufs (plaque clapets, tete de cylindres), car ceux-ci
peuvent tre dtriors au cours du
demontage.
It is necessary to change the complete valve plate, for

high wear,
constriction of the ports due to
coking or
damage to the valve seats.
Le remplacement complet de la plaque

clapets s'avre ncessaire en cas
d'une usure importante ou
de diminution de section par cokfaction de l'huile, ou la suite
d'une deterioration des sieges des
clapets.
.!:aiiMa*TtffiaMiaiaeasa*iS*^;s(5^^
KB-510-3
17
^g;
Bei Montage der Ventilplatten achten auf
saubere Dichtflchen,
richtigen Sitz der Dichtungen und
Ventiifedern sowie
When fitting the valve plates attention must be given to

ensure clean sealing surfaces,
correct seating of the gaskets and
valve reeds and
gleichmiges Anziehen der

Zylinderkopfschrauben.
uniform tightening of the cylinder

head screws.
Zylinderkopfschrauben nach ca.

100 Betriebsstunden noch einmal
nachziehen. Anzugsmomente siehe
Wartungsanleitung KW-100.
Tighten again the cylinder head

screws after approx. 100 operating
hours. For tightening torques see
Maintenance Instruction KW-100.
Au cours du montage de la plaque

clapets, il faut prendre soin
la propret des surfaces d'tanchit,
la mise en place correcte de ces
joints et des ressorts de clapets,
ainsi qu'au serrage regulier des vis de
la tete de culasse.
Resserer les vis de la tete de culasse
aprs environ 100 heures de fonctlonnement. Pour des couples de serrage
voir Instruction de Service KW-100.
6.3 lwechsel
6.3 Oil changing
6.3 Remplacement de I'huile
lwechsel ist bei fabrikmig gefertigten Anlagen nicht zwingend. Bei

"Feldinstallationen" oder bei Einsatz
nahe der Einsatzgrenze empfiehlt sich
ein erstmaliger Wechsel nach ca. 100
Betriebsstunden. Dabei auch lfilter
und Magnetstopfen reinigen.
Danach etwa alle 3 Jahre bzw.
10 .. 12 000 Betriebsstunden l wechseln. Dabei auch lfilter und Magnetstopfen reinigen.
lsorten: Siehe Kapitel 2.
Oil changing is not normally necessary for factory assembled plants. For
"field installations" and for applications
near the operating limits a first oil
change is recommended after approx.
100 operating hours. This includes
cleaning the oil filter and magnetic
plug.
The oil has to be replaced after that
approx. every 3 years or 10 .. 12000
operating hours. Clean also oil filter
and magnetic plug.
Oil types: See chapter 2.
Une vidange d'huile ne s'impose pas pour

les systmes realises en usine. En cas
de "realisation sur le site" ou de fonctionnement aupres des limites du champs
d'application autoris, une premiere
vidange est prconise aprs environ
100 heures de fonctionnement. Nettoyer
alors galement le filtre huile et le trauchon magntique.
Par la suite, prvoir une vidange d'huile
tous les 3 ans resp. aprs 10 000.. 12000
heures de fonctionnement. Nettoyer alors
galement le filtre huile et le bouchon
magntique.
Types d'huile: Voir chapitre 2.
lmenge:
0(Y) + l{Y): Niveau bis Anschluss
3 (siehe Seite 10)
ll(Y).. VII(W)(Y): bis SchauglasMitte
Oil quantity:
0(Y) & l(Y): level until connection
3 (see page 10)
ll(Y) ..VII(W)(Y): until middle of
sight glass
ffipi Achtung*
pf-S Esterle sind stark hygrosko| ' . | Pisch.
ft ^ Feuchtigkeit wird im l chemisch
^ ^ gebunden. Es kann nicht oder
% J | nur unzureichend durch Evakuf ^^ ieren entfernt werden.
^ i f uerst sorgsamer Umgang
J j J erforderlich!
^ ' f Lufteintritt in Anlage und lgei ^ binde vermeiden!
WM Attention!
p f Ester oils are strongly hygro^_" J scopic.
:] J Moisture is chemically com^." j pounded with these oils. It cani'j' .1 not be, or only insufficiently,
V Si removed by evacuation.
1-' ," Handle very carefully!
ki -.. Avoid air admission into the
Hil^jji plant and oil can!


71 i"i:=;-i'.:i.z-;iK.j:aK;,au:fc jbif.
I'" III 'ii'H I n i l
Quantit d'huile:
0(Y) + l(Y): niveau jusqu'au raccord 3
(p.10)
ll(Y).. VIl(W)(Y): jusqu'au milieu du
voyant
Attention !
Les huiles ester sont fortement
hygroscopiques.
L'humidit est lie chimiquement
dans les huiles. Elle ne peut pas
tre, ou de manire insuffisante seulement, retire lors de la mise sous
vide.
Manipulation tres soigne exige !
Eviter l'introduction d'air dans installation et les bidons d'huile !
L'hulle usee devra tre recycle de
fagon adapte!
Les huiles chiores usees sont des
dchets pollus.
iim>w I HiiT-.-rn iT"-^f^-;i-f>-n ^;ftt<;c.iygajJMCL*i''iiator?îf*i33iaKfat!ggawaB^^
i-js.-:
E,:aaES-i.3S3*fau*s
KB-510-3
^
6.4 Weilenabdichtung
6.4 Shaft seal
6.4 Garniture d'tanchit
Eine routinemige berprfung der

Weilenabdichtung ist im Regelfall nicht
erforderlich.
Im Hinblick auf erhhte Betriebssicherheit empfiehlt sich jedoch eine
lllberprfung im Zusammenhang mit
lwechsel oder Strungen im
Schmierkreislauf. Dabei besonders
achten auf
Verhrtungen und Risse an den
Dichtungen sowie auf
Verschlei,
Riefen,
Material-Ablagerungen,
lkohle und
Kupferplattierung.
It is not necessary to make a regulary

routine inspection of the shaft seal.
In order to increase operating reliability it is however recommend to check
the seal in conjunction with an oil
change or after faults in the lubrication
circuit. Special attention should be
given to
En regie generale, un contrle de routine

de la garniture d'tanchit n'est pas
ncessaire.
En vue d'une scurit de fonctionnement
accrue, il est cependant recommande de
proceder un contrle lors de la vidange
d'huile ou en cas de problemes sur Talimentation d'huile II faut alors porter son
attention
sur les fissures dans les joints ainsi
que
sur I'usure,
la presence de stries et
de depots de matire,
de calamine et
de cuivre sur les bagues de glissement.
hardening and cracking of the gaskets and to

wear,
scoring,
material deposits,
oil coke and
copper plating.
11
10
. Dichtung
6
7
Gasket
Kugpl
Dichtung
.
' '
--vi"-
"--.
- .
',
'
'- Couvercle lateral
_-
" '
- ^'' - '
" " " ' - "^
Rotierender Gleitring
Rotanling sealing cover
10
Statischer Gleitring
Stationary sealing cover
Bague de glissement statique
11
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
jdichtijng
" '""'^Joint
,
, ^ .
'Arbre
\
.
Shaft
-.-;..;-^-'V ., ,Kv';..'
Spring _" .*,*- > > ! ; - - - , , ; . ' , , ~ ',^Ressort *.
Gasket" > . r - y-^-^.
'- : V '-: '?~-Joint
- .\"' -
- ' f
End cover
- ^
>
- Couvercle de fermeture .
Bali
>*'
'
' - / , . ' ' -'-'/''Boule
'
'
Gasket
"
- - - " ""Joint
Abschlussidcrkel
8'\
9
Side cover
Soitendockel
Dirhtiing
Welle
Feder
^' * '
" i
2
3
4
Fig 5
Shaft seal
Bague de glissement tournante
Fig 5
Etancheite de I'arbre
etsiaiBaiei^ni:frtSau!iL::Ta:s!stw3^
KB-510-3
19
g;
Lecklmengen bis ca. 0.05 cm^ pro
Betriebsstunde liegen im zulssigen
Toleranz bereich.
In der Einlaulzeit der neuen Gleitringdichtung (ca. 250 Stunden) kann eine
erhhte Lecklmenge austreten.
<
Leakage oil quantities up to 0.05 cm^
per hour are within the permitted tolerance range.
During the running-in period of the
new shaft seal (about 250 hours) an
increased oil leak rate may occur.
Wellenabdichtung austauschen
Replacing the shaft seal
Anzugsdrehmomente siehe Wartungsanleitung KW-100.
Tightening torque see maintenance

instruction KW-100.
Die Wellenabdichtung nur als komplette Einheit austauschen (Abb. 5)!

Der Wellenabdichtungs-Satz
besteht aus:
statischem Gleitring (10),
rotierendem Gleitring (9) sowie
Dichtungen (2), (5), (8) und (11).
Replace the shaft seal as a complete unit (figure 5)!

The parts of the shaft seal kit are:
stationary sealing ring (10),
rotating sealing ring (9) and
gaskets (2), (5), (8), and (11).
Der Verdichter muss nicht aus der

Anlage ausgebaut werden.
Es gengt die Demontage des
Schwungrades:
Keilriemen entspannen.
Mutter und Gewindekeil entfernen.
Schwungrad von der Welle nehmen.
The compressor need not be

removed from the system.
It is enough to remove the flywheel:
Relax V-belt.
Remove nut and key.
Take off the flywheel from the
shaft.
Close the shut-off valves of the
compressor.
Une plus grande perte d'huile risque de

survenir pendant le temps de mise en
ceuvre de la nouvelle garniture d'tanche.
Remplacement de la garniture d'tanchit

Couples de sentige voir instructions de
maintenance KW-100.
Remplacer la garniture d'tanchit
toujours entlerement comme unite
complete (figure 5)!
Les parts du kit de la garniture d'tanchit sont:
bague de glissement statique (10),
bague de glissement tournante (9) et
joints (2), (5), (8) et (11).
11 n'est pas ncessaire de retirer le
compresseur de l'installation.
Le demontage du volant suffit:
Reicher la courroie trapzoTdale.
Retirer l'crou et la clavette filete.
Retirer le volant de l'arbre.
Fermer les vannes d'arrt du compresseur.
Absperrventile des Verdichters

schlieen.
'^f/'S Warnung!
Z A Verdichter steht unter Druck!
^' i Schwere Verletzungen mglich.
Verdichter auf drucklosen Zustand bringen!
Warning:
i. Compressor is under pressure!
^ ^ j l Serious injuries possible.
i J Release the pressure in the
compressori
Abschlussdeckel (6) so weit lsen,

bis Feder (4) ganz entspannt ist.
Loosen end cover (6) until

spring (4) is completely relaxed.
Sj^
"MJ
S
M
S
Avertissement I
Retirer la pression sur le compresseur!
Desserrer le couvercle d'extrmit (6)

jusqu' ce que le ressort (4) soit totalement relch.
i Attention!
Breakage of connecting rods
possible due to axial displacing
of the shaft!
Relax spring (4) completely!
Attention I
Possibilit de rupture de bielle par
dislocation axial de l'arbre!
Relcher tolalement le ressort (4)!
Seitendeckel (1) und statischen

Gleitring (10) mit Dichtung (11) entfernen.
Remove side cover (1) and stationary sealing ring (10) with gasket (11).
Retirer le couvercle lateral (1), la

bague de glissement statique (10) et le
joint (11).
Welle (3) unter Drehen bis zum

Anschlag herausziehen. Rotierenden Gleitring (9) und Dichtung (8)
entfernen.
Pull out shaft (3) with turning motions until it stops. Remove rotating
sealing ring (9) and gasket (8).
Sortir l'arbre (3) en le tournant jusqu'

l'arrt. Retirer la bague de glissement
tournante (9) et le joint (8).
Remove the end cover (6) and the

gasket (5).
Retirer le couvercle de fermeture (6) et

le joint (5).
f | 1 Achtung!
13 Gefahr von Pleueibruch durch
axiales Verschieben der Welle!
Feder (4) vollstndig entspannen!
Abschlussdeckel (6) und

Dichtung (5) entfernen.
v i r A r ^ J * : jit^.)rs;,c;:tti;::iiya--.j^s<!SifjxastB^tvaa :; tiHiR::^,-.::
20
Une perte d'huile jusqu' environ 0,05

cm^/h est admissible.
ilJKS^-'iK^-S.
^""atjw-.âsrs; >tsja;>*iWii'c5;';" t-^
g:
Flanschflchen, Welle, Seiten- und
Abschlussdeckel reinigen. Rostschutzfett von den neuen Gleitringen entfernen.
Neue (kleinere) Dichtung (8) bis
zum Bund auf die Welle schieben.
Gleitflchen der neuen Gleitringe
mit sauberem Kltel einlen.
Rotierenden Gleitring (9) auf die
Weile schieben.
Welle unter Drehen nach innen
schieben.
Neue (grere) Dichtung (11) und
statischen Gleitring (10) in die Aussparung des Seitendeckels (1) einlegen. Neue Dichtung (2) in Gehuseflansch einsetzen. Seitendekkel (1) aufsetzen. Schrauben ber
Kreuz gleichmig anziehen.
Kugel (7) einlegen. Neue Dichtung (5) in Gehuseflansch einsetzen. Abschlussdeckel (6) aufsetzen
und unter Drehen der Welle wieder
festziehen. Schrauben ber Kreuz
gleichmig anziehen.
Schwungrad montieren entsprechend Kapitel 3.3.
Clean flanges, shaft, side and end

cover. Remove the preservation
grease from the new sealing rings.
Slide the new small gasket (8) over
the shaft up to the shaft shoulder.
Oil the sliding surfaces of the new
sealing rings with clean refrigeration oil. Push the new rotating sealing ring (9) onto the shaft.
Push shaft inward, whilst turning.
Place the new larger gasket (11)
and the stationary sealing ring (10)
into the notch of the side cover (1).
Place the new gasket (2) into the
housing flange. Fit the side cover (1). Screw in the bolts squarely
and tighten them uniformly.
Place the ball (7). Place the new
gasket (5) into the housing flange.
Fit the end cover (6) and retighten
it whilst turning the shaft. Screw in
the bolts squarely and tighten them
uniformly.
Assemble flywheel according to
chapter 3.3.
Open the shut-off valves of the
compressor.
Absperrventile des Verdichters ffnen.
Glisser la plus petite joint nouvelle (8)

sur l'arbre jusqu' l'paulement. Huiler
les surfaces de glissement des bagues
de glissement avec de l'huile frigorifique propre. Glisser la bague de glissement tournante (9) sur l'arbre.
Repousser l'arbre vers l'intrieur en le
tournant.
Mettre le plus grand joint nouveau (11)
et la bague de glissement statique
dans l'videment du couvercle lateral (1). Mettre le joint nouveau (2) dans
le flasque du carter. Mettre le couvercle lateral. Serrer les vis uniformment et en croix.
Remplacer la boule (7). Mettre le joint
nouveau (5) dans le flasque du carter.
Mettre le couvercle de fermeture (6) et
le refixer tout en tournant l'arbre.
Serrer les vis uniformment et en
crolx.
Monter le volant suivant chapitre 3.3.
Ouvrir les vannes d'arrt du compresseur
sâB^n&unffjKSi
KB-510-3
Nettoyer le flasque du carter, I'arbre, le

couvercle lateral et le couvercle de fermeture. Retirer la graisse de protection
antirouille des nouvelles bagues de
giissements.
s^'aHsaisassa'.'sstts
21
(c
7 Auer Betrieb nehmen
7 De-commissioning
7 Mise hors service
7.1 Stillstand
7.1 Standstill
7.1 Arret
Bis zur Demontage lsumpfheizung

eingeschaltet lassen. Das verhindert
erhhte Kltemittel-Anreicherung im
Verdichter-l.
Keep the crankcase heater switched

on until dismatling the compressor!
This prevents increased refrigerant
solution in the compressor oil.
Laisser la resistance de carter mise en

service jusqu'au demontage du compresseur! Elle permet d'viter un enrichissement de fluide frigorigne dans le compresseur.
7.2 Demontage des Verdichters
7.2 Dismantling the compressor
7.2 Demontage du compresseur
Bei Reparatureingriffen, die eine

Demontage notwendig machen, oder
bei Auer-Betriebnahme:
For repair work, that makes dismantling necessary, or when decommissioning them:
En vue d'une reparation, que fait un

demontage ncessaire, ou de la mise
hors service:
Absperrventile am Verdichter schlieen. Kltemittel absaugen. Kltemittel

nicht abblasen, sondern Umwelt
gerecht entsorgen!
Close the shut-off valves at the compressor. Pump-off the refrigerant. Do

not release the refrigerant but dispose
it property!
Fermer les vannes d'arrt du compresseur. Aspirer le fluide frigorigne. Ne pas

laisser le fluide frigorigne s'chapper,
mais recycler le de fafon adapte !
^sg
Zi^
\ ^ S
1 ^ ^
Warnung!
Verdichter kann unter Druck
stehen!
Schwere Verietzungen mglich.
^ Verschraubungen oder Flansche an

den Verdichter-Ventilen ffnen. Verdichter ggf. mit Hebezeug entfernen.
Warning!
Compressor can be under
I pressure!
^,. * Severe injuries possible.
2 B Wear safety goggles!
'/f
Avertissement I
Le compresseur peut-tre sous
pression !
1^
Open the threaded joints or flanges at

the compressor valves. Remove the
compressor if necessary with a hoisting tool.
Ouvrir les vissages ou les brides aux

vannes du compresseur. Enlever le compresseur en cas chant avec un engin
de levage.
Verdichter entsorgen
Disposing the compressor
Mise la ferraille du compresseur
l am Verdichter ablassen.
Drain the oil at the compressor.

Dispose of waste oil property!
Verdichter reparieren lassen oder

Umwelt gerecht entsorgen.
Have the compressor repaired or disposed of properly!
Vider I'huile du compresseur.

L'huile usee devra tre recyclee de fagon
adapte ! Les huiles chiores usees sont
des dchets pollus.
*=-**:a:SMeUaIK3M>ibC*2tBvlf3^^
22
-->T^..-^-TK'j*-i"->^:Tt^-Man>^.ji-jMri;>(-j^.g7gâg:?>a<iCT-tfji--
Faire reparer le compresseur ou le faire

recycler de fafon adapte.
^.îliH'^:^^^. crWnaiiK'.tSî^^MJaua-kur-;
KB-510-3
s^
agas'aaaaaaagBaweKiMaCTaiaaaiÊiaai
KB-510-3
23
l-N-T-E-R-N-A-T-l-O-N-A-L

Eschenbrnnlestr. 15
71065 Sindelfingen (Germany)
Tel.+49(0)7031-932-0
Fax +49(0)7031 -932-146 & -147
bitzer@bitzer.de http://www.bitzer.de
Ersatzteilliste
Spare Parts
List
Liste des pieces

dtaches
Hubkolbenverdichter,
2-Zylinder
Recip. Compressors,
2-Cylinder
Compresseurs piston,
2 cylindres
I Lill
'^VW|,f
J -
ill
IV
VI
VII
""'*. .
S
."'=<.-, " s
'-'--.'
f"'
--^
^ . - . >
- > .
J . . .
1 in
r>-i
^>-'
v''^.'*
if
Mfc
rr"
Wiclitige Hinweise fr
den Benutzer
Important recommendations for the user
Recommendation


L'xcution conforme d'une commande de

pieces dtaches ne peut tre faite qu'avec
Bestellbeispiel:
Exemple de commande:
Stck
Quantity
Quantit
Benennung
Description
Designation
Typ
Type
Type
Art.-Nr.
Ref. nr.
Rf. no.
Fabrikationsnummer
Serial number
No. de fabrication
Magnetschraube
Magnetic plug
Vis magrietique
III
366 111-02
490 015
Sind bei einem Teil nderungsstufen

vermerkt, mu neben der Art.-Nummer
I Werden keine Angaben gemacht, wird
1 die neueste Teileausfhrung geliefert.
In cases where stages of modification

be supplied.
S'ii s'agit d'une piece ayant subie des

^ Verdichtertypen, die lter als 10 Jahre

sind, werden in dieser Liste nicht mehr
aufgefhrt.
Compressor types older than 10 years

are not entered any more in this list.
Les types de compresseurs qui sont plus

ges que 10 ans ne figurent plus dans la
liste.
(123 456-78)
(123 456-78) i
[inci. 17,23]
^ 17,23
(23)
T
Legende
Legend
Legende
Artikel-Nr. In Klammem:
nicht mehr lieferbar
Ref. no. In brackets:

no more available

non plus livrable
nicht mehr lieferbar, aber austauschbar durch nchste nderungsstufe
non plus livrable, mais interchangeable par le prochain no. de modification
inclus no. 17 et 23
Pos.-Nr. In Klammem:

not shown in the exploded view

No. continue la page suivante
,1,
^ , j < ^ ^ .
'
t^^jgfflgtl^ . ^ 7 ^
'i
O-
'SM^
-.-..--
--%T'1i.
Pos
Typ
stuck
Item
Type
No
Type
^"
II'
-
Qty.
ReK nr.
Modifi- from model
cation month/year/no. ,
' '"-"
Description
Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Rf.no. *',-' t

Designation
10/82/230 091
- - .
10/82/230 O O f t
IV
300 002-01
[ i n d . 2,3,4)
vif
"iops-oi^j,
' --'
-;-
'
11/98/5510204
311 104-08
2/77/Y 081 U
311 100-09
(311 104-02) \
11/98/551 0024
3/77/L 201 U
311 104-06
f (311'104-04) l '
11/98/551 0204
311 104-08
2/77/Y 081 U
311 100-09
3/77/L 074 T " " ' "
''rrioo-ib""'
' ~
VI
VII
'
"0 6 0 x 0 55x40
0 23 x 0 20 x 27
0 23x020x135
s^ ^ J x "^ û x i J . S
9/79/169 001
('3i;i'l04-03)'r
0 34 X 0 30 X 40
11/98/551 0204
311 104-09
0 34 x" 30 X 20
5/86/305 001
311 100-12
0 39 X 0 35 X 50
1/81/201 000
11/98/551 0024
1/81/201 OO'O
11/98/551 0204
_ J
311 104-07
0 4 4 x' 4 0 x 5 0
Lagerbuchse (hinten/auen)
Bearing bush (back/outer)
Coussinet ( ramre/extrieur)
^'^'^^^
^
^ " ^ ^-^-^
0 34 X 0 30 X 20
311104-09
310 000-01
Welle
310 001-01 ''
Aê
0 23x178
-0-27x232;-
fj(^-W
3iobb3-"oT " '

V
46 X 0 42 X 25
0 55 X 0 50 X 30
Lagerbuchse (hinten/innen)
Bearing bush (backflnner)
Coussinet ( ramre/intrieur)
310 002-01
- ""
34x030x20
46 x ' 42 x 50
311 104-07
''
IV
34 x 0 30 x 40
(311 104-01) i
Lagerbuchse (vorn/innen)
0
Bearing bush (drive end/inner)
Coussinet (cot volant/
0
Interieur)
.
-1
0
11/98/551 0024
0, 1
"
0 60 X 0 55 X 40 '
5/86/305 OOI-VJ' . ' 3 1 l " l ^ 0 - 1 3 "
0 55 X 0 50 X 30
1/77/Z001 N
" ";
IV
II. III
, 0 46 X 0 42 X 25
'
"
VI
vif " ' ' '
311 104-09
Lagerbuchse (vorn/auen)
Bearing bush (drive end/outer) 34 g 30 20

Coussinet
^ f^ x w j u x -iu
(cot volant/extrieur)
',
"'
IV
V
398 X 330 x 292

445x380x320
3/77/L 001 U
VI
^
'294x290x217
3/77/L 0 7 4 T ' - ' ~ ' 311 100-10
VII
"-'
300'025-04' -
11/98/551 0024
'
250x223x171
300 025-03
181x160x119
'!l,18rx 200x139^
300 025-01
1 ' " 3/77/L 201'U
IV
5t43xi60>:iio;;-
12/82/232 051
3/77/L 001 U
"' "'-
139,5x150x92
3/83/243 0 0 1 "
1
VI
3 0 " Q 0 1 ^ W
1 1 / 8 2 / 2 3 1 ' 0 0 1 J 3 0 0 025-02
(5)
Gehuse
300 000-01
11/82/231 001
VI
IV
VII
2
Benennung
/ij-LNr.
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
"""
III
nderung
0 30 X 289
' 0 42x377
310 004-01
0 50 X 505
31'0"005-Q1
0 55x578 - "
'
^'"""vy*!
Pos.
T>P
Item Type
Type
S urk
rde
rung
Art Nr
Benennung
Qty
VoGifl from model

Ref nr
Description
Pioce
Modifi partir du modele Rf no

Designation
ab Baujahr
Mor /Jahr/Nr
0,1
374 008-01
II, III
374 008-02"
IV
374 008-03
374*008-04
VI
374 008-05
VII
374 008-06"
OY, l Y
374 018-01
MY III Y
374 018-02
Wellendichtung komplett
Shaft seal complete
BoTte d'tanchit complete
[incl.8..11,12,28]
Standard-Ausfhrung
Standard versions
Versbns standard
oder/or/ou
HFKW NH3
IVY
374 018-03
VY
374 018-04
VI Y
374 018-05
VII Y
374 018-06
0.1
372 001-01
II. Ill
372 OOt-02
018x3
0-Ring
O ring
-7
Standard-Ausfhrung
Standard versions
Versions standard
014x3
IV
372 001-03
0 20 X 3 5
372bof-0ff
0 30x4
VI
372 001-08
Vlf '
*
0 35x5
372"'0O'l-''l 1'
oder/or/ou
OYIY
372 013-03
II Y 111 Y
372 013-04
IV Y "
372'o'l3^05 "
'
.HFWK.NH3 ^ .\^
'014x3 i^lT'jr
0 18x3
'-;!>=wgB'Wi^*^ '
f 20 X 3.5'Jti- r
372 013-01
0 30x4
VI Y " '
372*013-08*
| 0 35 X 5^
VII Y
372 013-09
0 40x5
VY
""
(312 000-01) i
1
ca.8.98
2
11,111. -;-
"i
2'
IV
312 035-01
(312000-02))^ '
-
-,-}
ca 8 98 \ ' A- 312^035-02';:
1
2
ca. 9.98
*"l .''
2
^ J.
VI
Wellenabdichtungsring
Ring for shaft seal
Anneau boTte d'tanchit
-7
ca 6 98
ca.5.99
VII
f" 26.5ir 'i 8,2'x'5. f Str"nicht einzeln lieferbar

pas livratHe sparment
' 26,5 x' 18,2 x'5.1

-GGG-70 ,'^^-:
. ",
0 29.5 X 0 20,2 X 5.5 SL
312 035-03
0 29.5 X 0 20.2 X 5.5

GGG-70
{3T200d;:4y'r
' 0 4'1 .Slt' 305"X"6.5"SL"^
312 035-04 "^
t 41,5 X 0 3 0 i V 6 . 5 . ',-
;GGG_^7Q __ ;
ft,J
(312 000-05) i
0 4 9 , 5 x 0 35.2x7,5 S t
312 035-05
0 4 9 , 5 x 0 35.2x7,5
GGG - 70
312000-06 7 "
ca.5.99
0 22.5x014.2x4.7
GGG-70
(312 000-03) i
^ ^
^^
0 22,5x014,2x4.7 S t
312 035-06 .,
'^"54,5x40,2"x8,9'st"
0 54,5x40,2x8,9
GGG-70
,
- '
-It.
' e^-v
"*
" ^ r " ' - * ' ' J^'''*> '*"'
35^
s;/-''S
'Pos.
Item
-No.
10
Typ
stuck
nderung
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Ref.no.

Type
'
- .
ab Baujahr
MonJJahr/Nr.
Ref. nr,
0,1
ca.8.98
(312 o t ^ 2 y r
."
ca 8 98
ca. 9.98
' 2
ca. 8 98
1
2
VII
11
ca. 5.99
- "
", 1
2
,.,
'
'';
ca. 5.99
0.1
'
"" '
'
.= . ..,
IV
V
VII
. . .-.^^ 1^
'
VI
,
... .>
'
'
- -
- ' -
J'27"x 0 1'8.4 X 5,2

Bronze ^
(312 0 0 V 0 3 n
0 2 9 , 5 x 0 20.4x5,7
Bronze
312 033-03
0 29,5 x 0 20,4 X 5,7

Hartkohle
, 0 4 1 , 5 x 0 38,5x7,5
~ Bronze
312 033 04
0 4 1 , 5 x 0 38,5x7,5
Hartkohle
(312 001-05) 1
0 49,5 X 0 35,5 X 8
Bronze
312 033-05
0 49,5 X 0 35,5 X 8
Hartkohle
(312 001-06) i
0 54,5 X 0 40,5 X 9,4

Bronze
312 033-06
0 5 4 , 5 x 0 40,5x9.4
Hartkohle
O-Ring
O ring
* 7
372 001-04
Standard-Ausfhrung
Standard versions
Versions standard
0 18x3
" 23 X 3
0 23x3,5
372 0 0 1 - 0 7 ' "
0 34x4'
372 001-11
0 40x5
372 001-14" "'.-
0 45x5
372 013-04
HFKW, NH3
018x3
0 23x3
0 23x3,5
VY
372 013-02
0 34x4
372 0 1 3 ^ 9
0 40 X 5
372 013-10
0 45x5
_..'.^_
372 300-01
0.1
ll.lll
. a . _,
-i.U
IV
v.vi \ "
^;,
f '
"
k.^
VII
- ---'"-'
.-.J-:
305 302-01
305 303-01
Vlf
... .
-
-'--.-'
-- - - -
305 304-01
305 305-01
"0 51 x 0 4 3 x O , 5 " . '

0 62 X 0 52 X 0.5
305 3 0 1 - d t '
IV
0 45 X 0 35 X 0,5
' 89 x ' 77 X 1
372 301-06
V
VI
Dichtung Seitendeckel
Gasket
Joint
7,101
372 3 0 1 - 0 4 " ' -
305 300-01
0.1
11,111
372~300-d2 " " '

372 300-03
"
'^*-.
>
372 013-07
'
5.-5
<
-At
372 001-05
372 013-06
VIIY
13
0 2 2 , 2 x 0 14,4x4,6
Hartkohle
IVY
VIY
12
0 2 2 , 2 x 0 14,4x4,6
Bronze
oder/or/ou
OY, l Y
II Y IIIY
" 27 X 0 18.4 X 5,2

Hartkohle
372 001-02
II. III
nicht einzeln liefertiar

(3-2 001-04) i
' 1~
VI
" f
Schleifring
Slip ring
Bague d'tanchit
* 7
312 033-02 ,
1
2
Description
Designation
312 033-01
IV
_' -
(312 0 0 1 - 0 1 ) 1
2
11,111
Benennung
Art Nr.
Seitendeckel
Shaft seal cover
Flasque
100x095x1
0 7Ox 10
0 80x12
0 95 X 30
0 125x15,5
0 125X 18
-0150x18
,. < i "
.^...ji-'L'.-.
Typ
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr'Nr
rung
Art Nr
Benennung
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

Ref nr
Descnption
Type
Piece

Osignabon
Sechskantschraube
380 154-04
Hexagon screw
380 154-05<'^: VIS hexagonale
380 155-05
j^
f<7
M 6x16. DIN 933-10.9
IM einy&ftTgpriora^'
M 8 x 2 0 , DIN 933-10.9
'V*- /)V^ j~J'-j.J

VI, VII
380 155-08
0,1
303 125-01
II. Ill
303 123-10
Schwungrad
Flywheel
\A3lant
M 8x30, DIN 933-10.9

0 180x22
^26x26ProfiM3
oder/or/ou
'J3 260x26 Profil 17
303 123-50
IV
303 219-51
sos'Sirfi
VI
303 316-51
VII
30T404^5'l
0,1
315 107-01
II, III
315'l07-i)2X>
"
^*
^ ^ ^
ir.(^--
0 380 x 52
PT50V47
0 450 X 69
50*500x91 '
Gewindekell fOr Schwungrad, komplett
Key for flywheel, complete
Clavette filete pour volant, complete
[incl. 17..20]
'"""
IV
315 107-03
v ' '"
315 107-04.*
VI, VII
315 107-05
0,1
''M''8r'l2x'53''"^'
IV
Gewindekeil for Schwungrad

315 100-01
Key for flywheel
315 100-04 - f v Clavette filete pour volant
16
315 100-05
315 100-07'f
^M 12.0 18x78
VI, VII
31^5 100-08'
'M'"I2, 0
0 1
382 001-03
II, III "
II. Ill
IV
382 011-02
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
16
M 6, 0 10x52
M 8 , 0 14x54
2Tx'il8
A 6,4 DIN 125

A 8,4 DIN 134
. _* -B. I. . - -
VI, VII
382 011-04
A 13 DIN 134
0, I
A 6 DIN 127
Federring
Spring washer
382 201-04T?.? Rondelle
16
382 211-03
V l VII
382""20i^6T
A 12 DIN 127
0,1
M 6 DIN 934-8
V, VI, VII
Sechskantmutter
381 101-04
Hexagon nut
381 t O I - O S j ! ^ Ecrou six pans
16
381 101-07
II. Ill
372 301-01
Dichtung fr Schauglas
Gasket for sight glass
Joint pour volant
0 30 x 0 20 X 1
372 003-01
0 26,7x1.78
372 010-02
0-Ring fur Schauglas

O-ring
^101
ca. 10.97
(372'302-02)7
372 301-12 "';
Dichtung'fr^liZugla^'^
Gasket for sight glass "r
Joint pour volant .t- v*
11/82/231001
372 003-15
0-Ring for Schauglas - - - . 0 36,3x1,78 '\

O-nng
Joint a section circulaire
-.101
HFKW/NH3
382 201-03
II, 111, IV
II, 111', IV
10/82/230 091
Oder / or /ou
IV ,. Vll
Oder/ or/ou
372 010-03
TTSDINTS-'
sg^^^^
A 12 DIN 128
^^*<*-
M 12 DIN 934-8
HFKW/NH3
'' 0 4 0 X 0 31 X-Tcgrn)
Pos.
Typ
stuck
nde- ab Baujahr
rung ^ Mon./Jahr/Nr.
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Item
Type
Qty.

Ref, nr,
Oescnption
No.
Type
Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Rf. no. '" .

22
II, III
IV
23
VII
II, III
IV..Vir
""'"--
'l
2
1
2
'
25
II, III
IV., v n " "
0 .. Ill
v
vCvif
26
* "" "'
367 224-oY " "
-, - . -
--.--
380''l54-06'
320 501-01
1/85/281 000
320 501-02
0-4
320 501-03
0-4
320'50l"-d4""'
0 .III
325 000-23
325 000-24' '"
VI, VII
..
0 .. Ill
iV "
' '
' .
v'
V I , VII
29
! 62 X 8 5
0 .. Ill
. '***"'
.^.
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vishexagonale
Plttchen fr Federausgleich
Spring compensating disk
Plaquette
M 6 x 16 DIN 933-10.9
" .
-"',.,'^ ;
M 6 x 20 DIN 933-10 9
0 12,7 x 0,5
0 15x0,5
0 18x0,5
~0 2 2 x 0 , 5
Druckfeder
Thrust spring
Ressort
' " " ' "
2 , 0 x 0 10,5x20
- . , . , '_
2 . 2 x 0 12,7x23 .
3 , 0 x 0 18,5x28
325 0 0 0 - 2 1 '
' 3 , 5 x 0 18,5'x31.5
'386 002-02
".';::
0 50 x 7
325 000-22
386 002-01
iv"
Schauglasdeckel
Sight glass cover
Bride de voyant
t<U9el
Ball
Boule
0 1 ' , " DIN 5401

,,
0 S/g" Diivj 5401
386 002-03
0 ^/4" DIN 5401
386 002-04" - "
0 V
DIN 5401
372 310-01
Dichtung / Abschludeckel
0 50 x 0 20 x 0,5
372 3 1 0 - 0 2 "
?^^^^'
Joint
7,101
0 5 6 x ' 0 22x,5 " ^

. , ' t i -- / ,
0 65x032x0,5
.-.-.^ViU,^.
372 310-03
VI
372 312-02
VII
372 312-03
0 80 X 0 60 X 1
0 .. Ill
305 412-01
IV ' ~
'
'-' "
11/82/231 001 '
''0-4
28
-.'0,67 X 8.5
380 154-04
IV
27
0 39,5 x " l ' "'-'.
361 802-02
(367 223-01)
--
0-4
0 29,5x12
c <;K v 7
0 56 x 7
361'806-02"?^'
10/82/230 091
1, '
2
Schauglas
Sight glass
Voyant
361 802-01
11/82/231001.
0
24
10/82/230 091
0
;'l '
361 806-01
Designation
*^
1^
<
Abschludeckel
'305'4'l2-02 ' Back cover

Couverde de fermeture
{incl. 30]
305 412-03
75x036x1
0 50 x 10
"55x10"''
-^'t'-"
.
^ ' , ' , , ,t'
0 65x10
305*412-04""
0 75x16
VII
305 412-05
0 80x16'
(30)
0 .. Vll
313 100-01
Einlegeplttchen
Insert
Plaquette enfonce
-29
0 10 x 4,5
31
0 .. HI
380 154-06
Sechskantschraube
M 6 x 20 DIN 933-10.9
VI
IV''
3
'
"3
-< <
380'155-05"
380 155-06
M 8 x 2 2 DIN 933-10.9
VI
VII
6'
380 "155-08
M " 8 X 30 DIN 933-10.9
(
Pos
Typ
Stuck
nderung"
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

Type
Piece

cation mois/anne/no
,v
iNo.'
32
0 . . IV
ab Baujahr
MonyJahr'Nr
Art Nr
Rof nr
(366 100-01)
(366 1 0 1 - 0 1 ) 1
5/86/305 000
(33)
366 110-10
V z ' - U NPTF SL
366 110-08
5/86/305 000
"
>
"V *
Verschlustopfen mit
lmestab
Plug with oil legel indicator
Bouchon de fermeture avec
jauge d'huile
V8"-27 NPTF
366 111-01
Magnetschraube
Magnetic plug
Vis magnetique
V4"-18 NPTF
366 npavvT
366 111-03
VI, Vil
(366 102-01) i
366 110-09
(366 102-01) i
366 110-09
302 000-01
302 0 0 1 - 0 1 T .
1
rf
- C i s W i K a 'li-r'.-*
302 002-01
r - ^ "^^^
^ ^
302 003-Ot^
IV
1
2
ca. 3/92
i^3
Tn,!
'
-^
-):
"*^^ '
V-18NPTFMS.
Exzenter
Excentric
Excentrique
0 45 X 56
V-18NPTFSt.
0 50 X 61 * - ^ , f~ "
0 55 X 68
0 6 5 ' x ' 8 2 ' " ^ - ' ' l V F " ' "'"
0 75x103
'3irio7?;7:^
' 1 ~
315 107-09
' l T o X 178
f 135T2OO ~
Gewindekeil fr Exzenter komplett
Key for eccentric complete
Clavette filete pour excentrique, complete
[incl. 40..42]
3 f 5 107-1 t-WJ.--
"1
VI, VII
0 .. III
Verschlustopfen
Plug
V-18NPTFSt.
0 75x103
32;oo7:oijf'
IV " ""*'
40
V-18NPTFMS.
302 014-01
315 107-06
t-
Verschlustopfen
Plug
sfos-^?^:
0 1
'
V j ' - U NPTF
(302 004 01 ) i
302 006-01
II. III "
'V^S'NPTFST
^^ -t-r
ll"*^""
39
V4"-18NPTFSt.
(366 106-01)
5/86/305 000
0, 1, II
VM ''
Verschlustopfen
(leinfllung)
Plug
5/86/305 000
V, VI, VII
38
' V z ' - U NPTF Ms
V - 1 4 NPTF Ms.
37
(366 103 01) i
(366 103-01) i
0, 1
III, IV
36
*V8"-27NPTF
"^ 35
( 3 6 6 1 0 0 01)
366 110-09
'; 0 "
V4'-18NPTFMs.
V4'-18NPTFSt.
i-
- - ''
(34)
5/86/305 000
Va'-27 NPTF
V - " * NPTF St
,---*"
Verschlustopfen
Plug
" '
366 110 10
II . . V
vi,'yuT
Designation
3
VI, VII
315 107-12
.-,-.,
315 100-01
.^.f.
" 7
'
"'-
^-
315'100-02 ' T
315 100-07
VI. VII
1 315 100-08
Oescnption
366 110-08
" 1'
Benennung
1
2
Gewindekeil fr Exzenter
M 6, 0 10 x 52
Key for eccentric
,- w v , " i-, - p - - - . =
Clavette filete pour excentrique
' ^^^f . f^j^.U\
-39
M 12. 0 1 8 x 7 8
M 12 0 2 2 x 1 1 8
. ^
Pos
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model - *

calon month/year/no.
No.
Type
Piece
Modifi- partir du modele Rf. no. ^ " ^

41
0,1
, '
II, 1. IV
'
-'
"
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
'^ '
V, VI, VII
42
0 . . IV
vrvi,Vll
"
Art. Nr."' "" ' '
Benennung
Ref. nr. "
Description
'
Designation .
''
Sne
-39
381 101-04
Sechskantmutter
M 6 DIN 934-8
Hexagon nut
Ecrou a six pans
-.39
^ M 1 2 DIN 934-8
315 107-06
315'107-08"^'
A 6,4 DIN 125
^^""^^^^ 1.
A 13 DIN 134
'
'
Gewindekeil fr Exzenter komplett (Wellenflche)

Key for eccentric complete(Shaft flat)
Clavette filete complete pour excentrique (plaine d'arbre)
[incl. 44..46]
315 107-10
T---
382 011-04
11, l l f
'
U-Scheibe
j . " r ** ~
"
382 0 2 1 ; 0 2 - - -
0.1
IV
,'
382 001-03
~ "'
i '
43
s^
*.,-*j'-.j*.
-WSWf t
375'l7-'li"^'*'"
VI, VII
44
315 107-12
- -
11, III
-43
MB 0 12x53
315'100-07""
M 12 0 1 8 x 7 8
315 100-08
M 12 0 2 2 x 1 1 8
U-Scheibe
A 6,4 DIN 125
382 011-02 " " '
^Rondelle
^^^^^
A
4 DUr INN 11J4
34'"
A Bb.4
382 011-04
43
A 13 DIN 134
381 101-04
Sechskantmutter
M 6 DIN 934-8
381 1 0 1 - 0 5 " "
M 8 DIN 934-8
--
.^
_.^,
0,1
'
V, VI, VII
381 101-07
Hexagon nut
Ecrou a six pans
43
320 308-01
Sicherungsblech
1 '
Locking plate
320 308-02 T " ' Plaquette
arrtoire
320 308-03
-^
IV-
50x12,5x1
'55x14x1
ooxi-txi
' '"
74x30x1
1 1 0 x 3 0 x 1,5
VI
320 308-06
114x35x1,5
VII
320 308-07
1 2 7 x 4 0 x 1,5
302 239-01
302 239-02'
11
302 239-03
III
302 239-04
IV
302 239-05
302 239-06
302 239-07
2
, 2
^..,
'
62x21 x1
'
320 308-05
VII
M 12 DIN 934-8
VI
' "
^3-
320 308-04 "
- " ;
M8014x54
382 001-03
11.111
48
S v e t t e filete
315 100-05
II, III, IV
\\ 111, IV
47
315.100-04'T"
M6010x52
V I , VII
0.1
V, VI, VII
46
'
IV
45
Gewindekeil
315 100-01
0,1
% '.' 302 2 3 9 - 0 8 ' ' .
*.-
" '
Pleuel/Kolben komplett
Connecting rod/piston complete
Bielle/Piston complet
[incl. 49..54]
Standard-Kolben ohne Stempelung. Ist eine Stempelung vortianden,

mu diese zustzlich zur Ersatzteil-Nr. angegeben vrerden.
Standard piston without marking. When marked indicate this in
addition to spare part no.
Piston standard sans timbrage. S'il y existe un timbrage. ii faul le
prciser additionnellement au numro de reference.
11
(C
-i^luebU.
Pos
Typ
StLck
Andt
rung
ab Baujahr
Men /Jahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Item
Type
Qty
MoQifi
cation
from model
month/year/no
Rof nr
Descnption
Type
Piece

cation mois/anne/no
'No.
(49)
Designation
(302 100-01 ) i
6/93/446 001
302118-05
{3'02 101-01
6/93/446 001 ' \ 302 118-06 *
2
2
(302 102-01 ) i
6/93/446 001
302 118-07
3027lS'-01^
:Mili&,v^ÂC^f<-
IV
'HS !p-'2^
VI
(50)
6/93/446 001
311 107-02
111
4/76/1 l i T r " "
3t1"103-01
IV
4/76/1 223 T
311 103-02
v"* '
12/79/172 0017"
0, I, 11
nicht einzeln liefeitar

12x12
i87-'i4'8'x"'22,9
0 2 2 x 0 17,8x27,9
311 103-04
0 30 X 0 24,8 x 45
'"33x""27,8x'50"
9/80/189 001
302 200-01
Kolben
Piston
302 20jl-01 '-^ ' 4
Piston
[incl. 52..54]
302 202-01
*48
3dF204-o'lJ "
4/76/1 161 f
3/89/363 000
302 233-14
3/89/363 000
302 233-^6 t '
"
VI
3/89/363 000
VII
3/89/363 000 '
9/80/189 001
. 2
II
302 233-18
1/81/201 001
383 401-12
..,
4/76/1 161 T '"""
3834l-"l4 3 -
4nei\ 223 T
383 401-16
8776/Rboi T ' , V 3 8 3 ' 4 6 l ^ 1 8 ' * - "
VI
12/71/F 001 N
VII
12/71/F 001 N 1 '383''4'crf-22"'-5^''
Kolbenbolzen
Piston pin
Axe de piston
48
nicht einzeln lieferbar
383 023-02
III
4/76/1 161 T ^?f 382,231-02>I
IV
4/76/1 223 T
8/76/R 001
382 231-03
382"23T-05 "'
0 4Ox5Ox012GG
^ 0 50"x s F x 0 15 G G " ' '
0 6 5 x 5 9 , 9 x 0 18 AL
-" 85 x 7 4 ^ 9 x 0 22 A
0 12x26
!'l2'x32
0 12x37
0 15T42
0 18x56
'"22x75
383 401-20
9/80/189 001
"0 3 5 V 4 5 X 0 1 2 G G
0 105 X 9 0 x 0 25 AL
III
O, I.
0 3 0 x 4 0 x 0 12 GG
' 120 X 100 X 0*28 A U
383 401-08
6/79/l"67 001 1 , . -383,401-10
f"

:30i233-20Tb
IV
VII
014x0
3l'ri03-05""
IV
V
12
Lagerbuchse
Bearing bush
Coussinet
-49
III
VI
^ i l T 3 i r ' 2 8 " x 260
12/71/F 001 N
1/81/201 001
(53)
^>J
|T6T22ir 1905"
12/71/F b o r N "
6/79/167 0 0 1 "
|0655^015x112
R,**-*^!-"
(51)
I 1^.
0 55x012x50
0 1 2 0 x 0 25x235
32lT8-4"'r''^
VII
(52)
nicht einzeln I'lefertiar

12/79/l'r2'00'?|T 3 0 2 " ! - r o 5 - o r : ^
12/71/FOOI'^N""'
'"fV
0 50x12x85
0 7 5 x 0 18x149,5
302 118-03
VI
[incl. 50]
^48
'
12/71/F001 N
VII
0 45 X 0 12 X 68
302 118-02
4/76/1 223 T
Pleuel mit Lagerbuchse

Connecting rod with bearing
bush
Bielle avec coussinet
0 25 X 94
""28"xT08
Spannstift
Locking pin
Coupille
0 2,5 X 26
Sicherungsring
Retaining ring
CIrclip d'arret
^48
0 15xl''DIN'472'y
0 1 8 x 1 DIN 472
0 22x1'DIN
472""
12/71/F 001 N
382 231 06
0 2 5 x 1,2 DIN 472
12/71/F 001 N
382 231-07
0 2 8 x 1,2'DIN 472
iSL
. U^ÎKU. 1 * ^ ' . ; ^ ^
Pos.
Typ
Stuck
nderung
Hern
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

cation monthyyear/no.
Type
Piece
, No
54
IV
VI
VII
55
Art. Nr.
Benennung
Ref. nr.
Description
Modifi- partr du modele Rf. no'.

Designation
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr.
382 300-22
Kolbenring
0 65 x 3 DIN 24919
2/82/222 001
382 300-20
s j n ^ e r d e piston
0 65 x 2,5 DIN 70910
1/86/301 306
382 300-35
*48
0 6 5 x 2 DIN 70910
382 300-29 * : *
Standard-Kolben ohne Stempelung

Ist eine Stempelung vorhanden^
muls diese zustzlich zur ErsatzteilNr. angegeben werden.
Standard piston. When marked indicate this in addition to spare part no
Piston standard sans timbrage. S'll
yexisteuntimbrage,ilfautleprciser
additionnellement au numro de
reference.
0 ?5.?.2.5 DIN 70910

- 85 x 2 DIN 70910
. . . . ,
0 105 x 3,5 DIN 24919
Dichtung
Gasket
116x100x0,5
'-^rT'T.x
"AIT
382 3 0 0 - 3 7 '
3/86/303 043
382 300-31
382 300-39
1/86/301 031
382 300-33
2/8&/302 001 " "
1"
372'401-of"~
Joint
II
372 402-01
IM
372 403-01
160x122x0,5
IV
372 404-01
200x150x0,5
372 405-01
250x185x0,5'
372 406-01
300 100-01
Zylinder
300 101-01
C y t S
'_'l"^
"360 X 2*60 x ' 1 " "
300 102-01
"--:
-130X130X72
140 X 1 2 4 x 8 5
160x131x100
4/76/1 001 T
300 104-01
200 X 165 X 135
12/71/F001 N
300 105-01
250x185x165'
VI
12/71/F001 N
300 106-01
VII
12/71/F001 N
300 107-01 '
"
,
' "'
116x110x57,2
300 1 0 3 - 0 1 '
IV
J . .
320 X 243 X 204

'360 x'270x231,5 ~
380 155-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 8 x 20 DIN 933-10.9
1, II, III
10
IV -"j""'"" 7 'r
12
380*155-06
M 8 x 2 2 DIN 933-10.9
14
380 156-05
M 1 0 x 2 5 DIN 933-10 9
380 157-03
M 12 x"35 DIN 933-10 9
380 157-03
M 1 2 x 3 5 DIN 933-10.9
vf
vif
16
- -
18
320 316-01
i.riv""'"""V' '-!'
60
140x108x0,5
320 X 240 x 1
372 407-01 "
iif
l ' i ' ' 2 l / - ^ . ^_-
- ^
II
59
101
VII
1.
58
1 0 5 x 2 , 5 DIN 70910
, _ .,'niM oyiaio ' "
1 2 0 x 4 DIN 24919
120 x 2 5 DIN 70910
'
372 400-01
57
382 300-41 , '
0
_
0
^
VI
56
S^
v,^-,
vi.'vii
2 ,
- - ' -^'-"
Abdeckbiech fr Zylinder
Covering plate for cylinder
Chapeau pour cylindre
320 315-02
10x10x1
? v bo v n 5 ' "
^ ^_ ^ ^l^
36 X 33 X 0,25
320 315-03
48x32x0,3
320 315-01
! . . IV
3/88/343 000
380 101-91
V. VI. vil
3/88/343 000 "
380 102-91
314 005-01
"
Sechskantschraube
M 3 x 6 DIN 933-8 8
V i S a g =
M 4 X 6 DIN 933-8.8
Dse
Orifice
Orifice
0 14x5
13
T ^ i " y i * r t nrnwi
AaHv'tMa' I
- -' -"
Typ
stuck
Andc
rung
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from rrodel

cation monlh/year/no
No.
Type
Piece

cation mois'annee/no
61
304 050-01
304 050-02
II
304 050-03
III
304 050-04
'Pos.
*
ab Baujahr
Mon /Jahr/Nr
rC
*.,
Art N r *
Benennung
Rof nr
Dcscnpljon
, -
IV
Designation
'
"
Ventilplatte komplett mit Dichtungen

[ i n d . 62..75]
304 050-05
p H - -r
.^
*" ^ ^
304 050'06
(62)
(63)
VI
304 050-07
VII
304 050-08 ~
320 210-01
IV
III
320"210-02
VI
VII
10
0 .. III
2
2
(64)
V ,
4^
VI
VII
10
III
" 4 "
(65)
VI
12
VII
20
0 .111
IV '
V
. - .
, .
'"
Druckplatte
55x19,2x2
325 000-18
Druckfeder
0 , 8 x 0 6,2x10,5
S r t
11X065X13
325 000-20

315 000-01
VII
20
(67)
VII
(68)
VII
' '
39,5 x 8,2 x 2,6
mKv5v9R
53 5 x 8 2 x 2 6
\^^^
Schraube Druckventilplttchen W 4 x 14
Sere/for discharge reed
: , , . .,-, ,
w
1
. J . I
'M 4 X17 5
Vis pour clapet de refoulement
-61
-
315 000-03

M 5 x 21,5
320 321-01
Anschlagblech
Locating plate
Tle de localisation
i 61
cannot tse delivered separately
190 x 73,5 x 0,75
380 153-02
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 5 x 10 DIN 933-10.9

14
1,2 x 0 7 X 15.5
Sicherungsblech
Locking plate
3?.Q.t8-,02j'~r: Plaquette arretoire
61
315 000-02
12

324 018-01
""

"4
VI
39,6 x 14,5 x 1,3

' S^^f.\^.^^^
5x'l9'2x2-
320 230-03
10
0 .. III
iv' ' ' T t ' ' ' '
320 230-01
-.6
. .
55 x 19 x 0,5
-61
4.
--.
nht einzeln lieferbar

sis'ooo-ig ' ^
VI ' . . r t ' \ - - - ^ ' ' . , - . - : ,
(66)
2
'"','
VII
qniF-^ * , f
320 210-03
320 2 3 " 2 ^ ^ " 'Ban-ette

^ ^ ' ^ ' " ^ ^ clapet refoulement
-61
CT]HJf -
39,6x14,3x0,3
M x iax u 3
M 6 1
Druckventilplttchen
Discharge valve reed
Clapet de refoulement
c
Typ
Stuck
nde
rung
Art Nr.
Benennung
Item
Type
Qty
Ref. nr.
Modifi- from model
cation month/year/no, ,
Description
No.
Type
PlOCO
Modifi- partfr du modele Rf no

Designation
(69)
VII
(70)
VII
ab Bdujahr
Mon7Jahr/Nr.
1/80/181 001
(71)
382 001-02
U-Scheibe
Washer
Rondelle
61
A 5,3 DIN 125
382 201-02
Federring
Spring washer
Rondelle Grower
-61
A 5 DIN 127
320 200-01
Saugventilplattchen
Suction valve reed
Clapet d'aspiration
35x17,4x0,2
320 200-02"
II III
320 200-03
i61
44x24,1 x0,25
iV
320 200-04

54,4x30x0 4
r38x 17.4x0,25
VI
VII
(72)
0,1
315 020-01
II, fii, iv"
315 020-02
VI
VII
304 000-01
(73)
304 001-01
II
304 002-01
304 003-01'
, U *
304 004-01
y7
304 Os'-Or"
VI
VII
74
JtljK(J>jJ..-i
IV
Jt
Zylinderschraube fr Pos. 71
Cylinder screw for pos. 71
Vis tete cylindrique pour 71
61
Ventiiplatte
Vlave plate
Plaque clapets
61
M4x4 -
110 X 74 X 8
-121x80x8
1 3 5 x 8 7 x 10,5
'J55x'95lc'l0,5'
191 X 118x 10,5
.''24VxT4^x'l2""
J.. i**
304 006-01
298 X 180 X 13
304"007-0l"
'335x200x14
372 500-01
I "
372 5 0 1 - O r
II
372 502-01
III
372 503-01
IV
372 504-01
Dichtung Zylinder / Ventilplatte 1 1 0 x 7 4 x 0 , 5

Gasket
. 1 2 1 x 8 0 x 0 , 5 -'
Joint
-61,101
135x87x0,5
155x95x0,5 '
191 X 1 1 8 x 0 , 7 5
'240'x14'5x0.75"
372 5 0 5 - 0 1 '
V'
M 2,3x3,5
-_ t. !_ -^W-fiSii-K-js, _
75
VI
372 506-01
298x180x1
Vll"
372 507-01
'335'xi00'"x 1
372 600-01
372 601-01
II
372 602-01
lit
372 6'03-0l"'
IV
372 604-01
372 605-01
240x145x0,75
VI
372 606-01
298 X 180 X 1
VII
372 607-01
335 x 200 X 1
Dichtung Ventilplatte/Zylinderkopf
Gasket
Joint
-.61,101
110x74x0,5
12l'x"80x0.5 "
135x87x0,5
'l5'5'x95'x0,5
191 X 1 1 8 x 0 , 7 5
15
^M.
^
Art. Nr
Benennung
Ref nr
Descnption
-Pos.
Typ
SliJck
nde
rung
'Item
Typo
Qty.
Modifi- from model

Piece
Modifi- partirdcnodle Rf.no

cation mols/anne/no.
k;:
" N o . ; Type
76
Designat orv
302 300-01
302'3ai-'in?3,
II
12/71/F 001 N
*
302 3 0 3 - 0 1 ^
302 305-01
' 1
12/717F 001 N
302 3 0 7 - 0 1 , ^ '
1 .w-
380 055-03 i ; .
,,.^Jvuk^K(&HLat^tr w . i t ~ l . H..
78
12
III
S4o1t!i4Sx a'
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 10x65 DIN 931-10.9
380 056-04
302 304-01
: M 8 x 4 5 DIN 931-10 9 . |
s-M a x 55 DIN s a y o - ^ _ ^
380'055l04T?
&2^^..
M 8 x 4 0 DIN 931-10.9
1^8x50 DIN 931-10.9
Zylilnderkopf.wassergekOhlt
Cylinderhead, water-cooled
Culasse refroidie eau
oder/or/ou
IV
1155x95x43
380 055-01
' 10
191x118x46
380 055-02
110x74x30
|12t78ffx.31
135x87x43
12/71/F 001 N
"iv ^C"*'
Zylinderkopf, luftgekhlt
Cylinder head, air cooled
Culasse refroidie air
302 302-01
II, III
i.
12/71/F001 N
IV
-^r.
III
77
ab Baujahr
MonVJahr/Nr
155x95x49
302 351-01
seewasserbestndig
seawater resistant
resistante I'eau de mer
302 306-01
191x118x52
oder/or/ou
302 351-02
seewasserbestndig
seawater resistant
resistante 1 eau de mer
302 308-01
240 x 145 X 60
oder/or/ou
VI
302 351-03
seewasserbestndig
seawater resistant
302 309-01
298x180x70
oder/or/ou
VII
'
302 351-04
seewassertestndig
seawater resistant
rcsistarte 1 eau de mer
302 310-01
335 X 200 X 77
oder/or/ou
302 351-05
79
III
380 055-07
1 *v.
"lO
V
VII
80
0.. V
VI, VII
81
VII
seewasserbestndig
seawater resistant
380 055-08 -,%-
12
380 056-07
16
380 056-08 %:^J
16
1
Ivl 8 X 65 DIN 931-10.9
?M8x70OlN:93T-ip'.9^
M 10 X 80 DiN 931-10.9
m
10 x 8 5 D I J f 931-10.951
380 057-05
M 1 2 x 9 0 DIN 931-10.9
(366 100-01) i
366 110-01
:-.-;c?r , . , ' ^ ^-
2 '
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
Verschlustopfen
Plug
V8'-27 NPTF Ms.

V8--27 NPTF St.
(366" 100-01 ) Y !
V - 2 7 NPTF Ms.
'
366 110-01
V8"-27NPTFSt'
" 2 '
(366 102-01) i
366 110-09
.^
Verschlustopfen
Plug
V-18NPTFMS.
V-18NPTFSL
'A
,,
r^
S^
liL'.ltUiu3&!_/-?;&^
Pos.
Typ
Stck
nderung
Item
Type
Qty
Modifi- from model

No.
Type
Pfce
82
0 . . III
IV
83
'
Art.'Nr.
Benennung
Ref nr.
Description
Modifi- partir du modele Rf no.

Designation
372 701-01
'.1
372 702-01
vrvi. VII
0 . . IV
- --' ,, -
vfv'i.'vn '7>' j ' " 84
ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr.
^fl. .,
^ . . . ,
372 704-01
IV
361 310-04
_vj,'"_)'_
. ; '
',"
,^
, , \ ' -'.,--
85
86
366 000-03
V I ,
366 000-06
VII
366 000-07
372 200-03
VI, VU. .
372 200-04
'
'
'
- '
.. __,_
91x52x1
M 8 x 20 DIN 933-10.9
în'''in'roc'nm'QT3'<n o "
^M 10 x 25 DIN 933-10.9 >
Druckabsperrventil komplett,
0 i o ^la B.
Discharge shut of valve
_. _, .^, , ,
complete
^ 12 V2''B.
Robinet d'arrt au refoulement
-. ..,.-.
complet
0 18 '^1^ B.
[incl. 85-89]
. -,
0 22%-^0 28 1 Vs" L.
361 310-08
61 x 28 x 1
SA,_i,i_-., . i _ , ,
361'310-06 '
'.-
, ' ^ , - ^ , x. ,'
Joint
361 310-07
vtf'' y.'-.'
ffrx35x}|-~
,1
VI"""""" " " "
}^\
Gasket
380 155-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
380'156-05 ' " ' \ Vishexagonale
'36y3T-02",T/
...
- , ^
*101
361 310-01
0,1
Dichtung Druclâbsperrventil
y
K . . j _
' -^ ^"ji^ -r ^ -^v<-T/
'
. 0 3 5 1 V L -
Rohranschlu
Pipe connection
*84
Dichtring fr Rohranschluli
Joint ring
: Joint annulaire
2 2 ^/g" L
0 28 1 ^/n" L
... . - . , - _ - _
0 35 1 ^/g" L.
0 25,4 x 0 22,2 x 1,5
^ ^ ., ^->.r ., ,0 38.1x035x1,5
^84,101
(87)
0..V
VI, VII ~ "
2
88
10/85/290 001
0..V
' .
'
=
(366 201-03)
2 10/85/290 001
375 014-03
0.. VII
' ^ . , , , , . ..,0 2 2 , 8 x 0 19,5x1,5
375 014-01
Vl.Vlf'
89
Dichtring fr Pos. 88
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
(382 41-9)
-.-
366 202-01
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
Chapeau de protecion
3/^...| g y ^ p 43 5
* ^^
GFK
Verschlumutter
^ / I K " - 20 UNF
St.
.
Sealing nut
Bochon d'obturation six pans
*B4
90
0 . . III
IV
... , ..
, .
V, VI
VU
91
'.
. '
Dichtung Saugabsperrventil
372 702-01
?oir
.î.'^35xi
372 704-01
-101
91 x 5 2 x 1
372 301-02
362 000-01
0, 1
11. III
372 701-01
'' '
'
362 000-02
'
362 001-03
IV
v " . " '
.'
-
- ^
'*>
362 001-01 ' " '
61 x 28 x 1
0 70 X 0 54 X 1
Sauggasfilter
Suction strainer
Tamis d'aspiration
0 17 x 38
ibi'ori
&.'=,
.- ' ' , _
0 23 X 36
'
"0 30 X 40 "
VI
362 001-01
0 30 X 40
VII ' "
362 001-08 . "
0 50 X 57 -"
'
; -
17
^*ig.
w*i
tA
rC
hWik t
Pos
Typ
stuck
Ande- ab Baujahr
rung ' MonVJahr/Nr
Art Nr
Benennung
Item
Type
Qty
N'odifi- from model

Ref nr
Oescr pl on
4,
[tid!
92
Piece
Type
380 155-05
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
IV
380 306-*02
Zylinderschraube ^ >
Socket screw
Vis i tete cylindnque
V VI
* -^
380 156-05
-
VII
>
P-^
"
(380 057-04) i
v-.>>
. <
>'
;
"
"
v'"
f '
'-
M 8 x 2 0 DIN 933-10.9
a^r
M S x*2 DIN'912-1"CI.9
^
j h jfT^fci^ aliiiifflii Bii-Wi ..fc^\,flliifti.^fMjA
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
M 1 0 x 2 5 DIN 933-10 9
' M " 1 2 X 8"DIN 9 3 3 " I 0
380 007-52
4/94/464 001
:isA
"
"r**'.-"
;'
93
Designation
0 .. III
1k
J
1

cation mols/annee/no
>n*^c^<' M
9*
,M 1 2 x 8 0 D I N 9 3 1 - f l 8
verz *'
361 310-01
l.'ll
361 310-02
III
361 310-03
IV
361 310-05
0 22/iV'L
361 310-07
0 28 / 1 Vg' L
VI
361 310-08
0 35 / 1 \ '
VII
361 313-01
0 42 / 1 %' L
IV
366 000-03
Saugabsperrventil komplett
Suction shut-off valve complete
Robinet d'arrt I'aspiration
complete
[ind. 94..100]
0 10/VB
0 127^2" B
016/VB
1
94
>.
366'00-06'itt
M J
VI
372 200-03
"
"l-MJZ.
' " ", "

'
."/:
vn'~
96
VII
97
VII
(98)
c . IV
ca. 10/96
372 200-04'' '

372 303-01
99
0 . . IV
si
'r2
'=ij_
100
U^JT-...
.f_4.**-
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon screw
Vis hexagonale
93
M 1 2 x 5 0 DIN 931-10.9
Dichtring fr Pos.99
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
>*93
'''-^'-'
9/87/329 001
1 " '
- ^ ' '
'
Schutzkappe
Protecting cap
93
3/4"-16UNF43,5
366 202-01
Verschlumutter
Sealing nut
^/i6"-20 UNF
(36 101-01) T
Verschlustopfen , ' '

Plug
'
'
.
'
-93
366 110-08
i
18
- / ' - ' >
0 28 X 0 23,5 X 2
375 014-04
9/87/329 Ool
'"'i "
(182 4 0 1 - 1 2 ) " ^
'l0/85/290"0bT;v' '375'014-3î'^';
; ' / " T "
M 1 2 x 5 0 DIN 912-10.9
W.^
375 014-01
- ~'*'" -
0 52x 0 1 7 X 2
(380 057-15) i
10/85/290 001 l,i
0 ..VI
VII'""';-
-t.
v/vi''''^:^'':^^'}
vTf'"""
0 2 5 , 4 x 0 22,2x1.5
| 0 J 3 8 , 1 x 0 35x,1,5 - v
80x80
0
-
Dichtring
Joint ring
Joint annulaire
1*93,101
Spannplatte
Clamping plate
Bride de serrage
93
380 302-05
VII
\ -
367121-01
v.vi -KfY^^y1 --^..t..., ) H t - > ~ ^ A M r , t i i ^ ^
0 35 / 1
365'^32l"-14 '~'
IV
V,VI
0 22 / %
366 000-07
VII
95
RohranschluB
Pipe connection
93
GFK
- . r V - I S NPTF Ms. - '.

<'. -' - " '- -J ^ C ' 'V/-'l8NPTFSt.'
*'Aî^j.,iJUii:ûn^2^-<.
Pos
Typ
Item Type
No.
Type
Stck
nde- ab Baujahr
Mon./Jahr/Nr. rung
Art Nr.
Benennung
Qty
Modifi- from model

Ref, nr.
Description
Piece
Modifi- partrdunnodle Rf. no.

Designation
372 800-01
101
372 800-02"
372 800-03
372800*047
IV
372 800-05
372 800-06
VI
372 800-07
VII
372 800-08 '
Dichtungssatz
Set of gasket
Jeu de joints
[mel. 12, 21,28, 55,
74, 75, 82, 86, 90, 95]
19
(F
^
I N-T-R-NA
-T-
I-o-N
-A-

P. O. Box 240
D-71044 Sindelfingen (Germany)
Tel. +49(0)7031/932-0
Fax +49(0)7031/932-146+147
http://www.bitzer.de mail@bitzer.de
Aeroevaporatori a soffitto - Ceiling unit coolers - Deckenluftverdampfer
Particolari:
gruppo motoventilatore 25 mm;
gruppo motoventilatore 315 mm
con condensatore incorporato.
^.
- -tjur'.
Details:
250 mm diameterfannryjtor assembly;
315 mm diameter fan nrotor assembly with mounted capacitor.
Einzelheiten:
Motoreinheit mit Flgeldurchmesser
250 mm;
Motoreinheit mit Flgeldurchmesser
315 mm mit
eingebautem
Betriebsltondensator.
'^fE.j
^'^#;m^;;-j
.-=-^_i-
Modelli - Models - Modelle:

CTE 16L8 ED
CTE 45L8 ED
CTE 68L8 ED
CTE 90L8 ED
'ji~~-
^^2 r - J - .
-* I ^'fwUiitvaitiîai)
eCOREFRIGERAZiONE
Particolari:
batteria lato collegamenti con
messa a terra; tutio speciale cross
grooved con doppia rigatura.
Details:
coil electric connection side with
ground connection; double rifled
special cross-grooved tube.
Einzelheiten:
Wrmetauscher Sammlerseite mit
Erdungskabel; spezielles doppelt
verkreuztes " c r o s s - g r o o v e d "
Kupferrohr.
-TBT
.>
f^^^'^^
W'
.* - .
'ff . . :
Modeln - Models - Modelle:

CTE 84L8 ED
CTE 349H3 ED
CTE 194M6 ED
Caratteristiche tecniche
Technical features
Technische Eigenschaften
o Gli aeroevaporatori della gamma CTE

trovano applicazione in celle frigorifere
per la consen/azione di prodotti freschi
e congelati. La forma compatta permette di ottenere un maggior volume di
cella disponibile.
o A seconda del campo di applicazione si
suddividono come segue:
- CTE H3 con passo alette 3,5 mm per
alte temperature di cella ( i +2 C);
- CTE M6 con passo alette 6 mm per
medie temperature di cella ( -15 "C)
(consigliabile sbrinamento elettrico);
- CTE L8 ED con passo alette 8,5 mm
per basse temperature di cella (> -35
C) (solo con sbrinamento elettrico).
o Ogni serie composta da 12 modelli. Si
ottiene cosi una gamma con 36 modelli
che copre globalmhte un campo di
potenzialit nominali da 1050 a 17630 W.
u The CTE range of unit coolers is suitable for installation in cold rooms for the
preservation of fresh and frozen products. Its compact size allows more
space for storage. ij The CTE range is divided according to
application:
- CTE H3 with 3,5 mm fin spacing for
high room temperatures [i +2 'C);
- CTE M6 with 6 mm fin spacing for
medium room temperatures (2 -15 *C)
(electric defrost recommended);
- CTE L8 ED with 8,5 mm fin spacing
for low room temperatures (2 - 3 5 "C)
(version with electric defrost).
o Each of the above series consists of 12
models obtaining therefore 36 models,
covering nominal capacities ranging from
1050 W to 17630 W.
o Die Luftverdampfer der CTE Serie

finden ihre Anwendung in den
Khlzellen fr die Aufbewahrung von
Frisch-und Tiefkhlprodukten. Durch die
kompakte Ausfhrung wird mehr Platz
in der Khlzelle gewonnen.
0 Je nach Anwendungsbereich werden
sie wie folgt unterteilt
- CTE H3 mit Lamellenabstand 3,5 mm
fr hohe Raumtemperaturen (2 +2 C);
- CTE MS mit Lamellenabstand 6 mm
fr mittlere Raumtemperaturen (>
- 1 5 ' C ) (elektrische Abtauung wird
empfohlen);
- CTE L8 ED mit Lamellenabstand 8,5
mm fr niedrige Raumtemperaturen
( 2 - 3 5 C) (nur mit elektrischer
Abtauung).
o Jede Serie besteht aus 12 Modellen. Man
kann so unter 36 Modellen fr einen
Leistungsbereich von 1050 W bis 17630
W Nennwert whlen.
Caratteristiche costruttive
Batteria
o La batteria costmlta con alette corrugate in alluminio e tubi in rame cross grooved ad alta efficienza ( = 12,7 mm)
disposti secondo la geometria 37,5 x
32,5 mm, stata appositamente studiata per ottenere alte prestazioni con l'utilizzo dei refrigeranti dell'ultima generazione.
o La batteria viene accuratarnente sgras-.
sata e collaudata ad una pressione d'aria di 30 bar.
o La pulizia interna viene effettuata
secondo gli standard DIN 8964.
o Tutti i collettori d'uscita sono dotati di
presa di pressione da 1/4" SAE.
Carrozzeria
o La carrozzeria completamente realizzata in alluminio "SATINATO". una lega
di alluminio al magnesio-(Peraluman)con finitura liscia che la rende simile
all'acciaio inossidabile. Sono garantite
elevate caratteristiche di resistenza
meccanica e di resistenza alia con-osione e non necessita di alcun trattamento
protettivo.
o La carrozzeria rivestita da una pellicola in plastica che la protegge da eventuali graffiature durante il trasporto e la
messa in opera.
o L'elevata qualit degli aeroevaporatori
ECO data dalle seguenti caratteristiche;
- assenza di fragilit alle basse temperature;
- non infiammabilit;
- assenza di tossicit;
- assenza di particelle inquinanti (ruggine, scrostamenti).
Motoventilatori
o I motori elettrici sono monofase, costruiti secondo norme EN 60 335-1, con protezione termica interna.
Manufacturing features
Coil
o The coil is manufactured, according to
37,5 X 32,5 mm geometry, with rippled
aluminium fins and highly efficient
cross-grooved copper tube (12,7 mm
diameter), which has been properly
studied for Jhe newest refrigerant types
in order to grant high efficiency performance, î
'
0 The coil is carefully degreased and air
pressure tested at 30 t)ar.
o Inner cleaning according to DIN 8964
standard.
o All outlet headers are equipped with
1/4" SAE pressure valves.
Konstruictionseigenschaften
Wrmeaustauscher
o Der Wrmeaustauscher wird aus
gewellten Aluminiumlamellen und
"cross-grooved" KupfenDhren (0 = 12,7
mm) mit hoher Leistungsfhigkeit,
angeordnet in Rohrteilung 37,5 x 32,5
mm, hergestellt
o Der Wrmeaustauscher wird sorgfltig
entfettet und mit einem Luftdruck von
30 bar geprft
o Die innere Reinigung erfolgt gem
DIN 8964.
o Alle Austrittssammler sind mit 1/4" SAE
Druckprobeventilen versehen.
Gehuse
o The casing is made of "SATINATO" aluminium, a magnesium-aluminium alloy

(Peraluman) with a smooth finish which
makes it look like stainless steel. Impact
and high corrosion strength are granted
and no protective treatment is required.
o The casing is covered by a plastic film
protecting against possible scratches
during the transportation and positioning phases of the unit
o The high quality of ECO unit coolers is
provided by the following characteristics:
- no possibility of cold shortness;
- non-flammable;
- non-toxic material;
- no possibility of pollutant particles
(rust, peeling particles).
o Das Gehuse ist komplett aus

'SATINATO" Aluminium hergestellt. Es
handelt sich um eine glatte AluMagnesium Legienjng (Peraluman), die
sie dem rostfreien Stahl hnlich macht.
Hohe mechanische Festigkeit und
Korrosionsbestndigkeit
sind
gewhrleistet und keine weitere
Schutzbehandlung ist erforderiich.
o Das Gehuse ist zum Schutz gegen
Kratzer whrend des Transportes und
der Montage mit einem Schutzfilm berzogen.
o Folgende Eigenschaften kennzeichnen
die
hohe Qualitt
der
ECO
Luftverdampfer
- keine Brchigksit bei niedrigen
Temperaturen;
- Unentzndbarkeit;
- Ungiftigkeit;
- keine umweltschdlichen Stoffe (Rost,
Abbrckeln).
Fan motors
o Single-phase fan motors are manufactured according to EN 60 335-1 standards with inner thermal protection.
o The range has two types of motors;
1) 250 mm diameter fan motor with the
Motorventilatoren
o Die einphasigen Elektromotoren
entsprechen den Nonnen EM 60 335-1
mit inneren thermischen Schutz.
o Die Serie umfat zwei Motortypen:
1) Motor mit Ventilatordurchmesser 250
Casing
e C O REFRIGERAZiONE
CTE Identificazione modelli - model idntification - Kennzeichinung der Modelle
-:^-^'-:^îm:î^^
,,i
5?"
#^î^Si^^
'^^J^.
' i
H3
ED
^^>.^-?
:Codice idenbficazine modello 'J- k.is-t*

kf'Model Identification coae .-^v--;?/- Ci--^:, k Kennzeichnung des "Modells '?": "xi-'r"!-'''
,.r.,.
Passo alette - Fin spaang - L-amellenabstand

H3 = 3,5 mm
, '
Alte temperature
High temperature
, Hohe Temperaturen
Iyi6 = 6,0mm "Medie temperature

:""
y ' .-,, "- ,v -Medium temperature -,
>.
- ' Mittlere Temperaturen
^ ^ '' ^
L8 = 8,5 mm
Basse temperature
. i ' - '
, Low temperature
^'
? . i . ' - -* Niedrige Temperaturen "J
-\V -
Versione con sbrinamento elettnco

Electnc defrost version
Ausfhrung mit elektnscher Abtauung
'^
o La gamma comprende due tipologie di

motori:
1) motore con ventola a 250 mm con le
seguenti caratteristiche:
- alimentazione 230V/1/50-60 Hz;
- grado di protezione IP 44;
- temperatura di funzionamento da
-40 'C a +40 'C;
- possibilit di regolazione del numero
dl giri medlante trasformatore dl tensione;
2) motoventilatore a rotore esterno
0 315 mm con le seguenti caratteristiche:
- alimentazione 230V/1/50-60 Hz;
- grade di protezione IP 44;
- temperatura di funzionamento da
-40 C a + 4 0 ' C ;
- condensatore elettrico incorporate;
- possibilit dl regolazione del numero
di giri mediante variazione elettronica
della tensione oppure mediante trasformatore.
Per entrambi i tipi di motore l'esecuzione elettrica conforme alia direttiva
73/23 CEE per motori a bassa tensione.
o II loro fissaggio alia struttura realizzato interponendo guamizioni in gomma al
fine di ridurre le vibrazioni ed evitare
l'allentamento dei fissaggi a vite.
u L'assorbimento totale dei motoventilatori installati riferito a 230V/1/50 Hz.
Griglie
uRispettano le norme,di sicurezza e EN
294. Vengono realizzte in poliammide
caricato con fibra di vetro per la serie
con ventola da 250 mm, e in acciaio
vemiciato con polvere epossidica per la
serie con motoventilatori da 315 mm.
Freccia d'aria
o La freccia d'aria stata misurata nel
Laboratorio Tecnologico ECO, in accordo con la nomia CECOMAF GT 6-001
(velodt finale vf = 0,25 m/s).
c
following features:
- 230V/1/50-60 Hz feed;
- IP 44 protection grade;
- operating temperature from -40 *C to
+40 'C;
- possible regulation of the number of
revolutions by means of a voltage
transformer;
2) 315 mm diameter external rotor type
fan motor with the following features:
-230V/1/50-60Hzfeed;
- IP 44 protection grade;
- operating temperature from -40 ' C to
+40 'C;
- built-in capacitor in the nrrator terminal
box;
- possible regulation of the number of
revolutions by electronic variation of
voltage or by use of a transformer.
For both motor types the electric execution is in accordance with EEC 73/23
standards for low voltage fan motors.
o To reduce vibrations and to avoid loosening of fastening screws rubber
dampers are placed between the motor
and the unit casing.
o The total absorption of the mounted fan
motors is refen-ed to 230V/1/50 Hz.
mm, der die folgenden Eigenschaften

aufweist:
- Stromspannung 230V/1/50-60 Hz;
- Schutzgrad IP 44;
- Anwendung bei Temperaturen von
-40 ' C bis +40 'C;
- drehzahlsteuerbar mitteis transfomiatorischer Spannungsnderung;
2) Ventilatormotor mit Auenrotor, 315
mm Durchmesser mit den folgenden
Eigenschaften:
- Stromspannung 230V/1/50 Hz;
- Schutzgrad IP 44;
-Anwendung bei Temperaturen von
-40 ' 0 bis +40 "C;
- eingebauter Betriebskondensator;
- drehzahlsteuerbar mittels elektronischer oder transformatorischer
Spannungsnderung.
Die elektrische Ausfhrung beider
Motortypen entspricht der EWG Vorschrift
73/23 fr Niederspannungsmotoren.
o Bei der Befestigung ans Gehuse werden Gummistocke dazwischengelegt,
um die Schwingungen zu reduzieren
und
das
Lockern
der
Befestigungsschrauben zu verhindern.
o Die Gesamtstromaufnahme der
Motorventilatoren bezieht sich auf
230V/1/50 Hz.
Fan guards
o The fan guards comply with, EN 294
safety standards. Fan guards are manufactured from fibre glass charged
poliammide for the 250 mm series and
epoxy coated steel for the 315 mm
series.
o Gem Sicherheitsnorm EN 294. Aus

Polyamid Glasfaser fr die Serie mit
Ventilatordurchmesser 250 mm, aus
Stahl mit Epoxydiack bespritzt fr die
Serie mit Ventilatordurchmesser 315
mm.
Air ttirow
The air throw was tested in the ECO
Technical Lab. in accordance to CECOMAF GT 6-001 standard (terminal
velocity vf = 0,25 m/s).
o La versione con sbrinamento elettrico

ED realizzata mediante resistenze
elettriche in acciaio inox con terminali
vulcanizzati. II loro collegamento predisposto per Tallmentazione 400V/3/5060 Hz. La potenza elettrica sempre
equamente suddivisa sulle tre fasi.
o II posizionamento e le potenze delle
resistenze sono stati studiati dalla ECO
per assicurare uno sbrinamento ideale
contenendo i consumi energetici.
o La potenza totale delle resistenze
uguale alia somma di ogni singola
potenza riferita a 230V/1/50-60HZ.
Electric defrost
o The electric defrost version (ED) is
manufactured with stainless steel
heaters with vulcanized terminals. The
connection configuration is designed for
a 400V/3/50-60 Hz feed. Electric power
is always equally divided on three phases.
The positioning and capacity of the
heaters have been designed by ECO to
ensure thorough defrost and minimum
energy consumption.
o The total output of the installed heaters
is equal to the sum of each output
refen-ed to 230V/1/50-60 Hz feed.
Sicurezza elettrica
o Le parti elettriche (motori, resistenze) e
la carcassa sono collegate ad un morsetto di terra.
u II collegamento dei motori e delle resistenze viene esegulto in scatole di deri-
o Electrical parts (fan motors, heaters)

and the casing are connected to an
earth terminal.
o Motors and heaters connection is executed in separated terminal boxes pro-
Sbrinamento elettrico
Safety features of electrical parts
Schutzgitter
Wurfweite
o Im Technologischen Labor der Firma
ECO, gem der Nomi CECOMAF GT,
6-001 (Endgeschwindigkeit vf = 0,25
m/s) gemessen.
Elektrisctie Abtauung
o Die Ausfhrung mit elektrischer
Abtauung ED ist mit elektrischen
Heizstben versehen, die aus Edelstahl
hergestellt sind und vulkanisierte
Endverschlsse haben. Der Anschlu
ist fr Stromspannung 400V/3/50-60 Hz
vorbereitet. Die Stromstrke ist immer
gleichmig auf alle drei Phasen
aufgeteilt.
o Die Lage und die Stromstrke der
Heizstbe wurden von der Firma ECO
so studiert, um eine ideale Abtauung
bei geringem Energieverbrauch zu
garantieren.
o Die Gesamtstromstrice der Heizstbe ist
die Summe jeder einzelnen Stromstrke
bezogen auf 230V/1/50-60 Hz.
Eiektrischie Sictiertieit
o Die elektrischen Teile (Motoren,
Heizstbe) und das Gehuse sind an
eine Erdungsklemme angeschlossen.
o Der Anschlu der Motoren und
Heizstbe erfolgt in separaten
Abzweigdosen mit Schutzgrad IP 54.
u Die Produktreihe entspricht der EWG
Vorschrift 98/37 fr Maschinen und der
e C O REFRlGERAZiONE
vazione separate con grado di protezione IP 54.

o La gamma risponde alia direttiva macchine 98/37 CEE e alia direttiva di
bassa tensione 73/23 CEE.
vided With IP 54 protection grade,

o The range is in compliance with 98/37
EEC macfiine and 73/23 EEC low tension regulations.
Imballo
o L'imballo di cartone ridclabile (RESY)
con rinforzo Intemo in legno.
o Recyclable cardboard (RESY) with

inner wooden reinforcement
Wrmeaustauscher
Options a n d special versions
Batteria
o Con alette in alluminio preverniciato
(PV).
oCompletamente verniciata ("A" max
2200 mm) (VT).
o Con alette prevemiciate + vemiciatura
totale ("A" max 2200 mm) (PV-VT).
o Con funzionamento ad acqua glicolata
(W).
o Con circuitazioni speciali (CXX).
Coil
o With prepainted aluminum fins (PV).
o Completely coated coil ("A" max 2200
mm) (VT).
o With prepainted aluminium fins + total
coating ("A" max 2200 mm) (PV-VT).
o Special coil for brine coolers (W).
o With particular circuiting for special
applications (CXX).
Sbrinamento
o A pioggia d'acqua (WD), consigliabile
per temperature cella non inferior! a
-10C.
o A gas caldo (HG).
A gas caldo nella batteria, con resistenze elettriche sullo sgocciolatoio intemo
{HG ED),
o A gas caldo (HGP) a bassa perdita di
carico.
o Elettrico nello scarico: 120 W
230V/1/50HZ.
Defrost
o Defuser for water defrost (WD), recommendable for room temperatures not
lower than-10 "C.
o Hot gas defrost (HG).
o Hot gas in coil with electric heaters on
inner drip tray (HG ED),
o Low pressure drop hot gas defrost
(HGP).
o Electric defrost in drain: 120 W
230V/1/5O-60 Hz.
Motoventilatori
o Motoventilatori 315 mm con alimentazione: 400V/3/50-60 Hz.
Fan motors
o 315 mm diameter fan motors with:
400V/3/50-60Hzfeed.
Modelli con doppia vaschetta isolata.
Special versions
o Models with double insulated drip trays.
C a p a c i t dichiarate
o Le capacit degli aeroevaporatori sono

State provate dal RWTV di Essen
secondo la norma-EN 328, con R22
nelle condizioni di prova SC2 (temperatura entrata aria = O C; temperatura
evaporazione = - 8 C; temperatura surriscaldamento = -2,8 C; AT = 8 K) a
superficie secca. Vedere la tabella di
riferimento 'Capacit (AT= 8K)".
o 11rigoblu indica le capacit nominali in
condizioni pratiche con presenza di
umidit con fluido R404A in cella a O C
e AT = 8K, vedere la tabella di riferimento 'Cap. nominale (AT= 8K)'.
o Le capacit nominali indicate nel diagramma di scelta rapida corrispondono
a utilizzo in condizioni pratiche con presenza di umidit con fluido R404A.
o I parametri utilizzati per i refrigeranti e le
condizioni pratiche con presenza di
umidit si attengono agii standard
Eurovent 7/C/001 -1999.
Optionen
u n d Sonderausftimngen
(Wir bitten Sie, das technische Bro der
Firma ECO zu konsultieren).
(Consult ECO Technical Department).
Versioni speciali
o Recyclingfhige Kartonagenverpackung
(RESY) mit innerer Verstrkung aus
Holz.
Paclcaging
Opzioni e versioni special!

(Consuttare l'Ufficio Tecnico ECO).
EWG Vorschritt 73/23 fr Niederspannung.
Verpacl<ung
Stated c a p a c i t i e s
o The unit cooler capacities have been
tested by the RWTV in Essen according to EN 328 standard, with R22 at
testing conditions SC2 (air inlet temperature = 0 C; evaporating temperature =
- 8 C; TD = 8 K; superheating temperature = -2,8 *C) with dry surface. See
now table with 'Capacity (TD = 8K):
o The blue line shows the nominal capacity in wet conditions for R404A at 0 C
room temperature and TD = 8K; see
now the table with 'Nominal capacity
(TD = SK)".
o The nominal capacities quoted in the
quick selection charts correspond to
R404A in wet conditions.
o The factors used for refrigerants and
wet conditions are according to the
Eurovent rating standard 7/C/001-1999.
Mit vorbeschichteten /Muminiumlamellen

(PV).
o Komplett lackiert fA" max 2200 mm) (VT),
o Mit vorbeschichteten Aluminiumlamellen
+ komplette Lackierung ("A" max
2200 mm) (PV-VT).
o Geeignet fr Glykolwasser (W).
o Mit Kreislaufschaltung fijr
Sonderanwendungen (CXX).
Abtauung
oWasserbrauseabtauung (WD), empfohlen bei einer Zellentemperatur von
nicht unter-10 C.
o Heigasabtauung (HG).
o HeiRgasabtauung im Wrmeaustauscher
mit elektrischen Abtauheizstben an der
inneren Troptwanne (HG ED).
oHeiligasabtauung mit geringem
Dnjckveriust (HGP).
o Elektrische Abtauung im Tauwasserabfiu:
120W230V/1/50HZ
Motorventilatoren
u Motorventilatoren mit 315 mm
Durchmesser mit Stromspannung
400V/3/50-60 Hz
Sonderausfhrungen
o Modelle mit doppelt isolierten
Tropfwannen.
A n g e g e b e n e Leistungen
o Die Leistungen der Luftverdampfer
wurden vom RWTV Essen gem
Norm EN 328, mit Kltemittel R22
unter
Prfbedingung
SC2
(Lufteintrittstemperatur= 0 C;
Verdampfungstemperatur = - 8 C;
berhitzungstemperatur = -2,8 C; TD
= 8 K) bei trockener Oberflche
geprft.
Siehe
Bezugstabelle
'Leistung (TD = 8 K)".
Q Die blaue Linie zeigt die Nennleistung tiei
praktischer
Anwendung
unter
Vortiandensein von Feuchtigkeit (wet conditions) mit Kltemittel R404A bei
Raumtemperatur 0 "C und TD 8 K zwischen
Zellentemperatur
und
Verdampfungstemperatur,
siehe
Bezugstabelle 'Nennleistung (TD = 8K)'.
o Die im Schnellauswahldiagramm
angegebenen
Nennleistungen
entsprechen den Bedingungen bei praktischer Anwendung unter Vorhandensein
von Feuchtigkeit mit Kltemittel R404A.
o Die fr die Kltemittel und tjei praktischer
Anwendung unter Vorhandensein von
Feuchtigkeit angeget)enen Parameter halten sich an die Eurovent 7/C/001 - 1999
Standard.
(C
Caratteristiche costruttive e dimensionali CTE motoventilatori 250 mm
CTE manufacturing and dimensional features 250 mm fan motors
Konstruktive und dimensionale Eigensctiaften CTE f\/Ioton/entilatoren 250 mm
500
40
Particolare di fissaggio "F"

Fastening detail "F"
Einzelheit der "F" Befestigung
12
#
CTE Modell! - Mode! - Modell
23L8ED
53H3
75H3
41 M
58M6
34UED
45LED
80H3
113H3
63M6
86M6
51L8ED
68L8ED
90L8ED
26H3
38H3
20M6
29M6
16L8ED
150H3
n5M6
mm
680
680
1030
1380
1730
mm
380
380
730
1080
1430
mm
12
12
12
12
12
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
f i ,i
tubo - tube - Rohr
2 = i
as
111
attacco - connections - Anschlsse SAE flare

tubo - tube - Rohr
mm
16
22
22
22
28
Attacco scarico - Drain connections - Tauwasserabflu
GAS
1"
1"
1"
Attacco scarico versione "WD" - "WD" drain connection vers.

Tauwasserabflu "WD" Ausfhrung
GAS
11/4"
11/4"
11/4"
uscita - outlet - Austritt
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
e C O REFRIGERAZiONE
Caratteristiche costruttive e dimensionali CTE motoventilatori 315 mm

CTE manufacturing and dimensional features 315 mm fan motors
Konstruktive und dimensionale Eigensctiaften CTE Motorventilatoren 315 mm
550
"
Ur
40
Particolare di fissaggio "Fi"

Fastening detail "Fi"
Einzelheit der "Fi" Befestigung
=
in
12
CTE Modelli - Model - Modell
11H3
174H3
233H3
291H3
349H3
96M6
145M6
243M6
291M6
194M6
84L8ED 125L8ED 158L8ED 209L8ED 254L8ED
A
mm
1230
1680
2130
2580
3030
mm
930
1380
1830
2280
2730
mm
12
12
16
16
22
SAE flare
1/2"
1/2"
5/8"
5/8"
mm
28
28
28
35
35
Attacco scarico - Drain connections - Tauwasserabflu
GAS
1"
1"
1"
1"
Attacco scarico versions "WD" - "WD" drain connection vers.

Tauwasserabflu "WD" Ausfhrung
GAS
ri/4
1"1/4
ri/4
ri/4
ri/4
I I I
tubo-tube-Rohr
?= i
attacco - connections - Anschlsse
S i l
_
uscita - outlet - Austritt
tubo - tube - Rohr
CD
(') - Staffa intermedia solo nei modelli 349H3, 291M6 e 254L8ED.

- Intermediate support bracket for 349H3, 291M6 and 254L8ED models only.
- Mittlere Aufhngnug nur bei Modellen 349H3. 291M6 und 254L8ED.
Scelta dell'aeroevaporatore
Unit cooler selection mettiod
o Per una veloce e corretta scelta dell'ae- o For the selection of unit coolers a quick
roevaporatore, utilizzare i diagrammi di
selection chart has been devised,
scelta rapida, nei quali le capacit sono
where the capacities are referred to the
riferite alia differenza di temperatura AT
temperature difference TD between the
tra entrata aria (conispondente alia teminlet air temperature (corresponding to
peratura di cella) e la temperatura di
the room temperature) and the evapoevaporazione del refrigerante.
rating temperature of the refrigerant.
Definiti i valori di AT, della temperatura
Once the TD, the room temperature and
di cella ed il carico termico, immediato
the heat load are determined, the selecricavare il modelle che ha la capacit
tion of the model with the required
pill rispondente a quanto richiesto.
capacity is in fact very quick.
u disponibile un software ECO per la o An ECO software is available to deterdeterminazione esatta del carico termimine the exact heat load of the room co della cella.
according to the specific parameters of
o Le capacit nominali (rigo blu) sono rifethe room - hence, the selection of the
rite al fluide frigorigeno R404A.
unit.
Utilizzando altri refrigeranti la capacit o The nominal capacity (blu line) are for
va moltiplicata per 11 seguente fattore
R404A refrigerant. By using others
correttivo Fe.
refrigerants the following corrector factor (Fc) must by used.
R22
R134a
R404A/R507
0,95
0,91
1
R22
R134a
R404A/R507
0,95 .
0,91
1
Auswatil des Luftverdampfers

o Fr die richtige Wahl des einzubauenden
Luftverdampfers
die
Schnellauswahldiagramme verwenden,
in denen die Leistungen auf den
Temperaturunterschied (TD) zwischen
Zuluft (mit der Zellentemperatur identifizierbar) und Verdampfungstemperatur
des KOhlmittels bezogen sind.
Nach Festlegung der TD Werte, der
Zellentemperatur und des Kltebedarfs
wird die Wahl des entsprechenden
Modells sehr einfach.
o ECO Software steht zur Verfgung, um
den genauen Kltebedarf der Zelle zu
bestimmen, in Abhngigkeit von den
verschiedenen Parametern, die diese
kennzeichnen und daher die Auswahl
des Luftverdampfers.
Die Nennleistungen (blaue Linie) wurden mit Kltemittel R404A gemessen.
o Bei Anwendung von anderen Kltemittel
wird die Leistung mit dem folgenden
Korrekturfaktor Fc multipliziert
R22
R134a
R404A/R507
0.95
0.91
1
o Per altri fluidi contattare l'Ufficio Teenico

ECO.
o For other types of refrigerant please

contact the ECO Technical Dept.
uFr die Verwendung von anderen

Kltemittel setzen Sie sich bitte mit der
technischen Abteilung der Firma ECO
in Verbindung.
Esempio
Example
Beispiele
Carico termico = 8,2 kW;

Temperatura cella = 2 "C;
AT = 7 K;
Refrigerante R404A:
Modello scelto: CTE 174H3ED.
Carico termico = 4,3 kW;

Temperatura cella =-12 "C;
AT = 8 K;
Refrigerante R404A:
Modello scelto: CTE 86M6ED.
Heat load = 4,3 kW;

Room temperature = -12 C;
TD = 8 K;
Refrigerant R404A:
Selected model: CTE 86M6ED.
Kltebedarf = 4,3 kW;

Raumtemperatur = -12 C;
TD = 8 K;
Kltemittel R404A:
Gewhltes Modell: CTE 86M6ED.
Carico termico = 6 kW;

Temperatura cella = -23 *C;
AT = 6 K;
Refrigerante R404A:
Modello scelto: CTE 158L8ED.
Heat load = 6 kW;

Room temperature = -23 "C;
TD = 6 K;
Refrigerant R404A:
Selected model: CTE 158L8ED.
Kltebedarf =6 kW;
Raumtemperatur = -23 C;
TD = 6 K;
Kltemittel R404A;
Gewhltes Modeil: CTE158L8ED.
10
Heat load = 8,2 kW;

Room temperature = 2 C;
TD = 7 K;
Refrigerant R404A:
Selected model: CTE 174H3ED.
Kltebedarf =8,2 kW;

Raumtemperatur = 2 C;
TD = 7 K;
Kltemittel R404A;
Gewhltes Modell: CTE 174H3ED.
eCOREFRiGERAZiOHE
Serie CTE passo fra le alette 3,5 mm - CTE Series 3,5 mm fin spacing - CTE Serie Lamelienabstand 3,5 mm
Modello
Model
Modell
Cap. nominaki'
Nominal capacity'
Nennleistung' (AT^c8K)l(W
135
1.67
2,73
333
4,11
5,00
6,67
Capacit'
Capacity'
Leistung'
1,12
1.38
2,26
2,76
3,40
4,14
5,52
Portata aria
Airflow
Luftmenge
m'^
750
650
1500
1300
2250
1950
2600
2740
4110
5480
6850
8220
FreciMaria
Air throw
Wurfweite
8,00
7,00
9.00
8,00
11,00
10,00
12,00
14,00
16,00
18,00
20,00
22,00
Superiicie totale*
Air surface'
Gesamtoberflche*
m'
7,33
11,00
14,66
22,00
21.99
33,00
44,00
31,82
47,73
63,64
79,55
95.45
Peso netto
Net weight
Nettogewicht
norm.
14.80
16.90
23,10
25,90
32.90
37,80
42,20
38,80
54.20
68,40
84,00
92.90
27,90
35,40
89,50
99,90
ZSH3
(AT
i8K)l<W
(ko)
ED
15.80
53H3
38H3
17,90
25,10
80H3 113H3 150H3 116H3 174H3 233H3 291H3 349H3
75H3
40,30
45,20
_5,88 " ,8,81

4.87
41,80
7,30
57,70
11.76 '14,68
9,74 12,16
72,40
17,63 '
14,60
Serie CTE passo fra le alette 6 mm - CTE Series 6 m m fin spacing - <
CTE Serie Lamellenabstand 6 mm
Modello
Model
Modell
20MS
Nominal capacity'
Nennleistung'
(AT =8K)kW
Capacit'
Capacity*
Leistung'
(AT = 8K)kW
1 Cap. nominale"
29M6
41M8
1.20 1,51
,2,40
3ffi
3,60
452 -
6,01 .533- .7.99 -10,64
1,99
2,50
2.98
3,74
4,98 ^ 4,41
0.99
1,25
63IVI6
58M6
86M8 115M6
86M6 145W6 194lfl6 243W6 291M6
6,62
1331
8,81 11,02
15,96 .
13.22
Portata aria
Airflow
Luftmenge
m'/h
820
750
1540
1500
2460
2250
3000
3130
4700
6260
7830
9400
Freccia aria
Air throw
Wurfweite
S.50
7,50
10,00
9.00
12,00
11,00
13,00
15,00
17,00
19,00 21,00
23,00
Superficie totale'
Air surface'
Gesamtoberftche*
m'
4.47
6,70
8,94
13,40
13,41
20,10
26,80
19,38
29,07
38.76
48.45
58,14
Peso netto
Net weight
Nettogewicht
norm.
14,30
16,40
22.60
25.40
32.40
37,30 41,70
38,30
53,70
67,40
83,00
91.90
ED
15.30
17,40'
24,60
27.40
34,90
39.80
41.30
57,20
71,40
88,50
98.90
44,70
Serie CTE passo fra le alette 8,5 mm - CTE Series 8,5 mm1 fin spacing - CTE Serie Lamelienabstand 8,5 mm
Modello
Model
16L8ED Z31KD 3418ED 45L8EP SLSffi 66188) mSB) 84L8ED 125L8a) ISaLSTO ai9LBED 2S4UB)
Modell
lipli
9M$.p3;MS:|7|iliifiîi7X8:M'Pî^9t ff14/19-|
i J 2 . 1 0 |'?$izM
$Siffmmn^M iNniicapaclity';;;iNenn(e|stung':fe?<T ==;?!<) kW,::
;;:;<(acit5t-;;||g;;:S<Spac(t/^;5|S;;?iJi;i |!istun^s|:||?;(4TiSi<) iW/^^ ilOi87iW^sl ;|:i;;74 ;:::;2;io;;:'liifik

Portata aria
Airflow
Luftmenge
m*/h
870
Freccia aria
Air throw
Wurfweite
Superficie totate* Air surface'
Gesamtoberflche*
Peso netto
Nettogewicht
Net weight
i;3.15||i20?i3i92ijii:5,853:|:;7:49^-|:;9i75': Siii.75;S.
780
1740
1560
2610
2340
3120
3270
9,00
8,00
11,00
10,00
13,00
12.00 14.00
m'
3,29
4,93
6,58
9;86
9,87
(kg) ED
14,80
16,40
23,60
26.40
33,40
1x250
2x250
2x250
3x250
0,47
0.94
0.94
9810
4900
6530
8180
16.00
18.00
20,00
22.00
24,00
14,79 19,72
14.27
21,40 28.54
35.68
42.81
37,80
42,70
39.30
54.20
67.40
83,50
92.90
3x250
4x250
2x315
3x315
4x315
5x315
6x315
1,88
0.95
1,43
1,90
2,38
2,85
400
Dati comun i - Common data - Gemeinsame Daten

Motoventilatoii
Fan motors
VentitatOTmotoren
ri" X a mm
Assoftjimento mot.
Fan motors atisor^1. Stromaulnahme Motoren
Capacit circuito
Droit capacity
Rohiinhalt
1x250
0,47
1,41
1,41
72
72
144
144
216
216
288
200
300
500
600
dm'
1,56
. 2,34
2,89
4,34
4,23
.6,35
8,35
6,17
8.06
11.08 13.21
17,76
St]rinamento elettrico
Qectric defrost
BektJische Atjtauung
750
750
1275
1275
1800
1800
2400
2700
3990
5250
6060
7200
Sbrinanwnto acqua1
Water defrost
Wasserabtauung
l/h
400
400
850
850
1200
1200
1700
1400
1800
2500
3200
3800
Attacco
Connection
AnschluQ
GAS
3/4-
3/4-
3/4-
3/4-
3/4-
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
- I j capacit nominali sono riferite alle condlaonl piatiche d utilizzo in presenja di umidit con fluida R404A eflS07.In pratica si tileiisce al diagiammi dl scelta lapida.
- Nominal capacity in wet condition with R404A and R5D7 In practice it refers to quick selection diagrams.
- Die Nennleistungen erilsprechen den Bedingungen lid praktisw Anwendung uiter Vorhandensein Ân lxMgkeit ni^
- Capadta con R22 neBe condlaoni dl prova SC2 {tempeiatura enttata aria 0 "C; temperatura di evaporazione = -8 "C; temperalura suriiscaldamento - 2 , 8 1 ; AT = 8K) a superficie secca.
- Capacity with dry surface according to EN 328 with B22 refrigerant in testing condition SC2 (air in temp.. 0* C: evap. temp. =. -8 X : TD . 8 K; superheating temperature = -2,8 "Cj.
- LeistungraitKltemittel R22 unter Prlbedingung SC2 (Lutteintrtltstempefatur = O "C; Verdampfungstemperatur -8 X ; LItierhitajngstemperalur * -2.8 "C; TD = 8 K) tiei trockener Oberflche.
- Superficie lambrta dafl'aria - Surface touched by air running through - Oberflche luftbespOft
XXX - Impiegare valvola termostatica con equallzzatore dl pressione estemo.

- Use thermostatic vah/e with external pressure equalizer.
' Thermostatlsches Ventil mit Aussendruck-Kompensator anwenden.
-XXX - Testato dal RWTW di Essen secondo la norma EN 328. con R22 e superfid secca.
- Tested by RWIV Essen according to EN 328 with dry surfaces and R22.
Vora RWTIJV Essen gemB Norm EN 328 mit Klteminel R22 bei trockener Oberflche geprft
11
f';'
Diagramma di scelta rapida CTE H3 (R404A)
CTE H3 quick selection chart (R404A)
Schnellauswahldiagramm CTE H3 (R404A)
[kCaimj
26000
[Bturtil
[kWl
TI
349H3
291H3
~^^^
233H3
^^^
60000
soooo
174H3
- 150H3
116H3
"C :" ta
113H3
2. u c
O) CO D
to a ^
c O)
^ 55
80H3
7SH3
53H3
~'~~^.^
"~-^^
>-^^
^^
L^
"-~J
o I (O
<i XI X)
c CO
"^^
""-^
c -1-
38H3
26H3
co
' ^ ^ ^
' ^
^^-^^^
"---..^^
\
-S
S
T= C3. g -
2E i
sil
S.S "
^ "
- ^
"S^
3- [F1
'.i-
,^Vs^
'1- -
'.<
2*
o \'^
7^
" : / '
V'o
,>;:;
h~t
AT = temperatura cella - temperatura evaporazione

room temperature - evaporating temperature
Raumtemperatur - Verdampfungstemperatur
12
\
^
rc]
"^"
"--^ ^. ""^.^
AT [K] = AT [-C]
AT[K] = AT[F]/1,8
"
|~7] - Con valvola di espansione elettronica

- Witti electronic expansion valve
- Mit elektronischem Expansionsventil
CO
II
Temperatura della cella

Room temperature
Raumtemperatur
Carico termico - Potenza frigorifera

Heat-load - Cooling capacity
Kltebedarf-Klteleistung
TT
1 Q"
m
(U
Q
Q
C
J3
O
?r
Q
3-
C
(A
<D
3
3
Q
a
O
IL
Q
(O
Q
"
Q
3
O
1
O D
ZT
Q
=1. Q
m ,^
()
1
2 2 m
o ^ 2
X)
o
4:>.
%.
33
II
II
XJ
33
H9
m 2. m
5 5^?-
3 ô
3 o m
2, D.
q. o
Is S
(D
O
O
?a
m
-n
mS
m
>
ai o 2
o' 01 2.
< m
(C
f
Diagramme di scelta rapida CTE L8 ED (R404A)
CTE L8 ED quick selection chart (R404A)
Schnellauswahldiagramm CTE L8 ED (R404A)
[kCalAil
26000
S, " c
.Dl (O 3
t -^
CO O _a)
o o ^
c
t
to (D
O J3
0) ^ S
tr TO
n
<D 5xa
CO
( ^
-g S
2 Eg
sil
E o: "01
AT = temperatura cella temperatura evaporazione

room temperature - evaporating temperature
Raumtemperatur - Verdampfungstemperatur
14
AT [K] = AT ["C]
AT[K] = AT[F]/1,8
I I - Con valvola di espansione elettronica

- Witti electronic expansion valve
- Mit elektronischem Expansionsventil
eCOREFRlGERAZlONE
15
European Refrigeration Controls Catalogue

Catalog Section 7
Product Bulletin V46
Issue 9911
Is
'^:m^^
Series V46
Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves
I'ntroduction
These pressure actuated modulating valves
control the quantity of water to a condenser by
directly sensing pressure changes in a
refrigerant circuit. The valves can be used in
non-corrosive refrigerant systems. Ammonia
power elements and valves designed for saltwater applications are available. The valves
have a quick opening characteristic and open
on pressure increase (direct acting). Reverse
acting (close on pressure increase) is possible.
Series V46
Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve
Feature and Benefits
Pressure balanced valve design
Setpoint is independent from water inlet pressure
High refrigerant pressure resistant

bellows
Refrigeration pressure may increase up to 28 bar

without bellow damage
Pressure actuated
Direct and fast response to pressure variations
3/8,1/2, 3/4" are angled body type

valves with high Kv value
Small dimensions with high flow capacity
3/8" up to 2" pressure valves "all

range" types
Reduces stock. One valve for all non-corrosive

refrigerants
Quick opening valve characteristics
Fast response to pressure increase
No close fitting or sliding parts in

water passages
No hysteresis increase or stuck valve caused by

contamination
Easy to disassemble. All parts can

be replaced
Valve can easily be repaired "in line". Valve piece

parts are available "world-wide"
Special bronze bodies and monel

parts
Used for sea water applications
Power elements with stainless steel

bellows available
For use on ammonia filled equipment
Wide range of pressure connection

styles
Possibility to meet the legislation in your country
Nickel plated seats available for 3/8,

1/2, and 3/4" valves
High resistant against erosion/ corrosion and

cavitation
Direct/reverse action
Control action can be (factory) changed

Order No. PD-V46-E
Catalogue Section 7
V46
Issue 9911
/Vote
All series V46 water regulating valves are
designed for use only as operating devices.
Where system closure, improper flow or
loss of pressure due to valve failure can
result in personal injury and/or loss of
property, a separate pressure relief or
safety shut off valve, as applicable, must
be added by the user.
yVote
At a certain pressure the valve starts to
open. If the pressure decreases, the valve
will close again at a = 0,5 bar lower
pressure than the pressure where the valve
starts to open.
A(ote
description
A pressure-balanced design employing rubber
sealing diaphragms correctly proportioned to the
valve port area, balances valve against both
gradual and sudden water pressure changes,
and seals water away from range spring, guides
and sliding parts so these are not submerged in
water where they would be subject to
sedimentation and corrosion. Only five metal
parts, made of corrosion resistant material,
come in contact with the water. These are the
valve disc holder, the disc stud, the valve seat,
the valve stem, and the body.
X\djustments
The pressure at which the valve starts to open
(= opening point) can be adjusted by the
adjusting screw located at the top of the range
spring housing. Valves may be adjusted with
standard service valve wrenches or
screwdrivers. (Valves are not factory set at a
certain value.)
If the compressor operates in a high

ambient temperature, the refrigerant
pressure may at times remain high enough
to cause the valve to partly open when the
compressor is idle. In such conditions the
valve opening point should be raised just
enough to cause the valve to close during
compressor standby periods. Take this into
account when the head pressure rise
(HPR) is calculated.
The valve size can be selected by the use of:
-
the diagram (see page 3 and 4).
Kv factors and calculation formulae (see

page 3). This can only be used when the
allowed head pressure rise is 3 bar or higher.
At lower head pressure rises the diagram
has to be used.
ll/fanual flushing
Valves may be manually flushed by lifting the
lower spring guide with screwdrivers at two
sides of the pressure plate to open valve. This
does not affect valve adjustment.
y<alve size selection

The valve size is determined by three data:
- The required maximum flow (quantity of
liquid = Q) that must pass the valve (in mVh).
- Tlie maximum allowed pressure drop (= A P)
across the valve (in bar).
- The head pressure rise (= HPR) which is the
difference between the pressure where the
valve starts to open and the condenser
operating pressure.
Catalogue Section 7

Order No. PD-V46-E
V46
Issue 9911
Valve size selection by the use of the

diagram page 4
Q: The quantity of water (m%) is indicated on
the left side of the upper diagram
(= scale A).
A P: The curves for the pressure drop across
the valve are indicated in the lower diagram
(0,1 up to 4 bar, see scale C).
Solution:
a. Draw a horizontal line through 6 m^/h (scale
A) and determine the intersection of this line
with the Û" valve curve.
b. Draw a vertical line from this intersection
point to the 2,5 bar HPR line.
c. The found part is between the 2 and 3 bar
pressure drop curves. Interpolate the point
which gives 2,3 bar.
If this is acceptable the valve can be used.
E.g. Maximum flow.
HPR: The head pressure rise above the valve

opening point is indicated at the left side of the
lower diagram (max. 4 bar, see scale B).
yVote
There are two vertical head pressure rise
scales. The left side for range 5/18 bar
valves and the right side for high ranges
5/23 and 10/23 bar valves.
Valve size: The valve size can be read from the
right side of the upper diagram.
Valve size selection example:
Q
= 6,5m'/h
HPR = 2,7 bar
AP
= 0,5 bar
a. Draw a horizontal line through the 6,5 m %
point of scale A (see A).
b. Draw a horizontal line through the 2,7 bar of
scale B (see B). The intersection of this
horizontal line with the delta P curve of 0,5
bar is used to draw a vertical line from this
intersection point up to the horizontal line in
scale A (see C).
c. The intersection point of this vertical line with
the horizontal line in scale A indicates the
valve size. If the point falls on a size curve,
this is the valve size needed. If it is between
two sizes always take the largest valve size.
In this example it is between size i V v and
IV2".
The selected valve is IV2".
Of course the same diagram can be used to
read the pressure drop across a valve or to find
the maximum capacity of a valve.
E.g. Pressure drop.
Q needed is 6 m % .
HPR is 2,5 bar.
The valve size available is 'I".
What will be the pressure drop?

Order No. PD-V46-E
Valve size is 1"

HPR = 3 bar
Maximum A P = 2 bar
What is maximum Q?
Solution:
a. Draw a horizontal line at 3 bar HPR (scale B)
till intersection with 2 bar delta P curve.
b. Draw a vertical line from this intersection
point to the 1" valve curve.
c. Draw from this point a horizontal line to the
water flow scale A.
You find 9 m'/h.
Valve size selection by the use of the

Ky factors and calculation formulae
For water:
The following Ky values

can be used:
Q
K =
VXF
Q
Q = Kv Vp"
Valve
size
Ky value
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
11/4"
11/2"
2"
2"
21/2"
21/2"
1.8
2.7
4.5
6.5
9
10.5
18 (low range)
17 (high range)
22 (low range)
20(high range)
Q
= quantity of liquid (in m /h)
A P = pressure drop across valve (in bar)
Ky - valve flow coefficient
The Ky factor is the quantity of 20C water that
will pass through the valve at one bar pressure
drop and a valve opening which belongs by 3
bar head pressure rise (HPR) above the valve
opening point.
Catalogue Section 7
V46
Issue 9911
Diagram for selecting the valve size corresponding with information on page 3
Note: Use dotted curves for high range 2" and 2V-i' valves
Low range
m*
7
High range
*
^ . 21/2'
50
40
30
^2^5^
20
7
6
<
^-^^'T-
=^
1 '
1
1
5
__34'
ia"
^yy
J'<^'
/y
11(2"
11" "
^ -^"
'r-^
y ^^5^^
î^
'
--^
'"^"^^
^î
10
9
^îfii"
2" =-:?'- 2"
^"z:^ vf3^-^ ^
^r^-^"^^
^^^"
- vs-
i^,-"-"^
^
^
f7^ ^ - ^ ^^'^
^^
^
/ //
/ / ' -' y ^
fj /
y^
'1/ / y
y
^
y '
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
/ / , X
0.2
0.1
0.25
0.1
1
h.
!5 -^JS-
2.5
---
. . /
/
/
& 1?
8|
,5
''
r'
y____.
/
y
/
/
/
1/
I î- 2
|
1 0.5
3.5
? .S.S
zz
!/
/
^
/
^ '^ ^
4''
/
/
^
-"
3 5
3
'
S> -
^^
2
S "-
Si
1
sr;
^ '^ ^--^.S-
,
'
0..
46
^
^
''^^ ^ y
^^
^
y ^
/ ^ ^y^ ^ '^^^^ ^....^^
1.5
^s
1 0
Pressu e drop aero ss valve (sc aleC)
Note:
1 dm^/s = 3.6 m^/h = 15.8 U.S. gal./min. = 13,2 U.K. gal./min.

1 bar= 1 0 0 k P a = 0.1 MPa = 1.02 kp/cm^ = 1,02 at = 14.5 psi.
Fig. 1
Catalogue Section 7

Order No. PD-V46-E
V46
Issue 9911
y ! | m m o n i a (NH3)applications
Repair
For all larger valve types an ammonia element

is available. These elements have style 15
pressure connection and consist of a stainless
steel bellow in a steel cup (coated). The existing
element can be replaced by this ammonia
element. The pressure range does not change.
For the high range valves (V46AS/AT/BS/BT)
the spring inside the power element has to be
placed in the ammonia element. If low pressure
is needed this spring can be removed. For low
quantities you have to order the selected valve
and separate ammonia replacement power
element (see valve type selection table). For
quantity orders a special valve type can be set
up. Then please contact the JC sales office in
your region.
Diaphragm kits can be ordered for all valves.

Also the complete power element can be
replaced. For a total revision of the valve a
renewal kit can be ordered.
and replacement
For type numbers of replacement power

elements, renewal kits and diaphragm kits see
valve selection table.
If a replacement is ordered a "repair parts and
service instruction" sheet will be included in
which a step by step description is given to
disassemble/assemble the valve.
j f \ e n e w a l KITs
Each KIT contains parts

as indicated in the table
below. The complete KIT
must be ordered that
contains part required.
Valve
type:
V46AA
V46AB
V46AC
V46AD
V46AE
V46AR
V46AS
V46AT
KIT
number:
STT002N600R
STT003N600R
STT004N600R
STT17A609R
STT17A610R
STT17A610R
STT18A600R
STT18A601R
V46BA
V46BB
V46BC
V46BD
V46BE
V46BR
V46BS
V46BT
STT14A601R
STT15A603R
STT17A613R
STT17A611R
STT17A612R
STT17A612R
STT18A602R
STT18A602R

Order No. PD-V46-E
o
o
Q.
O
O
</)
b
(0
X!
0)
>
CC
>
(/3
TD
I
<D
O)
C
3
CL
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
3
O
Q.
0)
-O
'3
D5
a>
T3
0
a
*'
E
"55
x:
0
en
'-a
CD
"(5
<U
>
ro
>
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
>
CC
>
x:
0
c
>
CD
(D
CU
c/5
C
g
"c
en
CD
CU
"S
en
CD
CD
i-
CD
>
x:
CL
CD
CD
U>
CD
1
1
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
01
CC
>
CD
>
CD
CC
in
>
1
1
1
1
Catalogue Section 7
V46
(ssue 9911
p r e s s u r e connections
Fig. 2
Style 13 (excl. valve depressor)
1. 75 cm capillary
2. 7/16-20 UNF flare nut
Fig. 3
Style 34
1. 75 cm capillary
2. 1/4" tube for braze connection
Fig. 4
Style 50 (incl. valve depressor mounted into machined flare)
1. 75 cm capillary.
2. 7 / 1 6 - 2 0 UNF flare nut.
3. copper sealring
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Style 15
1/4-18NPT (female)
Style 5
7/16-20 UNF
Catalogue Section 7

Order No. PD-V46-E
V46
Issue 9911
d i m e n s i o n s (mm)
For valve type see specifications page 12
Angled type
^P
tU^
Fig. 7
Commercia Types
Valve type Valve size
V46AA
V46AB
V46AC

Order No. PD-V46-E
Va"
V2"
3/4"
Dimensions in mm
A
B
C
69
153
66
80
170
86
91
183
95
D
43
51
55
E
18
27
36
F
89
100
110
Catalogue Section 7
V46
Issue 9911
d i m e n s i o n s (mm)
Straiglit type
Fig. 8
Catalogue Section 7
Commercial Types
Dimensions in mm.
Valve
Valve
type
size
A
B
C
124
139
V46AD
1"
233
125
243
145
V46AE
VU"
D
72
72
E
50
58
F
13
13
Sea-water Types
V46BA
3/8"
1/2"
V46BB
3/4"
V46BC
V46BD
1"
V46BE
IV4"
42
52
55
71
71
32
29
35
52
62
10
10
10
13
13
68
79
86
124
124
161
165
175
246
254
80
86
96
139
144

Order No. PD-V46-E
V46
Issue 9911
jD'n'iisions (mm)
Flange type
Fig. 9
Commercial Types
Valve type
Valve
Dimensions in mm.
A
V46AR
size
^1/2"
137
244
144
20
150
48
72
13
110
18
2"
2l/2"
168
304
164
20
165
57
95
15
125
18
172
304
164
21
185
70
95
15
145
18
V46AS
V46AT
Sea-water Types
V46BR
1 Va"
136
235
141
14
150
46
71
13
110
18
V46BS
2"
2l/2"
162
292
160
17
165
56
95
15
125
18
172
293
160
17
185
68
95
15
137
18
V46BT
\/alve selection table

Order No. PD-V46-E
Catalogue Section 7
V46
Issue 9911
10
Commercial types
Item
Size
inch
Range
bar
Refrig.
connec.
Style
V46AA-9300
3/8
5/23
V46AA-9301
3/8
5/23
V46AA-9510
3/8
5/23
50
V46AA-9511
3/8
5/23
V46AA-9600
3/6
5/18
V46/\A-9602*
3/8
V46/\A-9606-
Capil.
length
m
Connection
thread/flange
R3/8
ISO R228
R3/8
ISO R228
0.75
R3/8
ISO R288
51
1.2
R3/8
ISO R228
13
0.75
R3/8
ISO R228
5/18
13
1.00
R3/8
ISO R228
3/8
5/23
13
0.75
R3/8
ISO R228
V46AA-9950*
3/8
5/18
34
0.75
R3/8
ISO R228
V46AB-9300
1/2
5/23
R1/2
ISO R228
V46AB-9510
1/2
5/23
50
0.75
R1/2
ISO R228
V46AB-9600
1/2
5/18
13
0.75
R1/2
ISO R228
V46AB-9605*
1/2
5/23
13
0.75
R1/2
V46AB-9606*
1/2
5/18
13
0.75
V46AB-9950
1/2
5/18
34
V46AB-9951*
1/2
5/23
V46AC-9300
3/4
V46AC-9510
V46AC-9600
V46AA-9620
power
element
246-821R
246-821R
Replacements
renewal
diaphragm
kit
l<it
Ammonia
element
type
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
0.9
24
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
0.9
24
22,0
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
0.9
24
22.0
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
0.9
24
22.0
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
0.9
24
22.0
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
0.9
24
22.0
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
0.9
24
22.0
B Jlkpack V46AA-9600
22.0
24
22.0
0.9
24
22.0
1.3
18
24.0
1.3
18
24.0
1.3
18
24.0
1.3
18
24.0
KIT016N601 100)
1.3
18
24.0
STT003N600R
KIT016N601 100)
1.3
18
24.0
STT003N600R
KIT016N601 100)
1.3
18
24.0
STT004N600R
KIT016N602 100)
1.7
14
25.5
1.7
14
25,5
1.7
14
25.5
1.7
14
25.5
1.7
14
25.5
1.7
14
25.5
STT002N600R
KIT016N600 100)
STT003N600R
KIT016N601 100)
STT003N600R
KIT016N601 100)
246-824R
STT003N600R
KIT016N601 100)
ISO R228
246-824R
STT003N600R
KIT016N601 100)
R1/2
ISO R228
246-824R
STT003N600R
0.75
R1/2
ISO R223
34
0.75
R1/2
ISO R228
5/23
0.75
R3/4
ISO R228
3/4
5/23
50
0.75
R3/4
ISO R228
3/4
5/18
13
0.75
R3/4
ISO R228
V46AC-9605*
3/4
5/23
13
0.75
R3/4
V46AC-9606
3/4
5/18
13
1.20
V46AC-9951
3/4
5/18
34
0.75
V46AD-9300
5/18
V46AD-9510
5/18
V46AD-9511
10/23
V4eAD-9600
V46AE-9300
1 1/4
V46AE-9510
Qty Weight
Weight
per per
single
pacif l<g. box box kg.
STT004N600R
KIT016N602 100)
246-825R
STT004N600R
KIT016N602 100)
ISO R228
246-825R
STT004N600R
KIT016N602 100)
R3/4
ISO R228
STT004N600R
KIT016N602 100)
R3/4
ISO R228
STT004N600R
KIT016N602 100)
R1
IS0R7
STT17A609R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667 R
3.5
50
0.75
R1
IS0R7
STT17A609R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
3.5
3.5
50
0.75
R1
IS0R7
STT17A609R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
3.5
3.5
5/18
13
0.75
R1
IS0R7
246-925R
STT17A609R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
3.5
3.5
5/18
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
3.8
3.8
1 1/4
5/18
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
3.8
3.8
V46AE-9612
1 1/4
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
4.0
3.8
V46AE-9513
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
4.0
3.8
246-667R
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
3,8
3.8
R11/4ISOR7
50
0.75
R11/4ISOR7
10/23
50
0.75
R11/4ISOR7
1 1/4
10/23
50
1.50
R11/4ISOR7
V46AE-9600
1 1/4
5/18
13
0.75
R11/4ISOR7
246-925R
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
V46AE-9700
1 1/4
7/14
15
R11/4ISOR7
246-667R
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
V46AE-9950
1 1/4
5/18
34
1.30
R11/4ISOR7
246-667R
V46AR-9300
1 1/2
5/18
V46AR-9600
1 1/2
5/18
13
0.75
V46AR-9700
1 1/2
7/14
V46AS-9300
5/11.5
V46AS-9301
11/18
V46AS-9700
7/14
15
V46AT-9300
2 1/2
5/11.5
V46AT-9301
2 1/2
11/18
V46AT-9700
2 1/2
7/14
15
* nickel plated seat
Catalogue Section 7
3.5
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
Flange 11/2 DIN2533
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
7,5
7.5
Flange 1 1/2 DIN2533 246-925R
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
246-667R
7,5
7.5
15
Flange 1 1/2DIN2533 246-667R
STT17A610R
KIT016N603
50)
7.5
7.5
Flange 2
DIN2533 246-671R
STT18A600R
KIT016N604
25)
246-781R
13.0
13.0
Flange 2
DIN2533 246-758R
STT18A600R
KIT016N604
25)
246-781R
13.0
13.0
Flange 2
DIN2533 246-781R
STT18A600R
KIT016N604
25)
13.0
13.0
Flang e 2 1/2 DIN2533 246-671R
STT18A601R
KIT016N604
26)
246-781R
14.0
14.0
Flange 2 1/2 DIN2533
246-758R
STT18A601R
KIT016N604
25)
246-781R
14.0
14.0
Flange 2 1/2 DIN2533 246-781R
STT18A601R
KIT016N604
25)
14.0
14.0

Order No. PD-V46-E
V46
Issue 9911
11
Sea-water types
Size
inch
Range
bar
Refrig.
connec.
style
Capll. C o n n e c t i o n
lengtti t h r e a d / f l a n g e
m
V46BA-9510
3/8
5/18
50
0,75
R3/8
ISO R228
STT14A601R
V4eBA-9600
3/8
5/18
13
0.75
R3/8
ISO R228
246-723R
STT14A601R
V4eBB-9510
1/2
5/18
50
0.75
R1/2
ISO R228
STT15A603R
KIT016N601 (100)
V4eBB-9600
1/2
5/18
13
0.75
R1/2
ISO R228
246-724R
STT15A603R
KIT016N601 (100)
V46BC-9510
3/4
5/18
50
0.75
R3/4
ISO R228
STT17A613R
KIT016N602 (100)
V4eBC-9511
3/4
5/23
50
1.40
R3/4
ISO R228
STT17A613R
KIT016N602(100)
V46BC-9600
3/4
5/18
13
0.75
R3/4
ISO R228
STT17A613R
KIT016N6G2(100)
V4eBC-9601
3/4
5/18
13
1,20
R3/4
ISO R228
STT17A613R
KIT016N602(100)
V46BD-9510
5/18
50
0,75
R1
ISO R228
STT17A611R
KIT016N603(50)
246-667R
4.0
4.0
V46BD-9600
5/18
13
0,75
R1
ISO R228
STT17A611R
KIT016N603 ( 50)
246-667 R
4.0
4.0
V4eBD-9601
5/18
13
1.20
R1
ISO R228
STT17A611R
KIT016N603 ( 50)
246-667R
4.0
4.0
V4eBE-9510
1 1/4
5/18
50
0.75
R11/4ISOR228
STT17A612R
KIT016N603(50)
246-667R
4.5
4.5
V4eBE-9511
1 1/4
10/23
50
1.50
R11/4ISOR228
STT17A612R
KIT016N603(50)
246-667R
4.5
4.5
V46BE-9600
1 1/4
5/18
13
0.75
R11/4ISOR228
STT17A612R
KIT016N603(50)
246-667R
4.5
4.5
V46BE-9601
1 1/4
5/13
13
1,20
R11/4ISOR228
STT17A612R
KIT016N603(50)
246-667R
4.5
4.5
V46BR-9510
1 1/2
5/18
50
0,75
STT17A612R
KIT016N603(50)
246-667R
7.5
7.5
V46BR-9600
1 1/2
5/18
13
0.75
246-755R
STT17A612R
KIT016N603(50)
246-667R
7.6
7.5
V46BS-9300
5/11.5
Flang e 2
DIN2533
246-758R
STT18A602R
KIT016N604(25)
246-781R
13.5
13.5
V46BS-9301
11/18
Flange 2
DIN2533
246-758R
STT18A602R
KIT016N604(25)
246-781R
13.5
13.5
V46BT-9300
2 1/2
5/11.5
246-758R
STT18A602R
KIT016N604(25)
246-781R
14,5
14.5
V4eBT-9301
2 1/2
11/18
Flange 2 1/2DIN2533
246-758R
STT18A602R
KIT016N604(25)
246-781R
15.0
15.0
V4eBT-9700
2 1/2
7/14
15
Flange 2 1/2DIN2533
246-781R
STT18A602R
KIT016N604(25)
246-781R
15.0
15.0
Item

Order No. PD-V46-E
power
element
246-762R
246-755R
246-755R
Replacements
renewal
diapliragm
l<it
kit
Ammonia
element
type
Weigiit
single
pacld<g.
Qty W e i g i i t
per per
b o x b o x kg.
KIT016N600(100)
0.8
24
20.0
KIT016N600(100)
0.8
24
20.0
1.3
18
24.0
1.3
18
24.0
1.7
14
25.0
1.7
14
25.0
1.7
14
25.0
1.7
14
25.0
Catalogue Section 7
V46
Issue 9911
12
Specifications
Commercial
Size
Operating range (bar)
Max. refrig. overrun press.(bar)
IVIax. water supply press, (bar)
Max. water supply temp.
Min. water supply temp.*
Valve hysteresis (bar)
Valve body style
angled
straight
Pipe connection**
thread ISO R228
thread ISO R7
flange DIN 2533
Material
body
disc stud/disc cup
seat
diaphragms
bellows
stem/extension sleeve
disc
3/8" - 3/4"
5-18/5-23
28
10
90 C
-20 C
-0,5
1"-l1/4"
5-18/10-23
28
10
90 C
-20 C
-0,5
l1/2"
5-18
28
10
90 C
-20 C
-0,5
2"-2l/2"
5-11,5
28
10
90 "C
-20 C
-0,5
2"-2l/2"
11-18
28
10
90C
-20C
-0,5
X
X
X
hot forged
brass
brass
alum, bronze
BUNA-N
ph. bronze
brass
BUNA-N
cast iron***
cast iron*
cast iron***
cast iron**
brass
alum, bronze
BUNA-N
ph. bronze
brass
BUNA-N
brass
alum, bronze
BUNA-N
ph. bronze
brass
BUNA-N
brass
alum, bronze
BUNA-N
tombac
brass
BUNA-N
brass
alum, bronze
BUNA-N
monel
monel
BUNA-N
Sea-water
Size 3/8"-3/4"
Operating range (bar)
Max. refrig. overrun press.(bar)
Max. water supply press, (bar)
Max. water supply temp.
Min. water supply temp.*
Valve hysteresis (bar)
Valve body style straight
Pipe ** connection thread ISO R228
flange DIN 2533
Material
body
disc stud/disc cup
seat
diaphragms
bellows
stem/extension sleeve
disc
Pressure connection style
5-18
28
10
90 C
-20 C
- 0,5
x
x
1"-l1/4"
l1/2"
5-18
28
10
90 C
-20 C
-0,5
5-18
28
10
90 C
-20 C
-0,5
2"-21/2"
5-11,5
28
10
90 C
-20 C
-0,5
2"-2l/2"
11-18
28
10
90 C
-20 C
-0,5
bronze
monel
monel
BUNA-N
monel
monel
BUNA-N
bronze
monel
monel
BUNA-N
monel
monel
BUNA-N
bronze
bronze
bronze
monel
monel
monel
monel
monel
monel
BUNA-N
BUNA-N
BUNA-N
ph. bronze
ph. bronze
ph. bronze
monel
monel
monel
BUNA-N
BUNA-N
BUNA-N
See
selection
table.
Capillary length See
selection
table.
Ammonia element style 15 press. Stainless steel bellow in steel cup.
connection
Shipping weights See valve selection table.
*
Care should be taken the valve does not freeze up.
** Thread ISO R7 = DIN2999-RC thread/ISO R228 = DIN259-Rp thread
*** Cast iron bodies are executed with rust resisting finish
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond
these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office or representative. Johnson Controls shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
JQHNSON
CONTROLS
Johnson Controls International, Inc.
Headquarters:
Milwaul<ee, Wl, USA
European Headquarters:
Westendhof 8, 45143 Essen, Germany
European Factories:
Lomagna (Italy), Leeuwarden (The Netherlands) and Essen (Germany)
Branch Offices:
Principal European Cities.
This document is subject to chiange
Catalogue Section 7
Printed in Europe

Order No. PD-V46-E
Thermostats
type KP
Introduction
KP thermostats are temperature-controlled

electrical switches. A KP thermostat has a single
pole (SPOT) changeover switch.
The position of the switch depends on the
thermostat setting and the bulb temperature.
A KP thermostat can be directly connected to
single-phase a.c. motors of up to about 2 kW,
or installed in the control current circuit of d.o.
motors and large a.c. motors.
Features

Can be used for deep freeze, refrigeration
and air conditioning plant
Welded bellows elements mean
increased reliability
Small dimensions
Easy to install in refrigerated counters
or cold rooms.
Ultra-short bounce times
Long operating life.
Unnecessary cut-in and cut-out of control
equipment is avoided.
DEMKO, Denmark
NEMKO, Nonway
FIMKO, Finland
DSRK, Deutsche-Schiffs-Revision und
-Klassifikation, Germany
Polski Rejestr Statkw, Poland
DnV, Det norske Veritas, Norway
Approvals
Danfoss 9/96
Standard versions with changeover switch

Possible to obtain opposite switch function
or to connect a signal.
Electrical connection at the front of the unit
Facilitates rack mounting.
Saves space.
Suitable for alternating and direct current
Cable entry of soft thermoplastics for cables
from 6 to 14 mm diameter
Extensive and wide range

BV, France
LR, UK
MRS, Maritime Register of Shipping, Russia
EZU, Czech Republic / Slovak Republic
CE according to EN 60730-2-1 to -9
Versions with UL and CSA approvals can be
317
Thermostats, type KP
Regulating range
Vapour range
KP 61
KP 62
KP 63
KP 68
KP 69
Adsorption charge
KP 62
KP 71
KP 73
KP 75
KP 77
KP 79
KP 81
KP 98 HT
KP 98 OIL
KP 98 OIL
KP 98 HT
Technical data
+50
+100
Ambient temperature
- 4 0 - +65C (+80''C for max. 2 hours).
Switch
Single pole changeover switch (SPOT).
Contact load
Alternating current:
AC1: 16 A, 400V
AC3: 16 A, 400 V
AC15: 10 A, 400V
Max. starting current (L.R.): 112 A, 400 V
Direct current:
DC13:12W, 220V control current
Contact systems
+ 150
Cable connection
Cable entry for cables 6 - > 14 mmdia.
A P g 13.5 screwed cable entry can be used
for 6 -> 14 mm dia. cables.
With 8 -> 16 mm cables a standard Pg 16
screwed cable entry can be used.
Enclosure
IP 33 to IEC 529
This grade of enclosure Is obtained when the
unit Is mounted on a flat surface or bracket.
The bracket must be fixed so that all unused
holes are covered.
IP 44 for single and dual versions with separate
top cover (accessories, must be ordered
separately, see KP pressure controls).
SPOT
Line C^ e Z I - O "
ISA 1
KP thermostats
318
M) 2
O 1
L-inTTTTnI
KP 98
Danfoss 9/96
Ordering
Charge
Bulb
type
Setting range
KP 61
KP 61
Type
Vapour')
r-{mmmi
Adsorbtion2)
Reset
Max. Capillatybulb
tube
temp.
length
Code no.
Highest
temperature
C
-30^15
5.5-^23
1.5- 7
Aut.
120
60L1100
- 3 0 ^ 15
5.5 -4 23
1.5-7
Aut.
120
SOLI101
KP 61
-30^13
4.5-^23
1.2-7
Aut.
120
60L1102
KP 61
- 3 0 ^ 15
5.5 - 23
1.5-7
Aut.
120
60L1103 3)
KP 61
-30-^15
5.5 -> 23
1.5^7
Aut,
120
60L1128 3)'')
KP 61
- 3 0 ^ 15
Fixed 6
Fixed 2
Min,
120
60L1104
KP 61
- 3 0 - > 15
Fixed 6
Fixed 2
Min,
120
60L1105
KP 61
- 3 0 ^ 13
4.5-23
1.2-7
Aut,
120
60L1177 5)
KP 61
- 3 0 - 13
4.5^23
1.2 - 7
Aut,
120
60L1180
KP 62
C1
- 3 0 ^ 15
6.0 ^ 23
1.5^7
Aut,
120
KP 63
-50^-10
10.0 ^ 7 0
2,7^8
AuL
120
60L1107
KP 63
-50--10
10.0-> 70
2.7^8
Aut,
120
60L1108
KP 68
C1
-5-^35
4.5 ^ 25
1.8^7
Aut.
120
KP 69
-5^35
4.5 -> 25
1.8- 7
Aut.
120
60L1112
60L1165
Differential at
Lowest
temperature
C
60L1106
60L1111
KP 69
-5^35
4.5-25
1.8^7
Aut.
120
KP 62
C2
- 3 0 ^ 15
5.0-4 20
2.0-8
Aut.
80
60L11103)')
KP 62
C2
-30->15
5.0 ^ 20
2.0^8
Aut.
80
60L1178 3)5)
KP 71
E2
-5->20
3.0 -^ 10
2.2-9
Aut.
80
KP 71
E2
-5->20
Fixed 3
Fixed 3
IVlin.
80
60L1115
KP 73
El
-25-15
12.0^70
8.0 -> 25
Aut.
80
60L1117
KP 73
D 1
- 2 5 ^ 15
4 . 0 - 10
3.5^9
Aut.
80
60L11183)
KP 73
E2
- 2 5 ^ 15
3.5- 10
3.0- 9
Aut.
80
60L1130
KP 73
D 1
-25^15
Fixed 3.5
Fixed 3.5
Min.
80
60L1138
KP 73
El
-25-15
12.0^70
8.0 - 25
Aut.
80
60L1139
KP 73
D2
- 2 0 ^ 15
4 . 0 - 15
2.0.^13
Aut.
55
60L1140
KP 73
D 1
- 3 0 - 10
Fixed 3.5
Fixed 3.5
Min.
80
60L1141
KP 73
D 1
- 3 0 ^ 15
3.5 ^ 20
3.25- 18
Aut.
80
60L1143
KP 75
0^35
3 . 5 ^ 16
2 . 5 ^ 12
Aut.
110
60L1120
KP 75
E2
0-35
3.5 ^ 16
2.5- 12
Aut.
110
60L1137
KP 77
E3
20^60
3 . 5 ^ 10
3 . 5 ^ 10
Aut.
130
60L1121
KP 77
E3
20^60
3 . 5 ^ 10
3.5-> 10
Aut.
130
60L1122
KP 77
E2
20^60
3 . 5 ^ 10
3.5- 10
Aut.
130
60L1168
KP 77
E3
20->60
3 . 5 - 10
3.5-^ 10
Aut.
130
60L1189
KP 79
E3
50-> 100
5 . 0 ^ 15
5 . 0 ^ 15
Aut.
150
60L1126
KP 81
E3
8 0 - > 150
7.0 ^ 20
7.0 -> 20
Aut.
200
60L1125
KP 81
E3
Fixed 8
Fixed 8
60L1155
KP 98
KP 98
Max.
200
E2
OIL: 6 0 - 1 2 0
OIL: fixed 14 OIL: fixed 14
Max.
150
E2
HT; 100 ^ 180
HT: fixed 25
Max.
250
80^150
E2
OIL; 0 ^ 3 0
E2
HT: 100-180
HT: fixed 25
OIL: fixed 12 OIL: fixed 12
Aut.
100
HT; fixed 25
Max.
250
HT: fixed 25
60L1113
60L1131
60L1132
'') Bulb must always be placed colder than the thermostat housing and capillary tube.The thermostat will then regulate
independent of ambient temperature.
2) Bulb can be placed warmer or colder than thermostat housing and capillary tube, but variations from +20C ambient
temperature will influence the scale accuracy.
*) With manual switch, not isolating switch.
^) Panel mounting model with top plate.
5) Thermostats with gold-plated contacts.
Catalogue RK.00.H5,02
319
Ordering
(continued)
Thermostat bulb types
straight capillary tube
5 9.5 X 70 mm remote air coil
C1: 0 40 X 25 mm air coil

C2: 0 25 X 67 mm air coil
(integral with thermostat)
D 1 : 0 10 X 85 mm double contact remote bulb

D 2 : 0 16x 170 mm double contact remote bulb
Note! Cannot be used in sensor (bulb) pocket
E l : 0 6.4 X 95 mm remote bulb

E 2 : 0 9.5x 115 mm remote bulb
E3: 0 9.5 X 85 mm remote bulb
Il-^vwwiiim
0 25 X 125 mm remote duct coil
320
Danfoss 9/96
Design
Function
9
15
17
"-"
^ 1 1
Key sketch of KP thermostats
1.
2.
3.
7.
8.
9.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Temperature setting spindle

Differential setting spindle
Main arnn
Main spring
Differential spring
Bellows
Switch
Terminals
Earth terminal
Cable entry
Tumbler
Sensor
Adsorption charge
Vapour charge
The switch in the KP has a snap-action function

and the bellows move only when the cutin or cutout value is reached.
Danfoss 9/96
V.o..ar.
Adsorption charge
The design of the KP thermostat affords the

following advantages:
- high contact load
- ultra-short bounce time
- vibration resistance up to 4 g
in the range 0-1000 Hz
- long mechanical and electrical life.
321
Design
Function
(continued)
1. Temperature setting spindle, OIL

3. Main arm
5. Temperature setting spindle, HT
7. Main spring
9. Bellows
10. Capillary tube, OIL
11. Capillary tube, HT
12. Switch
13. Terminals
14. Earth terminal
15. Cable entry
16. Tumbler
17. Sensor (bulb)
18. Locking plate
Terminology
U u L. u
Dual thermostat KP 98 is used as a protection

against too high a discharge gas temperature
and to ensure a suitable oil temperature in the
compressor.
To avoid the temperature of the hot gas
exceeding the maximum permissible value during
extreme operating conditions (low evaporating
pressure, high condensing pressure, high suction
vapour superheat) a KP 98 thermostat can be
used on the high temperature side (HT). If the
temperature of the hot gas becomes too high the
refrigerant will break down and the compressor
discharge valve will become damaged.
The risk is greatest in refrigeration systems that
operate on a high compression ratio (e.g. in
systems with NH3 or R 22) and in applications
with hot gas bypass.
This unit has two separate thermostat functions.
The HT sensor that controls the discharge gas
temperature is fitted on the discharge tube
immediately after the compressor.
For larger compressors, the sensor can be built
into the discharge tube.
The OIL sensor that controls the oil temperature
is located in the compressor oil sump.
KP 98 is available in two versions:
A. Protection against low oil temperature
Compressor manufactures recommend fitting a
heating element in the crankcase to prevent
refrigerant boiling out of the oil during start.
Differential
The differential is the difference between the
make and break temperatures.
A differential is necessary for satisfactory
automatic operation of the plant.
Mechanical differential (intrinsic differential)
The mechanical differential is the differential set
by the differential spindle.
Operating differential (thermal differential)
The operating differential is the differential
the plant operates on. Operating differential is
the sum of the mechanical differential and the
differential produced by the time constant.
322
J '
KP 98, dual thermostat
KP 98 is the correct thermostat for controlling this

heating element.
Why a heating element?
During standstill, refrigerant is dissolved in the
crankcase oil. If the oil is cold and the standstill
period long a large amount of refrigerant can
become dissolved.This leads to two problems;
1. When the compressor is started, the refrigerant
will boil off.There is a high risk of liquid
hammer and consequent compressor damage.
2. The oil loses its lubricating capability when it
is thinned with refrigerant.
To avoid these problems a heating element
controlled by a KP 98,60L1132, should befitted
in the crankcase to keep the oil warm.This then
prevents dangerous amounts of refrigerant being
dissolved in the oil.
B. Protection against high oil temperature
Compressor manufactures recommend that
compressors used in connection with industrial
heat pumps or refrigerating systems be equipped
with a thermostat to give protection against too
high an oil temperature in the crankcase.
In periods of peak load, too high an oil
temperature leads to insufficient lubrication of
the compressor, with the risk of compressor
damage. KP 98,60L1131, monitors the oil
temperature so that it cannot become too high.
Reset
Manual reset:
Units with manual reset can only be restarted
after the reset button has been activated.
On min. reset units the set value is equal to
the out-out value for falling temperature.
On max. reset units the set value is equal to
the cut-out value for rising temperature.
Automatic reset:
These units are automatically reset after
operational stop.
Danfoss 9/96
Setting
Charges
Thermostats with automatic reset

Set the upper activating temperature on the range
scale.
Set the differential on the "DIFF" scale.
The temperature setting on the range scale will
then correspond to the temperature at which the
refrigeration compressor will be started on rising
temperature. The compressor will be stopped
when the temperature has fallen in relation to the
differential setting.
Please note that the differential depends on the
range setting.Therefore, the differential scale
must only be used as guideline.
If with low stop temperature settings the
compressor will not stop, check whether the
differential is set at too high a value!
1. Vapour charge
9. Bellows element
17. Sensor (bulb)
19. Capillary tube
Here the interdependence between the pressure

and temperature of saturated vapour is utilized,
i.e. the element is charged with saturated vapour
plus a small amount of liquid.
The charge is pressure-limited; a further increase
in pressure after evaporation of all the liquid in
the sensor (17) will only result in a small pressure
increase in the element.
Thermostats with minimum reset

Set the stop temperature on the range scale.
The differential is a fixed setting.
The compressor can be restarted by pressing
the "Reset button" after the temperature on the
thermostat sensor has risen by a value equal to
the fixed differential setting.
Thermostats with maximum reset
Set the stop temperature on the range scale.
The differential is a fixed setting.
The compressor can be restarted by pressing
the "Reset button" after the temperature on the
thermostat sensor has fallen to a value equal to
the fixed differential setting.
This principle can be utilized in thermostats for

low temperature, etc. where evaporation must be
able to take place from the free liquid surface in
the sensor (within the operating range of the
thermostat), and where at the same time, the
bellows must be protected against deformation
when kept at normal ambient temperatures.
Since the pressure in the element depends on
the temperature at the free liquid surface, the
thermostat must always be placed so that the
sensor is colder than the rest of the thermostatic
element.
The evaporated liquid will recondense at the
coldest point, i.e. the sensor.Thus, as intended,
the sensor becomes the temperature-controlling
part of the system.
Note: When the sensor is coldest, the ambient
temperature has no effect on regulating accuracy.
2. Adsorption charge
In this case the charge consists partly of a
superheated gas and partly of a solid having a
large adsorption surface.
The solid is concentrated in the sensor (17) and
it is therefore always the sensor that is the
temperature-controlling part of the thermostatic
element.
The sensor can be placed warmer or colder
than thermostat housing and capillary tube, but
variations from +20C ambient temperature will
influence the scale accuracy.
9. Bellows element
17, Sensor (bulb)
19. Capillary tube
Danfoss 9/96
323
Dimensions and weights
W^^
mm
Weight
KP 61-81: approx. 0.4 kg
KP 98: approx. 0.6 kg
Dia.5
\ 9-III. i
Dia.5-
KP 61-81
Mounting holes (back of KP)
M4
( 8 - 3 2 U N F V - . i25,4
00
fH
n' t
1?
Kr
in
Kl
in
Dio . S ^ ^ - I 27 -51"
Mounting holes (back of KP)
25.4
Wall bracket
16
n^
11
A:
KP 61.
KP 63
324
B:
KP 61,
KP 63,
KP 69
KP 62
D2:
KP 73
v
E2:
KP 71
KP 73
KP 75
KP 77
KP 98
f]
U
E3:
KP 77
KP 79
KP 81
DI:
KP 73
El:
KP 73
Danfoss 9/96
Hfl
j iiHj
:P
61 _> 81
KP 61,62, 63, 68, 69 vapour charge

KP 62,71,73,75,77,7S, 81 adsorption cfiarge (cross ambient)
MT3L
Lo)
Vapour charge
Adsorption charge
Wanua! reset
|j-stop
Max.
1
MQX.120''C
(250''F)
KP 62,71.73
KP 75
KP 77
KP 79
KP 81
"59
80''C(175''F)2
110 C (230"'F) 28
l/VO'C (235 F)
ISO'COOCF)
SOO'COgO-F)
ti
t j a t , + 2C(3.5F)
min. -Ô'C (-40F)

max. e S ' C d S O ' F )
Vapour charge
mm.
B
2m cap.tube:t>|AB|=40cm
5m c a p t u b e . A B =55cm
max.3mm
'(Vein.)
Drip proof iP33

(1EC529/DINA0'050)
(8-32 UNO
voli 1
amp y-
VVQttJ
I"
1n
il
volt 1
..
Au.omaxic
r?set
amp^-*;.:,
^QJ.V
v^.tj
Manual
reset
JrStart
o Stop -2 I
6 Stop
^Stari
5 3 ^ ? ^ -+ Ra.5D.B1,00
2-19S1
10-2/10-'9G
HEATEXCHANGER
w VJ X
III doucette industries, inc.
L1
SLHE-1/2 t/m SLHE-20
Suited for ail halogenic refrigerants i
L
CONNECTIONS
'
TYPE
DIMENSIONS (mm)
WEIGHT (kgj
SOLDER
NUMBER
PIPES
DIMENSIONS
PIPES
LI
1/4"
1/2"
292
267
0,35
5/8"
SLHE- 1
3/8"
5/8"
350
318
0,45
7/8"
SLHE-
3/8"
7/8"
368
318
0,8
1-1/8"
SLHE- 3
1/2"
1-1/8"
381
318
1-3/8"
SLHE- 5
SLHE-
1/2
1-1/2
5/8"
1-3/8"
362
292
1,4
5/8"
SLHE- 7-1/2
5/8"
1-5/8"
432
343
1,6
5/8"
SLHE-10
7/8"
2-1/8"
458
343
2,4
S/S-
SLHE-20
1-1/8"
2-1/8"
686
610
4,1
S/S"
SLHE-30 t/'m SLHE-15G
^d
Suited for all halogenic refrigerants

^
r~
and NH3
CONNECTIONS
TYPE
DIMENSIONS (mm)
WEIGHT (kg)
SOLDER
L1
NUMBER
PIPES
DIMENSIONS
PIPES
L1
SLHE-30
1-3/8"
2-5/8"
762
596
8,2
7/8"
SLHE- 50
1 -5/8"
3-1/8"
762
590
12,7
11
7/8"
SLHE- 75
2-1/8"
4-1/8"
685
476
13,5
16
7/8"
SLHE-100
2-1/8"
5-1/8"
572
324
14,5
24
7/8"
iE-125
2-1/8"
5-1/8"
600
350
15
24
7/8"
15,5
24
7/8"
SLHE-150
Euro-Cold bv
2-5/8"
6-1/8"
Augsburgstraat 29
622
362
3047 AA Rotterdam
Telefoon 010-4376566
Fax 010-4158130
e greei
Application:
Construction:
JGaneral:
Type:
Flexible connection for use with fluids like salt water, oils,
chemicals and solvents. Also suitable f o r drinking water.
Temperature range f r o m -60 C up to +180 C. Maximum
working pressure 4 bar at 20 C.
Special yellow fluoro-silicone innertube. Polyester
reinforcements. Green silicone rubber cover.
-Due-to-i-ts-eonstfuetieH-the-distenee-betwee-n-thetwo-pipeends, which the silicone bellow connects, may vary from
5 to 15 m m .
A greten '
Inside
Outside
diameter diameter
Imm)
Imm)
IMeutral
Cuff
Working
length
lengtli
pressure
(mm)
(mm|
(barl
Type: A green
' '45';.'
:4,v;
. - : . 3 8 ^ ' * ,:;;; 5 2 ' : ; : ; ^>-,J.30.,v'' .'l:-^Si^
!&':.=' 1
-.:34::,;-i
; 50.:-. : " : i 3 0
,"
''M'A :'-^M ui30.., # ' : ?

'MM
M^f--']":"l3a;.;i Sw:;:>:
iSm?;g
si;6iRii
Svj65|!; syfefj
mm
f&sim 'SwA SSpK';!
sifeij "'i'mM |i2tifea iM>M\

iilP' ^*}^f iiMfa'rfM^
Pari Glarnps
Desciption:
Application:
General:-
Zinc plated clamps consisting of one or t w o parts.

Clamp wideness depending on type 20 or 25 m m .
Mounting with hexagon socket headcap screws.
Mounting of silicone bellows TwinFit blue, Type A blue
and Type A green.
-AJso-avaU3b(e4n-staiflless-steei--AiSI-304-aHGl-AtSI-316.Pari type 1-1 part
Pari type 11-2 parts
Clamp 20 X 1 mm
Clamp 25 X 1 mm
Hexagon socket headcap screw
Hexagon socket headcap screw
M8 X 45/8.8
Diameter
M8 X 60/8.8
! Clamp reach
Diameter
Ctamp reach
(mm|
40
;,,-:,:45,;,;-r
(mm)
i'35-41
:-'4Q-46 :.
: BO -.: -: 4 5 - ^ 1 ; ; : ;
':,;, 55
..;;
60::
; "SO
82- 98
,100.
92-108
'
'.":;i05-:^;;-y'i : , 96=113;
:
100-118
:iio;
';^w:.\: \
.50:56:;,,
i ' ; ;;'65-61
,;. 120;,f
; 60-67
:; 125'/
: 1.30:
. ; .
. ; 65-;
V::';;7Q::;'.....;
' ;;:65-72.S:;;
105-123 :
; 110.125
/ 115-133
.120-138
::^','::75./;.5 .:-r?7,0-77: '
-/ 1 3 5 / , ;-126.143.
... 80. ^ v < ; ::ir 7 5 - 8 2 - - :

;:..;:-B5V:;,-;i i ,:. 80-8Z.- i
;;.;.'14/;:,':;.: ' ' 1 ^ / 1 4 8 :
g:?Qj-<:X<\ ,:,::*85r9^:'; =
''': M5v.i;;.;H / i l 3 5 - 1 5 3 ;
;:;Â5g;0^\S'-îteiss'::'
' / I B S ' i V ' / i :*:i44-i63::
Installation iiistryctions
Loggers silicone bellows are used as an easy to install flexible connection in
pipe lines.The outside diameter of the pipe on w l i i c h the silicone bellow is
fitted should be approximately equal to the inside diameter of the cuffs of the
bellow. To assure a good sealing, the surface of the pipe must be smooth.
We advise that each silicone bellow is fitted on the pipe w i t h four Pari clamps.
For the Twinfit silicone bellow, it is necessary to keep a distance between the
JyTO_p[Be.MLdsjw(iichJjTesilicjH]e_beJlow_^^^^
pipe ends must be 50 m m for TwinFit dimensions of up to 76 m m inside

diameter. TwinFit dimensions 89 m m or larger need to have a distance
between the pipe ends of 69 m m .
distance between pipe ends

50 or 69 mm
EWTM 101
electronic
digital thermometer
TECHNICAL DATA
Housing: plastic resin PC+ABS extinguishing grade VO.
Dimensions: front 32x74 mm
(2.913x1.260"), depth 67 mm (2.637").
Mounting: flush panel mount with mounting
bracket. Panel cut-out 71x29 mm
(2.78x1.14").
Protection: an optional snap-on cover can
be supplied to provide additional protection
of the rear terminal block.
Connections: screw terminal block
(2.5 mm2).
Display: 2 digits with "-" sign; 12.5 mm
LED (0.50").
Operating temperature: -5...65 C.
Storage temperature: -30...75 C.
Input: PTC.
Resolution: 1 C.
Accuracy: better than 0.5% of full scale.
Power supply: 12 Vac/do 15%.
POWER SUPPLY
temperature
version
:*^v-j
32x74
size
i
i
i
6
POS,
1
2
3
1,
5
6
7
an. DESCRPICN
1
1
1
1
5
2
2
e 1
9
1
1
V
ti
1
"C^ 1
13 1
% 1
i-lATERIAL US1
HATEIWl/MAXE
DMNSDS/IYre REMAf9(S
TErt=. CONTROUiR
SALOR
CLORtS
AALBORG
ATERCHANGER
SALOR
MX B-'iPl
AALBORG
OUTUTTUBE
SALGR
DN50
AALBORG
TErt>iaCATOR
SALDR
f1545 0-120
PRESS NXATQR
SALOR
f366 0-10
PRESS SWITCH
SALOR
PMAAA 9120
ORC. P U *
SALOR
PRESS REUEP VAIVE
SALOR
534X)83
EXPANSCN VESSa
SALOR
60/1,0
REGaATNGVAlVE
SALOR
f2620
DN50
flTER
SALOR
f1019
ON 50
I t h f CONTROLLER
SALOR
L2S40 VA.10
SOLENOD VALVE
SALDR
EVSl 6
WATERLXK
SALOR
HEHO
40/160
HETCER
ON 40
V,'
M ' S h u t off te non return volve (deLYARD)
{xfna-cSi1[
200
FRESH
(^_
WATER
90'
*''
FLEXIBLE HOSE
TO BE CONNECTED
ONLY WHEN FILLING
THE SYSTEM
-150'
-<xHh
Hh
-70
4<hj-l^T-x>-'
(1-
&
Designer
Scale: N.t.s. Subject

: Jiniing SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Unil-s; mm Subject No. : JLZ 0^0/f09 - 040^*12 Drawing No. : 12005055-501
Controller
HEATING SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Sheet
1 of
Rev.
A4 "' 0
AvM
HEIMEN SHOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

AIR CONDITIONING
HEATING
VENTILATION
.^HL-K.
REFRIGERATION
P.O. Box8-0750GASpBl<enDu.->g - The Noc'Te.-'Is.-id-P'lo.-is: +01 (PJOO - S S 9 SSOO- Tex: +01 ( 0 ) 0 0 - 3 8 8 2589-www.hoinon'-iop,ion.oo.i
'vil
30
200
1/2"BSP
1/2"BSP
1/2"BSP
1/2 "BSP
220
100
267
780
-0-
-0-
trtH
Nameplate side
The minimum withdrawal length

of heater insert, is:
length of tut)e8 < shell diameter.
Withdrawal length
The tolerance da&s tn accordance wKh ISO 2766-1 c
Tolarancektaase êlge DS/ISO 2766-1 c
Foundation details
Designer
23
65
Designer
Scale; r.7.5 Subject/Client :JINIING sy
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Units:
Drawing No.
mm Subject No.
Controller
:JLZ 0'.0409 - 12
: 12005055-S02
^^ HEAT EXCHANGER
AvM
2e-0'.-'05
TYPE VESTA
1^X15 T16 V-pass
MEINEN SiHOPMAN ENGINEERING

AIR CONDITIONING
HEATING
VENTILATION
BV
Controller
Sheet
A3
of
Rev.
cn
REFRIGERATION
P.O. Qx e - 0 7 e 0 QA Spkai-iOur-s - Tna NOcôHBneo - P^n.io: +01 SOPO - E e e S O C r<x: <11flZ!)Oa- e o e g s o e - v.ftAW.^v3i,T3-iô3.-w,i.t>ar->
3/8" Socket for manometer-
1 / 2 " Extra socket with plug
3/4" Socket for safety valve O u t l e t flange

DN50 DIN 2633
1/2" Socket
witti plug on
botti sides for
thermometer
D
-Tube 060.3x5x50
L^
Round plate
076x6
- 1 " Socket for sense

-Round plate
076 / 43x6
Tube 060.3x5x50
ITube 076.1x5.6x472
Inlet flange
DN50 DIN 2633
80,5
210,5
100
n~7
22
/ I \
40,5
Rev.
EJ
Description
Scale:
1:5 Subject
; Jinling SY
Units: mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 12
Designer
Controller
40,5
391
Designer
Reference No. ; 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing No.
: 12005055-503
OUTLET TUBE VESTA
Controller
1 of
Sheet
A4r
Rev.
AvM
28-4-'05
DN50 - 60 BAR
HEINEN SHOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

A I R CONDITI
-^M-'tM
W a f a : l S l t . A T I O N .:;sf=IBFBI0EBATION .
P . O . B o x a - 3 7 S O G A S p e l < e . ^ o c - s - T h e M e c ' ^ e . - l e . - l e s - P ' - l O . - l s ; 3 1 ( 0 ) 3 3 - 3 9 a 2 5 CDO-Tsx: - 3 1 C0103 S 9 3 2 5 3 3 - vv^vw ' l e r n e n ' i o p - i B - i c o -
WILO
CR^
dE)
CL^
CD"
Einbau- und Betriebsanleitung

Installation and Maintenance Instructions
Notice de mise en service et de montage
Istruzioni di montaggio, uso e manutenzione
Wilo-TOP-S /TOP-SD /TOP-SV
-C
t
((
Pimax<190W
Rg. 1
Pg 13.5
Rg.2
Pg 13.5.
Rg. 3a
rr nr
L O P ^ Pg 13,5
Rg. 3b
Rg. 3c
CD3
tniiil^Pgi3,5
Rg. 3d
min
Rg. 3e
Pgii
rV
f
y
^^
jcJosed/fefm/
chKjso
^ = ^
Hg. 4
(l
Fig. 5
CD
CD
CE-Konformlttserklrung
1. Allgemeines
1
3
Declaration CE de conformit
1. Gnral'its
1
15
2. Sicherheit
2. Scurit
15
3. Transport und Zwischenlagenjng
3. Transport et stockage avant utilisation
16
4. Beschreibung von Erzeugnis und Zubehr...
4. Description du produit et de ses accessoires . 16
5. Aufstellung/Bnbau
5. Installation/Montage
17
6. Inbetriebnahme
6. Mise en service
19
7. Wartung/Service
7. Entretien
8. Stmngen, Ursachen und Beseitigung
8. Dfauts, causes et
CE declaration of conformity
1. General
Dichiarazione CE di conformit
1. Generalit
1
21
2. Safety precautions
2. Sicurezza
21
3. Trasporto e magazzinaggio
22
3. Transport and storage
10
19
remde
19
CD
4. Description of product and accessories . . . . 10
4. Descrizione del prodotto e accessori
22
5. Siting/Installation
11
5. Installazione/montaggio
23
6. Commissioning
13
6. Messa in esercizio
25
7. Maintenance/Service
13
7. Manutenzione
8. Fault findings - causes and remedies
14
8. Disfunzioni, cause e
26
rimedi
26
fl
CE-Konformittserklrung
GB
Hiermit erklren wir, dass

dieses Aggregat folgenden
einschlgigen BestiTTimungen
entspricht
Declaration de
confonmit CE
Par la f)rsente, nous
ddarons que cet
agrgat sitisfait aux
dispositions sulvantes:
EC machinery directive
89/392/EWG in this version,
91/368/EWG, 93/44/EWG,
93/6a/EWG
Directives CEE relatives

aux machines 89/392/CEE,
91/368/CEE, 93/44/CEE,
93/68/CEE
Elektromagnetische
Vertrglichkeit
89/336/EWG i.d.F.
92/31/EWG, 93/68/EWG
Resistance to
electromagnetism
89/336/EWG in this version
92/31/EWG, 93/68/EWG
Compatibilit
lectromagntique
89/336/CEE, 92/31/CEE,
93/68/CEE
AngewerxJete harmonisierte
Nonnen, Insbesondere
EN 809, EN 50 0 8 1 - 1 ,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081-2,
EN 50 082-2.
/ ^ p l l e d harmonized
standards in particular
EN 809, EN 50 0 8 1 - 1 ,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081-2,
EN 50 082-2.
Normes utilises
tiarmonises, notamment
EN 809, EN 50 081-1,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081-2,
EN 50 082-2.
EG-verklaring van
overeenstemming
iermede verklaren wi] dat

deze machine voldoet aan
de voigende bepalingen:
EG-richtlijnen betreffende
machines 89/392/EEG,
91/368/EEG, 93/44/EEG,
93/68/EEG
Elektromagrietische
tolerantie
89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG,
93/68/EEG
Gebruikte geharmoniseerde
normen, In het bijzonder
EN 809, EN 50 0 8 1 - 1 ,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081-2,
EN 50 082-2.
SF
We hereby declare that this

unit complies with the
following relevant provisions:
EG-Maschinenrichtlinien
89/392/EWG i.d.F.,
91/368/EWG, 93/44/EWG.
93/6a/EWG
NL
EC declaration of
confonnity
CE-standardinmukaisuusseloste
D e d a r a c i o n de
c o n f o r m i d a d CE
Dichiarazione di
c o n f o r m i t CE
Por la presente declaramos

que esta unidad satisface las
disposiciones pertinentes
siguientes:
Con la presente si dichiara

che le presenti pompe s o r
conformi alle seguenti
direttive di armonizzazione
Directivas CE sobre
mquinas 89/392/CEE,
9V368/CEE. 93/44/CEE,
93/68/CEE
Direttiva Macchine CEE

89/392/CEE, 91/368/CEE,
93/44/CEE, 93/68/CEE
Compatibilidad electromagntica 89/336/CEE,

92/31/GEE, 93/e8/CEE
Compatibilit
elettromagnetica
89/336/CEE, 92/31/CEE.
93/68/CEE
Normas armonizadas
ulilizadas particularmente
EN 809, EN 50 081-1,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081 - 2 ,
EN 50 082-2.
Norme armonizzate
applicate, in particolare
EN 809, EN 50 081-1,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081 - 2 ,
EN 50 082-2.
EEC k o n f o r m i t e t s deklaration
EK. azonossgi
nyilatkozat
llmoitamme tten, ett tm

laite vastaa seuraavia
asiaankuuluvia mryksl:
Harmed forklaras att derma

maskin uppfyller fljande
bestmmelser.
Ezennel kijelentjk, hogy

az agregt a megkivant
alanti feltteleknek
megfelel:
EY-konedirektiivit
89/392/ETY, 91/368/ETY,
93/44/ETY, 93/68/ETY
EEC maskindirektiv
89/392/EEC i denna version,
91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC,
93/68/EEC
EK-Gpirnyelvek
89/392/EWG, 91/368/EWG,
93/44/EWG, 93/68WG
Shkmagneettinen
soveltuvuus
89/336/ETY, 92/31/ETY,
93/68/ETY
Elektromagnetisk
kompatibilitet 89/336/EEC i
denna version, 92/31/EEC,
93/6a/EEC
Kytetyt yhteensovitetut
staixlardit, erttyisesti
EN 809, EN 50 0 8 1 - 1 ,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081-2,
EN 50 082-2.
TiHmpade harmoniserade
nonner, sarskilt:
EN 809, EN 50 081-1,
EN 50 082-1, EN 50 081-2,
EN 50 082-Z
Eletctromagnetikus
OsszeegyeztethetSsg
89/336/EWG, 92/31/EWG,
93/68/EWG
Alkalmazott, harmonizalt
normk, klnsen az
EN 809, EN 50 081-1,
EN 5 0 082-1, EN 50 081-2,
EN 5 0 082-2.
ENGLISH
1 . General
Installation and service by qualified
personnel only
1.1 Applications
The circulating pump is available in single and
twinhead design. It is suitable for handling fluids in
- LTHW and MTHW heating systems
- Chiled and cooling water systems
- Closed industrial heat transfer systems.
The pump should not be used to handle potable
water.
- If another medium is to be used, it must be

cleared by Wilo.
Water temperature range: - 1 0 C to +130C.
Short-term running: +140 C.
Should there be a Display-module, the
maximum temperature of the fluids reduces to
110C.
Maximum ambient temperature: +40C.
- Maximum working pressure: 6/10 bar respectively
- System of protection IP 43.
- Please observe data on the motor rating plate.
- Minimum inlet pressure required to avoid
cavitation noise (at max. fluid temperature T^gj^)
. 'max
R 1 1 R 1 'AON 40 (32) ON 50 DN 65 1 DN 80 DN100
+ 50C
0.05 bar
0.3 bar
1.2 Technical description
+ 95C
0.5 bar
1.0 bar
1.2.1 Serial Code
+110'C
1.1 bar
1.6 bar
+130C
2.4 bar
2.9 bar
TOP-S 30/7 EM
Heating circulating pumps,
wet ainner motors
S -> Standard design
SD Standard design double pump
SV Standard design
with built-in isolating-valve
Pipe connection size in mm ID
Range connection: 32 (for SD),
40,50,65,80,100
(For SV: PN 6/10 all-purpose flange:
40, 50, 65)

Screw connection:
25 (R 1), 30 (R IV^l
Shut-off head in m WG
EM = single-phase motor 1 -230/240 V
DM = three-phase motor 3-400/415 V_
(3-230 V with adaptor plug)
1JZ.2 Performance and electrical data
- Suitable fluids.
- Heating water, ace. to VDI 2035.
- Water and water/glycd mixtures up to a ration
of 1:1 Glycol mixtures require a re-assessment
of pump hydraulic data in line with the
increased viscosity and depending on mixing
ratios. Only approved makes of additives with
corrosion inhibitors must t>e used in strict
compliance with manufacturers' instructions.
These values are valid up to 300 m atxive sea

levels. For higher elevations add: 0.01 bar/100 m.
When ordering spare parts, please give all the
information on the pump/motor rating plate.
2. Safety precautions
These instructions contain basic references which
must be strictly adhered to. It is therefore imperative
for the Installer and the Operator to carefully read
these instructions prior to installation and
commissioning.
Please observe, not only the safety directions under
the main heading Safety precautions, but also
those added and specifically mari<ed under the
following headings.
2.1 Safety marks contained in these instructions
Safety references contained herein which, if not
complied with, may cause injuries to persons are
specially highlighted by the following danger
symbols:
Danger from general causes:
Danger from electrical causes.
A
A
ENGLISH
Safety references which, if not complied with, may

result in damage to the plant or its function are
highlighted by the word:
ATTENTION!
2.2 Personnel qualifications
Personnel carrying out the installation must be
qualified installers.
2.3 Dangers from non-observance of safety
references
Non-observance of safety references may cause
bodily harm to persons or damage to the plant.
Failure to comply with safety references could
invalidate warranty and/or damage claims. In
detail, non-compliance could have the following
dangerous consequences;
- failure of important plant functions,
- danger to persons due to electrical and/or
mechanical causes.
2.4 Safety reference for the operator
Local regulations for the prevention of accidents
must be observed"'
Danger from electrical energy must be excluded
(conforming to local or general regulations such as
EC, VDE, etc.).
2.5 Safety reference for Inspections and
installation work
It is the Operator's responsibility to ensure that
inspections and installation wort< are carried out by
authorized-.and-qualified personnel only, having
themselves made fully conversant with these
instructions.
Work must principally be carried out only with the
plant switched off and at complete standstill.
2.6 Arbitrary alterations and spare part
procurement
Any alterations to the plant are only permitted in
agreement with the manufacturer. Original spare
parts and authorized accessories serve safety and
reliabilrty. The use of unauthorized parts could invalidate any claims for consequential damages.
2.7 Abnormal operating conditions
Operational safety of the plant is only ensured if
used in accordance with clause 1 of these
instructions. The limits stated there must not be
exceeded under any circumstances.
10
3. Transport and storage

I ATTENTION!] The pump must be protected from
moisture and mechanical damage at
all times during transport and intermediate storage.
4. Description of product and

accessories
4.1 Description of the pump {Rg. 1)
The pump has a canned rotor motor (single-phase
(EM) 1-230-240 V or three-phase (DM) 3 - 4 0 0 415 V), with all rotating parts in contact with the
water being handled, which also acts as lubricant
for the sleeve bearing supported pump shaft.
Double pumps have identical pump sets mounted
in a common housing.
The TOP-SV pumphousing is equipped with
integrated tiutterfly valves for flange pumps and ball
valves for the pumps with union flanges. These
valves positioned in the suction and pressure side of
the pump can be opened and closed with a
standard spanner (key size 11 or 13).
Flanged pumps; The actual position is shown
through an indicator on the shaft (yellow) (Fig. 4,
pos. 1 a open / pos. 1 b closed).
Union pumps; The actual position is indicated
through a slot inside the hexagon size 13 (Fig. 4,
pos. 1 c open / pos. 1 d closed).
The connection flanges are equipped with a self
adhesive gasket (pos. 2). Additional gaskets are not
required.
The pump is equipped w/ith a variable 3-speed
motor. The required speed is manually set by
means of the rotary switch (EM 1 ~230 V/240 V) or
by the speed selector plug (DM 3 - 4 0 0 V/415 V)
(Fig. 3, Item 1).
An alternative plug for use on 3-pfiase 230-240 V
power supply, also for three speed settings, is optionally available.
|ATTENTIONI| The motor will be subject to damage
if connected to the wrong voltage
supply.
4.1.1 Thermal overload contacts (WSK)
Pumps of power input ratings Pimax < 190 W (EMand DM-types) operate non-overioading under all
operating conditions, including locked-rotor current.
((
ENGLISH
All other types are internally equipped with thermal

overload contacts or overload p>rotective device
respectively switching off tfie motor on overheating.
Both heads of double pumps are equipped with
overload protective devices.
- EM (1~): The WSK must be wired to an external
trip relay, e.g. to switchbox SK 602/SK 622.
- DM (3~): The trip relay is an integral part of the
motor terminal box.
4 . 1 ^ Motor terminal boxes
The standard types are equipped with three
different terminal boxes:
- EM (1~)-types:
3-speed rotary selector switch only, no display
facility.
- Non-overioading DM (3~)-types (Pi max < 190 W)
3-speed selector plug, direction of rotation and
RUN-lights.
- Ail other DM (3)-types (Pi max ^ 200 W):
3-speed selector plug, sense of rotation and Run
lights {Rg. 1, Item 1). Fault light (Fig. 1, Item 2),
reset button (Rg. 1, 3a, 3b, Item 3) to cancel a
fault and to restart the pump.
- The terminal boxes PM-Type) are suitable to be
fitted with one display module (see accessories).
4.2 Scope of supply
- Pump complete.
- Two-piece thermal insulation jacket (single head
pump only).
- Plain washers (for flange pumps TOP-SV only).
- Installation and operating instructions.
4.3 Accessories
Accessories must be ordered separately.
- SK 602, SK 622 overioad trip relays
- SK 601, timer-box (direct connecting for nonoverioading EM pMjmp types only, otherwise in
conjunction with switch-boxes SK 602/622 only)
- Selector plug for 3 ~ 230 - 240 V,
- One Display-Module for more elaborate single
pump control with individual RUN- and FAULTsignals,
- Two Display-Modules for more elaborate double
pump control with individual RUN- and FAULTsignals.
[ATTENTION! I Display-Modules are for use on
3-400 V only.
5. Siting/Installation
5.1 installation
- Before pump installation, remote both halves of
the insulation case,
- make sure that all welding/soldering on the pipe
system is completed and that the pipe system
has been flushed out thoroughly to be clear of
foreign matters and impurities as they may cause
damage to the pump.
- Pump to be placed in an easily accessible position
in order to facilitate inspections and exchange.
- To avoid draining and re-filling the whole of the
pipe system for pump inspections and exchange,
it is recommended that isolating valves are
] installed at the suction and discharge ports of the
pump.
Additional isolating devices are no longer required
for pump type TOP-SV. The isolating units are
built into the pump casing. Therefore it is no
tonger necessary to drain and refill the instlation
as and when the motor module needs changing.
Assembly is to be carried out in suchway in such
a way as to prevent leakage or dripping onto the
pump motor or the terminal box.
- When assembling pumps with all-purpose flange
PN 6/10 the following guidelines are to be
observed (Rg. 5):
1. It is not permitted to assemble all-purpose
flanges with all-purpose flanges.
2. Enclosed plain washers (pos. 1) must be used
between the screw/nut head and the all-purpose
flange.
|ATTENTION!| Safety elements (e.g. lock washers)
are not penmitted.
I ATTENTION!] In the event of incorrect assembly
the screw nut may become locked
in the oblong hole. This may
adversely influence the operatability of the flange connection due
to the inadequate tenston of the
scr&NS.
3. It is recommended to use screws for flange
connections of property class 4.6 if screws of
higher properties are used for the assembly only
the torque according to property class 4.6 is
permissible.
Permissible torque of property class 4.6:
forM 1 2 - 4 0 Nm
forM16-95Nm
11
(r
ENGLISH
|ATTENTION!| If screws of higher property

classes are used, splintering may
occur around the edges of the
oblong holes due to the higher
screw tensions. This will cause the
screws to lose their tension and
the flange connection may
become leaky.
4. Screw of sufficient length must be used:
Ttitead
min. screw length

DN40 DN50/DN65
M12
55 mm
60 mm
Range connection PN 10^ M16
60 mm
65 mm
Flange connection PN 6
- During the installation of TOP-SV union pumps,

the valve unit must be hold with a spanner in
the correct position while fixing the union nut.
lATTErmoriTl The valve unit can turn during the
assembly, the pump can be
brought back in the correct
position by turning. The hexagon
for operating the valve should be
positioned on the left side of the
pump in order to garantee free
access for the spanner.
When installed into the flow pipe of an openvented
system, the open safety vent must be connected
to the system on the inlet side of the pump.
Ensure that the pump is not stresses by tfie
pipewori< with the shaft in the horizontal plane
(refer Fig. 2).
Arrows, on the pump casing indicate water flow
direction through the pump.
To avoid moisture ingress the control module
must not face downwards. If necessary rotate
pump head after renrnaving the screws holding the
Stator housing.
|ATTENT10NT| Make sure that the 0-Ring gasket
t)etween the can and the pump
housing is not damaged or twisted.
- For single pumps: Place the two halves of the
insulation case around the pump body, ensuring
that the guide pins are property locked in position.
IATTEIMTION!] On-site thermal insulating fif not
using factory supplied insulation or
for twin head pumps) must be
applied to the pump body only, ensuring the condensation drain holes
on the motor flange remain open.
12
5J2 Oectrical work

- Bectrical wori< to be carried out by a
qualified electrician in strict conformity
to ruling regulations.
The electrical connection to be in accordance
with ruling local regulations (e.g. rigid cable in
accordance vwth the latest edition of lEE wiring
regulations).
- Double pumps require for safety reasons
separately swrtch controlled leads to each motor
head.
- Power cable to be of sufficient diameter to suit
PG-size of compression gland for cable entry to
terminal box to ensure tightness against entry of
water, dirt or condensation.
- Heat-resisting cable must be used when handling
fluids of temperatures above 90 C.
- Cable leads to be routed in such a way to avoid
any contact vwth pipe work and/or pump or stator
housings.
- Check that the electricity supply is suitable and in
accordance with the data on the motor rating
plate.
- Mains power supply: 3 400-415 V AC or 3 ~
230-240 V AC, 50 Hz, EC 38.
- Network supply fuses: 10 A inert.
- Safety regulations require separate fuses 10 A
inert for each twin pump motor head.
- Mains power connections to be wired according
to the following attribution, subject to obsen/ing
name plate data (Fig. 3):
Fig. 3a; DM (3~)
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
3b: DM (3~)
3c: DM (3~)
3d: EM (1~)
3e: EM (1~)
Pi max > 500 W

(terminals CI and C2
remain free)
200 W < Pi max 400 W
Pi max :S 190 W
200W< Pimax400W
Pimax s 190 W
- Alarm contacts (normally closed) with terminals

SSM can be used for common potential-free
remote fault signal circuit. Max, switch rating:
250 V/1 A.
- If the collective FAULT signal SSM is wired to the
"WSK"-terminals of a Wilo switch/control box, it is
necessary to cancel an occured fault first at the
pump and then at the switch/control box.
- Pump/installation must be earthed in compliance
with regulations.
fC
ENGLISH
Prior to commencing work on the

pump the distribution voltage must
be svwtched off. Due to the danger of
electric shocks (capacitors), wori< on
the module may only be continued
five minutes after the distribution
voltage has been cut off (EM-Types).
Check that all connections (potentialfree contacts too) are neutral.
6. Commissioning
6.1 Initial start-up
Ensure that the pipe system is property filled and
vented. The pump is normally vented automatically
after a short operational period. Short-term drynjnning will not harm the pump. Pumps (Pimax
< 190 W) with a venting screw can be vented as
necessary in the following procedure:
- Switch off pump,
-- close discharge isolating valve,
- slacken the vent plug (Fig. 1, Item 4) and remove
carefully,
A
-
- Depending on fluid temperature and

system pressure, there might be a
release of hot water in liquid or
gaseous state when opening the vent
plug.
Acute danger of scalding!
Protect electrical parts against water splashes,
carefully move and push pumpshaft with a
screwdriver,
after 15...30 sees, replace vent plug and tighten,
switch on pump,
Open isolating valve.
|ATTElfflON!]lt is possible that the pump jams
writh the vent plug open, depending
on system pressure.
I ATTENTION! ITOP-SV: The built-in isolating
devices are pure blockage and
control units, i.e. in an operating
state these must be fully open!
(Fig. 4, pos. 1a/1c)!
- There is always the danger the pump

becoming very hot, depending on
operational conditions of pump or
system (fluid temperature).
Dcmger of scalding when touching
the pump!
6.2 Adjustments
- Rotation check on DM-types only: The sense of
rotation is indicated by one LED at the motor end
(Hg. 1) of the terminal box. The LED on the left
with the clockwise arrow (Rg. 1, Item 1) lights-up
green on correct direction of rotation. On
incorrect rotation the light remains dark. To
- check, briefly switch on the pump.
If rotating incorrectly, proceed as follows:
- switch-off pump,
- change any two phase wires at the motor
terminals (Fig. 3a/b/c),
- restart the pump.
- Chcinge of speed:
- EM (1~)-types: Set 3-speed selector switch
(Rg. 3d/e, Item 1) at the nnotor terminal t)ox the
required speed.
- DM (3~)-types: The setting to the required
spieed is done manually by means of the speed
selector plug (Rg. 3 aAj/c, Item 1).
7. Maintenance/Service
Before starting sen/ice or repair work
switch off the plant and secure
against unauthorized switching.
In the event of high temperatures and
high system pressure, the pumps
should be allowed to cod down.
Danger of liquid boiling over!
I ATTENTION! I Close isolating devices before
dismantling motor module (Type
TOP-SV), (Fig. 4, pos. l b / Id)!
If, for service or inspections, the stator
housing is removed from the pump
housing, it is necessary to replace the
O-ring between the can and the pump
housing. For re-assembly ensure
connect seating of the O-ring.
13
c
ENGLISH
8. Fault findings - causes and

remedies
8.1 Motor Is switched on but fails to run:
Check electric fuses,

Check voltage at pump terminals
(Observe name plate data).
At high fluid temperatures and system

pressures wait for the pump to cool
down and close isolating valves at
both pump ports.
Danger of scalding!
Thermal overload protection has tripped and the

right hand red FAULT signal light (Fig. 1, Item 2) is
illuminated. After the viflnding temperature has
returned to normal, the trip device can be
manually reset by pressing the reset button
(Rg. 1, Item 3).
Rotor is jammed: e.g. caused by impurities in the
water.
Action: for those pumps with venting screws,
remove the vent plug to check and free rotor by
rotating the pump shaft by means of a
screwdriver
8.2 Noisy pump operation

- Caused by cavitation due to insufficient inlet
pressure.
- Action: Increase system pressure within the
permissible limits.
-Check speed setting; if neeessary.-switch-to
lower setting.
If the fault cannot be located or rectified, please
contact your nearest Wilo representative.
Technical modifications reserved.
14
^ ^
'^F
({
M2F Valves, 2 Ports, PN 16, DN 20...80 mm^

Cast Iron, 2 Seats, Flanged Ends
Characteristics
Dimensioning
Nominal pressure PN 16
Regulating capability - ^
For sizing of control valves and selection

of actuators please see "Quick Choice"
leaflet No. 9.0.00.
>25
2.3.04-F
GB-1
Double-seated
Adjustable seat interspace
Design
Quadratic characteristic
Applications
Regulating valves type M2F are designed
for regulating hot v\âter, steam and lubricating oil systems.
The double-seated valves are used in
installations where the system pressure
necessitates a closing force greater than
available in the actuator programme for
a single-seated valve.
The valves are used in conjunction with
temperature-or pressure differential regulators for controlling industrial processes,
district or central heating plants or marine
installations.
Pressure/Temperature Diagram
According to DIN 2401
Bar
16
13
10
-10
120
200
300 C
The valve components -spindle, seats and

cone - are made of stainless steel.
The valve body is made of cast iron
GG25 with flanges drilled according to
EN 1092-2. The thread for the actuator
connection is GIB ISO 228.
The valves are double-seated and
designed for tight closure.The leakage
rate is less than 0.5 % of the full flow
(according to VDIA/DE 2174).
Quality assurance
Teciinical Data
All valves are manufactured under an

ISO 9001 certification and are pressure
and leakage tested before shipment.
For marine applications the valves can be
supplied with relevant test certificates from
recognized classification societies.
Materials:
- Valve body
- Components
-Nuts
- Bolts
Nominal pressure
Sealing
Valve characteristic
Regulating capability
Function
Without the actuatorbeing connected, the
valve is held in open position by means
of a spring. With pressure on the spindle
the valve will close.
In connection with ourthermostats or electronic actuators, the valves will close at
rising temperatures. Forcooling circuits a
reverse acting valve can be used.
The quadratic characteristicwill not cease,
until the flow has dropped below 4% of
the full flow.
Specificati on
Lifting height
mm
Weight
kg
6.5
25
7.5
6.5
32 mm
32
12.5
40M2F
40 mm
40
20
11
50M2F
50 mm
50
30
10
16
65M2F
65 mm
65
50
11
21
80M2F
80 mm
80
80
13
26
Type
Flange
Connection
Opening
DN in mm
k-value
20M2F
20 mm
20
25M2F
25 mm
32t^2F
LJ2OICU4
m^/h
Leakage rate
Temperature range
Mounting
Flanges drilled
according to
Counter flanges
Colour
Cast iron GG25

Stainless steel
C 35 N/A4
CK 35/A4
PN 16
Double-seated
Quadratic
j^"
> 25
< 0.5 % of k
See pressure/temperature diagram
See page 2
EN 1092-2 FN 16
DIN 2633/BS 4504
Grey
Subject to changes without notice.
1VI2F Valves, 2 Ports, PN 16, DN 20...80 mm^

Cast Iron, 2 Seats, Flanged Ends
Definition of kvs-vaiue
The kvs-value is identical to the IEC flow
coefficient kv and defined as the water
flow rate In mVh through the fully open
valve by a constant differential pressure,
Apv, of 1 bar.
Dimension Siêtch
2.3.04-F
GB-2 (^
GIB
rrtn
P I 1 fTTn
+T
H1
r-i-
Type: 20 - 65
Mounting
The valves can be installed with vertical

as well as horizontal spindles. For
valve temperatures of max. 150C, the
thermostat/actuator can be fitted below or
above the valve. For valve temperatures
above 150C, a cooling unit of type
KS has to be applied with connection
downwards - according to the following
instructions:
Valve
Temperature
Cooling
Unit
Suitable
for
150C - 250''C
KS-4
KS-5
KS-6
All actuators
Themnostats
Valve Motors
k
H2
G1B
fltn
"
1 fTTTj
HI
aso-c - aoo^c
250C - soo-c
Type: 80
KS-5 or KS-6 must be applied to hot oil

systems.
I,:":, ri^
cir
H2
"ICD
Strainer
It is recommended to use a strainer in
front of the regulating valve if the liquid
contains suspended particles.
Accessories
Manual Adjusting Device
The device has a built-in stuffing box.

For sealing and manual operation of
valves when an actuator has not been
fitted, e.g. during periods of construction
(max. 150C).
Cooling Unit KS-4
Type
L
mm
HI
mm
H2
mm
b
mm
D (dia.)
mm
k (dia.)
mm
d mm
dia.
(number)
20M2F
150
85
70
16
105
75
14x(4)
25M2F
160
95
77
16
115
85
14x(4)
32M2F
180
105
82
18
140
100
14x(4)
40M2F
200
110
92
18
150
110
14x(4)
50M2F
230
125
102
20
165
125
14x(4)
65M2F
290
135
120
20
185
145
14x(4)
80M2F
310
145
165
22
200
160
14x(4)
Cooling Unit KS-5
Cooling Unit KS-6
DD
Cooling unit protecting the stuffing box
of the motor/thermostat. To be applied
at valve temperatures between 150C
and 250C.
LjÔi^ccU
Controls A/S
Cooling units with built-in bellow glands, replacing stuffing box of thermostat (KS-5) or
valve motor (KS-6). Must be applied at valve temperatures above 250C and in hot oil
systems.
Subject to changes without notice.
Clorius Conlrols A/S

Tempovei 27 DK-27SO Balleiup
enir.aK
Tel +45 77 32 31 30 Fax .^;5 77 32 V 3'

h-maii; niaii@Llofiurj(:ij"1i.:!-.:.on.
V2, V4 and V8 Thermostats

Self Acting Temperature Controls
3.4.01-G
GB-1
Characteristics
Closing Force 200N, 400N
and 800N
For heating or cooling valves
Sturdy and Reliable
Temperature Range 0 to 160C
(-30 to 280C on request)
Applications
The temperature controller, which consists
of a thermostat and a valve, is used for
controlling the temperature in central
heating systems, district heating systems
and industrial plants or for industrial
processes and in marine systems. It can
be used for the control of cold or hot
water, steam or oil in heating as well as
cooling systems.
Function
The adjusting cylinder of the thermostat
is set at the required temperature for the
heating medium in "C.This setting can be
fixed, if required. The temperature control
is carried out by the thermostatically
controlled valve reducing or increasing the
flow of the heating (or cooling) medium.
The sensor and the capillary tube, which
are filled with a liquid, constitute - together
with the adjusting cylinder - a closed
system.
If the temperature of a medium to be
heated is above the required level, the
temperature of the sensor liquid rises
and expands, causing the piston of the
thermostat to act upon the valve, reducing
the flow of the heating medium.
If the temperature of the medium to
be heated is below the required, the
temperature of the sensor liquid falls,
reducing the volume of the liquid, so that
the piston allows the valve to open under
its internal spring, thus increasing the
flow of the heating medium.
The neutral zone of a thermostat is the
temperature difference which can occur
at the sensor without any movement
of the valve spindle. This represents
the sensitivity of the control system to
temperature changes;
V.2 = 2.5C, V.4 = 2 C and V.8 = 1.5C.
Design
Thermostat
A thermostat consists of a sensor and a
capillary tube, filled with liquid, and an
adjusting cylinder.
The thermostat type designations and

technical data are specified in fig. 2.
A number of limitations depend on the
actual temperature range - see fig. 1.
With temperatures above 150C, a
cooling unit must be fitted between the
valve and the thermostat.
The thermostat is self-acting and works
on the principle of liquid expansion, it
is sturdy in its design, and works with a
large closing force.
Sensor
The following sensor types are available
- see fig. 4:
4.1 Rod/spiral sensor in copper or
stainless steel with BSP threaded connection.
4.2 Spiral sensor (copper only) with
air duct flange.
4.3 Rod/spiral sensor with steel flange

according to DS, DN 50, PN 40 and
D N 5 0 , PN 160.
4.4 Sensor without connection. Usually
used with capillary packbox for temperature control in tanks.
Capillary Tube
The capillary tube is made of copper,
stainless steel, or of PVC-coated copper
- see fig. 3.
Valve
A wide range of valve types for heating
as well as cooling systems can be
delivered. See the Quick Choice" leaflet
No. 5.0.01 and datasheets for the valves
in question.
Clorius Controls A/S
\.^\4JA4
CRtrol^?il/&
fempovej 27 OK-27S0 Sciliirup
Denmark
Tel +45 77 32 31 30 Fox: -45 77 32 31 31

E -moll moiiiSdonuscor-rois.coiT!
Web wvvv.- ^lontjs^TnirGis com

Choice of Temperature Control
The selection of the correct temperature
controller is determined by the sizing of
the valve and thermostat respectively,
which may be chosen by using the Quick
Choice" leaflet No. 9.0.00.
The designation of the thermostat is
determined by using 3 elements, e.g.
thermostat type V.4.05, where V indicates
type V thermostat, 4 indicates 0.01 x the
force in Newton by which the thermostat
can act upon the connected valve, and
05 relates to the travel of the thermostat
spindle in mm by a temperature change
of 1C - s e e also fig. 2.
Fig. 1 indicates whether the temperature
of the heating medium necessitates a
cooling unit, and how the thermostat is
to be mounted in relation to the valve; for
a temperature range - 30C to 150C the
thermostat may be installed both above
and below the valve.
Fig. 2 shows the type number of the
thermostat, its closing force in N and its
setting range in C.
Fig. 3 shows the choices of length and
material for the capillary lubes.
Fig. 4 shows the different types of
sensor.
Fig. 5 shows the time coefficients for
the sensors.
Fig. 6 shows the choices of sensor
material etc.
Fig. 7 shows the dimensions and weights
of the sensors etc.
3.4.01-G
GB-2 (^
Temperature Limits, Fig. 1

Temperature of valve medium:
(j-30C
aso-c
150C
^^^r
:Cx
(1
1
'
It
v^# i h 'Vi--'
V *-J^
M ipl ' e n ' . clo*nw i r J i "
Mounted upwards or downwards
*<it I
Without cooling unit
ihn I II il h
I , I A 11 CO liiiq '>i<t KS-5 1
Temperature of sensor:
C-30C
280'
140C leo'C
') See Accessories

on page 4.
Glycerin filled
, - ^ Paraffine'filled
'..ijsM''
) Max. 160-C
- incl. 40C overtemperature.
Sensor of copper')
Sensor of stainless steel
For marine instalations please see instruction manual.
Thermostat Types, Fig. 2

Thermostat Types
Technical Data
Max. closing force
Setting range for

standard thermostats ')
V.2.05
V.4.03
V.4.05
V.4.10
V.8.09
V.8.18
200
400
400
400
800
800
0-60
0-160
0-120
0-60
0-120
0-60
40-160
30-90
40-160
30-90
30-90
60-120
60-120
60-120
Neutral zone
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
For valves with rated travel up to;
mm
10
21
21
21
21
21
-30 to 160 C 2)
0.5
0.3
0.5
1.0
0.9
1.8
140 to 280 C 3)
0.7
0.33
0.7
1.33
1.2
2.4
Travel in mm/ C
(amplification)
in range:
') Setting ranges from -30 to 280C on request. - Excess temp, sately range: 40C. ^) Glycerine ') Paraffine
CAîZ^
C a n t r o l s A/S^

Tempovei 27 DK-2750 Bollerup
Denmark
Tel: +45 77 32 31 30 Fax: +45 77 32 31 31

E-maii: iT,cii@cloriuscon!rols.coiTi

3.4.01-G
GB-3
C a p i l l a r y T u b e s , Fig. 3
Choice of capillary tube, length and material. Is determined
according to the table below. Independent of the choice of the
thermostat type.
Length
Copper
PVC-Coated
Copper
Stainless
Steel
3.0 m
+
+
4.5 m
6.0 m
Rod Sensor
Spiral Sensor
7.5 m
9.0 m
: i
10.5 m
12.0 m
13.5 m
15.0 m
16.5 m
18.0 m
19.5 m
21.0 m
Capillary Tube
SensorTypes, Fig. 4
1. Sensors with BSP threaded connection
A d j u s t i n g Handle
2. Sensors with air duct flange
^ f ^
3. Sensors with steel flange
Scale Adjustment
Union Nut
L.î'CCU
4. Sensors without connection
"V
^=^=r
T
Tempovej 27 DK-2750 Ballerup Denmark
Tei ^-45 7~ 32 V 30 - Fax: ^45 77 32 31 3!
E -rficii miSrlorjsconuols.con

3.4.01-G
GB-4
Time Coefficient for Senso rs, Fig.5

ffC
ttank
t, j
The time coefficients for rod and
spiral sensors are measured in
water flowing at a velocity of
1 m/sec, for air duct spiral sensors
in air at a velocity of 4 m/sec.
'i'
J. ^
In the table the time lag T^ and

time coefficient T are indicated
in sec.
t,
Rod Sensor
\%
J-
Tsec.
Acld-Resistant StainlessStee
Spiral Sensor
for Air Duct
Spiral Sensor
-* - L
T D _
Copper
Type
'
Rod Sensor
Spiral Sensor
Copper with Sensor Pocket

Liquid in
Sensor Pocket
Rod Sensor
To
To
To
To
To
V.2.0S
10
85
20
360
10
85
20
20
210
Hot oil
V.4.03
120
20
360
90
20
20
250
Hot oil
V.4.05
130
20
360
100
20
20
200
Hot oil
V.4.10
165
20
360
150
25
25
300
Hot oil
V.8.09
165
30
600
.9
220
30
25
450
Hot oil
280
10
65
V.8.18
Sensor Materia! etc., Fig. 6

Adjusting
Cylinder
Acid-Resistant
stainless Steel Sensors
Copper Sensors
Capillary
Tubes
Copper = c
Stainless
Steel = n
' ulu
DIN No.
Material No.
a
b
1651
17440
1.0711 1.4305
c
1787
2.0090
d
OM-Metal
OM-Metal
e
17100
1.0134
f
1725
3.2581
h
17440
1.4436
k
17440
1.4435
n
17440
1.4301
Accessories
Manual Adjusting Device
Cooling Unit KS-4
Cooling Unit KS-5
With stuffing box. For tightening and

manual operation of the valves, when an
actuator has not been fitted, e.g. during
periods of construction.
Cooling unit protecting the stuffing box

of the motor/thermostat. To be applied
at valve temperatures between 150 C
and 250 C .
Cooling unit with built-in bellows gland.

Replaces the stuffing box of thermostat.
Must be applied by valve temperatures
between 250 -C and 350 C and in case
of hot oil systems.
KjÔiôCU
XaittratsÂ/S'
Clorius Controls A/5

Tennpovej 27 DK-2750 Ballerup Denmark
Tel. +45 77 32 31 30 fax +45 77 32 31 31
E-maii: maiiclomjsconois coin

3.4.01-G
GB-5
Dimensional Sketch
Dimensions and Weights Fig 7

The measurements G and H are pipe
Thermostat / Sensor Material
threads, all other measurements are mm.
Weight: net.
Type V.2.05 Type V.4.03 Type V.4.05 Type V.4.10 Type V.8.09 Type V.8.18
C = Copper sensor.
c
s
c
s
c
s
c
s
c
s
c
s
S = Acid-resistant stairless steel sensor.
Adjusting cylinder
A
B
I 1
Weigtits:
see below
connection
-e-
1f 'I
305 385
405 525
385
525
385
525
385
525
385
525
385
525
560
740
560
740
560
740
210
235
22
49
190
170
22
49
1"
2"
390
235
22
49
1"
2"
380
250
22
49
2"
490
325
28
49
1"
2"
515
325
25
49
1"
2"
710
425
28
49
2"
2"
745
435
25
49
2"
2"
800
810
34
49
2"
2"
2.4
2.9
2.6
3.1
2.6
3.1
3.3
3.8
3.3
3.8
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
7.3
7.3
28
49
700
415
4x18
125
165
22
25
49
735
425
4x18
125
165
22
34
49
790
800
4x18
125
165
22
""^
Sensor with BSP tlireaded

.30. -
305
405
f r-
' =
H
;lusive of G-cor rection

;lusive of H-connection
C 210
D 235
E 22
F 49
G 3/4H 2"
Kg 1.8
kg 2.3
190
170
22
49
3/4"
2"
2"
1.8 2.4
2.3 2.9
Weight
irK with air d u c t flange
Sensors
Weight in(
so
-'J
! i,.
-^-
Sensors with steel flange

ace. to = DS = PN 40
i--^r
i r
J
-^
'
k- ,^
' r t j ^'T.'i
Sensors with steel flange

ace. to = DS = PN160
- X-
,-^:i:i'
1 :
'
! ^
-Z
ir^"
' 1; Y J 1-^
tJ
Sensors w i t h o u t c o n n e c t i o n
Available with capillary packbox
\l " ^ 1
I 1
'?>
1')
1 _,T "
'1
*5"
1 -)
" A "
1 1
F 49
1 420
L 60
M 95
49
420
60
95
49
420
60
95
49
420
60
95
49
420
60
95
1.8
2.4
2.6
3.3
5.8
kg
E 22
22
22
F 49
49
49
N 200 180 200
0 225 160 225
P 4x18 4x18 4x18
R 125 125 125
S 165 165 165
T 22
22 22
22
49
180
160
4x18
125
165
22
kg 5.3
5.9
5.3
5.9
22
49
380
225
4x18
125
165
22
6.1
22
E 22
22
22
22
49 49
49
49
F 49
N 180 160 180 160 360
0 205 140 205 140 205
P 4x27 4x27 4x27 4x27 4x27
R 145 145 145 145 145
S 195 195 195 195 195
45
T 45
45
45
45
kg
11.3
11.3 11.9
11.9 12.1
E
F
G
H
U
V
kg')
kq^)
kq^)
kg*)
22
49
1"
2"
250
22
49
1"
2"
230
220
1.6
1.6
1.8
2.3
22
49
1"
2"
230
22
49
1"
2'
430
220
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.9
290
2.3
2.4
2.6
3.1
290
1.6
1.6
1.8
2.3
22
49
1"
2"
250
290
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.9
22
49
360
240
4x18
125
165
22
6.1
22
49
340
220
4x27
145
195
45
28
49
480
315
4x18
125
165
22
25
49
505
315
4x18
125
165
22
6.8
6.8
9.3
9.3
10.3
28
49
460
295
4x27
145
195
45
25
49
485
295
4x27
145
195
45
28
49
680
395
4x27
145
195
45
25
49
715
405
4x27
145
195
45
34
49
770
780
4x27
145
195
45
12.8 15.3
15.3
16.3
28
49
2"
2"
750
470
5.5
5.6
6.3
6.3
25
49
2"
2"
785
490
5.5
5.6
6.3
6.3
34
49
2"
2"
840
860
6.5
6.6
7.3
7.3
12.1 12.8
22
49
1"
2"
410
310
2.3
2.4
2.6
3.1
28
49
1"
2"
535
375
3.0
3.1
3.3
3.8
25
49
1"
2"
555
370
3.0
3.1
3.3
3.8
Subject to ctianges, without notice.

Ciorius Controls A/S
lempovej 2? DK-27SO Ballerup - Denmark
Tgi, +45 .'7 32 31 30 Fax: ^45 77 32 31 31
-rnO(i: ,-i-:cioriuscni;oli com
Duostats
Clorius Duostats
Duostats are thermostats, type V, which
via two sensing elements in a common
hydraulic system act on one and the
same control valve.
Two basic types are available:
V.4.05 or V.4.10, depending on the
preferable proportional band PB, and the
valve size. For more details, see the
combination diagrams in the Quick
Choice" leaflet No. 9.0.00.
The sensing elements are two spiral
sensors for the ventilation duct or two
rod sensors (a combination of one spiral
sensor and one rod sensor may be
supplied in certain combinations). The
effect, which the two sensing elements
have on the adjustment, is proportional
to the liquid volume of the individual
sensors.
Duostats are therefore available with
varying proportions between the liquid
volumes of the two sensors (sensor proportions) and in that way they can meet
the requirements made by a number of
different adjustment problems. As the
3.5.01-C
GB-1
adjustment result is a weighted average

value of the temperatures of the two
sensors, no fixed adjustment value can
be indicated. Hence, Duostats are not
equipped with a temperature scale, but
with a marking for adjustment towards
higher or lower temperatures,
respectively.
Applications
1. Adjustment of discharge air
temperatures in hot-air heating plants,
dependent on the outdoor temperature.
2. Adjustment of the supply-pipe temperature of central heating plants,
dependent on the outdoor temperature.
3. Adjustment af two temperatures which
are interdependent. E.g. the hot-water
tank of a district heating plant with
simultaneous control that the return
water temperature does not become too
high.
Selection of Duostat Type

Duostats for room heating are supplied
with seven different sensor combinations
which cover all requirements seen in
practice.
Clorius Controls A.'S

Tempej27 DK-2750 Bjlteiup Lteiwiiaik
lei. +45 77 32 31 30 Fax, *'\b / ; 3^ 31 31
Duostats
On selecting the suitable Duostat, the
d i a g r a m A is used in the following
manner:
When the correct basic type (V.4.05 or
V.4.10) has been c h o s e n from the
c o m b i n a t i o n d i a g r a m in the Quick
Choice" leaflet, look at the curve sheet
for
the max.
d i s c h a r g e air/flow
temperature (t ^ J , for which the plant
has been dimensioned by the outdoor
temperature ( t ^ ^ ) .
From here you follow the vertical lines to
the crossing with the respective t^ ^^
curve. The intersection lies within the
area of the suitable sensor combination,
the technical data of which are shown
on page 4.
Example
A 50 M1F valve combined with a V.4.10
thermostat, chosen from the combination
diagrams in the Quick Choice" leaflet,
has to regulate by t,^,^ = 40C and
t
= -15C. The Duostat curve sheet
u mm
gives the sensor proportion C, and the

Duostat will be type V.4.10C, which has
the sensor proportion 0.7:1. This value
may be calculated from equation 2) and
3) on page 3:
V
- 1-25 I : = 1.25
40-20
20+15
^0.7
If, for instance, a capillary tube of 6 m

is required from the adjusting cylinder
to the secondary sensor and 3 m to
the primary sensor, you specify:
Valve:
50 M 1F
Duostat:
V.4.10C
Capillary tube:
Adjusting cylinder secondary sensor
6m
Adjusting cylinder primary sensor
3m
Applications
Air Heating Plants
For air heating plants Duostats with two
spiral sensing elements for air ducts are
used. Fig. 1 shows an example of a plant
with Duostat. The primary sensor V
(red) is the real control sensor which
goes into the controlled system.
The secondary sensor V^ (blue) which is
located outside the controlled system,
registers the outdoor temperature and
determines
the
necessary
air
temperature by V^. If there is no supply
air duct, where the secondary sensor can
be built in, it can be placed in free air.

For this p u r p o s e a wall bracket is
available. In order to determine the
con-ect Duostat, use diagram A where
the combinations of spiral sensors for
air ducts are found on the left hand.
Central Heating Plants
For central heating plants Duostats with
two rod sensors are used.
Fig. 2 shows an example of a plant with
own boiler. Fig. 3 shows a plant with
mixing loop connected to district heating
plant, and fig. 4 is a district heating plant
with heat exchanger.
The basis f o r e m p l o y m e n t
with
Duostats for central heating plants is the
same as that described for air heating
plants, but the primary sensor is a rod
sensor in the flow of the plant, and the
secondary sensor is a rod sensor with
wall bracket outside on the building. On
diagram A you will find the combinations
of rod sensors on the right hand.
Other Applications
Duostats are sometimes used for purposes where both sensing elements go
into the same controlled system (see the
examples). The controlled condition will
then be a weighted average of the
registrations of the two sensors, as
shown in the following examples. In
fig. 5 a hot-water tank connected to
district heating is adjusted by a Duostat
whose one sensor - the primary sensor
- controls the temperature of the tank
which s h o u l d be constant. The
secondary s e n s o r registers the
temperature of the water which is led
back to the district heating network. In
this place it sees to it that the valve does
not open so much that the temperature
of the r e t u r n w a t e r rises in an
uncontrolled manner, when a large water
consumption makes the temperature in
the tank fall.
Fig. 6 shows a room heated by hot air.
The primary sensor is built into the extract air duct in order to serve as a room
thermostat f r o m this p l a c e . T h e
secondary s e n s o r is built into the
discharge air duct where it counteracts
that the d i s c h a r g e air t e m p e r a t u r e
becomes too low - which would feel like
a draught - when the room temperature
rises as a result of the heat development
which may come from persons or heating
processes in the room.
3.5.01-C
GB-2 C
^ ^
- ^
Fig. 1
Duoslatl ij
'S
U4^
v"*1
4^"
Fig. 2
ri|4ppt
*D.
O-Cxj-.-Fig. 4
o-lxj
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
CioriusConirolsA/S
fcnipvej27
OK-2750 Balleuip Denniaik
10!. i-'IS 77 SI 31 30 f a v +4'j 11 32 31 :j1

'A-.';j.W'vV.;:luiîi;,;cn-r(jt :;:':TI
Duostats
3.5.01-C
GB-3
Theoretical Basis
The theoretical basis for the use of
Duostats for plants for room heating
rests on the balance between the heat
brought to the plant, and the thermal loss
from the heated rooms to the
surroundings. By hot-air plants (fig. 1)
this may approximately be expressed by
equation 1), but with small changes,
these considerations may be applied to
central heating plants with water as the
heat carrier.
1) Lcp(ti-tu) = Zkf(tr-tu)
Here L is the quantity of air which is
heated from the outdoor temperature t^^
to the discharge temperature t,, and c is
the specific heat of the air. K f
expresses the sum of transmission
surfaces, joints, etc., through which heat
is lost to the surroundings by the
difference between the temperatures of
the heated rooms t^ and the outdoor
temperature t^. As L, c , k f and the
room temperature are constant sizes,
equation 1) can be converted into:
2) 7
zi~ = TT - n
Umax
Here t
ûnitn
uLu
and t
I max
are belonging values

u mm
for the calculated discharge air temperature by the outdoor temperature for
which the plant has been dimensioned.
In the same way, t . and t
are
'
I uiin
u max
interbelonging values by the condition

where the thermal loss is 0 (normally
20C). The size n expresses how many
degrees t has to be raised, when t^ falls
one degree. It is constant for the
individual plant, but varies from plant to
plant. This problem can be met by
supplying the Duostats with different
sensor proportions. The proportion
between the liquid volume in secondary
and primary sensors is:
3)
= 1.25n
This formula is approximate, as the expansion coefficient of the liquid

(glycerine) varies with the temperature,
which is compensated for with the factor
1.25.
Clonus Conlrols A/S

Tempovei27 OK-2750 Balleiup Deiiniaik
Tei. ^4b 77 32 31 30 fax *43 7/ 32 31 V,
Emat! nia^^LiiiriLt.Lrrtfijis.cun;
Duostats
3.5.01-C
Type
Closing power
Length of secondary sensor L
Secondary sensor's windings, VV
Secondary sensor's time constant*
Primary sensors's time constant*
Sensor proportion VjiVp
Excess temperature protector
Max. lifting height
Travel
[-95-I
V.4.0S A V.4.05 B V.4.05 C V.4.05 D V.4.05 E

N.
mm
number
sec.
sec.
'C
mm
mm/C
Type
Closing power
Length of secondary sensor L
Secondary sensor's windings, W^
Primary sensors's time constant*
Sensor proportion V3:Vp
Max. lifting height
.
Travel
1-95H
C
mm
mm/C
HEJ-
n8
n
V-^,
Closing power
Length of secondary sensor C
Secondary sensor's diam. E
Secondary sensor's thread conn. G
Primary sensor's time constant*
Sensor proportion Vg:Vp
Max. lifting height
Travel
400
420
14
360
360
0.7:1
80
12
0.5
400
420
21
360
360
1:1
80
12
0.5
400
420
29
360
360
1.4:1
80
12
0.5
400
420
14
360
360
0.35:1
40
21
1.0
400
420
21
360
360
0.5:1
40
21
1.0
400
420
29
360
360
0.7:1
40
21
1.0
400
420
42
360
360
1:1
40
21
1.0
400
420
42
360 (M
360
~
1.45:1
40
21
1.0
V.4.05 L V.4.05 M
N.
mm
mm
"BSP
sec.
sec.
C
mm
mm/C
Type
^30
400
420
10
360
360
0.5;1
80
12
0.5
V.4.10 A V.4.10 B V.4.10 C V.4.10 D V.4.10 E

N.
mm
number
sec.
sec.
Type
Closing power
Length of secondary sensor C
Secondary sensor's diam. E
Secondary sensor's thread conn. G
Primary sensor's time constant*
Sensor proportion Vg:Vp
Max. lifting height
Travel
400
420
7
360
360
0.35;1
80
12
0.5
400
390
22
1
120
120
1:1
80
12
0.5
V.4.10 L
N.
mm
mm
"BSP
sec.
sec.
C
mm
mmTC
400
490
28
1
150
120
2:1
80
12
0.5
V.4.10 N
400
490
28
1
150
150
1:1
40
21
1.0
High alloy
stainless
steel
" The time constants are for spiral sensing elements for air ducts measured in air with a velocity of 4 m/sec. For rod sensing elements they are measured in water with
a vdodty of 1 m/sec.
Order Diagram
By specifications of Duostats, the following information is given:

1. Valve. Dimension and type
2. Duostat. Basic type and sensor proportion
3. Capillary tube from adjusting cylinder to secondary sensor (V^, blue)
4. Capillary tube from adjusting cylinder to primary sensor (V , red)
Example
50 M1F
V.4.10 C
6 m
3 m
Clonus Controls A/S

TeiTipovej 27 DK-2750 Bullerup Denrnork
Tei +4S 77 32 31 30 fax +45 77 32 3! 31
[ rr.Oi' ii>o:K?}c:or!uscon:rois.cOir'
Heimeier
Hydro lux
Differenzdruck-berstrmventil
mit direkt ablesbaren Einstellwerten
<>
l
t^m^mi^ms^
Montage- und Bedienungsanleitung

Beschreibung
Proportional arbeitendes differenzdruckgesteuertes berstrmventil fr den Einbau in Pumpenwarmwasser-Heizungsanlagen.
Gehuse aus korrosionsbestndigem Rotguss.
Direkt ablesbare Einstellskala.
Hchste Ansprechgenauigkeit durch innenliegende, groztjgig
dimensionierte Sollwertfeder aus Edelstahl.
Stufenlose Einstellung gegen unbefugte Verstellung gesichert.
Ausfhrungen DN 20 - 32.
Anschlsse eingangsseitig Innengewinde; ausgangsseitig
Innengewinde oder flachdichtende Verschraubung ().
Gehuse
0-Ring
Teller
Sicherungsscheibe
(D Sollwertfeder
Anzeigemutter
Oberteil
Handradkappe
(D Spindel
Sprengring
@ Spindelmutter
Feststellschraube
Scheibe
Anwendung
Das Hydrolux-berstmventil verhindert den unen-vnscht hohen
Anstieg der Frderhhe und hlt den Frderstrom aufrecht.
Bei Umlauf-Gaswasserheizungen wird die MindestUmlaufwassermenge sichergestellt.
Einbau
Der Einbau ist grundstzlich lageunabhngig mglich.
Zur besseren Ablesbarkeit sollte das berstrmventil mglichst
senkrecht, d.h. mit der Handradkappe nach oben, eingebaut werden. Durchflussrichtung beachten. Die Ansteuerung erfolgt innerhalb der Armatur Externe Steuerieitungen sind nicht erforderlich.
Um die Wirkung des berstrmventils zu verbessern, ist die
Bypassleitung strmungsgnstig bzw. druckverlustarm auszufhren, d.h. mglichst kurz, grozgig dimensioniert und ohne vermeidbare Einzelwiderstnde.
Einstellung
Das HEIMEIER Hydrolux-berstrmventil ist werkseitig justiert und
auf einen ffnungsdruck von 200 mbar (2 m WS) voreingestellt.
Ist eine Vernderung der Voreinstellung dennoch erforderlich, so
ist zunchst die Feststellschraube zu lsen. Danach kann der ffnungsdruck durch Drehen der Handradkappe stufenlos, im Bereich
zwischen 50 mbar und 500 mbar, verschoben werden. Der
gewnschte Wert ist dabei direkt an der Skala der Handradkappe
abzulesen. Einstelldiagramme sind nicht erforderlich. Die gewhlte
Position ist anschlieend durch die Feststellschraube gegen unbeabsichtigtes Verstellen zu sichern.
Technische nderungen vorbehalten
THEODOR HEIMEIER METALLWERK GMBH & CO. KG - D-59592 ERWITTE TEL. (02943) 891-0 FAX (02943) 891-100 WVWV.HEIMEIER.COM
iM*A.~ii-Ji*
Heimeier
fc<#i8iaWsrBm!ti's'SjAfefcA
^fe1U^^^f^siV^''A'?*'''^
(^B^ Hydrolux Differential pressure overflow valve with direct reading of values
(T F J ) Hydrolux Soupape differentielle avec valeur de rglage directennent lisible
( ^ j / ) Hydrolux Drukverschil-overstroomventiel met direct afleesbare instelwaarden
Installation and operating

instructions
Descriptor!
Instructions de montage et
mode d'emploi
Description
Montage- en bedieningsvoorschrift
Omschrijving
Proportionally operating differential pressure controlled overflow valve for the installation in pumpoperated heating systems.
Body made of anticorrosive gunmetal.
Directly readable adjusting scale.
Highest response accurancy due to the
internally mounted and amply dimensioned set
valve spring made of stainless steel.
Infinitely variable adjustment which Is protected
against any unauthorized re-setting.
Valve version DN,20-32.
Femal-threaded entry connection; outlet either
femal-threaded () or flat sealing fitting (g).
Soupape proportionelle la pression differentielle.

Corps en bronze resistant la corrosion.
Lecture directe sur l'chelle de rglage.
Haute precision de reaction grace au ressort en
acler inoxydable incorpor, largement
dimenslonn.
Rglage sans pallers, proteg contre le drglage
eventuel non autoris.
Disponible en DN 20 - 32.
Raccordement d'entr filet;
Raccordement de sortie filet ()ou raccord
joint plat (B).
Proportloneel werkend drukverschil-overstroomventiel voor venfl/armings-installaties met

pompcirculatle. Ventielhuls van korrosiebestendig
gletbrons.
Direkt afleesbare instelschaal.
Grote regelbaarheid door rulm gedimensioneerd
veerelement gemaakt van edelstaal.
Traploze Instelling, beveillgd tegen onbevoegde
bedlening.
Uitvoering: DN 20 - 32.
Aanslulting: ingangszijde: binnendraad;
ultganszljde binnendraad (S) of vlakdichtende
koppeling ( ) .
(D
d)
(D
@
@
Corps
Joint d'tancheit
C3) Ressort dimenslonn
Mcanlsme
Axe
Ecrou
Disque
Ce) Joint torique
Disque de scurit
Oo) Ecrou d'indlcation
(3P Volant manuel en matire synthtique
02) Rondelle
Vis de fixation
Body
Disc
Spring
Bonnet
Stem
Stem nut
Washer
0-ring
Retaining washer
Indicating nut
Handwheel
Snap ring
Securing screw
Use
The Hydrolux overflow valve prevents the undesirably steep rise of the pump head and maintains
the flow at a stable rate.
, In the case of circulation of gas-fired water heating systems, the minimum amount of the circulating water Is achieved.
Installation
Installation is basically possible in any position. In
order to read off the values more easily, the relief
valve should be placed vertically wherever possble:
i.e. it should be Installed with the handwheel
pointing upwards.
Obey flow direction. To Improve the effect of the
overflow valve the bypass piping should be installed with low pressure drop: i.e. as short as possible, with generous dimensions and by avoiding all
possible areas of resistance.
Setting
(2)
Huls
Klepschotel
Instelveer
Binnenwerk
Spindel
Splndelmoer
Schijf
O-Ring
6eveillngsrlng
Instelmoer
Handkap
Borgveer
Borgschroef
Application
Ibepassing
La soupape differentielle Hydrolux rduit les

pointes des hauteur manomtrlque Indsirables et
malntlent un debit convenable.
La circulation minimale exige dans les installations chaufes par chaudlre gaz est ainsi assure.
Het Hydrolux-drukverschil-overstroomventlel voorkomt ongewenste verhoging van de opvoerhoogte en houdt de massastroom constant.
Bij Combigaswandketels" wordt een minimaal
aantal liters ingesteld.
Montage
Inbouw
-iSPi'M'
De Inbouwpositie is in principe met van belang.
Echter voor een betete afleesbaarheld Is het raadzaam om het overstroomventlel 20 recht mogelijk,
met de instelschaal naar boven, in te bouwen, let
wel op de doorstroomrichting. De aansturing
geschledt in het overstroomventlel. Externe stuurleidingen zijn niet nodig. Om de werking van het
overstroomventlel te verbeteren is de bypassleiding stromingsgunstig, respectievelljk met een
laagdrukverschil ultgevoerd, dat wll zeggen zo
kort mogelijk en groot gedemensioneerd en zonder vermijdbare weerstanden.
La position de montage n'a strictement pas d'importance, pour avoir une bonne lecture directe de
i'chelle de rglage, un montage vertlcale est preferable. Toujours verifier le sens de circulation. La
regulation est autonome, une commande extrleur n'est pas ncessalre.
Afin d'amllorer le fonctlonnement de la soupape
differentielle, la conduite de by-pass est realiser
de facon hydrodynamique resp. avec flble perte
de charge, c..d. la plus courte possible, largement dimensionne, et sans zone d'tranglement
Inutile.
Rglage
'|nstffljHg*ti#!p|J:*;t';A.^^
The HEIMEIER Hydrolux overflow valve is adjusted

in the factory and is set to open at a preliminary
pressure of 200 mbar. Should It be necessary to
change the preliminary setting, the securing screw
must first be released.
Then, by turning the handwheel cover, the pressure at the opening can be adjusted to any required
point between 50 and 500 mbar. The required
value can then be directly read off from the graduations on the handwheel.
Setting-diagrams are not necessary.
Unintended adjustment of the selected setting can
then be avoided by, finally, once again, fixing the
securing screw.
La soupape differentielle HEIMEIER Hydrolux est

prrgie d'usine une pression d'ouverture de
200 mbar
Si, le cas chant, une modification du prrglage
talt ncessalre, II faudralt dserrer la vis de fixation. Ensulte, la valeur d'ouverture peut tre
rgle sans paller entre 50 mbar et 500 mbar en
tournant le volant. La valeur souhaite est directement iisible sur l'chelle du volant.
Des diagrammes de rglage ne sont pas ncessaires. La position choisie est ensulte protegee
contre des manoeuvres non autorlses par blocage de la vis.
Het HEIMEIER Hydrolux-overstroomventiel is

fabrieksmatig op een openingsdruk van
200 mbar (2 m WK) Ingesteld.
Het is gebleken dat deze instelling In de meeste
situaties de gunstigste is.
Is een verandering van de voorinstelling noodzakelljk, dan kan men na verwijdering van de borgschroef, door het verdraaien van de handkap, de
openingsdruk instellen tussen de 50 en 500 mbar.
De Ingestelde waarde kan direkt van de handkap
worden afgelezen.
De gekozen instelwaarde kan aansluitend, door
het vastdraaien van de borgschroef, tegen onbevoegde bedlening worden beveiligd.
We reserve the right to Introduce technical alterations without previous notice.
Sous reserve de modifications.
Technische wijzigingen voorbehouden.
THEODOR HIMEIER METALLWERK GMBH & CO. KG D-59592 ERWITTE TEL. +49 (0)2943 891- O FAX +49 (0)2943 891- 100 WWW.HEIMEIER.COM
"-f^-wy
IiSiSSi^-.
Heimeief
l>
mm'msîmxatô^
(Îj
Hydrolux Valvola di troppo pieno a pressione differenziale con valori di regolazione direttamente leggibiii
( ^ ^ E J ) Hydrolux Vivula de sobreflujo de presion diferencial
(RUS^jHydrolux flepenycKHOM KjianaHflMcJ3ct:epeHUManbHoronaenema c HenocpeflCTBeHHo cMMibiBaeiubiMM napaMeipaMM pery/iMpoBKM
Istruzioni d i montaggio
e per l'uso
Oescrizione
Instrucciones de montaje
y de manejo
Oescripcion
Valvola di troppo pieno controllata dalla pressione

differenziale operante proporzionalmente per il montaggio in impianti di riscaldamento di acqua azionati
da pompa. Corpo di bronzo resistente alia corrosione.
Lettura diretta della scala graduata di regolazione.
Massima precisione di risposta grazie alia molla interna
di acciaio inossidabile ampiamente dimensionata.
Regolazione continua protetta dalla manipolazione
da parte di persone non autorizzate.
Modelli DN 20 - 32.
Vlvula de sobreflujo controlada con presion diferencial que opera proporcionalmente para el montaje en
instaiaciones de calefaccin de agua caliente bombeada. La carcasa es de fundicin de bronce.
Una escala de ajuste puede ser leida directamente.
Maxima precision debido a muelle de acero refinado
de valor terico interior de grandes dimensiones.
Ajuste sin escalones para protegerla contra ajuste
por personas ajenas.
Versiones DN 20 - 32.
Collegamenti sul lato di ingresso con filettatura interna e sul lato di uscita con filettatura interna (A) o
con raccordo filettato a tenuta piatta (B).
Conexiones en el lado de entrada de las roscas inferiores ; en el lado de salida. Roscas interiores @ o
atornillado de hermetizacin plana ( B )
(D
(2)
(3)
()
(5)
(7)
(9)
(10)
0?
(Bl
Corpo
Disco
Molla
Parte superiore
Asta filettata
Madrevite
Rondella
O-Ring
Rondella di sicurezza
Dado indicatore
Cappuccio della manopola
Anello elastico
Vite di fermo
Carcasa
Plato
Muelle de valor terico
Pieza superior
Husillo
Tuerca del husillo
Disco
Anillo
Disco de proteccin
Tuerca de visualizacin
Caperuza de la rueda de mano
Anillo de sujecin
Tornillo de ajuste fijo
iMHCTpyKUMfi n o MOHxay M
o6cny>KiiBaHMK}
OnMcaHMe
flponopitiiaHanbHbi nepeoycKHo KnanaH c ynpasneiweti oi
)lii(jx))epemaflbHOfoflaajeHMnp^raSHaveH m MOHtaxa B oioraiTeiibHbix
omeMax c rcfiflve eoAC, noqasaeMO nocpencTBOM Kacoca. Kopnyc rnaffl
uafOToem m Koppoaimio croiKoii meimi ammio-DiHmai fifmM.
Ulraiia perynHpoBK c HaiocpeilcTBeflHbiM cnnuBameM,
BucmaAuiafl rnHocTb cpafiarbiaam tarcwapii MaroTOB/ieHHo 3
ewcoKDKaieaBeHHoii craiw npyxcune neo6xqiimora anaieHm tuuHX
paauepoa, pacnomweHHoi BHyip njpnyca,
EeccTynemaroe peiyniipoeaHiie aauiwiieHo or HecaiiKUiioHiipoGaHfloro
SMeuiaTeMTBa.
KoHCTpyKTKBHue HcnonHeHffi DN 20 32.
lUiynepti CO CTOpoKH sum c SHyrpaiHai peabfioji; co cropoHbi atixma c
BHyrpeme peabM ( ) w pesbfioBoe aximeme c ynnoTmrenbHoii
npoKiiafliffl ( B ) .
w
(7)
01)
Impiego
Apiicacin
La valvola di t r o p p o pieno Hydrolux impedisce

l'aumento della prevalenza oltre il valore desiderato
e mantiene costante la portata.
Nei sistemi d i riscaldamento a gas con circolazione
d'acqua si assicura la portata minima dell'acqua in
circolazione.
La vivula de sobreflujo de Hydrolux evita el alto

aumento indeseado de la altura de transporte y
mantiene el flujo de transporte. En ei caso d e
calefacciones de agua de gas de circulacin se
garantiza la cantidad minima de agua de circulacin.
II m o n t a g g i o possibile indipendentemente dalla

posizione.
Per migliorare la lettura, o p p o r t u n e montare la valvola
di troppo pieno in posizione verticale, cioe c o n il cappuccio della m a n o p o l a in alto, Attenzione al verso del flusso.
II pilotaggio a w i e n e all'interno della valvola. N o n sono
necessarie tubazioni di c o m a n d o esterne. Per migliorare
I'azione della valvola di t r o p p o pieno, la tubazione di
bypass deve essere realizzata a bassa resistenza idrodinamica o w e r o c o n una piccola caduta di pressione, vale a
dire lunghezza m i n i m a possibile, diametro massimo
possibile e d assenza d i transizioni ad alta resistenza.
E! morilcijc cS puiiuic inucpcniciHciMcFlie uc id

posicion. Es recomendable montar la vlvula de
sobreflujo verticalmente, o sea con la caperuza de
la rueda manual hada arriba. Preste atenclon a la
direccin del flujo. El control se realiza dentro de los
artefactos. N o son necesarios conductos d e control
exteriores. Se debe realizar el conducto bypass de
forma favorable del flujo y/o con poca prdida de
presin para mejorar la eficacia de la vlvula d e
sobreflujo, o sea, bastante corto, de dimensiones
grandes y sind resistencias individuales evitables.
i^pntaje
Regolazione
Ajuste
Kopnyc
Tapewa
npy)Ki<Ha perympoeKH neoxQAXMoro SHaieHUH
BepxHHH lacTb
UJniiKAeiib
fauxa uinuHqenn
Ulaiia
ynnoTHMTenbHoe vibiio Kpyrnoro ceieKHit
Cionopiia iii36a
faKa yKaaaTenn
KonnaHOK c MaxoBHîKOu
r^jyxHHKoe cionopHoe rauio
PeiympoaoHHbi BHHT
ripHMeHeHMe
riepenycKKOii Kiiana Hydrolux cunimaeT excenaienbHoe
3H3'WTe/ibi<oe yBenMseHHe Hanopa H ncwepxaiBaeT Heo6xoAutiyio
oieuHy noflavy.
B rasoBo-BOflflHbix cHcreuax oioraiBHHd c UHpKymnue oecneinBaercB
MHHUuanHoe KonnecTBoimpKyiuipyioiiie earn-
IVl0HTa)K
B npHHUKne BOSMOxen nioMi uoHiaiK K/ianana B nofiOM Km%em.
Ana onefHeHnn cvnTbiBaHiiR napanieipa perymtpoBKM nepenycxHo
manaH cnwyei, no Boauoxaoc, ycraHaBiwBaTb BeprnKanbHO, TO ecTb
mnavKOM c uaxosmKou Bsepx. Co&iK)aai<Te yxasaHHoe nanpaBiieHtie
noTOKa ynpasjieHue ocyuteasniieTCfi BHyrp apMatypu. BHeuwKe
ynpaanaiomiie ipy6onpoeotu He rpefiyioTc.fymnasbneHun
3<{xt)eKTkiBHocTH nepenycKWO uianaHa HeoxciaHUo CMOHntpoBatb
nepenycKHo rpyoonpoeag rax, iroou HC 6buio fionbiiio noiepH
pacxona urn naAeraiH AaBjiewiB, le. TpyGoipoBiw imxen meit
MHHUMaiibHyio Awmy, 6onMiioe ceieKe B HEM O/mcHbi oTcyicTBOflaib
He Tpefiyioiuxecii tiecra c noBbwieHHbiu conpoTHBnemeM.
.feryn'upoBKa
La valvola d i t r o p p o pieno Hydrolux della HEIMEIER

preregolata su una pressione di apertura di 2 0 0
mbar (2 m H 2 0 ) . Se necessario modificare tale
preregolazione, occorre innanzitutto allentare la vite
di fermo. Ruotando il cappuccio della manopola si
puo ora modificare la .pressione di apertura su
qualsiasi valore compreso tra 50 mbar e 5 0 0 m b a r
II valore p u o essere letto direttamente sulla scala
graduata del cappuccio della manopola. Diagrammi
di regolazione n o n sono necessari. La posizione d i
regolazione va infine bloccata con la vite di f e r m o
per impedire la manipolazione della valvola.
La valvula de sobreflujo Hydrolux de HEIMEIER ha

sido justada en la fabrica y pre-ajustada a una
presin de apertura de 2 0 0 mbar (2 m WS). En el
caso de q u e fuera necesaria una modificacin del
preajuste, se debe aflojar el tornillo de ajuste fijo.
Despus se puede cambiar la presin de apertura sin
escalones girando la caperuza de la rueda d e m a n o ,
en el inten/alo entre 50 mbar y 5 0 0 mbar. El valor
deseado se puede leer directamente en la escala de
la caperuza de la rueda de mano. Diagramas de
ajuste n o son necesarios. La posicin seleccionada
se debe proteger contra ajuste indebido a traves del
tornillo de ajuste fijo.
nepenycKHOH xnanaH Hydrolux itinpuu HEIMEIER oniociKpoBaH Ha

aaaooe H npeflBapme/ibHo oipeiympoeaH Ha mneme oiKpwtH 200
u6ap (2 uerpa BOAnnoro CTona). Eaw HeoxoAHUo lUMeHHTb
aaawcKyio perynnpoBxy, TO yxHo cHaiana oinycTHTb peiyjiHpoBovKbi
BHHT. flocjie sToro aBjeHHe ornpbiTiifl OXHO oTperynnpoBaTb
6eccTyneH>iaTo B nptaenax or 50 Map no 500 M6ap nyre noBopora
KomaiKB c MaxoBmxoM. BemtHHy ycraHOBjieHHoroflBBjieHuBUOXHO
npti 3T0U HenocpescTBeKHo (NHibiBaTb no ujKajie axoBrnxa.
ftiarpaMua peiynnpoBKH He ipe6yeTCfl. B aawiioHeHne Heofixonnuo
3a(|iKctipoeaTb BuSpaHHoe noiKixeHue MaxoatHxa or
HenpeflHauepeHHoro lOHefleHH nyren saTnniBaHtiB peiynMpoBo^Horo
Con riserva di modifiche tecniche.
Resen/ado el derecho de modificaciones tcnicas.
OcTaanneM 3a coOoii npaso a BHeceHne TexHmecKMX 3MeHeH.
BHHia.
THEODOR HEIMEIER METALLWERK GMBH & CO. KG D-59592 ERWITTE TEL, -1-49 (0)2943 891- 0 FAX +A9 (0)2943 891- 100 WWW.HEIMEIER.COM
Heimeier
(^Pl/) Hydrolux Zawr rznicowo-przelewowy z bezposrednim odczytem nastaw

C,CZ} Hydrolux Diferencilnf pfepoustci' ventil tIaku s pfi'mo odeci'tatelnymi nastaviteinymi hodnotami
Hydrolux Diferencilny prepadovy ventil tIaku s priamo odci'taternymi nastavitefnymi hodnotami
Instrukcja Montazu 1
Obstugi
Opis
Montznf navod a nvod na

obsluhu
Popis
Montazny navod a nvod

na cbsluhu
Popis
Zawr przelewowy o dziataniuproporcjonainym ze

sterowanlem rznicq cisnieri przeznaczony do
montazu na pompowych instalacjach grzewczych
na cleptq wod. Obudowa z mosi^dzu czerwonego
odpornego na korozj^. Skala nastaw z odczytem
bezposrednim. Najwyzsza doktadnosc zadziatania
dzi?ki wbudowanej spr^zynie wartosci zadanej ze
stall szlachetnel o duzych rozmiarach. Nastawy
bezstopnlowe z zabezpieczeniem przed
niepowotanymi zmlanami.
Typy wg DN 20 - 32.
Przyfqcza po stronle wlotu z gwintami wewnftrznyml, po stronie wylotu z gwintami wewn^trznyml g )
lub srubunklem z uszczelnlenlem ptaskim ( ) .
Proporcionlne funguji'cf pi'epoustci ventil, fi'zeny

diferencnfm tiakem, pro vestavbu do toplovodni'ch
topnych zafi'zeni s nucenym obhem. Tleso je z
cervenho bronzu s odolnosti protl korozi.
Pfi'mo odeci'tateln nastavlteln stupnice.
Nejvyssi pi'esnost reakce di'ky vnitfn ulozen, velkoryse dimenzovan pruzin pozadovan hodnoty z
ulechtil oceli.
Zajistno plynul nastaveni protl nezdoucimu
pfestaveni. Provedenf DN 20 - 32.
Pri'poje ze strany vstupu vnitrnf zvlty; ze strany
vystupu vnitrnf zvlty (g)nebo sroubovy spoj (g)
s plochym tsnni'm.
Proporcionlne fungujci prepadovy ventil, riadeny

diferencnym tiakom, pre zabudovanie do teplovodnych
vykurovacich zariadenf s nutenym obehom. Tleso je 2
cervenho bronzu odolnho protl korozii.
Priamo odcitatelha nastavitern stupnica.
Najvyssia presnosf reakcie vdaka vniitri ulozenej,
velkoryso dimezovanej pruziny pozadovanej hodnoty z
usrachtllej ocele.
Zaisten plynul nastavenie proti neziaducemu prestaveniu.
Vyholovenia DN 20 32.
Pri'poje zo strany vstupu vnutom zvlty; zo strany
vystupu vnutom zavity (A) alebo skrutkovy spoj ()
s plochym tesnenim.
(5)
(D
(D
@
@
@
Tleso
Tanier
Pmzina pozadovanej hodnoty
Horny diel
Vreteno
Matica vretena
Kotuc
Kruzok 0
Poistny kotuc
Indikacna matica
Uzver mcnho kolieska
Rozprny poistny knjzok
Zabezpecovacia skrutka
obudowa
talerz
spr^zyna wartosci zadanej
element grny
trzpleri
nakrQtka trzpienia
podWadka
pierscieri o przekroju okr^gtym
podkladka zabezpieczajgca
nakr^tka wskaznikowa
kolpak pokr^tta r^cznego
pierscieri rozporowy
sruba ustalajqca
Zastosowanie
Tleso
Talif
Pruzina pozadovan hodnoty
Homi dil
Vfeteno
Matice vi'etena
Kotouc
Krouzek 0
Pojistny kotouc
Indikacni matice
Uzavr rucni'ho kolecka
Rozprny pojistny krouzek
Zajisfovaci sroub
Pouzitr
Zawr rznicowo-przelewowy Hydrolux zapoblega

niezamierzenle wysokiemu wzrostowi wysokosci
Itoczenia oraz podtrzymuje nat^zenle przepfywu.
W opalanych gazem wodnych uWadach grzewczych
obiegowych zapewniona zostaje minimaina ilosc
wody obiegowej.
Pfepoustci ventil Hydrolux zabranuje, aby nedoslo

k nezdoucn vysokmu vzestupu cerpaci vysky, a
napomha k udrzovni' objemovho prCiloku.
U clrkulacni'ch plynovodni'ch topenf se zajisfuje
minimlni mnozstvi' obtocn vody.
'Montaz
;Vstayba,/:fe?a52||i3l|S
Montaz mozliwy jest zasadniczo w kazdym potozeniu.

Dia zapewnienia tatwiejszego odczytu zawr rznicowoprzelewowy monlowac naiezy w miar? moznosci pionowo, tzn. tak, aby pokrywa poi<rtta r^cznego skierowana
byla ku gorze. Przestrzegac kieainku przeplywu.
Zasterowanie odbywa si? wewnqtrz amiatury.
Zewn^trzne przewody sterownicze nie sq wymagane.
Dia poprawy dziatania zaworu rznicowo-przelewowego
przewody obiegowe przewidzlec naiezy w sposob
ufatwiajqcy przeptyw, z nieznacznymi strataml cisnlen,
tzn. mozliwie jak najkrtsze, o duzych przekrojach i
pozbawione zb^dnych oporow jednostkowych.
Vestavba se muie zsadn provdt nezavisle na

poloze.
Z dCivodu snadnjsi'ho odeci'tni by se ml
pfepoustci ventil pokud mozno zamontovat svisle,
tzn. s uzavrem rucni'ho kolecka nahoru. Dodrzovat
smr prtoku. Navoleni' probfh uvnitf baterie.
Extemf fi'dici potrubi nejsou zapotfebf. Pro zlepseni
ucinku pfepoustciho ventilu je zapotfebf provest
obtokov potrubf se zvyhodnnym proudnfm popf.
s nfzkou ztratou tIaku, tzn. pokud mo^no krtk,
velkoryse dimenzovan a bez jednotlivych odpoai,
kter^m je mozn zabrnit.
Nastawa
Nastaveni
Pouzitie
Prepadovy ventil Hydrolux zabranuje neziaducemu
vysokmu vzostupu cerpacej vyky a udrzuje
objemovy prietok.
U cirkulacnych plynovodnych vykurovani sa zaisfuje
minimine mnozslvo cirkulujucej vody.
Z^budoSi^rii
Montaz sa moze vykonvaf zsadne nezavisle od
polohy.
Z dovodu fahsieho odcitania by sa mal prepadovy
ventil nakolko je to len mozn namontovaf zvisle,
tzn. uzver nrcnho kolieska smerom hore.
Dodrziavaf smer prietoku. Nastavenie sa uskutocfiuje
vntri batrie. Externe riadiace potrubia nie s
potrebn. Aby sa ziepsll ijcinok prepadovho ventilu,
je potrebn zhotovlf obtokov potmble so zvyhodnnym pnJdenim popr. s nfzkou stratou tIaku, tzn. co
najkratsie, velkoryso dimenzovan a bez
jednotlivych odporov, ktorym niozno zabrnif.
Nastavenie
Zawr rznicowo-przelewowy Hydrolux HEIMEIER-a

justowany jest fabrycznie, nastawa wst?pna cisnienia otwarcia wynosi 200 mbar (2 m sfupa wody).
Jezeli konieczna miala by byc zmiana nastawionej
wst^pnie warlosci, naiezy wpierw poluzowac snibq
ustalajqc^. Cisnienie otwarcia zmieniac mozna
nast^pnie bezstopniowo w zakresie pomi?dzy 50
mbar a 500 mbar, obracajqc w tym celu pokryw?
pokr^tla r^cznego. Poz^danq wartosc odczytac
mozna bezposrednio na skall pokrywy pokr^tta
r^cznego. Wykresy nastaw nie sq konleczne.
Wybranq pozycj? zabezpleczyc naiezy nast^pnie
przy pomocy sruby ustalajqcej przed niepowotanymi
zmianami.
Pfepoutcf ventil HEIMEIER Hydrolux je ze strany

vyroby justovan a pfednastaven na olvfracf tiak 200
mbar (2 m WS). Pokud je vsak zapotfebf provest
zmnu pfednastaveni, je nutn nejdffve uvolnit
zajisfovacf sroub. Pote je mozn otcenfm uzavru
rucni'ho kolecka plynul pfesunout otvi'racf tIak v
rozsahu 50 mbar a 500 mbar. Pozadovanou hodnotu
je pfitom mozn odecfst primo na stupnicl uzavru
runfho kolecka. Nastavovacf diagramy nejsou
zapotfebf. Zvolen poloha se pote zajistf proti
nezdoucimu pfestaveni pomoci zajisfovacfho
sroubu.
Prepadovy ventil HEIMEIER Hydrolux je z vyroby

justovany a prednastaveny na otvracf tIak 200
mbar (2 m WS). Ak je napriek tomu potrebn
vykonaf zmenu prednastavenia, treba najskor uvolnif
zabezpecovaciu skaitku. Potom je mozn otcanfm
uzvenj rucnho kolieska plynul posuvaf otvracf
tIak V rozsahu 50 mbar a 500 mbar. Pozadovanu
hodnotu pritom mozno precftaf priamo na stupnicl
uzveru oicnho kolieska. Nastavovacie diagramy
nie s potrebn. Zvolen poloha sa potom pomocou
zabezpecovacej skrutky zaisti proti neumyselnmu
prestaveniu.
Zastrzega si mozliwosc zmian technicznych.
Technick zmny se vyhrazuji.
Technick zmeny su vyhfaden.
THEODOR HEIMEIER METALtWERK GMBH & CO. KG D-59592 ERWITTE TEL +49 (0)2943 891- O FAX +49 (0)2943 891- 100 WWW.HEIMEIER.COM
Heimeief
(JHj) Hydrolux Nyomasklnbsegi ateresztszelep kzvetlenl leolvashat bealli'tsi rtkekkel

C H R ) Hydrolux Raziika tiaka-popiavni ventil s mogunoscu direktnog ocitavanja vrijednosti za namjestanje
CGR^_Hydrolux BaAiSa unepxeiAioric; (le AsiToupyia oupcpva ne rri Siacpopci nieoric;, |ie pue|iiJi6[iV(; n\iq iiEcrqc; avdyvuoric;
Szerelsi s kezelsi
utasi'tas
Lei'ras
Uputstva o montazi i
rukovanju
Opis
OSriY'Et; ecpappoynq KQI

xerpioôu
nepiypatpn
Arnyosan mkd, nyomskiilonbsg lfal

vezrelt ateresztszelep szivattyzott meleg
vizzel mkd ftberendezesekhez. A hza
korrzlll rezntvenybl keszlt. A bellftskla
kzvetlenl leolvashat. A bels elhelyezkedes,
nagyvonalan mrefezett, nemesaclbol keszlt
eli'rt rtket biztosit rug rvn a legpontosabb
tnegszlalsi pontossggal rendelkezik.
Fokozatmentesen allithat, az illetktelen
tlli'tsok ellen biztosi'tva van.
N 20-32 mretekben keszl.
A bemen oldali csatlakozs bels menetes, a
kimen oldalon bels menetes (S) vagy lapos
tmites csavaros ().
Proporcionaini radni poplavni ventil upravljan razlikom tiaka

za ugradnju u pumpna postrojenja za toplu vodu-postrojenja
za grijanje. Kuciste o d crvenog lijeva otpomog na koroziju.
Direktna mogucnost ocltanja Ijestvice namjestanja Visoka
proradna tocnost na osnovu unutra polozene dalekosezno
dimenzionirane opruge za potrebnu vrijednost iz plemenitog
celika.
Osigurano bezstupnjevano namjestanje protiv nedozvoljenog
premjestaja.
Izvedbe DN 20-32.
Prikljucci sa ulazne strane s unutamjim navojem; s izlazne
strane.
unutamji navoj @ ili vijcani spoj koji ima sposobnost plitkog
brtvljenja ( ) .
BoAfiSa untpxtioiii; iit avaAoyiKij kiioupyio KOI pu9(iioii oupipavo (ic

m 5ia(popd nitoiK ipa; Ejapiioyii OE tyKOTauiaoc; Btppavorn; HE
anUa Bsptio vEpo. To nikôi; um KOTaoKEuaopvo on EpuBpd XUT
u^K, TO onoio Eivai avBsniKO KOTO iioPpiixirii;.
KAiiioKO piJe|JiiJr|(; |IE taioiriia oiicotii; ovdvvaiorn;.
AvuTatti OKpiptio Evtpyonoiiioiiq Ayo) lou EAaTr)piou Tijpnonq l u v
npoKaBopiqjEVBv npiov, TO onoio EXEI EipapfiooTEi oiov tOBiEpiKo xipo
lou opydvou, sivm untppEipa SiooiaoioAoytipvo KOI KOTOOKcuaopvo
ond EuyEvij xdAufa
AnXiiidKomi puStiioii. oofoAio^vti Koid ovraipEmi)<; pEiappyOpioiK.
KoiaoKEuaomd )iy6r| IN 20 - 32.
iaouvEoai; OTTIV topd v^ tiodSou \ii EomEpiKO onsipuHa, OTt|v
nAcupd n i ; s ^ o u p couTCMd onclpdipo @ i i pc iSupa
OBTavEWKiic; oiEydvuoiic; ( m .
hz
(D tnyr
d) elfrt rtk rugja
(els rsz
(D ors
orsanya
@ altt
(D gyrij
(D biztosft altt
Jelzanya
kzikerk sapkja
rugs altt
rgzftcsavar
Alkalmazs
A Hydrolux ateresztszelep megakadlyozza a
szlli'tsl nyoms nem ki'vnatosan magas rtkre
emelkedst s fenntartja a szlli'tsi ramot.
Gzuzemfl keringetses fdtsek esetn biztosi'tja a
kering vi'z minimalis mennyisgt.
Beszerels
A beszerels a helyzettl fggetlenl lehetsges.
A jobb leolvashatsag rdekben azonban az
ateresztszelepet lehetleg fOgglegesen, azaz a
kzikerk sapkjval felfel kell beszerelni. Ogyeljen
az tfolys irnyra! A vezris az armaturn bell
tortnik. Kls vezrlovezetkek nem sziiksgesek.
Az ateresztszelep hatsnak javrtsa rdekben a
megkerlvezeteket az ramls szempontjbl
kedvezen, ill. alacsony nyomsvesztesggel kell
kivezetnl, azaz a vezetk legyen lehetleg rvid,
nagyvonalan mretezett s ne legyenek benne
elkerlhet egyedi ellenllsok.
Beili'tis
Kuciste
Tanjur
Opruga za potrebnu vrijednost
Gomji dio
Vreteno
Matica vretena
Ploca
0-prsten
Sigumosna ploca
Pokazna matica
Kapa rucnog kotaca
Opruzni prsten
Pricvrsni vijak
Pritnjena
Hydrolux-poplavni ventil sprjecava nezeljeno visoki
porast vislne dizanja i odrzava stmju dizanja.
Kod obilaznog plinsko-vodenog grijanja se osigurava
minimaina kolicina obilazne vode.
Ugradnja
Ugradnja je u nacelu moguca neovisno od polozaja.
Zbog boljeg ocitavanja bi trebao preplavni ventil po
mogucnosti biti vertikaino ugraden, tj. s kapom
rucnog kotaca prema gore.
Paziti na smjer protoka. Upravljanje se odvija unutar
armature. Ekstern! upravljacki vodovi nisu potrebni.
Za poboljsanje djelovanja preplavnog ventila izvodi
se Bypas vod povoljno prema strujl odnosno sa
niskim gubitkom tIaka, tj. sto je moguce krace,
dalekosezno dimenzioniran i bez pojedinacnih
otpora koji se mogu sprijeciti.
Namjestanje
A HEIMEIER Hydrolux ateresztszelepet gyrilag

kiigazitottuk s 200 mbar nyitsl nyomsra (2 m
vizoszlopmagassg) elre beili'tottuk,
Ha szuksgess vlik az elzetes bellits
megvltoztatsa, ahhoz elszr meg kell oldani a
rgzitcsavart. Ezutn lehet a nyitsi nyomst a
kzikerk sapkjnak elforditsval 50 s 500 mbar
kztt fokozatmentesen vltoztatni. A kfvnt rtk
kzvetlenl a kzikerk sapkjnak skljn
olvashato le. Bellitsi diagramok nem szuksgesek.
A rgzilcsavarral lehet megakadlyozni a vlasztott
pozfcio vletlen tllitst.
HEIMEIER Hydrolux preplavni ventil je namjesten

od strane tvomice i prethodno namjesten na Hak
otvaranja od 200 mbar (2 m WS).
Ukoliko je Izmjena prethodnog namjestanja ipak
potrebna, tada se najprije popusta pricvrsni vijak.
Nakon toga se moze otvomi tiak potisnuti
okretanjem kape rucnog kotaca bezstupnjevano u
podrucje izmedu 50 mbara i 500 mbara. Zeljena
vrijednost se pri tome moze direktno ocitati na
Ijestvici kape rucnog kotaca. Dijagrami namjestanja
nisu potrebni.
Fenntartjuk a mszaki vltoztatsok jogt.
Zadrzana prava na tehnicke izmjene.
KAupo;
AioKo<;
Etanjpio njpnoiK H K npoKaflopiopvti; ^niff,
AvoiTpijpa
AipaKTOQpEOnEipdHia
riEpiKdxAio aipdiaoii
POEAO
lTpoyyuAd(;5oKTuAio<;(aiopii<; "O"
PoEia ooipoXEioi;
riEpiKoxAio EVSEIÊMV
KdAuppa pE xtipoTpoxd
Iuv6ETiipio<; 5oKiOAiO(;
Bida OKivi]ionoi(ion<;
xpiian
H poApido unEpXEJAiorii; Hydrolux napEpnodiÊi niv ot avEniBiipnro Pa6pd
alienor) lou 0(101; iijq H'EOIK ipoipoddTqoiic; KOI fpovriÊi yia ii)v Tijpiion
niq TpoîoooiiKije; poii(;.
ITK; BEppdvoELc; KUKAIIHIOTOC; OEpiou-vcpou npoKurati côoipdAiori in;
EAdxioiJK noodiritoc; lou vspoii lou KUKAiipoioi;.
ZuvapiioAvnon
H oiJvoppoAdyi)ri Eivai KOTO KOVOVO Suvaijj avt^dptiiTa ond rov idno
Efoppoyij; VY; OUOKEUIK-
Tio Tiiv KoAuiEpr] ovdyvfflor] npHEi vo EipoppooTti n aAido unEpxtiAioiK

KOtd SuVaTOTIlTO OE KOBEIII BEOTI, dnAolj PE lO KOAoppO pE lOV
XEipoipoxd npo(;Ta dvw. i i o i E npoooxij <m\ iEeuvoi) rric; poiiq, H

puSpion npoKumEi EVTd<; TOU opydvou. EâiEpiKoi puBpioiiKoi oyayoi 6EV
Eivoi onapainiToi. Tio in EAiiowi) VK anoTEAEopaiiKdiriTO<; TII(; paApia<;
unEpxEiAioiii; npiEi vo Eipoppooiei o oycoydt; pndi-noc; KOTO EUvoiKd (*;
npo<; H] porj rpdno KOI pc dripioupyia pmpv ontiAciuv niEoiK, driAadi) pE
piKpd piJKoc;, pE unppETpi] diooraoioAdyrion KOI xnpii; pEpovoipEVEi;
oviioidoEK;, nou pnopouv vo anoîcuxflouv,
PuMioii
H PoAfidfl uncpxElAioiK Hydtolui TTK HEIMEIER civoi ijdt) opioBETpptvri KOI
npoppu9piopcvii OE pio niEon ovoiypaioq 200 rJEoi (2 pipo onjArii;
vcpoO). ZE nEpinroioi), Kord irjv onoia civai nopd IOUTO ovoyKoio pio
pciotponii Trji; npoppuBpioi)!;, npnci npip va ÊPidaiBci r) fido
OKivi)ionoiiioii<;. AKOAOUBUX; pnopci vo pcioTponri OKAIPOKBIO ii nicon
ovoiypoioc; pou nEpiorpoipiK lou KoAOppotoi; pE lov xcipoipoxd, OTOV
Topo pcTO^P 50 rjcoi KOI 500 ijdi. H cKdoroTC ovoyraio Tipii pnopci vo
ovayvMiEi oiriv iiAipoKo cni lou KoAppparoi; pc lOv xcipotpoxd,
Aloypdppoio puBpioi]!; 6V civoi ovoyKoio. H EniAEypn] puflpioiiKrj BEOI)
npREi vo oiyoupcuBd OKOAOUBOX; Koid aUkfn\i; pEToppiiBpioi)!;.
Nakon toga se izabrana pozicija protiv

nekontroliranog premjestaja osigurava pomocu
pricvrsnog vijka.
AioTTipopE TO diKoiupo EKTAEOIK lEXviKii) oAAoyuv
THEODOR HEIMEIER METALLWERK G M 6 H & CO. KG D-59592 ERWITTE TEL. -h49 (0)2943 8 9 1 - O FAX +49 {0)2943 8 9 1 - 100 - VWWi'.HEiMEIERCOM
Heimeier
^m&s^s^mmm^^^mmme^^m^^sxiims^ms
( T ) Hydrolux MJE:t-/^-7P-/t;|xyil^g^fXUT^-2>iSlnfii^#^
MSJ) Hydrolux Yfirstreymisventill (Utstreymisventill) fyrir mismunaf:rysting me stillimerkjum, sem lesast beint
îîi^R^mi^mm
Uppsetningar- og
starfrksluleldbeiningar
L^^slng
L;jgg!(A)SfclSStai;^(B)
Yfirstreymisventill, sem styrist af

mismunat)rystingi og starfar tilutfallslega, fyrir
i'sefningu i heitavatns-pumpuhitunarkerfi.
Hyiki r ryfriu rausteypustali.
Maslikvari, sem lesa m beint af.
Haesta viobragosnkvmni i gegnum strgera
inniliggjandi mlipunktfjoSur r ryafri'u stall,
t'repalaus stilling er trygg gegn vikomandi
tilfrslu.
litfasrslur f fivermlum DN 20 -32.
Tengingar vid inngang me innanskrfugangi;
via tgang me innanskrfunangi ()e3a
flatfittancll skrfutenging (B).
Hylkl
gn
Diskur
Maelipunktfjaur
Efri hluti
Snlda (Mndull.s)
^>:/tiS7KRSgff5tW-.itffl(0. ibWftft
rtgiiicfaL;t:*c5-y--i'xxx>u;<iiiK
ja/'s :t~ IC J ; ^ g t i S S / j : S ! .
DN 20 - 32(Ciiai,
:x\i>\^)l-)-y\oSU>^
y>^
Iftoiffi*
$:taU
Snasidur
Ski'fa
O-Hringur
ryggisskffa
Mlikvaroaro
Handhjlhetta
Hleypihringur
Festingarskrfa
Notkun
Hydrolux-yfirstreymisventillinn hindrar oskilega
auknun vanfsflutnings og held-ur flutningsstraumnum f gangi. Minnsta vatnsmagni i
hringrs er tryggt tij gas-kyntum hringrasarvatnshitakerfum.
7KBA<{Sffsnst.
fsetning
S*e*)lcl i'coj; 5/j:ST-feIi!#lt C i * '
;i^7'iT*^;fc'itSilic, /\>K;um+-v7:/
*:^(ci]ij-T5;u#(tS;-r. ynm.'nmz'i.m
L.T<aFi\ sijwigs4'T-?7ton*-r.
ÎtrraiESli^ST-r.
^t-zt-^P-
icia, a i * 5 m y s < , ,^>-5:;c*

J;pCb*-r.
isetningin er almennt se mguleg h

stellingu ventils. Til aS lesa betur mlikvaroa
tti heizt a setja ofstreymisventilinn lrett i,
f).e. me3 handhjol-fiettu upp vis. Athugi
gegnumstraumstt. St^rlngin sr staS inn i
tbOnainum. Styrisleislur utan fr eru ekki
nausynlegar. Til pess a bseta virkni
yfirstreymisventllsins, verur a leggja
framhjaleisluna hagkvmt fyrir strauminn, svo
sem minnst tap verl (jrystingi, p.e. eins stutt
og tigt er, ngu vfa og n einstaka vinms,
sem er umflyjanlegt.
Stilling
HEIMEIER Hydrolux
^-I\-Va-lMV:f\t.
I200 mbarraPff :^ i o T l ^ s - r .
miiS:ro^M<!E:'Siieii- S f $ t a
f 7 : / $ I s ] - r < t , 50mbari500 mbariroral
TgE&lcrlQJ:#]^^XSCiST**-r.
# a - r ^ ( i l l , /N>h';K4^-v>^@SU
l^FST-r. SfKL.:7t^v->3>li.
SoT
'. 11fi1h U S
HEIMEIER-yfirstreymIsvenfillInn er innstilltur
a verksmiju hlfu og stilltur til a byrja me
200 mbar (2 m vatnssla) oppnunar|3rysting.
Ef breyting a byrjun-arstillingunni er samt
nausynleg, verur p fyrst a losa
festingarskrfuna. Eftir pa er hgt a fra til
oppnunarpr^stinginn brepalaust sviinu milli
50 mbar og 500 mbar me pvi a sna
handhjlhettunni. skilega gildi (merki) er
me bessu mti hgt a lesa beint
mlikvaroa handhjlhettunnar. Stillingarlinurit
eru ekki nausynleg. Tryggja verur hina
tvldu stu sian gegn vlljandi frslu me
festingarskrfunni.
Tknilegar breytingar skildar
t.
THEODOR HEIMEIER METALLWERK GM8H & CO. KG D-59592 ERWITTE TEL. +49 (0)2943 891- 0 FAX +49 (0)2943 891- 100 WWW.HEIMEIER.COM
mm
Flexcon expansion vessels for central heating installations and

cooling installations, low pressure (3 and 5 bar)
Type
Initial
pressure
in
...
0A
U-
MM
Dimensions
inmnn
bar
0A|
|0C
kg
bar
Rexcon
0.5
194
152
3/4"
1.1
26021
3/4"
1.6
26041
flli~
"1
Rexcon
0.5
194 257
Rexcon
0.5
245 286
Connection Weigtit Max.

Code
nnale
working number
thread
pressure
381
381
Rexcon 12
Rexcon ,12
0.5
1.0
245
245
Rexcon 18
Rexcon 18
0.5
1.0
286 409
286 409
Rexcon - 25
Rexcon 25
0.5
1.0
327 419
327 419
3/4"
2.2
26085
3/4"
3/4"
2.7
2.7
3
3
26125
26126
3/4"
3.7
3.7
26185
26186
4.5
4.5
26255
26256
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
"^
'*?i il'^g'--^-. . 1 1 ^
3
1
II
1 i<
1 J H H i
o
s
m1r
Rexcon 35
Rexcon 35
Rexcon 35
0.5
1.0
1.5
397 408 263

397 408 263
397 408 263
Rexcon 50
Rexcon 50
Rexcon 50
0.5
1.0
1.5
397 551 263

397 551 263
397 551 263
3/4"
Rexcon 80
Rexcon 80
Rexcon 80
0.5
1.0
1.5
519 528 360

519 528 360
519 528 360
'înl
26355 / .
26356
26357
6.5
6.5
6.5
3
3
3
14.1
14.1
14.1
3
3
3
26505
26506
26507
1"
1"
1"
20.2
20.2
20.2
3
3
3
26805
26806
26807
1"
1"
1"
26 3
26.3
26.3
3
3
3
3/4'
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
^^4#î'V3B-T>VVal^^^^^îSi^^
-^-^
K
0A
Rexcon 110
Rexcon 110
Rexcon 110
05
1.0
1.5
519 696 360

519 696 360
519 696 360
\&^
, , J>'i'^
1 'DJ-'
'
11
TV 1
jf
1 ; J
1.6
'
^^
Fiamco
IxiirUi lfJ3 i
^~^
contents
< ^
U
section 8 I HVAC valves and accessories
171
econ d o u b l e regulating
and c o m m i s s i o n i n g valves
regula type
with PTFE valve seal
DN 20 to DN 50
with screwed-in
bonnet
flanged ends t o D I N PN 16
face to face to DIN 3202-F1
with 2 measuring nipples: fig. 2620
w
DN 65 to DN 200 with
bolted bonnet
application:
features:
Regula double regulating andcommissioning valves are applied in central heating

pipe systems in order to establish a precise distribution and a hydraulic balance
of the water in the installation.
They can be mounted in the supply pipe as well as in the return pipe.
continuously variable presetting* always remains readable,
irregardless of the valve position
the preset value is maintained during operation of the valve
more operation comfort in measuring the differential pressures
(measuring nipples can be found at the handwheel cover side)
maintenance-free stem valve with two 0-rings
low flow resistance because of oblique stem construction
manual up to and including DN 50, larger sizes with the help of an
included Allen key.
pressureftemperature rating;
materials:
dimensions (mm|;
DN 20 to DN 50
DN 65 to DN 200
16bar-150C
part
material according to DIN
Ws.no.
body and bonnet

stem < DN 50
> DN 65
disc
measuring nipples
handwheel
cast iron
GG-25
brass (dezincification resistant
bronze Rg 5
G-CuSn5ZnPb
PTFE
brass Ms 58 CuZn39Pb3
plastic, black
0.6025
DN
H max.
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
105
115
140
150
165
185
200
220
250
285
340
150
160
180
200
230
290
310
350
400
480
600
115
119
147
154
166
188
203
232
275
277
470
2.1096.01
2.0401
W^
contents
<-^
cCTOiiOS i O
section 9 I strainers
181
ecofi super stratners

cast iron
BSPP threaded ends: fig. 1010
flanged ends to DIN PN 16: fig. 1019
fig. 1010
DN > 65 (2V2") with cover
capacity of dirt:
pressure/temperature rating:
materiaJs:
Scale and dirt in piping systems cause endless trouble and serious damage to
pipeline equipment. Econ strainers have an extra large screen area within the
body of the strainer assuring free flow of fluid with minimal pressure loss. There
is a large pocket for accumulated sediment (which should be removed at regular
intervals).
fig. 1010: max. 10 bar-200 C
fig. 1019: max. 16bar-120C
max. 13bar-200C
part
material according to DIN
Ws.no.
body
screen
cast iron
nickel
stainless steel
brass Ms 58
cast iron
GG-25
0.6025
X5CrNil8 10
CuZn39Pb3
GG-25
1.4301
2.0401
0.6025
9. 1010
fig. 1019
fig- 1010
fig- 1019
cap
cover
scree perforations:
other types available:
on request;
dimenstns
0.6 mm
nodular cast iron PN 25: fig. 1020
cap/cover with connection for drain or blowdown
screen with other perforations
screen of other materials
with NPT threaded ends
flanged ends to other standards
with permanent magnet
'/."
%
'h"
^h"
1 "
TATA"
2 "
2V2"
3 "
fjg 1019
DN 15 to DN 200
fie . 1019
fig. 1010
(mm):
fig. 1010
2" to 3"
fig. 1019
wt
(kg)
72
72
46
46
0.3
0.3
50 x 18
50 X 18
15
20
25
32
40
85
100
120
140
160
53
63
74
88
98
0.5
0.8
1.1
1.9
2.5
57x23
69x28
83 x 3 6
99x42
115 X 50
130
150
160
180
200
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
205
245
265
140
170
185
6.1
8.5
12
154 X 60
187x76
201 X 83
230
290
310
350
400
DN
screen
length/diam.
wt
(kg)
95
105
115
140
150
90
100
115
125
150
3
4
5
7
9
165
185
200
220
250
160
180
215
235
275
12
16
21
30
43
480 285
600 340
305
390
61
121
larger sizes on request

spare screens are normally available ex-stock
screen
length/diam.
56 X
68 X
82 X
98 X
114X
23
28
36
42
50
1 1 9 x 61.5
134 X 78.5
149 X 89.5
169x109.5
199x137.5
224x160
284x210
TT
System
Outlet tlange
Fan:
Make
Type
Arquantity
Static pressure
Fan speed
Power consurnpticin
hpeilof Made angle
277
217
SAIOR
GTLB-1-031-1-21-00
m3/hr
Pa
rpm
kW
dgr
1420
1050
1700
0,89
Eiectric motor:
Make
Type
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
Mounting arrangement
Protection class
Isolation class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type NE
ReraarC
Weigtit witfiout E-motor
Weight with E-motor
-i
Topview
247
257
Ltfl-ftand nrsm
Mnnd Iran cH skU
R9<-lian) n n b i
( k m frm a m sUd
t:
ABB
M2AAM 90S
3x440-60
1,3
1700
25
5
90
V/Hz
kW
rpm
A
A
ED
55
F
(P)
flSO)
kg
J3_
O"
^w"'^
27IC
NDTt dmenslans of fan citange In otter posllian
Side view
(Motor side)
Front view
Side view
(Air intal<e side)
Alteration
code
Fonul
A3
RijEdtan
K M of Atferaflon
(Alteratlcn orty by CAB
DEs^na*
AvM
Nang
Nans
Date
DesQner
I DEsJgn date
1HI4-'05 I
Sdb|Bj
:JNK5SY
Scale
SmaJlT.
;JU 040409-040412
Urtb
:M
rtrto"
Date
Ccntroflef
Cntrtl (bte
Atkraftn
jaefstenr.
: 120.0S055 - 05
Drart^lir.
;12005055-301
TIte:
Direct-driven, single-inlet centrifugal tan E-1

Sanitary Type 'GTLB-1-(gi-1-21-00' (LGO)
MEINEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING B V
ISO 9001
r*g}ttmd by
B-0-
AIR CONDITIONING
GAS, WATER AND SANITARY SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
MECHANICAL VENTILATION
CENTRAL HEATING
COOLING AND REFRIGERATION
ZUIDWENK45 P.O. BOX 9 - 3750GASPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-2992500 - Fax:+31-33-2992599 e-mail: lnfo@helnenhopnian.com - httpr/Awww.helnenhopman.com
Ploldafe :
physical data
820 m3/tir
375 Pa
Airquanfify
Static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
lôtor power
Iîotor speed
Enclosure class, motor
Insulation class, motor
lâx. temp.
Weigtit
Noise level to enviroment (Lp*)
Noise level to enviroment (LJ
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Design date
Ming SY
Subject
Suêct nr.
Title
AvM
: i Z 040A09 - 040412
11-04-'05
Scale
IMs
:inm
Controller
V/Hz
A
403 W
3230 rpm
P
F
55 "C
6.5 .kg
dB(A)
(JB(A)
61
Date
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-302
Cenfrifugai duct fan (in-line) E-2 Laundry S Drying roofi]

Type ^^RS Û"
(tot)
Name
Name
Gate
Designer
Kind of Alteration
(Alteration only by CAD)
Designer
230/60
1.73
0
ISO
9001
registered by
'^LT'
/ \
AIR CONDITIONING
/
1
FIRE PROTECTION
-JTCENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - http://www.heinenhopman.com
-JT-
Plot date
Physical data
710 m3/tir
Airquanfify
Static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor ppvyer
Mptpr speed
Insulation class motor
Max. temp.
Weight
Noise, level fp enyirpment. .(L,*)
Noise ievel to enviroment (UiJ
235 Pa
230/60 V/HIz
.86
2
329
rpm
IP"
70
"C
kg:;:::::;;;:;;
dB(A)
55 dB() otj'
"5
OE
LH
OO
L_n
Alteration
code
m
e-
Format
Kind of Alteration
Desgner
AvM
A4
Subject
Subject nr.
Projection
Title:
Ln
c\j
0-
LH
G-
Name
Date
Controller
Name
Date
Designer
Design date
: Ming SY
: I Z 040409 - 0^0412
11-04-'05
Scale :
Units : m
Control date
Controller
Alteratrai
Reference rr.
-. 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-303
Centrifugal duci fan (in-line) E-] Hospital & Ambulance

Type ^^RS 2W
0
ISO 9001
registered by
MEINEN
& HOPMAN ENGINEERING
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK45 P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Plot date
X
o
IT)
Ol
^:_;NL^.::XI^'._^
V-ITL 2 x 1 8 W i r *
1500
INSPECTION DOOR
(500x500)
CABLE GLAND-
DELIVERY YARD
4J
(Location holes etc to be

decided by yard
Holes not predrilled)
1500
Pos 1: V-ADL-S canopy SS welded

dim: 1500x950x600 m m / 200 mm high at front side
450x655x600 mm added for fan
Canopy: 1420 m 3 / h - 100 Pa

3 pc. Fecon filters 450x400x36 mm
1 pc. V-ITL Lighting 2x18 W 1x220V-60Hz
1 pc. Removable greaspan
Pos 2: Exhaustfan E - 4
type: TEA 0 1 - 2 8 0 - 4
- Capacity: 1420 m 3 / h - 626 Pa
- 3x440V-60Hz
/
1,4kW
Format
A4r
Designer
AvM
Design date i_04-'0f
Controller
Subject
:Jinling SY
Scale :1:20
Subject nr. :JLZ 040409 - 04041^ Units :mm
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.: 120.05.055 - 05
Drowing nr. : 12005055-304
Projection Title
Exhausthood V-ADL-S with built in fan

E-4 type TEA 01-280-4 serving Galley
MEINEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING BV / \ _
ISO 9001
registered by
AIR CONDITIONING
/
1
FIRE PROTECTION
-TILCENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS
-TU
Plot date
Physical data
515 m3/hr
Airquantity
static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor power
Motor speed
Insulafipn class, motor
Max, temp.
300 Pa
230/60 V / H z "
:87
IP "
70
Weight
'5
Noise ieyel to enyirpment (ifi)

Noise level to enviroment (ij
OO
vD
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
m
0-
Sulycl
Subject nr.
Title
56
AvM
Ming SY
C
kg;:::::::::;::
dB(A)
dB() (tot)'
CD
CD
CD
-0-
Name
Date
Designer
Kind of Alteration
(Alteration only by CAO)
Designer
2 W...
331' rpm
Design date
: I Z 040409 - 040412
11-04-'05
Scale
Units : mm
Controller
Name
Date
Controller
Control dale
Reference nr. : 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-305
Centrifugal ducf fan (in-line) E-5 Offs mess & day room
Type "RS 200L"
MEINEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING

BV
AIR CONDITIONING
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99
"LT"
Alteration
0
ISO 9001
registered by
/ \
^~\Z,
_n_
-TL-
/
1
FIRE PROTECTION
- 3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS
- e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - http://www.heinenhopman.com
Plot date
Physical data
1031
AirquanfitY,
Static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor .ppvyer
Mptpr speed
Enclosure, class, motor
Insulation class,, .motor
Max, temp.
Weight
Noi.se.level .to. .enyirgment. .(Lp*)
Noise level to enviroment (UA)
m3/tir
Pa
V/Hz
A
300
230/60
1.73
403
323
W.'.
rpm
IP"
55
6.'5
C
kg:::::;;;:::::
dB(A)
61 am
(tot)'
<CM]
<j-
-0-
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
i_n
LTl
m
0-
Kind of Alteration
Designer
AvM
Design date
11-O4-'0S
Sutyct
: Jnling SY
Sce
Subject nr.
: i Z 040409 - 040412
Uiits
Title :
Name
Date
Controller
Name
Date
Designer
(Alferafion only by CAD)
: mm
Cmtrol date
Controller
Alteration
Reference nr.
; 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-306
Centrifugal duct fan (in-line) E-6 Crew's mess & day roc^,so
Type ''RS 3R"
9001
^glstered by
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
CENTRAL HEATING
FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK 45 P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Plot date
Physical data
560 m3/tir
280 Pa
AirquanNty
Stafic pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Hotor power
Motor speed
lâx. temp.
Weigtit
Noise level to enviroment (L<u)
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Sutject
Sutiect nr.
Title
Avt^
Design date
Jrting SY
: XZ 04QA09 - 040412
11-04-'05
Scale
Units
; mm
V/Hz
A
200 W
3310 rpm
IP
F
70 C
5 .kg
56
Name
Date
Designer
Kind of Alteration
Designer
230/60
0.87
dB(A)
dB(A)
Name
Date
Controller
Control date
Contrller
(tot)
Alteration
Reference nr.
. 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr
:12005055-307
ISO 9001
Centrifugal duci fan (in-iine) E-7 Dry prov & RefMacfi rn" registered
by
Type ^^RS 2QQL^^
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - http:y/www.heinenhopman.com
Plot date
physical data
245 m3/hr
175 Pa
Airquantity
Static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor power
Motor speed
Max. temp.
Weigtit
Noise level to enviroment (LPA)
I1
V/Hz
036 A
81 W
3270 rpm
IP
B
65 C
3 .kg
51
dB(A)
dB(A)
(tot)
i.. N
^
1
,1
230/60
1 ^
/ ^
OB
1
m
m
1
1
CD
vD
o
o
0-
''
1'
22
16 4
208
-^
Alteration
code
Fonnat
A4
Projection
Kind of Alteration
Designer
Subject
Design date
Ming SY
Siiiject nr.
Title
AvM
Name
Name
Date
Designer
: AZ 040409 - 040412
11-04-'05
Scale
Units
: mm
Controller
Date
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawfig nr.
: 12005055-308
Cenfrifugai ducf fan (in-line) E-8 Recreation

Type;RS160"
0
ISO
9001
registered by
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
CENTRAL HEATING
FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK45
P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - http://www.heJnenhopman.com
Plot date
Physical data
601 m3/tir
245 Pa
AirquanNfy
Static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor power
Motor speed
Max. temp.
Weigtit
Noise level to enviroment (Lp)
Noise level to enviroment (LJ
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Designer
Subject nr.
Title
AvM
Design date
Ming SY
: i Z Q4Q409 - 040412
11-04-'05
Scale
Units
iinni
V/Hz
A
2 W
3310 rpm
IP
F
70 C
5 .kg
56
dB(A)
dB(A)
Date
Controller
Control date
Controller
(tot)
Name
Name
Date
Designer
Kind of Alteration
(AtferaHon only by CAO)
Subject
230/60
.87
Alteration
Reference nr,
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-309
Cenfrifugai duci fan (in-line) E-9 Air con room

Type ^^RS 2QQL"
0
ISO
9001
registered by

AIR CONDITIONING
CENTRAL HEATING

FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK45 P.O. BOX 9 3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS

Plot date
System
240
E-10
Fan:
Make
..Type
Airquantity
Static pressure
Fan speed
Power consumpfion
Impeller blade angle
SALOR
VM31-10-2
KO
290
3375
0.3
5
m3/hr
Pa
"
rpm
kW
grd
Elecfric motor:
Make
ABB
M2VA63
B
Jm
Current supply
3x440-60
Motor power
0.32
Motor speed
3375
Nominal current
0.67
StaftThg current
3.015
Frame size
63
63
Protection class
55
Isolation class
F
Bearing type DE
6202-2Z/C3
Bearing type NE
6202-2Z/C3
Remark
INCLUDING DRAIN
Weight wittiout E-motor: 8,5
Weight with E-motor
14
V7HZ
kW
rpm
(iC)
(iPI
(ISO)
.kg...
kg
For a l l frame s i z e s
HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION
INCLUDING:
- T W O FLEXIBLES
- DRAINAGE CONNECTION
NOTE:
Dimension X depends on the make
and type of motor
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Name
Kind of Alteration
Designer
AvM
Design date
11-04-'05
Subject
: Jinling SY
Scale
Subject nr.
: JLZ 040409 - 040412
Units
Title :
Name
Date
Designer
lAlteration only by CADI
Control date
Controller
: mm
Date
Controller
Alteration
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 120050SS-310
AXIAL FLOW FAN E-10 C02 room

TYPE "VM31-10-2"
ISO
9001
registered by

AiR CONDiTiONfNG
MECHANICAL VENTIUVTiON
CENTRAL HEATING

FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK 45
P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mall: info@helnenhopman.com - http://www.helnenhopman.com
Plot date
Make
Type
Airquantify
Static pressure
Fan spieed
Power Cnsumpfnn
Impeilpr blade angle
196
142
IPiT
System
Fan:
Outlet flange
SALOR
GTLF-1-020-8
1303
350
1695
m3/frr
Pa
rpm
kW
Electric motor:
Make
Type
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
Protection class
Isolalion class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type NE
Rernari
Weight wittiout E-motor
W e ^ t witti E-motor
ffi
196
bV
Topview
166
175
ABB
71
V/H2
kW
rpm
A
A
(ED
55
F
(P)
IBO)
0,37
1695
Eex-iJe-B-T3
kg
270"
Left-fiard v'SJon
htand Inn M c stU
tt^-tom version
Mival Irm it*n stk)
Itj^
\
NOTE: dmensions of fan cfiange in other position
Side view
(Iôtor side)
Front view
Side view
(Air intake side)
Alteration
code
Fonnal
A3
Projection
Kind of Alteraticn
lAlterallon orty by CAD
Designef
AvM
Name
Dale
Designer
| Design date
Sitject
tJWhgSY
1W-'05 I
Scale :
Sitject rr.
; U Oîm - 0Wi12
IHs
Tte:
lânie
Cmlrd dale
CmtroCer
Date
Controller
Alteralion
Rrferancenr,
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawhgtr.
! 12005055-311
Direct-driven, single-inlet centrifugal fan, -11

Paint store Type "GTLF-1-02Q-8" (RD90)
ISO 9 0 0 1
n^9\.*nd by

AIR CONDITIONING
MECHANICAL VENTIUTION
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
COOUNG AND REFRIGERATION
Phone: +31-33-299 25 00 - Fax: +31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@helnenhopinan.com - hHpi^nvw.helnenhopm8n.com
I
Hol dale :
Sysfem
: E-12
Fan:
SALOR
VM31-1-2
UOO
Airquantify
Static pressure
: 420
Fan's'peed''2Z'I'Z I l Z r i ' l i ^ O ^ ^
Power consumption
: 0,46
Impeiier blacie angle
: "i'3
Make
m3/'hr
Pa;;;;;
rpm'
kW
grd
Electric motor:
Make
lype
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
IHounting arrangementProtection class
Isolation class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type N
Remark
Weight without E-motor;
Weight with E-mtor
ABB
'M2V7i A
3xU-6
V/Hz
kW
rpm
A
A
(IEC)'
0.5
34.5
1.5
5,775
7I
B3
(ipy
55
F
i623-2Z/C3
(isor
6203-2Z/C3
iNCLiNG DRAIN
8,5
14
kg
For all frame sizes

INCLUDING:
- TWO FLEXIBLES
NOTE:
and type of motor
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Designer
AvM
Design date
in:
11-04
Subject
: Jinling SY
Scale
Subject nr.
: JLZ 0^,0409 - 040/.12
Units
"
Name
Name
Date
Designr
Kind of Alteration
: mm
Control date
Controller
Date
Controller
Alteration
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-312
AXIAL FLOW FAN E-12 Passageway in Ace

TYPE "VM31-10-2"
ISO 9001
registered by

AIR CONDITIONING
CENTRAL HEATING

FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9
3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@helnenhopman.com - http://www.helnenhopman.com
Plot date
System
240
E-13
Fan:
Make
SALOR
VM31-10-2
1500
.lype
Airquantify
Static pressure
Fan speed
Power consumption
m3/hr
Pa
rpm
kW
grd
390
3i05
0.42
11
Electric motor:
Make
ABB
Im
Current
M2VA71 A
3x440-60
supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
Protection class
Isolation class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type NE
V/Hz
kW
rpm
A
A
0.5
3405
1.05
5,775
(lECl
71A
B3
55
F
(iPI
(ISO)
fieii'l^
6203-2Z/C3
6203-2Z/C3
INCLUDING DRAIN

Weight with E-motor
8,5
14
kg
kg
For all frame sizes

INCLUDING:
- TWO FLEXIBLES
NOTE:
and type of motor
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Designer
AvM
I Design date
11-04-'05 I
Subject
: Jinling SY
Scale
Subject nr.
: JLZ 040409 - 040412
Units
Title :
Name
Name
Date
Designer
Kind of Alteration
(Alteration only by CADI
Controller
: mm
Date
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-313
AXIAL FLOW FAN E-13 Workshop

TYPE "VM31-1-2"
ISO 9001
registered by

AiR CONDITIONING
IMECHANICAL VENTILATION
CENTRAL HEATING
GAS, WATER AND SANITARY SYSTEIMS

FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK45 - P.O. BOX 9 3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS

Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mall: info@heinenhopman.com - http://www.heinenhopman.com
Plot date
Physical data
Airquantity
Static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor power
Motor speed
Max. temp.
Weight
Noise level to enviromenl (L^*)
Noise level to enviroment ( L J
nn
m
250 m3/tir
180 Pa
230/60
0.36
V/Hz
A
81 W
3270 rpm
IP
B
65 C
3 kg...
dB(A)
51 dB(A)
(tot)
CI?
-0-
22
Alteration
code
Fomiat
A4
Projection
Kind of Alteration
Name
Gate
Designer
Designer
Sutject
Subject T.
Title:
Design date
AvM
Jnling SY
: I Z 040409 - 040412
11-04-'05
Scale
Units
Controller
Reference nr,
Drawing nr.
Name
Date
Controller
Control date
: 120.05.055 - 058
: 12005055-314
Centrifugal duct fan (in-line) E-14 Sauna

TypeTC160^'
Alteration
0
ISO 9001
registered by
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: info(gheinenhopman.com - http://www.heinenhopman.com
Plot date
TT
System
So
Outlet flange
T78
SALOR
Make
Type
Airquantity
Static pressire
Fan speed
Power consunplion
Hipettor blade angle
239
179
??
GTLF-1-025-1--B
3300
550
m3/tr
Pa
rpm
kW
dgr
1710
Electric motor:
ii
n
ffl ?S
239
Topview
ABB
Make
Type
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
l*unting arrangement
Protection class
Isolation class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type NE
Remark
Weight with E-motor
3x440-60
1,75
1710
0,75
V/HZ
kW
rpm
A
A
90L
(lEO
55
F
HP)
IISO)
I?
kg
209
218
O*
90"
2W
^ ^ ^
<8
Left-hard versiDn
(viewed fron [ ^ i k U
MeymllrmHn tkH
NOTE: dtnensicns cf fan change In other pcsion
Side view
(Motor side)
Front view
Side view
(Air intake side)
AlteraNon
code
FfflBl
A3
Ri|edfen
Kind cf Attersticn
lAltersllcn only by CAD)
TSS"
AvM
Design [fate
SllCt
:Jlnlii9SY
Subject IT.
;JUWW09-WW12
mie:
Name
Nane
Date
Designer
im-'OS I IJr^
Sde
j UHts
;im
Date
ControHer
xtt date
ftteateir.
l>awh|[r,
Alhration
: 120,05.055 - 05
!12005D55-315
rect-driven, singleHnlet centrifugal tan, E-15

Seperator rm Type 'GTLF-1-025-1-B' (RD90)

AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE N E T H E R U N D S
Phone: i'31-33-299 25 00 - Fax: +31-33-299 25 99 - e-mall; lnfo@heinenhapman.com http://www.heinenhopman.com
&
Mie
tjO
Outlet flange
EB
219
159
J]|!
Uli
System
Tin-
M6
Make
Type
Airi^tity
Static pressure
Fan speed
Power consumption
tnpellDr blade angle
SALOR
GTLF-1-022-1
1033
412
1695
nd/tr
Pa
gr
b^^
Electric motor:
219
Topview
189
199
Make
Type
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
frame size
Mountirg arrangement
Protecttan class
Isolation class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type NE
Remark
Weigtit witti E-motar
ABB
3x440-60
0,37
1695
71
55
F
(ISO)
iL
0-
90*
270*
g>l
(viewed Inn ( t ^ f t
Ivkwed t m itOc ttU
V/Hz
kW
rpm
A
A
OED
/NTT
1)
NOTE' dinenslcns di fan dcnge In ottier positian
Side view
(Air intake side)
Front view
Side view
(Motor side)
Alteration
code
Fortet
A3
f^tlfEdin
Kind of Alteration
(Alteranon orty tiy CAO
DEs^ner
AvM
Name
Date
Kame
Designer
D^TStB
11-04-0
' 5 I rtrF
Oxtni date
Alhratb)
Sitjict
.-JnliigSY
Scale
R*retBrr.
: 120.05.055 - OM
SilJEtt ir.
! Xl 0404Q9 - 1X0412
His -.m
Drarhitr.
; 12005055-3*
THe:
Date
Confrolter
Direct-driven, single-inlet centrfugal fan

Store Type 'GTLF-1-022-r aG90)
S^
AIR CONOmONING
GAS, WATER AND SANrTARY SYSTEI/IS
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
Phone: +31-33-299 25 0 0 - Fax: +31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfb@helnnhapman.coin - http:/Avww.helnanhopman.coin
M*;
System
E-17
Fan:
Make
SALOR
VM40-1-2
Type
m3/hr
Pa"
rpm
2650
Airquantity
Sfafic pressure
Fan speed
Power consuriipFion
605
3^20
1.15
9
kw;;
grd
Eiecfric motor:
Make
lype
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nniinai current
Starting current
Frame size
Protection class
Isolation class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type NE
Remark
Weight with E-motor
ABB
M2V80 B
3XAW-6
1.3
342
V/Hz
kw;;;;;;
rpm
A
A
(ICI"
2V5
15,25
80 B
B3
55
F
(IP)
(isr
624-2Z/C3
6203-2Z/C3
INCLOiNG D R I N
12
2"3
kg
From frame size 80

INCLUDING:
- TWO FLEXIBLES
NOTE:
and type of motor
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Kind of Alteration
Name
Designer
AvM
Design date
11-04-'05
Subject
; Jinling SY
Scale
Subject nr.
: JLZ 040409 - 0^0^12
Units
"
Date
Name
Designer
(AlteraHon only by CAD)
Controller
:mm
Date
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.
; 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-311
AXIAL FLOW FAN E-17 Tunnel

TYPE "VM4-1-2"
0
ISO 9 0 0 1
registered by

AIR CONDITiONING
MECHANICAL VENTIU\TiON
CENTRAL HEATING

FIRE PROTECTION
ZUiDWENK45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS

Plot date
S-3
System
240
Fan:
Make
SALOR
VM3i-i-2
lype
m3/tir
3000
Airquantity
Static pressure
Fan speed
Power consumption
330
3395
.'61
jpa;;;
rpm
20
grd
Electric motor;
Make
lype
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
Protection class
Isolation class
Bearing type pE
Bearing type N
Remark
Weight without E-motor:
Weight with E-motor
ABB
M2V71 B
3x/t;-6
0.75
3395
V/Hz
i,5
8,55
718
B3
55
F
62(J3-2Z/C3
6203-2Z/C3
INCLbiNG DRAIN
8,5
15
rpm
A
A
(IC)
(iPl
(isr
..ha,
kg
For all frame sizes

INCLUDING:
- TWO FLEXIBLES
NOTE:
and type of motor
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Kind of Alteration
lAlteration only by CAD)
Designer
Subject nr.
"
AvM
| Design date
Jinling SY
Subject
Name
Name
Date
Designer
: JLZ O'>0409 -
mm
11-04-'05
Controller
Dafe
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Scale
Reference nr.
: 120,05.055 - 058
Units
Drawing nr.
:12005055-318
AXIAL FLOW FAN S-3 Emergency Gen room

TYPE "VM31-1-2"
ISO 9001
registered by
;ASTE:<

AIR CONDITIONING
MECHANICAL VENTIU^TION
CENTRAL HEATING

FIRE PROTECTION

Plot date
^^ u . wJ n^îZXXi^^-^^Z~~Z i -
Sysj-em
S-4
Fan:
Make
SALOR
.lyp.e.
Airquantity
Static pressure
Fan speed
Power consumption
VM4-i-2
42
m3/hr
465
3420
Pa;;;;;
rpm
;;kw;;;;
1.18
ii
g'rd
Electric motor:
Make
lype
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
Mounting arrangemeni'
Protection class
sqlation class
Bearing type iJE
Bearing type NE
Remark
Weight with E-motor
ABB
M2VA8 B
3x440-60
1.3
3'42
2.5
V/Hz
;;kw;
rpm
A
A
(lECl
15,25
808
B3
55
F
624-2Z/C3
6203-2Z/C3
INCLUDING DRAIN
12
23
(ip)
(ISO)
kg
From frame size 80
NOTE:
and type of motor
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
- &
Kind of Alteration
Designer
AvM
Design date
11-04-'05
Subject
: Jinling SY
Scale
Subject nr.
: JLZ 040409 - 040412
Units
Title :
Name
Name
Date
Designer
lAlteration only by CADI
Controller
Date
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
: mm
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-319
AXIAL FLOW FAN S-4 Bow Thrusfer room

TYPE "VM40-1-2"
0
ISO 9001
registered by

AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK45
Plot date
. r f ^ - t * . * ..-.%.ij^.., ^
* ^ Û-
^Mi^,
hr
S-5
Sysfem
Fan:
Make
SALOR
VM31-1CI-2
30
Type
A ir quantity
Static pressure
Fan speed
Power consumption
Tmpelier blade angle'
m3/hr
Pa
330
3395
.'61
20
rpm
kw;;;
grd
Electric motor:
Make
lype
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
Protection class
Isolation class
Bearing type DE
Bearing type N
Remark
Weight with E-niotor
ABB
M2V71B
3xU-6
V/Hz
kw;;;;;
rpm
0.75
3'395
i,5
8,55
718
B3
55
F
623-2Z/G
6202-2Z/C3
II^CLUDiNG DRAJN
8,5
15
A
A
(JC)'
(iPI
(iSI
kg
For all frame sizes

INCLUDING:
- TWO FLEXIBLES
NOTE:
and type of motor
Alteraf-ion
code
Format
A4
Projection
Designer
AvM
Name
Name
Date
Designer
Kind of Alteration
Design date
11-04-'05 |
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Subject
; Jinling SY
Scale
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Subject nr.
: JLZ 040409 - 040M2
Units
: mm
Drawing nr.
; 120Q505S-B20
Title :
Date
Controller
AXIAL FLOW FAN S-5 Steering gear room

TYPE "VM31-10-2"
0
ISO 9001
registered by

AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45
P.O. BOX 9 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:'31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@heinenhopman.com - http://www.helnenhopman.com
Plot date
System
S-7
Fan:
Hake
.Lype
SALOR
VM31-1-2
Airquantity
Sfafic pressure
Fan speed
Power consumpfion
305
3375
.31
5
m3/hr
Pa;;;;
rpm
'MI
grd
Electric motor:
Make
lyp?
Current supply
Motor power
Motor speed
Nominal current
Starting current
Frame size
Protection class
solation class
Bearing type tJE
Bearing type N
Remark
Weight with E-motor
ABB
M2V63 B
3xU-6
0,32
3375
0,67
3,015
V/Hz
W'Z.
rpm
A
A
(iEcr
63
B3
56
(ip)
(iso)
F
622-2Z/C3
..620.2-2Z./C.3.
iomm Casing
18.5
kg..
kg
For all frame sizes

INCLUDING:
- TWO FLEXIBLES
NOTE:
and type of motor
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Name
Kind of Alteration
(AlteraHon only by CAD)
Designer
AvM
Designer
Design date
11-04-'05
Subject
: Jinling SY
Scale
Subject nr.
: JLZ 040409 - 040412
Units
Title:
Name
Date
: mm
Controller
Date
Controller
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.
; 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
: 12005055-321
AXIAL FLOW FAN S-7 Fwd Windlass control panel rm

TYPE "VM31-10-2"
ISO
9001
registered by

AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@heinenhopman.com - http://www.heinenhopman.com
Plot date
Physical data
Aiirquanfity
static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor power
Motor speed
Insulation class motor
Max. temp.
Weight
Noise level to envroment (Lp)
Noise level to enviroment ( I j
OO
vD
-ctC\l
200 m3/tir
170 Pa
230/60
.36
8i2
3270
V/Hz
A
rpm
IP
B
65 C
3 kg::::::;;;::::
48
Ln
CNJ
dB(A)
dB()
(tot)
i_n
0-
B
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Kind of Alteration
Name
Date
iJesigner
(Alteration only by CAO)
Designer
Subject
Subject nr.
me;
Design date
Controller
AvM
11-04-'05
: Jinling SY
Scale :
: I Z 040409 - 040412
| Units : mm
Reference nr.
Drawing nr.
Name
Control date
: 120.05.055 - 058
12005055-322
Centrifugal duct fan (in-line) S-8 Laundry

Type ^^RS MT
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
Date
Con roller
Alteration
0
ISO 9001
registered by
{ ^ ^
MECHANICAL VENTIi_ATiON
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@heinenhopman.com - http://www.helnenhopman.com
Plot date
~H^ , . i . -. -vn -i.~i6. ^
Physical data
710 m3/tir
235 Pa
Airquantity
Static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor power
iôtor speed
insulation class, motor
Max. temp.
Weigtit
Noise level to enviroment (L^)
Noise level to enviroment (UJ
Alteration
code
Format
A4
Projection
Designer
55
dB(A)
dB(A)
Design date
: I Z 040409 - 040412
11-04-'05
Scie
Units
:iiim
Controller
(tot)
Date
Controller
Name
Date
Designer
Ming SY
Subject nr.
Title
AvM
V/Hz
A
200 W
3290 rpm
IP
F
70 "C
5 .kg
Name
Kind of Alteration
Subject
230/60
0.86
Control date
Alteration
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing rr.
: 12005055-323
Cenirifugai duel fan (in-line) S-1S Galiey

Type ^^RS 2W
0
ISO
9001
registered by
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
CENTRAL HEATING
FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK45
Plot date
Installation and Maintenance Instructions

Centrifugal Flow Fans
Version 22.02.2002
Salor GT
Salor
Contents
General
General
1. Receiving and inspecting the product
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
2
2
3
3
Receiving inspection
Data on the ratirig plate
Handling and lifting of the fan
Fan weight
Storing the fan
2. Function and construction of the fan
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fan construction
Operating conditions
Noise emissions
Balancing
4
5
5
5
3. Installation and start-up
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
Fan installation
Electrical connection
Safety equipment
Fitting accessories
How not to-install the fan
Inspection after the fan has been installed
Measures to be taken before starting
Starting
4. Fan service and repair
4.1 Warranty
4.3 Before maintenance
4.4 Belt drive {GT-3 and GT-5)
4.4.1 Inspection of V-belts
4.4.2 Adjusting the belt tension
4.4.3 Tensioning of V-belts
4.4.4 Tensioning of flat belts
4.4.5 Replacement of V-belts
4.4.6 Replacement of belt pulleys
4.5 Impeller
4.6 Fan casing
4.7 Inspecting the bearings
4.7.1 Permanently lubricated bearings (Y and S)
4.7.2 "Y" bearings (YB) needing lubrication
4.7.3 Plummer block "SNL" cast iron bearings (H)
4.8 Beahng replacement
4.9 Motor replacement of the direct drive fan GT-1
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
13
5. Service intervals
14
6. Trouble shooting
14
7. Scrapping the product
15
This instruction is intended for professional installation

and use by trained personnel. Technical skills are required,
for example, when tensioning the belts and replacing
motors, applicable to the trained personnel of the factory.
Replacement of the impeller and bearing require
specialised professional skills. This should be performed
by service personnel familiar with the construction
of the fan, (A separate service instruction is available
for the replacement of impeller and bearing). Electrical
connections must be carried out by an authorized
electrician, A separate installation and maintenance
instruction is delivered with the motor. Professional staff
who is familiar with the safety regulations must carry
out the installation, start-up and operation of the fans.
Tools and protective equipment necessary for preventing
accidents from occurring while installing and operating
the fan must be used in accordance with the national
safety regulations.
1 . Receiving and inspecting the product
1.1 Receiving inspection
Check the fan immediately after you receive it and
make sure that it has not been damaged externally and,
if required, contact the transport agency immediately.
Briefly rotate the impeller and the motor shaft by hand to
make sure that they rotate freely. Check all the
information on the fan rating plate.
1.2 Data on the rating plate
Fan data:
Ordernumber, make, type, airquantity (m3/h), static
pressure (Pa), speed (RPM)
Motor data:
Power (kW), voltage (V), nominal current (A), speed (RPM),
frequency (Hz)
fa am
RS
am
ca;
iccai
Fig. 1.1 Fan rating plate
1.3 Handling and lifting of the fan
Fans are delivered on wooden pallets, allowing for
transport by forklift. Use removable lifting lugs when
lifting. Place the fans on a level surface. Do not stack
them on top of each other.
Salor
Fig. 1.2 GT-1 fan can be lifted from liftingholes.

Do not jerk the fan as you lift it.
Fig. 1.4 GT-3 fan (sizes 080...100) can be lifted

by the lifting lugs, and (sizes 112...140) by the base
frame. Do not jerk the fan as you lift it.
1.4 Fan weight
Approximate weights of standard fans with the base
frame and without optional accessories and motor are
given in Tables 1,1 and 1.2 IVlotor weight is given in
the motor rating plate.
1.5 Storing the fan
Fans are protected for delivery in such a way that they
can be stored for one (1) month. This requires that they
are not directly exposed to rain or snowfall. If the storage
period exceeds 3 months, the fan belt drives must be
loosened and the motor and the impeller must be turned
by hand at regular intervals. Storage time can be
extended to 6 months, provided that the fans are stored
in an area with adequate ventilation and heat in order to
prevent condensation from forming.
Fig. 1.3 GT-3 fan (sizes 025...071) can be lifted

by the lifting lugs or, if there are none, lifting will take
place with lifting ropes by the beam platform.
Do not jerk the fan as you lift it.
Table 1.1 GT-1 fan weight without motor and optional accessories.
Impeller
LF
tB
Fan size/Weight (
020
022
8.4
9.8
10.f
025
13
14
028 031
035
15.2 17.7 276
15 18.2 275
040
32.5
34.2
045 050
38
056
063 071
67
92
47
120
Table 1.2 GT-3 fan weight without motor and optional accessories.
Impeller
LF
LB
HB
Fan size/Weight (kg)
025
17
031
23.5
18.5
25
040
39
41
41
045
45
495
495
050
56
61
61
056
84
91
91
063
071
107
134
080
115
144
267
115
144
267
9
-
100
112
125
140
320
320
367
367
498
581
770
Salor
2. Function and construction of the fan
GT-3 sizes 080... 100
The fan is used to generate a desired air volume at a

given pressure rise which corresponds to the pressure
losses in the duct system to which the fan is connected.
This is achieved by driving the fan impeller.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.Fan
2.1 Fan construction
Frame
Motor
Motor fastening bolts
Motor bracket
Belt guard
Vibration dampers (optional accessory)
GT-1
I.Fan
2. Motor shelf
3. Motor
4. Flexible connection duct, inlet side (optional accessory)
5. Flexible connection duct,outlet side (optional accessory)
6. Vibration dampers, 4 pes (optional accessory))
Fig. 2.3 GT-3 type fan construction parts

(sizes 080...100).
Fig. 2.1 GT-1 fan construction parts.
GT-3 sizes 025...071

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fan
Fan base frame
Motor
Tensioning of the belt drive
Motor slide rails
Belt guard
Vibration dampers, 4 pes (optional accessory)
Fig. 2.2 GT-3 fan type construction parts (sizes 025 ...071).
Salor
Fan
1. Fan casing
2. Tongue
3. Impeller ~"
4. Shaft (not GT-1)
5. inlet cone
6. Inlet ring
7. Bearing bracket (not GT-1
8. Bearing set (not GT-1)
9. Outlet flange
Fig. 2.4 Fan construction parts.

A normal construction fan is intended for the circulation
of air when air conditioning. If the air being circulated
contains explosive gases, check whether the fan is
suited for the prevailing conditions on a case by case
basis. The standard operating temperature of a fan
is -30..,+80C. iVIotor efficiency values are valid when
the ambient temperature does not exceed +40C,
and the installation location is maximum 1000 m above
the sea level. If installed on the exterior of a building,
the motor must be protected from direct sunlight.
2.3 Noise emissions
Noise level generated by the fan might exceed 70 dB(A)
in normal operation. More detailed performance figures
can be found in the product brochure.
2.4 Balancing
The impeller has been balanced dynamically and the
fan has been test run at the factory, with a vibration level
(measured from its bearings) of <7.1 mm/s (RMS).
3. Installation and start-up
Plan out the installation of the fan and ductwork before
starting workrAvoid sharp duct bends and changes
before inlet opening, especially near the outlet opening.
The flow has not yet equalised in the fan outlet opening.
Salor
3.1 Fan installation
Fans are normally installed on vibration dampers
(optional accessory), which are fastened with bolts In the
installation holes of the base frame. The fastening
platform must be even and sufficiently sturdy. When
performing an installation, ensure that there are no
bending forces or other mechanical tensions affecting
the fan.
3.2 Electrical connection
Fig. 3.1 Minimum safe distance behind the outlet

opening. Do not install an angle duct piece
immediately after the fan outlet opening. Use a short,
straight duct allowing the flow to equalise.
When installing the fan, the service area requirement
must be noted as follows:
GT-1 (standard construction)
- When replacing the motor, it must be possible to
remove the impeller lockingscrew.
GT-3
- Bearing replacement from both sides of the fan and
especially space requirement for inlet side bearing
replacement.
GT-5
- Bearing replacement from both sides of the fan.
If the inlet opening has been ducted, ensure that you
can replace the bearing by removing the flexible
connection duct and part of the inlet ducting or that you
can move the fan as a unit towards the service space.
Electrical connection must be carried out by an

authorised electrician. The fan must have an operating
switch and a safety switch which can be secured for the
duration of the servicing. Electrical connections must be
carried out in accordance with respective national
regulations and instructions. Ensure that the motor cable
is long enough so that the motor can be moved freely
when tensioning the belts. The cable should be rubber
insulated. When using frequency transformers, the
cabling instructions of the frequency transformer
manufacturer must be followed.
3.3 Safety equipment
The fan complies with the EU Council machine directive
and EN 294:1992 standard regulations concerning
contact protection. These regulations must be followed
in any fan installation. An open pressure or inlet opening
must be protected by an inlet guard (optional accessory).
After servicing, ensure that all the guards, including the
belt guard, are properly in place. Machine rooms should
be kept locked so that non-authorised persons cannot
access them.
3.4 Fitting accessories
The fan should normally be connected to ducting by
means of a flexible connection duct. The tightness of the
flexible connection duct must be adequate and there
must be no bends that could choke the air flow. Check
that the flexible connection duct is in alignment with
the fan outlet and the ducting. Before installing the
counter flange, fit a gasket (e.g. 2 x 1 0 mm) to one
flange of the flange joint. After this, assemble the flange
joint. Separate operating instructions are included with
the air flow sensor (optional accessory).
3.5 How not to install the fan
The fan must not be mounted with the shaft vertical.
3.6 Inspection after the fan has been installed
Rotate the shaft and check that the impeller does not
come in contact with the inlet cone and that the bearings
do not make any unusual noise. Make sure that there
are no foreign objects in the fan or in the ducting.
3.7 Measures to be taken before starting
Fig. 3.2 Space reservation for bearing replacement.
If the fan has an impeller with forward curved blades

(type GTLF), make sure before starting that it has been
Salor
connected to ducting that conforms to the designed

pressure drop. This will prevent overloading of the
motor. Check that the belt guard and inlet guard are
fitted in accorSance with regulations. If the fan is
intended for Y/D starting, check that the time relay has
been set for the calculated Y position starting time.
3.8 Starting
Briefly switch on the motor power supply to check
whether the fan impeller rotates in the correct direction.
Check that no abnormal mechanical sounds or surging
occurs. Check that,the level of vibrations transmitted to
the bearings is normal. If required, measure the
vibrations emanating from the fan and from the motor
bearings with a vibrometer. The strength of vibrations
must not exceed an RMS value of 7.1 mm/s. If the fan is
mounted on vibration dampers, check that they can
operate correctly without stretching the flexible
connection duct or electric cable. After running for 30
minutes, the belt tension must be checked and, if
required, adjusted. Check the temperature and running
noise of the plummet block bearings. If necessary,
ensure that there is grease in the bearings.
Fig. 3.3 The correct direction of rotation for an

LF impeller.
Fig. 3.4 The correct direction of rotation of LB and

HB impeller.
Service and repair

4. Fan service and repair
4.1 Warranty
The warranty Is valid for one (1) year from the despatch
date from the factory unless otherwise agreed prior to
placing the order. The warranty is only applicable to
manufacturing defects. A precondition of warranty is that
regular maintenance has been carried out. Defects
under warranty must be reported immediately to the
manufacturer or importer. The warranty does not cover
bearing damages caused by over-tensioning of the belt.
The warranty does not cover work or indirect damages.
Salor
4.4.2 Adjusting the belt tension
Belt tension is adjusted by moving the motor.
GT-3 025...071 tensioning the belts:
- Loosen the motor slide rails'locking screws No.1 (4 pes).
- Adjustment of belt tension is performed with screws
No. 2 (2 pes). If you want to tighten the belts, turn both
screws evenly clockwise. Loosening of the belts is
done counterclockwise.
- When the correct belt tension has been achieved,
tighten motor beam securing screws No. 1 (4 pes).
- Then check the alignment of the belt pulleys.
1. motor slide rails securing screws
2. motor tightening bolts
To guarantee smooth operation, the fan must be serviced

regularly. The need for servicing depends on operating
conditions. If the air contains a lot of impurities, the service
intervals will have to be shorter. As a general rule, the
fan must be inspected at least twice a year. For the most
important maintenance measures, see the following
sections.
4.3 Before maintenance
- Switch off the fan by the operating switch in the
control center.
- Also remove the fuses, when required.
- Before starting the fan service and repair, the power
feed must be cut off with the safety switch, which
should be locl<ed out for the duration of the service work.
- Note! Small motors which are protected by an
automatic heat switch in the main circuit can start
running automatically.
- The safety switch must not be used as operating switch.
- Motor may be stopped with the safety switch only in
an emergency situation.
4.4 Belt drive (GT-3 and GT-5)
4.4.1 Inspection of V-belts
- Make sure that the fan does not rotate.
- Remove or loosen the fastening
bolts of the belt guard.
- Lift the guard off.
- Check the tension
of the belts.
Fig. 4.1 GT-3 025...071 removal of belt guard.
^(2)
Fig. 4.2 GT-3 025...071 tensioning the belts.

GT-3 sizes 080...100 tensioning of the belts:
- Loosen the four fastening bolts (No. 2) of the motor.
- Move the motor with the adjusting bolts (No. 3).
- If the threads of the adjusting bolts are not
adequate, loosen the slide rails fastening bolts and
move the slide rails to the next slot on the
tightening rail.
- When the correct belt tension has been reached,
tighten the motor fastening bolts.
- Then check the alignment of the belt pulleys.
Salor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Motor slide rails (2 pes)

Motor fastening bolts (4 pes)
Adjustment bolt (2 pes)
Adjustmenfbracket (2 pes)
Adjustment bracket fastening bolt (4 pes)
Service and repair

4. Compare deflection force F to the table 4.1. If the
measured deflection force is between the values
given, the tension is satisfactory. If the tension is less
than the lower value, the belts are too loose:
New belts should be tensioned to the higher value
of the measuring force, as the belts will stretch
during the drive-in period.
Table 4.1 Deflection forces of the V-belt.
Belt profil
SPZ
SPA
SP8
SPC
Diameter ol smaller pulley
Force F (N)
67-95
10-15
100-140
15-20
100-132
20-27
140-200
28-35
160-224
35-50
236-315
50-65
224-355
60-90
375-560
90-120
4.4.4 Tensioning of flat belts
Fig. 4.3 GT-3 080...100 tensioning the belts.

When using new belts, the belt tensions must be checked
and belts tensioned, if necessary, after about 30 minutes
of operation. Belt tensions must be checked at 6 month
intervals. The belts must be kept clean and protected from
oil and direct sunlight.
4.4.3 Tensioning of V-belts
For proper functioning of a belt, the drive requires
correct belt tension. If the belt tension is too slack, there
is a danger of belt slippage, causing premature wear
of the belts. If the belts have been tensioned too tightly,
there is a danger that the motor bearing service life
will be consider-ably shortened. Even an over-tensioning
of 25% can shorten the bearing service life by half.
Fig. 4.4 Belt span, deflection and deflection force.

1. Measure the belt span length CC [m]. For example,
belt span CC = 1.2 m.
2. Desired deflection dL = 15 mm/length meter. For
example; deflection dL = 15 mm/m * 1.2 m = 18 mm.
3. Measure the perpendicular deflection force F,
which is obtained by deflecting dL (by 18 mm).
Fig. 4.5 Measurement distance of a flat belt.

1. Install the motor and fan belt pulleys on their shafts
without tightening the sleeves.
Install the belt over the pulley and move the
engine so that the belt will straighten, but will not
be tensioned.
Align the belt pulleys using a ruler and tighten
their sleeves.
Fasten the motor loosely so that it can still be
moved on the slide rails.
Measure the longest free belt span DD, rounded
down to the nearest 100 mm. For example,
if CC = 865, then DO = 800 mm. The belt must not
touch the belt pulley within the measuring distance.
Remove the belt, place it on an even surface
and mark the free belt span mentioned in the
previous section on the belt with a pen.
Install the belt on the pulley again and tension
it by means of slide rails, with the motor and fan
shaft being as parallel as possible.
8. Stop tensioning when the belt has reached the
correct stretch according to the table 4.2.
9. Rotate the belt drive by hand. If the belt moves
axially to either direction, this is due to the
fact that the shafts are not parallel. This situation
can be corrected by means of slide rails so
Service and repair
Salor
that the belt stays in the middle when rotating

the drive.
10. When the belt has been tensioned and it stays in
the middle^when rotating, the motor slide rails
securing bolts are tightened.
Table 4.2 Flat belt tensioning lengths.
Distance between the marks
Before tensioning
(mm)
After tensioning
Typ: F-0, F10,2,8 %
Typ:F14,F25,A-2,A-3,2,5%
102.8
102.5
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
822.4
820
925.2
922.5
1000
1028
1025
205.6
205
308.4
307.5
411.2
410
514
512.5
616.8
615
719.6
717.5
4.4.5 Replacement of V-beits
the low vibration level of the fan. Proper alignment

lessens the wear of the belt flanks.
4.4.6 Replacement of belt pulleys
If a belt pulley is changed, for example, to change
the speed, ensure that the maximum rpm, as given on
the motor rating plate, is not exceeded and that the
motor output is sufficient for the new operating point.
To avoid endangering the service life of the bearings,
the highest allowed tightening forces, as stated
for the motor and the fan, are noted in dimensioning
the belt drive. All factory fitted pulleys have a Taper
Lock type belt pulley fastening.
Removal of a belt pulley:
Remove screws No. 3 (2 pes) by using an Allen key
Fig. 4.7. One (or two) of the removed screws is screwed
in removal hole No. 4, and the screw should be
tightened so that cone sleeve No. 2 and belt pulley No. 1
will be separated from each other. A belt pulley must
never be removed with a tool. Even a light impact might
cause damage to the bearing.
In connection with a belt replacement, the motor must be

moved so that it is easier to remove the old belt and place
the new belt on its place on the belt pulley. Do not use
any tools to remove belts from a belt pulley. If there are
several belts on a belt drive, they all must be replaced at
the same time. It is always best to use belts which belong
to the same manufacturing batch, i.e. belts which have
the same measurement deviation of the manufacturing
tolerance. In connection with the tensioning check that the
pulleys will be completely parallel and aligned. The exact
alignment of the pulleys is very important for the sake of
Fig. 4.7 Taper Lock belt pulley.
Fig. 4.6 The exact alignment of pulleys is important.
10
Installing a belt pulley;

Clean the pulley hole and sleeve inside and out with a
rust protection compound, ensuring that there is no
debris on the surfaces. Oil the cone surface lightly and
grease the screws. The sleeve is installed on the pulley
and screws are screwed loosely into place in holes No. 3.
The pulley is pushed onto the shaft with the sleeve (The
sleeve fastens itself on the shaft and the pulley moves
slightly along the sleeve when tightening. Then alignment
is made and the screws are tightened, each in turn,
evenly). The belt pulley is placed as close as possible to
the bearing, not at the end of the shaft. Check the
alignment once more when the screws have been
tightened for the last time. Fill the pull-out holes, e.g. with
stiff grease, in order to prevent dirt from entering. Tension
the belts after this according to the previous instructions.
If the drive is exposed to dust, it is possible that, for
example, sand particles can remain between the belt and
the belt pulley, which then grind the pulley flanks into a
Salor
Service and repair
concave shape. If wear is strong, the belt pulleys must

also be occasionally replaced with new ones.
detailed descriptions of the care of the bearing types

used. In Table 4.3 is a summary of bearings used in
different fans.
4.5 Impeller
4.7.1 Permanently lubricated bearings (Y and S)
In order for the impeller to stay in balance dynamically,

dirt sticking to it must be removed. Imbalance will cause
extra vibration, resulting in, for example, greater stress
placed on the bearings, Cleaning should be done when
needed, but inspections should be carried out at least
once a year. A badly contaminated impeller reduces the
fan efficiency rate, thus increasing energy consumption.
Cleaning of the impeller can be done with a vacuum
cleaner, compressed air or by brushing. If dirt is greasy
and sits tight on the impeller, it must be cleaned with
a suitable detergent or solution.
Two different types of permanently lubricated bearings

are used in GT-3 fans:
Y = groove ball bearing, with eccentric securing ring
S = groove bail bearing, with cone sleeve fastening
Self-lubricating bearings have been factory lubricated to
last throughout their entire service life (20,000-40,000
hours of operation). High quality seals in the bearing unit
itself prevent lubricant from seeping out and dhpping.
The maintenance of this type of bearing consists of
occasionally cleaning its external surface and performing
inspections to detect any possible abnormal operation or
defective seals. If the latter is detected, the beahngs will
have to be replaced. Use the proper tools to prevent
impacts affecting the bearing balls or rollers. Impacts will
cause dents on the bearing rolling races Even the
slightest impact can cause the bearing to emit a
scratchy noise and will lead to a premature wear.
4.6 Fan casing

Action is similar as with the impeller. Check also that
the impeller does not make any contact with the inlet
cone (especially with LB and HB fans).
4.7 Inspecting the bearings
4.7.2 "Y" bearings (YB) needing lubrication
In most cases, any flaws in the bearings can be detected

by listening. When the bearings are normal, they
generate a smooth and uniform sound. Loud and
squeaking noises or other abnormal sounds indicate that
the bearings are worn out. A squeaking noise can also
be caused by insufficient lubrication. Bearing cross-gaps
that are too small can cause a metallic noise. Dents on
the outer race of the bearing can cause vibrations, which
produce a soft and clear noise. Intermittent noises
indicate a defective rolling surface. Noises are produced
when the damaged spot hits the rolling surface. High
temperatures are usually a sign that the bearings are
running abnormally. Excessively high temperatures are
harmful to the grease and the bearing itself. Long term
operation at temperatures above 120C can shorten the
useful life of the bearing. High bearing temperature may
be due to insufficient or excessive lubrication, impurities
in the grease, overloading, bearing damage or too small
a beahng cross gap. Even a slight temperature change
can be a sign of impaired operation if the operating
conditions have not changed. First filling or refilling with
lubricant will normally cause a rise in beahng
temperature, lasting one or two days. Monitor the
grease. A change of color or darkening is usually a sign
that there are impurities in the grease. Larger grains of
impurities can be detected by rubbing the grease
between the fingers. Check also the gaskets (e.g. V-hng)
and change them if necessary. In the following are
The bearings are factory lubricated and they are

equipped with a grease nipple. As a general rule, the
beahngs should be re-lubricated every 6 months: the
amount of grease for re-lubrication is given in Table 4.4.
As these bearings are equipped with high quality seals,
the changing grease is not possible without damaging
the seals. If the bearing is damaged, the whole plummer
block, including the bearing, must be replaced.
4.7.3 Plummer block "SNL" cast iron bearings (H)
Re-lubrication
Plummer block bearings in a fan running 8 hours a day
should be re-lubricated once a year. Plummer block
bearing should be re-lubricated twice a year if the fan is
operated around the clock. New grease is normally
injected while the fan is operating. If the bearing is relubricated, for example, during a maintenance downtime,
the impeller must be rotated in order to distribute the
grease uniformly in the bearing. The amount of grease
required for re-lubrication in grams/greasing time is :
0.005 x bearing outer diameter x bearing width
(measured in mm).
Please note that an excessive amount of grease can
cause a temperature peak in the bearing, which can
damage the lubrication properties of the grease and lead
to bearing damage. Stop filling grease when excess
grease starts to seep out of the bearing.
Table 4.3 Standard bearing types for GT-3 fans.

Impeller
LF
LB
HB
Fan size
025
Y
031
Y
Y
040
Y
Y
S
045
Y
Y
S
050
Y
Y
S
056
Y
Y
S
063
Y
Y
S
071
Y
Y
S
080
090
100
112
125
140
YB
H
YB
H
YB
H
11
Service and repair
Salor
Replacing the grease

After the bearing has been re-lubricated a number of
times, or the grease has become caked, darkened or
faded (compare with its original color), the grease should
be changed as follows:
1. Clean the outside of the bearing housing. Open the
bearing cover.
2. Remove all the old grease. Wash the bearing with
white spirit or paraffin oil. Petrol may also be used, but
bear in mind its flammability. Check the bearing
after cleaning, If even the slightest flaw is discovered,
the bearing must be replaced. The bearing should
be oiled after cleaning. Bearings rust easily if they are
not installed immediately.
3. Spread new grease on the rolling surface by hand or
by using a plastic smoothing tool. Fill the empty space
in the bottom half of the bearing housing half way
with new grease. Do not overfill, as it can cause
overheating of the bearing.
4. Refit the upper half of the bearing housing.
5. Perform test run. Check the bearing using a screw
driver as a simple stethoscope, placing its tip against
the bearing housing and the handle against the ear.
The bearing is running properly if you can hear a
muted humming sound. A whistling sound indicates
inadequate lubrication.
Fig. 4.8 Assembly of the LB and HB impeller and
the inlet cone. Measurements S and T should be as
equal as possible the whole way.

Only high quality bearing greases should be used.
The following greases, amongst others, are suitable:
Standard operating conditions: (-30...+110C)
- SKF Alfalub LGMT 2
- Mobilux 2
- Shell Alvania R2
- Esso Beacon 2
Warning! Use protective gloves when handling
lubricants and cleaning solutions. Regular exposure
to paraffin oils, solvents, etc. can cause allergic
reactions.
4.8 Bearing replacement
See Flakt separate instructions "GX fan bearing
replacement".
Important! Before replacing bearings, mark the bearing
location on the shaft so that the clearance between the
fan impeller and fan casing will not be changed. When
you have replaced the bearing ensure by rotating the
impeller, that it has been centred correctly (see Figs. 4.8
and 4.9 and Table 4.5) and that it rotates freely.
Table 4.4 The amount of grease needed for
re-lubrication (g).
Fan
Impeller
(g)
12
Fan size
056
HB
10
063
HB
11
071
HB
13
090
080
100
LB
HB
LB
HB
LB
HB
18
20
14
23
Fig. 4.9 Assembly of LF impeller and the inlet cone.

The distance between the impeller and the side plate
inlet opening T should be as equal as possible for
its entire length.
Salor
Service and repair
Table 4.5 Dimensions R, S and T (Tolerance +1 mm).

Impeller LF
Fan size
R (mm)
020
impeller LB and HB
S (mm)
T(mm)
5.5
022
1.5
7.8
025
7.5
7.8
028
8.5
2-
9.3
031
9.5
2.1
9.5
035
10.5
2.2
12.8
040
12
3.7
18
045
13.5
4.3
17
050
15
4.7
20
056
17
7.5
28
063
19
4.8
26
071
21
4.4
26
080
Fig. 4.10 GTLF-1-020...050 Remove the hub

securing and the impeller from the motor shaft.
090
100
112
125
140
4.9 Motor replacement of the direct drive fan GT-1

See first Section 4.3 (Before maintenance).
Make sure that you can access the inlet opening (note
this in assembly). In principle there are two alternative
methods:
a) Remove the inlet side flexible connection duct and
(possibly) part of the inlet ducting.
b) Remove the flexible connection ducts.
Remove the fan from its base frame and move
it to the direction of service passage so that you can
access the inlet opening and the hub securing.
If you need to change to a larger or smaller motor,
check the shaft diameter. If the shaft diameter is
changed, you will also have to change the impeller, so
that the shaft of the new motor will fit the impeller.
The impeller is removed, when needed, through the
outlet opening.
GTLB-1 and GTLF-1:
- Support the impeller in the fan casing first so that
it will not fall.
- Remove the hub securing screw (Figs. 4.10 and 4.11)
- If necessary, also remove the inlet cone from the
LB-fan in order to facilitate work.
- Remove the motor from the bracket (Fig. 4.12).
- If required, remove the impeller from the motor shaft
with a puller (there is a groove in the hub for a puller)
through the inlet opening.
- Replace the motor.
^=t^
Fig. 4.11 GTLB-1-022...071 Remove the hub
securing and the impeller from the motor shaft.
Fig. 4.12 Remove the motor from the bracket.
13
Service and repair
Salor
5. Service intervals
Table 5.1 GT-1 fan maintenance plan.
Service action
Fan
Cleaning of casing and impeller
Motor
Cleaning
Motor bearings
Listening to noises
3 months
9 months
12 months
24 months
X
X
X
X
Checking
Soundness and tigtitness
Monitoring temperature
Flexible connection duct
6 months
Table 5.2 GT-3 and GT-5 maintenance plan.

Service action
Belt
3 months
6 months
9 months
12 months
24 months
X
X
X
X
X
X
Visual inspection
Tensioning
Bearings
Listening to noises
Monitoring temperature
Checking
X
X
Cleaning (with housing)
Fan
Cleaning ol casing and impeller
Motor
Cleaning
Flexible connection ttuct
Soundness and tightness
6. Trouble shooting
1. No air comes out of the fan
- Check the functioning of the motor, heat shield
and the fuses
- Check that the belts are not broken
2. Pressure rise and air flow too low
- Check the direction of rotation and the speed of
the fan
- If there is an undesirable duct bend in close proximity
to the outlet opening, then the connection losses
may be greater than expected -> check the ducting
and use baffle plates, if necessary
3. Fan vibrates
- Check the anti-vibration mountings
- Check that the impeller is not dirty
- Check the bearings
- Check the alignment of the belt drive pulleys
- Check that the bearings, hub and pulleys are properly
secured
4. Abnormal noise from bearings
- See Section 4.7 "Checking the bearings"
5. Repeated bearing damage
- Excessive bearing loads (i.e. belts have been
tightened too much)
- Poor or inadequate lubrication
- Impurities have entered the bearing
14
Salor
7. Scrapping the product
Sort the materials in accordance with national
environmentaUegulations and deliver the materials either
for recycling or proper disposal. Materials used in
manufacturing are described in Table 7.1. Final handling
of the bearing takes place according to SKF instructions.
Table 7.1 Manufacturing materials.
Component
Material
Casing
Back plate, tongue
Galvanized steel
Side plate, inlet cone
Galvanized steel
inlet cone, spark-free const, (sizes 014...071)
Brass
Inlet cone, spark-free const (sizes 080...100)
Copper
Bearing
Bearing bracket (sizes 014...071)
Galvanized steel
Bearing brack (sizes 080...100)
Steel
Anti-vibration damper
EPDM
Bearing
Special steel
Impeller
Impeller LB and HB (sizes 022...028)
Steel
Impeller LB and HB. (sizes 031 ...100)
Steel
Impeller LP
Galvanized steel
Hub LB and HB
Aluminium
HubLF
Welded
Shaft
Steel
Base Irame GT-3 and GT-5

GT-3 sizes (025...100)
Galvanized steel
GT-3 sizes (100...140)
Galvanized steel
Belt drive GT-3 and GT-5

Belt pulley
Cast iron
Adapter sleeve
Cast iron
Belt
Rubber
Motor
See motor manufacturers' instructions
Accessories
Feet/Frame
Galvanized steel
Flange
Galvanized steel
Flexible connection duct
PVC-textile
-i^.
Salor Spakenburg B.V.

P.O. Box 9
3750 G A Spakenburg
The Netherlands
Telephone +31 33 2992500
E-mail: info@salor.com
www.salor.com
CD
CD
C
J
^^
(D
_3
CU
cn
en CQ
0
-1
"a
CD
Q.
ffl CD
D
C
3
CD
3
CD
en
CD
D
to
!_
_)
n
0
3
CU
LJ.
M
"I
0
O
ZT
CT
C
tn
o-
'
CH
0
X
N
3'
CD S
0) s
CD
^ "^
cT
^ cn
CD
O)
:. C
V 3
(Q ,
S o"
CD 0)
3 2.
s-
cji
en
-^
-^
CD
N)
CO
N5
CD
ro
CO
ro
C*3
CJ
o
CJ
o
hJ
hO
CO
CD
ro
CO
a>
NJ
CO
en
'
73
ro
CO
M
CO
N3
CO
en
-^
cji
hO
en
-^
O)
O)
O)
i
00
CJ)
o>
en
c o e n c D c n c n c o e n c o
o c n o e n e n e n e n e n
en
N)
i
O)
en
CJ)
en
cji
C3>
i?
oi
S!
en
o
tÔ
CO
en
(35
c/i
C3f>
en
7: :c
73
c/i in ui en 70
PO
c n c n c J i c n c j i c j i o i c j i c j i c n
N>
CO
01
to
w(nu>wv>ww(/)C/i
: : P 3 7 3 7 ^ 7 > 7 3 ' ^ 7 3 7 3
I CO CO
-i -^ CJl
Rohrventilator (Metall)
Tube Fan (Metal)
(D O) s:
s 3-
g-.CQ
' S
: ^ CD
Q.
CD
(B
Tltii
S- K ) NJ '
*^
s CD CD ><
5 - CAJ CO S r
O O CD
<
,3
CDCD'
ro
-;ro
n
C/)
3^ CD CD
4^ *>.
CT
CD
3g CD
m ;TI -1 D 7)
!U CD .
a
=f
=! m
CD
CD
<
IVIax. Umgebungstemp.
IVIax. ambient temp.
Stromaufnahme
Current
Leistungsaufnahme
Power consumption
Frequenz
Frequency
Spannung
Voltage
71
<
Anschluss-Schema 1; fr alle Ventiiatoren auer RSI00 und RSI25

Wiring diagram 1: for all models except RS100 and RS125
Anschluss-Schema 2; ausschliesslich fr RS100 und RS125

Wiring diagram 2: only for RS100 and RS125
GB
Sicherheitshinweise
Safety Notes
r a c k Rohrventilatoren sind keine fertigen

Maschinen, sondern Teil einer Anlage. Somit
trgt der Anlagenbauer die Verantwortung, dass
alle einschlgigen Sicherheitsbestimmungen
hinsichtlich elektrischem Anschluss und
Berhrungsschutz eingehalten werden.
r a c k Tube Fans are not finished machines, but

part of a system. Thus, the systems installer
carries the responsibility that all relevant safety
regulations regarding electrical connections and
contact protection are complied to.
Bitte besonders auf Berhrungsschutz achten

(Schutzgitter oder ausreichend lange
Rohrleitungen).
Der elektrische Anschluss sowie Reparaturen
drfen nur von Elektrofachkrften
vorgenommen werden.
Special care should be taken regarding contact

protection (protection guard or sufficient length
of ducting).
Wiring and service should be carried out only by
qualified electricians.
Before carrying out any installation or
service isolate unit from the mains supply.
Bei smtlichen Installations- und Wartungsarbeiten muss der Stromkreis unterbrochen

werden.
P =
r
T-
pa
-V
Montagekonsole
Mounting with a console
Montage mit Verbindungsmanschette

Mounting with fast clamp
IVIontage
Mounting
r a c k Rohrventilatoren knnen in beliebiger

Lage montiert werden.
ruck Tube Fans can be mounted in any

position.
Der Rohrventilator kann direkt in das

Rohrsystem eingeschoben und befestigt werden.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das Rohrsystem
nicht verspannt ist.
The Tube Fans can be plugged directly into the

duct and fastened, make sure the ducting
system is not deformed or twisted.
Wir empfehlen zur IWontage gepolsterte

Verbindungsmanschetten, die die Geruschbertragung auf das Kanalsystem stark
vermindern.
For mounting we recommend lined fast clamps

that reduces noise carry-over into the ducting
system.
Betriebsbedingungen
Operating Conditions
Ventilator nicht in explosionsfhiger Atmosphre

betreiben!
Do not operate fans in potentially explosive

atmosphere.
Ventilator nicht mit Frequenzumrichter betreiben!
Do not operate fans with a frequency converter
Maximale Umgebungstemperatur auf dem

Typenschild beachten!
Pay attention to the maximum ambient

temperature on nameplate.
Wartung
Maintenance
r a c k Rohrventllatoren sind mit Ausnahme von

empfohlenen Reinigungsintervallen wartungsfrei.
ruck Tube Fans with exception of recommended

cleaning intervals are maintenance free.
Staubhaltige Luft ergibt mit der Zeit Ablagerungen im Laufrad und Gehuse. Dies fhrt zu
Leistungsreduzierung und Unwucht des
Ventilators und zu einer Verringerung der
Lebensdauer.
Deposits from dust laden air will in time

accumulate on the impeller and housing. This
leads to lower performance, unbalance in the
unit, and reduced lifespan. We therefore
recommend that an air filter be installed.
Innenraum keinesfalls mit Wasser oder gar

Hochdruckreiniger reinigen.
Under no circumstances should the interior

space be cleaned with water or high pressure
cleaner (steam jet cleaner).
Durch Einbau eines Luftfilters kann der

Reinigungsintervall erheblich verlngert bzw.
vermieden werden.
Through installation of an air filter the cleaning

interval can be considerably extended or
avoided.
IWI.
S>
> -".ÂA t."
- 3 . - - ^ , " ? ! ^ / ' * ' * -
'.-:-^v:^^r;
','
?JI;
-*
-1,
',
|$<$9
'1 iii''*''
_y
?>-.
"t-^r
:*-5V
rw^l^j
T-
^::i
fLf^,l
> ,
^ ^ ^
V'
- * ' . > " *" 1; *. /*' * (
'y.'"-.::!;
?5^:':'i'a
-''.--5,
SJSs^S^ -
^^ V
r
.,
^ .
Iviw
'.'^SJ
'>.';
'<-*;
<:T^><^
V->,
WJ
C'^Siary-r ^5î'C''?-'ê'^%*J'0'''' ^'

g ^ -.,':!*= i-.
Sfr
Operating instructions
Series VM, VML, VH
Table of contents
1.0 Technical data
2.0 Manufacturer's declaration
3.0 Symbols
4.0 Safety regulations
5.0 Proper use
6.0 Storage
7.0 Transport
in original packaging
7.1 Transport without packaging
8.0 Assembly-preparation
9.0 Fan assembly
10.0 Sleeve assembly
11.0 Connection to the mains
12.0 Testing and trial run
13.0 Commissioning
14.0 Check
15.0 Failures - Cause - Remedy
10
16.0 Cleaning, maintenance

and repair work
11
16.1 Additional safety regulations

for cleaning, maintenance
and repair work
11
16.2 Cleaning and maintenance
11
16.3 Repair work
11
17.0 Replacing impeller with

Tollok clamping element
12
18.0 Impeller assembly in

the thread shaft end face
13
19.0 Replacing impeller with

taper lock bush
14
20.0 Motor assembly
15
21.0 Ordering of spare parts
15
1.0
OLK VcniitarorenGmbH
Zicgereistr.18
74214Berlichingen
These operating instructions are for

series VM. VML, VH.
Any relevant changes are indicated.
These operating instructions are
protected by copyright.
Any other use of the texts and
figures or excerpts thereof is
prohibited and shall be
punishable by law.
1999 DLK Ventilatoren GmbH
w
m
j
! TeferonOygaS'^t 02-0
( ^ 1
1 ^ ^ Telefa)ia7943/9t 02-10
ji^L.lV;
(VENTtUATOR;
VENTILATOR FAN
Motortypenschitd und Wartung Im Klemmkasten

motortype and rating in the terminal box
Luftrichtung dlroction of air flow
1.0 Technical d a t a
See rating plate on the fan housing
for operational data for the DLK fan.
"i\">
Series VM, VML, VH
..0 Manufacturer's Declaration
Manufacturer's Declaration as defined in the EC Machine Directive 89/392/EE, Annex 11 B for machines to be installed and s defined i n the EC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
We herewith declare that the machines named - however incomplete - in the following were designed and
manufactured by us in compliance with the rules and regulations of the above EC Directives.
C o m m i s s i o n i n g is prohibited until the conformity of the final product has been determined
w i t h the rules a n d r e g u l a t i o n ^ of t h e Directive 89/392/EEC.
3neral o v e r v i e w o f t h e a s s e m b l i e s :
dsignation of the machines:
iVlachlne models:
Axial Medium-Pressure Fans

Series: VM,VMP.VMD, VMG, VMGG. AVM, VMKR, VMR, VMRR, VMRQ.
VMK, VMHU, VML, AVML, VMLG, VMLGG, VMLKR, GARIO andtheir
explosion-protected versions
Designation of the machines:

Machine models: Series:
Axial High-Pressure Fans

VH, VHG, VHGG, VHA, AVH. VHKR, VHHU and their xpiosion-protected
versions

Machine models:
Centrifugal Fans
Series: ARAX. VRE, VDV, VDVF, VRZE. VRGG, FR, VOM, ART, MEG, BRV.,
KG, KM, KA, KB and their explosion-protected versions

Machine models:
Centrifugal Plug Fans

Series: VREU,VREUKR
and their explosion-protected versions
designation of the machines:

.achine models:
Smoke Extraction Fans

Series: VHB, VHBG, VHBGG, VMB. VMBG, VMBGG, VHA, VDVB, VREB,
VRBW-A, VRBW-D, VRBW-R, ARAXB and their explosion-protected versions
Applied harmonised standards:
DIN EN 292, Safety of Machines, Appliances and Systems

DIN EN 60 204.1, Electrical Equipment of Industrial Systems
EN 50081-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility: Basic Specification on
Emitted Interference EN 50082-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility:
Basic Specification on Immunity to Interference
Applied national standards and

technical specifications:
DIN 24163
VDI2060
VDMA 24169 for explosion-protected versions
Date:
10/06/1997
i>/lanufacturer's Signature
Information on Signatory:
Managing Director: Hans Joachim Leithner
:;p5i3g*!iwa:ei?y
Series VM, VML, VH
3.0 Symbols
4.0 Safety regulations
5.0 Proper use
AA
DLK fans are not products that are

ready for use.
Commissioning is not allowed until it
is made certain that the facility in
which the DLK fan is to be installed
meets the requirements of the EU
Guideline on Machinery.
Safety has to be provided for by
means of protective screens and
structural measures.
Only DLK fans that are protected '
against potential explosive
atmospheres may be mounted in
hazardous areas.
Cleaning intervals shall be
scheduled for areas subjected to
^
dust.
A
The installation location may not liefi
above 1000 m over NN for standara^
designed models.
Assembly and connection shall be
carried out in accordance with these
operating instructions and the rating
plate.
The DLK fan maybe only operated
in technically periect condition.
Any use which is not in accordance
with its intended purpose is
prohibited.
These instructions shall be handed
over to the operator after successful
commissioning.
Adjustment of the impeller angle
may only be carried out by the
manufacturer.
A
Warning!
Noncompliance may present a
hazard for humans and equipment
A
Warning!
Noncompliance may lead to injury.
Warning!
Danger of injury through falling parts.
A
Warning!
Laws and proyisions must be
complied with. / :
Danger of explosion!
A
1
\
*
High voltage!
\ ^ Unauthorized admittance
prohibited!
Unauthorized persons and children
may not stay in the working area.
( ^
Crane transport prohibited!

Forlclift transport prohibited!
1. Regulations
When assembling and
commissioning all safety and accident
prevention regulations as well as the
EU Guideline on Machinery shall be
taken into consideration.
The DLK fan may be only operated
in technically perfect condition.
AA
2. Personal conditions
The DLK fan may only be installed
and serviced by authorized technical
personnel.
Connection to the mains may only
be carried out by a specialist
electrician in accordance with
electrotechnical regulations (VDE).
A
A
3. Personal protective equipment
When periorming assembly,
maintenance and repair work
personal protective equipment must,
correspond to the relevant safety'
regulations.
- "
A A A
Storage
7^
Protect from moisture
^
Truck transport
[I
Forklift transport
Crane transport
m
(Q
X
4. Accidental protection
The hazard area for unauthorized
persons, in particular children,
shall be amply secured.
Shut off the current and secure the
fan against unauthorized start-up
before periorming any work on it.
Wait until impeller comes to a stop.
Mortal danger due to high voltage.
Caution on walls and ceilings in
which current, gas and water mains
may be installed.
A
5. Arbitrary changes
Arbitrary changes and modifications

to the DLK fan are not permitted.
Check for possible changes The fan may not be operated without
a protective screen.
in the system
Perform visual inspection
Warning!
Noncompliance with safety

Assembly and maintenance provisions mav present a hazard to
life and limb!
Series VM, VML. VH
f
0 Storage
^
store the DLK fan in the original
paclâgfng until it is installed (foil
paclcaging or bands):
in a clean area
dry
weather-protected
shockproof
^ 7.0 Transport in the

1 original packaging
Transport DLK fan in such a
" way that it is protected against
vibrations and impact.
\ .1 Transport without
ê original packaging
-Transport DLK fan in such a way
that it is protected against
vibrations and impact.
7.1
v-^^
AAA^
Series V M , V M L . V H
8.0 Assemblypreparation
8.0
^m
Unpack DLK fan.
w Check for possible transport

damage.
Check whether modifications
have been made to the system
between the time of tiie purchase
order and delivery for which the DLK
fan has to cornpensate.
O Detemfiine direction bf air flow
and rotation (see rating plate).
Impeller may not come into
contact with housing when manually
turned (in direction of rotation).
9.0 F a n a s s e m b l y
/K Warning!
The DLK fan may only be mounted
by qualified specialized personnel.
Caution on walls and ceilings in
which current, gas and water mains
may be installed. .
Suitable free space for maintenance
and repair work should be taken into
account.
rf
^
l^^^vw
^SI
^^M^:
QT^
0.0 Sleeve assembly
Assembly of the DLK fan must be
carried out using sleeves in order to
prevent the transfer of vibrations.
V 1 . 0 Connection to the
iiains
A\ Warning!
^
O Connect in accordance with
motor rating plate or block diagram
(in fan terminal box).
3 Pay attention to electrical load '
values indicated on the motor rating
plate.
Series VM, VML, VH
operating instructions
Series VM, VML, VH
12.0 Testing a n d trial run
12.0
-((
O Were the directions of air flow and

rotation taken into consideration jn
accordance with the rating plate?
O 's the impeller capable of being
manually rotated without coming into
contact with the housing?
Has the fan been properly

mounted?
O Was connection to the mains
carried out correctly?
Have tools, small parts and
assembly debris been removed from
the area of suction?
Was a protective screen mounted to
the suction arid exhaust end?
O Does the facility in which the
ventilator was installed meet the
provisions of the respective country
li
X
Cf
3 as well as the EU Guideline on

Machinery?
^
Perform trial run.
e
Trial run
13.0 C o m m i s s i o n i n g
13.0
A Warning!
O Commissioning
- Only wlien testing and trial run have
been successfully completed.
3
Record operational data.
14.0 Check
O A check is recommended after
approximately 1,000 operational
hours.
14.0
Check mechanical running for

noise or vibrations.
Check impeller for wear in
atmospheres exposed to dust.
See enclosed instructions from
the motor manufacturer for
regreasing periods.
1,000 hours
^
Series VM, VML, V H
i.O F a i l u r e
DLK fan motor does not run
Motor protection shut off
Cause
"
Remedy
- no voltage
check current supply

reconnect cun-ent supply
- defective fuse
check fuse
insert new fuse
- impeller is stuck
check motor protection
- damage to bearings
contact DLK
Scrapping noise
impeller scrapes
shut off fan!

contact DLK
Heavy vibration
imbalance
shut off fan!

contact DLK
Noise from the bearings
damage to bearings
keep fan under supervision

contact DLK
Pressure / flow rate drops
10
- system parts are not capable pf

functioning
e.g.:
- filter
-flap
- perform functional test of system

parts
-contact DLK
Series VM. VML, VH
(1
16.0 Cleaning,
maintenance and repair
woric
16.1 Additional safety
regulations for cleaning,
maintenance and repair
work
A Warning!
Shut off voltage to DLK fan prior to
carrying out cleaning, maintenance
or repair work^
Make certain thatttie unit is
voltage-free:
Wait for impeller to come to a stop.
Secure against unauthorized startup!
:'' '
Prior to restarting
Perform 12.0 testing and trial run!
16.2 Cleaning and

maintenance
Assembly: connections and impeller
shall be checked for tightness at
appropriate intervals.' .;
Check impeiier for wear.
Remove dirt and dust deposits on
motor and housing. '
Do not pressure clean.
Carefully clean impeller using water
or boish and cleaning agent.
16.3
16.3 Repair w o r k
/ ! \ Important!
For safety reasons only original
DLK spare parts may be used.
[a] Remove DLK fan
Carefully remove DLK motor, making
certain to comply with all of the
relevant safety regulations.
i S Remove hub cowling
Remove any hub cowling.
AA A
Series VM, VML, VH
it 7.0 Replacing impeller

with Tollok clamping
element
\B\ Remove Impeller
A Warning!
Shut off voltage to DLK fan.
Secure against unauttiorized
start-upl
( J Loosen inner hexagon head cap
screw
O Screw out two inner hexagon head
cap screws
. O Twist in two inner disassembly
f read and force off locking collar witii
axagon head cap screws. ; Q Pull off impeller.
Keep sleeve in safe place during
disassembly.
pb] Vane angle
The vane angle may only be
modified by the manufacturer.
\c] Mounting the impeller

/ \ Warning!
^ yy
' Switchi off the voltage to the DLK
fan and secure it against
unauthorized start-up!
577
Determine the direction of air flow

3
Slide on impeller.
Evenly tighten three hexagon

head cap screws in the assembly
thread while relieving impeller
Screw tightening torque:
Tollok clamping,element 2 8 x 5 5 :
10 Nm
Tollok clamping element ^55 x 85;
22 Nm
O Impeller may not come into
'.urned (in direction of rotation).
Prior to restarting
12
[Nm
O"
Ê-v \
wf
'^,
10 Nm
Series VM, VML, VH
18.0 Impeller assembly

in the t h r e a d shaft end
face
18.0^^,.^^
//*
fa] Remove DLK impeller

A Warning! -'
Switch off ttie voltage to the DLK
fan.
Secure against unauthorized
start-up!
^ N )
*"vJ7>s_$
^^
O Remove impeller fastening screw,

Screw pull-off device on to
impeller hub with three hexagon head
cap screws.
0 Force impeller off of shaft with
hexagon head cap screw.
O Remove impeller.
[b] Vane angle

\
I
''
{c} Mounting the impeller

A Warning!
Switch off the voltage to the DLK
unauthorized start-up.
O Determine the direction of air flow
0
Push on impeller.
0 Screw impeller with hexagon

head cap screw, front disk, toothed
washer and plain washer.
Screw diameter 0
M4
M5
M6
M8
MIO
M 12
M16 : '
M20
M24
: ; ^
-;;Torque In NmV
3
6
10
25
49
85
210
:.:vv;; 425
730
O Impeller may not come into

turned (in direction of rotation).
Prior to restarting
ill
13
Series VM, VMUVH
r
.9.0 Replacing impeller
with taper lock bush
19.0
/^(
[a] Remove DLK fan

A Warning!
fan.
Secure against unauthorized ^t
start-upl
O Screw off cover plate.

O Screw off both thread screws.
O Screw in one thread screw in
disassembly thread.
^ A Pull off impeller.
fb] Vane angle

\c\ Mounting t h e impeller

A Warning!
unauthorized start-up.
O Introduce inner part.
O Manually tighten both thread
screws.
Slide on impeller,
determine direction of running and
Mation (see rating plate).
O Evenly tighten both tiiread screws
while relieving impeller.
0
Mount cover plate.
Impeller may not come into contact

with housing when manually turned
(in direction of rotation).
Prior to restarting
"AS
,t610 |615
iijc
5,6
5,6
20
20
20
30
50
90
90
1/4-
IM"
3/8"
3/8"
3/8' 7/16" 1/2"
5/8"
5/8"
Screw
Wren* width
14
-V-.W,
4030 :i)04o ,4S, 4545 ;504O
3030 ^Îlflpt JOCK, DUQffih^^'9S2S
?.^,>j<-.i..
.^ Screw
flghlerting'
115
170
170
190
190
270
270
1/2"
1/2'
5/8"
5/8"
3/4"
3/4'
7/8"
7/8-
10
10
12
12
14
14
14
14
115
fyScmN f&CB Is f 3
,
20.0 Motor assembly
Series VM, VML, VH
(C
20.0
A\ Warning!
Carefully remove DLK motor,
making certain to comply with all of
the relevant safety regulations.
Connect in accordance with motor
rating plate or block diagram (in fan
terminal box).
Pay attention to electrical load
values indicated on the motor rating
plate.
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
A A Af
Torque In Nm '11
Screw diameter 0
:
i
i
;
I
3
6
10
25
49
85
210
425
730
AAA
\\
\ox
w
^
I M
AAA
i
i
8
L I
L !
L 3
H
K
210
ji
1H
mtmmum Ihermostot 7CrC i-poUg
w w w
I I
CD
JO
40
110
110
65
+ S r - tJCC 1-olig
(roomlhermoslal RM-20)
48
(3x) 1.l7liW-220fA
15
CONNECTION Dl AGN
460
50
?'
400
m-
"^'^'^ ELECTRICAL DUCT-HEATER SERVING WHEELHOUSE

4 kW / 3x220V-60Hz
ISO 9001
registered by
Date
Name Rev
11-04-'05 AvM
Scale
Subject : Ming SY
Sub j e c t
nr.
AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS
Drawing
form
Ref.nr.
Drawing
: JLZ 040409 - 04(4i;

: A4
: 120.05.055 - 058
nr.
: 12005055-801
158
I'o
4 PE
T21 - SAFETY THERH IMAK RESET)

TZ2 - CONTROL THERH (AUTO RESET)
TR - ROOM THERMOSTAT
Gl G2 - HEAT aEMENTS
42B
26
90
'.58
S86
205
- NOMINAL CURRENT CAN NOT OVERFULL A CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY OF

CONTACTS OF THE ROOM THERMOSTAT.
- HEATER OaiVERABLE WITH A CAPACITY OF 500. 750 AND 1000 WATT.
- HEATER ELEMENT LENGTH VARIES AT EACH CAPACITY.
160
S
Alteration
code
AvM
Fuiul
CC3-
A4
Hax
Kind of Alteration
lAllcrallon cnly by CAD)
SUject
SUjedrr.
DHe:
Date
Name
Date
Controller
I Deaji date
;JWIngSY
; I Z 00W9 - 040412
'
1H)4-'05 I
Cflrtrcl datg
nlnatr
Sde
REfBHte IT.
UHh ; r a
l>T>l>191T,
AltEraltan
; I2O.O61O55 - 058
: 12005055-802
Cabin unit HOH250 with electriol reheater.

Maximum airflow 250ii/hr
ISO 9001
r*gltrd by

AIR CONDITIONING
MECHANICAL V E M T I U T I O N
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBUR6 - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@helnenhopman.com - http.f/www.helnenhopman.com
I
fWdaie
TZ1 - SAFETY THERM (MAR RESET)

TZ2 - CONTRa THERM. (AUTO RESET)
TR - ROOM THERMOSTAT
Gt 6 2 - HEAT ELEMENTS
- NOMNAL CURRENT CAN NOT OVERFULL A QJRRENT-CARRYN5 CAPAOTY W

CONTACTS OF THE ROOM THERMOSTAT.
- HEATER DELIVERABLE WITH A CAPACITY OF SOO, 750 AND 1000 WATT.
- HEATER ELEMENT LENGTH VARIES AT EACH CAPADTY.
245
200
Sr=.
(l
Of)
Atter afon
code
Firaal
A4
Bt|ect1cn
Nate
Kind cf Alteratjcn
(Alltfatlon orty by CAD)
Dedygr
AvH
Dê
Designer
I Dedgn^te
11-0t-'05 I rirJET
Dale
Controller
Eirtnl date
AltETSltol
SitjEd
;JnlhgSY
Scale :
laereisir.
; 00.05^5 - 05
Sitject nr.
; XI MM09 - W0412
Urils :inn
Drawhiir.
; 12005055-603
TitlE:
Nane
Cabin unit HCM-350 with electriGl retieatGr.

Maximum airflow 350m3/tir

AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURQ - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@helnenhopman.com - http://wvnv.helnenhopman.com
I Wiae
430
MIO(4x1
HSrH DELIVERY
2x1 ANGLE STEEL 30x30x3
Mounted to unit with
selfdrilling screws
1.
Ftraaf
A3
>4^"
PreJKtwn
Oesifitr
AM
I Design ifatT
Si*)Kt
iJinlingSY
Subject f.
> AZ 0ii0i>09 -
TIHe:
Mm
H-m-'OS I
CoflM ibte
Cwitrollef
Scale s-
Reftrcncenr.
Uniti
Dravirnw.
MfenHM
:120.0S.OSS-OSI
>1200SOSS-80(
Cabin unit HCM-250

Maximum airflow 250m3/hr

AIR CONDmONINQ
MECHANICAL V E N T I U T I O N
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG THE NETHERLANDS
Phone: +31-33-299 25 00 - Fax: +31-33-299 25 99 e-mall: lnfo@helnenhapman.com hHp://www.helnenhopman.com
I fMtott :
50
T-l
ID
30
0248
0gO6
YARD DELIVERY tx
V//////////////////////X,
r-f--rr-^
WZZZZZZZZZZZZA
i
CEILING K I P . 0S5O
0 354
57a
1
1
rrf
1
-iPpPt-
1'
\\ \\
\ I
I I
I I
/(
y
'-%
186
600
M12 Uxl
H&H DELIVERY
(2x1 ANGLE STEEL 30x30x3
Mounted to unit with
selfdrilling screws
L
Fcnut
- = ^
A4
PnJKtiHi
^4-
Dttlgiitf
AvM
I Design date "ivo4-|i5 | Contraller
I Control date'
AltenNm
Sutjtit
I JinliBj SY
Seile i ~ .
Refer nr.
.120.05.055-058
suyjct nr.
1AZ0U4C9-040412
Uhitt imn
Dnwinjw.
112005055-805
Title:
Cabin unit HCM-350

Maximum airflow 350m3/hr
HEiNEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

AIR CONDiTIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
Phone: +31-33-299 25 00 - Fax: +31-33-299 25 99 e-mail: lnfo@helnenhopiTian.com - hBp://wvw.helnDnhopman.com
I
Plot date :
Total length must tie 900mni
5^66666666<X>0<><>0<y>OOOO<:>0><X>!^g5666^
-p^
A-60 Isolation
When leading through A-60/A-30 or A-0

bulkhead or deck, the whole coaming
(damper and steel pipe)
has to be A-60 insulated (900 mm).
CROSS SECTION A - A
H.I.P.
DIA^fTERS
D nom
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
CONTROL
CORD
Swivelgear to be made of
stainless steel-316
AlteraNon
code
D ext
0 88,9
0 108
0133
0 168,3
0208
0233
0258
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
91 mm
110 mm
135 mm
170 mm
210 mm
235 mm
260 mm
Kind cf Alteration
Name
M e
Deslgnef
lAlteraltn orty by CAD)
AvH
Foml
SHjBd
atject nr.
Vlte:
Design date
:JMrgSY
; j u 04M09 - omn
11-04-05 I rtrto"
Scale :
Uris
REferoce rr.
Drav(tBrr.
Cortrii date
: 12O.08.OS - 089
Name
Date
Controtler
AllffallDn
; 12005055-606
Round firedaniper
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONOmONING
CENTRAL HEATING
FIRE PROTECTION
ZUIDWENK45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750GASPAKENBURG - THE NETHERUNDS
Phone: +31-33-299 25 00 - Fax: +31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@heln8ntiopman.com hHp://www.lialnenhopman.com
-Velded by
shipyard
I A - 6 0 isdaNon
NSULATNG -Ctnm THK.
<><yyxxxxxy>jx>^yxxyyxxxxxxxyi<xyxyxxxxyyyyyyxyyxxxxyx8<yxyyyxxxxyxyxyyyxxyxyyxyyxxyxxyyyyyyyyyxxyyyx.xxxx>
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyys?yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyB<'yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyvyyyyyyyyyyvyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy5
A
16
L
(Delivery
A-O IsolaHon
SALDR)
Delivery
Total
lenght
nust
yard
be 900nn
L=350 mm
Swivelgear t o be m a d e of
stainless steel316
When leading through
A-60/A-30
bulkhead or deck, t h e whole
or A - 0
coaming
(damper and steel pipe)

has to be A - 6 0 insulated (900 mm).
AUeration
code
Kind of AltGraHon
lAlteraHon orly by CAD
Fnal
Designer
A4
Sim
SJW fr.
me:
AvM | Dedji ihte I lHK-'05 I Cmlnitr
iJWiigSY
i jg 040409 - 0W12
Name
Nane
Date
Destpner
Scie :
UNhiW
RnraeiT.
DraxtBrr.
Cmhtlot
:120.0i055-058
CONTROL CORD
Alteralon
! 12005055-007
Rectangular fredaniper
ISO 9001
r*g1trtd by

CROSS SECTION A - A
Date
ControHer
AIR CONDUIONING
MECHANICAL VENTIUT10N
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERUNDS
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@helnenliopman.com http://www.helnenhopman.com
Mut
10
OS
Oi
0.7
sot
|03
i 02
25.0
2216
2032
17.7
IM
! 1270
[10.1s
, 7i2 '
] i08
i 2S4
A. /
/
/
<.y^
f/ .T"
/^
"
It
9.1
30
^
1X7
ThDW tf *
2S
y ^^^^
212 a 7
]Br h netert
TITM l< ) n Itel
200
,-
BO
n 4-^'^
^^'
lirr
a Ii 2 s s
<
TYPE
FLOW
mVhr
D
E
100
130
DIMENSIONS
nrowflf* Jefh mtet
>
-1I
I I I I I
mtM (tf It-jtr h fill
A B C
143 92 181
156 102 194
Rml
A4
DssfcinEr
Si<cl
SublBdnr.
Dedgn itate
AvM
iJMingSY
; i Z MIK09 - O W B
IHW-'OS I
Scale :Uris
:iini
Cnilror
I Ccrtrri ifete
Rfferenir.
Drawhgir.
AHeralkn
;120.0S0S5-058
;1200S055-808
""= DUAL PURPOSE ARDFFUSER

TYPE-LOUVRE-

AIR CONDITIONING
GAS, W A T E R AND SANITARY SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
C O O U N G AND REFRIGERATION
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG T H E N E T H E R U N D S
Phon: t-31-33-299 25 00 Fax: +31-33-299 25 99 e-mall: lnfo@helnenhopmn.com - http://www.helnenhopman.com
250-
THREADED END
TYPE
C
D
E
A
127
143
156
61
53
47
B
Alteration
code
Kind of Alteration
ftxmat
Designer
A4r
Subject
Subject nr.
Projection
Title;
AvM I Design date" 11-O4-'05

Scale
: Ming SY
Units :inii
: i Z OWW - 040412
Name
Name
Date
Designer
Controller
Date
Controller
Control date
Reference nr.
: 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing nr.
;12005055-809
PLENUM BOX FOR SUPPLY LOUVRE
Alteration
0
ISO 9001
registered by

AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK 45 - P.O. BOX 9 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Rot date
SIEMENS
002
>"k!
Room Thermostat
RAA20
Adjustable for heating only or cooling only
Two-position control
Operating voltage AC 24...250 V
Use
The RAA20 room thermostat is used in heating only or cooling only systems to maintain
the selected room temperature.
Typical use:
Residential buildings
Light industrial buildings
In conjunction with
zone valves, thermal valves
gas or oil burners
fans
pumps
Functions
The RAA20 room thermostat has separate outputs for heating only and cooling only.
If the room temperature falls below the selected setpoint, the heating contact will close.
If the room themperature exceeds the selected setpoint, the cooling contact will close.
CE1N3002E
06.03.2001
Slefiens Building Technologlefs

Landis & Staefa Division
Function diagrams
i
I
Y211
i
,
''
''
Trc]
SD
Y1
Y2
OFF
T
SD
w
Room temperature
Switching differential
Room temperature
setpoint
Output signal "Heating"
Output signal "Cooling"
TfC]
-^
SD
Equipment combinations
Designation
Type reference
Data sheet
2-way zone valve DN15
MVE22.15
CA2N4825
2-way zone valve DN 20
MVE22.20
CA2N4825
MVE22.25
GA2N4825
MXE22.15
CA2N4825
MXE22.20
CA2N4825
MXE22.25
CA2N4825
STE21.1
CA1N4874
Thermal actuator
(suitable for radiator valves V D . . . / VE... / VU... and 2T,..)
Technical design
Key features of the RAA20 room thermostat:
Two-position control
Gas-filled diaphragm
Adjustments
The required temperature is selected by a setpoint adjuster on the front of the thermostat.
The setpoint setting range can be mechanically limited by means of setpoint limiter
under the unit cover.
Notes
Mounting, installation
and commissioning
The room thermostat should be located where the air temperature can be sensed as
accurately as possible, without getting adversely affected by direct solar radiation or
other heat or refrigeration sources.
Mounting height is about 1.5 m above the floor.
The unit can be fitted to most commercially available recessed conduit boxes or directly
on the wall.
Only authorised personnel may open the unit to perform service. (Caution: AC 250 V)
The unit must be isolated from the mains supply before opening.
2/4
Siemens Building Technologies
Room Themiostat RAA20
CE1N3002E
06.03.2001
Maintenance
Mechanical design
When installing the unit, fix the baseplate first, then hook on the thermostat body and
make the electrical connections. Then fit the cover and secure it (also refer to separate
mounting istructions).
The thermostat must be mounted on a flat wall.
The local electrical regulations must be complied writh.
If there are thermostatic radiator valves in the reference room, set them to their fully
open position.
The room thermostat is maintenance-free.
The diaphragm is filled with environmentally friendly gas.
The thermostat housing is made of plastic.
Technical data
A,
Operating voltage
Frequency
Switching differential SD
Setpoint setting range
Amperage at AC 250 V
AG 24...250 V
50 or 60 Hz
^1K
8...30C
0.2...6(2)A
Environmental conditions
Operation
Climatic conditions
Temperature
Humidity
Pollution degree
Transport / Storage
Climatic conditions
Temperature
Humidity
Mechanical conditions
Packaging
to IEC 721-3-3
class 3K5
0...+50"'C
<95 % r.h.
normal, to EN 60730
to IEC 721-3-2
class 2K3/1K3
-20;..+50X
<95 % r.h.
class 2M2
single packaging / min. order 20 pieces
Norms and standards
C conformity
Low voltage directive
Product standard
73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC

EN 60730
Power supply
Operational data
V^N474 c-Tick conformity to

EMC emission standard
Safety standard
Degree of protection
AS/NSZ 4251.1:1994
II to EN 60730
IP30 to EN 60529
Screw terminals for

Weight
Colour
2 X 1.5 mm^ or 1 x 2.5 mm^ min.( 0.5 mm^)

0.14 kg
white, NCS S 0502-G (RAL 9003)
Connection diagrams
D1
m
8
Y1
^ Y 2
D2
m
SIYT
N1
Y2
N1
L
N1
Y1
D'
N
<
S
D:_
N
Y2
N
T
Zone valve or thermal

valve for heating
Zone valve or thermal
valve for cooling
Operating voltage
AC 24...250 V
Room thermostat
Control output "Heating"", AC 24...250 V
Control output "Cooling", AC 24...250 V
Neutral
Thermostat element
(gas-filled diaphragm)
3/4
CE1N3002E
06.03.2001
Dimensions
Unit
to
Ol"
Ol
'QD'
96,4
42.8
^-
86
Baseplate
30
30
^^r^l^n^^
" t o
CO
i}i-
3
28
28
4/4
1999 Siemens Building Technologies Ltd.

CE1N3002E
06.03,2001
3_
ROOM
Wheelhouse
TYPE
Cobin Unit (Non Magnetic Material) HCM 2 5 0
Duct Else. Heater 4 kW
Overpressure Grill F.A.=0.1m2
Smokedamper
0160
Demisting gri
300x300
Demisting fan
RS 250L
Demisting heater 3.0 kW
Demisting nozzles Louvre D
Unit E - 1 2
VM31-10-2
F.A.=0.13ml
Exhaust grill
DESCRIPTION
8
Passage way in
accommodation
REMARK
Del. HcSciDel. HScb
Del. Yard
Del. H&lDel. H&h
Del. H&:h
Del. HScb
Del. H&;F
Del. H<SlDel. Yard

MINERALWOOL CORD (TYPE GGVj_
INSULATED
JNINSUIATEO
SPiROPIPe
PR16
RIO
R12
R16
R20
PR20
R22.5
PRIO
PR12
SECTION
D1
127.0
159.0
193.7
219.1
267.0
T
7.1
7.1
7.1
8.8
8.8
HiP
130
162
197
222
270
99.9
164.7
253.1
318.9
4-88.5

SPiBOPiPE
INSULATED
^MEEL^gPRIVETS
UNINSUUTED
SPIROPIPE
RIO
R12
PRIO
PR12
PR16
RIB
PR20
R20
R22
R25
PR22
PR25
DI
114.3
139.7
177.
219.1
?44.;
267.(
BULK DECI'
SECTICiN
HEAC
L
L
HIP (cifi
7.1 125
7.1 125
8.0 900
8.0 9 0 0
8.0 9 0 0
8.0 900
200
200
900
900
900
900
117
143
181
222
24
27C
78.
123.7
205. e
324.('
410.1
494.r
Penetration has to be insulated according the required fire integrity of the bulkhead/deck
Length of p e n e t r a t i o n s :
BULKHEAD
DECK
L=125 when section < XJcm

L = 2 0 0 when section < )Ocm
L = 9 0 0 when 200<?m < section k 750cm L = 9 0 0 when 200^m < section k 750cm
L = 9 0 0 + Fire Damper when sectior? > 750bBF00 + Fire Damper when sectior? > 750cm
SUPPLY
AIRQUANTITY
AIRCHANGES
FIREDAMPER /
DIMENSION
PR-10
iOI g n ^ MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM 250

HCM 250
EXHAUST GRID VWTH HATCH

FREE AREA 0.083 m2
CAP. 1200 m3/Hr
YARD SUPPLY
M
UNIT WO-1
Q=800m3/h
RS 250L
UNIT E-12
Q=1200m3A
VM31-10-2
ORPRESS. GRID MTM HATOI

FREE AREA 0.06 m2
Q=860 m3/h
YARD SUPPLY
Smoke damper
0160
SLOT UNDER DOOR

DOORGRILLE 150 c m ^ ( 1 6 0 - 2 1 5 m V h )
OOORGRILLE 2 0 0 c m ' ( 2 2 0 . - 2 9 0 m ' / h )
HEATER !M^-1
Q=800m3/h
3.0 kW
DOORGRILLE 3 0 0 c m ^ ( 2 9 5 - 4 3 0 m V ^ )
DOORGRILLE 4 0 0 c m ^ ( 4 3 5 - 5 8 0 m V ^ )
Rev.
25-08-05
Window demisting added
AvM
E-12 moved t o 6 t h Deck
AvM
08-08-05
Designer
Description
Scale: 1:50 Subject
&
Units:
Designer
: Jinling SY
Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058
Controller
: 12005055-001
Controller
Sheet
A2
: 1 of 9
Rev.
AvM
11-04-'05
6. DECK
MEINEN S i H O P M A N ENGINEERING B V
iMM<mMMimM^BMEj^Sî^M/MmBWri&
P.O. Box 3 - 375Q GA Spakenburg - The Nebhertands - Phone: +31 P333 - 3 3 9 2 5 OO - Fax: +31 (0)33 - 2 9 9 2 5 9 9 - WAW.heinenhopman.com
Physical data
\ :
m Mir
Pa
V/Hz
0.81 A
185 W
28 rpm
IP
Airquantity
static pressure
Current supply
Nominal current
Motor poyyer
fylqtpr speed
nclqsure class, m o t o
nsulqtion class, . m p t p ;
Max. terrip.
800
200
ZmW.
F
70 c
5 kg,::
.Weight
Noise leyel to enyirppdent
Noise level to enviroro ent (L
LO
00
TO
ro
O
LO
dB(A
55 dB(
-O
O
LO
B
Nam4 Date Nam<i Date
Designr
Controller
Designer | ZY
| Design datRM)6-'0J Controller
Control doje
Alteration
Reference
nr.:
120.05.055
058
Subject
rJinling SY
Scale
Drawing nr. : 12005055-324
Subject nr. :JLZ 040409 - 04041; Units :mm
Alteratio iKind of Alteration

code
Format
A4
Projection Title
Centrifugal duct fan (in-line) WD-I Wheelhouse demisting

Type "RS 25QL"
ISO 9001
registered by
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
Phone:+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax;+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - http;//www.heinenhopman.com
L-n
Plot date
o:
15
NOMINAL AxA
-^D
BxB (EXT. PIF.)
CSI
TYPE
NOMINAL
1
2
3
4
150
225
300
450
I
7
6
5
4
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
NR QTY
Ti
A
150
225
300
450
B
294
389
444
594
C
225
300
375
525
0D
0124
0199
0199
0199
E
150
150
150
207
F
55
95
95
95
G
320
320
320
435
H
340
340
340
455
Forniot
REGULATING PLATE
ALUZINC & NEOPRENE
5^0.8mni ^6nim
REGULATOR SUPPORT
ALUZINC
?* 1.5fnm
A3
Projection
'
REGULATOR
ALUZINC
5* 1.5mm
PERFORATED SHAFT
PERFORATED PLATE
4 0.8mm 04.8mm
CAP
ALUZINC
^^ 0.8mm
CONNECTION FLANGE
ALUZINC
7* 0.8mm
CASING
ALUZINC
T'0.8mm
DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL
REMARK
Nam'
Date
Desiginer
AlteratiopKInd o f Alteration
code
(Alterotlon only by CAD)
Designer I
Subject
ZY
| Design date 2 9 - 0 1 - ( | 4 ControJIer
:Jlnling SY
Subject nr.:JLZ 040409-040412
Title :
Nam<
Date
Controller
Control doll
Alteration
Scale
Reference nr.: 120.05.055-058
Units :mm
Drawing nr. : 12005055-810
AIR EXHAUST GRILL

e-TYPE '50FR-3"
0
ISO 9001
r*gltr*d by
AIR CONOrriONING
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
Phone:+31-33-29925 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 - e-mail: lnfo@hBinenhopman.com - http://www.heinenhopman.com
Plot date
t
L 2
L J
N
210
\
'
C)
IB
o
III
50
40
15
110
110
65
TTP
i- r ^
(3x) l.0(m-22Wh
^5
460
I,
monum tfrnntoHot 7CK 3-^foSg
o oil o
a
S3
CD
o
a
I f ' f '
-n_
ELECTRICAL DUCT-HEATER SERVING IBTEELHOUSE WINDOWS DEMISTING

3 kW / 3x220V-60Hz
CONNECTION DI ACRAM
ISO 9001
registered by
Date
Name Rev
11-06-'05
zy
Scale : Subject : Jiniing SY
MEINEN
BV
AIR CONDITIONING
Sub ject nr. : JLZ 040409 - 0404i;
FIRE PROTECTION
CENTRAL HEATING
ZUIDWENK45 P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA SPAKENBURG - THE NETHERLANDS
Phone;+31-33-299 25 00 - Fax:+31-33-299 25 99 e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - http://www.heinenhopman.com
Ref.nr. : 120.05.055 - 058
Drawing form : A4
Drawing nr. : 12005055-811
10

M4 Deck Drawings

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

M4 Deck Drawings

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

INSTRUCTION

SHIP & HULLNUMBER

1 lOOTEU Container Vessel

Heinen & Hopman

Cabin Unit (l^on Hagnetic Material) HCM 250

Duct Elec. Heater

H-PENETRATIQN IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN A-BULKHEADS

G-PENETRATION IN A.... BULKHEAD/DECK

when sectii < 20Etai)*

EXHAUST GRID WITH HATCH

when section < 2 0 C t o n '

MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM 2 5 0

GRID, FREE AREA (FA) = .... M2

SLOT UNDER DOOR

OVERPRESS. GRID WITH HATCH

DOORGRILLE 150 c m ' ( 1 6 0 - 2 1 5 m V h )

DOORGRILLE 200 cm^ ( 2 2 0 - 2 9 0 m V h )

DOORGRILLE 300 cm^ ( 2 9 5 - 4 3 0 m V h )

E-12 moved t o 6Lh Deck

mm Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No.

Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT HVAC

Chief Eng. Bedroom

H-PENETRATIQN IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN A-BULKHEADS

G-PENETRATION IN A.... BULKHEAD/DECK

when sectton < 20cni'

OVERPRESS. GRID WITH HATCH

GRID. FREE AREA (FA)

MONODUCT CABIN UNIT H C M - 2 5 0 E L

NAT VENT GRO WITH HATCH

MONODUCT CABIN UNIT H C M - 3 5 0 E L

E-12 moved to 6f[i Deck

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT HVAC

MEINEN fitHOPMAN ENGINEERING BV

Jrawing File 12005055-001A iSensral ArrangementLilvg

Plot Ual^e: Aug 10. 2005 '- 16:57

1st Eng. Bedroom

1st Off. Bedroom

MINERALWOa CORD ( H P E GGV)

G-PENETRATIQN IN A.... BULKHEAD/DECK

H-PENETRATION IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN A-BULKHEADS

when 200cm ' < section < 750cm ^

Fre Damper when section > 750cm ^

when sectton < 200cm ^

GRID, FREE AREA ( F A ) =

MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-250EL

1L MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-350EL

OVERPRESS. GRID WITH HATCH

E-12 moved to 6th Deck

Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058

Subject No. : JLZ 040409 - 040412 Drawing No.

Irauing File 12005Q5S-001A (General Arrangementl.dwg

HCM-250/750W ~Del. H&H

MitRALwooL a m awt GOV)

H-PENETRATION IN BULKHEADS OTHER THEN A-BULKHEADS

G-PENETRATIQN IN A.... BULKHEAD/DECK

Penetration tias to be insulated according t h e required fire integrity of ttie bull<head/decl<

v^hen sNm < 200cra^

When section < 200cm'

MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-250EL

:] SJ- MONODUCT CABIN UNIT HCM-350EL

EXHAUST GRD WITH HATCH

E-12 moved \o 6Fti Deck

Reference No.: 120.05.055 - 058